Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Third-Party Trademarks Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Advanced ClusterProven, ClusterProven, and the ClusterProven design are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries and are used under license. IBM Corporation does not warrant and is not responsible for the operation of this software product. AIX is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation. Allegro, Cadence, and Concept are registered trademarks of Cadence Design Systems, Inc. Apple, Mac, Mac OS, and Panther are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. AutoCAD and Autodesk Inventor are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systemes. COACH is a trademark of CADTRAIN, Inc. DOORS is a registered trademark of Telelogic AB. FLEXlm is a trademark of Macrovision Corporation. Geomagic is a registered trademark of Raindrop Geomagic, Inc. EVERSYNC, GROOVE, GROOVEFEST, GROOVE.NET, GROOVE NETWORKS, iGROOVE, PEERWARE, and the interlocking circles logo are trademarks of Groove Networks, Inc. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft America, Inc. HP-UX is a registered trademark and Tru64 is a trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. I-DEAS, Metaphase, Parasolid, SHERPA, Solid Edge, and Unigraphics are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation (EDS). InstallShield is a registered trademark and service mark of InstallShield Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. MatrixOne is a trademark of MatrixOne, Inc. Mentor Graphics and Board Station are registered trademarks and 3D Design, AMPLE, and Design Manager are trademarks of Mentor Graphics Corporation. MEDUSA and STHENO are trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH. Microsoft, Microsoft Project, Windows, the Windows logo, Windows NT, Visual Basic, and the Visual Basic logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Netscape and the Netscape N and Ship's Wheel logos are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. OrbixWeb is a registered trademark of IONA Technologies PLC. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. RAND is a trademark of RAND Worldwide. Rational Rose is a registered trademark of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is a registered trademark of Convera Corporation. RosettaNet is a trademark and Partner Interface Process and PIP are registered trademarks of RosettaNet, a nonprofit organization. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, Solaris, UltraSPARC, Java and all Java based marks, and The Network is the Computer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. TIBCO, TIBCO Software, TIBCO ActiveEnterprise, TIBCO Designer, TIBCO Enterprise for JMS, TIBCO Rendezvous, TIBCO Turbo XML, TIBCO Business Works are the trademarks or registered trademarks of TIBCO Software Inc. in the United States and other countries. WebEx is a trademark of WebEx Communications, Inc. Third-Party Technology Information Certain PTC software products contain licensed third-party technology: Rational Rose 2000E is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software of Convera Corporation. VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI. HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. G-POST is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of Intercim. VERICUT is copyrighted software and a registered trademark of CGTech. Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR is powered by Moldflow technology. Moldflow is a registered trademark of Moldflow Corporation. The JPEG image output in the Pro/Web.Publish module is based in part on the work of the independent JPEG Group. DFORMD.DLL is copyrighted software from Compaq Computer Corporation and may not be distributed. METIS, developed by George Karypis and Vipin Kumar at the University of Minnesota, can be researched at http://www.cs.umn.edu/~karypis/metis. METIS is 1997 Regents of the University of Minnesota. LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 19902001. Visual Basic for Applications and Internet Explorer is copyrighted software of Microsoft Corporation. Parasolid Electronic Data
Systems (EDS). Windchill Info*Engine Server contains IBM XML Parser for Java Edition and the IBM Lotus XSL Edition. Pop-up calendar components Copyright 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. TECHNOMATIX is copyrighted software and contains proprietary information of Technomatix Technologies Ltd. Technology "Powered by Groove" is provided by Groove Networks, Inc. Technology "Powered by WebEx" is provided by WebEx Communications, Inc. Oracle 8i run-time and Oracle 9i run-time, Copyright 20022003 Oracle Corporation. Oracle programs provided herein are subject to a restricted use license and can only be used in conjunction with the PTC software they are provided with. Apache Server, Tomcat, Xalan, and Xerces are technologies developed by, and are copyrighted software of, the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org) their use is subject to the terms and limitations at: http://www.apache.org/LICENSE.txt. Acrobat Reader is copyrighted software of Adobe Systems Inc. and is subject to the Adobe End-User License Agreement as provided by Adobe with those products. UnZip ( 1990-2001 Info-ZIP, All Rights Reserved) is provided AS IS and WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. For the complete Info-ZIP license see ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html. Gecko and Mozilla components are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL. Software distributed under the MPL is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied. See the MPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations. The Java Telnet Applet (StatusPeer.java, TelnetIO.java, TelnetWrapper.java, TimedOutException.java), Copyright 1996, 97 Mattias L. Jugel, Marcus Meiner, is redistributed under the GNU General Public License. This license is from the original copyright holder and the Applet is provided WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. You may obtain a copy of the source code for the Applet at http://www.mud.de/se/jta (for a charge of no more than the cost of physically performing the source distribution), by sending e-mail to leo@mud.de or marcus@mud.deyou are allowed to choose either distribution method. The source code is likewise provided under the GNU General Public License. GTK+The GIMP Toolkit are licensed under the GNU LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.gtk.org, which is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. zlib software Copyright 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler. OmniORB is distributed under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License and GNU Library General Public License. The Java Getopt.jar, copyright 1987-1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.; Java Port copyright 1998 by Aaron M. Renn (arenn@urbanophile.com), is redistributed under the GNU LGPL. You may obtain a copy of the source code at http://www.urbanophile.com/arenn/hacking/download.html. The source code is likewise provided under the GNU LGPL. Mozilla Japanese localization components are subject to the Netscape Public License Version 1.1 (at http://www.mozilla.org/NPL). Software distributed under NPL is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either expressed or implied (see the NPL for the specific language governing rights and limitations). The Original Code is Mozilla Communicator client code, released March 31, 1998 and the Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by Netscape are Copyright 1998 Netscape Communications Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Contributors: Kazu Yamamoto (kazu@mozilla.gr.jp), Ryoichi Furukawa (furu@mozilla.gr.jp), Tsukasa Maruyama (mal@mozilla.gr.jp), Teiji Matsuba (matsuba@dream.com). UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95), is provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 012304 Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
Table Of Contents
Structure and Thermal Simulation Help .............................................................. 1 Updates for Mechanica Wildfire 2.0.................................................................. 1 Compatibility Issues ................................................................................... 2 Functionality Limitations ............................................................................. 2 Platform-Specific Limitations........................................................................ 2 Mechanica Wildfire Installation Issues ........................................................ 2 HP......................................................................................................... 2 Getting Started with Mechanica ......................................................................... 3 Configuration File Options ................................................................................. 3 config.pro Overview................................................................................. 4 config.pro Options ................................................................................... 4 Mechanica Products ....................................................................................... 21 Introducing the Mechanica Product Line.................................................... 21 Mechanica Structure .............................................................................. 22 Mechanica Thermal................................................................................ 22 Mechanica Workflow ...................................................................................... 23 Native Mode Workflow ........................................................................... 24 FEM Mode Workflow............................................................................... 25 Operating Modes ........................................................................................... 26 Integrated Mode.................................................................................... 27 Independent Mode................................................................................. 28 Operating Mode Comparison ................................................................... 29 Planning and Modeling Considerations .............................................................. 30
Table of Contents
Building Part and Assemblies .................................................................. 30 Using Effective Modeling Techniques ........................................................ 38 Planning for Optimization ....................................................................... 48 User Interface Basics for Integrated Mode......................................................... 51 Working With the User Interface.............................................................. 51 Using Dialog Boxes and Message Boxes.................................................... 51 Mechanica Toolbar................................................................................. 53 Selection Methods ................................................................................. 54 Using Layers......................................................................................... 55 Managing Modeling Entities Through Suppression and Family Tables ............ 56 Simulation Display................................................................................. 58 Color References ................................................................................... 62 Getting Information on Your Model .......................................................... 63 Removing Simulation Entities from Your Model .......................................... 63 Transferring Your Model to Independent Mode........................................... 64 Printing Your Model ............................................................................... 64 Changing Configuration Settings.............................................................. 64 Setting Environment Variables ................................................................ 65 Online Help................................................................................................... 66 Online Help for Mechanica ...................................................................... 67 Supplemental Online Documents for Mechanica ......................................... 67 Simulation Advisor ................................................................................ 68 Modeling Structure and Thermal Problems ........................................................ 69 About Creating Models in Mechanica ........................................................... 69 Model Type ................................................................................................... 70 vi
Table of Contents
About Specifying a Product, Mode, and Model Type .................................... 70 About Model Types ................................................................................ 71 Structure Model Types ........................................................................... 72 Thermal Model Type .............................................................................. 76 Guidelines for Working with Model Types .................................................. 79 To Specify a Product, Mode, and Model Type ............................................. 80 To Define 2D Model Types ...................................................................... 81 Features....................................................................................................... 81 About Features ..................................................................................... 81 Creating Features .................................................................................. 83 Datum Curve ........................................................................................ 87 Connections .................................................................................................. 94 About Connections................................................................................. 94 Welds .................................................................................................. 95 Rigid Connections.................................................................................101 Fasteners ............................................................................................103 Contact Regions ...................................................................................112 Rigid Links (FEM mode).........................................................................115 Weighted Links (FEM mode)...................................................................118 Interfaces............................................................................................120 Gaps (FEM mode).................................................................................122 Precedence Rules .................................................................................125 Idealizations ................................................................................................127 About Idealizations ...............................................................................127 Shells .................................................................................................127 vii
Table of Contents
Beams ................................................................................................145 Masses................................................................................................150 Springs ...............................................................................................155 Precedence Rules .................................................................................162 Properties....................................................................................................164 About Properties ..................................................................................164 Deleting Properties ...............................................................................164 Background Information ........................................................................165 Beam Sections .....................................................................................166 Beam Orientation .................................................................................173 Beam Releases ....................................................................................177 Shell Properties....................................................................................179 Spring Properties..................................................................................186 Mass Properties....................................................................................191 Materials .............................................................................................192 Material Orientation ..............................................................................215 Structural Constraints ...................................................................................224 About Structure Constraints...................................................................224 Adding Constraints ...............................................................................225 Constraints, Loads, and Analysis Types ...................................................226 Constraints on Entities ..........................................................................227 Guidelines for Structure Constraint Sets ..................................................228 Guidelines for Structure Constraints........................................................230 Displacement Constraints ......................................................................231 Symmetry Constraints ..........................................................................238 viii
Table of Contents
Along Surface Constraints......................................................................245 Thermal Boundary Conditions.........................................................................246 Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions ............................................246 Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions for Geometry .........................247 Boundary Condition Sets .......................................................................247 Convection Conditions...........................................................................248 Prescribed Temperatures .......................................................................261 Radiation Conditions (FEM Mode)............................................................266 Structure Loads............................................................................................267 About Loads ........................................................................................267 About Structure Loads ..........................................................................267 Relations Functions for Loads and Constraints ..........................................268 Load Basics .........................................................................................269 Guidelines for Structure Loads ...............................................................271 Guidelines for Load Sets........................................................................271 Pressure Loads.....................................................................................285 Temperature Loads...............................................................................288 Mechanism Loads .................................................................................296 Troubleshooting Your Loads ...................................................................297 Thermal Loads .............................................................................................299 About Loads ........................................................................................299 About Heat Loads .................................................................................300 Guidelines for Heat Loads ......................................................................301 Defining Heat Loads..............................................................................304 FEM Heat Loads ...................................................................................310 ix
Table of Contents
Reviewing Total Heat Loads ...................................................................311 To Review Total Heat Loads ...................................................................312 Measures.....................................................................................................312 About Simulation Measures....................................................................312 Uses of Measures .................................................................................313 Measures Dialog Box.............................................................................328 Measures Definition Dialog Box ..............................................................330 Results Available for Measures ...............................................................352 Selecting One or More Measures.............................................................352 Meshes .......................................................................................................353 Native Mode Meshes .............................................................................353 FEM Meshes.........................................................................................381 Design Parameters ...............................................................................420 Verifying Models ...........................................................................................435 Validity Checking..................................................................................436 Structure and Thermal Errors.................................................................436 Structure Errors ...................................................................................437 Thermal Errors.....................................................................................438 Creating Analyses .........................................................................................438 Creating Analyses and Design Studies........................................................439 Analyses and Design Studies Dialog Box.....................................................439 Analysis Types ........................................................................................440 Structural Analysis........................................................................................441 About Structural Analysis ......................................................................441 Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses .......................................442 x
Table of Contents
Thermal Analysis ..........................................................................................458 About Thermal Analysis.........................................................................458 Boundary Condition and Load Sets in Thermal Analyses.............................459 Vibration Analysis .........................................................................................462 About Vibration Analysis........................................................................462 Dynamic Shock Analysis ........................................................................468 To Create a Dynamic Shock Analysis .......................................................468 FEM Analysis ................................................................................................469 About FEM Analysis.......................................................................................469 Using the FEM Analysis Command in FEM Mode ........................................469 Defining a FEM Analysis.........................................................................470 Defining a Modal FEM Analysis ...............................................................471 To Create a FEM Analysis ......................................................................471 Creating Design Studies ................................................................................472 About Design Studies ..............................................................................472 Strategies for Running a Standard Design Study ...............................................473 Design Study Files...................................................................................473 Creating Design Studies ...........................................................................474 Analyses and Design Studies Dialog Box..................................................474 Design Study Definition Dialog Box .........................................................475 Standard Study for Structure and Thermal...............................................475 Global Sensitivity Study for Structure and Thermal ...................................477 Local Sensitivity Study for Structure and Thermal .....................................480 Running Solvers ...........................................................................................490 Native Mode Solvers ................................................................................490 xi
Table of Contents
Running Analyses and Design Studies .....................................................490 Before You Run an Analysis or Design Study ............................................491 Analyses and Design Studies Dialog Box..................................................492 To Start an Analysis or Design Study Run ................................................493 Setting Up a Run ..................................................................................493 Batch..................................................................................................501 Stop ...................................................................................................502 Monitoring an Analysis or Design Study Run.............................................503 Time and Disk Usage Information ...........................................................506 Diagnose.............................................................................................507 FEM Solvers ...........................................................................................514 About Running FEM Analyses and Generating Output Decks ...............................514 Solving a Model Using an FEA Program....................................................515 Selecting a Solver ................................................................................516 FEM Analysis Types ..............................................................................516 Element Shape.....................................................................................517 Determining a Run Method ....................................................................517 Reviewing Results.........................................................................................522 Results for Native Mode ...........................................................................522 About Results ......................................................................................522 Working with the Results User Interface ..................................................523 Results User Interface Menu Bar.............................................................524 Results User Interface Toolbar ...............................................................524 Basic Functions for the Results User Interface ..........................................526 Evaluating Results ................................................................................534 xii
Table of Contents
Loading Result Windows ........................................................................534 To Load a Result Window.......................................................................535 Saving Results .....................................................................................536 Generating Reports...............................................................................537 Results for FEM .......................................................................................538 About FEM Results................................................................................538 Using the Postprocessor in FEM Mode......................................................538 Loading NASTRAN Results Database .......................................................539 Graphical Result Windows......................................................................540 FEA Parameters ...................................................................................554 Analysis Statistics.................................................................................555 Hard Point Reports ...............................................................................558 Supported FEA Solvers..........................................................................559 Common Facilities.........................................................................................560 Working With Normals .............................................................................560 Surface Normals...................................................................................560 Specifying Y Direction for Beams ............................................................561 Shell Normals ......................................................................................561 Working with Functions ............................................................................562 Functions for Native Mode .....................................................................562 Functions for FEM Mode.........................................................................568 Additional Information...................................................................................572 Long-Term Limitations ..........................................................................572 Glossary for Mechanica .........................................................................574 Icons Used in Mechanica .......................................................................603 xiii
Table of Contents
Icons Common to Structure and Thermal.................................................603 Icons Specific to Structure .....................................................................606 Icons Specific to Thermal ......................................................................610 Bibliography ........................................................................................611 Database Considerations .......................................................................614 Native Mode Files .................................................................................614 Using Pro/ENGINEER File Commands ......................................................616 FEM Database Considerations ................................................................617 Support for Pro/INTRALINK and Windchill ................................................618 Files Created by Mechanica ....................................................................621 Engine Files .........................................................................................621 Library Files.........................................................................................626 Results Files ........................................................................................627 AutoGEM Files......................................................................................627 FEM Mode Files ....................................................................................628 Miscellaneous Files ...............................................................................628 Information Transfer.............................................................................629 Transferring Geometry ..........................................................................629 Geometry Transfer Limitations ...............................................................632 Transferring Loads and Constraints .........................................................632 Import Considerations...........................................................................632 What Does Not Transfer ........................................................................634 FEM Neutral Format File ........................................................................635 About the FEM Neutral Format ...............................................................635 Defining an Object................................................................................636 xiv
Table of Contents
Sections of a FEM Neutral Format File .....................................................641 Specialized Information............................................................................668 Understanding Fatigue Analysis ..............................................................668 Shell Property Equations .......................................................................686 Overview.............................................................................................686 Formulae for Calculating Shell Properties .................................................687 List of Symbols ....................................................................................694 Bibliography ........................................................................................695 Verification Guide .................................................................................696 Modal Analysis Problems .............................................................................795 ascii ....................................................................................................868 bsram ram_size ....................................................................................868 elram ram_size .....................................................................................868 -gdp ......................................................................................................869 i input_dir ............................................................................................869 iter n ...................................................................................................869 -massnorm ............................................................................................870 p password...........................................................................................870 solram ram_size....................................................................................870 sturm option.........................................................................................870 T.........................................................................................................870 w working_dir1:working_dir2:.................................................................871 About Creating and Running Analyses and Design Studies ...............................872 About Interfaces .....................................................................................872 About Thermal Boundary Conditions ..........................................................873 xv
Table of Contents
About Units ............................................................................................873 Acceleration Results Quantity....................................................................874 Accuracy ................................................................................................874 Add for Interpolation ...............................................................................875 Adjusting Color Scale for Fringe, Contour, and Vector Legends ......................875 Adjusting Cyclic Material Properties for Fatigue ...........................................876 Adjusting Fringe, Contour, and Vector Legends ...........................................876 Adjusting the Biaxiality Parameter for Fatigue .............................................877 Adjusting the Material Confidence Level for Fatigue .....................................877 Adjusting the Mean Stress Parameter for Fatigue.........................................877 Advanced Tuning for Fatigue Advisor .........................................................878 After P-Loop Pass ....................................................................................879 Alignment ..............................................................................................879 Allowable Edge and Face Angles ................................................................879 Allowable Errors......................................................................................880 Analyses and Design Studies Toolbar .........................................................880 Analysis and Design Study Workflow ............................................................881 Analyzing a Model (Native Mode)...............................................................882 Animating Your Results Display .................................................................883 ANSYS ...................................................................................................884 Apparent Frequency ................................................................................885 Area ......................................................................................................885 Assembly Modeling Entities, Idealizations, and Connections ..........................885 At Each Step ..........................................................................................886 At Each Step Time Evaluation (Thermal Analysis) ....................................886 xvi
Table of Contents
At Each Step Time or Frequency Evaluation Method .................................886 Auto Detect Paired Surfaces .....................................................................886 AutoGEM File Names ...............................................................................887 AutoGEM Interruption Guidelines...............................................................887 AutoGEM Overconstrained ........................................................................887 Automatic Interrupt.................................................................................888 Automatically Smooth Convections ............................................................888 Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems .................889 Base Excitation .......................................................................................890 Beam Contribution ..................................................................................890 Beam Resultant Results Quantity ..............................................................891 Beam Sections Dialog Box ........................................................................892 Before You Use the Results Command........................................................892 BLF Convergence ....................................................................................893 Boundary Edges......................................................................................893 Boundary Faces ......................................................................................893 Boundary Processing Takes Too Long.........................................................894 Buckling Load Factor and Optimization Studies............................................894 Building and Saving Queries .....................................................................894 Calculate Quantities and Factors for Vibration Analysis .................................895 Calculate Quantities for Analysis ...............................................................896 Calculate Stresses and Strains ..................................................................896 Cartesian Coordinate System ....................................................................897 Channel .................................................................................................898 Clearing Query Tags from a Result Window.................................................899 xvii
Table of Contents
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion...............................................................899 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Isotropic ..............................................900 Combine Results with Results from Previous Static Analysis ..........................900 Comparing Animations .............................................................................900 Comparing Mirror and Cyclic Symmetry......................................................901 Comparing Results ..................................................................................902 Component ............................................................................................902 Component Basic Analyses ...................................................................902 Component Center of Mass Quantities ....................................................903 Component Contact Force Quantity........................................................903 Component Displacement, Rotation, and Reaction Quantities ....................903 Component Dynamic Analyses ..............................................................904 Component Moment of Inertia Quantities................................................904 Component Stress and Strain Quantities.................................................905 Component Stress, Strain.....................................................................905 Component Thermal Analyses ...............................................................906 Component and Layer Visibility in Results...................................................906 Component for Linearized Stress Results ....................................................907 Components for Acceleration, Displacement, Reaction, Rotation, Rotation Acceleration, Rotation Velocity, or Velocity .................................................907 Components for Beam Bending, Tension, Torsion, and Total .........................908 Components for Beam Resultant ...............................................................909 Components for Fatigue ...........................................................................909 Components for Flux and Temp Gradient....................................................910 Components for Reactions at Point Constraints............................................910
xviii
Table of Contents
Components for Shear and Moment ...........................................................911 Components for Shell Resultant ................................................................911 Components for Stress or Strain ...............................................................912 Conflicting Coordinate Systems .................................................................913 Connected and Unconnected Parts.............................................................914 Considerations for Multiple Model Sessions .................................................916 Constrained, With Rigid Mode Search.........................................................916 Constraints and Loads on Compressed Geometry ........................................917 Constraints on Compressed Midsurfaces .....................................................917 Contact Analyses in Design Studies ...........................................................918 Contact Pressure Results Quantity .............................................................918 Contour Labels .......................................................................................919 Contour Results Display ...........................................................................919 Controlling Animations .............................................................................920 Controlling FEM Mesh Display ...................................................................920 Controlling Mesh Display ..........................................................................921 Controlling Result Window Appearance.......................................................922 Convergence Indicators ...........................................................................923 Convergence Measures ............................................................................923 Convergence Method ...............................................................................923 Convergence Options for Structural Analyses ..............................................924 Convergence Options for Thermal Analyses ................................................925 Convergence Percentage Calculation..........................................................925 Convergence Quantities for Steady Thermal Analysis ...................................926 Convergence Quantity for Buckling Analyses ...............................................926 xix
Table of Contents
Convergence Quantity for Modal and Prestress Modal Analyses......................927 Convergence Quantity for Static, Prestress Static, Large Deformation, and Contact Analyses ....................................................................................927 Coordinate System Guidelines...................................................................928 Coordinate System Types.........................................................................929 Coordinate Systems and Functions ............................................................929 Coordinate Systems and Loads and Constraints...........................................930 Coordinates for Cylindrical UCS .................................................................931 Coordinates for Spherical UCS ..................................................................931 Copying and Deleting Result Windows........................................................932 Cost ......................................................................................................933 Create a Full Set of Elements....................................................................933 Create Links Where Needed......................................................................934 Creating ................................................................................................934 Creating a Mesh (FEM Mode) ....................................................................934 Custom System of Units...........................................................................935 Custom Unit ...........................................................................................936 Customizing Graph Display Settings ..........................................................937 Customizing the Mechanica Toolbar ...........................................................938 Cylindrical UCS .......................................................................................939 Damping Coefficient (%) ..........................................................................940 Data Series Tab ......................................................................................940 Datum Points for User-Defined Measures....................................................940 Default ..................................................................................................941 Defining an Analysis (FEM Mode)...............................................................941
xx
Table of Contents
Defining Cutting or Capping Surface Depth .................................................942 Defining Cutting or Capping Surface References ..........................................942 Defining Design Changes (Native Mode) .....................................................943 Defining Parameters Based on Results .......................................................944 Defining Reference Planes for Cutting or Capping Surfaces ...........................944 Deformed Results Display.........................................................................945 Degrees of Freedom for Rigid Links ...........................................................946 Degrees of Freedom for Weighted Links .....................................................946 Density ..................................................................................................946 Design Parameters with Laminate Layup ....................................................946 Detailed Fillet Modeling ............................................................................947 Determining the Minimum and Maximum Locations for a Quantity .................948 Developing a Model (FEM Mode)................................................................948 Developing a Model (Native Mode) ............................................................950 Diamond ................................................................................................951 Direct VRML ...........................................................................................952 Direction of Base Excitation ......................................................................952 Displacement Results Quantity..................................................................952 Display AutoGEM Messages ......................................................................953 Displaying Element IDs, Node IDs, and Result Values (FEM mode).................953 Displaying Result Windows .......................................................................954 Displaying the Mesh Model .......................................................................954 Distortion Energy (von Mises) Failure Criterion ............................................955 Driven and Driving Parameters .................................................................955 Dynamic Cutting and Capping Surface Displays ...........................................956 xxi
Table of Contents
Dynamic Evaluation in Structure ...............................................................956 Dynamic Evaluation in Thermal .................................................................957 Dynamic Query .......................................................................................958 Elements with Approximated Linear Edges..................................................958 Error Detection in Optimization Studies ......................................................958 Error Resolution ......................................................................................959 Estimated Variation .................................................................................959 Examining Model Interiors for Fringe and Contour Plots ................................960 Example: 2D Axisymmetric Modeling .........................................................961 Example: 2D Plane Strain Modeling ...........................................................961 Example: 2D Surface Directions ................................................................962 Example: Applying a Material to a Solid Portion of Your Model .......................962 Example: Assembly Model with Gap...........................................................964 Example: Avoiding Interference ................................................................964 Example: Axis of Symmetry .....................................................................965 Example: Bearing Load ............................................................................965 Example: Bearing Load on a Surface..........................................................966 Example: Bearing Load on an Open Curve ..................................................966 Example: Brick .......................................................................................967 Example: Collet Illustration ......................................................................967 Example: Comparing Animation Stages for the Same Model..........................968 Example: Comparing Mode Animations for the Same Model ..........................969 Example: Contour Plot .............................................................................970 Example: Creating Load Paths for Pre-meshed Components..........................970 Example: Curved Surface Directions ..........................................................972 xxii
Table of Contents
Example: Cut for Cyclic Symmetry ............................................................973 Example: Cylindrical Coordinate System.....................................................974 Example: Dependent Movement in Patterned Features .................................974 Example: Featuring Your Part ...................................................................976 Example: Fringe Display...........................................................................977 Example: Geometric Precedence Rules .......................................................978 Example: Insert Points.............................................................................979 Example: Intervening Geometry ...............................................................980 Example: Invalidating a Modeling Entity .....................................................981 Example: Laminate Layup ........................................................................982 Example: Laminate Orientation .................................................................982 Example: Material Directions ....................................................................984 Example: Max Principal Stress Vector Plot ..................................................984 Example: Modeling Specialized Loads with a Cylindrical Coordinate System ....984 Example: Multiconstant-Thickness Pairs .....................................................985 Example: Near Point Measures and Geometric Intersection ...........................986 Example: Near Point Measures and Model Types .........................................987 Example: Orientation and Tolerance Settings ..............................................988 Example: Orienting the BSCS Shear Center ................................................988 Example: Orienting the BSCS to the BACS..................................................990 Example: Part with Unopposed Surfaces.....................................................991 Example: Point Loads ..............................................................................992 Example: Pre-planning for Shape Changes .................................................993 Example: Pressure Load...........................................................................995 Example: Project a Vector onto a Surface ...................................................995 xxiii
Table of Contents
Example: Reentrant Corners.....................................................................996 Example: Relations..................................................................................998 Example: Rotation for Shells and Surfaces..................................................999 Example: Setting up a Solid Model for a 2D Analysis on an Internal Surface....999 Example: Spatially Varying Loads............................................................ 1000 Example: T-Bracket............................................................................... 1002 Example: Tetra ..................................................................................... 1002 Example: Unpaired Surface on L-Bracket.................................................. 1003 Example: Unwanted Rotation About a Fastener ......................................... 1003 Example: Using a Simplified Part............................................................. 1005 Example: Variable Material Orientation .................................................... 1006 Example: Vector Plot ............................................................................. 1007 Example: Wedge................................................................................... 1007 Excel ................................................................................................... 1008 Export HTML Dialog Box ......................................................................... 1008 Export HTML Setup Dialog Box................................................................ 1009 Export VRML Dialog Box......................................................................... 1009 Extra Tab on Beam Definition Dialog Box.................................................. 1009 Factors Determining the Selection of Entities ............................................ 1010 Failure Criterion .................................................................................... 1010 Failure Index Results Quantity ................................................................ 1011 Fatigue Properties ................................................................................. 1011 Fatigue Results Quantity ........................................................................ 1012 FEA Parameter Types............................................................................. 1012 FEM Mesh Display Buttons ...................................................................... 1012 xxiv
Table of Contents
FEM Mesh File Names ............................................................................ 1013 FEM Mode ............................................................................................ 1013 FEM Neutral Format............................................................................... 1013 File Menu on Results Window Toolbar....................................................... 1014 Fix and Flip Normals .............................................................................. 1014 Fixing Parabolic Elements ....................................................................... 1014 For Individual Modes ............................................................................. 1015 Force Per Unit Type ............................................................................... 1016 Force Per Unit Type Guidelines................................................................ 1017 Format Result Window Dialog Box ........................................................... 1017 Frequency Convergence ......................................................................... 1018 Frequency Range .................................................................................. 1018 Fringe Display Type ............................................................................... 1018 From and To Fields for Dir Points & Mag ................................................... 1020 Full Results .......................................................................................... 1020 Function Material Properties................................................................ 1020 Function of Coordinates ......................................................................... 1021 Function of Frequency............................................................................ 1021 Functional Form of Interpolation.............................................................. 1022 General ............................................................................................... 1023 General Guidelines for Tying Result Windows ............................................ 1023 Generate Report for Linearized Stress Results ........................................... 1024 Generating Point Data............................................................................ 1024 Creating Statistics, Parameters, or Reports from Shell Elements .................. 1024 Global Energy Index .............................................................................. 1025 xxv
Table of Contents
Global RMS Stress Index ........................................................................ 1025 Global Sensitivity Studies ....................................................................... 1025 Global Spatial Evaluation Methods ........................................................... 1025 Graph Display Tab................................................................................. 1026 Graph Display Type ............................................................................... 1026 Graph Location ..................................................................................... 1027 Graph Report........................................................................................ 1027 Graphic Size ......................................................................................... 1028 Graphing Statistics ................................................................................ 1028 Graphtool Window................................................................................. 1028 Guidelines and Tips for Using Datum Points .............................................. 1029 Guidelines for Allocating RAM for Solver and Element Data ......................... 1030 Guidelines for Allocating Swap Space ....................................................... 1030 Guidelines for Assigning Mass Properties .................................................. 1031 Guidelines for Changing Legend Values .................................................... 1032 Guidelines for Entering Polynomial Order.................................................. 1033 Guidelines for Managing Disk Space Resources.......................................... 1033 Guidelines for NASTRAN Deck Import ...................................................... 1033 Guidelines for Prescribed Displacement Constraints ................................... 1034 Guidelines for Setting Solram ................................................................. 1034 Guidelines for Spatially Varying Loads...................................................... 1035 Guidelines for Specifying Units ................................................................ 1035 Guidelines for Surface-Surface Connections and Interfaces (FEM mode) ....... 1036 Guidelines for Tying Graphs.................................................................... 1037 Guidelines for Using Relations ................................................................. 1037 xxvi
Table of Contents
Heat Flux ............................................................................................. 1038 Heat Loads on Internal Surfaces.............................................................. 1038 Hollow Circle ........................................................................................ 1039 Hollow Ellipse ....................................................................................... 1040 Hollow Rect .......................................................................................... 1041 How Loads Transfer to Structure ............................................................. 1042 How Mechanica Handles Your Working Model ............................................ 1043 How Stress Components Relate to Textbook Examples ............................... 1043 How Structure Imports Loads from Mechanism Design ............................... 1044 HTML Report ........................................................................................ 1045 I-Beam ................................................................................................ 1046 Improperly Connected Idealizations ......................................................... 1046 Improperly Constrained Springs, Beams, or Shells..................................... 1047 Inconsistent Shell Normals ..................................................................... 1048 Initial Temperature Distribution .............................................................. 1048 Insert Points......................................................................................... 1048 Insert Result Windows From Template Dialog Box ..................................... 1049 Insufficiently Constrained Models ............................................................ 1049 Interpolated Over Entity......................................................................... 1050 Invalid Curves for 2D Axisymmetric Models .............................................. 1050 Invalid Surfaces for 2D Axisymmetric Models ............................................ 1051 Isotropic .............................................................................................. 1052 Isotropic Properties ............................................................................... 1052 Iyy, Iyz, Izz.......................................................................................... 1053 J ......................................................................................................... 1053 xxvii
Table of Contents
L-Section ............................................................................................. 1053 Labels ................................................................................................. 1054 Layup .................................................................................................. 1055 Legend Value........................................................................................ 1055 Limitations of Averaging in Results .......................................................... 1056 Linearized Stress Report ........................................................................ 1056 Linearized Stress Value Calculation.......................................................... 1057 Load History Options for Fatigue Analysis ................................................. 1058 Load Interpolation ................................................................................. 1059 Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses .............. 1060 Load Resultant Dialog Box for Heat Loads................................................. 1060 Load Resultant Dialog Box for Structure Loads .......................................... 1061 Load Scale Factor for Prestress Analyses .................................................. 1061 Load Set Functions ................................................................................ 1062 Load Types in Large Deformation Static Analysis ....................................... 1063 Loading Types for Fatigue Analysis .......................................................... 1063 Local Disp/Energy Index, Local Temp/Energy Index ................................... 1064 Local Sensitivity Dialog Box .................................................................... 1064 Local Sensitivity Graph Notes.................................................................. 1065 Local Sensitivity Studies......................................................................... 1065 Local Temperatures and Local and Global Energy Norms ............................ 1065 Local Temperatures and Local Energy Norms ............................................ 1065 Localized Mesh Refinement..................................................................... 1066 Log Scale ............................................................................................. 1066 Managing Graphs .................................................................................. 1066 xxviii
Table of Contents
Managing Memory and Swap Space ......................................................... 1067 Managing Performance .......................................................................... 1068 Mass Participation Factor Results............................................................. 1068 Masses Based on Components ................................................................ 1069 Masses Based on Components (FEM mode)............................................... 1069 Matching Parameters ............................................................................. 1070 Material Assignment in Part Mode and Assembly Mode ............................... 1070 Material Directions 1, 2, and 3 ................................................................ 1071 Material or Sub-laminate ........................................................................ 1072 Material Property Requirements Failure Criterion ................................... 1073 Max Absolute........................................................................................ 1074 Max Aspect Ratio .................................................................................. 1074 Max Edge Turn (Degrees)....................................................................... 1074 Maximum............................................................................................. 1075 Maximum Time Evaluation (Thermal Analysis) ....................................... 1075 Maximum Time or Frequency Evaluation Method.................................... 1077 Maximum Absolute Time Evaluation (Thermal Analysis) .......................... 1077 Maximum Absolute Time or Frequency Evaluation Method....................... 1078 Maximum and Minimum Shell Values ....................................................... 1078 Maximum Number of Iterations............................................................... 1078 Maximum Shear Stress (Tresca) Failure Criterion ...................................... 1079 Maximum Strain Failure Criterion ............................................................ 1079 Maximum Stress Failure Criterion ............................................................ 1079 Measure Convergence............................................................................ 1079 Measure Results Quantity....................................................................... 1080 xxix
Table of Contents
Measures Not Calculated for Dynamic Random .......................................... 1080 mech_extopt.in File Format .................................................................... 1080 mech_extopt.out File Format .................................................................. 1081 Mechanica Fatigue Advisor ..................................................................... 1081 Mechanica Mass Properties ..................................................................... 1082 Mechanism Load Import Dialog Box ......................................................... 1083 Methods of Simplifying Your Model .......................................................... 1083 Min Frequency, Max Frequency ............................................................... 1084 Minimum.............................................................................................. 1084 Minimum Time Evaluation (Thermal Analysis)........................................ 1085 Minimum Time or Frequency Evaluation Method .................................... 1085 Minimum and Maximum Angles ............................................................... 1086 Mode Options for Dynamic Analyses ........................................................ 1086 Mode Options for Modal and Prestress Modal Analyses ............................... 1086 Model Accuracy..................................................................................... 1087 Model Display Type ............................................................................... 1088 Model Temperature Distribution .............................................................. 1088 Modes Included..................................................................................... 1089 Modified Mohr Failure Criterion................................................................ 1089 Modify or Delete Existing Elements .......................................................... 1090 Modifying Analyses and Design Studies .................................................... 1090 Modifying and Deleting Cutting and Capping Surfaces ................................ 1090 Move or Delete Existing Points ................................................................ 1091 MPEG .................................................................................................. 1091 MPEG Export Dialog Box......................................................................... 1092 xxx
Table of Contents
MSC/NASTRAN ..................................................................................... 1093 Multi-Pass Adaptive Convergence Method ................................................. 1094 NASTRAN Templates.............................................................................. 1094 Normalized Tsai-Wu Interaction Term ...................................................... 1095 Note Style Dialog Box ............................................................................ 1095 Number ............................................................................................... 1095 Number of Load Intervals ....................................................................... 1096 Number of Modes, All Modes in Frequency Range ...................................... 1096 Object Action........................................................................................ 1097 Object Action Shortcut Menu .................................................................. 1098 Omit Unopposed Surfaces ...................................................................... 1098 Optimization Studies ............................................................................. 1099 Optimizing a Model (Native Mode) ........................................................... 1099 Order of Rotation .................................................................................. 1100 Orientation........................................................................................... 1100 Orientation Dialog Box ........................................................................... 1101 Orientation Dialog Box ........................................................................... 1102 Orthotropic........................................................................................... 1102 Output Format ...................................................................................... 1103 Output Formats .................................................................................... 1103 Output Intervals for Transient Thermal Analysis ........................................ 1104 Output of Statistics and Reports for Structural or Modal Analyses ................ 1104 Output of Statistics and Reports for Thermal Analyses................................ 1105 Output Options for Dynamic Analyses ...................................................... 1105 Output Options for Structural Analyses .................................................... 1105 xxxi
Table of Contents
Output Options for Thermal Analyses ....................................................... 1106 Outputting FEM Analysis Statistics ........................................................... 1106 Outputting Hard Point Reports ................................................................ 1107 Overlay................................................................................................ 1108 Override Coordinate System for Rigid Links .............................................. 1108 Override Coordinate System for Weighted Links ........................................ 1109 P-Level Results Quantity ........................................................................ 1109 Pairing Unopposed Surfaces.................................................................... 1109 Pan ..................................................................................................... 1110 Paper .................................................................................................. 1111 Parameter-Based Measures Goal ......................................................... 1111 Parameter-Based Measures Limit......................................................... 1112 Parameter-Based Measures Parameters................................................ 1112 Parameter-Capable Edit Fields ................................................................ 1113 Parameter-Capable Edit Fields ................................................................ 1113 Parameter Button.................................................................................. 1114 Pass or Fail Results 2D ....................................................................... 1114 Pass or Fail Results 3D ....................................................................... 1114 Percent Convergence ............................................................................. 1114 Percent Convergence ............................................................................. 1115 Permanent and Session-based Configuration Files ..................................... 1115 Phase Type .......................................................................................... 1116 Plotting Grid ......................................................................................... 1116 Plotting Grid ......................................................................................... 1117
xxxii
Table of Contents
Point Loads, Point Constraints, Point Heat Loads, Point Prescribed Temperatures, Point Convection Conditions.................................................................... 1117 PointPoint Pairs ................................................................................... 1118 Poisson's Ratio...................................................................................... 1119 Poisson's Ratio Isotropic ..................................................................... 1120 Polynomial Order .................................................................................. 1120 Predefined Systems of Units ................................................................... 1120 Predefined Units.................................................................................... 1121 Preview for Interpolation ........................................................................ 1122 Previous Analysis Options for Buckling Analysis ......................................... 1122 Previous Analysis Options for Dynamic Analysis......................................... 1122 Previous Analysis Options for Fatigue Analysis .......................................... 1123 Previous Analysis Options for Prestress Analyses ....................................... 1123 Printing Result Windows......................................................................... 1124 Pro/ENGINEER Parameters as Design Parameters ...................................... 1124 Pro/ENGINEER Parameters as Measures ................................................... 1125 Probing Fringe, Contour, and Vector Plots................................................. 1125 Probing Graphs ..................................................................................... 1126 Problems with Elements ......................................................................... 1127 Problems with Loads and Constraints ....................................................... 1127 Problems with Properties........................................................................ 1128 Projected Vector ................................................................................... 1128 Properties According to Mass Type (FEM mode)......................................... 1128 Property Type ....................................................................................... 1129 Quantity Basic Analyses ..................................................................... 1130
xxxiii
Table of Contents
Quantity Dynamic Analyses ................................................................ 1130 Quantity Thermal Analyses ................................................................. 1131 Quantity for Measure Definition............................................................... 1132 Quantity for Result Windows................................................................... 1133 Quantity Notes for Modal and Dynamic Analyses ....................................... 1134 Querying for Linearized Stress ................................................................ 1134 Querying Quantities for Fringe Plots and Linearized Stress Analyses............. 1135 Radius ................................................................................................. 1135 Reaction Results Quantity ...................................................................... 1135 Reaction Results Reporting ..................................................................... 1136 Reactions at Point Constraints Quantity.................................................... 1136 Recovery Points for Beam Results............................................................ 1137 Rectangle............................................................................................. 1138 Redefine the Design Study ..................................................................... 1138 Redistribute Levels ................................................................................ 1139 Reentrant Corners ................................................................................. 1139 Reference Entities for Weighted Links ...................................................... 1139 Referenced Coordinate System ............................................................... 1140 Refit .................................................................................................... 1140 Relabel Contour .................................................................................... 1141 Relative To ........................................................................................... 1141 Remove for Interpolation ....................................................................... 1141 Required Modeling Entities ..................................................................... 1141 Response Spectrum Options for Dynamic Shock Analysis............................ 1142 Restrictions When Specifying Multiple Working Directories .......................... 1143 xxxiv
Table of Contents
Results Output Intervals ........................................................................ 1143 Results Relative to Beam Orientation ....................................................... 1144 Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.................................................... 1145 Results Relative to Material Orientation .................................................... 1145 Results Relative to Ply Orientation ........................................................... 1145 Results Surface Definition Dialog Box....................................................... 1146 Results When Using Automatic Midsurface Connections .............................. 1146 Review Beam Section Properties ............................................................. 1147 Review Layup ....................................................................................... 1149 Review Stiffness ................................................................................... 1149 Reviewing Analyses ............................................................................... 1150 Reviewing and Altering Result Windows.................................................... 1151 Reviewing Connectivity .......................................................................... 1152 Reviewing Contact Regions..................................................................... 1152 Reviewing the Results............................................................................ 1152 Rigid Link Icon...................................................................................... 1153 RMS .................................................................................................... 1154 Rotate About ........................................................................................ 1154 Rotation Acceleration Results Quantity ..................................................... 1154 Rotation and Separation......................................................................... 1155 Rotation Results Quantity ....................................................................... 1156 Rotation Velocity Results Quantity ........................................................... 1157 Sample FNF File for External Temperature ................................................ 1157 Sample mecbatch File ............................................................................ 1158 Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses ...................................... 1159 xxxv
Table of Contents
Saved Views......................................................................................... 1159 Search Tool .......................................................................................... 1160 Search Tool Dialog Box .......................................................................... 1160 Secondary Quantity Option Menu ............................................................ 1162 Segmenting a Graph.............................................................................. 1162 Select the Solver................................................................................... 1163 Selecting Load Sets and Modes for Optimization Studies............................. 1163 Set the Principal System of Units............................................................. 1164 Setting a Current Coordinate System ....................................................... 1165 Shading Your Model............................................................................... 1165 Shear & Moment Results Quantity ........................................................... 1165 Shear DY, Shear DZ .............................................................................. 1165 Shear FY, Shear FZ ............................................................................... 1166 Shear Modulus...................................................................................... 1166 Shear Strength ..................................................................................... 1167 Shell Contribution ................................................................................. 1167 Shell , 2D Plate Element Type, 2D Solid Element Type ............................... 1168 Shell Resultant Results Quantity.............................................................. 1168 Shell Side ............................................................................................ 1169 Shell Thickness ..................................................................................... 1169 SIM SELECT Menu ................................................................................. 1170 Simulation Model .................................................................................. 1171 Single-Pass Adaptive Convergence Method ............................................... 1172 Singularities ......................................................................................... 1172 Singularities and Constraints .................................................................. 1173 xxxvi
Table of Contents
Singularities and Loads .......................................................................... 1174 Solid Circle........................................................................................... 1174 Solid Ellipse.......................................................................................... 1175 Solids .................................................................................................. 1176 Solving a Model (FEM Mode) ................................................................... 1176 Spatial Evaluation Structure................................................................ 1177 Spatial Evaluation Thermal ................................................................. 1178 Spatial Evaluation Method Basic and Dynamic Analyses .......................... 1179 Spatial Evaluation Method Thermal Analyses ......................................... 1180 Spherical UCS....................................................................................... 1181 Spin .................................................................................................... 1182 Spin Softening ...................................................................................... 1182 Spring References ................................................................................. 1182 Square ................................................................................................ 1183 Standard Design Study with Parameters................................................... 1184 Standard Studies, Dynamic Shock Analyses .............................................. 1184 Standard Studies: Dynamic Time, Frequency, and Random Analyses ........... 1184 Standard Studies: Static, Large Deformation Static, Contact, Prestress Static, Modal, Prestress Modal, Buckling, Steady-State Thermal, and Transient Thermal Analyses .............................................................................................. 1185 Steady Thermal Convergence Method ...................................................... 1185 Storing and Retrieving FEA Results .......................................................... 1186 Strain Energy Results Quantity ............................................................... 1187 Strain Measures in Large Deformation Static Analysis ................................ 1188 Strain Results Quantity .......................................................................... 1188 Strategy: After You Run an Optimization Study ......................................... 1189 xxxvii
Table of Contents
Strategy: Defining Optimization Studies ................................................... 1190 Strategy: Determining the Presence of a Non-Linear Problem...................... 1190 Strategy: Displaying Graphs with Logarithmic Scales ................................. 1191 Strategy: Establishing Geometrically-Consistent Node Locations .................. 1192 Strategy: Fixing Convergence Problems ................................................... 1193 Strategy: Identifying and Resolving Potential Trouble Spots in a Model......... 1193 Strategy: If Solver RAM Is Too High ........................................................ 1194 Strategy: If Solver RAM Is Too Low ......................................................... 1195 Strategy: Improving Convergence ........................................................... 1195 Strategy: Interpreting Beam Resultant Forces and Moments ....................... 1195 Strategy: Minimizing Singularities ........................................................... 1197 Strategy: Optimizing a Model.................................................................. 1197 Strategy: Preparing for Optimization Studies ............................................ 1198 Strategy: Running a Global Sensitivity Study ............................................ 1198 Strategy: Running the Engine with Parallel Processing................................ 1199 Strategy: Scaling Results for Centrifugal Loads in a Combined Load Set ....... 1199 Strategy: Specifying Polynomial Order for a Multi-Pass Adaptive Analysis ..... 1200 Strategy: Using Contact Analysis Effectively ............................................. 1201 Strategy: Using Convergence Graphs to Review Results ............................. 1201 Strategy: Using Design Parameters ......................................................... 1203 Strategy: Viewing Optimization Results .................................................... 1204 Stress Grids ......................................................................................... 1204 Stress Results Quantity.......................................................................... 1205 Structural Options for Material Definition .................................................. 1205 Structural Temperature Loads................................................................. 1206 xxxviii
Table of Contents
Structure Constraints and Coordinate Systems.......................................... 1207 Structure Constraints on Datum Points..................................................... 1207 Structure Constraints on Geometry.......................................................... 1208 Structure Constraints on Regions ............................................................ 1208 Structure Loads on Geometry ................................................................. 1208 Structure Loads on Points....................................................................... 1209 Structure Loads on Regions .................................................................... 1210 Sum Load Sets ..................................................................................... 1210 Suppressing Loads, Constraints, and Boundary Conditions .......................... 1210 Suppression and Family Tables ............................................................... 1211 Surface-Surface Gaps ............................................................................ 1212 Surfaces and Curves Used in Shell Definition ............................................ 1213 Systems of Units Management ................................................................ 1213 Techniques for Establishing Consistent Hierarchical Meshes ........................ 1214 Temp Gradient Results Quantity.............................................................. 1215 Temperature Distribution ....................................................................... 1215 Temperature Distribution Options ............................................................ 1215 Temperature Load Information for Static Analyses..................................... 1216 Temperature Options for Transient Thermal Analysis.................................. 1216 Temperature Results Quantity................................................................. 1217 Thermal Measures ................................................................................. 1217 Thermal Options for Material Definition .................................................... 1217 Thermal Strain Energy Results Quantity ................................................... 1218 Thermal Strain Results Quantity.............................................................. 1218 Thermal Values for Isotropic Properties .................................................... 1218 xxxix
Table of Contents
Thermal Values for Orthotropic Properties ................................................ 1218 Thermal Values for Transversely Isotropic Properties ................................. 1219 Thickness............................................................................................. 1219 Tie Contour, Fringe, Graph, or Vectors Result Windows .......................... 1220 Tie Graph Windows ............................................................................... 1220 Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows .......................................................... 1221 Time Evaluation Method Thermal Analyses............................................ 1221 Time or Frequency Evaluation Method Dynamic Analyses ........................ 1222 Time Range .......................................................................................... 1222 Time Range .......................................................................................... 1223 Time Range Specification ....................................................................... 1223 Time Stamp ......................................................................................... 1223 Time/Frequency Eval ............................................................................. 1223 Time/Frequency Eval Options.................................................................. 1224 Tips for Fringe Displays.......................................................................... 1225 Titles ................................................................................................... 1225 To Animate a Results Display.................................................................. 1225 To Annotate a Result Window ................................................................. 1226 To Assign a Mechanica Material in Pro/ENGINEER ...................................... 1226 To Assign Fatigue Properties to Materials.................................................. 1227 To Control Icon Appearance.................................................................... 1227 To Create a Beam (FEM mode) ............................................................... 1228 To Create a Capping Surface .................................................................. 1228 To Create a Custom System of Units........................................................ 1229 To Create a Custom Unit ........................................................................ 1229 xl
Table of Contents
To Create a Cutting Surface.................................................................... 1230 To Create a Design Study....................................................................... 1231 To Create a Modal FEM Analysis .............................................................. 1232 To Create a Prestress Modal Analysis ....................................................... 1232 To Create a Pro/ENGINEER Parameter ..................................................... 1232 To Create a Symbolic Function ................................................................ 1233 To Create a Table Function ..................................................................... 1233 To Create an Excel Graph Report............................................................. 1233 To Create an Interface ........................................................................... 1234 To Create an Orientation for Parts, Solids, Volumes ................................... 1234 To Create an Orientation for Surfaces ...................................................... 1235 To Create an Output File ........................................................................ 1236 To Create Shells.................................................................................... 1236 To Customize Annotation Styles .............................................................. 1237 To Customize the Mechanica Toolbar ....................................................... 1237 To Define a Beam Resultant Quantity....................................................... 1237 To Define a Center of Mass Measure ........................................................ 1238 To Define a Contact Measure .................................................................. 1238 To Define a Contact Pressure Quantity ..................................................... 1238 To Define a Contour Results Display ........................................................ 1238 To Define a Deformed Results Display...................................................... 1239 To Define a Displacement Measure .......................................................... 1239 To Define a Displacement Quantity .......................................................... 1240 To Define a Driven Pro Parameter Measure ............................................... 1240 To Define a Failure Index Measure........................................................... 1241 xli
Table of Contents
To Define a Failure Index Quantity .......................................................... 1241 To Define a Fatigue Measure................................................................... 1241 To Define a Fatigue Quantity .................................................................. 1241 To Define a Flux or Temp Gradient Quantity ............................................. 1242 To Define a Force Measure ..................................................................... 1242 To Define a Fringe Results Display........................................................... 1242 To Define a Graph Results Display ........................................................... 1243 To Define a Heat Flux or Temperature Gradient Measure ............................ 1243 To Define a Measure Quantity ................................................................. 1244 To Define a Model Results Display ........................................................... 1244 To Define a Moment Measure.................................................................. 1244 To Define a Moment of Inertia Measure .................................................... 1245 To Define a Phase Measure..................................................................... 1245 To Define a Radiation Condition .............................................................. 1245 To Define a Reaction Quantity................................................................. 1246 To Define a Reactions at Point Constraints Quantity ................................... 1246 To Define a Results Display Location ........................................................ 1247 To Define a Rotation Acceleration Quantity ............................................... 1247 To Define a Rotation Measure ................................................................. 1247 To Define a Rotation Quantity ................................................................. 1248 To Define a Rotation Velocity Quantity ..................................................... 1248 To Define a Rotational Acceleration Measure ............................................. 1248 To Define a Rotational Velocity Measure ................................................... 1249 To Define a Shear & Moment Quantity ..................................................... 1249 To Define a Shell Resultant Quantity........................................................ 1249 xlii
Table of Contents
To Define a Strain Energy Quantity.......................................................... 1249 To Define a Strain Quantity .................................................................... 1250 To Define a Stress or Strain Measure ....................................................... 1250 To Define a Stress Quantity .................................................................... 1250 To Define a Temperature Measure ........................................................... 1251 To Define a Temperature Quantity........................................................... 1251 To Define a Thermal Strain Energy Quantity ............................................. 1251 To Define a Thermal Strain Quantity ........................................................ 1252 To Define a Time Measure ...................................................................... 1252 To Define a Vectors Results Display ......................................................... 1252 To Define a Velocity Measure .................................................................. 1253 To Define a Velocity Quantity.................................................................. 1253 To Define an Acceleration Measure .......................................................... 1253 To Define an Acceleration Quantity .......................................................... 1254 To Define an Advanced Fastener Using Material and Diameter ..................... 1254 To Define an Advanced Fastener Using Spring Stiffness Properties ............... 1254 To Define an Optimization Study Goal ...................................................... 1255 To Define an Optimization Study Limit ..................................................... 1255 To Define Structural Temperature Loads .................................................. 1256 To Define the Load History for a Fatigue Analysis ...................................... 1256 To Define the Response Spectrum for a Dynamic Shock Analysis ................. 1257 To Delete Parameters ............................................................................ 1257 To Display Run Errors ............................................................................ 1258 To Edit a Coordinate System Definition .................................................... 1259 To Edit a Custom System of Units ........................................................... 1259 xliii
Table of Contents
To Edit a Custom Unit ............................................................................ 1260 To Edit a Result Window......................................................................... 1260 To Edit the Legend ................................................................................ 1261 To Export a File as an MPEG ................................................................... 1261 To Export a File in HTML ........................................................................ 1261 To Export a File in VRML ........................................................................ 1262 To Format a Fringe, Contour, Vector, Model, or Animation Result Window..... 1262 To Generate a Report for Linearized Stress ............................................... 1263 To Generate an Edge Graph.................................................................... 1263 To Modify a Capping Surface................................................................... 1264 To Modify a Cutting Surface.................................................................... 1264 To Modify an Offset Coordinate System .................................................... 1265 To Move the Mechanica Toolbar .............................................................. 1265 To Display or Output Parameters............................................................. 1266 To Promote Simulation Features to Pro/ENGINEER..................................... 1266 To Query for Linearized Stress ................................................................ 1266 To Review a System of Units .................................................................. 1267 To Review an Individual Unit .................................................................. 1267 To Review the Mesh .............................................................................. 1268 To Run a Regeneration Analysis .............................................................. 1268 To Save a Result Window ....................................................................... 1269 To Save an Optimized Shape .................................................................. 1269 To Segment a Graph ............................................................................. 1270 To Select Load Functions for a Dynamic Analysis ....................................... 1270 To Select Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses 1270 xliv
Table of Contents
To Select Mode Options for a Dynamic Analysis ......................................... 1271 To Select Mode Options for a Modal Analysis ............................................. 1272 To Select Output Options for a Dynamic Analysis....................................... 1272 To Select Output Options for a Structural Analysis ..................................... 1273 To Select Output Options for a Thermal Analysis ....................................... 1274 To Select Temperature Distribution for an Analysis .................................... 1275 To Select Temperature Options for a Transient Thermal Analysis ................. 1275 To Select the Iterative Solver ................................................................. 1276 To Set a Current Coordinate System ........................................................ 1277 To Set a Principal System of Units ........................................................... 1277 To Set Convergence for a Structural Analysis ............................................ 1278 To Set Convergence for a Thermal Analysis .............................................. 1278 To Set Icon Visibilities for Loads and Constraints ....................................... 1279 To Set Icon Visibilities for Modeling Entities .............................................. 1279 To Set Labels........................................................................................ 1279 To Set Simulation Entity Prehighlighting Filters ......................................... 1280 To Set Titles ......................................................................................... 1280 To Solve a FEM Model Online or in the Background .................................... 1280 To Specify a Result Window Quantity ....................................................... 1281 To Specify Base Excitation for a Dynamic Analysis ..................................... 1281 To Specify Result Window Display Options ................................................ 1282 To Suppress Modeling Entities Through a Family Table ............................... 1282 To Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows, Procedure 1 ................................... 1283 To Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows, Procedure 2 ................................... 1283 To Tie Multiple Result Windows ............................................................... 1284 xlv
Table of Contents
To Untie Multiple Result Windows ............................................................ 1284 To Use External Bulk Temperature Spatial Variation for 3D Models............... 1285 To Use External Conv Coef & Bulk Temp Spatial Variation for 3D Models....... 1285 To Use External Conv Coefficient Spatial Variation for 3D Models ................. 1286 To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Buckling Analysis .............................. 1286 To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Dynamic Analysis ............................. 1287 To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Fatigue Analysis ............................... 1287 To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Prestress Analysis ............................. 1288 To Use Uniform Spatial Variation for 3D Models ......................................... 1288 Tolerance Report................................................................................... 1289 Top and Bottom Shell Location................................................................ 1289 Total Load ............................................................................................ 1290 Total Load At Point ................................................................................ 1291 Track................................................................................................... 1291 Transient Thermal Convergence Method ................................................... 1292 Transversely Isotropic............................................................................ 1292 Transversely Isotropic Properties............................................................. 1293 Troubleshooting Browser Problems For Simulation Advisor.......................... 1293 Troubleshooting Constraints ................................................................... 1293 Tsai-Wu Failure Criterion........................................................................ 1293 Tsai Definition for Poisson's Ratios........................................................... 1294 Types of Measure Results Graphs ............................................................ 1295 UCS-Based Measures............................................................................. 1295 Ultimate Compressive Strength ............................................................... 1296 Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS).............................................................. 1296 xlvi
Table of Contents
Unconstrained ...................................................................................... 1297 Understanding Accuracy......................................................................... 1297 Understanding Thermal Boundary Condition Sets ...................................... 1297 Unit Conversion Tables .......................................................................... 1299 Introduction ......................................................................................... 1299 Basic Equalities..................................................................................... 1300 System of Units .................................................................................... 1303 MKS ................................................................................................. 1303 mmNS .............................................................................................. 1303 FPS .................................................................................................. 1304 IPS................................................................................................... 1304 Basic Units ........................................................................................... 1305 Examples of Values for Gravitational Acceleration and Selected Properties of Steel .......................................................................................................... 1307 Correspondence Between Mass and Force................................................. 1308 Correspondence Between Mass and Pounds-mass...................................... 1308 Conversion of Basic Units ....................................................................... 1309 Correspondence Between Degrees Celsius and Degrees Fahrenheit .............. 1313 Units According to Model Type and Entity ................................................. 1313 Units Management ................................................................................ 1314 Units of Modal Frequency Results ............................................................ 1315 Untie Contour, Fringe, Graph, or Vectors Result Windows ....................... 1315 Use Modes From Previous Design Study ................................................... 1315 Use of Function Definitions ..................................................................... 1316 Use Static Analysis Results From Previous Design Study ............................. 1317
xlvii
Table of Contents
Use Temperatures from Previous Design Study ......................................... 1318 User-defined Steps................................................................................ 1319 User-defined Steps for Transient Thermal Analysis .................................... 1319 Using Global Sensitivity Studies Effectively ............................................... 1319 Using Maximum and Minimum Legend Values to Get More Details................ 1320 Using Measures More than Once for Optimization Limits ............................. 1321 Using Online Help.................................................................................. 1322 Using Simulation Advisor........................................................................ 1323 Using Solver Results in the Postprocessor................................................. 1323 Validate ............................................................................................... 1324 Variations for Convection Conditions in FEM Mode ..................................... 1324 Varying a Single Design Parameter in a Global Sensitivity Study.................. 1324 Vectors Display Type ............................................................................. 1325 Velocity Results Quantity........................................................................ 1326 View Menu on Results Window Toolbar..................................................... 1327 Viewing Specifications for Simulation Advisor ............................................ 1327 Warp & Mass Tab .................................................................................. 1328 Weighted Link Icon................................................................................ 1328 When a Nonessential Feature Causes Unexpected Model Behavior Changes... 1329 When a Nonessential Feature Provides Hidden Benefits .............................. 1329 Working with the Laminate Layup Dialog Box............................................ 1329 X Axis and Y Axis Tabs........................................................................... 1330 Y Direction for Gaps .............................................................................. 1330 Young's Modulus ................................................................................... 1331 Young's Modulus Isotropic .................................................................. 1332 xlviii
Table of Contents
xlix
Index
Compatibility Issues
Mechanica Wildfire 2.0 is not compatible with Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire, or lower. To run Mechanica Wildfire 2.0, upgrade to Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire 2.0. Mechanica Wildfire 2.0 supports Pro/INTRALINK, version 3.3. Mechanica Wildfire 2.0 supports Unigraphics II Release 18.0 and Unigraphics NX. Mechanica Wildfire 2.0 supports CATIA 4.2.4 release 2. Mechanica's FEM mode no longer supports the Mold product.
Functionality Limitations
In assemblies where the points, edges, or surfaces of individual parts overlap to form the assembly, Structure and Thermal do not support beams, shells, and springs placed on the overlapping geometry. This limitation is specific to native mode and does not occur in FEM mode. The Mechanica Motion Help for Integrated mode is available at <proe_load_point>/html/usascii/proe/motion/start.html in your Pro/ENGINEER installation. You can use the browsers Mozilla 1.4 or IE 6.0 SP1 and later browsers to view the Motion Integrated Help.
Platform-Specific Limitations
The following discussion covers limitations specific to a given platform or specific to localized versions of the product, and includes: Mechanica Wildfire 2.0 Installation Issues HP
HP
For the HP-UX operating system, the maxdsize parameter fixes a ceiling on the amount of swap space any single process can utilize. If this parameter is set too low, the Structure engine may terminate when solving large models due to insufficient swap space. In this case, the system displays the error message "An engine database error has occurred. Please check available disk and swap space." 2
If the available swap space appears more than adequate, the maxdsize parameter may be limiting the amount of the available swap space that Mechanica can utilize. You can use the HP-UX utility sam to check the current value of this parameter. You need to reconfigure the HP-UX kernel to change the value for this parameter to a minimum value of 500 MB.
config.pro Overview
The settings in config.pro control various aspects of your Mechanica session. This discussion covers all config.pro options supported for integrated mode. Here are some guidelines to consider when creating or amending a config.pro file: In general, configuration file options and values are not case sensitive. In both UNIX and Windows, the actual file names on disk must use lowercase characters only. In both UNIX and Windows, directory names can contain a mix of uppercase and lowercase characters. However, if Mechanica encounters two or more directories in the same path that have the same parent and the same name except for a different mix of uppercase and lowercase characters, it accesses only the directory with the earliest uppercase characters (since their ASCII values are lower.) This is true if you enter the full path with correct case sensitivity. For example, if it encounters directories named aBc, ABc, and Abc, it only looks in/through directory ABc. A config.pro line should not exceed 80 characters. You cannot continue a search path or mapkey on a second line. In Windows, you should specify the drive at the beginning of the path, so as to avoid problems if you change your working directory to another drive. You can set these options from the Tools>Options menu, or you can manually edit your config.pro file using a text editor.
config.pro Options
Here are the config.pro option categories available for Mechanica: Mechanica Unit Settings Option Simulation Display Options General Modeling Options FEM Mode Modeling, Meshing, and Output Options Fatigue Options Run Options Result Display Options Miscellaneous Options
Options in each category begin with the keyword or attribute name in boldface type, followed by a brief paragraph describing the option and a list of valid value types. The options in each category appear in alphabetical order.
In this system, the unit of force is in x lbm/sec (inch lbm second), which is not a common unit. o o o o o MKS meter kilogram second CGS centimeter gram second mmNs millimeter Newton second FPS foot pound second IPS inch pound second
SIM_DISPLAY_FASTENERS Toggles display of fastener icons. SIM_DISPLAY_GAPS Toggles display of gap icons. SIM_DISPLAY_IN_SPIN Toggles display of icons when a model is spinning. SIM_DISPLAY_INTERFACES Toggles display of interface icons. SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_COLORS Toggles display of individual colors. SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_DISTRIBUTION Toggles display of distributed load vectors over entire entity. SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_ICONS Toggles display of load icons. SIM_DISPLAY_LOAD_VALUE Toggles display of load value tags. SIM_DISPLAY_MASSES Toggles display of mass icons. SIM_DISPLAY_MATL_ASSIGNEMNTS Toggles display of material assignment icons. SIM_DISPLAY_MEASURES Toggles display of Simulation Measure icons. SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_AND_MODEL Toggles display of geometry and mesh models.
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_CONTROLS Toggles display of Mesh Control icons in FEM mode. SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_ENTITIES Toggles display of all mesh entities. SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_MODE Determines the initial state of the mesh display mode. You can set the initial state so that it displays your mesh as wireframe, hidden line, visible line (no hidden lines), or shaded. You can also set the initial state to display the geometry only. o o o o o NO_MESH WIREFRAME (default) HIDDEN NOHIDDEN SHADING
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_QUALITY Specifies the display refinement for mesh viewing. o o o COARSE (default) FINE MEDIUM
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_SHELLS_THICK Determines whether Mechanica displays shells meshes with zero thickness or the thickness that you defined for the shell. When this option is set to no, Mechanica displays the shell mesh with a zero thickness. If you set this option to Yes, Mechanica displays the shell mesh using the actual thickness. o o NO (default) YES
SIM_DISPLAY_MESH_SHRINK_ELEMS Specifies the size of displayed mesh elements. Enter a value between 0 and 100. If you do not want Mechanica to shrink the elements, you can use the default value, which is 0. Note that, for complex models that have very high element counts, shrinking the elements can degrade performance. SIM_DISPLAY_NAMES Toggles display of icon name tags.
SIM_DISPLAY_RIGID_CONNECTIONS Toggles display of rigid connection icons. SIM_DISPLAY_RIGID_DOF Toggles display of DOF icons for rigid links. SIM_DISPLAY_RIGID_LINKS Toggles display of rigid link icons. SIM_DISPLAY_SHELLS Toggles shell boundary highlighting. SIM_DISPLAY_SPOT_WELDS Toggles display of spot weld icons. SIM_DISPLAY_SPRINGS Toggles display of spring icons. SIM_DISPLAY_STRUCT_CONSTRAINTS Toggles display of all Structure constraint icons. SIM_DISPLAY_STRUCT_LOADS Toggles display of all Structure load icons. SIM_DISPLAY_THERM_BCS Toggles display of Thermal constraint icons. SIM_DISPLAY_THERM_LOADS Toggles display of Thermal load icons. SIM_DISPLAY_WEIGHTED_DOF Toggle display of DOF icons for weighted links. SIM_DISPLAY_WEIGHTED_LINKS Toggles display of weighted link icons.
SIM_BEAMSECTION_PATH Specifies the path for the beam sections directory, which contains the beam section library files. You must use the full path. SIMULATION_PRODUCT Specifies the product that you want to use as the default when you enter Mechanica. If you set this option to "prompt," the Model Type dialog box appears whenever you enter Mechanica with a new model. This behavior persists until you save your model while working in a Mechanica product. After the save occurs, Mechanica assumes that you will continue working in the selected product and no longer displays the Model Type dialog box upon entry. However, if you set this option to one of the product types, the software assumes that all models you bring into Mechanica are 3D, will use the specified product type, and, unless you specify otherwise through the SIMULATION_FEM_MODE config.pro option, will use native mode. In this case, Mechanica does not display the Model Type dialog box on entry. It simply applies the appropriate assumptions. If you want to use a different product, mode, or model type, you need to select the Edit>Mechanica Model Type command after you enter Mechanica. o o o PROMPT (default) STRUCTURE THERMAL
FEM_ANSYS_GROUPING Determines your ability to group ANSYS commands. When you set this option to "yes," you can use ANSYS CM commands for grouping nodes and elements on a part-by-part basis. Group names must be shorter than 8 characters. If the component name is longer than 8 characters, the software generates a default name. A part in part mode is not a group because you can select its elements and nodes. An element or a node may be part of more than one group. An element defined on a feature mentioned in a layer appears in the layer group and in the parent group. Bar elements connecting two assembly members do not belong to any group. o o NO (default) YES
10
FEM_ASP_RATIO Sets the value against which FEM mode compares the aspect ratios of the elements it creates. The value type is numeric and the default value is 7. FEM_DEFAULT_SOLVER Specifies the path to one of the solvers. o o ANSYS (default) MSC/NASTRAN
FEM_DIST_INDEX Sets the value against which FEM mode compares the distortion indices of the elements it creates. The value type is numeric and the default value is 0.4. FEM_EDGE_ANGLE Sets the angle between two adjacent element edges. Enter a value between 0 and 90. The value type is numeric and the default value is 30. FEM_IGNORE_UNPAIRED Determines whether Mechanica notifies you of unpaired surfaces when you test shell compression. If you set this option to "no," Mechanica alerts you when it encounters unpaired surfaces during a compression test. In this case, the software shows you the entire model and highlights the unpaired surfaces. If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica does not notify you of unpaired surfaces. Instead, it displays your model without the unpaired surfaces. o o NO (default) YES
FEM_MESH_OPERATIONS Activates the OPERATIONS menu, which enables you to perform specialized operations on NASTRAN files and the finite element mesh for NASTRAN. When you set this option to "yes," the Operations command appears on the Mesh menu. If you set the option to "no," the Operations command does not appear. o o NO (default) YES
FEM_MESH_PRESERVE Determines whether Mechanica should automatically store the mesh in a model_name.fmp(a) file. The storage location is the current directory, and 11
Mechanica overwrites any existing model_name.fmp(a) file in that directory without warning. If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica assumes that you want to use retained meshes rather than transient meshes. The use of retained meshes has a number of implications that affect how FEM mode behaves, the assembly meshing methods you can use, and so forth. To learn more, see Transient and Retained Meshes. With FEM_MESH_PRESERVE set to "yes," the software automatically retrieves the mesh from the model_name.fmp(a) file when you reopen the model in Structure or Thermal for FEM mode, provided the model has not changed. If the model has changed, a warning message appears. o o NO (default) YES
FEM_MESH_SOLID_SHELL_AUTO_CONSTRAINT Determines whether Mechanica constrains rotation for shell nodes. When you set this option to "yes," Mechanica adds rotational constraints to shell nodes at the interface between shell and solid elements at the shell node. These additional constraints prevent unwanted degrees of freedom (DOFs) in shell elements at the interface. Unwanted DOFs occur because the solid elements typically have 3 translational DOFs whereas shells have 3 translational DOFs plus 3 rotational DOFs. With FEM_MESH_SOLID_SHELL_AUTO_CONSTRAINT set to "yes," the software freezes the rotational DOFs, creating a more consistent interface between the shells and solids. If you do not want Mechanica to add the rotational constraints for you, you can set this option to "no." In this case, you are responsible for ensuring that the nodes at the interface are not underconstrained. You can also set the option so that Mechanica asks you whether you want automatic constraints or plan to constrain the nodes yourself. o o o YES (default) NO ASK
FEM_MID_RATIO Sets the value against which FEM mode compares the mid ratios of the elements it creates. The value type is numeric and the default value is 0.1.
12
FEM_NEUTRAL_VERSION Specifies the version number of the FEM neutral file. o o o 1 2 3 (default)
FEM_REMOVE_UNOPPOSED Defines the default state of the UseUnopposed toggle. The UseUnopposed toggle determines whether Mechanica will keep or ignore unopposed surfaces during compression. If you set this option to "yes," the system ignores unopposed surfaces when meshing the model; the system also deselects the UseUnopposed toggle. When you set this option to "no," the system uses the unopposed surfaces in the shell model. o o NO (default) YES
FEM_SKEW_ANGLE Sets the maximum acceptable default skew angle value, measured in degrees. Enter a value between 0 and 90. The value type is numeric and the default value is 45. FEM_SOLVER_TIME_LIMIT For MSC/NASTRAN solutions, this option interrupts the solver after the specified time limit. The default value is 60, and you specify values for this option in minutes. FEM_TAPER Sets the minimum acceptable default taper value. Enter a value between 0 and 1. The value type is numeric and the default value is 0.5. FEM_TWIST_ANGLE Sets the maximum acceptable default twist angle between opposing element faces. Applies to brick and wedge elements only. Enter a value between 0 and 90. FEM_WARP_ANGLE Sets the maximum acceptable default warp angle value, measured in degrees. Enter a value between 0 and 90. The value type is numeric and the default value is 10. 13
FEM_WHICH_ANSYS_SOLVER Specifies whether Mechanica uses the Frontal, Iterative, or Powersolver ANSYS solver. o o o FRONTAL (default) ITERATIVE POWERSOLVER
FEM_Y_DIR_COMPRESS Specifies the Y direction based on compressed and uncompressed geometry. The default value is "no," which indicates that Mechanica will use uncompressed geometry. o o NO (default) YES
PRO_ANSYS_PATH Specifies the path to the ANSYS executable. PRO_NASTRAN_PATH Specifies the path to the MSC/NASTRAN executable (nastran). PRO_SOLVER_NAME Specifies the name of the user-defined solver to be included in the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. PRO_SOLVER_PATH Specifies the path to the user-defined solver whose name is included in the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. SIM_ADDITIVE_MASS Adds any masses that reference the same geometrical entity or resolve to the same mesh node. If you set this option to "yes," FEM suppresses the precedence rules that apply to masses. o o NO (default) YES
SIM_FEM_NASTRAN_USE_PSHELL For MSC/NASTRAN solutions, this option determines the form that FEM mode uses to output laminated composite shell properties to the solver. When you set this option to "no," FEM outputs laminated composite shell properties using 14
PCOMP cards that reference MAT8 material cards. If you set this option to "yes," FEM outputs laminated composite shell properties using PSHELL cards that reference MAT2 material cards. o o NO (default) YES
SIM_NASTRAN_USE_COUPMASS For MSC/NASTRAN solutions, this option enables you to enforce consistent mass matrix generation. When you set this option to "yes," FEM adds PARAM,COUPMASS,1 to the NASTRAN deck to ensure that the solver generates a consistent mass matrix. If you set this option to "no," FEM does not add this statement, and NASTRAN generates a lumped mass matrix. o o NO (default) YES
SIM_OUTPUT_OBJ_NAMES Output beam sections name, analyses name, coordinate systems names as comments. SIM_OUTPUT_IDS_FOR_LAYERS Determines whether Mechanica will generate an XML file containing layer data when you output a NASTRAN deck. If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica generates the XML file that provides a listing of node and element IDs for any idealizationssuch as beams, shells, and massesthat you place on layers. The file provides lists for all layers that contain simulation entities. The filename for the XML file is outputfilename_layers.xml, where outputfilename is the name that you specified for the .nas file on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. Mechanica places the file in the same directory as the .nas file. o o NO (default) YES
SIM_REGEN_ON_ENTRY Determines whether Mechanica regenerates your model when you initiate a session. o o YES (default) NO
SIM_SMOOTH_ASPECT_RATIO Determines the element aspect ratio criterion that Mechanica will use when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization. You must specify a real 15
number for this option, and the default setting is 7.0. As a general rule, you should not change the default setting unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has degraded such that setting a new aspect ratio criterion would result in better shaped elements. SIM_SMOOTH_EDGE_ANGLE Determines the element edge angle criterion that Mechanica will apply to quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization. You must specify a real number in degrees for this option, and the default setting is 30 . As a general rule, you should not change the default setting unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has degraded such that setting a new edge angle criterion would result in better shaped elements. SIM_SMOOTH_SKEW Determines the element skew angle criterion that Mechanica will apply to quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization. You must specify a real number in degrees for this option, and the default setting is 45 . As a general rule, you should not change the default setting unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has degraded such that setting a new skew angle criterion would result in better shaped elements. SIM_SMOOTH_TAPER Determines the element taper criterion that Mechanica will apply to quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization. You must specify a real number for this option, and the default setting is 0.5. As a general rule, you should not change the default setting unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has degraded such that setting a new taper criterion would result in better shaped elements. SIM_SMOOTH_WARP_ANGLE Determines the element warp angle criterion that Mechanica will apply to quadrilateral elements when smoothing a FEM mesh during mesh optimization. You must specify a real number in degrees for this option, and the default setting is 10 . As a general rule, you should not change the default setting unless the first optimization pass shows that the overall element quality has degraded such that setting a new warp angle criterion would result in better shaped elements. SIMULATION_FEM_MODE Determines the initial state of the FEM Mode check box on the Model Type dialog box. The default is "prompt," indicating that the Model Type dialog appears when you enter Mechanica with a new or unsaved model and the check box is unchecked.
16
If you select "No," the software assumes you always want to work in native mode, and the check box is unchecked. If you select "Yes," the software assumes you always want to work in FEM mode, and the check box is checked. In either case, if the SIMULATION_PRODUCT config.pro option is set to a specific product, the software bypasses the Model Type dialog box altogether when you enter Mechanica with a new or unsaved model. o o o PROMPT (default) NO YES
STD_NASTRAN_TEMPLATE Sets the file path of a NASTRAN deck template. Use the full path to avoid problems.
Fatigue Options
Use these options to control fatigue analysis. You can also access some of these options on the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog box. For more information on each of these settings, see Fatigue Analysis. SIM_FATIGUE_BIAXIALITY_CORRECT Controls the use of biaxiality correction. The value types are as follows: o o YES (default) NO
SIM_FATIGUE_BIAXIALITY_METHOD Specifies the method Mechanica uses to model biaxiality: Klann-Tipton-Cordes, Hoffman-Seeger, or the most conservative (WORST) of the two methods. The value types are as follows: o o o WORST (default) KTC HS
SIM_FATIGUE_CONFIDENCE_LEVEL Specifies the percentage confidence in the predicted life result value. The value type is numeric and may range from 0.1 to 99.9. The default value is 90. SIM_FATIGUE_EXTERNAL_MATDATA Controls the use of external material data. The value types are as follows: o o NO (default) YES 17
SIM_FATIGUE_HYSTERESIS_GATE Specifies the gate Mechanica applies to cycle counting as a percentage of peak load. The value type is numeric and may range from 0 to 50. The default value is 1. SIM_FATIGUE_INFINITE_LIFE_VALUE Specifies a value for the lives beyond cutoff. The value type is numeric and may range from 1e15 to 1e30. The default value is 1e20. SIM_FATIGUE_MEAN_STRESS Controls the application of the mean stress correction. The value types are as follows: o o YES (default) NO
SIM_FATIGUE_MEAN_STRESS_METHOD Specifies the method Mechanica uses to model mean stress: the SmithWatson-Topper Approach, Morrow Correction, or the most conservative (WORST) of the two methods. The value types are as follows: o o o WORST (default) SWT MORROW
SIM_FATIGUE_SAFETY_MARGIN Specifies the factor Mechanica uses to determine the Life Confidence quantity. The value type is numeric and may range from 1.1 to 100. The default value is 3. SIM_FATIGUE_USER_DIRECTORY Specifies the directory for user files, for example, external materials files. The value is the path to the directory. The default value is the current directory. SIM_FATIGUE_WRITE_SURF_STRESS Controls the writing of surface stresses to a neutral file. The value types are as follows: o o NO (default) YES
18
Run Options
Use these options to control the engine run. You can also access many of these functions through the Analysis>Mechanica Analyses and Design Studies command and the associated dialog box. For more information on each of these settings, see Setting Up a Run. SIM_MAX_MEMORY_USAGE Specifies the maximum amount of memory that the Mechanica mesher and solver or the FEM mesher can use for the run. The value type is a numeric value that is measured in megabytes and should be greater than 0. The default value is 128. Be aware that, if you are a FEM user and enter a value of 0, the FEM mesher will assume that it can use all available memory. SIM_RUN_COPY_FEM_NEUTRAL_FILE Controls whether Mechanica copies the FEM neutral file (.fnf extension) into the study directory. The value types are as follows: o o YES (default) NO
SIM_RUN_OUT_DIR Specifies the directory for output storage. The value type is a complete path name. By default, Mechanica uses the current directory. SIM_RUN_TMP_DIR Specifies the directory for temporary file storage. The value type is a complete path name. By default, Mechanica uses the current directory.
o o
BLACK WHITE
SIM_PP_PATH_ABSOLUTE Controls whether Mechanica uses an absolute path for study directories when it writes an .rwd file for results. When you create an .rwd file, Mechanica includes the results windows currently defined in the results session. Further, it includes path information on that indicates where the study directories for the results windows are located. The path for the study directories can be either absolute or relative, depending on how you set this config.pro option. If you set this option to "yes," Mechanica uses absolute paths for study directories when it writes the .rwd file. When you set the option to "no," Mechanica writes relative paths in the .rwd file. If you use this configuration option, you should be sure you have a thorough understanding of your operating environment and sharing needs. Setting this option to "no" can be beneficial if you plan to share the entire file structure with another location or plan to move the file set in the future. The value types are as follows: o o YES (default) NO
SIM_PP_VRML_EXPORT_FORMAT Specifies the VRML export format that Mechanica uses when exporting VRML reports: o o VRML2.0 (default) VRML1.0
SIM_PP_VRML_FEATURE_EDGES Specifies that the VRML file will represent feature edges. By default, no feature edges are represented in the VRML file. The value types are as follows: o o NO (default) YES
Miscellaneous Options
These options are not a part of any other larger category. SIM_MAT_POISSONS_NOTATION Specifies the convention used for defining Poisson's ratio for anisotropic materials as being either Tsai (column-normalized) or Jones (row-normalized). This option affects only the labels for Poisson's ratio on the Material Definition dialog box. The value types are as follows:
20
IndexMechanica Products
o o
SIM_USE_LAYERS Specifies that Mechanica allows Pro/ENGINEER layers to transfer as groups into independent mode. When set to "no," Mechanica transfers components as groups, but does not transfer layers as groups. When set to "yes," Mechanica transfers each relevant layer to a group. Note that Mechanica transfers blanked or hidden layers as invisible. Also, if a Pro/ENGINEER coordinate system resides on a blanked layer that transfers to independent mode, the corresponding Mechanica UCS entity will be invisible. o o NO (default) YES
21
Mechanica Structure
Mechanica Structure allows design engineers to evaluate, understand, and optimize the static and dynamic structural performance of their designs in a real-world environment. Structure's unique adaptive solution technology provides fast, accurate solutions automaticallysolutions that help to improve product quality and decrease design costs. In addition to its native solver, Structure's FEM mode offers specialized analyses that automatically create fully associative FEA meshes for third-party finite element solvers. Structure enables you to: set up a real-world environment for your design by applying properties, loads, and constraints to model geometry control how Mechanica meshes your model to ensure the most efficient solution define the level of solution accuracy up front by specifying convergence settings before running a simulation, and watch as Mechanica automatically checks for errors, converges to an accurate solution, and generates convergence information for verification use the functionality of Mechanica's adaptive solver or use FEM mode to solve finite element models with NASTRAN or ANSYS select one or more sensitivity parameters to vary over a range and then review graphs of desired outputs as a function of that changing parameter optimize designs to best meet design goals such as minimizing the cost of the design or its total stress. For example, you can ask Structure to minimize the mass of an assembly while keeping stress, first modal frequency, and maximum displacement within limits. store and view displacement, stress, and strain over selected model entities as fringes, contours, and query plots view vector plots of displacements and principal stresses as well as results on standard beam sections, animations of displacements, mode shapes, and optimization shape history save and review results of displacement, velocity, acceleration, stress, and RMS quantities as fringes, contours, and query plots evaluate graphs of any measure at each step in linear and logarithmic format obtain summary values for all single-value evaluation methods (minimum, maximum, maximum absolute value, and RMS)
Mechanica Thermal
Mechanica Thermal provides design engineers with expert tools to simulate the behavior of parts and assemblies subject to thermal loading. Thermal relies on unique adaptive solution technology that provides fast, accurate solutions automatically, helping you improve product quality and decrease design costs. In addition to its native solver, Thermal's integrated mode offers specialized analyses that automatically create fully associative FEA meshes for third-party finite element solvers.
22
IndexMechanica Workflow
Thermal enables you to: set up a real-world environment by applying heat loads, prescribed temperatures, and convection conditions to model geometry specify convergence settings based on local temperature, energy norm, global error norm, or measures you define. Then, review graphs to visually inspect the convergence behavior. study your design's thermal behavior at a single point in time or as that behavior changes through a set of user-specified intervals use the functionality of Mechanica's adaptive solver or use FEM to solve finite element models with ANSYS select one or more sensitivity parameters to vary over a range and then graphically review results as a function of that changing parameter optimize designs to best meet such design goals as minimizing the temperature heat flux, temperature gradients, or any other aspect of the design. For example, you can ask Thermal to minimize the mass of an assembly while keeping stress, first modal frequency, and maximum model temperature within limits. store and view results as fringes, contours, and query plots of temperature, temperature gradient, and heat flux over selected model entities
Mechanica Workflow
When you use any of the Mechanica products to analyze and optimize your design, you typically complete the various activities required for simulation modeling and analysis in a particular order. The workflow you use depends on the product. These links take you to a discussion of the workflow for each product: Native mode FEM mode
The workflows described in these discussions represent the most common approach to each product. However, there are several alternatives, some more efficient than others. The workflow that you ultimately develop will depend on your design process, the goals you are trying to achieve, and the nature of your model.
23
Create your model geometry in Pro/ENGINEER. Simplify the model. Define a system of units. Add modeling prerequisites such as coordinate systems and regions, if desired. Add materials, loads, constraints, contact regions, and measures. Add idealizations such as springs, beams, shells, and so forth. Check the mesh.
Define the design parameters. Review and modify the shape or property changes.
Define sensitivity and optimization studies. Run the studies. Review the study results. If satisfied with the optimization results, update your model to reflect the optimized design.
Be aware that the order of the stepsparticularly during the model development phasemay be different depending on your preferences, modeling goals, and techniques.
24
IndexMechanica Workflow
Create model geometry in Pro/ENGINEER. Simplify your model. Define a system of units. Add modeling prerequisites such as coordinate systems and regions, if desired. Add materials, loads, and constraints. Add idealizations such as shells, springs, beams, gaps, and masses. Add connections such as welds, links, and interfaces. Define the analysis.
Define an Analysis
Select the analysis type. Select the constraints, loads, modes, and frequencies to be used in the analysis, as applicable.
Apply mesh controls. Create the mesh. Review the mesh and refine, if necessary.
Export the mesh to FEA solvers such as NASTRAN or ANSYS. Review the exported mesh. Optionally, run the analysis. If you ran an analysis, define and view the results windows and reports.
25
Be aware that the order of the stepsparticularly during the model development phasemay be different depending on your preferences, modeling goals, and techniques. Additionally, if you plan to export a deck rather than run a FEM analysis from within Mechanica, you can skip defining an analysis. You can also consider an alternative workflow if you are working with an assembly and create a hierarchical mesh.
Operating Modes
You can work with Mechanica in two operating modesintegrated mode or independent mode. The mode you use governs whether you work primarily within the Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica user interface, how you apply modeling entities, the modeling functions available to you, and the types of analyses you can perform. Integrated mode incorporates Mechanica functionality into Pro/ENGINEER. In integrated mode, you create, analyze, and optimize Mechanica models within Pro/ENGINEER. Because you never start the Mechanica user interface, integrated mode eliminates the need to manually switch back and forth between Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica. Thus, integrated mode represents the most streamlined approach to part or assembly modeling and optimization. Within integrated mode, you can work in either of two submodes depending on your modeling needs: o Native mode enables you to run integrated mode using Mechanica's adaptive P-code functionality. Native mode lets you create modeling entities like loads, constraints, idealizations, connections, properties, and measures. In this mode, Mechanica meshes your model with Pcode elements and uses its own adaptive solvers to find a solution. o FEM mode enables you to run integrated mode using Mechanica's finite element modeling functionality instead of its P-code functionality. This functionality enables you to create FEM modeling entities like loads, constraints, and idealizations. It also enables you to mesh your model with H-code elements, run various types of finite element analyses including NASTRAN, ANSYS, and so forth, and review the results of the run. You can activate FEM mode by selecting the FEM Mode toggle on the Model Type dialog box before you enter Structure or Thermal in integrated mode. Independent mode utilizes a separate, fully featured Mechanica user interface for all part modeling, analysis, and design studies. With independent mode, you can build your part or assembly in Pro/ENGINEER and transfer it to independent mode to perform simulation modeling and analysis. Alternatively, you can build your model geometry in Mechanica itself or import a model from a supported MCAD interface. Note: If you transfer a Pro/ENGINEER model to independent mode and then save it in the independent Mechanica user interface, you cannot return any model changes or analysis results to the Pro/ENGINEER environment.
26
IndexOperating Modes
Integrated Mode
Integrated mode incorporates Mechanica simulation functionality into Pro/ENGINEER. In integrated mode, you create, analyze, and optimize your simulation model in the same user environment that you use to create your Pro/ENGINEER geometry. Here are some unique features of integrated mode: You can choose whether to define your model for use in native mode or FEM mode. Native mode provides P-element solutions and FEM mode lets you solve your model using any of several third-party H-element solvers. Mechanica creates the mesh automatically as part of model analysis. For solid models, Mechanica uses solid elements such as tetrahedrons, wedges, or bricks while, for shell models, it applies both triangle and quadrilateral shell elements to achieve the best mesh. You can also have models that combine solid and shell elements to create a mixed mesh. As an option, you can manually add several specialized element types, or idealizations and connections, to your model. These include beams, various types of welds, springs, gaps, contacts, rigid connections, and masses. Although native mode does not normally display elements except as a background for study or analysis results, you can test and refine your mesh before you run an analysis. You indicate which aspects of your model can change during a sensitivity or optimization study by defining design parameters for dimensions and properties. For dimension changes, you create design parameters using Pro/ENGINEER relations. You can work in more than one model at a time. When you wish to work on another model, you simply open it, and a new work area window opens displaying the newly-chosen model. You do not need to save until you exit integrated Mechanica. For more information, see Considerations for Multiple Model Sessions.
To get a better idea of how integrated mode differs from independent mode, see Operating Mode Comparison.
27
Independent Mode
Independent mode relies on the independent Mechanica user interface for all simulation modeling, analysis and design study execution, and results viewing. In independent mode, you have the option of building your model geometry in Pro/ENGINEER, importing geometry from a third-party CAD package, or building the geometry exclusively within Mechanica. After you work with your model in independent mode, you break all association with Pro/ENGINEER and you can no longer automatically update the Pro/ENGINEER model from Mechanica. Here are some features of independent mode: You can create elements manually or automatically. For solid models, you can create solid elements such as tetrahedrons, wedges, or bricks. For shell models, you can apply triangular and quadrilateral shell or plate elements. As an option, you can manually add several specialized element types to your model. These element types include beams, spot welds, springs, and masses. Mechanica provides a variety of manual element generation methods including geometry selection, point seeding, extrusion, and revolution. If you want Mechanica to create elements automatically, you can use AutoGEM, a tool that generates elements on curves, surfaces, and volumes. You indicate which aspects of your model can change during a sensitivity or optimization study by defining design variables for dimensions and design parameters for properties. You cannot, however, use Pro/ENGINEER relations or parameters to control shape changes. You can create element-based measures to get information on stress intensity factors (cracking) in your model, resultant forces and moments, and net heat flux.
To get a better idea of how integrated mode differs from independent mode, see Operating Mode Comparison.
28
IndexOperating Modes
All analysis types P-code native solver and thirdparty H-code solvers 2D and 3D models Geometry created in Pro/ENGINEER only
2D and 3D models Geometry created in Pro/ENGINEER, Mechanica, or one of several CAD file formats Modeling entities created in a separate Mechanica user interface or transferred from integrated mode Geometry-based and elementbased measures Elements created manually or through AutoGEM
Geometry-based measures
Elements generated automatically with testing and refinement capabilities Design parameters only created in Pro/ENGINEER
Shape and property design variablescreated in Mechanica Classic results definition and viewing workflow
29
Each of these discussions assumes that you are already familiar with Pro/ENGINEER part and assembly building techniques. Therefore, the focus lies with explaining general methodology rather than with providing detailed instructions on how to create Pro/ENGINEER parts and assemblies.
30
Most of the above guidelines focus on part planning and building, but some are valid for assemblies as well. To learn more about issues you should consider if you are working with assemblies, see Assembly Considerations.
There are a number of methods you can use to simplify a part or assembly. You should determine the best approach by evaluating the nature of your model and your simulation goals.
See Also
Example: Using a Simplified Part
31
If the answer to both questions is no, consider suppressing the feature. Otherwise, you need to limit the design parameter range to eliminate the problem or, in some cases, rebuild the part using a different development scheme. Note: If your part includes a large number of datum points that have no use in Mechanica, consider suppressing these points before accessing Mechanica. An excessive number of datum points can affect performance.
32
be. As you build the part, ensure that the movement of these features is not artificially restrained by relationships, topology, and so forth. Here are some techniques you can consider: Plan your shape changes and develop your part to allow these changes. Build larger, more basic features first. Identify relationships that prevent desired movement or cause undesired movement. Change dimension names for easy identification. Avoid topology conflicts introduced by design parameter ranges and part building techniques that create interference between features or introduce extreme topological changes.
See Also
Example: Pre-planning for Shape Changes
33
See Also
Example: Featuring Your Part
34
patterning and mirroring Patterning and dependent mirroring link the movements of multiple geometric entities. If you use these techniques, you will not be able to move geometric entities individually. Further, you may introduce unexpected topology changes or Mechanica may eliminate a geometric entity altogether. Before using these techniques, consider how you may want the shape of your part to change during sensitivity or optimization studies.
Because it is fairly easy to set up unintentional relationships while building a part, you should perform the following checks: Use the Info>Parent/Child command to review parent-child relationships and reassign dimensions when necessary. Before you enter Mechanica, select the Edit>References>Reroute Feat>Ref Info command to display the reference information window. Review the data in this file to determine each of the dimension references. When necessary, redefine the dimensioning scheme or redesign the feature. Test your design by animating or reviewing the shape changes using the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Animate and Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Review commands. If you see any problems or Pro/ENGINEER fails to regenerate the part, redesign the part in a way that prevents conflicts.
See Also
Example: Dependent Movement in Patterned Features
Here are some tips for working with dimension names: You can check your part's current dimension names with the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Switch Dim command in Mechanica or the Info>Switch Dimensions command on the Relations dialog box in Pro/ENGINEER. You access the Relations dialog box through the Tools>Relations command. You can change dimension names when you define design parameters in Mechanica. If you want to change the names before accessing Mechanica, activate the dimension display in standard mode, select dimension, and use the Edit>Properties command. Once you click this command, you can use the Dimension Text tab on the Dimension Properties dialog box to change the name.
See Also
Reference: About Design Controls
36
To test for topology interference, animate or review your shape changes using the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Animate and Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Review commands in Mechanica prior to starting your design study. Start with smaller shape changes to make sure the shape changes are realistic before specifying the full range of movement. In addition to interference and topology problems caused by complex blends and sweeps, be aware that topology changes can introduce the following situations: Mechanica may experience conflicts between existing loads. In this case, the software may modify one of the loads as a result of the conflict. If the topology change is large and sudden, as with the dynamic suppression or addition of a feature through Pro/PROGRAM, the change may affect the quality of the optimization. The sudden introduction or removal of a feature can increase stresses in such a way that the optimizer stops prematurely, assuming that it has found a lower-stress design immediately prior to the topology change.
See Also
Reference: Example: Prepare Your Model for Design Parameters Avoiding Interference
Assembly Considerations
Working with an assembly is similar to working with a part. However, you should bear the following in mind as you work: When you model an assembly, you are working with a nonmoving entity. Regardless of the appearance or behavior of the assembly in real-world conditions, Structure and Thermal treat all assemblies as nonmoving. Mechanica requires that all the parts in the assembly use the same system of units. You are responsible for ensuring that all dimensioning systems in your assembly are consistent. If you use a different system of units for some of the parts, Mechanica displays a message indicating that the software automatically converts the part's units so that the units of measure are the same. Up to the point when you run an analysis or study, Mechanica treats your assembly as a collection of individual parts. Thus, during the model development phase, you add modeling entities to parts, rather than to the assembly as a whole. After you start a run, Mechanica merges the individual parts into a single, multivolume body, where individual parts are either connected or unconnected.
37
If you want Mechanica to treat your assembly as a set of shells, you must first define shells or shell pairs for each part in the assembly. You define shells and shell pairs on a part-by-part basis by accessing Mechanica after opening the individual parts. After you have defined shells and shell pairs for each of your parts, you can access Mechanica from assembly mode and work with the assembly as a whole. For more information on shells and shell pairs, see About Shells. If you use midsurface compression for any parts in your assembly that are made up of shells or shells and solids, gaps can form in your model where the curves (edges) or surfaces (faces) are mated or have assembly constraints applied to them. Mechanica creates connections between these gaps so the parts deform together as if they are one entity. Although Mechanica uses shell, surface region, beam, mass, and spring definitions from the individual parts that make up an assembly, it ignores any modeling entities and idealizations you added to the parts while working in part mode. Consequently, you need to assign new modeling entities and idealizations when you work with the assembly. Mechanica disregards all design parameters assigned to individual parts. For assemblies, be aware that you cannot place loads or constraints on geometry that Mechanica merges during a run. If a portion of a merged surface is freefor example, two volumes that have mated surfaces, but one surface is larger than the otheryou can create a surface region on the free area and then apply the load or constraint to that surface region. When using family table instances in assemblies, note that any modeling entities you create are stored with the assembly rather than with the part.
You may need to take special steps to prepare your model for 2D analysis, such as adding a Cartesian coordinate system, or to prepare a symmetric model, such as defining cuts along the axes of symmetry. As a step in your part planning process, decide which types of modeling entities you want to add to your model. After you have your plan in mind, determine the requirements for each of the entities you will define. Here are some of the techniques and prerequisites you may want to consider:
38
determining your model's system of units adding coordinate systems adding datum features defining surface and volume regions defining Pro/ENGINEER parameters using symmetry preparing a 2D model
Units Settings
Before designing your model, you need to select a system of units in which Pro/ENGINEER stores all data in the database. You can use the Pro/ENGINEER Units Manager menu to select a system of units for your Mechanica model. If you do not define a system of units, Pro/ENGINEER uses a default system of unitsinch pound-mass second (inch lbm second). You can select from a predefined system of units, create a custom system of units, or set a default system of units for your model. You can learn more about units by reviewing these references: Predefined systems of units or custom systems of units See Systems of Units Management. Setting a default system of units See the discussion of pro_unit_sys in Configuration File Options. Unit conversion tables and other units tables See Unit Conversion Tables. The Pro/ENGINEER default, inch pound-mass second (inch lbm second), is not a standard system of units, and thus is not described in the tables.
See Also
Procedures: To Set a Principal System of Units To Create a Custom System of Units Reference: About Units
39
When you start your Mechanica session, the software adds a default coordinate system to your model. This coordinate system is known as the World Coordinate System (WCS). The WCS is a Cartesian coordinate system with an origin at 0 0 0. At the time that it comes up, Mechanica defines the WCS as the current coordinate system and assumes the WCS is the coordinate system it should use when creating modeling entities. If you want to apply your modeling entities relative to a different coordinate system, you can set that coordinate system as current using the Edit>Current Coordinate System command. Making a coordinate system current means that Mechanica will base the creation of certain modeling entities on that coordinate system. You can also create new coordinate systems in Mechanica using the Insert>Model Datum>Coordinate System command. You can define coordinate systems you create in Mechanica as Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical, enabling a more flexible and accurate realization of mechanical behavior. For example, cylindrical coordinate systems can be handy when defining cyclic symmetry constraints. Note: If you select a 2D model type, you must choose a Cartesian coordinate system that you want Mechanica to use as the reference coordinate system.
See Also
Example: Modeling Specialized Loads with a Cylindrical Coordinate System
consider creating the datum features within Mechanica instead, as they will not be visible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER. Mechanica If you create the datum features within Mechanica, these are known as simulation features. You can create simulation features at any time during your Mechanica sessionbefore you add modeling entities or as you define those modeling entities. Simulation features are only available to you during your Mechanica sessions unless you promote them. The software turns off these features each time you return to Pro/ENGINEER.
As such, a regions location can change if you apply design parameters that change the shape of the original surface or volume. A surface region is a contour that subdivides a part surface or volume to allow partial loading, constraining, or shell pairing of that surface. In situations where you want to constrain or load a specific portion of a part surface, you can create a region on the surface and apply the load or constraint to that region only. A volume region is, essentially, a cut or protrusion that subdivides a volume into two distinct subvolumes. There are a variety of methods that you can use to define the contour of a volume region, including extruding the volume region, revolving the region, and developing the regions from a blend, sweep, or quilt surface. You can also use advanced volume region creation techniques such as helical sweeps, variable section sweeps, and sweeps based on blended sections retrieved from a file. You use volume regions primarily if you want to refine your mesh in either native mode or FEM mode. Additionally, in FEM mode, you can apply different material 41
properties to the parent volume and the solid chunk created by the volume region. In this case, you place the differing material property on the surface that defines the volume region, and the material propagates through the solid chunk. You can also place loads, constraints, and other modeling entities on the surfaces that define the volume region, be they internal or external surfaces. Creating surface or volume regions can also prove handy if you want to define a small contact region for contact analysis instead of using an entire part as the contact region.
Pro/ENGINEER Parameters
You can use Pro/ENGINEER parameters as Mechanica material properties, certain load and constraint values, design parameters, or measures. This functionality enables you to do the following: Define material properties in such a way that Mechanica can vary individual characteristics of the materialfor instance, Young's modulus or mass densityduring a design study Vary Pro/ENGINEER dimensional parameters as part of a design study Use Pro/ENGINEER parameters as the limits or goals of an optimization study
You can also use Pro/ENGINEER parameters to define the thickness of simple shells or the stiffness properties of simple springs. Before addressing the specific issues that you need to consider when creating Pro/ENGINEER parameters for use in Mechanica, let us take a moment to review some basic concepts. In Pro/ENGINEER, you can control many aspects of part design through the use of parameters. Parameters enable you to set particular values for a dimension, drive the value of one dimension based on the behavior of another dimension, dynamically suppress features based on changes in the part, and so forth. You can define Pro/ENGINEER parameters in the following two ways: Through the Tools>Relations command in Pro/ENGINEER In this case, the value of the resulting parameter depends on other values, and can change as those values change. For example, if you define parameter1 as equal to d0 using the Relations command, Pro/ENGINEER ties the value of parameter1 to d0 as a symbolic variable and does not record d0's current value. Thus, if you later change the value of d0, parameter1 changes along with d0. Parameters created through the Relations command are sometimes known as drivenor dependentparameters because they are controlled by the equation you define. Through the Tools>Parameters command in Pro/ENGINEER In this case, the resulting parameter is a symbolic constantin other words, a single,
42
unchanging value. For example, if you define parameter1 as equal to d0 using the Parameters command, Pro/ENGINEER determines the current value of d0 and records parameter1 as equaling that value. Even if you later change the value of d0, the value of parameter1 does not change. Parameters created through the Parameters command are sometimes known as drivingor independentparameters because they are capable of controlling activity. If a conflict occurs, bear in mind that parameters created through the Tools>Relations command override parameters created through the Parameters command.
There are two types of symmetry you can model in Mechanicamirror symmetry and cyclic symmetry. Mirror symmetry relies on the principle that one segment of a model is the mirror image of other segments. An example of this type of model would be a rectangular plate with a hole at its center. In native mode you can use the mirror symmetry constraint to take advantage of your model's symmetry. To use mirror symmetry in FEM mode you must apply a displacement constraint to fix translation normal to the plane of symmetry and fix rotations in opposition to the plane of symmetry. Cyclic symmetry relies on the principle that a segment of the geometry is repeated in a cyclic manner throughout the model, but the segment is not a mirror image, either 43
in its geometry or its load scheme. An example of this type of geometry would be a fan blade or turbine. You can only use cyclic symmetry in native mode. FEM mode does not support this type of modeling. The methods you use to develop these two types of symmetry differ, as does the application of constraints and certain loads. Both types of symmetry can prove efficient for a 3D solid or shell model. The choice of which symmetry type you use depends on the model and the problem you wish to solve. Note that, in some situations, you can use 2D axisymmetric modeling in place of symmetry. While not strictly a form of symmetry, 2D axisymmetric modeling provides an extremely efficient alternative to treating your model as a symmetric solid. This form of modeling relies on the principle that a 2D slice of your solid model, if rotated around an axis, can accurately depict the whole of your model's geometry, loads, and constraints. For an example of this type of model, see Setting up a Solid Model for a 2D Analysis on an Internal Surface.
See Also
Examples: Using Cyclic Symmetry Using Mirror Symmetry
44
You can choose to cut the original model at the division lines, or simply apply mirror symmetry constraints along those lines. Note that, if you use the division plan proposed above, you will end up working with one quarter of your model. You could also choose to cut the original model in half instead, but your resulting model would have more elements and be less efficient for the Mechanica solver. Thus, you should always strive to find the smallest symmetric section. The remainder of this discussion assumes that you are working with a cut model. To apply mirror symmetry constraints you must select enough geometric entities to define a plane. If you cut the model as in the figure below, you can create mirror symmetry constraints by selecting the surfaces created by the cuts. If you choose not to cut the model, you would need to define enough datum points or axes to define the plane.
Here, you add a mirror constraint in the X direction along the vertical cut, where the surface would normally merge with the rest of the part geometry. Similarly, you add a mirror constraint in the Y direction along the horizontal cut. In this way, you mimic the way that the geometry would behave were it part of the full model. Note that 45
mirror symmetry constraints are not available in FEM mode. However, you can add constraints simply by defining a displacement constraint and selecting the surfaces at the horizontal and vertical cuts as the constraint references. In addition to adding the mirror symmetry constraints at the cuts, you also need to adjust the load on the symmetric section by dividing the additive load seen by the model by the number of segments that result from the cut process. This situation occurs whenever you apply your load using a total load distribution. In this case, the model sees an additive total force load of 200 pounds100 pounds on one end of the model, and 100 on the other. To develop the symmetric segment, you cut the model into 4 parts. Dividing 200 by 4 yields a 50 pound load on the symmetric segment. Tip: If you had modeled this problem using a pressure load or force per unit area load distribution, you would not need to divide the load. For both of these load types, Mechanica performs any load division automatically.
46
Looking at the model as a whole, you would first plan the cut lines using a cylindrical coordinate system as a reference. The best choice is as follows:
The segment defined by the cuts repeats four times to form the circumference of the fan. After you cut the model, you need to add a cyclic symmetry constraint to the model so that the solver will correctly interpret the geometry as a cyclic symmetry segment:
Here, you add a cyclic symmetry constraint to both of the cut surfaces. Note that you do not need to change the value of the load to reflect the fact that the load acts on a smaller segment. This is primarily a function of the load type. For example, this model uses a centrifugal loada body load that, in this case, behaves cyclically. Therefore, the load requires no adjustment. However, if you were working with a total load against the outer surface of the hole, you would need to adjust the load just as you would for standard symmetry.
47
Note that this model does not qualify for mirror symmetry because the fan blades are set at an angle, which would preclude mirroring. Additionally, the centrifugal load would not mirror correctly as, in the mirror image, the direction of the load would oppose the actual direction of the load.
Preparing a 2D Model
There are several good reasons for treating your model as a 2D model rather than a 3D model. One of the most compelling is the simplicity of 2D models from a meshing and solution perspective. Mechanica can solve your model in a fraction of the time it would take to mesh and solve a 3D model. However, 2D modeling is a specialized form of simulation modeling and is appropriate only if your model displays certain geometric, constraint, and load characteristics. If you plan to perform 2D analysis on your model, you must first define your model as a 2D model type using the Model Type dialog box. The software displays this dialog box when you enter Mechanica, or you can activate the dialog box from within Mechanica by selecting Edit>Mechanica Model Type if you want to convert a 3D model to a 2D model during your simulation session. When you define your model as a 2D model, you use the Model Type dialog box to select the geometry on which you want to perform the 2D analysis and a reference coordinate system. As you prepare your 2D model, be aware that the geometry you select for analysis must be coplanar, and the reference coordinate system must be Cartesian. You may need to create a Cartesian reference coordinate system for your model so that the geometry you select for 2D analysis lies in the XY plane. For 2D axisymmetric models, all coordinates must be positive in X. To read more about specifying a reference coordinate system for your model, see About Coordinate Systems. Mechanica cannot perform 2D analysis on midsurface models, sketches, or sections. If you have a sketch on which you want to perform 2D analysis, you can extrude the sketch into a solid in order to carry out a 2D analysis.
See Also
Example: Setting up a Solid Model for a 2D Analysis on an Internal Surface
48
Before you start Mechanica, take a moment to consider the effects of optimization shape changes in a wider context. Look at the various ways you use your part and make sure that the optimization does not inadvertently change related parts. Click on these topics to learn how optimization affects various aspects of your part: Optimization Optimization Optimization Optimization and and and and Suppressed Features Assemblies Generic Parts Reference Parts
49
50
User Interface Basics for Integrated Mode Working With the User Interface
To use Mechanica effectively, you need to understand the basics of the user interface and some of the tools available to you through that user interface. A solid knowledge of how to operate the user interface effectively will help you perform tasks such as defining modeling entities and analyses, or reviewing study results. Browse this area of the online Help to learn about the following common activities you perform in Mechanica as well as several tools that can help you make your Mechanica sessions more efficient: using dialog boxes and message boxes using the Mechanica toolbar selecting geometry and modeling entities using layers using suppression and family tables to manage modeling entities setting simulation visibilities interpreting color references getting information on your simulation model removing all simulation entities from your model transferring your model to independent mode printing your model working with Mechanica configuration options setting environment variables
51
To apply settings using a dialog box, enter or select values using the items on the dialog box. When you select a button on a dialog box, additional buttons or entry boxes related to your selection may appear on the dialog box. The following list describes most dialog box items and how to use them:
button check box display-only text entry box list box option menu tab Enables you to perform an action. Enables you to select an item. From a group of check boxes, you can select one or many. Displays a name or value that you cannot edit. Provides a place for you to enter a value, name, or comment. Displays a list of items with a scroll bar. You usually select an item on the list. Enables you to select one of several options. The dialog box displays the name of the currently selected option. Enables you to select an activity to perform on a dialog box. When you click a tab, the dialog box brings that tab to the forefront for you to fill out. Lists a variety of attributes associated with an entity. You use dialog box tables to select entities that you want Mechanica to act on or that you want to define. You can insert new rows into dialog box tables and delete existing rows. In some cases, you can edit the contents of a table by right-clicking on an item.
table
52
Mechanica displays message boxes to provide you with important information you need before continuing with a command. Some Mechanica commands use message boxes to display a question or a message. If this is the case, the message box includes buttons that you can use to respond to the question. You select the buttons on these message boxes with the left mouse button. You can also select the default response, the button with the double border, by pressing RETURN. Like dialog boxes, a message box is a separate window that you can move or close.
Mechanica Toolbar
You can access many of the Mechanica functions by using toolbar buttons. When you start Mechanica, a toolbar appears to the right of the graphics window. The toolbar is customizable. Use Tools>Customize Screen to control the position of the toolbar, and to control which icons Mechanica displays. For more information on customizing the user interface, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. Note: The default selection of buttons changes depending on the Mechanica module you are in. Click the links in the following table to get information on the functions of each toolbar button.
Button Description New Displacement Constraint New Along Surface Constraint New Symmetry Constraint New Bearing Load New Centrifugal Load New Gravity Load New Global Temperature Load New Heat Load on Point New Heat Load on Edge New Heat Load on Surface New Heat Load on Volume New Force or Moment Load New Pressure Load New Structural Temperature Load on Point Module* S, SF SF S S S, SF S, SF S, SF T, TF T, TF T, TF TF S, SF S, SF SF
53
New Structural Temperature Load on Curve New Structural Temperature Load on Surface New Structural Temperature Load on Volume New Beam New Interface New Weld New Fastener New Measure New Gap New Mass New Shell Pair New Spring New Rigid Link New Weighted Link New Material Assignment New Cyclic Constraint New Point Convection Condition New Edge Convection Condition New Surface Convection Condition New Prescribed Temperature New Radiation Condition
*
Selection Methods
There are several ways to select entities on your model as you are performing various Mechanica operations. These include: Direct Selection Use Pro/ENGINEER selection methods to select objects directly on your model. The direct selection can be handy when you want to select geometric references for simulation entities (springs, beams, loads, constraints, and so forth) before opening an entity definition dialog box. In this case, if your geometric selections are valid, they appear in the References area when you open the corresponding entity definition dialog box. If they are not valid, along with the entity definition dialog box appears the SIM SELECT menu that you can use to make new selections.
54
Model Tree Use the Model Tree to select model entities from its list of entities and features. You can select entities from the Model Tree just as you would select them directly on your model. You can also work from the Model Tree, highlighting an item, and then right-clicking to display information about the selected entity. Object Action Select any entity on your model, or on the Model Tree, and right-click to perform operations on the shortcut menu that appears. Search Tool Use the Search Tool dialog box to find modeling entities by using criteria such as name, type, and property.
Using Layers
You can group different kinds of modeling entities and control their visibility in part or assembly mode by creating and maintaining layers. For example, by placing items on a layer, you can show or blank the items by showing or blanking the layer. You create and maintain layers through the Layers dialog box. When you select on the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar, the Layers dialog box appears. You can also access the Layers dialog box by selecting Show>Layer Tree on the Model Tree. Use this dialog box to: create, edit, and delete layers add appropriate simulation features to a layer show, hide, or isolate features by layers
In Mechanica, you can place the following objects on layers: loads constraints simple or advanced shells shell pairs gaps (FEM mode) rigid links (FEM mode) weighted links (FEM mode) material assignments (FEM mode) interfaces end and perimeter welds
You place idealizations on layers primarily so that you can hide and show the element renderings for a layer when working with or viewing the mesh. Note that elements associated with simulation objects are only visible if the parent objects are
55
visible. Thus, to hide and show elements, you place the associated idealizations on layers. In addition, you can use layers to hide and show particular idealizations or sets of idealizations as you develop your model. You also place idealizations on layers if you want to transfer them to independent mode as groups. If you transfer a model to independent mode, the layers you define become groups if the config.pro option sim_use_layers is set to "Yes" and if the assembly or part contains layers with geometry. Layers containing datum axes and planes do not transfer to independent mode groups. The transfer also converts all components into groups. In results, you can use layers to selectively display parts of your model in the results window display. You can display or hide beam and shell definitions that you placed on layers before running an analysis, and you can display or hide different components of an assembly. Here are some of the highlights of layer creation that you should consider as you develop layers for simulation features: You can create as many layers as you want in a model. You can associate items with more than one layer or create nested layers. For example, you can associate a mass with several layers. You can use simulation default layer types to organize families of simulation features in your model. For example, if you assign a newly-created layer as the SIM_BEAM default layer, Mechanica places all beams that you subsequently create on that layer.
For more detailed information on layers, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Managing your model through these techniques can help you simplify and organize its modeling entities. It can also help you meet a variety of different simulation needs without having to create and maintain separate versions of the same model. 56
For example, assume you have a model that you want to evaluate using both static analysis and dynamic analysis. However, you want to apply a different set of AutoGEM controls for the static analysis than you do for the dynamic analysis. In this case, you would create all the mesh controls in the same model. But, prior to running the static analysis, you would use the Suppress command to turn off the dynamic analysis AutoGEM controls. With these entities suppressed, Mechanica only uses the static analysis mesh controls and ignores the suppressed dynamic analysis AutoGEM controls when it creates the mesh at the beginning of the static analysis. Thus, the Suppress command has given you the option of using either of the two AutoGEM control sets without having to maintain separate models. You can achieve a similar effect using family tables within the simulation environment. In this case, you would create two family table instances in your modelinstance1 containing the static AutoGEM controls, and instance 2 containing the dynamic analysis controls. You would work in instance 1 when running the static analysis and instance 2 when running the dynamic analysis. You can suppress the following modeling entities using either the Suppress command or the family table instances: Loads Constraints Connections Idealizations Mesh controls
The way you use the Suppress command and create family table instances in Mechanica is similar to how you work with this functionality in Pro/ENGINEER. However the progression, implications, and cases for use are different. To learn about the specifics of using suppression and family tables in Mechanica, see Suppression and Family Tables. To learn the basics of entity suppression and family tables, search the Fundamentals module of the PTC Help system.
57
At the bottom of this dialog box is the Show Simulation Entities check box. You can use this to display or hide all simulation entity icons. This check box appears on all tabs. The changes you make in the Simulation Display dialog box affect the current session only. You can change the icon visibilities to affect all Mechanica sessions by making changes in the config.pro file.
Settings Tab
Use this tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control the appearance of the icons on your model. When you create certain entities, the software places an icon on the associated geometry. Icons enable you to keep track of entities you apply, let you select these entities for editing or deletion, and give you an idea of where you placed these items. Displaying or hiding the icons on your model allows you to simplify the model's appearance making it easier to view specific areas when necessary.
58
Icons on
Display load and constraint icons or turn them off. Display or hide distributed load vectors over geometry. Display in individual colors or all yellow. Scale load icons with the given coefficient. Display or hide tags containing load value. Scale or do not scale load arrows. Display load arrows with heads or tails touching geometry.
Icons on
Distribution
Distribution icons on
Individual Colors
Individual colors
Icon Scale
Default size
Value
Values displayed
Arrows Scaled
Arrows scaled
Heads touching
Mesh Control Display Display Mesh Controls Display or hide mesh control icons. Mesh control icons displayed
See Also
Procedure: To Control Icon Appearance
59
By default, Mechanica sets all accessible icons to be visible. To hide them, you can either use the Clear All button or turn off the icons of specific idealizations or connections. Idealizations, Properties, and Measures Beams Beam Sections Beam Releases Springs Gaps Masses Shells Material Assignments Measures
Connections Rigid Links Rigid Link DOFs Weighted Links Weighted Link DOFs Interfaces Fasteners End/Perimeter Welds Spot Welds Rigid Connections Contact Regions Gaps
To obtain more information about icons, see Icons Used in Mechanica. Another method you can use to manage visibilities is layers. You can place varying combinations of modeling entities as well as loads and constraints on a layer. Then, you can blank the layer to remove the entities on it from view, or show the layer to restore the layer entities to view. For more information on layers, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
See Also
Procedure: To Set Icon Visibilities for Modeling Entities
Loads/Constraints Tab
Use this tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control visibilities of load and constraint icons. Two sections of the tab list icons available in Structure and Thermal. Although the two products do not share the icons, each having its own set, all icons on the tab are accessible from both products. By default, all Structure icons are set to be visible and all Thermal icons are invisible if you are working in Structure. In Thermal, all Thermal icons are set to be on and all Structure icons are off. If you want to change these settings, use the Clear All or 60
Select All buttons, or make individual selections in the Structure or Thermal section of the tab. Structure Constraints Cyclic Symmetry Forces/Moments Pressures Bearing Loads Gravity Load Centrifugal Load Global Temperature Structural Temperature External Temperature MEC/T Temperature
Thermal Prescribed Temperatures Cyclic Symmetry Convection Conditions Radiation Heat Loads Volume Heat
To obtain more information about icons, see Icons Used in Mechanica. Another method you can use to manage visibilities is layers. You can place varying combinations of loads and constraints along with the modeling entities on a layer. Then, you can blank the layer to remove from view the entities on it, or show the layer to restore the layer entities to view. For more information on layers, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
See Also
Procedure: To Set Icon Visibilities for Loads and Constraints
Mesh Tab
Use this tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control the appearance of meshes generated in native mode and FEM mode. Depending on which mode you are working in, the content of the tab changes. Native Mode After you generate a mesh using the AutoGEM command, Mechanica displays all mesh elements by default. You can hide them by clicking the Clear All button on the tab or by turning off individual entities from the following list:
61
Beams Links
You can control the size of mesh entities and the quality of mesh display using the Mesh Display area on the Mesh tab of the Simulation Display dialog box. FEM Mode The FEM version of the tab provides the following options for you to control the FEM mesh display: Mesh and Model Mesh Display Mode
See Also
Reference: About FEM Meshes
Color References
Mechanica uses color to identify modeling entities, distinguish icons and geometry, indicate the selection state of icons, show meshes, and so forth. In addition, when it displays fringe plots, vector plots, and graphs, Mechanica uses color to show stresses, strains, and other types of results. Pro/ENGINEER uses several basic color schemes, among which are the default color scheme, the black on white color scheme, and so forth. You can work in any of these color schemes, or customize the user interface by establishing a color scheme of your own. Mechanica online help refers to entity and icon color when the color has significance from a modeling perspectivesuch as the different colors of the top and bottom surfaces in a shell pairor when the color will help you identify an entity on your screen. Be aware that all references to color in the online help system are based on the default color scheme. If you use a different color scheme, you will need to understand how the colors in your scheme correspond to the colors in the default scheme in order to correctly interpret the online help. For information on the Pro/ENGINEER color schemes and how to set them, search the Fundamentals functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To learn how to customize the colors Mechanica uses for result windows, see Adjusting Color Scale for Fringe, Contour, and Vector Legends and Managing Graphs.
62
Some of the commands on the Info menu are present for all modelsfor example, Simulation Model. Others, such as Review Total Load and Tolerance Report, are only present for certain types of models or for models that include the appropriate modeling entities.
63
See Also
Reference: Transferring Entities From Integrated Mode to Independent Mode
See Also
Reference: Generating Reports
There are two methods you can use to create or update a configuration file:
64
You can manually enter the various configuration options into a text file using a standard text editor like Notepad, WordPad, or vi. You perform this process outside of Pro/ENGINEER. You can select the Tools>Options command from within Pro/ENGINEER. When you select this command, Pro/ENGINEER displays the Options dialog box. You use this form to set a configuration option, update an existing configuration file, create a new configuration file, or activate a different configuration file.
There are also two different types of configuration filespermanent files and sessionbased files. Permanent configuration files are usually named config.pro and sessionbased configuration files are called current_session.pro. You should understand the difference between these files before deciding which type will best suit your situation. For more information on configuration files and how to create them, see the appropriate area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. To review a list of the configuration options pertinent to Mechanica and read about issues that you may want to consider when developing a configuration file, see Configuration File Options.
As an example, consider setting the environment variable for MECH_ARCH. The variable setting changes depending upon the platform and shell type. 65
For a C shell, the following syntax defines the environment variable for a Sun system when entered from the command prompt:
set MECH_ARCH=i486_nt
Online Help
Mechanica provides several types of online documents to meet various needs that might arise in your use of the software. For the most part, you will use the topics found in the online help. Those topics answer questions and provide instructions related to specific menus, commands, procedures, and processes that tie directly to tasks you are performing in the software. In addition to the online help, Mechanica also provides supplemental online documents that you can use to gain a more in-depth understanding of various aspects of the software. For an overview of basic simulation tasks and workflow, Mechanica provides Simulation Advisor. Mechanica documents are written for mechanical engineers and assume a working knowledge of mechanical engineering theory, terminology, and practice. However, you do not need specialized knowledge of design analysis to use either Mechanica software or this documentation. Viewing methods for Mechanica help vary as follows: For online help, use the same methods you would use for Pro/ENGINEER. For more information on viewing help for Pro/ENGINEER, see the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. For Simulation Advisor, see Using Simulation Advisor. Simulation Advisor primarily covers the Structure product.
There are several tools that help you navigate through the help system easily. You can use the contents, index, and search functions to help you find specific information, and the hyperlinks inside each help topic to jump to related information. Most online help topics have a "Return to" link at the bottom that links to the topic's parent page or to a previous page. You can also use the browser's Back button to return to a previous topic.
66
IndexOnline Help
during Mechanica sessions, and some guidelines for using Mechanica with Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill. o Files Created by Mechanica Describes files that Mechanica creates. o FEM Neutral Format File Provides details on the FEM neutral format files used to transfer FEM model information to FEA solvers and Mechanica. Mechanica Background o Understanding Fatigue Analysis Provides background information on fatigue and describes the methodology used in Mechanica fatigue analysis. o Shell Property Equations Describes how the mechanical properties of shells are represented mathematically in Mechanica. o Verification Guide Presents a series of problems based on finite element models for which analytic solutions are known, and compares Mechanica results to the textbook results.
Simulation Advisor
Simulation Advisor presents an overview of basic Mechanica processes, mostly for Structure. It starts with a general workflow and goes through each of the major areas you need to be familiar with as you create your model. You access Simulation Advisor through the Simulation Area top page of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. The majority of the Simulation Advisor provides information on the following: What Mechanica Does Provides a general workflow for Mechanica. Using Single Parts and Assemblies Explains how to deal with interfaces between parts in an assembly and make sure you have a consistent system of units. Defining Suitable Geometry Helps you define the geometry in your model in the best way. Setting Up the Simulation Model Provides information on assigning material properties, applying loads and other boundary conditions, and controlling solution quality. Simulations You Can Perform Explains the different types of analysis that you can perform. Running the Solution and Viewing the Results Gives helpful information on optimizing your computer resources and ensuring the quality of the results you generate. Improving the Design Provides design optimization techniques.
How and when you use Simulation Advisor depends on your individual needs. Simulation Advisor lends itself to a variety of uses. As time allows, take a quick tour through the different areas to familiarize yourself with the overall content. If you need information on such topics as fatigue analysis or family tables or allocating computer resources, just to name a few, Simulation Advisor can provide you with this type of information. 68
69
70
IndexModel Type
box will be turned on by default whenever the Model Type dialog box displays for a new model. If you also set the product type using the simulation_product config.pro option, the software will default to your chosen product and will bypass the Model Type dialog box altogether when you enter Mechanica. You will then automatically work in FEM mode for the chosen product.
If you select one of the 2D model types, Mechanica activates the Geometry and Coordinate System areas of the dialog box. You use these areas as follows: Geometry area Select the 2D geometry that you want to use for your 2D model. Coordinate System area Select a reference Cartesian coordinate system so that Mechanica can correctly interpret your model and verify that the loads and constraints lie in the model plane.
Be aware that if your model meets the criteria for a 2D model type, you can save significant calculation time when you run a design study. Additionally, if you perform a function that removes the highlighting of your 2D model, you can use the Repaint option to restore the highlighting. Regardless of which model type you select, Mechanica creates a mesh made up of elements specific to the model type. The type of elements that Mechanica creates for the model type depends on whether you are working in Structure or Thermal. After you select a model type, Mechanica adjusts commands and dialog boxes to reflect the idealizations and degrees of freedom available for the model type you selected. If you change the model type later, Mechanica will delete a variety of modeling entities such as loads, constraints, thermal boundary conditions, 71
idealizations, and meshes. It will, however, keep predefined measures and design parameters.
See Also
Procedures: To Specify a Product, Mode, and Model Type To Define 2D Model Types
You can define loads, constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in six degrees of freedom for a 3D model: translation in X, Y, and Z rotation in X, Y, and Z
See Also
Procedure: References: To Specify a Product, Mode and Model Type About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
72
IndexModel Type
For 2D plane stress models, Mechanica meshes your model using 2D plate elements. To successfully run an analysis, you must first assign a simple or advanced shell idealization to any surfaces you plan to include in your plane stress model. In addition to the shell idealizations that you must assign, you can create the mass and spring idealizations for a 2D plane stress model. As mentioned, you must use a Cartesian coordinate system as the model type reference coordinate system. However, you can base other modeling entities on Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. You can define loads, constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in two degrees of freedom for a plane stress modeltranslation in X and Y (or the cylindrical and spherical equivalents).
See Also
Procedures: To Specify a Product, Mode and Model Type To Define 2D Model Types References: About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
73
If your model meets these criteria, you can model a cross-section of your structure as a 2D plane strain model using shells or solids, or a combination of both. Depending on your choice, Mechanica takes one of the following actions: Pure solid models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D solid elements. For solid modeling, you need to assign material properties to the cross-section surface. You should not assign shell idealizations to any of the curves in your model. Pure shell models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D shell elements. For shell modeling, you should choose only edges when you select the geometry to include in your plane strain model. Do not select surfaces. You also need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve that you want Mechanica to mesh. You should not assign material properties to the cross-section surface. Mixed models Mechanica meshes your model using both 2D solid and 2D shell elements. For mixed modeling, you need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve that you want Mechanica to mesh. You must also assign material properties to the cross-section surface.
In addition to shell idealizations, you can create the mass and spring idealizations for a 2D plane strain model. As mentioned, you must use a Cartesian coordinate system as the model type reference coordinate system. However, you can base other modeling entities on Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. You can define loads, constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in three degrees of freedom for a plane strain model: translation in X and Y (or the cylindrical and spherical equivalents) rotation in Z (or the cylindrical and spherical equivalent)
For solid treatments of your model, only two degrees of freedom are available translation in X and Y.
See Also
Procedures: To Specify a Product, Mode and Model Type To Define 2D Model Types References: About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
74
IndexModel Type
If your model meets these criteria, you can model a cross-section of your structure as a 2D axisymmetric model using shells or solids, or a combination of both. When you use a cross-section for 2D axisymmetric modeling, you need to observe several rules that govern Mechanica's ability to treat the cross-section geometry as an entity that can be revolved about an axis. These rules differ depending on whether you are working with surfaces or curves. Depending on how you treat your model, Mechanica takes one of the following actions: Pure solid models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D solid elements. For solid modeling, you need to assign material properties to the cross-section surface. You should not assign shell idealizations to any of the curves in your model. Pure shell models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D shell elements. For shell modeling, you should choose only edges when you select the geometry to include in your 2D axisymmetric model. Do not select surfaces. You also need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve that you want Mechanica to mesh. You should not assign material properties to the cross-section surface. Mixed models Mechanica meshes your model using both 2D solid and 2D shell elements. For mixed modeling, you need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve that you want Mechanica to mesh. You must also assign material properties to the cross-section surface.
In addition to shell idealizations, you can create the mass and spring idealizations for a plane strain model. As mentioned, you must use a Cartesian coordinate system as the model type reference coordinate system. However, you can base other modeling entities on Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate systems. You can define loads,
75
constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in three degrees of freedom for a 2D axisymmetric model: translation in X and Y (or the cylindrical and spherical equivalents) rotation in Z (or the cylindrical and spherical equivalent)
For solid treatments of your model, only two degrees of freedom are available translation in X and Y.
See Also
Procedures: To Specify a Product, Mode and Model Type To Define 2D Model Types References: About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
You can define loads, constraints, design parameters, and other model attributes in six degrees of freedom for a 3D model: translation in X, Y, and Z rotation in X, Y, and Z
76
IndexModel Type
See Also
Procedure: References: To Specify a Product, Mode and Model Type About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
See Also
Procedures: To Select a Model Type To Define 2D Model Types References: About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
77
Pure solid models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D solid elements. For solid modeling, you need to assign material properties to the cross-section surface. You should not assign shell idealizations to any of the curves in your model. Pure shell models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D shell elements. For shell modeling, you should choose only edges when you select the geometry to include in your 2D plain strain model. Do not select surfaces. You also need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve you want Mechanica to mesh. You should not assign material properties to the cross-section surface. Mixed models Mechanica meshes your model using both 2D solid and 2D shell elements. For mixed modeling, you need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve you want Mechanica to mesh. You must also assign material properties to the cross-section surface.
See Also
Procedures: To Select a Model Type To Define 2D Model Types References: About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
If your model meets these criteria, you can model a cross-section of your structure as a 2D axisymmetric model using shells or solids, or a combination of both. When you use a cross-section for 2D axisymmetric modeling, you need to observe several rules that govern Mechanica's ability to treat the cross-section geometry as an entity that can be revolved about an axis. These rules differ depending on whether you are working with surfaces or curves.
78
IndexModel Type
Depending on how you treat your model, Mechanica takes one of the following actions: Pure solid models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D solid elements. For solid modeling, you need to assign material properties to the cross-section surface. You should not assign shell idealizations to any of the curves in your model. Pure shell models Mechanica meshes your model using 2D shell elements. For shell modeling, you should choose only edges when you select the geometry to include in your 2D axisymmetric model. Do not select surfaces. You also need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve that you want Mechanica to mesh. You should not assign material properties to the cross-section surface. Mixed models Mechanica meshes your model using both 2D solid and 2D shell elements. For mixed modeling, you need to create simple or advanced shell idealizations on each curve that you want Mechanica to mesh. You must also assign material properties to the cross-section surface.
See Also
Procedures: To Select a Model Type To Define 2D Model Types References: About Idealizations Guidelines for Working with Model Types
supported for 2D plane strain and 2D plane stress models, but not for 2D axisymmetric models. You can perform a contact analysis on two disjoint surfaces. Mechanica cannot perform 2D analysis on midsurface models, sketches, or sections. Mechanica treats assemblies that include 2D components differently depending on whether the top-level assembly component is a 2D or 3D component. Here is a summary of the difference: o If the top-level component is 2D, Mechanica suppresses most simulation data from lower-level assembly components, including loads, constraints, boundary conditions, properties, and idealizations. o If the top-level component is 3D, Mechanica suppresses the simulation data listed above from any 2D lower-level assembly component.
If you switch between 2D and 3D model types for the top-level component, Mechanica suppresses or unsuppresses lower-level component simulation data according to the rules just described.
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Working with Model Types
80
IndexFeatures
2. Select the desired 2D model type. 3. Use the arrow selector in the Geometry area to select the geometric entities that will form the 2D model.
For all 2D model types, you can select one or more coplanar faces or surfaces. For 2D plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models, you can select one or more of the following entities either alone or in combination:
If you want to create pure shell models for any of the model types just listed, be sure to select edges only.
4. Use the arrow selector in the Coordinate System area to select the Cartesian coordinate system that you want to use as the reference coordinate system for your 2D model.
All the selected geometry must lie in the XY plane of the reference coordinate system you select. For 2D axisymmetric models only, all geometry must lie in the positive X direction relative to the coordinate system.
See Also
References: About Coordinate Systems Guidelines for Working with Model Types
81
Mechanica saves and regenerates these features each time you reenter the Mechanica environment. You can promote certain simulation features (datum points, datum curves, datum planes, and datum axes) to Pro/ENGINEER features, where they remain permanently visible. If you do not promote the features, they are not visible in Pro/ENGINEER. You cannot promote coordinate systems, surface regions, or volume regions to Pro/ENGINEER. You can create the following simulation features. Click on these topics for more information: Datum points Datum curves Datum planes Coordinate systems Datum axes Surface regions Volume regions
You can add simulation features to your model while you are working with modeling entities such as loads, constraints, and beams. To do so, use the datum features creation buttons on the toolbar.
See Also
References: Datum Features in Pro/ENGINEER versus Mechanica Guidelines for Simulation Features Feature Creation Methods
82
IndexFeatures
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Promote Simulation Features to Pro/ENGINEER Datum Features in Pro/ENGINEER versus Mechanica
83
The methods that you use to create datum points, curves, axes, and planes are the same as those you use in Pro/ENGINEER. For more information, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. If you create datum curves, datum planes, datum axes, or datum points in Mechanica, you can promote them so they are permanently visible and accessible in Pro/ENGINEER. Simulation Feature Creation Methods Simulation features are modeling features that you create while you are working in Mechanicaeither native mode or FEM mode. These features exist only in your Mechanica session and are not visible in Pro/ENGINEER unless you promote them. Mechanica saves and regenerates simulation features each time you reenter the Mechanica environment. You can use simulation features to help define modeling entities, such as loads and constraints. You can create simulation features on your model in three different ways: While in Mechanica, use the Insert>Model Datum command to create datum axes, all three types of coordinate systems, datum points, datum curves, datum planes, surface regions, and volume regions. While in Pro/ENGINEER, use the Insert>Model Datum command to create datum axes, coordinate systems, datum points, datum curves, and datum planes. Note that you cannot create surface or volume regions while in Pro/ENGINEER.
Additionally, you can only create Cartesian coordinate systems. Even if you attempt to create cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems in Pro/ENGINEER by using offsets, Mechanica treats the resulting coordinate system as Cartesian. To create true cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems, work from within Mechanica.
Use the icons on the toolbar to create datum axes, datum points, datum curves, or datum planes.
See Also
Reference: Datum Features in Pro/ENGINEER versus Mechanica
84
IndexFeatures
Datum Point
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Point command to create datum points. You may need datum points on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling entities. For example, point loads, springs, and Near Point measures require a datum point. When you select Insert>Model Datum>Point, Mechanica opens the DATUM POINT dialog box, which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to indicate whether you want to create the datum point at the assembly level or on one of the assembly components. Note: As an alternative, you can create the datum point by selecting the Insert>Model Datum>Point command and then selecting the Sketched, Offset Coordinate System, or Field command. If you use these methods, you work with dialog boxes other than the DATUM POINT dialog box. Also, you can use the button to add a datum point to your model during the creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on these methods of creating datum points, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. When you create datum points, Mechanica treats the points as simulation features. Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure: To Create Datum Points
85
As an alternative, you can create the datum point by selecting the Insert>Model Datum>Point command and then selecting the Sketched, Offset Coordinate System, or Field command. If you use these methods, you work with dialog boxes other than the DATUM POINT dialog box. For more information on these methods of creating datum points, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Datum Plane
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Plane command to create datum planes. You may need datum planes on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling entities. For example, you can use datum planes as references for modeling other simulation features, like datum curves, volume regions, and so on. When you select this command, Mechanica opens the DATUM PLANE dialog box, which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to indicate whether you want to create the datum plane at the assembly level or on one of the assembly components. Also, you can use the button to add a datum plane to your model during the creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on creating datum planes, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. When you create datum planes, Mechanica treats the planes as simulation features. Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure: To Create Datum Planes
2. Use this dialog box to define the datum plane placement and properties. 3. Click OK. The DATUM PLANE dialog box functions as it does in Pro/ENGINEER. For more information on the dialog box, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. 86
IndexFeatures
Datum Axis
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Axis to create datum axes. You may need datum axes on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling entities. For example, you can use a datum axis when designing a cyclic symmetry constraint or defining a coordinate system. When you select this command, Mechanica opens the DATUM AXIS dialog box, which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to indicate whether you want to create the datum axis at the assembly level or on one of the assembly components. Also, you can use the button to add a datum axis to your model during the creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on creating datum axes, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. When you create datum axes, Mechanica treats the axes as simulation features. Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure: To Create Datum Axes
Datum Curve
Use the Insert>Model Datum>Curve command to create datum curves. You may need datum curves on your model to create a number of Mechanica modeling entities. For example, some loads and constraints can require a datum curve for designing certain idealization features, like beams. 87
When you select this command, Mechanica opens the CRV OPTIONS menu, which you use just as you would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you are working with an assembly, Mechanica displays the FEM SELCOMP menu first. Use this menu to indicate whether you want to create the datum curve at the assembly level or on one of the assembly components. Note: As an alternative, you can create the datum curve using the Insert>Model Datum>Sketched Curve command. If you use this method, you work with the Sketched Datum Curve dialog box. Also, you can use the button to add a datum curve to your model during the creation of other Mechanica entities. For more information on creating datum curves, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. When you create datum curves, Mechanica treats the curves as simulation features. Simulation features are not visible or accessible when you return to Pro/ENGINEER unless you promote them.
See Also
Procedure: To Create Datum Curves
88
IndexFeatures
Coordinate Systems
You can create a coordinate system using one of the following methods: Use the Insert>Model Datum>Coordinate System command. If you want to create the coordinate system for an entire assembly, be sure to select assembly datum geometry as coordinate system references. Click Datum Coordinate System Tool) on the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
In either case, you may want to make the new coordinate system current if you plan to use it as a reference for multiple modeling entities. Also see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems and Coordinate System Guidelines for more information.
See Also
Procedures: To Set a Current Coordinate System To Create a Coordinate System To Modify an Offset Coordinate System To Edit a Coordinate System Definition References: Coordinate Systems and Loads and Constraints Coordinate Systems and Functions About Beam Orientations
89
After using one of these methods, the COORDINATE SYSTEM dialog box appears.
2. Select Cartesian, Cylindrical, or Spherical from the Type option menu. 3. Select reference geometry for the coordinate system as follows: o If you want to create the coordinate system for an entire assembly, select assembly datum geometry as the coordinate system references. o If you want to create the coordinate system for a part or a single part assembly component, select geometry on the part as the coordinate system references. 4. Complete the tabs on the dialog box to define the coordinate system. For more information on the dialog box and how to define coordinate systems, search the Part Modeling functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. 5. Click OK. 6. The coordinate system appears in the model. If you want to make this coordinate system the current coordinate system, see To Set a Current Coordinate System.
See Also
Procedures: To Edit a Coordinate System Definition To Modify an Offset Coordinate System Reference: About Coordinate Systems
Surface Region
Use the Insert>Surface Region command to create surface regions. Surface regions enable you to split up a surface so you can perform an operation on a portion of a surface, such as applying loads or constraints. Applying a load to a region is useful for models that require forces in one or more specific areas of a surface. Region definition is a two-step process: First, you define the contour that bounds the region.
90
IndexFeatures
Second, you identify the contour as a region boundary, in effect splitting the bounded area from the parent surface. To do this, you use the SURFACE REGION dialog box.
Before you assign a surface region, consider the effect the new region will have on your model. After you fully define a surface region, you can apply constraints, loads, and contact regions to the region, exclusive of the parent surface or other regions on that surface. All rules and procedures that govern loads, constraints, and contact regions applied to full surfaces hold true when you apply these entities to surface regions.
See Also
Procedure: To Create Surface Regions
91
See Also
Reference: Datum Curve
IndexFeatures
4. Use the SURFACE REGION dialog box to define the surface region by selecting or creating the curve that defines the region and then selecting the surface that you want Mechanica to split into regions. Volume Region Use the Insert>Volume Region command to create a volume region so you can break a part into multiple volumes. Volume regions are primarily useful for: facilitating mesh refinement for both AutoGEM and the FEM solvers adding heat loads to internal surfaces of a parent volume. In this case, you apply the heat load to one or more of the surfaces created by the volume region. applying different material properties to different volumes in FEM mode. In this case, you apply one material property to your part and another to the defining surface for the volume region. Mechanica propagates the material property throughout the volume region.
When you select the Volume Region command, Mechanica displays the SOLID OPTS menu with these options: Extrude Extrude a single section. Revolve Revolve a single section. Sweep Sweep a section along a trajectory. Blend Blend two or more sections. Use Quilt Use quilt surfaces as the boundaries of a volume region. This option is not active if your model contains no quilts. Advanced Select any of several advanced volume creation methods.
These commands open various versions of the VOLUME REGION dialog boxthe tool you use to create the geometry that will define the volume region. The procedure for creating volume region geometry using these options is almost identical to the procedure you use to create similar features in Pro/ENGINEER. For more information, search the Part Modeling area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. After you create the volume region, Mechanica treats the volume region geometry as a region boundary, in effect splitting the bounded area from the parent volume.
See Also
Procedure: To Create Volume Regions
93
Var Sec Swp Create a volume region based on a variable section sweep of a surface from the trajectories of points on the swept surface. Swept Blend Create a volume region based on a swept blend from sections at different points on the trajectory of sweep. Helical Swp Create a volume region based on a sweep along the trajectory defined by profile and pitch. Boundaries Create a volume region based on the boundaries of a surface. Sect To Srfs Create a volume region based on a transitional surface between a set of tangent surfaces and a sketched contour. Srfs to Srfs Create a volume region based on a blend from one tangent surface to another. From File Create a volume region based on blend sections that are specified from a file. TangentToSrf Create a volume region that is tangent to a surface.
For more information on these techniques, search the Part Modeling functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
2. Select one of the following methods for creating volume regions. o Extrude o Revolve o Sweep o Blend o Use Quilt o Advanced 3. Click Done. 4. Use the VOLUME REGION dialog box to define the volume region by selecting or creating the volume that defines the region and then selecting the volume that you want Mechanica to split into regions.
94
IndexConnections
If you work with native mode assemblies that include compressed midsurface shells, you need to consider how you want Mechanica to treat mated and overlapping surfaces. Wherever the surfaces of a component modeled with midsurfaces mate or overlap with the surfaces of another component, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface connections between all contacting surfaces of the two components. Mechanica makes an exception for any surface where you explicitly create a weld, fastener, rigid connection, or free interface.
See Also
References: Gaps in Parts Gaps in Assemblies
Welds
You can use welds in Mechanica to bridge the gaps that form during shell compression between plates that have been mated because they touch or overlap. You can create the following types of welds: End Welds Perimeter Welds Spot Welds (native mode)
When you work with native mode assemblies that include compressed midsurface shells, you need to consider how you want Mechanica to treat mated and overlapping surfaces. Wherever the surfaces of a component modeled with midsurfaces mate or overlap with the surfaces of another component, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface connections between all contacting surfaces of the two components. Mechanica makes an exception for any surface where you create welds, fasteners, or rigid connections. If you do not want Mechanica to apply automatic midsurface connections to given surfaces, you need to use one of the connection types just mentioned or assign free interfaces to those surfaces.
95
See Also
Procedures: To Create an End Weld To Create a Perimeter Weld
End Welds
Use end welds in assembly models to connect plates. Plates can be curved and placed at oblique or right angles, such as T or L configurations. Using the end weld, the shell mesh from one plate is extended to meet the mesh from the base plate, as shown here:
96
IndexConnections
When Mechanica creates an end weld, it attempts to keep the neighboring geometry consistent. When a plane surface is moved to a new location during the shell compression process (to the midsurface of its contacting surface), sometimes the surface cannot be extended to the new location. You must make sure, therefore, that a surface to which you are adding an end weld can be extended in this way. If it cannot be extended, consider using the automatic midsurface connection provided by Mechanica. You can use end welds to join the following entities: two thin-wall components connecting at a right or oblique angle two offset thin-wall components mated at a right angle with a gap between the compressed surfaces of the components two offset thin-wall components mated at an oblique angle with no contact between the components
To define an end weld, select the Insert>Connection>Weld command to open the Weld Definition dialog box. After you create an end weld, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting an end weld, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure: To Create an End Weld
See Also
97
Procedures:
2. Enter a name or accept the default name. 3. Select End Weld from the Type option menu. 4. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, click and use the regular selection methods to select the first and second surfaces now. Your selections appear next to the selector arrow in the References area. 5. Click OK. The end weld icon appears where the two surfaces meet.
Perimeter Welds
Use perimeter welds in assembly models to connect parallel plates, that may be curved, along the perimeter of one of the plates, as shown here:
Before mesh generation, a sequence of surfaces is automatically created to connect the selected edges of the top plate to the base plate. Mechanica adds shell elements to the newly created surfaces. A series of welds on one or more of the perimeter edges of the top plate connects it to the base plate. In this case, the components are touching, but the resulting compressed surfaces are parallel to one another and do not touch. For this type of geometry, you should use a perimeter weld to connect the two plates, or allow Mechanica to create automatic midsurface connections. For more information on allowed surfaces, see Guidelines for Surface-Surface Connections and Interfaces (FEM mode). To define a perimeter weld, select the Insert>Connection>Weld command to open the Weld Definition dialog box. After you create a perimeter weld, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using
98
IndexConnections
Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a perimeter weld, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Perimeter Weld
See Also
Procedures: To Create an End Weld To Create a Perimeter Weld
2. Enter a name or accept the default name. 3. Select Perimeter Weld from the Type option menu. 4. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, click in the References area and use the regular selection methods to select the doubler surface on which you will place the weld and the base surface to which the weld will extend. 5. Use the selector arrow under Edges to select one or more edges you want Mechanica to weld.
99
6. Enter a thickness for the shell elements that will represent the perimeter weld. The perimeter weld icon appears between the two surfaces.
Spot Welds
Use spot welds to connect two somewhat parallel surfaces at a datum point you specify. Mechanica creates a spot weld entity that connects the two surfaces using a circular beam section to simulate the weld. Spot welds are not available in FEM mode. When you add spot welds to your model, Mechanica connects the two surfaces in a circular spot at a point, and transfers displacements from one part to another. If you are creating an assembly that has rivets, spot welds are one way to model the rivets. When working with spot welds, be aware of the following: The surfaces that you connect must be within 15 of being parallel to each other, and some distance apart. The surfaces cannot be touching. Spot welds transfer load forces. However, stresses close to the welds can be inaccurate. You cannot apply beam releases to the beams created with spot welds.
To create a spot weld, select the Insert>Connection>Spot Weld>Create command and follow the prompts. After you create a spot weld, you can edit or delete it using the Insert>Connection>Spot Weld>Edit command or the Insert>Connection>Spot Weld>Delete command, respectively.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Spot Weld
IndexConnections
For each spot weld, Mechanica adds a spot weld icon and a beam icon to your model.
Because Mechanica uses linear constraint equations to enforce the rigid rotations, rather than equations with sines and cosines, you should use rigid connections only for small rotation angles of rigidly connected entities. Use rigid connections in this way, even if you intend to use them in a large deformation analysis. The following apply to 3D and 2D models: You can create, edit, and delete rigid connections. You can turn rigid connection visibility on and off by selecting or deselecting Rigid Connections on the Simulation Display dialog box (View>Simulation Display>Modeling Entities tab).
Additionally, you can use rigid connections to connect two or more parts at selected surfaces, or to help idealize complex models. For example, you can use a rigid connection to connect a point mass representing an engine to the engine mount bolt holes. You can create a rigid connection from one point to a second point. If you are working with a 3D model, at least one of the points must meet one of these two conditions: The point must lie on a spring, beam, or shell. The point must act as the reference for a point constraint with at least one free rotation, a point load with a moment, or a point mass with a nonzero moment of inertia.
You can create a rigid connection from one or more curves or surfaces on your model to a free point that is not otherwise associated with the model geometry. Use a rigid connection from a surface to a free point with a constraint, for example, to model a pin support. If you create a rigid connection from one edge, to a free point, and then to a second edge, the two edges will move together when you apply a load.
101
When you create a rigid connection to a free point, be aware of the following: You can create a displacement measure on a free point with a rigid connection, but the point will not be visible when you view results. You cannot query displacements or rotations at rigidly connected free points. However, Mechanica will include loads or constraints on a rigidly connected point when calculating measures over the entire model, such as maximum displacement.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Rigid Connection To Edit a Rigid Connection To Delete a Rigid Connection
IndexConnections
Mechanica highlights the entities you defined as associated with this rigid connection.
4. Use the normal selection methods to deselect any of the highlighted entities, and/or select new ones. 5. Click OK to complete the edit.
Regardless of the fastener type, you can only create fasteners made of isotropic materials. 103
After you create a fastener, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a fastener, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
Modeling Prerequisites
If you plan to add fasteners to your model, the model must meet the following basic conditions: The model must be an assembly. You can add as many fasteners to your assembly as you want, but you can only pass any given fastener through two components. Mechanica does not support zero-length fasteners. When adding fasteners to quilt assemblies, you can inadvertently create zero-length fasteners if you do not correctly account for shell thickness when you place the assembly components. To prevent this problem, be sure to impose offsets equivalent to at least: (part1 shell thickness + part2 shell thickness) / 2 When adding fasteners to midsurface assemblies, take care that the midsurface offsets you use do not result in direct contact between two midsurfaces you intend to fasten. If you plan to create a fastener based on actual holes in your model, both components must have holes through which the bolt or screw pass. In the case of bolts, both holes must fully pierce the component. For screws, only the component on the screw head side of the fastener connection must be fully pierced. The component on the screw tip side can be fully or partially pierced. Any hole that participates in a fastener connection must be a right cylindrical hole. In other words, the hole must be perpendicular to the component surface and have straight sides. The two holes must be approximately the same size, with the hole axes not further apart than 5% of the hole diameter. The axes of the holes must also be approximately parallel to each other. If the axes are not parallel to within 5 , Mechanica warns you. If you plan to create a fastener based on points in your model, both components must have points to establish the bolt or screw axis. The axes established by the two points must be approximately parallel to each other. If the axes are not parallel to within 5 , Mechanica warns you. There should not be any interfering or intervening geometry in the fastener pathfor example, interfering or intervening geometry from one of the fastener components, or a third component that lies between the two fastener components and in the fastener path. You must limit the degrees of freedom in your model by establishing separation between fastened components and limiting their ability to rotate about the bolt or screw axis.
104
IndexConnections
When you create simple fasteners, Mechanica automatically enforces certain degrees of freedom for you. However, if you create advanced fasteners, you can either specify that Mechanica takes care of this automatically or use other modeling techniques to deal with any unwanted degrees of freedom. These techniques include adding appropriate constraints or, for separation, defining contact regions. If you choose one of these alternative methods, you must have them in place before running an analysis.
Fastener Meshes
When it meshes a model that includes fasteners, Mechanica creates the mesh according to the type of fastener you specify and refines the mesh about the fastener to increase the accuracy of your results. To create the mesh, Mechanica determines whether the fastener is a bolt or screw, then creates one or two annular areas about the fastener hole depending on whether the fastener is a bolt or screw, as shown below. Note that the annular area serves only to guide mesh creation, and does not appear as an entity or simulation feature on your model.
The illustration shows that if the fastener is a bolt, Mechanica creates two annular areasone on each of the outside fastener surfaces where the bolt head and nut would contact the fastened components. For screws, Mechanica creates the annular area on the screw head side only. In both cases, the size of the annular area is equivalent to the head diameter. For simple fasteners and most advanced fasteners, Mechanica assumes the head diameter to be 1.7 times the hole diameter. However, if you define a preload, Mechanica instead uses the head diameter you specify as part of the preload definition. The annular areas act as a form of mesh control enforcing smaller elements within its boundaries than might ordinarily be present on the surface. When Mechanica meshes the model, it ensures that no element boundaries cross the border of the annular area. For solid models, this surface mesh refinement extends into the volume, radiating outward from the annular area so that you typically see a concentration of small elements about the annular area with element size increasing as you move
105
away. This mesh refinement enables Mechanica to more accurately calculate the pressure introduced by the fastener head and, for bolts, the fastener nut. If you create simple fasteners or turn on Fix Separation for an advanced fastener, Mechanica creates additional annular areas on the inner surfaces as follows.
Here, Mechanica inserts the separation annular areas where the two inner surfaces would contact, enabling Mechanica to correctly model the separation for the solver. These annular areas have a similar effect on the mesh as do the ones for the fastener head and nutthey serve to refine the mesh about the separation area and ensure that element boundaries do not cross the border. For simple fasteners and for advanced fasteners defined using hole references or materials and diameter, the separation annular areas are always 2 the diameter of the fastener shaft. If you define advanced fasteners using both point references and spring stiffness properties, the separation annular areas are always 1.4 (t1 + t2) where t1 is the thickness of the first fastener component and t2 is the thickness of the second. Note: If you are working with a midsurface model or a pure surface, the fastener head and nut annular areas physically coincide with the separation annular areas. In this case, Mechanica uses the fastener head to determine the size of the shared annular area.
Creating Fasteners
When you select the Insert>Connection>Fastener command, the Fastener Definition dialog box appears. The following items appear on the Fastener Definition dialog box: Name Specify a name for the fastener. If you do not specify a name, Mechanica uses a default name of Fastener1, Fastener2, and so forth. References Specify the reference type and select geometric entities for your fastener. If you already selected valid geometric references for the fastener before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the
106
IndexConnections
selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the desired geometry. Type Specify either Simple or Advanced. The remaining fields on the dialog box change depending on your selection.
After you define the fastener and click the OK button, Mechanica automatically creates measures that compute the stresses in the fastener. Mechanica also adds a fastener icon to your model. The size of the icon depends on the head size of the fastener, which is either automatically defined or based on a preload you define.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Simple Fastener To Create an Advanced Fastener
Fastener References
You can select from several fastener reference types when you define the location and nature of your fastener. The way you define references indicates the type of fastener you are creatingbolt or screwas well as the holes or points through which the fastener passes. To define the fastener references, select one of the following reference types on the Fastener Definition dialog box: Bolt (edges of holes) Select two edges of holes. The holes can be through either a solid or a surface. The holes you select must meet certain criteria. Mechanica designates the hole associated with the first edge you select as the head side of the bolt. Bolt (points on surfaces) Select one point on each of two quilts or midsurfaces. If you select this form of reference, your model need not contain actual holes. Instead, Mechanica uses the points you select to form the bolt centerline. The points you select must meet certain criteria. Mechanica designates the surface associated with the first point you select as the head side of the bolt. Note: Before meshing or analyzing the model, you must assign shell idealizations to both quilts. Screw (edges of holes) Select two edges of holes. The holes can be through either a solid or a surface. As with bolts, the holes you select must meet certain criteria. Mechanica designates the hole associated with the first edge you select as the head side of the screw.
107
Simple Fasteners
Simple Fasteners After you select Simple as a fastener type on the Fastener Definition dialog box, the following items appear: Diameter Specify the diameter of the fastener shaft. You can use a realnumber value, parameter name, or expression. If you are using holes as references, Mechanica sets the default in the Diameter field to the diameter of the smallest fastener hole. If you change the default diameter, be sure you do not enter a negative number or specify a diameter larger than the diameter of the smaller hole. If you are using points as references, Mechanica does not display a default diameter in the Diameter field. Materials Specify the material that the fastener is made of. Click the arrow to display a drop-down list of material properties already associated with your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to display more materials, or to create a new material. Note: Because you can not use orthotropic or transversely isotropic materials when creating fasteners, the drop-down list contains only isotropic materials. If you define a simple fastener, Mechanica assumes that: There is an enforced separation between the fastened components to prevent interpenetration. If there is a valid contact region, Mechanica uses the contact region to enforce separation. If you have not defined a valid contact region, Mechanica enforces the separation automatically when solving for the fastener. The components are free to rotate about each other relative to the fastener axis. To prevent the solver from failing, you must impose constraints to prevent this rotation or define an advanced fastener instead. The fastener carries all the shear force. In other words, there is no friction between the components.
2. Enter a name for the fastener in the Name field. 3. Select Simple from the Type option menu. 4. Select a reference type from the drop-down menu in the Reference area. 5. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, click and use the regular selection methods to select the appropriate geometry now. Your selections appear next to the selector arrow in the References area. 6. Enter a real-number value, parameter name, or expression for the Diameter of the fastener. 108
IndexConnections
7. Select a material from the drop-down list. If you do not see the material you want, click More to select a material from the library or to define a new one. 8. Click OK. The fastener icon appears at the fastener location.
Advanced Fasteners
Advanced Fasteners After you select Advanced as a fastener type on the Fastener Definition dialog box, the following items appear: Stiffness Specify the method you are using to define the fastener as follows: Using Material And Diameter Define the fastener by specifying the fastener diameter and material. Using Spring Stiffness Property Define the fastener by specifying the spring properties of the fastener.
Depending on your choice, the items available on the dialog box change.
Fix Separation Ensure that the fastened components do not interpenetrate. You can select from: Automatic Enforces separation based on standard fastener separation or based on a contact region that touches an inside hole edge. If there is a contact region, the contact region ensures that the components do not interpenetrate. If there is no contact region, Mechanica uses standard fastener separationa faster, less accurate method of preventing interpenetration. One of the effects of using standard fastener separation is that the components cannot separate even if they would naturally do so. On Enforces standard fastener separation regardless of the presence of any contact regions about the fastener hole. Off Does not enforce any separation. If you select this option, you must enforce separation between the components in some other way with a contact region, for example. The selection you make has an effect on the mesh and, if you select an option that results in using contact regions, an effect on solver run time. Fix Separation is not active for bolts that use points as fastener references, and the separation for this type of bolt defaults to Automatic.
Include Preload Define a preload for the fastener. A preload simulates the degree to which the bolt or screw will be tightened and enables you to determine that the fastener properly compresses the components. Include Preload is not active for bolts that use points as fastener references.
109
When you select the Using Material and Diameter option to define fastener stiffness, the Fastener Definition dialog box displays or activates the following items: Diameter Specify the diameter of the fastener shaft. You can use a realnumber value, parameter name, or expression. If you are using holes as references, Mechanica sets the default in the Diameter field to the diameter of the smallest fastener hole. If you change the default diameter, be sure you do not enter a negative number or specify a diameter larger than the diameter of the smaller hole. If you are using points as references, Mechanica does not display a default diameter in the Diameter field. Materials Specify the material of the fastener. Click the arrow to display a drop-down list of material properties already associated with your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to display more materials, or to create a new material.
Note: Because you can not use orthotropic or transversely isotropic materials when creating fasteners, the drop-down list contains only isotropic materials.
Fix Rotations Constrain the components from rotating relative to each other about the fastener axis. Unless you have fully constrained rotations about the fastener by adding displacement constraints, defining extra fasteners, or some other means, be sure this option box is turned on. Carries Shear Specify that the bolt or screw carries all of the shear force that passes through the fastener connection. If you turn this option box off, the fastener carries none of the shear force. Instead, Mechanica assumes that the shear force passes through the components by friction where the components meet.
Defining Advanced Fasteners Using Spring Stiffness Properties When you select the Using Spring Stiffness Property option to define fastener stiffness, the Fastener Definition dialog box displays a Spring Property option list you can use to select a spring property that you have already defined. You can also use the More button to create new spring properties, edit existing properties, and so forth. If you choose this method to define a fastener, Mechanica uses spring properties to model the fastener. The spring property you select or create determines the stiffness of the spring, governs the ability of the components to rotate about the fastener, and determines how the fastener carries shear. The X direction of the spring lies along the fastener axis so that Kxx is the axial stretching stiffness of the fastener, Kyy and Kzz are the shearing stiffness, and Txx is the axial rotational stiffness, as illustrated below:
110
IndexConnections
Note that, for any spring property you select or define when creating fasteners, you must ensure that Kyy = Kzz. Also, to prevent components from rotating relative to each other about the fastener axis, be sure to specify a relatively high axial rotational stiffnessTxx. Fastener Preloads For advanced fasteners on solid components, you can define the tensile preload that results from the torque you expect the fastener to be tightened to. With this information, Mechanica can calculate such behaviors as component compression and fastener tension, allowing more realistic distribution of stresses between the fastener and the fastened components. If you select the Include Preload check box, the Fastener Definition dialog box displays the following items. For any of these items, you can enter a real-number value, parameter name, or expression. Preload Force Define the tensile force in the fastener that results from tightening the bolt or screw. You must express the force as a positive value. Fastener Head and Nut Diameter Define the head and nut diameter for the fastener. You can specify a head and nut diameter for screws as well as bolts. If the fastener is a bolt, Mechanica uses the value you enter for both the head and nut. For screws, there is no nut, so the value applies to the head only. If you do not specify the value, Mechanica uses the default value displayed in this field, which is 1.7 the fastener shaft diameter. Separation Test Diameter Define an area within which Mechanica will track normal stresses during analysis. Mechanica uses the value you specify to determine a sampling area about the fastener. This area is an annulus with the inside ring as the fastener shaft/hole diameter and the outside ring as the separation test diameter. These annular areas are located on the inner surfaces of the fastener components.
111
As the analysis runs, Mechanica checks the normal stresses at sampling points in the annular area to be sure the stresses remain less than zero. Values of zero or greater mean that there is no compression between the components and the components are separating. Mechanica reports this situation in the analysis summary. If you do not specify a value for Separation Test Diameter, Mechanica uses a default value that it determines as follows:
If you select Using Material and Diameter from the Stiffness option menu or are using holes as reference, the default is 2 the fastener shaft diameter. If you select Using Spring Stiffness Property from the Stiffness option menu and are using points as references, the default is 1.4 (t1 + t2) where t1 is the thickness of the first fastened component and t2 is the thickness of the second.
When you define a preload for a fastener, Mechanica creates a fastener_separation_stress measure that it uses to track compression by evaluating the stresses normal to the inner component surfaces. To Create an Advanced Fastener 1. Select Insert>Connection>Fastener.
The Fastener Definition dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for the fastener in the Name field. 3. Select Advanced from the Type option menu. 4. Select a reference type from the drop-down menu in the Reference area. 5. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, click and use the regular selection methods to select the appropriate geometry now. Your selections appear next to the selector arrow in the References area. 6. Select the method that you want to use to determine stiffness from the Stiffness menu. You can select from these options: Using Material and Diameter Using Spring Stiffness Property
IndexConnections
2D models 3D models
After you create a contact region, you can review it to ensure that you have correctly selected the geometric entities that you want to include in the contact region. You can also delete the contact region using the Insert>Connection>Contact Region>Delete command
See Also
Procedures: To Create Contact Regions To Create a Contact Analysis Reference: Contact Analysis
Mechanica also checks to see if any points in common between the two selected curves will prevent the curves from moving completely apart during an analysis. If there are any such points, a warning box appears and you should respond appropriately. For each valid pair of curves, Mechanica places a contact region icon at the point where the curves are closest to each other, oriented along the point of closest approach.
113
Mechanica also checks to see if: the contact region lies between two interpenetrating volumes. any curves in common between the two selected surfaces prevents the surfaces from moving completely apart during an analysis. If there are any such curves, a warning box appears and you should respond appropriately. you are attempting to create a contact region on a surface that is on the boundary of two volumes. Applying a contact region to this surface allows the volumes to separate. If you split a surface that two volumes share, you must place contact regions on all split surfaces to allow the volumes to separate. For each valid pair of surfaces, Mechanica places a contact region icon at the point where the surfaces are closest to each other, oriented along the point of closest approach.
114
IndexConnections
2. Select a surface on a part, or a surface region on a part in an assembly. o For information on requirements for contact regions between surfaces, see Contact Regions 2D Models. o For information on requirements for contact regions between surface regions, see Contact Regions 3D Models. 3. Select a second surface or surface region. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each contact region.
You can use the Insert>Connection>Rigid Link command to create rigid links in your model. After you create a rigid link, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a rigid link, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. While creating, editing, or deleting rigid links, keep in mind the following: Use the rules that govern the way you work with the rigid links. Control visibility of the rigid link icons by using the View>Simulation Display command. Mechanica places two iconsone for the link, another for the degrees of freedomon the model. Place the rigid links on layers. Use object action to make any changes to the rigid links.
Mechanica outputs rigid links as RBAR cards to be used with the NASTRAN solver. One rigid link may create multiple RBAR cards in the output NASTRAN deck. Because Mechanica supports only NASTRAN for the rigid link output, if you try to choose another solver, Mechanica ignores the rigid link. Mechanica does not output the rigid link whose dependent side has constraints. 115
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Rigid Link (FEM mode)
PointPoint Creates a rigid link between two points or two vertices. o PointSurface Creates a rigid link between a point and a surface, or a vertex and a surface. o PointEdge Creates a rigid link between a point and an edge, or a vertex and an edge. o SurfaceSurface Creates a rigid link between two surfaces. For more information on allowed surfaces, see Guidelines for SurfaceSurface Connections and Interfaces (FEM mode). Override Coordinate System This option is available for both dependent and independent reference entities of the rigid link. Check this box if you want to select a new coordinate system for the reference entities. The selected coordinate system overrides the default WCS or the displacement coordinate system that you have assigned using the Mesh Control dialog box. o Note: You cannot override the displacement coordinate system that has been earlier specified by another rigid link, load, or constraint associated with the selected reference entity. If you output to NASTRAN, conflicts between coordinate systems may occur.
Degrees of Freedom Use to specify degrees of freedom for the dependent reference entity. Degrees of freedom define the ability of a node on the dependent side of the link to move in any direction in space. The node may have six degrees of freedomthree translational and three rotational.
Note that if you change references or delete a link that has already been meshed, Mechanica erases the mesh. 116
IndexConnections
After you create your rigid link, Mechanica displays two icons on the modelone for the rigid link and another for the degrees of freedom.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Rigid Link (FEM mode) Precedence Rules
4. 5. 6. 7.
o a single point or vertex o a point feature (includes one or more single points) o a pattern of point features For the independent side, select the Override Coordinate System check box if you want to select a new displacement coordinate system. For the dependent side, select the Override Coordinate System check box if you want to select a new displacement coordinate system. For the dependent side, accept the default degrees of freedom or select a different combination of DOF. Click OK to save the new rigid connection. Mechanica places two icons on the modelone for the rigid link and another for the degrees of freedom.
117
These characteristics make weighted links useful when you need to attach mass idealizations to your model without stiffening the structure. You can use the Insert>Connection>Weighted Link command to create weighted links in your model. After you create a weighted link, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a weighted link, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. While creating, editing, or deleting weighted links, keep in mind the following: Use the precedence rules. Control visibility of the weighted link icons by using the View>Simulation Display command. Mechanica places two iconsone for the link, another for the degrees of freedomon the model. Place the weighted links on layers. Use object action to make any changes to the weighted links.
Mechanica outputs weighted links as RBE3 cards to be used with the NASTRAN solver only. If you try to choose another solver, Mechanica ignores the weighted links. Mechanica does not output the weighted link whose dependent side has constraints.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Weighted Link (FEM mode) Creating Load Paths for FEM Meshing
118
IndexConnections
Note that if you change the references or delete a weighted link that has already been meshed, Mechanica automatically erases the mesh. After you create your weighted link, Mechanica displays two icons on the modelone for the weighted link and another for the degrees of freedom.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Weighted Link (FEM mode) Precedence Rules
3. If you did not select geometry for the independent side of the link before to select any entering the dialog box, choose the reference type and click of the following geometric references: o Point(s) o Edge(s)/Curve(s) o Surface(s) For the independent side, select the Override Coordinate System check box if you want to select a new displacement coordinate system. For the independent side, accept the default degrees of freedom or select a different combination of DOF. For the dependent side of the link, select or create a point as a reference entity. For the dependent side, select the Override Coordinate System check box if you want to select a new displacement coordinate system. Click OK to save the new weighted connection. Mechanica places two icons on the modelone for the weighted link and another for the degrees of freedom.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
To define a free interface on a midsurface, you select the surface that will be compressed to a midsurface. If your assembly includes components modeled with midsurfaces, Mechanica compresses these components during meshing, potentially creating gaps in the assembly. To prevent these assembly gaps, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface connections where the original surfaces of midsurface components mate or overlap with surfaces from other assembly components. If you want to avoid these automatic midsurface connections, you can define a free interface between the overlapping surfaces. In this case, your model will have inconsistent meshes for the contacting 120
IndexConnections
components where you have placed the free interfaces, and there will be assembly gaps at the free interfaces. When you define an interface as Free, Mechanica outlines the interface and adds an interface icon to your assembly. When you transfer the assembly to independent mode Mechanica, the free interfaces will be outlined with a bold border. Keep the following in mind if you work with your assembly in both native mode and FEM mode: The default interface type in native mode is Bonded. You cannot change the definition of the default interface type in native mode, but you can in FEM mode. If you define the default type in FEM mode as Free, and then enter native mode, Mechanica uses a default interface type of Bonded. If you specify a Bonded interface for surfaces in your assembly in FEM mode, and then enter native mode Mechanica, the bonded interface definition will be suppressed.
After you create an interface, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting an interface, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create an Interface Shell Compression
your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Generate Compatible Mesh This option is available only for Free interfaces, and is on by default. If you clear this check box in the Properties area, Mechanica treats the surfaces on your interface as having no contact and does not create geometrically-consistent node locations when it generates the mesh for the surfaces. This is the same behavior as seen in previous releases for the None interface type. Note: If you defined an interface type None for your assembly in a previous release, Mechanica converts the interface type to Free with the Generate Compatible Mesh option turned off. If you defined an interface type Free for your assembly in a previous release, Mechanica converts the interface type to Free with the Generate Compatible Mesh option selected.
You can set either Bonded or Free as the default contact type for FEM mode. In this case, Mechanica applies the default you set to all mated surfaces in your model except those for which you explicitly define a different type of contact. To set the default contact type, use the Properties>Default Interface Type command. Note: In native mode, the Free connection type is not supported as a default setting. If you define the default connection type for your assembly as Free in FEM mode, and open the assembly in native mode, any analyses you run will use a default connection type of Bonded. After you create an interface, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting an interface, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure: To Create an Interface
IndexConnections
editing a gap Select the gap icon for the gap you want to edit. Then, select Edit>Definition to re-open the Gap Definition dialog box and edit the current settings. deleting a gap Right-click on the gap icon for the gap you want to delete. Then, select the Delete command from the object action menu. Mechanica deletes the gap without confirmation.
You can control the visibility of gaps on your model by using the View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Gap (FEM mode) Precedence Rules
For a surface-surface gap, you can select any of the following entities: o o o surfaces on two different parts in an assembly a surface and a quilt on the same part surfaces with the same type of curvature. For example, you cannot form a surface-surface gap between a planar surface and a spherical surface, or a cylindrical surface and a cone surface.
Clearance Define the distance between two nodes at which Mechanica activates axial and transverse stiffnesses due to displacement during an analysis. If you specify Clearance as zero, the gap acts as a spring. 123
Axial Stiffness Define the axial stiffness value. Where applicable, this parameter defines the stiffness or a spring factor. Transverse Stiffness Define the transverse stiffness value. This parameter defines elastic stiffness, characterizing resistance of the material until the slippage occurs. This parameter is optional. Y direction Define the Y direction by selecting a datum point, edge, curve, axis, surface, or vertex to identify the XY plane of the element. You can also specify a vector in the WCS. The X direction is given by the gap length, which is the shortest distance between the two selected references. A zero-length gap has no length between the two references. For example, you can define a gap between a point on a surface and the surface itself. For a zero-length gap, the X direction is normal to the surface.
Distribution Select the method that Mechanica uses to calculate the axial and transverse stiffnesses for your gap. This option is available only for surfacesurface gaps. The stiffnesses are distributed uniformly across the surfaces. o Total The entered value represents the sum of stiffnesses for all gap elements. o Per Unit Area The entered value is multiplied by the surface area to give the stiffness values. The area of the first selected surface is used for the stiffness calculations. See Surface-Surface Gaps for more information.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Gap (FEM mode)
2. Enter a name or accept the default name. 3. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, select one of these references for the gap from the drop-down list, and use the normal selection methods to select the appropriate geometric entities on your model: o PointPoint Select two points or two vertices. o PointEdge Select a point and an edge, or a vertex and an edge. o PointSurface Select a point and a surface, or a vertex and a surface. o SurfaceSurface Select two surfaces. 4. Select and define Y-direction and these stiffness properties: o Clearance o Axial Stiffness o Transverse Stiffness 124
IndexConnections
5. If you select SurfaceSurface under Reference, select one of these methods for calculation of the stiffness values from the Distribution dropdown list: o Total o Per Unit Area 6. Click OK. Mechanica places a gap icon at the specified location on your model.
Precedence Rules
Precedence rules for your idealizations and connections determine which modeling entity takes precedence when you apply two modeling entities of the same type on or between the same reference entities. There are two types of precedence rules, modeling precedence rules and geometric precedence rules. Modeling Precedence Rules These rules apply when you work with assemblies, and are determined by the assembly hierarchy: When you apply a modeling entity from a top-level assembly, this modeling entity takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a subassembly or a part. When you apply a modeling entity from a subassembly, this modeling entity takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a part.
Geometric Precedence Rules Keep these rules in mind when working with the modeling entities that require points, curves, or surfaces as their reference entities. With some of these modeling entities, you can use multiple geometric entities as reference entities. For example, you can select a feature or a pattern of points and create a beam, spring, or rigid link that runs along a sequence of points. You can also apply a beam on multiple curves, or place a shell on a collection of surfaces. If you later create a new modeling entity of the same type, placing it on or between the same reference entities, it overrides the existing one when the following conditions are met: You select a higher precedence geometric entity as a reference entity for your new modeling entity. The higher precedence geometric entity belongs to a lower precedence geometric entity already referenced by your existing modeling entity.
For example, if you select a single point as a reference entity for your new beam, the new beam overrides an existing one that references a feature of points that include this single point.
125
The following table illustrates how the precedence rules work for modeling entities that can reference points, curves, or surfaces.
Modeling Entity or Mesh Control Reference Entity Geometric Precedence Rule A single point takes precedence over a feature of points or a pattern of points. A feature of points takes precedence over a pattern of points. Points take precedence over curves, edges, and surfaces.
points
curves or edges
An individual curve takes precedence over a composite curve. Curves and edges take precedence over surfaces.
surfaces
126
IndexIdealizations
You create both single shells and shell pairs using the Insert menu. The command you select differs depending upon whether you want to create single shells or midsurface compressed shells: If your design includes shells that are made of the same material as your part, use the Insert>Midsurface command to create shell pairs. To create a shell pair in this way your model must include at least two surfaces on opposite sides of a volume. When Mechanica analyses a shell model, it compresses shell pairs to a midsurface or set of midsurfaces. To perform midsurface compression, Mechanica requires a pairing scheme. To ensure the successful analysis of your shell model, you should check the shell compression before you run an analysis.
127
If you want to create a single shell, for example as a layer on a solid, or if you want to create a shell pair that is composed of a different material than the rest of your part, or if you want to include properties such as laminates or material orientation, use the Insert>Shell command.
You may choose to design a model solely with midsurface compressed shells, or your design may benefit from a mixture of shells, solids, beams, and other idealizations. If you are working with midsurface compressed shells, before you begin analysis, you should define your model as a solid, as a shell, or as a mixed model. The model type determines how Mechanica analyzes your part. Before you create shells on your model, read about recommended geometry for your model. You can control the visibility of shells on your model by using the View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers. After you create a shell, you can edit or delete it by right-clicking on the shell idealizationeither Shell Pair or Shellin the model tree and using Edit Definition or Delete command, as appropriate. If you are deleting a shell, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create Shells Shell Mesh (FEM mode)
When you select the Insert>Shell command, Mechanica displays the Shell Definition dialog box, which includes: Name Specify a name for the shell. The software provides default names, such as Shell1, Shell2, and so on. You can change these default names to more meaningful names if you like.
128
IndexIdealizations
Surface(s) Specify the surfaces associated with the shell. If you already selected a valid surface or surfaces for the shell before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the surfaces. When you select the surface, you can change the normal direction of the shell. Note: The software shares data across several selected surfaces or quilts. Therefore, if you change data on one surface or quilt with shared data, the others will be affected as well.
Type Specify either Simple or Advanced. The remaining fields on the dialog box change depending on your selection.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Simple Shell To Define an Advanced Shell
Simple Shells
After you have specified a name, associated surfaces, and the Simple shell type, you need to provide Mechanica with the following information as well: Thickness You can specify the thickness of your shell as a numerical value. A numerical thickness is measured in the principal system of units that is associated with all of your modeling activities. When Mechanica creates the shell elements for the surface, it applies the thickness you specify equally on both sides of the selected surface. For example, if you specify a shell thickness of 1, Mechanica places 0.5 on the top side of the surface and 0.5 on the bottom side. The thickness field is a parameter-capable edit field. This field accepts Pro/ENGINEER parameters, which you can select from a displayed list. You can also enter an expression as a thickness value. The shell thickness you assign to an individual quilt surface overrides any other thickness that might be assigned to that quilt surface as part of another shell definition. Material Specify the material of the shell. Click the arrow to display a drop-down list of material properties already associated with your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to display more materials, or to create a new material.
129
You can only use isotropic materials with simple shells, so the drop-down list contains only those. If you select a non-isotropic material after clicking the More button, the software reminds you that you must use isotropic material properties with simple shells.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define a Simple Shell About Materials
See Also
References: Simple Shells Shell Definition
Advanced Shells
After you have specified a name, associated surfaces, and the Advanced shell type, you need to provide Mechanica with the following information as well: Shell Property Click the arrow to display a drop-down list of shell properties already associated with your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to open the Shell Properties dialog box, where you can define a new shell property, name it, and specify its type and thickness. Material Click the arrow to display a drop-down list of material properties already associated with your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to display the Materials dialog box, where you can assign a material from the library to your model, or define a new material.
130
IndexIdealizations
The Material drop-down list may not be active if you select certain shell properties. For example, if the shell property you select is a laminate layup, the Material drop-down list is not active. Material Orientation Click the arrow to display a drop-down list that shows the material orientations on the surfaces of your model. If you do not see what you want in the drop-down list, use the More button to display the Material Orientations dialog box, where you can assign a material orientation to your shell, or create a new orientation.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Define an Advanced Shell About Shell Properties About Materials About Material Orientation
5. 6.
See Also
References: Advanced Shells Shell Definition
131
When determining which features to suppress, weigh the benefits of suppressing the feature against the reduction in model accuracy.
Unopposed Surfaces Make sure all surfaces you shell pair have an opposing surface.
132
IndexIdealizations
Pairing Schemes
Mechanica uses the surface pairs that you define to form a network of compressed surfaces called the midsurface. When it models your part, the software places elements on the midsurface only, using the thickness associated with each portion of the shell to determine the depth of the elements. For example, if you were modeling a T-bracket, you might take the approach shown in the T-Bracket example. Mechanica highlights the first surface or set of surfaces you select for a pair in red and the opposing surface or surfaces in yellow. The red surface acts as a point of reference for the pair. Mechanica uses this surface as a viewpoint when determining which opposing surfaces in the model are part of the pair. In addition, Mechanica defines the normal direction for a compressed midsurface from the red surface to the yellow surface. If you omit opposing surfaces from your model, Mechanica compresses the model differently than if you include all opposing surfaces.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Test Shell Compression Gaps in Parts Model Thickness Model Entities and Idealizations
Mixed Models
Certain models contain some areas best suited for shells and others best suited for solids. For these models, you can create shell pairs for the areas that you want Mechanica to treat as shells. Then, you use the following commands on the MIDSURFACES>COMPR OPTS menu to get an idea of how Mechanica will treat your model during analysis, provided you select the equivalent meshing options in native mode and FEM mode. Shells Only Select this command if you want to view what your model would look like if you have Mechanica treat it as a pure shell model. In this case, the software applies shell elements to the paired portion of the model at analysis time and omits any unpaired portions from analysis. Shells And Solids Select this command if you want to view what your model would look like if you have Mechanica treat it as a mixed model. In this case, the software applies shells to the paired portion of the model and solids to the unpaired portion. This is the default option. 133
Once you have decided whether you want Mechanica to treat the model as a pure shell model or a mixed model, you can use the Midsurface or Solid/Midsurface option box on the AutoGEM menu to indicate your choice to the mesher and, consequently, the solver.
Model Thickness
Mechanica uses the thickness associated with each midsurface to calculate the thickness of the shell elements. If it encounters unopposed surfaces in your model, the software uses the thickness of a neighboring or related pair to define the thickness for that portion of the model. Mechanica supports shell pairs with both constant and multiconstant thickness. Constant-thickness pairs All opposing paired surfaces are parallel to each other and equidistant from the opposing surface. Multiconstant-thickness pairs One or both of the opposing surfaces include multiple surfaces. Although all the surfaces are parallel to the opposing surface, they are not equidistant from the opposing surface. Your model is a good candidate for use with multiconstant thickness if: o o it does not require high accuracy or solution quality near the multiconstant-thickness pairs its behavior is not sensitive to minor shape changes
When it encounters surfaces with multiconstant-thicknesses, Mechanica compresses the bottom surfaces and top surfaces into a single continuous midsurface.
Variable thickness pairs (in FEM mode) Both opposing surfaces are neither parallel nor concentric.
If you decide that your model is not a good candidate, rework the part geometry in Pro/ENGINEER to improve midsurface coincidence or treat the model as a solid instead of a shell.
See Also
References: Gaps in Parts Gaps in Assemblies Model Entities and Idealizations Unopposed Surfaces
134
IndexIdealizations
Unopposed Surfaces
For Mechanica to create a complete shell model, you need to make sure all the surfaces you pair have an opposing surface. Unopposed surfaces can be the result of omitting a surface or surface region from a pair, or they can occur because of slight geometrical differences between surfaces that make up a pair. You can use any of the following approaches to resolve problems due to unopposed surfaces: If the unopposed surface is a separate feature, such as a round, you can suppress the feature. You can elect to use or ignore unopposed surfaces during analysis through the COMPRES MDL menu. If you choose to ignore these surfaces, Mechanica omits the unopposed surfaces from your model, and your model may have gaps. To understand how the midsurface compression of a part may differ depending upon whether you use or ignore an unopposed surface, see Example: Part with Unopposed Surfaces. You can add an opposing surface to the model.
See Also
Procedure: To Handle Unopposed and Unpaired Surfaces
135
surface constraint to an edge constraint whose translations and rotations are fully fixed. compressing a loaded or constrained surface region to a partial curve, unless you applied the load or constraint to the curve instead of the region as a whole compressing a loaded or constrained curve to a point
For example, if you decide to model a rectangular plate as a shell, Mechanica would ask you to redefine the problem load.
If you place regional loads on both pair surfaces and those loads overlap, Mechanica calculates the overlapping area by adding or subtracting the load values and directions for the two regions. Mechanica maintains constraints applied to overlapping regions. If you place a constraint or load on a region and omit the region when you define your pairs, the software may not include that constraint or load. In this case, Mechanica displays a warning message when you try to analyze the model.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Test Shell Compression Pairing Schemes Gaps in Parts Gaps in Assemblies Model Thickness
Gaps in Parts
Depending on how you pair your single-part model, Mechanica can encounter gaps in the midsurface. A gap is a section of the model where the midsurfaces do not meet. Gaps often occur in portions of a solid model that are not symmetric. In asymmetric models, various sections of the model have different thicknesses and the midsurfaces of the sections do not coincide. Thus, if you define individual shell pairs for each thickness, the midsurfaces do not meet. In addition, gaps can occur in Pro/SHEETMETAL models, depending on how you create your features. This situation results from the fact that Pro/SHEETMETAL does not typically merge common feature faces, or wall junctions. In the solid following model, there are two gaps:
136
IndexIdealizations
Be aware that no modeling information passes between gaps. For example, if you create a constraint set that fixes the far end of section a for the model shown above, sections b and c would not see this constraint. Gaps can cause problems during analysis. If Mechanica analyzed the example model using the constraint set just described, the software would interpret the model as three independent bodies, only one of which is constrained. Because the model contains unconstrained bodies, Mechanica would display an error message and halt the analysis. You can correct this problem by inspecting the model closely for gaps. When you locate a gap, you can do one of the following: Use the Multiconstant Thickness command to redefine pairs for the surrounding geometry. For more information on this command, see Model Thickness. When you define multiconstant-thickness pairs for asymmetric models, slight shape differences can occur between the Pro/ENGINEER part and the model analyzed by Mechanica. Before using multiconstant thicknesses, determine whether this type of shape change is acceptable in terms of the results you want Mechanica to provide. Rework the part geometry in Pro/ENGINEER to improve midsurface coincidence. Treat the model as a solid instead of a shell. For Pro/SHEETMETAL, rework the features using the Merge Walls command. For information on merged walls and how to create them, search the Sheetmetal functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Test Shell Compression Gaps in Assemblies
137
Gaps in Assemblies
For assemblies, gaps typically occur at locations where two parts meet or overlap. Pro/ENGINEER assembly constraints are such that Mechanica treats an assembly as a single body for solid modeling. However, when you treat an assembly as a shell and perform midsurface compression, Mechanica sees more than one body, resulting in a gap. For an analysis of a model to be accurate, you must correct these gaps so that the parts of the assembly move together as if they were a single body. For assemblies, the likelihood of gaps caused by midsurface compression is greater than it is for single parts because an assembly can have gaps between parts as well as within a particular part. For an example of an assembly that has a gap caused by midsurface compression, see Example: Assembly Model with Gap. To find gaps in your model, be sure to perform a compression test before starting an analysis. To avoid gaps in assemblies, you must make sure the midsurfaces of the parts connect. You can correct assembly gaps in various ways depending on your model geometry and sensitivities. Here are some methods you can consider: In native mode, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface connections wherever two components have mated or overlapping surfaces. When you mesh your model, these connections appear as dotted magenta lines along the edges of all connected curves and surfaces. If your meshed model shows automatic midsurface connections in areas where you do not want them, define free interfaces for these areas. In general, you should use automatic midsurface connections only if the size of the connections is small relative to the size of the model. In a model that uses automatic midsurface connections to connect two overlapping surfaces that are subject to displacement, Mechanica can give results that do not reflect the actual displacement. For a comparison of the expected results versus the actual results, see Results When Using Automatic Connections. You can use end welds, perimeter welds, or, in native mode, spot welds. You can use a rigid connection. You can use a fastener. You can use the Pair Place command on the MODIFY PAIR menu to define the midsurface placement so the midsurfaces of the parts touch in the merged area. This can result in coincident curves and surfaces, which can cause meshing problems.
When you start your first analysis or design study for an assembly, you should request error checking. Among other things, error checking includes a count of the disjoint bodies in the assembly.
138
IndexIdealizations
If Mechanica finds multiple disjoint bodies during error checking, your assembly may have gaps that you should consider before progressing further. The software does not consider spot welds when determining the number of disjoint bodies. Note: Do not confuse the term gaps as discussed here with the gap idealizations that you can create in FEM mode.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Test Shell Compression Gaps in Parts
In native mode, Mechanica treats all models as solid models by default. To direct Mechanica to treat your model as a midsurface shell model, or as a mixed model, you first need to define the model, or some areas of it, using midsurface shells. Then, use the following options buttons to indicate how Mechanica should mesh and analyze the model: To direct Mechanica to mesh and analyze your model as a shell model, select the AutoGEM>Midsurface option button. The Midsurface command is selected by default when you create shell pairs, but if you start a new session of Mechanica with a model for which you created shells, you should check the setting. For example, if you have defined shell pairs for the surfaces in your
139
model, but want to analyze the model as a solid without deleting the shells, you would select the AutoGEM>Solid command instead. To direct Mechanica to mesh and analyze your model as a mixture of midsurface shells and solids, select the AutoGEM>Solid/Midsurface option button.
In FEM mode, the way you indicate how you want Mechanica to treat models that include midsurface shells is different. In this case, you select the model treatment when you create the mesh. Specifying Mesh Treatment for Models with Midsurfaces The Solid, Midsurface, and Solid/Midsurface options on the AutoGEM menu let you specify whether Mechanica will treat models that include midsurfaces as solid models, midsurface shell models, or a mixture of both during meshing and analysis. These toggle keys are only available in the native mode. In the FEM mode, you indicate model treatment at the time you create the FEM mesh. In models that have no midsurfaces, the Solid option is turned on and the Midsurface and Solid/Midsurface options are deactivated. However, when you define shell pairs for your model, the software automatically activates these two options and turns on the Midsurface option. Provided that you keep the option on, Mechanica meshes and analyzes the model as a shell model. If any potion of the model is a solid, Mechanica omits that portion from the mesh and, consequently the analysis. If you want to include the solid portions of the model, turn on the Solid/Midsurface option instead. For models with midsurfaces, the Midsurface option stays on by default unless you select one of the other two options and then save your model in that state. If you delete all the shell pairs in your model, Mechanica automatically turns off and deactivates the Midsurface and Solid/Midsurface options, reverting to the Solid option.
MIDSURFACES Menu
When you select Insert>Midsurface, the MIDSURFACES menu appears. From this menu, you can use the following commands: Auto Detect This command automatically creates shell pairs by pairing any suitable surfaces. New This command lets you specify the shell thickness type and select the surfaces that are to be paired. Edit This command takes you to the MODIFY PAIR menu, where you can edit an existing shell pair. Show This command lets you display the surfaces included in a shell pair. At the same time, the software displays a message telling you the thickness type associated with the shell pair. Delete This command lets you delete a shell pair from the model. Compress This command lets you compress the shell pair to its midsurface to review the result of compression.
140
IndexIdealizations
To Create a Midsurface
You create a midsurface by pairing two surfaces. Mechanica creates a midsurface from the surface pair and assigns shell elements to them. 1. Select Insert>Midsurface or click . 2. Select one of the following commands: o Auto Detect Select this command to automatically pair any surfaces that can be automatically created. o New Select this command to manually pair surfaces. 3. Select Constant to define a constant-thickness pair or Multi Const to define a multi-constant-thickness pair. In FEM mode, select Constant or Variable. 4. Select the surfaces you want to include in the pair. 5. Select Show to review the model's pairing scheme. 6. Select Compress to review the midsurface compression and check for errors. 7. If you find any unpaired surfaces that you do not want to treat as a solid, repeat the appropriate procedures from step 2.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Test Shell Compression Defining Solid and Shell Models
Flip Pair This command lets you swap the red and yellow surfaces in order to flip the resulting mesh normal. Thick Type This command lets you specify whether the thickness of the surface pair you select is constant (the default value) or multiconstant.
141
See Also
Reference: Defining Solid or Shell Models
Shell Compression
Shell Compression Mechanica processes all solid models as single volumes. However, the software uses a different approach when processing models with paired shells. With shell models, Mechanica compresses the model to a midsurface or set of midsurfaces. To perform midsurface compression, Mechanica requires a pairing scheme for the surfaces you want to model.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Test Shell Compression Gaps in Parts Gaps in Assemblies Model Thickness Model Entities and Idealizations
IndexIdealizations
wrong surfaces to pair. If there are gaps in your model, see either Gaps in Parts or Gaps in Assemblies. 6. Select Done from the COMPRES MDL menu when you finish reviewing the compressed model. 7. Be sure to correct any pairing problems using the commands on the MODIFY PAIR menu.
See Also
Reference: About Shells
3. If you want to work with the model as is, review the state of the UseUnopposed check box.
See Also
Reference: Unopposed Surfaces
ShowCompress displays the compressed midsurface. Mechanica highlights the midsurface in yellow, unopposed surfaces in cyan, and surfaces that may be missing from a pair in red. ShowOriginal displays the original model geometry. Mechanica highlights the original three-dimensional geometry in green and surfaces that may be missing from a pair in red. Show Both displays the original model geometry and compressed midsurface. Mechanica highlights the original three-dimensional geometry in green, the compressed midsurface in yellow, and surfaces that maybe be missing from a pair in red. Show Paired displays the paired surfaces only, if you have both paired and unpaired surfaces in your model. The unpaired surfaces (shown in red) disappear when you select this command.
If your model includes unopposed surfaces, the UseUnopposed check box appears on this menu, and is selected by default. Clear this check box if you do not want Mechanica to include unopposed surfaces during analysis.
See Also
Procedure: To Handle Unopposed and Unpaired Surfaces
144
IndexIdealizations
Reference:
When you select the Insert>Beam command, the Beam Definition dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to create beams in native mode, and to create beams and trusses in FEM mode. After you create a beam, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a beam, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. To manage beam sections, orientations, and releases, use the Properties menu. There are three coordinate systems that govern the way Mechanica defines and analyzes beams. To understand how to use these coordinate systems to design your beams and to obtain the desired results for your beam read Beam Coordinate Systems. You can control the visibility of beams on your model by using the View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Set Icon Visibilities for Modeling Entities Beam Elements Precedence Rules Creating Load Paths for FEM Meshing
145
When you create your beam, you use the Y Direction option on the Beam Definition dialog box to specify how the BACS relates to the WCS. You can then offset the BSCS from the BACS by using the options on the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box.
See Also
References: Beam Definition Dialog Box About Beam Orientations
146
IndexIdealizations
ends of your beam. However, in native mode, you can only specify section and orientation properties for the beam start. These tabs include the following items: o Section Define the cross-section properties for beams and save sections in a library. o Orientation Specify the orientation of the beam shape coordinate system with respect to the beam action coordinate system. o Release Specify the degrees of freedom at each beam end. Extra tab In FEM mode only,define, stress relief factors and specify whether to include stress recovery information.
When you create a beam or a truss, Mechanica displays an icon on your model that includes a line representing the beam X axis and a figure representing the beam cross section. To learn how FEM mode's FEA solvers treat beams, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Beam To Create a Beam Section To Define Beam Orientation To Create a Beam Release
Beam References
The geometric entities that you use for your beam define the location and direction of the beam X axis. Select one of the following reference types on the Beam Definition dialog box to define the location of your beam on your model: PointPoint Create a beam between two points or vertices, or any combination of the two. The positive direction of the beam goes from the first selected point to the second. PointSurface Create a beam between a point or vertex and a surface. The positive direction of the beam goes from the point to the surface. PointEdge Create a beam between a point or vertex and an edge. The positive direction of the beam goes from the point to the edge. Note: For the location of the beam end positioned on the surface/edge, the software selects the spot that is closest to the first point of the beam. If you need to position the beam at a particular place on the surface/edge, use the Point-Point option and create a datum point along the surface/edge. PointPoint Pairs Create multiple point-to-point beams with the same characteristics. 147
Chain (feature/pattern of points) Create a beam that runs along a sequence of points. Edge/Curve Create a beam that runs along an edge or a curve. You can select multiple curves and edges with which to associate a beam. To indicate the direction of a beam, Pro/ENGINEER displays a purple arrow at the center of each selected edge or curve. To invert the direction of an already-selected edge or curve beam, click on it again and the software redraws the arrow. If you select a curve that is not straight, the beam X axis lies along the length of and tangent to the curve. The Y direction is in the plane of the curve. If you select a vector direction for the Y direction that is not within the plane of the curve, Mechanica chooses the closest direction within the plane, or perpendicular to the plane.
SurfaceSurface (Beam contact) Create a beam between two surfaces. This option is available only in FEM mode. For information on allowed surfaces, see Guidelines for Surface-Surface Connections and Interfaces (FEM mode).
The points you use for any reference type requiring points can be any of the following: single point or vertex point feature (includes one or more single points) pattern of point features
The software treats the beams you create from point features or patterns of points as single entities. You cannot specify different properties for different beams created from the same point feature or pattern of point features.
Beam Type
In FEM mode, only, select the type of beam you want to define on the Beam Definition dialog box. You can define two types of beams: Beam A beam has an assigned material, Y direction, beam section(s), beam orientation(s), and beam releases. You can specify different beam section shapes and sizes for the beam ends in FEM mode. Truss A truss is a special kind of beam that has properties that define its material and cross-sectional area. You cannot define the orientation or release properties for a truss. A truss has no rotational DOF, and experiences no bending or torsional effects under load.
148
IndexIdealizations
beam action coordinate system as perpendicular to the XY plane. The Y and Z axes you define in this way orient the BACS. You can define the Y direction of a beam by selecting any of the following entities on your model: Point Define the beam's XY plane by the X axis of the beam and its Y vector, which extends from the start point of the beam to the selected datum point or vertex. Edge In FEM mode only, define the beam's XY plane with the beam's X vector and the projection from the start point of the beam toward the selected edge. Curve In FEM mode only, define the beam's XY plane with the beam's X vector and the projection from the start point of the beam to the selected datum curve. Axis Define the beam's XY plane with the beam's X vector and the projection from the beam start point to the selected axis. Surface In FEM mode only, define the beam's XY plane with the beam X vector and the projection of the start point of the beam to the selected surface. Vector in WCS Define the beam's Y direction by entering the X, Y, and Z components of a vector. The default is 0, 1, 0, which specifies a Y direction parallel to the positive Y axis of the WCS.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Beam
To Create a Beam
1. Select Insert>Beam or click .
The Beam Definition dialog box appears. 2. Type a name for the beam, or use the default name. 3. Select a reference type for the beam location from the drop-down list. 4. If you did not select reference(s) before opening the dialog box, click to select them now. 5. Select the material for the beam from the drop-down list, or click More to create a new material or select a material from the library. 6. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list to define the Y direction: o Point o Axis o Vector in WCS 7. On the Start tab, select a beam section from the drop-down list or click the More button to create a new beam section.
149
8. Select a beam orientation from the drop-down list or click the More button to define a new beam orientation. 9. Select a beam release from the drop-down list or click the More button to create a new beam release. 10. On the End tab, select a beam release from the drop-down list or click the More button to create a new beam release. 11. Select OK to accept your definition, or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the beam.
See Also
References: About Beams About Beam Sections About Beam Orientations About Beam Releases Y Direction for Beams
150
IndexIdealizations
FEM mode In addition to adding a mass to a point, you can also add a mass that is distributed over geometric entities such as curves, edges, or surfaces. Use distributed masses, for example, to represent the mass contribution from paint, or from a large number of small objects. You can select several curves, edges, or surfaces. To learn how FEM mode's FEA solvers treat masses, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN. If you want to override the precedence rules for masses in FEM mode, you can use the config.pro option sim_additive_mass. When you set this option to "Yes," you can create several masses that reference the same geometric entity and the software will include all of the masses. Also, with this option turned on you can override the precedence rules that normally govern mass creation. For example, if sim_additive_mass is set to "No" and you try to create two masses, mass a on a single point and mass b on a feature of points containing the single point, mass a on the single point overrides mass b on that same single point, leaving mass b on the other points in the feature unchanged. But if sim_additive_mass is set to "Yes," you can create both masses, and include both masses in your analysis. Use this option, for example, to simulate two layers of paint as distributed masses on a surface.
If you need to create additional datum points or curves before you begin the process of adding masses to your model, you can use the Insert>Model Datum>Point or Insert>Model Datum>Curve command. Keep in mind that if you want to model a mass on a point that is separate from your model, you must connect it to the model, for example, with rigid links or beams. Otherwise, the mass will not be included in any analyses. You can control the visibility of masses on your model by using the View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers.
See Also
References: Precedence Rules Datum Point Datum Curve Mass and Spring Elements
References If you already selected valid geometric references for your mass before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Otherwise, use the selector arrow to select a datum point or a vertex. For Simple or Advanced masses you can also select multiple single points, multiple points, vertices or features, or a single point pattern for your mass. Use the SIM SELECT menu to specify which type of entity you want to use. Tip: Read Precedence Rules for information on how the software applies masses to these references.
Type The Properties area of the dialog box changes depending upon the type you select from the drop-down list. o Simple Enter a real-number value for the mass, or click p to create or select a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. o Advanced Select a coordinate system or accept the default WCS. You must also specify a mass property for advanced masses. The mass properties are relative to the selected coordinate system. You can use any mass property previously defined for your model, or you can click the More button to define new mass properties. Tip: You cannot locate an advanced mass on the Z axis of a cylindrical coordinate system, or on the = 0 axis of a spherical coordinate system. o Component (for assembly mode only) Select a part or subassembly on your model. The software uses the mass property definition of the component for your mass idealization, as described in Masses Based on Components.
See Also
References: Parameter-Capable Edit Fields Object Action Shortcut Menu
152
IndexIdealizations
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Coordinate System
The Mass Definition dialog box appears. 2. Enter a descriptive name for your mass, or use the default name provided. 3. Accept Point(s) as the reference. 4. Click , select one of the following from the SIM SELECT menu to specify where the mass will be located, and select the appropriate entity on your model. o Single (default) o Feature o Pattern 5. Select one of the following from the drop-down list under Type. o Simple o Advanced o Component 6. If you select Simple, enter a real-number value for the mass or click p to open the Select Pro/ENGINEER Parameter dialog box. 7. If you select Advanced, specify mass properties and select a coordinate system, or accept the WCS as the default. 8. In assembly mode only, if you select Component, click and use the normal selection methods to select a part or subassembly to supply the mass value. 9. Select OK to accept your definition, or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the mass.
See Also
Reference: Parameter-Capable Edit Fields
153
References If you already selected valid geometric references for your mass before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Otherwise, select one of these items from the drop-down list, and use the selector arrow to select a reference on your model. o Point(s) Use the selector arrow to select a point or vertex on your model. If you want to create a simple or advanced mass, you can also select multiple single points, point features and point patterns. o Edge(s) or Curve(s) Use the selector arrow to select an edge or datum curve. o Surface(s) Use the selector arrow to select a surface. Note: If the config.pro option sim_additive_mass is set to "Yes," you can create multiple masses on the same geometric entity, or on geometric entities, which would share the same node after meshing, and thus would invoke the precedence rules if the option were turned off. If you create a mass using a geometric reference on which you previously created a mass, the software opens a dialog box stating that another entity uses the same references. When you confirm, the software creates the second mass.
Type Select from these mass types: o Simple Create a simple mass on a point, pattern of points, or feature of points, along a curve or edge, or across a surface. o Advanced Create an advanced mass with mass properties relative to a coordinate system. You can only assign advanced masses to points, patterns of point, or features of points. o Component Create a mass based on an assembly component's mass, moments of inertia, and center of gravity as described in Masses Based on Components (FEM mode). You can only assign component masses to points, patterns of point, or features of points in an assembly.
The Properties area of the dialog box changes depending upon the type you select from the drop-down list.
See Also
References: Solving a Model Using an FEA Program Strategy: Keeping Models Simple Parameter-Capable Edit Fields Object Action Shortcut Menu About FEM Meshes
154
IndexIdealizations
The Mass Definition dialog box appears. 2. Enter a descriptive name for your mass, or accept the default name. 3. If you did not select valid geometry as references before you entered the dialog box, select one of these options from the References drop-down list: o Point(s) o Curves(s)/Edges(s) o Surface(s) 4. If you select Point(s), see the procedure To Add a Mass to a Point. 5. If you select Curves(s)/Edges(s), or Surfaces(s), click and use the regular selection methods to select one or more curves(s), edges(s), or surfaces(s). 6. Select Simple or Component (for assemblies) from the drop-down list under Type. 7. If you select Simple, select Total, Per Unit Length (curves and edges), or Per Unit Area (surfaces) from the drop-down list under Properties. 8. Enter a real-number value for the mass, or click p and select or create a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. 9. In assembly mode only, if you select Component, click and use the normal selection methods to select a part or subassembly to supply the mass value. 10. Select OK to accept your definition, or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the mass.
See Also
Reference: Parameter-Capable Edit Fields
can create spring properties by selecting Properties>Spring Properties or from the Spring Definition dialog box as you are creating advanced or to-ground-type springs. When you select the Insert>Spring command, Mechanica displays the Spring Definition dialog box, which includes the following items: Name The name of the spring. You can enter a descriptive name or accept the default. References Use this area to select the geometric references for your spring. If you already selected valid geometric references before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box opens. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the desired geometry. Type When you select one of these types of spring from the drop-down list, the dialog box changes. o Simple You define a simple spring by specifying the extensional and torsional stiffness with a real-number value or a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. o Advanced You define an advanced spring by specifying the magnitude and direction of components for the spring extensional and torsional stiffness. o To Ground You define this type of spring by specifying the orientation of the components for the extensional and torsional stiffness in terms of a selected coordinate system.
When you click OK to accept your definition, the software adds a spring icon to your model. You can control the visibility of springs on your model by using the View>Simulation Display command, or by placing them on layers. After you create a spring, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a spring, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. To learn how FEM mode's FEA solvers treat springs, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Simple Spring To Create an Advanced Spring To Create a To Ground Spring References: Guidelines for Spring Creation Precedence Rules Creating Load Paths for FEM Meshing Mass and Spring Elements
156
IndexIdealizations
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Simple Spring To Create an Advanced Spring To Create a To Ground Spring
Use the following areas on the simple version of the Spring Definition dialog box to define a simple spring: Extensional stiffness The stiffness that resists the stretching or compression of the spring. You can enter a real-number value or an expression that contains parameter names. Torsional stiffness The stiffness that resists the twisting of the spring. You can enter a real-number value or an expression that contains parameter names.
These two stiffness fields are parameter-capable edit fields. They can accept Pro/ENGINEER parameters as stiffness values, which you can select from a displayed list.
157
Note: If you are using a simple spring to join two parts, make sure that the parts are attached to each other in another manner, or that they are constrained. Simple springs do not require that you specify an orientation.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Simple Spring Guidelines for Spring Creation
The Spring Definition dialog box appears. 2. Enter a name for the spring, or use the default name provided. 3. Select Simple as the spring type. 4. If you did not select geometric references before opening the dialog box, click under References and use the normal methods to select references on your model to specify the locations of the spring's end points. 5. Define the spring stiffness properties by entering real-number values for the following properties, or click p to use a Pro/ENGINEER parameter: o Extensional Stiffness o Torsional Stiffness 6. Click OK to save the new spring.
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Spring Creation
IndexIdealizations
Properties Use any stiffness properties previously defined for your model, or define new stiffness properties. Y Direction Define the orientation of the spring by selecting a coordinate system. This defines the directions to which the spring stiffnesses refer. You can select any coordinate system for this purpose. The default is the WCS.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a To Ground Spring Guidelines for Spring Creation
The Spring Definition dialog box appears. 2. Enter a name for the spring, or use the default name provided. 3. Select To Ground as the spring type. 4. If you did not select points as geometric references before opening the dialog box, click and use the normal methods to select references on your model to specify a location for the spring. 5. Define stiffness properties for the spring. You can select a previously-defined stiffness property from the drop-down list, or you can click the More button to define new stiffness properties. 6. Click in the Y Direction area to select a coordinate system to specify the orientation of your spring. The default is the WCS. 7. Click OK to save the new spring.
159
Y Direction Select a method to define the orientation of the spring properties. Additional Rotation Enter a real-number value for the number of degrees to rotate the spring's Y axis.
In FEM mode, advanced springs can have a zero lengththat is, they can have coincident ends. An example might be a spring between a point on a surface and the surface itself. To learn how the FEA solvers treat advanced springs, see ANSYS and MSC/NASTRAN.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Create an Advanced Spring Advanced Spring Restrictions (FEM mode) Guidelines for Spring Creation
160
IndexIdealizations
Axis Use the selector arrow to select a reference axis that is parallel to the spring's XY plane. Vector in WCS Specify the X, Y, and Z components, relative to the WCS, of a direction vector that lies in the spring's XY plane. This option is the default selection.
Coordinate System Specify the coordinate system to which the spring properties refer. You can select any coordinate system for this purpose. The default is the WCS. Note: You can define zero-length springs in FEM mode. In this case, to define the orientation, you should select a coordinate system.
See Also
Reference: Advanced Spring Restrictions (FEM mode)
The Spring Definition dialog box appears. 2. Enter a name for the spring, or use the default name provided. 3. Select Advanced as the spring type. 161
4. If you did not select geometric references before opening the dialog box, click and use the normal methods to select references on your model to specify a location for the spring. Define stiffness properties for the spring. You can select a previously-defined stiffness property from the drop-down list, or you can click the More button to define new stiffness properties. Define the Y direction of your spring. Enter an additional rotation if you want a value other than zero. If you do not enter a value, the software assumes a value of zero. Click OK to save the new spring.
5.
6. 7. 8.
Precedence Rules
Precedence rules for your idealizations and connections determine which modeling entity takes precedence when you apply two modeling entities of the same type on or between the same reference entities. There are two types of precedence rules, modeling precedence rules and geometric precedence rules. Modeling Precedence Rules These rules apply when you work with assemblies, and are determined by the assembly hierarchy: When you apply a modeling entity from a top-level assembly, this modeling entity takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a subassembly or a part. When you apply a modeling entity from a subassembly, this modeling entity takes precedence over a modeling entity applied from a part.
Geometric Precedence Rules Keep these rules in mind when working with the modeling entities that require points, curves, or surfaces as their reference entities. With some of these modeling entities, you can use multiple geometric entities as reference entities. For example, you can select a feature or a pattern of points and create a beam, spring, or rigid link that runs along a sequence of points. You can also apply a beam on multiple curves, or place a shell on a collection of surfaces. If you later create a new modeling entity of the same type, placing it on or between the same reference entities, it overrides the existing one when the following conditions are met: You select a higher precedence geometric entity as a reference entity for your new modeling entity. The higher precedence geometric entity belongs to a lower precedence geometric entity already referenced by your existing modeling entity.
For example, if you select a single point as a reference entity for your new beam, the new beam overrides an existing one that references a feature of points that include this single point. 162
IndexIdealizations
The following table illustrates how the precedence rules work for modeling entities that can reference points, curves, or surfaces.
Modeling Entity or Mesh Control Reference Entity Geometric Precedence Rule A single point takes precedence over a feature of points or a pattern of points. A feature of points takes precedence over a pattern of points. Points take precedence over curves, edges, and surfaces.
points
curves or edges
An individual curve takes precedence over a composite curve. Curves and edges take precedence over surfaces.
surfaces
163
For most properties, you must perform two main activitiescreating the property and assigning the property: Property Creation You can create properties at any time through the Properties menu and the dialog boxes for each property type. You can also create properties associated with idealizations as you create the idealization. Property Assignment You can assign most properties that are associated with idealizations while creating the idealization. For example, you can assign spring properties as you create a spring idealization. You can assign properties associated with geometry or with the model as a whole at any time prior to analysis. Material properties assigned to a part or surface fall into this category.
To learn more about the properties required by idealizations, see Properties on Idealizations and Geometry. For information on factors you should consider when using properties, see Considerations for Using Properties
Deleting Properties
You can delete properties using the following commands: Material Properties Properties>Materials. The Materials dialog box appears. You select a material from the Materials in Model list and click the Delete button to eliminate it. In FEM mode, you can also unassign materials you have assigned to your model. Shell Properties Properties>Shell Properties. The Shell Properties dialog box appears. You select a shell property from the Shell Properties in Model list and click the Delete button to eliminate it.
164
IndexProperties
Beam Section Properties Properties>Beam Sections. The Beam Sections dialog box appears. You select a beam section from the Beam Sections in Model list and click the Delete button to eliminate it.
Using Orthotropic or Transversely Isotropic Material Properties If you plan to use orthotropic or transversely isotropic material properties, you need to assign material orientation properties to solids, 2D solids, and 2D plates. See About Material Orientation for more information.
When you select the Properties>Beam Sections command, the Beam Sections dialog box appears. You can also access this dialog box by clicking the More button in the Section area of the Beam Definition dialog box. Use the items on this dialog box to create, edit, copy, or delete beam sections. You can create several types of beam sections from these three categories. Standard beam sections reflect a particular predefined beam shape. You use the sketcher to define the shapes for sketched beam sections. General types do not reflect a particular shape. When you create a beam, Mechanica represents each of the standard beam section types with a unique icon that represents their shape and size. Icons for sketched sections reproduce the sketch, and General section icons are not associated with any shape.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Create a Beam Section Beam Section Property Calculations Sketched Thin and Sketched Solid
166
IndexProperties
Beam Section Library Library Lists for Beam Sections, Shell Properties, and Spring Properties
You can save beam section definitions, shell properties, and spring stiffness properties in property-specific libraries. These libraries are a convenient way to use the same property definition for more than one model. There is no limit to the number of property definitions you can have in a model or in your library. You can use the library lists on the Beam Sections, Shell Properties, and Spring Properties dialog boxes to add property definitions to these libraries, or to move property definitions from a library to your model. For information on how Mechanica saves the libraries, see Managing Library Files. Adding to the libraries After you create a property definition, use the left arrow button on the appropriate dialog box to move the definition from the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. This places the current property definition in your library. Be aware that Mechanica creates and saves the property-specific library file as soon as you move the first property from the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. If the property definition you are adding has the same name as a definition already in the library, Mechanica tells you that the name already exists and asks if you want to overwrite it. If you select No, Mechanica does not add the current definition to the library. You cannot, overwrite a property definition in the Entity in Model list with a property definition with the same name from the Entity in Library list. If you create a new property definition with the same name as a definition already in the library, the left arrow button becomes inactive. Editing library definitions To edit a property definition from the library, use the right arrow button to move the property definition from the Entity in Library list to the Entity in Model list and select Edit to open the dialog box that you used to create the property definition. When you are finished editing, use the left arrow button to move it back to the Entity in Library list.
Note that if you have a beam section library file (mbmsct.lib) from an earlier release present in one of the directories where Mechanica searches for the libraries and you save a new beam section into that library, the software creates a beam_sections directory that includes a .bsf file for each of the previous beam section definitions. Mechanica retains the original beam section library file so you can archive it or use it with older Mechanica releases that support .lib files for beam sections. Shell properties mshlprp.lib. Spring stiffness properties mspstf.lib
The default location for all library files is your home directory, but you can move it to a different directory. You can use the environment variable $HOMEDRIVE to set your home directory on Windows platforms. When you access the library, Mechanica looks for the library file in the following directories in this order: 1. the directory from which you started Mechanica 2. your home directory 3. the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory You can move or copy the library files into any of the above directories. Note: For the beam section library, you can specify another location for the beam_sections directory with the config.pro option sim_beamsec_path. You must use a full path for this option.
168
IndexProperties
o Solid Ellipse o Hollow Ellipse o Sketched Solid o Sketched Thin Review Click this button to open the embedded browser with a summary of the parameters that Mechanica calculates for your section. Warp & Mass tab In FEM mode only, use this tab to define additional beam values when you use the MSC/NASTRAN solver.
169
See Also
Reference: Beam Contribution
170
IndexProperties
The beam section icon lies in a plane orthogonal to the beam X axis, as shown in this illustration:
Note that for general sections, the software does not display an icon. For sketched sections, the software uses a reproduction of the sketch for the icon. For information on the icons used for each beam section type, see Beam Section Definition Dialog Box and select the description for the appropriate beam section type.
171
The calculation of torsional stiffness depends on the type of section. The section types, and their torsional stiffness calculations, are as follows: o An open section:
J = 1/3 Ut3 where U is the total length of the sketched section, and t is the thickness. o A section containing a single closed cell:
J = 4 Am2 t / U where Am is the area enclosed by the loop that defines the section, t is the thickness, and U is the total length. For more complex sections, the software applies a numerical procedure. See R.J. Roark and W.C. Young, Formulas for Stress and Strain, 6th edition, for examples. Note: For beams likely to experience torsional loading or deformation, it is recommended that you use the standard, predefined Mechanica sections.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click the New button. The Beam Section Definition dialog box appears. Enter a section name or use the default name. Optionally, enter a description. On the Section tab, select the type of beam you want to create. In FEM mode only, on the Warp & Mass tab, define beam section information. 7. Optionally, you can click the Review button to review the beam section properties. 8. Click OK to save the beam section and exit the dialog box.
172
IndexProperties
See Also
References: About Beams About Beam Sections
For information on how the software defines beam orientation, see Beam Coordinate Systems.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Beam Orientation
173
If you create a sketched beam section, the orientation of the Y and Z axes for the BSCS is the same as the orientation of the Y and X axes in the sketcher. For a general cross section, the software determines the BCPCS based on your specifications, and the BSCS is essentially the same as the BCPCS for this crosssection type. When Mechanica draws the beam section outline as part of the beam icon in the model window, it also draws the BSCS, with a Y-shape at the tip of the Y axis and an arrow at the tip of the Z axis. You can position the origin of the BSCS relative to the BACS by entering values for DY and DZ on the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box. You can also rotate the BSCS around the beam X axis by entering a value for Orientation Angle on the same dialog box. As an alternative adjustment, you can click the Shear Center radio button to position the shear center of the beam section relative to the BACS. When you assign a beam orientation to your beam, Mechanica adjusts the beam icon in the model window to reflect the rotational and linear offsets.
174
IndexProperties
See Also
Examples: Orienting the BSCS to the BACS Orienting the BSCS Shear Center
Shear Center is the point on a beam section about which the section rotates under deflection. For many of the standard beam sections, the shear center is coincident with the shape origin. Channel sections and L-sections are exceptions. For channel sections, for example, the shear center is below the shape origin. You can view the offset of the shear center from the shape origin when you define or edit your beam section by reviewing beam section properties. DX (FEM mode only) Offset of the BSCS X axis from the BACS X axis. The offset occurs along the direction of the BSCS X axis. DY, DZ Offset of the BSCS from the BACS along the axis direction of the BSCS. o
See Also
Procedure: To Define Beam Orientation
2. Click the New button. The Beam Orientation Definition dialog box appears. 3. Enter a descriptive name for the beam orientation, or accept the default name. 4. Optionally, enter a description. 5. Enter the orientation angle. 6. Select Shape Origin or Shear Center as the attribute that you want to offset with respect to the BACS. 7. Enter values for DY and DZ. In the FEM mode, you can also enter a value for DX. 8. Click OK to save the definition and return to the Beam Orientations dialog box. The beam orientation definition appears in the list.
See Also
References: About Beams About Beam Orientation
176
IndexProperties
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Beam Release
177
If a degree of freedom is released in any direction, Mechanica adds the appropriate indicator to the icon: arrow head indicates a translational release of the degree of freedom for the indicated direction ring indicates a rotational release of the degree of freedom for the indicated direction
In the following illustration, the beam release has degrees of freedom released in all six directions:
178
IndexProperties
Click the New button. The Beam Release Definition dialog box appears. Enter a name for the beam release or accept the default name. Optionally, enter a description. Select the degrees of freedom you want to release by toggling on any of the Translation or Rotation buttons. 6. Click OK to complete the definition.
2. 3. 4. 5.
See Also
References: About Beams About Beam Releases
2D Plane Stress
2D Plane Strain
2D Axisymmetric
179
You can assign a shell property (its thickness and laminate matrices) to a face, region, or datum surface. You can also define a shell property that will reside in the shell property library, but is not assigned to a particular entity. The shell property library file is named mshlprp.lib. When you select the Properties>Shell Properties command, the Shell Properties dialog box appears. You use this dialog box to define the properties of a shell as you define the shell, or you can define a shell property and save it in the library. Before you define shell properties, see Guidelines for Using Shell Properties. To learn more about shell properties, see Shell Thickness. You can define three types of shell propertieshomogeneous, laminate layup, and laminate stiffness.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Shell Properties
Shell Property Library Library Lists for Beam Sections, Shell Properties, and Spring Properties
You can save beam section definitions, shell properties, and spring stiffness properties in property-specific libraries. These libraries are a convenient way to use the same property definition for more than one model. There is no limit to the number of property definitions you can have in a model or in your library. You can use the library lists on the Beam Sections, Shell Properties, and Spring Properties dialog boxes to add property definitions to these libraries, or to move property definitions from a library to your model. For information on how Mechanica saves the libraries, see Managing Library Files. Adding to the libraries After you create a property definition, use the left arrow button on the appropriate dialog box to move the definition from the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. This places the current property definition in your library. Be aware that Mechanica creates and saves the property-specific library file as soon as you move the first property from the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. If the property definition you are adding has the same name as a definition already in the library, Mechanica tells you that the name already exists and asks if you want to overwrite it. If you select No, Mechanica does not add the current definition to the library. You cannot, overwrite a property definition in the Entity in Model list with a property definition with the same name from the Entity in Library list. If you 180
IndexProperties
create a new property definition with the same name as a definition already in the library, the left arrow button becomes inactive. Editing library definitions To edit a property definition from the library, use the right arrow button to move the property definition from the Entity in Library list to the Entity in Model list and select Edit to open the dialog box that you used to create the property definition. When you are finished editing, use the left arrow button to move it back to the Entity in Library list.
The default location for all library files is your home directory, but you can move it to a different directory. You can use the environment variable $HOMEDRIVE to set your home directory on Windows platforms. When you access the library, Mechanica looks for the library file in the following directories in this order: 1. the directory from which you started Mechanica 2. your home directory 3. the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory You can move or copy the library files into any of the above directories. Note: For the beam section library, you can specify another location for the beam_sections directory with the config.pro option sim_beamsec_path. You must use a full path for this option.
181
Used for 2D and 3D shells Consists of a single material whose properties do not vary through the thickness of the shell Used for 3D shells Consists of one or more materials whose properties may vary through the thickness of the shell
Laminate
There are three types of shell properties: Homogeneous Assigned to homogeneous shells. Laminate Stiffness Assigned to laminate shells to specify their degree of stiffness. Laminate Layup Assigned to laminate shells to define them as layers of shells.
For more information about defining these property types, see the description of Property Type.
See Also
Reference: Model Thickness
182
IndexProperties
When you click New to create a new shell property, the Shell Property Definition dialog box appears.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define Shell Properties Advanced Shells
Used for 2D and 3D shells Consists of a single material whose properties do not vary through the thickness of the shell.
Laminate
Used for 3D shells Consists of one or more materials whose properties may vary through the thickness of the shell.
When you click New on the Shell Properties dialog box, the Shell Property Definition dialog box appears with these items: Name Enter a name or accept the default name. Description Enter an optional description. Property Type Select Homogeneous, Laminate Layup, or Laminate Stiffness. The items on the dialog box change depending upon your selection.
183
Homogeneous Stiffness
To define a homogeneous shell property type, you must specify a value in the Thickness field. You enter a positive value to define shell thickness for shells, 2D shells, 2D plates, surfaces, or curves you selected. When Mechanica creates the shell elements for the surface, it applies the thickness you specify for the shell property equally on both sides of the selected surface. For example, if you specify a shell thickness of 1, Mechanica places 0.5 on the top side of the surface and 0.5 on the bottom side. The Thickness field is a parameter-capable edit field. You can create or select a Pro/ENGINEER parameter for the thickness by clicking the p button.
Laminate Stiffness
To define a laminate stiffness shell property type, you must specify several values for Mechanica using the Shell Property Definition dialog box. Use the Stiffness tab and the Mass and Additional Calc tab to move from one portion of the dialog box to another. For each component there is a non-editable text field that displays the units. If you are working in the FEM mode, Mechanica does not support laminate stiffness. The components of the following stiffnesses are relative to the material orientation you have assigned to the shell. Entries in the fields on this dialog box are optional unless stated otherwise. You define them using the equations described in Shell Property Equations: Extensional Stiffness You must enter positive real numbers for A11, A22, and A66. Coupling Stiffness Entries in these fields are optional. Bending Stiffness You must enter positive real numbers for D11, D22, and D66. Transverse Shear Stiffness You must enter positive real numbers for A44 and A55.
The thermal resultant coefficients reflect the additional load applied to the laminate shell as a result of a difference in thermal properties in the ply materials. Mechanica assumes that the temperature distribution is uniform through the thickness of the shell. Keep this in mind when entering values in the Thermal Resultant Coefficients area for: Force Moment
If you want to perform a modal analysis of your model, or if this shell property set is to contribute to the total mass of the model, you must enter values for: 184 Mass Per Unit Area Rotary Inertia Per Unit Area
IndexProperties
If you click the Calculate Stresses and Strains button, more items appear. For ease of use when modeling composites and the ability to compute ply stresses in the postprocessor, use Laminate Layup rather than Laminate Stiffness.
Laminate Layup
A laminate consists of a number of layers, or plies, stacked on each other. When you define your 3D shell property as a laminate layup, you can: specify the properties for each ply obtain ply-by-ply stress results (native mode) parameterize ply thickness and orientation
You can review the properties for each ply in the results. For a picture of what a laminate layup shell looks like, see Laminate Layup Illustration. When you select Laminate Layup on the Shell Property Definition dialog box, additional items appear on the dialog box: Layup
For each ply, you must specify the following information: Material or Sub-laminate Thickness Orientation Number
Use the buttons to the right of the dialog box to control your laminate layup table. For ease of use when modeling composites and the ability to compute ply stresses in the postprocessor, use Laminate Layup rather than Laminate Stiffness.
Note: In the FEM mode, Mechanica supports laminate layup shell properties and material orientations assigned to surfaces for NASTRAN only. If you are running an analysis with another solver, Mechanica informs you that you cannot run the analysis with the solver you have chosen.
2. Click New. The Shell Property Definition dialog box appears. 3. Enter a name, or accept the default name. 185
4. Optionally, enter a description. 5. Select one of the following property types. The items on the dialog box change depending upon your selection. o Homogeneous o Laminate Layup o Laminate Stiffness 6. If you select Homogeneous, enter a real-number value for the thickness, or click p to select or create a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. Mechanica displays the units for the thickness. 7. If you select Laminate Stiffness or Laminate Layup, fill out the information on the dialog box. 8. Click OK to accept your definition, or Cancel to discard your changes and close the dialog box.
See Also
References: About Shell Properties
In either case, Mechanica opens the Spring Properties dialog box, which you can use to manage spring properties for an Advanced or To Ground spring. This dialog box lists any stiffness properties already created for your model and lets you create new ones. The dialog box contains the following items: Spring Properties in Library Displays a list of the spring properties you saved in your library. You can select one of these definitions and click the right arrow to move it to the Spring Properties in Model list. The spring properties library file is called mspstf.lib. Spring Properties in Model Displays a scrollable list of the spring properties that can be assigned to one or more springs in your model. You can select one of these spring property names to assign to the current spring definition. To add a spring property to your library, select it and use the left arrow to add it to the Spring Properties in Library List. Description This non-editable field displays the (optional) description you entered for the spring property currently selected in the Spring Properties in Library or Spring Properties in Model list.
186
IndexProperties
New Opens the Spring Properties Definition dialog box opens to allow you to create a new spring property. Copy Copies the selected spring property to a new name and adds it to the Spring Properties in Model list. A new spring property appears in the list with the default name SpringPropx, where x is one more than the number of items created for the model. To change the name, select it and click Edit. Edit Opens the Spring Properties Definition dialog box with the values of the selected spring property. Delete Removes the selected spring property from the Spring Properties in Model list.
If you accessed the Spring Properties dialog box from the Spring Definition dialog box, when you close the Spring Properties dialog box, the software uses the property you selected from the Spring Properties in Model list for the current spring definition, and displays the property name in the Spring Definition dialog box. If you did not select a property, the first property in the Spring Properties in Model list is selected by default.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define Spring Properties About Springs
Spring Property Library Library Lists for Beam Sections, Shell Properties, and Spring Properties
You can save beam section definitions, shell properties, and spring stiffness properties in property-specific libraries. These libraries are a convenient way to use the same property definition for more than one model. There is no limit to the number of property definitions you can have in a model or in your library. You can use the library lists on the Beam Sections, Shell Properties, and Spring Properties dialog boxes to add property definitions to these libraries, or to move property definitions from a library to your model. For information on how Mechanica saves the libraries, see Managing Library Files. Adding to the libraries After you create a property definition, use the left arrow button on the appropriate dialog box to move the definition from the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. This places the current property definition in your library. Be aware that Mechanica creates and saves the property-specific library file as soon as you move the first property from the Entity in Model list to the Entity in Library list. If the property definition you are adding has the same name as a definition already in the library, Mechanica tells you that the name already exists and
187
asks if you want to overwrite it. If you select No, Mechanica does not add the current definition to the library. You cannot, overwrite a property definition in the Entity in Model list with a property definition with the same name from the Entity in Library list. If you create a new property definition with the same name as a definition already in the library, the left arrow button becomes inactive. Editing library definitions To edit a property definition from the library, use the right arrow button to move the property definition from the Entity in Library list to the Entity in Model list and select Edit to open the dialog box that you used to create the property definition. When you are finished editing, use the left arrow button to move it back to the Entity in Library list.
The default location for all library files is your home directory, but you can move it to a different directory. You can use the environment variable $HOMEDRIVE to set your home directory on Windows platforms. When you access the library, Mechanica looks for the library file in the following directories in this order: 1. the directory from which you started Mechanica 2. your home directory 3. the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory You can move or copy the library files into any of the above directories. 188
IndexProperties
Note: For the beam section library, you can specify another location for the beam_sections directory with the config.pro option sim_beamsec_path. You must use a full path for this option.
Damping tab (FEM mode only) Specify non-negative values for the following properties of the spring: o o o Cxx Specifies the xx component of the damping coefficient relative to the spring's coordinate system. Cyy Specifies the yy component of the damping coefficient relative to the spring's coordinate system. Czz Specifies the zz component of the damping coefficient relative to the spring's coordinate system.
For information on defining extensional and torsional stiffness for 2D and 3D models, see Defining Spring Properties for 2D and 3D Models. Note that Mechanica labels the stiffness components using Cartesian component directions. To review the equivalent component directions for cylindrical and spherical components, see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems.
189
See Also
Reference: About Springs
Torsional stiffness For 3D models, you specify torsional stiffness in Txx, Tyy, and Tzz. For 2D plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models, you specify torsional stiffness only in Tzz. For 2D plane stress models, you do not specify torsional stiffness. A spring in a 2D plane stress model does not contribute to rotations when the engine calculates results.
Click New. The Spring Properties Definition dialog box appears. Enter a name or accept the default name. Optionally, enter a description. On the Stiffness tab, enter a non-negative real number for at least one of the extensional and torsional components: Kxx Kyy Kzz Txx Tyy Txx 6. In FEM mode only, on the Damping tab, enter a non-negative real number for any of the damping coefficients: 190
2. 3. 4. 5.
IndexProperties Cxx Cyy Czz 7. Click OK to accept your definition or Cancel to discard your changes and close the dialog box.
In either case, Mechanica displays the Mass Properties dialog box, which you can use to create a mass property. From this dialog box, you can also edit, copy, or delete an existing property. To create a new property, click New. The Mass Property Definition dialog box appears. You use this dialog box to define the property. This dialog box includes the following items: Name Enter a name for the mass property, or use the default name provided. Description Enter an optional description. Mass Specify the value of the mass in units consistent with the other units you have used in this model. You must enter a positive value. Moments of Inertia Specify the moments of inertia about each mass element's center of gravity with respect to the axes and principal planes of the WCS. For 3D models, you can specify values for Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Ixz, and Iyz. For plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models, you can specify a value for only Izz. For plane stress models, you cannot specify any moments of inertia. The default value for all moments is 0. Depending on the situation, you may not need to specify all of the diagonal terms when you specify moments of inertia. Note that Mechanica labels the moments of inertia using Cartesian component directions. To review the equivalent component directions for cylindrical and spherical components, see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems.
191
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Add a Mass to a Point About Masses
If you select this command in native mode, the Materials dialog box appears. If you select the Materials command in the FEM mode, the FEM MATERIAL menu appears. To learn more about materials, see: 192 Guidelines for Using Materials Material Types
IndexProperties
Material Property Requirements Material Basics Material Definition for Native and FEM Mode
You can assign the value of Pro/ENGINEER parameters as you create materials. In Structure, you can create isotropic materials that are temperaturedependent by specifying that Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, or the coefficient of thermal expansion is a function of temperature. You can also save materials in a library and use them across models. You cannot define material orientation for curvesor, by implication, beams. If you assign a material orientation to a part and that part gets compressed to a surface, the definition of the material orientation changes from one defined over a part to one defined over a surface. The material orientation applies to all the surfaces that are created when Mechanica compresses the part.
Material Types
You can define properties for three types of material symmetry: Isotropic a material with an infinite number of planes of material symmetry, making the properties equal in all directions. You enter a single value for each property. Orthotropic a material with symmetry relative to three mutually perpendicular planes. You enter three values for each property. 193
Transversely isotropic a material with rotational symmetry about an axis. The properties are equal for all directions in one plane, the plane of isotropy. You enter two values for each propertyone for the plane of isotropy, and one for the remaining principal material direction.
These types are independent for Structure and Thermal. Thus, a material may have isotropic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties. You can assign isotropic materials to any entity that requires materials. You can assign orthotropic and transversely isotropic materials to the following entities according to model type:
3D part face/surface shell Plane Stress/2D Plate shell All Other 2D Model Types face/surface
mass density
Young's modulus
Structural
yes
Poisson's ratio
Structural
yes
shear modulus
Structural
194
IndexProperties
Structural
failure criterion
Structural
specific heat
Thermal
thermal conductivity
Thermal
yes
Structural
Structural
Structural
Structural
Note: You can create isotropic material properties that are temperature-dependent by specifying Young's modulus, Poisson's ratio, or coefficient of thermal expansion as a function of temperature.
Material Basics
You can save materials in a library and use them across models. Both Mechanica productsStructure and Thermalcan use the properties from a single material set. You can use materials in the following ways: You can assign a material to one or more geometric entities in a model. You can place a material in a material library. You can create a new material.
There is no limit to the number of materials you can have in a model or in your library. For more information, see Materials Dialog Box or, for FEM mode, FEM MATERIAL menu.
195
See Also
Reference: Material Definition Dialog Box
Material Library
The material library is a convenient way to use the same material in more than one model. When you install Mechanica, the material library consists of a set of standard materials known as the default material library. If you do not find the material you want in the default material library, you can create your own material and add it to the library. When you save a material to the library, Mechanica creates a library file named mmatl.lib in your working directory. This new file contains all the materials in the Materials in Library listboth the Mechanica default materials and any materials you added. There is no limit to the number of materials you can have in your material library. You can edit any material in the library, whether the material is part of Mechanica's default material set or you created the material yourself. However, you cannot delete materials from the material library. Thus, if you create a new material and save it to the library, it will always be there. 196
IndexProperties
When you access the material library, Mechanica looks for the mmatl.lib file in the following directories in this order: 1. the directory from which you started Mechanica (working directory) 2. your home directory 3. the lib subdirectory of the directory in which Mechanica was installed You can move or copy the mmatl.lib file into any of these three directories.
197
For the meter-newton-second and millimeter-newton-second systems of units, the conductivity value is in the indicated system of unitsWatts/meterKelvin and milli-Watts/millimeter-Kelvin, respectively. For the foot-pound-second and inch-pound-second systems of units, the conductivity value is in Btu/hour-foot-degree-Fahrenheit and Btu/hour-inchdegree-Fahrenheit (not in pound/second-degree-Fahrenheit).
For transient thermal analysis, all of these measuring systems measure conductivity in seconds.
The following lists appear on the dialog box: Materials In Library Materials In Model
Use the arrow keys to do the following: Right arrow to add a material to the model from the library. This places the material in the model database. Note that the material must still be explicitly assigned to have an effect on an analysis. Left arrow to add a material to the library from the model
The following buttons on the dialog box enable you to perform various actions: Assign This option is not available when creating a beam definition or shell definition. This option is inactive in the FEM mode because you perform FEM mode material assignment from the FEM MATERIAL menu and not from this dialog box. New Edit Copy Delete This option is not available for a material associated with an idealization, such as a beam definition or shell definition.
198
IndexProperties
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material To Assign a Material in FEM Mode To Create a Material To Edit a Material To Copy a Material To Delete a Material
Assign a Material
On the Materials dialog box, click Assign to assign a material from the Materials In Library list or the Materials In Model list to one or more geometric entities. To add a material from either list to your model, select a material on the list, and click Assign. You can assign materials to parts, faces/surfaces, edges/curves. Note: The Assign button is inactive in FEM mode because you assign materials through the FEM MATERIAL menu rather than from the Materials dialog box. If you select a material from the Materials In Model list and click Assign, a dropdown list of entity types appears. If you select an entity type, you should use the normal selection methods to select one or more entities on the model. To change the properties of a material, click Edit to open the Material Definition dialog box where you can alter any property. You can verify an assignment by
199
selecting a material on the Materials In Model list and reviewing the highlighted part or geometry. After you assign materials to your model, Mechanica lists those materials on the Model Tree. If you select the material in the Model Tree, Mechanica highlights the part or surface to which it is assigned. For example, if you select bronze on the Model Tree, Mechanica will highlight every part or surface that is bronze. When assigning materials, be aware of these factors: When you assign a material to a part, Mechanica does not automatically assign the material to curves and surfaces of that part. To assign a material to curves or surfaces, you must specifically select the Edge/Curve or Face/Surface command on the Assign drop-down menu. You cannot change the name of a material. However, you can copy the material using a different name, thus achieving a similar effect. There is no need to assign a material to a curve for a 3D model. To assign materials to beams, use the Beam Definition dialog box instead of the Material Definition dialog box. If a surface has a material that is different from the material assigned to the volume it makes, reviewing the material assigned to the surface highlights just the surface, while reviewing the material assigned to the volume highlights the entire volume. You can assign a material to a shell pair surface that is different from the material that you assign to the part. Mechanica handles material assignment differently depending on whether you are working in part mode or assembly mode.
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material To Copy a Material To Edit a Material
To Assign a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material using one of the following methods: o Highlight a material on the Materials In Model list. o Highlight a material on the Materials In Library list. 3. Click Assign.
A drop-down list of entities appears.
200
IndexProperties
4. Select an entity type and use the normal selection methods to select one or more entities on your model. The material you selected appears on the Model Tree. 5. If you are working with an assembly and you select Part from the Assign drop-down list, you can use either the Model Tree, or the normal selection methods, to select a subassembly or the entire assembly. In this case, Mechanica implicitly assigns the material to all parts, datum, geometry, edges, and surfaces in the selected assembly or subassembly. 6. When you confirm your selection, the material is assigned to the entity, unless a material is already assigned to it. 7. If the entity you select is associated with a material other than the one you are trying to assign, Mechanica asks if you want to change the material. o o Click Yes to replace the current material with the selected material and be returned to the Materials dialog box. Click No to return to the Materials dialog box without changing the material.
This message does not appear if you assigned the same material in a product other than the one you are currently usingfor example, if you previously assigned a material in Thermal but are now in Structure. Continue on to About Material Orientation or return to previous.
Create a Material
Click New on the Materials dialog box to create a material. A blank Material Definition dialog box appears on which to define the material. After you complete the definition and click OK, the new material name appears on the Materials In Model list. Note that you can add a material to the Materials In Model list in the following ways: select a material from the library, and click the right arrow create a new material by using the New button on the Materials dialog box
Either method adds the new material to the database, but the material is not associated with any geometry until you assign it in either native Mode or FEM mode. If you add a new material to the material library, the software places the new material library in your home directory.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Material
201
On this dialog box, you enter the material name and an optional description, as well as determine definitions for: Cost Density
The principal system of units previously set for the model determines the units that appear by default on this dialog box. You can specify the system of units and also create individual units for your model. Choose one of the following tabs: Structural to define structural material properties for a model Thermal to define thermal material properties for a model
Different options appear on the Structural and Thermal tabs, depending on the material symmetry you select: Isotropic (in FEM mode, only isotropic materials are available) Orthotropic Transversely Isotropic
These symmetries are independent for Structure and Thermal. A material may have isotopic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties. The Mechanica library contains isotropic materials only. You define an isotropic material for materials such as steel. For wood or fiberreinforced composite, you define an orthotropic or transversely isotropic material.
To Create a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials. In FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Click New. The Material Definition dialog box appears. 3. Enter the appropriate material properties on the Material Definition dialog box. 202
IndexProperties
4. Click OK on the Material Definition dialog box. The material you created appears in the Materials In Model list on the Materials dialog box.
Edit a Material
Click Edit in the Materials dialog box to edit an assigned or unassigned material in the Materials in Model list. You can also edit a material in the Materials in Library list, but you must first move the material to the Materials in Model list. You can then move the edited material to the Materials in Library list, thus overwriting the original library material. When you click Edit, the Material Definition dialog box appears. Change the fields in the dialog box to the values you want for your material properties. By editing a material, you change the material on all of the geometric entities to which it was assigned.
See Also
Procedure: To Edit a Material
To Edit a Material
By editing a material, you change the material on all the geometric entities to which it was assigned. 1. Select Properties>Materials or click . In the FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in Mechanica's material library. 3. Click Edit. The Material Definition dialog box appears. 4. Change the fields in the dialog box to the values you want. As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to edit from the model tree. Right-click on the material or, for FEM mode solid chunks, the material assignment, and select the Edit Definition command from the object action menu.
203
Copy a Material
Click Copy on the Materials dialog box to duplicate a material on the Materials In Model list. You can also copy a material in the Materials in Library list, but you must first move the material to the Materials in Model list. Note that you cannot make an exact copy of a material because no two materials can have the same name. The materials may be identical in every way except their name. The copy will exist in the model file but not be assigned until you assign the material to a geometric entity.
See Also
Procedure: To Copy a Material
To Copy a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. 3. Click Copy. The Copy dialog box appears. 4. Enter a new material name xxx in the To text box. Mechanica duplicates a copy of the material xxx and places it in the Materials In Model list with the name of xxx. If the name is too long, the software issues a warning. The copy will exist in the model file but not be assigned until you assign the material to a geometric entity.
Delete a Material
Click Delete on the Materials dialog box to delete an assigned or unassigned material from the Materials in Model list, provided that material is not assigned to a shell or beam. You cannot delete any of the materials in the Materials in Library list. If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, Mechanica deletes the material from the model database. If you assigned the material to an entity, the
204
IndexProperties
software first asks whether you want to delete the material. Click one of the following buttons: No to retain the material Yes to delete the material. Mechanica deletes the material from your model and the model database.
See Also
Procedures: To Delete a Material To Create a Material
To Delete a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click . In the FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in Mechanica's material library. 3. Click Delete. If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, the material is deleted from the model database. 4. When you assign the material to an entity, the software asks whether you want to delete it. Click one of the following buttons: o No to retain the material o Yes to delete the material. The material is deleted from the model. As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to delete from the model tree. Right-click on the material and select the Delete command from the object action menu.
The following commands enable you to select an object type to which to apply a material: Whole Part Select the whole part. Solid Chunk Select a surface associated with a solid. The Solid Chunk option enables you to propagate the material throughout the tetrahedral elements in the solid area defined by the surface you select. For Solid Chunk, you must select a surface belonging fully to a solid portion of your model. You cannot select a surface that is only partially associated with a solid.
If you use the Solid Chunk option, you create a simulation object known as a Material Assignment. This object appears in the Model Tree with the default name of MaterialAssignX, where X is a unique number. You can rename the material assignment to make its associations more obvious.
You can also use the button as a quick alternative to using the FEM MATERIAL menu for assigning a material to a solid chunk.
The following commands on the FEM MATERIAL menu enable you to review information about a material, in addition to assigning materials to and unassigning materials from entities in your model: Info Review information about a material. Mechanica displays an information window that shows the material definition. Using commands in the information window, you can edit the material definition if you want to change values for specific properties such as Young's Modulus. Assign Assign a material to one or more entities of the object type you select on the upper section of the FEM MATERIAL menu. For Solid Chunk and Shell Pair, Mechanica prompts you to select an entity of the chosen object type. After you select an entity on your model, the Materials dialog box appears. Unassign Unassign a material from one or more entities of the object type you select on the upper section of the FEM MATERIAL menu. For Solid Chunk and Shell Pair, Mechanica prompts you to select an entity of the chosen object type.
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material in FEM Mode To Unassign a Material in FEM Mode Reference: Object Action
206
IndexProperties
The following lists appear on the dialog box: Materials In Library Materials In Model
Use the arrow keys to do the following: Right arrow to add a material to the model from the library. This places the material in the model database. Note that the material must still be explicitly assigned to have an effect on an analysis. Left arrow to add a material to the library from the model
The following buttons on the dialog box enable you to perform various actions: Assign This option is not available when creating a beam definition or shell definition. This option is inactive in the FEM mode because you perform FEM mode material assignment from the FEM MATERIAL menu and not from this dialog box. New Edit Copy Delete This option is not available for a material associated with an idealization, such as a beam definition or shell definition.
207
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material To Assign a Material in FEM Mode To Create a Material To Edit a Material To Copy a Material To Delete a Material
Assign a Material
Assign a Material in FEM Mode Click Properties>Materials. When the FEM MATERIAL menu appears with Assign highlighted, select one of the following object types: Whole Part Enables you to assign a material to the whole part. Solid Chunk Enables you to propagate a material throughout the tetrahedral elements in the solid area defined by the surface you select. Shell Pair Enables you to assign a material to a shell pair.
If you select Solid Chunk or Shell Pair, Mechanica prompts you to select an entity to which to assign a material. After you select an entity on your model, the Materials dialog box appears.
208
IndexProperties
Select a material from the Materials In Library list or from the Materials In Model list, or create a new material. After you click OK, the material is assigned to the selected entity. Repeat this procedure for each entity to which you are assigning a material.
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material in FEM Mode To Unassign a Material in FEM Mode Reference: Unassign a Material in FEM Mode
The FEM MATERIAL menu opens and software prompts you to select an object type to which to assign the material. 2. Select an object type on the FEM MATERIAL menu. The software prompts you to select an entity on the model. 3. Use the normal selection methods to select an entity or entities on your model. The Materials dialog box opens. 4. Select a material from the Materials In Model list. 5. If you want to use a material from the library, use the right arrow to move the material from the Materials in Library list to the Materials in Model list. The material you selected appears on the Model Tree. 6. Click OK. The material is assigned to the selected entity.
Create a Material
Click New on the Materials dialog box to create a material.
209
A blank Material Definition dialog box appears on which to define the material. After you complete the definition and click OK, the new material name appears on the Materials In Model list. Note that you can add a material to the Materials In Model list in the following ways: select a material from the library, and click the right arrow create a new material by using the New button on the Materials dialog box
Either method adds the new material to the database, but the material is not associated with any geometry until you assign it in either native Mode or FEM mode. If you add a new material to the material library, the software places the new material library in your home directory.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Material
On this dialog box, you enter the material name and an optional description, as well as determine definitions for: Cost Density
The principal system of units previously set for the model determines the units that appear by default on this dialog box. You can specify the system of units and also create individual units for your model. Choose one of the following tabs: Structural to define structural material properties for a model Thermal to define thermal material properties for a model
Different options appear on the Structural and Thermal tabs, depending on the material symmetry you select: 210 Isotropic (in FEM mode, only isotropic materials are available) Orthotropic Transversely Isotropic
IndexProperties
These symmetries are independent for Structure and Thermal. A material may have isotopic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties. The Mechanica library contains isotropic materials only. You define an isotropic material for materials such as steel. For wood or fiberreinforced composite, you define an orthotropic or transversely isotropic material.
To Create a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials. In FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Click New. The Material Definition dialog box appears. 3. Enter the appropriate material properties on the Material Definition dialog box. 4. Click OK on the Material Definition dialog box. The material you created appears in the Materials In Model list on the Materials dialog box.
Edit a Material
Click Edit in the Materials dialog box to edit an assigned or unassigned material in the Materials in Model list. You can also edit a material in the Materials in Library list, but you must first move the material to the Materials in Model list. You can then move the edited material to the Materials in Library list, thus overwriting the original library material. When you click Edit, the Material Definition dialog box appears. Change the fields in the dialog box to the values you want for your material properties. By editing a material, you change the material on all of the geometric entities to which it was assigned.
See Also
Procedure: To Edit a Material
211
To Edit a Material
By editing a material, you change the material on all the geometric entities to which it was assigned. 1. Select Properties>Materials or click . In the FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in Mechanica's material library. 3. Click Edit. The Material Definition dialog box appears. 4. Change the fields in the dialog box to the values you want. As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to edit from the model tree. Right-click on the material or, for FEM mode solid chunks, the material assignment, and select the Edit Definition command from the object action menu.
Copy a Material
Click Copy on the Materials dialog box to duplicate a material on the Materials In Model list. You can also copy a material in the Materials in Library list, but you must first move the material to the Materials in Model list. Note that you cannot make an exact copy of a material because no two materials can have the same name. The materials may be identical in every way except their name. The copy will exist in the model file but not be assigned until you assign the material to a geometric entity.
See Also
Procedure: To Copy a Material
To Copy a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
212
IndexProperties
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. 3. Click Copy. The Copy dialog box appears. 4. Enter a new material name xxx in the To text box. Mechanica duplicates a copy of the material xxx and places it in the Materials In Model list with the name of xxx. If the name is too long, the software issues a warning. The copy will exist in the model file but not be assigned until you assign the material to a geometric entity.
Delete a Material
Click Delete on the Materials dialog box to delete an assigned or unassigned material from the Materials in Model list, provided that material is not assigned to a shell or beam. You cannot delete any of the materials in the Materials in Library list. If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, Mechanica deletes the material from the model database. If you assigned the material to an entity, the software first asks whether you want to delete the material. Click one of the following buttons: No to retain the material Yes to delete the material. Mechanica deletes the material from your model and the model database.
See Also
Procedures: To Delete a Material To Create a Material
To Delete a Material
1. Select Properties>Materials or click . In the FEM mode, also select Whole Part on the FEM MATERIAL menu.
The Materials dialog box appears.
2. Select a material from the Materials in Model list. The material you select must be a user-created material rather than one of the standard materials in Mechanica's material library. 3. Click Delete. 213
If you did not previously assign the material to an entity, the material is deleted from the model database. 4. When you assign the material to an entity, the software asks whether you want to delete it. Click one of the following buttons: o No to retain the material o Yes to delete the material. The material is deleted from the model. As a quick alternative to this procedure, you can select the material you want to delete from the model tree. Right-click on the material and select the Delete command from the object action menu.
Unassign a Material
To Unassign a Material in FEM Mode 1. Select Properties>Materials or click
The FEM MATERIAL menu appears.
2. Select Unassign. The software prompts you to select an object type from which to unassign a material. 3. Select an object type from the FEM MATERIAL menu. 4. Select an entity or entities from which to delete an assigned material. The software asks if you want to remove the reference to the material. 5. Click Yes to remove the reference to the material or No to retain the reference to the material in your model. If you want to unassign a material from a solid chunk, there is a quick alternative to this procedure. Select the material assignment you want to remove from the model tree. Right-click on the material assignment and select the Delete command from the object action menu.
214
IndexProperties
After you select an object type, select an entity from which to delete a material. After you select an entity, the software asks if you want to remove the reference to the material. Click Yes to remove the reference to the material or No to retain the reference to the material in your model.
See Also
Procedures: To Unassign a Material in FEM Mode To Assign a Material in FEM Mode Reference: Assign a Material in FEM Mode
Material direction 3 is perpendicular to the surface and aligned with the surface normal. For information about surface normals, see Surface Normals.
The Material Orientations dialog box lists all material orientations that you have defined. You can define as many material orientations as you want without assigning them. 216
IndexProperties
When you select one of the listed material orientations, the entities to which that orientation is assigned are highlighted and a material orientation icon appears for each of those entities. The icon has 3 axes and is labeled for the material directions 1, 2, and 3. The type of entities to which you can assign a material orientation depends on: the current model type the type of material orientation that you selected
The following commands appear on the Material Orientations dialog box: Assign New Copy Edit Delete
If a description was entered for a selected material orientation, it appears below the list of material orientations.
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material Orientation To Create a Material Orientation To Copy a Material Orientation To Edit a Material Orientation To Delete a Material Orientation
217
If you have previously assigned a material orientation to any of the selected entities, Mechanica gives you the opportunity to retain the existing orientation or to change it. Click Yes to change the orientation or No to retain the existing one.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Assign a Material Orientation Create a Material Orientation
2. Select a material orientation from displayed list. 3. Click Assign. Mechanica prompts you to select an entity. 4. Use the normal selection methods to select one or more entities on your model.
If you are working with an assembly and you select a 3D-type material orientation, you can select a specific subassembly or the entire assembly on the Model Tree or on the model. In this case, Mechanica assigns the material orientation to all parts, datum, geometry, edges, and surfaces in the selected assembly or subassembly.
5. The software highlights the entity you select. (If you have previously assigned a material orientation to any of the entities you select, Mechanica gives you the opportunity to retain the existing orientation or to change it.) 6. Confirm your selection. The Material Orientations dialog box reappears.
See Also
Reference: Create a Material Orientation
218
IndexProperties
Native FEM
2D 3D
When you select an entity type, the Material Orientation Definition dialog box appears. Enter values in the dialog box fields to define a new material orientation. After you click OK, the new material orientation appears on the Material Orientations dialog box. The new orientation is not assigned to your model until you assign it to a geometric entity.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Material Orientation
Be aware that when you create material orientations for a surface, you may, in effect, be creating the material orientation for a shell, 2D plate, or 2D solid, depending on how you have idealized your model. If a material orientation is not assigned, the Preview button enables you to select a surface or solid to view the material orientation icon as if the orientation were assigned.
219
Part
When you select Part or Volume, Mechanica asks you to select the part or volume you want, and then displays a dialog box. On this dialog box, you can specify: Relative To Specifies the reference coordinate system for the principal material directions. Material Direction Specifies the material direction. This area includes: o Material Direction grid Use the buttons in this grid to select the alignment axis for material directions 1, 2, and 3. o Rotate About Specifies additional rotations about one or more material directions.
For examples of material orientation on surfaces, see: 220 Example: Example: Example: Example: Curved Surface Directions 2D Surface Directions Variable Material Orientation Rotation for Shells and Surfaces
IndexProperties
2. Click New.
In the native mode, a drop-down menu appears. In the FEM mode, the Material Orientation Definition dialog box appears.
3. In the native mode, select Part or Surface, depending on whether the orientation is for the whole part or for an individual surface. The Material Orientation Definition dialog box appears. The next steps depend on whether you are creating an orientation for a part, solid, or volume, or for a surface, shell, 2D plate, or 2D solid.
See Also
Procedure: To Edit a Material Orientation
221
2. Click Edit. The Material Orientation Definition dialog box appears. 3. Change the fields on the dialog box to the values you want for your material orientation.
See Also
Procedure: To Copy a Material Orientation
2. Select a material orientation from displayed list. 3. Click Copy. 4. If desired, edit the copy to differentiate it from the original material orientation. Mechanica does not assign the copy to a geometric entity until you explicitly assign it.
See Also
Procedure: To Delete a Material Orientation
222
IndexProperties
2. Click Delete. If you have assigned the orientation to one or more entities, the software asks whether you want to delete it. 3. Click No to retain the previously assigned orientation. Click Yes to delete the orientation from all of the entities to which it is assigned.
223
For each of these three constraint types, you need to consider different factors and use different creation methods. To review information that is common to all three constraint types, see: Adding Constraints Constraints, Loads, and Analysis Types
Mechanica applies the constraints you specify to all the entities that you select and places a constraint icon at each location. For compressed solid parts in assemblies, Mechanica automatically adds a constraint between intersecting midsurfaces whenever possible. When Mechanica adds such a constraint, the constrained midsurfaces are forced to deform together during a run. If you are working in Thermal, see About Thermal Boundary Conditions for information on applying convection conditions, prescribed temperatures, cyclic symmetry, or in FEM mode, radiation.
224
IndexStructural Constraints
After you create a constraint, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a constraint, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. You can also troubleshoot constraints, control constraint icon visibility, and place constraints on layers. To create, edit, or delete constraint sets, select Properties>Constraint Sets to open the Constraint Sets dialog box.
See Also
Procedures: To Define Displacement Constraints To Define Constraints Along Surfaces (FEM mode) To Create a Cyclic Symmetry Model Section To Add a Cyclic Symmetry Constraint To Define a Cyclic Symmetry Constraint
Adding Constraints
For Mechanica to perform most types of analyses, you must constrain at least one area of your model. When you apply constraints, Mechanica associates the constraints with model geometry. For structural analysis, a constraint is an external limit on the movement of a portion of your model. For thermal analysis, a constraint is an external limit on the temperature of a portion of your model. You can apply a constraint to a single geometric entity or to multiple entities. When you apply a constraint to multiple entities, Mechanica does not allow you to mix entity types, except for points and vertices, and edges and curves. For example, if you specify a point as the first entity, all remaining entities, to which constraint applies, must also be points or vertices. Note: Constraints applied to vertices and to multiple datum points in Mechanica FEM mode are suppressed in Mechanica. In general, you should plan the placement of your constraints according to the model type. For example, if you are working with a solid model, you should try to place your constraints on surfaces or surface regions rather than points or curves. With shell models, you should try to place your constraints on curves, surfaces, or surface regions, depending on the load type. Although you can place constraints on other entity types, this placement can adversely affect convergence. When constraining a structural assembly, be aware that you must constrain all independent bodies in the assembly. If the constraint set does not constrain all bodies in the model, Mechanica is unable to run the associated analyses.
225
You can place some types of constraints on a surface that will be compressed to a midsurface edge. When possible, Mechanica automatically transfers the constraint from the original surface to the compressed midsurface. When not possible, Mechanica deletes the constraints.
Mechanica Structure structural modal Mechanica Thermal thermal yes optional yes yes optional no
Mechanica Structure static modal buckling large deformation static prestress static prestress modal contact dynamic time yesa yesb yesc yesa yesa yes yesa yes optional no yes optional yes no optional yes
226
IndexStructural Constraints
dynamic frequency dynamic random dynamic shock fatigue Mechanica Thermal steady-state thermal transient thermal
yes yes
optional optional
a. If your model includes point-to-ground springs, you do not need to specify a constraint. b. If you plan a constrained modal analysis, you need to add at least one constraint. However, for unconstrained modal analyses with rigid mode search, you need no constraints. c. Buckling analysis uses the loads and constraints defined for the static analysis you select as a basis for the buckling analysis. d. Fatigue analysis uses the results from a static analysis as the basis for calculating loading.
Constraints on Entities
You can place displacement constraints on a variety of geometric entities including points, vertices, edges, curves,and surfaces. You define a displacement constraint by selecting the appropriate geometric reference before or after opening the Constraint dialog box to indicate how Mechanica should apply the constraint. The geometric entities you can constrain differ according to the model type and operating mode, as shown below:
Model Types Constrainable Entities
3D
2D plane stress
2D plane strain
227
2D axisymmetric
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for guidelines on how to use constraint sets in your analysis.
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Structure Constraints
228
IndexStructural Constraints
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your constraints separately, use a unique name and unique set name for each constraint. Remember, however, that an analysis can only access one constraint set. Load and constraint sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities so that you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully considered approach to load and constraint set creation simplifies load and constraint selection when defining your analyses. Although the software permits you to create each load and constraint as a separate load set or constraint set, you can greatly reduce the number of selections you need to make for analysis definition by grouping your loads and constraints into sets.
See Also
Reference: About Structure Constraints Understanding Load Sets
229
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Structure Constraint Sets
230
IndexStructural Constraints
Displacement Constraints
When you select the Insert>Displacement Constraint command, the following version of the Constraint dialog box appears. Use the following items on the dialog box to define a displacement constraint in Structure: Name The name of the constraint. Member of Set The name of the constraint set. You can select an existing constraint set from the drop-down list, or create a new constraint set by clicking the New button to display the Constraint Sets dialog box. References The drop-down list includes the following geometric entities. You can select the geometry for these references before you enter the dialog box, or use the selector arrow and the normal selection methods to choose the desired geometry. Surface(s) (default) You can select individual surfaces, several surfaces, quilts, or part boundaries. o Edge(s)/Curve(s) You can select edges, curves, or composite curves. o Point(s) You can select single points, vertices, features of points, or patterns of points. Coordinate System The selection button allows you to change the reference coordinate system. The default is the WCS. o Constraint type The translation and rotation constraints that you can apply differ depending upon your model type and coordinate system. You must specify the setting for each component of these constraint types. o Translation The extent to which you allow your model to move along a principal axis of the referenced Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate system. Rotation The extent to which you allow your model to rotate in reference to an axis of the referenced Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate system.
If you are working with symmetry constraints in native mode or Along Surface constraints in FEM mode, Mechanica provides a different version of the dialog box.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define Displacement Constraints SIM SELECT Menu
231
Constraint Settings
You can select one of the following settings for each constraint option: Free Allows freedom of movement in the specified direction. Fixed Constrains the entity, preventing movement in the specified direction. Prescribed Prescribes a specific displacement or rotation in the specified direction. Prescribed has an effect on the entity similar to a load.
When you select Prescribed, an input field appears to the right of the column. You can enter a value, mathematical expression, or parameter name in this field. When entering a value:
For translation options, enter an enforced displacement value in length units. For native mode, if you define the constraint referencing a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, enter theta and phi in radians rather than length units. In this case, the effective prescribed translation is the product of the radians you enter and the radial distance of the entity from the origin of the reference coordinate system. For rotation options, enter an enforced rotation in radians.
In defining prescribed displacement constraints, you should consider various guidelines and behaviors.
Function of coordinates (FEM mode) Enables you to define a constraint as a function of coordinates. When you click the Function Of Coordinates button, the f (x) button and option menu appear to the right. Select a function from the option menu or click the f (x) button to use the Functions dialog box to define a new function or edit an existing one.
The software uses only the translational degrees of freedom for solid models because solids have only three degrees of freedom. The software disregards any setting you select for the rotational degrees of freedom. If you apply the constraint to shell or beam models, the software uses both translational and rotational settings because the shell formulation has all six degrees of freedom.
See Also
Reference: Structure Constraint Icons
232
IndexStructural Constraints
Constraint Options
The following table shows which constraint options are available for each model type in a Cartesian coordinate system:
Model Type Constraint Options
3D
plane stress
Trans X, Trans Y
Note: The software ignores any rotational degrees of freedom for 2D solids or solids in 3D models. If you specify constraints on Rot X, Rot Y, or Rot Z for these elements, the software ignores the constraints. The software labels the coordinate directions differently if a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system is active. The following table shows the constraint options for each coordinate system (R=radial, T=theta, and P=phi):
Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical
Trans X
Trans R
Trans R
Trans Y
Trans T
Trans T
Trans Z
Trans Z
Trans P
Rot X
Rot R
Rot R
Rot Y
Rot T
Rot T
Rot Z
Rot Z
Rot P
233
See Also
References: Structure Constraint Icons Constraint Settings
Cylindrical:
Trans R Rot R Trans T Rot T Trans Z Rot Z
Spherical:
Trans R Rot R Trans T Rot T Trans P Rot P
Filled boxes correspond to constrained degrees of freedom or enforced displacements. Empty boxes correspond to degrees of freedom designated as free. In this example, the current coordinate system is Cartesian and the constraint is fixed in Trans X, Trans Y, and Rot Z:
234
IndexStructural Constraints
This icon indicates cyclic symmetry constraints. The icon appears on your design at the axis of symmetry:
This icon indicates Along Surface constraints in FEM mode. The icon appears on your design at the reference surface:
See Also
References: Constraint Settings Constraint Options
235
did not select geometric entities as references before you opened the box, select one of the following References from the drop-down list Surface(s) Edge(s) Point(s) and use the normal selection methods to select a reference.
6. If you want to change the reference coordinate system, click and select a coordinate system. The default is the WCS. 7. Click one of these settings buttons for each translational and rotational degree of freedom to define how you want to constrain the geometry:
Translation Free Fixed Prescribed Function (FEM mode only) Rotation
If you select a prescribed setting, enter a value in the field to the right. You can enter a value, mathematical expression, or parameter name in this field. The value should be in length units for translation constraints, and in radians for rotation constraints.
See Also
References: Structure Constraint Icons Guidelines for Structure Constraints Structure Constraints on Geometry
236
IndexStructural Constraints
Filled boxes correspond to fixed displacements or enforced displacements. Empty boxes correspond to displacements designated as free. In the above example, the constraint fixes the translation in the X and Y directions and fixes the rotation about the Z axis.
237
You may want to define a small surface region and apply the constraint to the region instead of to a point. This approach distributes the stresses and fluxes over a slightly wider portion of the model, avoiding concentration problems.
Symmetry Constraints
Use the Insert>Symmetry Constraint command in Structure or Thermal to create a cyclic or mirror symmetry constraint. This command is not available in FEM mode. When you select this command, the Symmetry Constraint dialog box appears with these items: Name The name of the constraint. Member of Set The name of the constraint set (in Structure) or boundary condition set (in Thermal). You can select an existing set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the Constraint Sets dialog box. Type Select one of the following constraint types. The dialog box changes depending upon your selection: o Cyclic o Mirror (Structure only) References For mirror constraints, you can select points, curves, edges, or surfaces to define the plane of symmetry. For cyclic constraints, you must make the following selections: o o o First Side Define the first side of the cut section. Second Side Define the second side of the cut section. Axis Select the axis of symmetry. Axis is inactive if the software automatically determines the axis of symmetry.
Your model can include both cyclic and mirror symmetry constraints, with these limitations: Your model can include only one cyclic symmetry constraint. The plane defining a mirror symmetry constraint must be orthogonal to the symmetry axis for a cyclic symmetry constraint.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Cyclic Symmetry Constraint To Define a Mirror Symmetry Constraint
238
IndexStructural Constraints
There are two types of symmetry you can model in Mechanicamirror symmetry and cyclic symmetry. Mirror symmetry relies on the principle that one segment of a model is the mirror image of other segments. An example of this type of model would be a rectangular plate with a hole at its center. In native mode you can use the mirror symmetry constraint to take advantage of your model's symmetry. To use mirror symmetry in FEM mode you must apply a displacement constraint to fix translation normal to the plane of symmetry and fix rotations in opposition to the plane of symmetry. Cyclic symmetry relies on the principle that a segment of the geometry is repeated in a cyclic manner throughout the model, but the segment is not a mirror image, either in its geometry or its load scheme. An example of this type of geometry would be a fan blade or turbine. You can only use cyclic symmetry in native mode. FEM mode does not support this type of modeling. The methods you use to develop these two types of symmetry differ, as does the application of constraints and certain loads. Both types of symmetry can prove efficient for a 3D solid or shell model. The choice of which symmetry type you use depends on the model and the problem you wish to solve. Note that, in some situations, you can use 2D axisymmetric modeling in place of symmetry. While not strictly a form of symmetry, 2D axisymmetric modeling provides an extremely efficient alternative to treating your model as a symmetric solid. This form of modeling relies on the principle that a 2D slice of your solid model, if rotated around an axis, can accurately depict the whole of your model's geometry, loads, and constraints. For an example of this type of model, see Setting up a Solid Model for a 2D Analysis on an Internal Surface.
239
See Also
Examples: Using Cyclic Symmetry Using Mirror Symmetry
In Structure, a cyclic symmetry constraint prescribes rotation and displacement on two boundaries to be the same. In Thermal, a cyclic symmetry constraint prescribes the temperature distribution on two boundaries to be the same. Note: All results are cyclically symmetric because the model is cyclically symmetric. To solve a cyclic symmetry problem, you need to complete three stepscutting your model to isolate a cyclically symmetric segment, defining the constraint with the Cyclic Constraint dialog box, and running an analysis that includes the constraint. For more information on cyclic symmetry, see Guidelines for Cyclic Symmetry.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Cyclic Symmetry Constraint To Create a Cyclic Symmetry Model Section Reference: Example: Working with Symmetric Models Using Cyclic Symmetry
240
IndexStructural Constraints
241
See Also
Reference: Cyclic Symmetry Constraints
See Also
Procedure: To Define A Cyclic Symmetry Constraint
242
IndexStructural Constraints
2. Enter a new name or accept the default name. 3. Select the desired constraint set from the Member of Set drop-down list. 4. If you want to create a new constraint set, click the New button to display the Constraint Set dialog box. Enter a name for the new constraint set. 5. In Structure, select Cyclic from the Type drop-down list. (This is the only choice in Thermal.) 6. Use the selector arrows in the References area and the normal selection methods to select two sets of surfaces, curves, and/or points to define the boundaries of the cyclic symmetry constraint. Depending on the geometry you selected, the software determines the axis of symmetry automatically. If it cannot, the software prompts you to specify the axis of symmetry. Datum axes/curves and solid edges/curves are all available for selection. For planar cuts, the axis of symmetry generally occurs at the intersection of the two cuts at the virtual center of the original model. For non-planar cuts, this is not the case and the location of the axis of symmetry will vary.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Cyclic Symmetry Model Section Cyclic Symmetry Constraints
243
modes. To determine whether there are nonsymmetric modes, run the modal analysis with the entire model without mirror symmetry constraints. To define a mirror symmetry constraint, you must select sufficient geometric references on your model to define a plane. Keep the following in mind when selecting references: The references must be coplanar. You can use combinations of points, curves, edges, or surfaces that lie on the plane of symmetry. You cannot use reference combinations that are collinear. You can define more than one mirror symmetry constraint for your model, but if you do, you cannot reference the same geometric entities for two different mirror symmetry constraints. The symmetry planes for multiple mirror constraints in the same model must be either parallel or orthogonal to each other.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: Example: To Define a Mirror Symmetry Constraint Working with Symmetric Models Example: Using Mirror Symmetry
244
IndexStructural Constraints
245
References Select planar or cylindrical surfaces to constrain, as appropriate to the constraint type. If you want to constrain a plane, you can select the geometry before you enter the dialog box. Otherwise use the selector arrow and the normal selection methods to choose the desired geometry.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Constraints Along Surfaces (FEM mode)
246
Boundary Condition Sets Boundary Condition and Load Sets in Thermal Analyses
When you are defining thermal analyses, keep in mind the following: For both steady and transient thermal analyses, you do not have to select a load set. For a transient thermal analysis, you do not have to select a boundary condition set. If you do not select a boundary condition set, however, you must select one or more load sets for the analysis to be valid. For steady thermal analyses, you must select one boundary condition set. If you delete a boundary condition set or load set after you include it in an analysis, you are also deleting that set from the analysis. Even if you create a new set with the same name as the set you deleted, you must edit the analysis and reselect the set name. Otherwise, you can 247
invalidate the analysis and any design studies in which you included the analysis.
When you define a boundary condition, you can: add the boundary condition to an existing boundary condition set create a new boundary condition set and enter a description
If you click Cancel, you exit without creating either the thermal boundary condition or the boundary condition set. If a boundary condition for one or more of the entities you selected already belongs to the boundary condition set, Mechanica prompts you to do one of the following: Click Yes to replace the existing boundary condition with a new one in the same set. Click No to retain the old boundary condition and cancel the new one.
If you click No and want to create the new boundary condition without losing the old one, define the constraint again and select a different boundary condition set.
Convection Conditions
Use the convection boundary conditions to define a linear convective heat exchange condition for one or more geometric entities in Thermal. If you are working in the FEM mode, see Convection Conditions (FEM Mode). You can assign convection conditions to points, edges, curves, and surfaces. When you select Insert>Convection Condition, Mechanica displays the CONV COND menu. You use this menu to select the type of entitypoint, edge/curve, or 248
surfaceyou want to apply the convection condition to. After you select the entity type, the Convection Condition dialog box appears. This dialog box has the following fields: Name The name of the boundary condition. Member of Set The name of the boundary condition set. You can select an existing boundary condition set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the BC Set Definition dialog box. Entity The name of the type of entity you chose. You can select appropriate geometry using the selector arrow and the normal selection methods. Once you complete the selection process, the software displays the name of the entity. Spatial Variation Specifies whether the convection condition will be applied uniformly over the entity or whether it will vary spatially over the entity. External Data (not available for uniform spatial variation) Provides needed information about the FNF file that you want to import. Convection Coefficient, h Provides a value for the convection coefficient. You can obtain this value from empirical data or you can enter your own data. This area becomes inactive when you select External Conv Coefficient or External Conv Coef & Bulk Temp from the Spatial Variation drop-down menu. Bulk Temperature, Tb Assigns a temperature for the fluid. This area becomes inactive when you select Ext Bulk Temperature or External Conv Coef & Bulk Temp from the Spatial Variation drop-down menu. Temporal Variation Applies the convection condition as a function of time. This option includes a Time Dependent check box and an f(x) button, which opens either the Functions dialog box or the Function Definition dialog box. If you specify a temporal variation for the convection condition, Mechanica multiplies the bulk temperature you enter by the function you definecreating, in effect, a time-varying bulk temperature.
If you want to preview the convection coefficient or bulk temperature in an FNF file selected for import, click the Preview h or Preview Tb button. These buttons become active only when you are importing external data from an FNF file. When you accept the dialog box, Mechanica places a convection condition icon at each location you selected. After you create a convection condition, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a convection condition, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedures: To Define Convection Conditions for Points, Edges, and Curves To Define Convection Conditions for 3D Surfaces
249
References:
How Mechanica Calculates the Convective Heat Transfer Rate Ramping of Heat Loads and Convection Conditions Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Condition Sets Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions for Geometry
where Q is the convective heat transfer rate. h is the convection coefficient. Te is the entity temperature (the temperature of an entity such as a node or surface). Tb is the bulk temperature (the temperature of the fluid in contact with the entity).
250
where is the density, c is the specific heat, k is the conductivity, L is the largest length scale of an element, and p is the p-order. Any time scale that is smaller than this causes errors. For example, if you enter a time-dependent heat load or bulk temperature that is a sine wave with a period much smaller than this value, the solution would have a large error. Therefore any ramp function must use a period at least as large as the local value of computed for the elements adjacent to the heat load or convection condition. A convection condition having a large Biot number can create a thin layer with large temperature gradients that is smaller than Mechanica can represent accurately. Mechanica defines the Biot number by
where h is the convective heat transfer coefficient (also called film coefficient in Mechanica), k is the conductivity, and L is the largest length scale of an element. If the Biot number is much greater than 1, the solution can have a large error. You can reduce the error in the solution by ramping the bulk temperature from the initial condition of the model to its final value over a period of time larger than . You can use the local value of for the elements adjacent to the convection condition and in many cases get accurate results, as mentioned above. To model a time-dependent prescribed temperature, you can enter a convection condition with a large value of h and set the bulk temperature as a function of time equal to the desired prescribed temperature. A Biot number of 100 should be sufficient. The bulk temperature should not vary more rapidly than in order to avoid errors in the solution.
251
Model Type/Entity
Units
3D:
Point
2D Axisymmetric:
Point
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Strain:
Point
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Stress
Point
Curve, Edge
Surface, 2D Plate
252
Bulk Temperature, Tb
If you do not import an externally computed bulk temperature, you must specify a bulk temperature for the software to use. Enter a real number for the bulk temperature of the convection condition you are defining. Time-dependent bulk temperatures (and time-dependent heat loads) are only relevant for transient thermal analysis. For steady-state thermal analysis, be aware of the following: Mechanica ignores time-dependent bulk temperatures. If all bulk temperatures are time-dependent and there are no prescribed temperatures, a steady-state thermal analysis cannot run because the model has no valid constraints.
When you click OK, the software checks for problems with either the file name or the content of the FNF file. Guidelines for Importing External Temperature Fields Before you import an external temperature, you must create a FEM Neutral Format file, which Mechanica uses to import your temperature load. The FEM Neutral Format file enables you to store an externally created temperature field and import it into Structure. For more information, see FEM Neutral Format File and Sample FNF File for External Temperature. Mechanica automatically copies the FEM Neutral Format file you create into a study directory. If you do not want this file in the study directory, you must set a config.pro option. For more information, see Configuration File Options. Mechanica extracts temperature data from the h-mesh Mechanica FEM Neutral Format file by finding the h-element that encompasses the point where the p-element temperature is desired, and performing a linear interpolation of the temperature at the h-element's corner nodes. If the pelement point is not inside any of the h-elementsfor example, when the 253
curved boundary of a p-element lies outside the h-meshMechanica projects the point to an h-element face, edge, or node and performs a three, two, or one-point interpolation.
When entire elements of the p-mesh lie outside the h-mesh, Mechanica still projects the points onto the outer faces of the h-mesh. As the distance increases, Mechanica may not project the point onto the closest face, but instead onto the first orthogonal projection it finds.
Your imported temperature load must contain the connectivity of a linear solid element mesh, node locations, and temperature values at the nodes. If the temperature load mesh is not consistent, Mechanica displays an error message. If you defined the temperature load for part of your model, Mechanica displays an error message indicating that it will calculate temperature through extrapolation for parts of the model. If you performed a design study for your model that included size or shape changes, you must make sure the temperature field is consistent for all the design variations included in the study.
When you import an external temperature load, you also import the model's orientation. Creating FNF Files for External Loads and Constraints FEM Neutral Format (FNF) files, with the extension .fnf, are organized into sections. When you are creating an FNF file that will be used to import an external load or constraint, you need only five of these sections. Each section describes its own class of objects. The order of sections in the FNF file is critical, since information from the earlier defined sections may be required in subsequent sections.
Note: FNF files are backward-compatible.
Create the following sections in an FNF file to import an external load or constraint: HEADER general information about the file and the model. This section can contain the following instructions: o TITLE describes the name of your model o STATISTICS provides information about the number of element types, coordinate systems, materials, element properties, nodes, and elements in your model ELEM_TYPES definition of element types MESH definition of the model's nodes and elements LOADS description of applied constraint cases, loads, and boundary conditions
The following table lists instructions required for importing external loads and constraints, their standard abbreviations, and the sections in which they may appear:
254
For more information about FNF files, see FEM Neutral Format File.
See Also
Strategies: Sample FNF File for External Temperature Sample FNF File for External Convection Conditions
Sample FNF File for External Convection Conditions Following is a sample FNF file for external convection conditions. #PTC_FEM_NEUT 3 #DATE 18-Sep-01 09:58:38 %START_SECT : HEADER %TITLE : B2 %STATISTICS : 1 0 1 1 26 24 %END_SECT %START_SECT : ELEM_TYPES %ELEM_TYPE 1 DEF : SHELL QUAD LINEAR 4 4 2 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 1 1 2 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 2 2 3 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 3 3 4 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 4 1 4 255
%ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 1 1 2 3 4 %ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 2 1 4 3 2 %END_SECT %START_SECT : MESH %NODE 1 DEF : -0.5 0.5 -0.5 %NODE 2 DEF : -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 %NODE 3 DEF : 0.5 0.5 -0.5 %NODE 4 DEF : 0.5 -0.5 -0.5 %NODE 5 DEF : -0.5 0 -0.5 %NODE 6 DEF : 0 -0.5 -0.5 %NODE 7 DEF : 0.5 0 -0.5 %NODE 8 DEF : 0 0.5 -0.5 %NODE 9 DEF : 0 0 -0.5 %NODE 10 DEF : -0.5 0.5 0.5 %NODE 11 DEF : -0.5 -0.5 0.5 %NODE 12 DEF : 0.5 0.5 0.5 %NODE 13 DEF : 0.5 -0.5 0.5 %NODE 14 DEF : -0.5 0 0.5 %NODE 15 DEF : 0 0.5 0.5 %NODE 16 DEF : 0.5 0 0.5 %NODE 17 DEF : 0 -0.5 0.5 %NODE 18 DEF : 0 0 0.5 %NODE 19 DEF : -0.5 0.5 0 %NODE 20 DEF : -0.5 -0.5 0 %NODE 21 DEF : -0.5 0 0 %NODE 22 DEF : 0.5 -0.5 0 %NODE 23 DEF : 0 -0.5 0 %NODE 24 DEF : 0.5 0.5 0 %NODE 25 DEF : 0.5 0 0 %NODE 26 DEF : 0 0.5 0 %ELEM 1 DEF : 1 1 1 9 6 2 5 %ELEM 2 DEF : 1 1 1 7 4 6 9 %ELEM 3 DEF : 1 1 1 8 9 5 1 %ELEM 4 DEF : 1 1 1 3 7 9 8 %ELEM 5 DEF : 1 1 1 18 16 12 15 %ELEM 6 DEF : 1 1 1 14 18 15 10 %ELEM 7 DEF : 1 1 1 17 13 16 18 %ELEM 8 DEF : 1 1 1 11 17 18 14 %ELEM 9 DEF : 1 1 1 21 14 10 19 %ELEM 10 DEF : 1 1 1 5 21 19 1 %ELEM 11 DEF : 1 1 1 20 11 14 21 %ELEM 12 DEF : 1 1 1 2 20 21 5 %ELEM 13 DEF : 1 1 1 23 17 11 20 %ELEM 14 DEF : 1 1 1 6 23 20 2 %ELEM 15 DEF : 1 1 1 22 13 17 23 %ELEM 16 DEF : 1 1 1 4 22 23 6 %ELEM 17 DEF : 1 1 1 25 16 13 22 %ELEM 18 DEF : 1 1 1 7 25 22 4 %ELEM 19 DEF : 1 1 1 24 12 16 25 %ELEM 20 DEF : 1 1 1 3 24 25 7 %ELEM 21 DEF : 1 1 1 26 15 12 24 %ELEM 22 DEF : 1 1 1 8 26 24 3 %ELEM 23 DEF : 1 1 1 19 10 15 26 %ELEM 24 DEF : 1 1 1 1 19 26 8 %END_SECT 256
%START_SECT : LOADS %LOAD_TYPE 1 DEF : CONVECTION NODE VECTOR_2 %CON_CASE 1 DEF : TestData1 %LOAD 1 DEF : 1 1 %LOAD 1 VAL : 1 0.6 0.23 %LOAD 1 VAL : 2 0 0 %LOAD 1 VAL : 3 0.85 0.68 %LOAD 1 VAL : 4 0.25 0.45 %LOAD 1 VAL : 5 0.3 0.115 %LOAD 1 VAL : 6 0.125 0.225 %LOAD 1 VAL : 7 0.55 0.565 %LOAD 1 VAL : 8 0.725 0.455 %LOAD 1 VAL : 9 0.425 0.34 %LOAD 1 VAL : 10 0.75 0.55 %LOAD 1 VAL : 11 0.15 0.32 %LOAD 1 VAL : 12 1 1 %LOAD 1 VAL : 13 0.4 0.77 %LOAD 1 VAL : 14 0.45 0.435 %LOAD 1 VAL : 15 0.875 0.775 %LOAD 1 VAL : 16 0.7 0.885 %LOAD 1 VAL : 17 0.275 0.545 %LOAD 1 VAL : 18 0.575 0.66 %LOAD 1 VAL : 19 0.675 0.39 %LOAD 1 VAL : 20 0.075 0.16 %LOAD 1 VAL : 21 0.375 0.275 %LOAD 1 VAL : 22 0.325 0.61 %LOAD 1 VAL : 23 0.2 0.385 %LOAD 1 VAL : 24 0.925 0.84 %LOAD 1 VAL : 25 0.625 0.725 %LOAD 1 VAL : 26 0.8 0.615 %END_SECT %START_SECT : ANALYSIS %SOLUTION 1 DEF : THERMAL %SOLUTION 1 CON_CASES : 1 %END_SECT %END
257
Additionally, the following options are available for shell and solid surfaces in 3D models: External Conv Coefficient Imports a convection condition FNF file that contains an externally calculated or measured convection coefficient that can vary spatially over the selected surface(s). External Bulk Temperature Imports a convection condition FNF file that contains an externally calculated or measured bulk temperature that can vary spatially over the selected surface(s). External Conv Coef & Bulk Temp Imports a convection condition FNF file that contains an externally calculated or measured convection coefficient and bulk temperature, both of which can vary spatially over the selected single or multiple surfaces.
For additional information, see the following: Creating FNF Files for External Loads and Constraints Sample FNF File for External Convection Conditions
258
If you select Edge/Curve, use Pro/ENGINEER selection methods to select one or more edges or curves. 4. Type a value for the convection coefficient, h. o Use real numbers only and ensure that the system of units you are working in is consistent with the rest of the model. 5. Type a value for the bulk temperature, Tb. If you do not specify a temperature, the software assumes a default of 0. 6. If you want the bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time Dependent check box under Temporal Variation. 7. If you want to define more convection conditions, repeat applicable preceding steps until you have defined all convection conditions. 8. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition(s).
259
When you accept the dialog box, Mechanica places a convection condition icon at each location you selected. After you create a convection condition, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a convection condition, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
260
See Also
Procedure: References: To Define Convection Conditions in FEM Mode How Mechanica Calculates the Convective Heat Transfer Rate Ramping of Heat Loads and Convection Conditions Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Condition Sets Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions for Geometry
Prescribed Temperatures
Use the Insert>Prescribed Temperature command in Thermal and FEM mode Thermal to define a temperature boundary condition for one or more geometric or model entities. A prescribed temperature is a thermal boundary condition that limits the temperature of your model. See Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions and Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions for Geometry. When you select Insert>Prescribed Temperature, the Prescribed Temperature dialog box appears. The dialog box has the following fields: 261
Name The name of the boundary condition. Member of Set The name of the boundary condition set. You can select an existing boundary condition set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the BC Set Definition dialog box. References The drop-down list includes the following geometric entities. You can select the geometry for these references before you enter the dialog box, or use the selector arrow and the normal selection methods to choose the desired geometry. o Surface(s) You can select individual surfaces, several surfaces, quilts, or part boundaries. o Edge(s)/Curve(s) You can select edges, curves, or composite curves. o Point(s) You can select single points, vertices, point features, or patterns of points. Temperature Specify values for a prescribed temperature as follows: o Value Enter any real number for the prescribed temperature, arithmetic expression, or Pro/ENGINEER parameter. For points and vertices, you can assign only a uniform temperature. o Advanced Expands the dialog box to display the Spatial Variation drop-down list. For edges, curves, surfaces, 2D plates, and 2D solids, you can assign a spatially varying prescribed temperature. Preview Adds a series of arrows to your model showing the location and distribution of the prescribed temperature condition.
After you accept the values in dialog box, the software places a prescribed temperature icon at each location you selected. After you create a prescribed temperature, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a prescribed temperature, the software asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Prescribed Temperature
262
Function of Coordinates Use the Functions dialog box to define a mathematical expression for the spatial variation.
When you are applying spatially varying temperatures, remember that changes in temperature throughout an entity must be smooth. Across adjacent entities, temperatures must be equal and continuous where the entities meet. In addition, temperature compatibility is needed in the following situations: If you have a spatially varying temperature on a curve, the end points of that curve cannot have independent temperatures. If you have a spatially varying temperature on a surface, the curves on the boundary of that surface cannot have independent temperatures. You must define a continuous temperature on the interior of adjacent entities.
Keep in mind the following points when defining functions: For table functions, Mechanica interprets angles as degrees. Domain bounds for the theta value must be between 180 and 180 degrees. Domain bounds for the phi value must be between zero and 180 degrees. For symbolic functions, Mechanica interprets angles as radians. Make sure that the domain bounds for these angles are in the following ranges: the theta value must be between and and the phi value must be between zero and .
263
The interpolation you create is associated with the prescribed temperature and the entity. Interpolation Over Entity Use the Interpolation Over Entity dialog box to add, preview, or remove interpolation points, and to enter and edit a value for each point. You can use from two to four points to define an interpolation. The number of points you select depends on whether you are selecting a curve or edge (usually two points) or a surface or face (usually four points). Mechanica selects default interpolation points for some entities as follows:
Entity Default Interpolation Points
endpoints
corners
surfaces
none
If you want interpolation points that are different from the default points, you can delete the default points and create new ones. When planning interpolated prescribed temperatures, be aware that: Each value is a scale factor. Mechanica multiplies the Temperature value you specify on the Prescribed Temperature dialog box by the interpolation value at a given location to determine the prescribed temperature vector at that location. At least one of the points should have a value other than zero. If you enter interpolation point values before entering the prescribed temperature value on the Prescribed Temperature dialog box, Mechanica enters a default value of 1 for Temperature. The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form of the interpolation.
264
Function of Coordinates
Use this option to apply a prescribed temperature that is a function of the current coordinate system (WCS or UCS). Alternatively, you can create a coordinate system whose X axis is aligned with the entity over which you are placing the spatially varying temperature. You can select one or more entities on which to apply this prescribed temperature. When you select Function Of Coordinates, the f(x) button and option menu appear on the dialog box. Click the f(x) button and the Functions dialog box (native mode) or Functions dialog box (FEM mode) appears. You can use this form to create, copy, edit, or delete a function.
See Also
265
References:
Structure Constraint Icons Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions for Geometry
The software places a radiation icon at each location you selected. Note: If you plan to analyze your model using the ANSYS solver, be aware that the radiation boundary condition will not be included. Mechanica does not output radiation to ANSYS. After you create a radiation condition, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a radiation condition, the software asks you for confirmation first.
266
IndexStructure Loads
See Also
References: About Structure Loads About Heat Loads
267
You can apply temperature results from a Thermal analysis as a temperature load. If you have a 2D model, and you want to associate loads with a UCS, the UCS must meet the following criteria: The UCS Z axis must be parallel to the WCS Z axis. The UCS origin must lie in the WCS XY plane.
If you have run an analysis in Mechanism Design, you can also transfer loads to Structure. You can create loads by selecting the appropriate command on the Insert menu, or by using object action or toolbar buttons. After you create a load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a load, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first. You can also troubleshoot loads, control load icon visibility, place loads on layers, and review resultant loads.
See Also
Reference: About Heat Loads
On the left side of a relation, use the function to set a value. On the right side, use it to get a value. For example, if you define a point load, Load1, with FX=100, and if you want another load, Load2, which may have been defined with different values, to have the same value for X as Load1, you can define a relation as follows: sim_load_value("Load2","X") = sim_load_value("Load1","X") If you edit Load2, you can see that X is now defined as 100. Any change to Load1 will affect Load2 equally. The sim_load_value function has an optional second argument that defines the load component for vector or force and moment loads. When this command is used for constraints, it only works for enforced displacements on both sides of the relation. This argument can have the following case-insensitive values:
268
IndexStructure Loads
Loads
Cartesian X Y Z MX MY MZ Cylindrical R THETA Z MR MTHETA MZ Spherical R THETA PHI MR MTHETA MPHI Magnitude MAGNITUDE
Constraints
Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical Convection Conditions CONVCOEFF AMBTEMP Radiation
DX DY DZ RX RY RZ
DR DTHETA DZ RR RTHETA RZ
EMISSIVITY AMBTEMP
Load Basics
Although each Mechanica load type requires a slightly different definition method, there are several factors that govern all loads. As you prepare to add loads to your model, bear the following points in mind: When you apply loads, Mechanica associates the loads with part geometry. In the case of compressed geometry, Mechanica can automatically transfer some loads from an original surface to a compressed edge. However, it is preferable to assign loads directly to curves if you know that you will compress the geometry. Mechanica supports a variety of loads. In terms of how you apply these loads to your model, there are two basic load categoriesentity loads and body loads.
269
An entity load is a load that you define for specific geometric entities in your model, such as curves or surfaces. Forces and moments are examples of entity loads. A body load is a load that you apply to your model as a whole. Gravity is an example of a body load. Typically, you can only use one body load per load set. For assemblies, you may have several independent bodies in your model. When applying a body load to an assembly, Mechanica places the load on all bodies in the model. When loading an assembly, be aware that you must load all independent bodies in the assembly if the analysis you plan to run requires loads. If you do not add loads for all bodies in the model, Mechanica is unable to run the analysis. You can apply a load to a single geometric entity or to multiple entities. When you apply a load to multiple entities, Mechanica does not allow you to mix entity types. For example, if you specify a point as the first entity, all remaining entities in the load must also be points. In the case of multiple entities, Mechanica associates the entities by virtue of the fact that they share a load. Thus, you cannot modify or delete the load for each entity individually. Further, deleting any of the entities associated with the load eliminates the load for the other associated entities. In general, you should plan the placement of your loads according to the model type. For example, if you are working with a solid model, you should try to place your loads on surfaces or surface regions rather than points or curves. With shell models, you should try to place your loads on curves, surfaces, or surface regions, depending on the load type. Although you can place loads on other entity types, this placement is not always optimal. Mechanica assumes the load values you enter are consistent with your principal system of units. Mechanica places many loads using coordinate locations. The way Mechanica expresses coordinate directions depends on the current coordinate system's type, whether that coordinate system is the WCS or one you selected during load definition. The following is a chart that defines the coordinate nomenclature for each coordinate system type:
Cartesian X Y Z Cylindrical R T Z Spherical R T P
When entering load values in Mechanica, use real numbers. You use the sign of the value to express directionality relative to the coordinate axis for which you are defining a load component. For heat loads, you use the sign to indicate whether a loaded entity is a heat source or heat sink. If you do not enter a value for a load component, magnitude, or direction, Mechanica assumes a default of 0 for that aspect of the load. For example, if you leave the Force X field blank for a force load, Mechanica assumes the load has no X component.
270
IndexStructure Loads
You can also use expressions as load values. Your expression can include real numbers, arithmetic operators, and Pro/ENGINEER parameter names. If you apply a load to a surface by selecting the surface with Box Select or Part Boundary, and Mechanica later creates a new surface due to a parameter change, the software does not automatically apply the existing load to the new surface.
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Load Sets
271
New Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and optional description for the new load set. Note: You can also access the Load Set Definition dialog box by clicking the New button in the Member of Set area of the Force/Moment Load, Pressure Load, Gravity Load, Centrifugal Load, Global Temperature Load, or Structural Temperature Load dialog boxes.
Copy Copies the selected load set and adds to the list in the Load Sets dialog box. The new load set includes copies of the same loads as the original load set. Edit Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box to enable you to modify any information you used to specify the highlighted load set. Delete Removes the highlighted load set. Description Displays the optional description that you entered when you created the load set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your loads or constraints separately, use a unique load and load set name for each load or constraint. Load and constraint sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities so that you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully-considered approach to load and constraint set creation simplifies load and constraint selection when defining your analyses. Although you are free to create a separate load or constraint set for each of your modeling entities, you can greatly reduce the number of selections you need to make when defining your analyses by grouping your loads and constraints into sets. For more information, see Guidelines for Load Sets.
See Also
References: Example: Load Set Understanding Structure Constraint Sets
272
IndexStructure Loads
Use names that uniquely and clearly identify the objective, placement, or other key characteristic of the set. If you use the default names, you or other users may have trouble distinguishing the sets later. You can include as many different entities and types of loads as you want within a single load set, with the exception of loads that affect the entire model. You can only include one centrifugal load, gravity load, MEC/T temperature load, or global temperature load per load set. There is no limit to the number of load sets you can create or the number of loads you can include in a load set. If you attempt to delete a point associated with a load or constraint, the software informs you of the association by pointing out that the geometry is referenced by a simulation feature. You can delete the point, but the software also deletes any associated load or constraint. You can edit and delete the individual loads or constraints that make up a set. You can also edit and delete a constraint set or load set. With constraint and load set editing, the only aspects of the set you can change are the name or the set description. You can remove a given load or constraint from its set by editing the name of the load set or constraint set.
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Structure Loads
Coordinate System Change the coordinate system. The default is the WCS. The software calculates the coordinate location of the component or vector you use to specify force or moment with respect to this coordinate system. Advanced Expand the dialog box to display these fields: o Distribution o Spatial Variation Does not appear if you selected Total Load At Point from the load distribution options. Force Specify the magnitude and direction of the force for your load. Moment Specify the magnitude and direction of the moment for your load. Preview Adds a series of arrows to your model showing the location and distribution of the load.
After you accept the dialog box, Mechanica places a load icon at each location you selected.
See Also
Procedures: To Define Force and Moment Loads To Define Centrifugal Loads To Define Gravity Loads
274
IndexStructure Loads
To work around this problem, you can change the coordinate system to a Cartesian coordinate system or re-orient the coordinate system so the Z axis no longer touches the entity you want to load. When you apply a force or moment, Mechanica displays a load icon on the appropriate entities. The icon includes a vector that indicates the direction of the load. If the vector direction does not agree with what you specified, review the load.
Note that, if you select Components or Dir Vector & Mag for centrifugal loads, the origin of the coordinate system you select determines the location of the angular velocity axis and angular acceleration axis. If you select Dir Points & Mag for centrifugal loads, the angular velocity axis and angular acceleration axis pass through the points you select.
275
If you are using a UCS for force or moment loads, the references to the WCS X, Y, and Z axes on the dialog box are replaced as follows:
UCS Type Axes
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Theta
Spherical
Theta
Phi
For points, you can select one of the following options on the Force/Moment Load dialog box: Total Load Distribute the load across all the points you select. In this case, Mechanica divides the load you specify by the number of points to determine the load that each point will bear. For example, if you specify a load of 100 pounds and select 4 points, each point will bear a 25 pound load. Load Per Point Apply the load you specify to each of the points you select. In other words, if you specify a load of 100 pounds and select 4 points, each point will bear a 100 pound load.
Spatial Variation
The spatial variation options supported in Mechanica enable you to simulate both simple and complex load variations over the entities for which you are defining the load. These options are useful for models that have localized load concentrations, such as tapering loads and load reversals. You can use Mechanica's spatial variation options to define nonuniform loads applied to the geometry of your model. The complexity of the variation depends on the option you select. Spatial variation options are available for Thermal heat loads and all Structure entity loads except for bearing loads.
276
IndexStructure Loads
You can select one of the following options for specifying how you want Mechanica to spatially vary the load you are creating: Uniform Use this option to apply a uniform load. The values entered are multiplied by 1 over the selected entities. The load has no spatial variation. Interpolated Over Entity Function of Coordinates
See Also
References: Load Interpolation Guidelines for Spatially Varying Loads Example: Spatially Varying Loads
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors. If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click OK. If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
277
8. Select one of these options from the drop-down list under Force to specify magnitude and direction, and enter the appropriate values: o Components o Dir Vector & Mag o Dir Points & Mag
In the directional component fields, you can enter a value, mathematical expression, or parameter name.
9. If desired, repeat step 8 for the Moment area. 10. If you want to display the load you just defined, click the Preview button. The software displays the load distribution and direction using arrows. 11. Click OK to accept the dialog box. If the software identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. If the software does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads that you specified to all the entities you selected. The software also adds a load icon to the geometry you are loading.
Bearing Loads
Use the Insert>Bearing Load command in Structure to create a bearing load on the surface or curve of a hole. Bearing loads are special-purpose loads that approximate the distribution of a force in a particular direction, for example, on a bolt through a hole. You can expect a tapering effect with this type of load. Bearing loads approximate the pressure applied to a 3D surface (hole) or a 2D circle (ring) by a rigid pin or axle passing through the center of a hole or ring. For more information on bearing loads, see Guidelines for Bearing Loads. When you select Insert>Bearing Load , the Bearing Load dialog box appears with the following items: Name The name of the load. Member of Set The name of the load set. You can select an existing load set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the Load Set Definition dialog box. Bearing Hole Allows you to select the hole surfaces on which you want to place the bearing load. Use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the desired geometry. Coordinate System Allows you to select the coordinate system that the bearing load will reference. You must select a Cartesian coordinate system. The default is the WCS. Force Allows you to specify the direction and magnitude of the bearing load vector. The load vector cannot be parallel to the axis of one or more selected holes. The software ignores any portion of the load vector that is parallel to the hole axis. Preview Adds a series of arrows to your model showing the location and distribution of the bearing load.
278
IndexStructure Loads
See Also
Procedure: Examples: To Define Bearing Loads Bearing Load Bearing Load on an Open Curve Bearing Load on a Surface
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors. If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click OK. If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
279
4. Select the circular curve or surface on which you want to place the bearing load now. Your selections appear under Bearing Hole. 5. To choose another Cartesian coordinate system, click the selector arrow. 6. Select one of the following to specify the magnitude and direction of the load: o o o Components Dir Points & Mag Dir Vector & Mag
7. If you want to display the load that you just defined, click the Preview button. The software displays the load distribution and direction as a series of magenta arrows. 8. Click OK to accept the dialog box. If the software identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. If the software does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads that you specified to all the entities you selected. The software also adds a load icon to the geometry you are loading.
Centrifugal Loads
Use the Insert>Centrifugal Load command in Structure and FEM mode Structure to create a centrifugal load on the entire model resulting from rigid body rotation of the model. You can specify the angular velocity and/or angular acceleration, which can have different vector directions. See Guidelines for Centrifugal Loads for more information. When you define a centrifugal load, you specify to which load set it belongs. Note that you can have only one centrifugal load per load set. When you select Insert>Centrifugal Load , the Centrifugal Load dialog box appears with the following items: Name The name of the load. Member of Set The name of the load set. You can select an existing load set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the Load Set Definition dialog box. Coordinate System Allows you to select the coordinate system that the centrifugal load will reference. You must select a Cartesian coordinate system. Angular Velocity Allows you to specify the direction and magnitude of the vector. The velocity can be positive or negative. For 2D axisymmetric models, you can only specify the magnitude of the angular velocity.
If you select the Dir Points & Mag option, see From and To Fields for Centrifugal Loads for more information.
280
IndexStructure Loads
Angular Acceleration Allows you to specify the direction and magnitude of the vector. The angular acceleration vector is the rate of change of the angular velocity vector.
If you select the Dir Points & Mag option, see From and To Fields for Centrifugal Loads for more information.
Preview Adds arrows to your model showing the vector direction of the centrifugal load. One of the arrows reflects the angular velocity and the other, the angular acceleration. If you specify angular velocity as 0, Mechanica only displays the angular acceleration arrow, and the reverse.
After you complete the Centrifugal Load dialog box, the software places an angular velocity and/or angular acceleration load icon on the model. The icons represent vectors. The angular velocity icon has one arrowhead, and the angular acceleration icon has two arrowheads, one on top of the other.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define Centrifugal Loads Spin Softening
and angular acceleration vector pass through that axis location and are perpendicular to the WCS XY plane. The software uses the right-hand rule to determine the direction of rotation about the axis and acceleration direction. To determine the direction of rotation, the software applies the right-hand rule to the velocity's sign. You can define only one centrifugal load per load set. You cannot review a resultant centrifugal load. (Each load set is calculated separately.) If you are running a prestress modal analysis on a model with a centrifugal load, Mechanica will compute modified vibrational modes to take into account the effect of relative circumferential motions, an effect known as spin softening. If you select multiple load sets for an analysis, at least one load set contains a centrifugal load, and you specify load set scaling when you view the analysis results, you can scale the load set, but the resulting omega term (such as rpm or rps) does not have a linear relationship with the centrifugal load. If you need to scale velocity or acceleration, you can isolate the centrifugal load and adjust the scale separately. For large deformation analyses that use centrifugal loads, the results will scale the body force, but not the velocity or acceleration. You can see the effect of this when you compare results of an analysis that uses one centrifugal load against the results of an analysis that uses a scaled version of the same load. The results will scale correctly in the linear range but, scaling may no longer provide accurate results when you enter the nonlinear range.
282
IndexStructure Loads
right-hand rule to determine the direction of rotation about the axis and acceleration direction.
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors. If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click OK. If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
Gravity Loads
Use the Insert>Gravity Load command in Structure or FEM mode Structure to create an accelerational load on your entire model. See Guidelines for Gravity Loads for more information.
283
When you define a gravity load, you specify to which load set it belongs. Note that you can have only one gravity load per load set. When you select Insert>Gravity Load, the Gravity Load dialog box appears with the following items: Name The name of the load. Member of Set The name of the load set. You can select an existing load set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the Load Set Definition dialog box. Properties Change the coordinate system. Use the selector arrow if you want to select a Cartesian coordinate system to reference the acceleration vector. The default is the WCS. Acceleration Specify the magnitude and direction of the gravitational acceleration. The units of the value you enter should be length/time2. Preview Adds an arrow to your model showing the direction of the gravity load.
After you complete the dialog box, Mechanica places a gravity load icon at the origin of the WCS, with a vector pointing in the direction of the load and the letter G at the endpoint of the vector. The gravity load acts at the center of gravity of the part or assembly.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Gravity Loads
284
IndexStructure Loads
When you apply a gravity load, the software displays a gravity icon at the origin of the WCS. The icon includes a vector that indicates the direction of the load. If the vector direction does not agree with what you thought you specified, review the load.
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors. If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click OK. If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
Pressure Loads
You can use the Insert>Pressure Load command in a Structure or FEM mode Structure model to create a pressure load on 3D model surfaces or 2D model curves. For 2D models, you can only select a curve that bounds one and only one surface. You cannot pick datum curves, free-floating curves, or curves shared by more than one surface.
285
A positive pressure load always acts in opposition to the normal direction of an entity at every location, even if the entity is curved. Mechanica sets the normal direction automatically for entities as you create them. When you select Insert>Pressure Load , the Pressure Load dialog box appears with the following items: Name The name of the load. Member of Set The name of the load set. You can select an existing load set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the Load Set Definition dialog box. References Select geometric entitiesedges or curves for 2D models, and surfaces for 3D models. If you selected the geometric entity before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when you open the dialog box. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the entities you want to load.
If you select a quilt surface, Mechanica displays the surface normal using a purple arrow at the time you select the surface, and gives you the option of flipping the normal direction. If you selected the surface before entering the dialog box, you can use the selector arrow to reselect the surface and determine the normal direction.
Advanced Expand the dialog box to define the spatial variation by indicating how you want Mechanica to vary the load across the geometric entity. You can choose a uniform loadone that remains the same across the selected geometry. As an alternative, you can vary the load either through interpolation or as a function of coordinates. Value Enter a real number, an arithmetic expression, or a parameter name for the magnitude of the pressure load. If you enter a negative magnitude, the pressure direction is coincident with the normal direction. Preview Adds a series of arrows to your model showing the location and distribution of the pressure load.
The software determines the pressure load direction by the sign that you use to specify the magnitude. Be aware of the following behaviors when determining the sign of a pressure load: Solid Faces If the pressure value is positive, the load pushes toward the surface because the normal for solids is always outward from the solid face. If the pressure value is negative, the load pulls away from the surface. Quilts If the pressure value is positive, the load pulls in the direction opposite of the normal direction that Mechanica displayed when you selected the pressure load surface. If the pressure value is negative, it pulls in the same direction as the normal direction.
Be aware that, if you switch to Pro/ENGINEER and change the surface normal of a quilt to which you have applied a pressure load, the load direction in Mechanica changes.
See Guidelines for Pressure Loads for more information. See Example: Pressure Load for an example of pressure load distribution.
286
IndexStructure Loads
See Also
Procedure: To Define Pressure Loads
Preview
When you click Preview, Mechanica checks the load for errors. If there are no errors, Mechanica displays the load vectors in magenta. The load vectors are replaced with yellow load distribution arrows when you click OK. If errors appear, correct the load definition before proceeding.
287
Temperature Loads
Temperature loads enable you to simulate a temperature change over your model. Temperature loads provide valuable information on how the structure of your model deforms due to a particular temperature change. Depending on how you specify the load, the temperature change is either uniform across the model or variable according to a temperature distribution from a Mechanica Thermal analysis. In FEM mode, function of coordinates is also a temperature distribution option. See Guidelines for Temperature Loads. Use the Insert>Temperature Load in Structure to: create global and MEC/T temperature loads that result from temperature changes over the model
288
IndexStructure Loads
You can include only one global or MEC/T temperature load in a load set. MEC/T temperature loads are not available in FEM mode. create structural temperature loads that result from temperature changes on a specified entity (FEM mode) You can include more than one structural load in a load set, but each load must be on a different entity. If you have a global temperature load and a structural temperature load, the global load applies everywhere except on the entities with the structural load. import external temperature loads into Structure. This option is not available in FEM mode.
When you create a temperature load, Mechanica places a load icon near the origin of the WCS. After you create a temperature load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a temperature load, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Reference: About Heat Loads
For global temperature loads, Mechanica assumes a default of 0 if you do not enter a value.
289
The difference between the model temperature and the reference temperature is the amount of temperature change over the model. After you complete the dialog box, the software places a temperature load icon on your model.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Global Temperature Loads
290
IndexStructure Loads
The Global Temperature dialog box (or Global Temperature Load in FEM mode) appears. 2. Enter a name for the load, or use the default name. 3. Select an existing load set from the Member Of Set area or use the New button to create a new load set. 4. Use the Model Temperature entry box to enter the temperature you want the software to apply to the model during analysis. In FEM mode, you also select Uniform or Function of Coordinates from the Spatial Variation area to tell the software how to distribute the temperature load. 5. Use the Reference Temperature entry box to enter the stress-free temperature of the model. 6. Click OK. If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the load that you specified. Mechanica also adds a temperature load icon to the geometry you are loading.
Use Previous Design Study Appears and is selected if you previously defined a standard design study that includes a thermal analysis. Design Study Appears only if the Use Previous Design Study check box is selected. If multiple standard design studies exist that include thermal analyses, you can select a design study other than the first standard design study for the model with a thermal analysis. Analysis If multiple thermal analyses exist, you can select a thermal analysis other than the first one defined for the design study (if you selected a design study) or the first one defined for the model. Load Set Appears only if the MEC/T temperature load is coming from a steady-state thermal analysis. If multiple load sets exist in the analysis you selected, you can select a load set other than the default (the first one defined for the thermal analysis). If the thermal analysis contains no load sets (for instance, prescribed temperatures only), this option does not appear. Step Appears only if the MEC/T temperature load is coming from a transient thermal analysis. Reference Temperature Enter the nominal zero strain temperature for the model. The temperature change for the thermal load at a given location on the model is the difference between the Thermal temperature result at the location and the reference temperature.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Define MEC/T Temperature Loads About Thermal Analysis About Design Studies
292
IndexStructure Loads
The mesh must be identical for the thermal and structural models. Thermal ignores springs and masses.
Step
Mechanica sums all load sets for transient thermal analyses, but computes separate solutions corresponding to different times. Use the Step drop-down list on the MEC/T Temperature dialog box to display the time steps that are defined for the transient thermal analysis associated with the MEC/T temperature load. For more information about how time steps are defined, see Transient Thermal Analysis.
293
7. If you selected a steady-state thermal analysis, select a Load Set from the drop-down list. 8. If you selected a transient thermal analysis, select a Step from the dropdown list. 9. Enter a real number or expression for the Reference Temperature. 10. Click OK to accept the dialog box. If the software identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. If the software does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the load that you specified. The software also adds a MEC/T load icon to the geometry you are loading.
See Also
Procedure: To Define External Temperature Loads
294
IndexStructure Loads
Your imported temperature load must contain the connectivity of a linear solid element mesh, node locations, and temperature values at the nodes. If the temperature load mesh is not consistent, Mechanica displays an error message. If you defined the temperature load for part of your model, Mechanica displays an error message indicating that it will calculate temperature through extrapolation for parts of the model. If you performed a design study for your model that included size or shape changes, you must make sure the temperature field is consistent for all the design variations included in the study.
When you import an external temperature load, you also import the model's orientation.
295
4. If you do not want to use the WCS as the reference coordinate system, click the selector arrow in the Reference area to select a different reference coordinate system. to 5. In the File area, enter an external temperature field file name or click display an additional dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a .fnf file. The default is your current directory. Select a file name from the current directory or from another directory. 6. Enter the reference temperature you want Mechanica to apply during the analysis. You can enter a real number or an expression. 7. Click OK. If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads that you specified to all the entities you selected. Mechanica also adds a temperature load icon to the geometry you are loading.
Mechanism Loads
Use the Insert>Mechanism Load command to import a load set from Mechanism Design Extension into Structure. Before using this command, you must use the Use In Structure command in Mechanism Design to create the load set based on the results of a dynamic analysis. This option is not available in FEM mode. For more information on the Use in Structure command, see About Load Transfer to Structure in the Mechanism Design module in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center (Simulation functional area). The load set that you create in Mechanism Design includes inertial and reaction forces and gravity, as well as any applied external forces and torques. When you create the load set, you associate the load set with a part, subassembly, or top-level assembly file. To import the Mechanism Design load set and use the loads in Structure, you must complete two steps: Open the component file in Structure and import the load set. Associate the loads that you want to use with geometric references.
It is important that you carry out both steps. If you do not associate the loads before you exit Structure, Mechanica will not save them with the model. To associate a load, highlight the load icon on your model, select Edit>Definition to open the appropriate dialog box, and select a geometric reference for the load. When you select Insert>Mechanism Load , the Mechanism Load Import dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to specify which Mechanism Design loads you want to include in a Structure load set. For information on the various types of imported loads, see How Structure Imports Loads from Mechanism Design. Note: You can import the same Mechanism Design load set several times in a given Structure session by making sure the Clear Load Info After Import check box on the Mechanism Load Import dialog box is not selected. This 296
IndexStructure Loads
gives you the option of associating the loads from the Mechanism Design load set with different entities in the same model.
The Mechanism Load Import dialog box appears with a list of the loads you exported from Mechanism Design for the component. 3. Accept the default load set from the Member Of Set area, select another existing load set, or use the New button to display the Load Set dialog box and create a new load set. 4. Clear the check box beside any load that you do not want to include in the load set. 5. Check the Clear Load Info After Import box if you do not want to import the load set more than once in the current session. 6. Click OK to create the load set. 7. Highlight each imported load icon and select Edit>Definition to associate the load with a geometric entity, or to change the referenced coordinate system. The various load types take you to different dialog boxes. For reaction loads on connections, servo motors, force motors, springs, dampers, or external forces or torques, see Force and Moment Loads. For centrifugal loads, see Centrifugal Loads. For gravity loads, see Gravity Loads.
297
Verifying a Load
You can review the load for entry errors by highlighting the load icon on your model and selecting Edit>Definition. The software will display the load definition dialog box for that load. To change any of the values you entered, simply type in new information.
If you want to review a resultant load at a particular location, you first need to add datum points. These datum points act as references from which the software evaluates the resultant load for the model, so place the points at locations that will provide significant data. In considering resultant loads, be aware of the following points: The software calculates the resultant force. It also calculates the resultant moments about the selected datum point. The software displays the components of the resultant force and moment with respect to the unit vectors of the current coordinate system. You can view the resultant force and moments with respect to the WCS, or you may select another Cartesian coordinate system in the model. You can examine the effect of one or more loads. Selecting a single load is helpful when you are trying to troubleshoot the values for a particular load. Looking at a combination of loads can be helpful if you are concerned about the actual load that a particular portion of the model will see during a multiload analysis.
See Also
Procedure: To Review Resultant Loads
298
IndexThermal Loads
You may want to define a small surface region and apply the load to the region instead of to a point. This approach distributes the stresses and fluxes over a slightly wider portion of the model, avoiding concentration problems.
For structural analysis, a load is a force, moment, pressure, acceleration, velocity, or temperature that you apply to a portion of your model. For thermal analysis, a load is a heat condition applied to a portion of your model.
See Also
References: About Structure Loads About Heat Loads
300
IndexThermal Loads
Time Dependent Select this check box to make your load a function of time. Preview Use this button to check the load for errors before you leave the dialog box. After you complete the heat load definition by accepting the dialog box, Mechanica places a heat load icon at each location you selected for the heat load.
After you create a heat load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a heat load, Mechanica asks you for confirmation first.
See Also
Procedures: To Define Heat Loads To Define Heat Loads (FEM mode) To Define Heat Loads for Components References: Heat Loads on Internal Surfaces Defining Heat Loads (FEM mode) Reviewing Total Heat Loads
301
Note: You can also access the Load Set Definition dialog box by clicking the New button in the Member of Set area of the Force/Moment Load, Pressure Load, Gravity Load, Centrifugal Load, Global Temperature Load, or Structural Temperature Load dialog boxes. Copy Copies the selected load set and adds to the list in the Load Sets dialog box. The new load set includes copies of the same loads as the original load set. Edit Opens the Load Set Definition dialog box to enable you to modify any information you used to specify the highlighted load set. Delete Removes the highlighted load set. Description Displays the optional description that you entered when you created the load set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your loads or constraints separately, use a unique load and load set name for each load or constraint. Load and constraint sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities so that you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully-considered approach to load and constraint set creation simplifies load and constraint selection when defining your analyses. Although you are free to create a separate load or constraint set for each of your modeling entities, you can greatly reduce the number of selections you need to make when defining your analyses by grouping your loads and constraints into sets. For more information, see Guidelines for Load Sets.
See Also
References: Example: Load Set Understanding Structure Constraint Sets
302
IndexThermal Loads
You can include as many different entities and types of loads as you want within a single load set, with the exception of loads that affect the entire model. You can only include one centrifugal load, gravity load, MEC/T temperature load, or global temperature load per load set. There is no limit to the number of load sets you can create or the number of loads you can include in a load set. If you attempt to delete a point associated with a load or constraint, the software informs you of the association by pointing out that the geometry is referenced by a simulation feature. You can delete the point, but the software also deletes any associated load or constraint. You can edit and delete the individual loads or constraints that make up a set. You can also edit and delete a constraint set or load set. With constraint and load set editing, the only aspects of the set you can change are the name or the set description. You can remove a given load or constraint from its set by editing the name of the load set or constraint set.
See Also
Reference: Guidelines for Structure Loads
To facilitate the application of the load, you add regions on either side of the screw slot. These regions simulate contact sites for the screwdriver as it presses against the slot when you apply torque. You then define two 25-pound loads in opposite directions relative to the Y axis of the coordinate system shown above. The opposition of these loads simulates torque applied to the screw as you twist it. You ensure that both loads are part of a load set called torque by giving them the Member Of Set name torque.
303
Total Load
Use this option on the Heat Load dialog box to distribute a load along the length or area of the entity such that the integral of the load over the selected entity equals the total prescribed value. For curves (and edges in FEM mode), Mechanica distributes the load as load per arc length. For surfaces, Mechanica distributes the load as load per surface area. Follow these guidelines: With this distribution method, the total heat load remains the same even if the entity's length or area changes. The geometric change may result from changes you make to the model or changes Mechanica makes during a sensitivity or optimization design study. If you select more than one entity, Mechanica places the load you create on each entity. You can apply a heat load to multiple surfaces. In this case, Mechanica distributes the load in such a way that all surfaces carry the heat load proportional to the surface area. Note: You cannot select the Total Load option for a 3D solid. Mechanica calculates the total load on different entities in the following ways (where Q = heat transfer rate):
304
IndexThermal Loads
Entity
edges, beams
curves
Q/sum of the lengths of the edges that lie on the curve Q/area of entity
surfaces
For 2D plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models, a load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell defines what is physically an area load. You enter the amount of such a load on the surface that the curve, edge, or 2D shell represents. Similarly, a load on a 2D solid defines what is physically internal heat generation. You enter this type of load on the body that the 2D solid represents.
The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form of the interpolation. For all entities, when you are specifying the heat transfer rate: To make the loaded entity a heat source for the model, enter a positive value for Q, which adds heat to the model. To make the loaded entity a heat sink for the model, enter a negative Q value, which removes heat from the model.
The sign on the heat load icon indicates whether the load is a heat source (+) or heat sink ().
305
Time Dependent
Select the Time Dependent check box on the Heat Load dialog box if your applied load is a function of time. You must then specify that function over the time range that the analysis will run. When you select the Time Dependent check box, the Heat Load dialog box expands to display the f(x) button and entry box in the Temporal Variation area. The dialog box that appears for selecting functions differs depending on the entity you chose: If you chose Point, Edge/Curve, or Surface, the Function Definition dialog box appears when you select the f(x) button. On this dialog box, you name and define the time function for your heat load. If you chose Component, the Functions dialog box appears when you select the f(x) button. Note: The functions you access if you select Component are the same as the FEM mode functions. Time dependence functions for heat load (Q) values are multipliers. When you make a heat load time dependent, its computed value is Q times the time dependence function. If you have also specified a spatial interpolation, the heat load's computed value is Q times the time dependence function times the spatial interpolation. There is no default value for the time dependence function.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Function
306
IndexThermal Loads
4. Select an existing load set from the Member Of Set area or use the New button to create a new load set. and use the normal selection methods to select the particular entity 5. Click that this load will be associated with. If the desired entity is an internal surface, see Heat Loads on Internal Surfaces. 6. Depending on the type of entity you selected, you will provide information for one or both of the following: o Distribution o Spatial Variation 7. Enter the heat transfer rate in the Q entry box. 8. To specify a time-dependent heat load, select the Time Dependent check box. Then click the f(x) button. Mechanica displays the Functions dialog box. 9. Select an existing function or click New or Edit to display the Function Definition dialog box on which you can define or edit the time function for your heat load. Click OK. 10. If you want to display the load you just defined, click the Preview button. Mechanica displays the load distribution and direction using arrows. 11. Click OK to accept the dialog box. If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you defined the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the loads you specified to all the entities you selected. Mechanica also adds a heat load icon to the geometry you are loading.
Time Dependent Select this check box to make your load a function of time.
After you create a heat load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a heat load, the software asks you for confirmation first. You can also review the total heat load.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Heat Loads (FEM mode)
The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form of the interpolation. For all entities, when you are specifying the heat transfer rate: To make the loaded entity a heat source for the model, enter a positive value for Q, which adds heat to the model. To make the loaded entity a heat sink for the model, enter a negative Q value, which removes heat from the model.
The sign on the heat load icon indicates whether the load is a heat source (+) or heat sink ().
Time Dependent
Select the Time Dependent check box on the Heat Load dialog box if your applied load is a function of time. You must then specify that function over the time range that the analysis will run. When you select the Time Dependent check box, the Heat Load dialog box expands to display the f(x) button and entry box in the Temporal Variation area. The dialog box that appears for selecting functions differs depending on the entity you chose: 308
IndexThermal Loads
If you chose Point, Edge/Curve, or Surface, the Function Definition dialog box appears when you select the f(x) button. On this dialog box, you name and define the time function for your heat load. If you chose Component, the Functions dialog box appears when you select the f(x) button. Note: The functions you access if you select Component are the same as the FEM mode functions.
Time dependence functions for heat load (Q) values are multipliers. When you make a heat load time dependent, its computed value is Q times the time dependence function. If you have also specified a spatial interpolation, the heat load's computed value is Q times the time dependence function times the spatial interpolation. There is no default value for the time dependence function.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Function
After you select Component, the Volume Heat Load dialog box appears. 3. Enter a name for the heat load, or use the default name. 4. Select an existing load set from the Member Of Load Set area or use the New button to create a new load set. 5. Click and select the component on which you want to place the load. 6. Enter a value. 7. To specify a time-dependent heat load, select the Time Dependent check box, and then click the f(x) button. Select or modify an existing function or create a new function using the Functions dialog box. Click Close when you are finished with functions. 8. When you have finished defining the heat load, click OK to accept the dialog box. If Mechanica identifies any problems with the way you define the load, it displays a message box informing you of the situation. 309
If Mechanica does not encounter any definition problems, it applies the load you specified. Mechanica also adds a heat load icon to the component.
After you create a heat load, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a heat load, the software asks you for confirmation first. You also review the total heat load.
310
IndexThermal Loads
See Also
Procedure: To Define Heat Loads (FEM mode)
311
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Review Total Heat Loads Troubleshooting Loads
312
IndexMeasures
Results Available for Measures the types of measure results you can access for different types of design studies
Uses of Measures
With measures, you can perform specific evaluations of aspects such as tensile, compressive, and shear strength, rotational flexibility, mass changes, refractive behavior, and so forth. You can use measures to do the following: Set up measures to monitor specific aspects of your model's performance. For instance, you might want to know the stress tangent to a fillet's radius for the later calculation of fatigue. Use measures as convergence criteria for an analysis, or as a goal or a limit in a design study. You also use measures to measure sensitivity to parameter changes in a local or global sensitivity design study. Use measures to determine how much a shape change affects a particular quantity in your model. As an example, you can see how much changing the radius of a fillet increases or decreases von Mises stress at the fillet. You can also use measures to monitor your model's performance in dynamic situations. For instance, you can set up a measure at a particular point on the model to act as an accelerometer, gauging the rate of acceleration at that point during a dynamic analysis. You can also use dynamic measures to determine model velocity or position.
Measure Basics
As analysis packages, Structure and Thermal have different goals. Understanding the implications of this difference will help you understand the types of measures you can apply as well as how to use those measures to obtain the information you are interested in. Structure Mechanica focuses on structural stresses. Although you can apply temperature loads to your model, you can only obtain information on how the structure of the model behaves at a particular temperaturenot on how heat flows through your model. Therefore, while you can measure structural stresses in your model, you cannot measure model temperature. Thermal Mechanica focuses on thermal behavior. Even though you can obtain information on how your model reacts to temperature, you cannot use Thermal to examine structural stresses resulting from the thermal conditions you applied to your model. In other words, you can measure thermal data, but not structural data.
Regardless of the Mechanica product you are working with, there are several aspects of measures you should be aware of when deciding which measures to use or define for your model. To learn about these aspects, see the following: Guidelines for Measures Predefined, User-Defined, and Automatically-Defined Measures 313
Global and Local Measures Parameter-Based Measures Coordinate Systems and Measures Measures and Output
User-Defined You can also create user-defined measures for your model. These measures are often called custom measures. User-defined measures look at many of the same quantities as the predefined measures, but provide additional flexibility and functionality. For instance, user-defined measures provide a means of observing a location-specific, time-specific, or frequencyspecific quantity. As with predefined measures, Mechanica automatically calculates all relevant user-defined measures during analysis. For information on when to create user-defined measures, see Reasons to Create User-Defined Measures.
Automatically Defined In addition, Mechanica automatically defines a limited set of measures that are specific to particular modeling entities. Mechanica creates automatically-defined measures only when you add a modeling entitysuch as contact regions or fastenersthat requires the
314
IndexMeasures
measure. If you delete the modeling entity, Mechanica removes the automatically-defined measure from the model. Although Mechanica creates these entity-dependent measures automatically, it treats some of these measuresthose for contact regionsas a form of userdefined measure, placing these measures in the User-Defined area of any measure selection lists. Other automatically defined measures, such as those for fasteners, appear in the Predefined area instead.
Predefined Measures
When using predefined measures, note that: Each model contains a set of predefined measures associated with the WCS. All predefined measures apply to the entire model. Mechanica automatically calculates predefined measures of the appropriate type for each analysis and design study. You cannot delete a predefined measure.
For lists of predefined measures, see: Predefined Measures in Structure Predefined Measures in Thermal
com_x
com_y
com_z
contact_area
contact_max_pres
315
inertia_xx
inertia_xy
inertia_xz
inertia_yy
inertia_yz
inertia_zz
max_beam_bending
max_beam_tensile
max_beam_torsiona
max_beam_totala
max_disp_magb
max_disp_x
max_disp_y
max_disp_z
max_prin_magb
max_rot_magb
316
IndexMeasures
max_rot_x
max_rot_y
max_rot_z
max_stress_prinb
max_stress_vmb
max_stress_xx
max_stress_xy
max_stress_xz
max_stress_yy
max_stress_yz
max_stress_zz
min_stress_prinb
modal_frequency
strain_energy
total_cost total_mass
a. Mechanica does not calculate these measures for any dynamic analyses.
317
b. Mechanica does not calculate these measures for dynamic random analyses.
max_dyn_flux_mag
maximum heat flux magnitude over model at each time step maximum temperature over model at each time step
max_dyn_temperature
min_dyn_temperature
max_flux_mag
max_flux_x
max_flux_y
max_flux_z
max_grad_mag
max_grad_x
maximum temperature gradient over model in WCS X direction maximum temperature gradient over model in WCS Y direction maximum temperature gradient over model in WCS Z direction maximum temperature over model
max_grad_y
max_grad_z
max_temperature
min_temperature
318
IndexMeasures
total_cost
total_mass
User-Defined Measures
To define measures that are a function of time, frequency, local measures, or measures relative to a coordinate system other than the WCS, you need to create a user-defined measure. You cannot use the name of a predefined measure for a new measure, or create a new measure that is identical to a predefined measure, unless you associate the measure with a UCS. Measures you define may apply to the entire model, to an entity or entities you select (the type and number of entities you can select depend on how you define the measure), or to an area near a point. Keep in mind the following, when you begin working with the user-defined measures: If you plan to make a measure relative to a coordinate system other than the WCS, you need to have that coordinate system in place. If you plan to place a measure at a specific point on an exterior surface, your part needs to include a datum point at that location unless the location is a vertex. If you plan to place a point measure on a shell model surface that Mechanica may compress during analysis, see Model Entities and Idealizations to learn about how Mechanica processes loads placed on compressed surfaces.
For more information about creating user-defined measures for different types of analyses, read the following: User-Defined Measures for Basic Analyses User-Defined Measures for Dynamic Analyses User-Defined Measures for Thermal Analyses.
319
When you would like to monitor a model quantity over time or as a function of frequency. For more information, see Quantity Dynamic Analyses. When you plan to perform transient thermal analyses and would like to monitor a model quantity over time. For more information, see Quantity Thermal Analyses. When you want to define a Pro/ENGINEER parameter as a measure. For more information, see Parameter-Based Measures. When you want to measure a quantity at a location of interest, such as a point that may experience high stress. For more information, see Global and Local Measures. When you want to define the components of a measure quantity, such as stress, relative to a coordinate system other than the WCS. For more information, see Coordinate Systems and Measures.
If you plan to add user-defined measures to your model rather than use Mechanica's predefined measures, refer to User-Defined Measures. Note that you cannot use the name of a predefined measure for a user-defined measure.
Automatically-Defined Measures
This table lists automatically-defined measures. Items in italics are variables typically an entity name or internal identifier. Automatically-defined measures are currently available for Structure only.
Name cntRgn_xxxcntArea Description contact area for contact region xxx
cntRgn_xxxmaxPres
fastener_tensile_force
fastener_tensile_stress
fastener_shear_force
fastener_shear_stress
fastener_separation_stress
320
IndexMeasures
a. This table shows the static form of these measures. Mechanica computes the static form of these measures for static, prestress static, contact, and dynamic shock analyses. If "_d" appears as a measure name suffix, the measure is the dynamic form. Mechanica computes the dynamic form of these measures for dynamic random, dynamic frequency, and dynamic time analyses.
Mechanica tracks three of the fastener measuresfastener_tensile_force, fastener_tensile_stress, and fastener_separation_stressonly for advanced fasteners that include a preload. The fastener_separation_stress measure tracks normal stresses on the inside surfaces of the fastened components. This measure determines whether the model maintains component separation properly as the preloaded fastener compresses the components. For proper separation, the normal stresses must remain less than zero during analysis. Values of zero or greater mean that there is no compression between the components and the components are separating. To learn more about how Mechanica creates this measure, see Fastener Preloads. Note: Mechanica does not calculate the fastener_separation_stress measure for dynamic random or dynamic shock analyses.
You can also create other types of local measures that reference your model's idealizations, layers, or geometry. With any type of local measures, Mechanica evaluates the measure quantity relative to a particular location on the model.
Point Measures
Mechanica evaluates the measure quantity at the application point only. Thus, the quantity that Mechanica reports for the measure is specific to the point and contains no direct information on the area immediately surrounding the point. However, you can make inferences about the surrounding area by looking at a fringe plot for the desired measure quantity and performing a dynamic query. For information about fringe plots, see Fringe Display Type.
For Near Point measures, Mechanica develops the radius you specify as a threedimensional sphere. Thus, the portion of the model this measure considers depends on the type, as well as the contour, of your model. For solid models, a Near Point measure samples the interior of your model as well as its surfaces. For shell and beam models, sampling is one- or two-dimensional, as determined by model geometry. If you specify a large radius that intersects more than one portion of the model, Mechanica samples only the portion of the model that contains the application point. Mechanica determines the sampling points from the plotting grid you specify for your analysis. The higher the number you specify for your plotting grid, the greater the number of sampling points and the greater the refinement of the analysis results. For more information on plotting grids, see Output Options for Structural Analyses. The Near Point option is available for stress, strain, heat flux, and temperature gradient measure quantities. You can only use Near Point if you select a Maximum, Minimum, or Maximum Abs spatial evaluation method for one of these quantities. For more information on spatial evaluation methods, see User-Defined Measures for Basic Analyses. Mechanica reports a single value for the quantity you select. This value reflects the maximum, minimum, or absolute maximum found among the sampled points. Mechanica does not provide the location of the point where the value occurred.
Parameter-Based Measures
To enhance product versatility, Mechanica enables you to use dependent Pro/ENGINEER parameters as measures. Parameter-based measures provide you with a greater degree of flexibility in how you define measures and the types of measure quantities you can ask Mechanica to evaluate. You can use parameter-based measures for the following functions: Obtaining analysis and study results specific to a Pro/ENGINEER parameter Obtaining analysis and study results for a specialized Pro/ENGINEER quantity Setting up optimization goals Setting up optimization limits Setting up parameters for use with regeneration analyses
For information you should know before defining parameter-based measures, see Parameter-Based Measure Basics.
See Also
Reference: Example: Using Parameter-Based Measures
322
IndexMeasures
323
If you are interested in evaluating one of these quantities, you can define the quantity as a Pro/ENGINEER parameter, create an associated Mechanica measure, and run an analysis or study on your model. You can then study how the quantity behaved during the analysis, or how it changed during the study.
324
IndexMeasures
If you plan to run a design study that relies on a regeneration analysis, note that the only result quantities available are measures and, for optimization studies, shape histories. In other words, the results you will view most typically are graphs of measures relative to design parameters. Further, regeneration analysis does not engage the engine to calculate typical Mechanica measures such as von Mises stress. The only measures it calculates are parameter-based measures. Thus, you should be sure to define parameter-based measures for the model. If you do not, you will be unable to review the results of the study. In addition, if you want to run an optimization study based on a regeneration analysis, you must define your goals and limits as parameter-based measures. If you choose to run a regeneration analysis in your current Pro/ENGINEER session and not in a separate session, the shape change is performed directly on the model in Pro/ENGINEER's memory. Using this method enables you to complete a study faster than running regeneration in a separate session. When defining parameter-based measures, you should be familiar with basic points.
325
In this case, you might define an optimization design study using the following: Goal Use a parameter-based measure for part mass. Limit Use a parameter-based measure for surface area. Parameters Create three Pro/ENGINEER parameters for the modelone each for d0, d1, and d2.
326
IndexMeasures
X Y Z
R T Z
R T P
Mechanica expresses displacement measures associated with the following directions: cylindrical coordinates in the T direction spherical coordinates in the T or P direction
Note that Mechanica expresses displacement measures in units of length, not angle. To simplify discussion, Mechanica help refers to a Cartesian coordinate system. If you are working with a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system instead, make the appropriate substitutions.
standard design study that runs one of the Vibration analyses or a transient thermal analysis
standard design study that runs a large deformation analysis or a contact analysis optimization design study local or global sensitivity study
327
The types of results listed above are not available for result quantities other than measures. For other result quantities, you can query values at specific locations or view fringe, contour, and vector displays.
Use these buttons to work with measures: New Create a new measure. Edit Review and edit an existing measure. Copy Copy an existing measure. Copying measures proves handy if you want to apply the same type of measure to several different datum points. In this case, be sure to edit each copy of the measure to select the appropriate point. You can copy more than one measure at a time. To do so, simply select more than one measure from the User-Defined list and click Copy. Delete Delete an existing measure. You can delete more than one measure at a time. To do so, simply select more than one measure from the User-Defined list and click Delete. Note that if you delete a measure that you have selected as a convergence quantity for an analysis, or as a goal or limit in an optimization design study, you should redefine the analysis or design study to ensure that it is still valid. Additionally, if you delete a measure upon which another measure depends, Mechanica deletes the dependent measure as well. For example, if you delete a measure referenced by a computed measure, Mechanica deletes both the measure you select and the computed measure.
See Also
Procedures: To Define Measures for Structural Analyses To Define Measures for Thermal Analyses
328
IndexMeasures
329
330
IndexMeasures
creating during any work you do on the assembly level. If you do not select this check box, Mechanica ignores this part level measure when you switch to the assembly.
See Also
Procedures: To Define Measures for Structural Analyses To Define Measures for Thermal Analyses
The method you use to add user-defined measures for these analyses differs slightly from the one you use for most of the dynamic analyses. The single exception is the dynamic shock analysis. You define measures for dynamic shock just as you would if you were defining a stress, strain, displacement, or rotation measure for a basic analysis. When you create user-defined measures for basic analyses, you specify a measure that does not require a time- or frequency-based calculation. In defining this type of measure, you indicate the quantity, component, and spatial evaluation method, with some exceptions. Mechanica provides several options for each of these aspects of the measure. The basic options are as follows: Quantity Component Spatial Evaluation Method
Depending on the quantity you select, other options may be available. For a graphical overview of measures used in basic analyses, see Basic Analyses Measure Selections.
331
See Also
Procedure: To Define Measures for Structural Analyses
332
IndexMeasures
Availability of the global spatial evaluation methods depends on the component you choose. For stress and strain quantities, Mechanica provides an additional option menu that enables you to specify whether the measure will be calculated over the model or at a particular model location. Available only for contact forces and center of mass.
333
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define Measures for Structural Analyses Dynamic Analysis Measure Selections
User-defined measures are especially important for dynamic analyses, where you want to study the model's behavior over a time range, at a point in time, or as a function of frequency. In fact, user-defined measures are the only measures that apply to dynamic random analyses. With dynamic time analysis, you use userdefined measures to define the quantities you want to look at through a series of time intervals (or time steps), over a range of time, or at a point in time. For dynamic frequency and dynamic random analyses, you use user-defined measures to define a quantity you want to study at given frequency intervals, or frequency steps. 334
IndexMeasures
The method you use to add user-defined measures for dynamic analyses differs slightly from the one you use for the basic analyses. The main difference is that the measures for most dynamic analyses require you to define the measure in terms of time or frequency. The exception is the measures for dynamic shock analyses, which are time- and frequency-independent. The methods you use to define measures for a dynamic shock analysis are the same as those you use to define a stress, displacement, or rotation measure for a basic analysis. Thus, to learn about dynamic shock, see Dynamic Shock Analysis. When you define a user-defined measure for dynamic analyses, you specify a measure that involves a time- or frequency-based calculation. In defining this type of measure, you indicate the quantity, component, spatial evaluation method, and time or frequency evaluation method. Mechanica provides several options for each of these aspects of the measure, as follows: Quantity Component Spatial Evaluation Method Time or Frequency Evaluation Method Time Stamp
For a graphical overview of measures used in dynamic analyses, see Dynamic Analyses Measure Selections.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Measures for Structural Analyses
335
Availability of the global spatial evaluation methods depends on the component you choose. For stress and strain quantities, Mechanica provides an additional option menu that enables you to specify whether the measure will be calculated over the model or at a particular location. To determine the time at which a maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute value occurs, select the Time Stamp check box.
336
IndexMeasures
3
Availability of each time/frequency evaluation method depends on the component and spatial evaluation method you choose. At Each Step is always available. Available only for the spring force or moment.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Stress or Strain Measure
Failure Index
Use a failure index measure to determine whether a material has failed because of excessive stress levels, which might be caused by an applied load or an enforced displacement constraint. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Failure Index as the quantity: Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Time/Frequency Eval Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Failure Index Measure
Displacement Use a displacement measure to measure displacement for your model in terms of either magnitude or component direction.
337
Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Displacement as the quantity: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select an LCS or UCS.
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Time/Frequency Eval Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Displacement Measure
Rotation
Use a rotation measure to measure model rotations in terms of magnitude or component direction. Use this quantity for shell and beam elements only. Rotation measures are not relevant for solid elements. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Rotation as the quantity: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Time/Frequency Eval Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
338
IndexMeasures
Procedure:
Force
Use a force measure to measure the spring force or the force acting on the structure through the constraints. When you select Force, the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box expands displaying the following options: Reaction At Constraint Spring
The following items also appear on the dialog box: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. If you are defining the force measure as Reaction At Constraint and you select a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, you will also need to select a reference point.
Spatial Evaluation: o Constraint This option appears if you selected Reaction At Constraint as a quantity. Click the arrow button to select a constraint. o Spring This option appears if you selected Spring as a quantity. Click the arrow button to select a spring. You can only select a pointpoint or to ground spring. Time/Frequency Eval This check box appears only if you selected Spring as a quantity. Select the check box if you want to define a dynamic evaluation method for your measure. The only available method is At Each Time Step, which directs Mechanica to calculate the value of the measure at each time or frequency step.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Force Measure
339
Moment
Use a moment measure to measure the spring moment or the moment acting on the structure through the constraints. When you select Moment, the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box expands displaying the following options: Reaction At Constraint Spring
The following items also appear on the dialog box: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. If you are defining the moment measure as Reaction At Constraint and you select a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, you will also need to select a reference point.
Spatial Evaluation: o Constraint This option appears if you selected Reaction At Constraint as a quantity. Click the arrow button to select a constraint. You also need to select point(s) for this quantity. o Spring This option appears if you selected Spring as a quantity. Click the arrow button to select a spring. You can only select a pointpoint or to ground spring. Time/Frequency Eval This check box appears only if you select Spring. Select the check box if you want to define a dynamic evaluation method for your measure. The only available method is At Each Time Step, which directs Mechanica to calculate the value of the measure at each time or frequency step.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Moment Measure
340
IndexMeasures
Computed Measure
Use a computed measure to measure values that cannot be calculated through other user-defined measures. You can define this measure as a function that references any other user-defined, noncomputed measure or measures already present in the model. After you select Computed Measure, you can enter an algebraic expression directly in the Expression entry box on the Measure Definition dialog box. You can also click the Available Function Components button to access the Symbolic Options dialog box, which you use to build your expression. The Symbolic Options dialog box contains the following: Variables Display all previously defined measures. Use these measures as independent variables for the function you are defining.
Note that any independent variable measures you select for the expression should be of the same evaluation type. For example, if one measure is At Each Step, all other measures you select should also be At Each Step measures. Additionally, if you later delete a measure that you are using as a variable, Mechanica will also delete the computed measure without warning you.
Constants, Operators, Functions Display various types of symbols you can use in the expression. If you are creating a computed measure for use in a dynamic analysis, you should be sure that you combine the functions in a linear fashion.
If you click the independent variable in the Variables box and any symbols in their respective boxes, Mechanica places them in the Expression entry box. When creating computed measures, always be sure that the expression you create makes sense from a functional point of view. Mechanica does not check the validity of the expression you create if you, therefore, create an expression that does not make sensevon Mises stress + displacement magnitude, for exampleyour results for the computed measure will be meaningless.
341
Velocity
Use a velocity measure to measure velocity in terms of magnitude or component direction. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Velocity as the quantity: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Dynamic Evaluation Select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Velocity Measure
Acceleration
Use an acceleration measure to measure acceleration in terms of magnitude or component direction. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Acceleration as the quantity: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Dynamic Evaluation Select a time or frequency evaluation method.
342
IndexMeasures
See Also
Procedure: To Define an Acceleration Measure
Rotational Velocity
Use a rotational velocity measure to measure rotational velocity in terms of magnitude or component direction. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Rotational Velocity as the quantity: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Dynamic Evaluation Select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Rotational Velocity Measure
Rotational Acceleration
Use a rotational acceleration measure to measure rotational acceleration in terms of magnitude or component direction. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Rotational Acceleration as the quantity: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
343
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Dynamic Evaluation Select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Rotational Acceleration Measure
Phase
Use a phase measure to measure the phase for several quantities. Phase measures can be used in dynamic frequency analyses only. When you select Phase, a second option menu appears in the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box. The following items also appear if you select Phase: Component Select one of the following: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Dynamic Evaluation Select a time or frequency evaluation method.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Phase Measure
Time
Use time measures to determine the time of first or last occurrence of a measure's value being greater or less than a specified value during an analysis. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Time as the quantity:
344
IndexMeasures
Measure Name Use the arrow button to choose a measure from the Measures dialog box. First Occurrence or Last Occurrence Greater Than or Less Than Measure Value
This measure applies to transient thermal or dynamic time analyses only. If the condition is never true, Mechanica returns a value of zero and also provides a warning in the .rpt file.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Time Measure
Fatigue Measures
Use fatigue measures to specify the types of values Mechanica calculates in determining the life of your model and the level of damage. You can use fatigue measures, for example, to calculate fatigue damage at a specific point on your model. When you define fatigue measures, you must specify the following on the Measures Definition dialog box: Component Select one of these options: o Fatigue Life o Fatigue Damage o Safety Factor Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for the quantity you are measuring.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Fatigue Measure
Contact
Use contact measures to measure various aspects and behaviors of contact regions during a contact analysis. This option appears only for models that contain contact regions. When you select Contact, a second option menu appears in the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box. Select an option from this menu to determine the type of contact measure: Force calculates the stress over a single contact region 345
Area calculates the total area of all the selected contact regions Maximum Pressure reports the maximum pressure over the selected contact regions Average Pressure reports the average pressure over the selected contact regions Load reports the contact pressure integrated over one or more contact regions
The following items also appear on the dialog box: Component This item appears if you select Force. Select a component for Force from this option menu: o Magnitude o X o Y o Z
For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
Contact Regions Use the arrow to select one or more contact regions. If you are defining a force contact measure, you can only select one contact region. For all other contact measure types, you can select multiple contact regions. Surface(s) This option appears if you selected Force. Use the arrow to select a surface for the contact force measure.
See Also
Reference: To Define a Contact Measure
Center of Mass
Use Center Of Mass to measure the location of the model's center of mass in relation to the current coordinate system. When you select Center Of Mass, the Component option menu appears on the Measure Definition Dialog Box. Use the Component option menu to select a component of your quantity from this option menu: Magnitude X Y Z
Note that Mechanica does not report Magnitude in the summary file for analysis. For the options X, Y, or Z, select a coordinate system relative to which you define
346
IndexMeasures
the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Center of Mass Measure
Moment of Inertia
Use Moment Of Inertia to measure the moment of inertia relative to either the current coordinate system or the principal inertial axes of the model. When you select Moment Of Inertia, the Quantity area of the Measure Definition dialog box expands displaying the following options: Center of Mass Origin
The Component option menu also appears when you select Moment Of Inertia. Use the Component option menu to select a component of your quantity from this option menu: Max Principal Mid Principal Min Principal XX YY ZZ XY XZ YZ
Note that Mechanica does not report Max Principal, Mid Principal, and Min Principal in the summary file for analysis. For the options XX, YY, ZZ, XY, XZ, or YZ, select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can use the arrow button to select a UCS.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Moment of Inertia Measure
347
For more information on parameter-based measures, see Example: Using ParameterBased Measures.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Driven Pro Parameter Measure
348
IndexMeasures
For a graphical overview of measures used in dynamic analyses, see Thermal Analyses Measure Selections.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Measures for Thermal Analyses
349
Availability of the global spatial evaluation methods depends on the component you choose. For temperature gradient and heat flux quantities, Mechanica provides an additional option menu that enables you to specify whether the measure will be calculated over the model or at a particular model location. To determine the time at which a maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute value occurs, select the Time Stamp check box.
Availability of each time evaluation method depends on the component and spatial evaluation method you choose. At Each Step is always available.
350
IndexMeasures
Temperature
Use a temperature measure to measure temperature in your model. Specify information for the following items that appear on the Measure Definition dialog box after you select Temperature as the quantity: Spatial Evalulation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Your selection determines the type of value Mechanica calculates for your quantity. Time Eval Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to specify a time evaluation method.
If you select the Time Eval check box, Mechanica calculates the measure for transient thermal analyses. If you do not select Time Eval, Mechanica calculates the measure for steady-state thermal analyses.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Temperature Measure
Spatial Evaluation Select a spatial evaluation method for your quantity from this option menu. Your selection determines the type of value Mechanica calculates for your quantity. Time Eval Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to specify the time evaluation method.
If you select Time Eval, Mechanica calculates the measure for transient thermal analyses. If you do not select Time Eval, Mechanica calculates the measure for steady-state thermal analyses.
351
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Heat Flux or Temp Gradient Measure
This data is available in the summary file, which you can view online through the Run command or print through your operating system. The summary file does not include values for measures that Mechanica calculates at each step of a dynamic analysis. The types of results listed above are not available for results quantities other than measures. For other results quantities, you can query values at specific locations, view fringe, contour, and vector displays, and graph the value along element edges.
IndexMeshes
The Measures dialog box appears when you are defining the following: Analyses This dialog box appears if you select Measures for convergence in an analysis and then use the Measure button on the Analysis Definition dialog box. See Convergence Quantity for Static, Prestress Static, Large Deformation, and Contact Analyses for more information. Design Studies This dialog box appears when you select a goal and limits for an optimization study. Results Window This dialog box appears when you select Measure as the quantity when defining a result window. See Measure Results Quantity for more information.
The two columns of the dialog box list the predefined measures relevant for the current analysis type and all user-defined measures valid for the current product. Select one or more measures or, if you are defining a result window, select one measure. Click the Review button if you want to evaluate the selected measure. After you select measures from either or both columns, click OK to close the dialog box.
353
Settings Review and alter AutoGEM's basic settings and limits. When you select the Settings command, the AutoGEM Settings dialog box appears. Use the dialog box to control the types of activities AutoGEM performs when generating elements and to modify element shape parameters such as aspect ratio and maximum edge turn. Adjustments to the AutoGEM Settings dialog box are a possible method of correcting mesh problems. Geometry Tolerance Refine geometry tolerance settings for your model to improve the geometry prior to meshing. When you select the Geometry Tolerance command, the Geometry Tolerance Settings dialog box appears. Use the dialog box to ensure that Mechanica resolve slivers, cusps, and other geometry problems in your model. Mesh treatment options There are three model treatment options Solid, Midsurface, and Solid/Midsurface. You use these options for models that include midsurfaces. These options enable you to specify whether Mechanica will treat your model as a solid, midsurface shell, or a mixture of both during meshing and analysis. Datum usage options There are two datum usage optionsUse Datum Curves and Use Datum Surfaces. These options let you refine your mesh, place certain idealizations on datum geometry, mesh datum geometry without having to add properties, and control transfer of datum geometry to independent mode.
While meshing your model using commands on the AutoGEM menu, AutoGEM creates mesh elements that you can later use when calculating displacements, reactions, stresses, thermal fluxes, and temperatures. If you want Mechanica to use these elements when running an analysis or design study, you need to select the Use Elements From Existing Mesh File option on the Run Settings dialog box. If you do not want to use the AutoGEM elements, you can direct Mechanica to create new elements by selecting the Create Elements During Run option on the Run Settings dialog box. When it meshes your model, AutoGEM uses the default element type for the model type unless you specify otherwise. For example, in 3D models, solid tetrahedra are the default element type. However, before you create the AutoGEM mesh, you can manually create idealizations or connectionsfor example, shells, springs, masses, welds, and so forthto alter or enhance the default AutoGEM mesh by incorporating additional element types that better reflect aspects or behaviors of your model.
See Also
References: Required Modeling Entities Preparing Your Model
354
IndexMeshes
When you select the AutoGEM>Control command, Mechanica opens the AutoGEM Control dialog box. The AutoGEM Control dialog box includes these fields: Name Specify the name for the AutoGEM control. Type Select one of these control types for mesh creation: Edge Distribution Select the surface edges or curves and specify the number of nodes associated with these edges. Minimum Edge Length Specify the edge length. Normally, AutoGEM meshes all edges in your model. However, if you apply this mesh control, AutoGEM ignores edges with lengths smaller than or equal to the length you have specified. You can also choose to retain such edges or curves during mesh creation.
Depending on the mesh control type you specify in the Type field, the active fields in the lower area of the dialog box change. For information on this area, use the links in the list above to learn more about the dialog box version for each mesh control type. After you have created AutoGEM mesh controls for your model, you can edit or delete it by selecting the associated icon on your model and using Edit>Definition or Edit>Delete, as appropriate. If you are deleting a mesh control, Mechanica asks for confirmation first.
Edge Distribution
Use Edge Distribution on the AutoGEM Control dialog box to specify the number of nodes and their placement intervals along curves or surface edges. Mechanica uses the specified number of nodes when creating elements in a mesh. By specifying the number of nodes on curves or surface edges, you control the number of nodes for a beam, shell, and solid element. Note: The edge distribution you define at the part or assembly component level remains active and visible at the assembly level. If you select Edge Distribution, you specify the following:
355
References Select one or more curves or edges for AutoGEM control. Mechanica displays an arrow on the specified edge to indicate the direction of node distribution. To reverse the direction of node distribution, select the same edge or curve again. Number of Nodes Specify the number of nodes along the selected edge or curve. If you specify an insufficient number of nodes, Mechanica may increase the number of nodes based on the requirement and complexity of the model geometry.
The value that you specify in the Number of Nodes field overrides the Insert Points setting on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box's Settings Tab.
First/Last Nodal Interval Ratio Select this option to specify the ratio of the first interval on the edge or curve to the last interval on the edge or curve. For example, if you enter 3 as the ratio, the last interval is 3 times the length of the first interval. Mechanica places the intermediate nodes at graduating intervals proportional to the ratio. If you enter a ratio of 1, all the intervals are equidistant. Prevent Additional Nodes Ensure that the number of nodes that AutoGEM creates is exactly the same as specified in AutoGEM control. If you have not specified a sufficient number of nodes, Mechanica displays a warning and may insert additional nodes based on meshing requirements. Note: Selecting this option can cause AutoGEM to fail, thus you should select this option only if it is absolutely necessary.
See Also
Procedure: To Control Edge Distribution in an AutoGEM Mesh
2. Enter a name for the AutoGEM control. 3. Select Edge Distribution as the type of control. 4. Select the edges or datum curves to which you want to apply the edge distribution control. 5. Enter the number of nodes along the selected edge or curve. 6. Enter the ratio of the first interval on the edge or curve to the last interval on the edge or curve. 7. If you want to ensure that the number of nodes that AutoGEM creates is exactly the same as you specified in the Number of Nodes field, select Prevent Additional Nodes. 8. Cick OK
356
IndexMeshes
After you define the Minimum Edge Length control, you can use the Preview button to verify that you have correctly selected the edges/curves you want AutoGEM to retain and to see which edges or curves it will ignore during meshing. Mechanica indicates this by highlighting the edges or curves you have chosen to retain and marking the edges or curves that are less than or equal to the Edge Length value with purple circles.
See Also
Procedure: To Control Minimum Edge Length in an AutoGEM Mesh
357
The AutoGEM Control dialog box appears. 2. Enter a name for the AutoGEM control. 3. Select Minimum Edge Length as the type of control. 4. Enter the minimum length of the edges or datum curves that you want AutoGEM to retain when it meshes the model. AutoGEM ignores all edges equal to or less than this length. 5. Optionally, select the % checkbox to specify the Edge Length field as a percentage. 6. Click Preview to display a preview of the edges or datum curves that AutoGEM will ignore. 7. If you want to retain some of the ignored edges or datum curves regardless of length, click Select Edges/Curves to Keep and use the selector arrow to select the edges. 8. If you want to verify that you have selected the correct edges, click Preview again to highlight the edges selected to be retained regardless of length. 9. Click OK.
Before using AutoGEM on a curve for 2D models, you need to assign a simple or advanced shell idealization. Before using AutoGEM on a surface for 2D plane stress models, you need to assign a simple or advanced shell idealization. When you use AutoGEM on a surface or volume, make sure that the Insert Points and Move Or Delete Existing Points options on the Settings tab of
358
IndexMeshes
the AutoGEM Settings dialog box are selected. For most cases, these options enable AutoGEM to generate the best set of elements. When you use AutoGEM on a surface, make sure all the options under Isolate Features are active. These options direct AutoGEM to isolate: o reentrant corners on individual surfaces o points with loads or constraints in Structure or with heat loads, prescribed temperatures, or convection conditions in Thermal
359
Create Click this button when you are ready to mesh the selected geometry. AutoGEM begins the meshing process, regularly displaying messages that indicate its progress. You can interrupt the meshing process at any time by clicking the Pro/ENGINEER Stop sign in the lower right corner of the screen. For more information, see Interrupting AutoGEM.
Usually AutoGEM completes its session successfully and opens the AutoGEM Summary dialog box at the end. Occasionally, your model may fail to mesh, especially if you are working with complicated geometry, such as irregular surfaces or volumes, or you are working with assemblies where the accuracy values for the components are not close enough. For a more detailed overview of AutoGEM meshing for these geometry types, and the strategies you can use to remedy AutoGEM failure, see Volume or Surface.
Delete Click this button if you want to remove a created mesh from the selected geometry.
You can use the Mesh tab on the Simulation Display dialog box to control the appearance of meshes that AutoGEM generates.
See Also
References: How AutoGEM Uses Existing Geometry How AutoGEM Uses Existing Elements
360
IndexMeshes
Model Summary Display a report of all elements present in your model. This report appears in the Model Summary dialog box. Boundary Edges Highlight all boundary edges. A boundary edge is an edge associated with only one shell and not associated with any solids. You can use this information to identify missing elements. If there are no boundary edges in your model, Mechanica informs you of this. Boundary Faces Highlight all boundary facesfaces that belong to only one solid and are not associated with a surface. You can use this information to identify missing elements. If there are no boundary faces in your model, Mechanica informs you of this. Approximated Elements Highlight the elements with approximated linear edges that AutoGEM has created to complete the mesh in the areas of your model where geometry problems exist. Because these elements can affect the accuracy of your analysis, you should review the areas of your model that contain approximated elements. AutoGEM Log Open an AutoGEM log file, which contains information about the most recent AutoGEM session. Validate Mesh Verify that all elements in the model meet the element creation limits.
A solid contains triangular faces, quadrilateral faces, or a combination of both. There are three types of solid elements: Brick an element with two opposite quadrilateral faces and four faces between the two opposite faces. Bricks are useful in models that include volumes with two opposing faces with a similar shapewhether the volumes are curved or planar. To connect a brick to a tetrahedron, AutoGEM must create links so that triangular faces of two tetrahedrons can interface with a single quadrilateral brick face. Wedge an element with two opposite triangular faces and three quadrilateral faces between the two opposite faces. Wedges are useful in models that include volumes with two opposing faces with a similar shape whether the volumes are curved or planar. They are more versatile than bricks because AutoGEM can connect wedges to both tetrahedrons and bricks without needing to create links. Tetrahedron an element with one triangular face and an opposite point. The element has three triangular faces between the triangular face and the opposing point. Tetrahedrons are the most widely used of the solid element types. Tetrahedrons function dependably for models with regular geometry, but also provide an excellent solution for models with irregular shapes and features. 361
Shell Elements
A shell element is a two-dimensional element that: you use to subdivide a structure that is relatively thin compared to its length and width has a constant cross-section and thickness
When creating shell elements, AutoGEM subdivides the shell surface into the following element shapes, depending on what you specify on the Settings tab: Quadrilaterals AutoGEM creates four-sided elements. Triangles AutoGEM creates three-sided elements.
For most model types, AutoGEM adds shells to your model if you have defined shell idealizations. In assigning thickness for a simple or advanced shell idealization, be aware that the thickness of resulting shell elements should be significantly smaller than the length of any of the body's other dimensions and radii of curvature. Note: If the shell element is too thin, Mechanica may have difficulty analyzing it. As a guideline, the ratio of the shell element's thickness to its other dimensions should be no greater than 1 to 10 and no less than 1 to 1000.
Beam Elements
A beam is a one-dimensional element that: represents a structure whose length is much greater than its other two dimensions. The cross-sectional dimensions of geometry you model with one or more beams should be small compared to the overall length and radii of curvature. As a guideline, the ratio of the length to the other dimensions should be no less than 10 to 1. has a constant cross-section and thickness in native mode
Beams are only available for 3D models. AutoGEM adds beams to your model if you have defined beam idealizations either on a curve or between a set of points, as follows: If you define a beam idealization on a curve, AutoGEM adds beams over the length of the curve to reflect the curve's geometry. For example, if the curve is linear, AutoGEM adds one beam. However, if the curve is a spline, AutoGEM adds as many individual beams as needed to follow the profile of the curve. If you define a beam idealization from a point or vertex to another entity type (point, surface, curve, and so forth), AutoGEM projects a single linear beam from the point or vertex to the entity.
AutoGEM also adds beams if you have defined spot weld connections.
362
IndexMeshes
Spring A spring element represents a linear elastic spring connection that you can define from one point to another or from a point to ground. Springs: o provide stiffness at the locations where you place them o act as constraints in your model and, in some instances, may be all the constraint that you need. However, while a spring can remove degrees of freedom in one direction, it can allow freedom of movement in other directions. If you are using a point-to-ground spring, your model is fully constrained at the point where the spring connects to ground.
You indicate that you want Mechanica to add springs to your model by creating spring idealizations.
2D Elements
Mechanica creates three types of 2D elements. Of these three types, Mechanica uses only those that are applicable to the type of 2D model you are working with. For example, Mechanica uses 2D solid elements and 2D shell elements for 2D axisymmetric models, but does not use 2D plate elements for this model type. The three element types are: 2D shell A 2D shell is a one-dimensional element that has constant thickness and represents a shell in one of the following models: o 2D plane strain o 2D axisymmetric 2D shell elements are linear but can be curved or straight, much as a beam element would be in a 3D model. 2D solid A 2D solid is a two-dimensional element that represents a slice of a solid in one of the following models: o 2D plane strain o 2D axisymmetric
363
Because 2D solid elements represent a slice, they have no actual thickness. 2D solid elements are quadrilateral or triangular, much as a shell element would be in a 3D model. 2D plate A 2D plate is a two-dimensional element that represents a solid in a 2D plane stress model. It is very thin in the Z direction, but does have an associated thickness. 2D plate elements are quadrilateral or triangular, much as a shell element would be in a 3D model.
All 2D elements must lie in: the XY plane of a Cartesian coordinate system for all 2D models the positive X half of the XY plane for 2D axisymmetric models
As mentioned, 2D shell and 2D plate elements have a constant thickness. You determine this thickness when you create the simple or advanced shell idealization upon which the 2D shell or 2D plate element will be based. In assigning thickness for the shell idealization, be aware that the thickness of 2D shell and 2D plate elements should be significantly smaller than the length of any of the body's other dimensions and radii of curvature. Note: If the 2D shell or 2D plate element is too thin, Mechanica may have difficulty analyzing it. As a guideline, the ratio of the 2D shell or 2D plate element's thickness to its other dimensions should be no greater than 1 to 10 and no less than 1 to 1000.
points
Note: In the above table, S indicates that the element is available for Structure only.
364
IndexMeshes
AutoGEM generates a full set of elements on the geometry you select in most cases. The amount of time AutoGEM needs to create elements varies with: the type of geometry that you are using the number of geometric entities that you select the number of complex features in the selected geometry
Although there is no limit to the number of elements it can create, you should strive for AutoGEM to use the minimum possible number of elements to take full advantage of geometric element analysis, and reduce analysis time.
Tip: You may want to add mesh controls, create points, or use other techniques to subdivide any element for which you need especially detailed data.
For 3D model types, remember that the more complex the element you use, the more computation time Mechanica requires. Here are the 3D element types listed from least computation time to most: 1. 2. 3. 4. Beams Flat shells Curved shells Solids
If you can build the model using one of the 2D model types, the solution takes much less time. Where appropriate, you can also create symmetry constraints that will further reduce element counts. For example, you can greatly simplify some axisymmetric models by using cyclic symmetry.
mass spring beam shell (quadrilateral or triangular) solid (tetrahedra, bricks, and wedges)
365
2D plate
The Surface option creates element endpoints on: o o points associated with those curves points directly associated with surfaces
The Volume option creates element edges on all curves associated with boundary surfaces. Boundary surfaces are surfaces along the outer or inner boundary of a volume. The Volume option creates element endpoints on: o o all points associated with curves on boundary surfaces all points directly associated with boundary surfaces
AutoGEM creates, moves, deletes, or ignores geometry as follows: AutoGEM creates multiple edges on a single curve if needed to make the element valid. For example, if a curve spans an arc angle of more than 95 , AutoGEM creates more than one edge on that curve. AutoGEM adds extra points to surface interior and boundary curves if needed to generate a complete set of elements. AutoGEM moves points or deletes unnecessary points created during meshing unless you deselect the Move or Delete Existing Points option on the
366
IndexMeshes
Settings tab. It does not, however, move or delete user-created datum points. AutoGEM ignores points and curves that are not associated with the curves, surfaces, or volumes you select. AutoGEM ignores geometry fully encased inside volumes. It does not, however, ignore volume regions or geometry that is associated with the volume boundary.
Surface
Surface Select the Surface option in the AutoGEM References area of the AutoGEM dialog box to create shell elements, 2D plate elements, or 2D shell elements on one or more surfaces that you select. AutoGEM creates the type of element appropriate for your model type. The description of the Surface command is divided into the following sections: Using Surface Strategies for Using the Surface Option
See Also
367
Reference:
Interrupting AutoGEM
Using Surface
When you select the Surface option, Mechanica asks you to select one or more surfaces. It then begins to preprocess your model. Preprocessing evaluates your model to determine if the surfaces and topology of your model are meshable, and prepares your model to be meshed. AutoGEM displays messages if it determines, during this phase, that it will not be able to mesh the model given the element limits or other conditions. After preprocessing is complete, AutoGEM creates a set of shell elements for the model. AutoGEM attempts to optimize elements by trying different element combinations until it finds a set that best meets its criteria. Note: Element optimization for shells is typically very fast. If you think that it is taking too long, you can interrupt the process. Provided you selected the Quad and Tri option on the Settings tab of the AutoGEM Settings dialog box, AutoGEM tries to reduce the number of elements where possible after it creates a complete set of elements. It reduces elements by combining triangular elements into quadrilateral elements. While you can interrupt AutoGEM, allowing it to complete this stage can result in a noticeable reduction in elements, often by 50% or so. If your model includes idealizations such as beams, springs, or masses, AutoGEM first meshes the surfaces, adding shell elements. It then adds the beams, springs, and so forth. If AutoGEM completes successfully, the AutoGEM Summary dialog box appears. If AutoGEM does not complete successfully, it displays messages or message boxes explaining the problem and adds this information to the log file.
See Also
Reference: Diagnose AutoGEM Problems
IndexMeshes
If you deselect the Insert Points and Move Or Delete Existing Points options, AutoGEM creates the best set of elements possible without inserting or moving points. Deselecting these options gives you more control over the elements AutoGEM creates. In rare cases, reduce the minimum edge angle, increase the maximum edge angle, or increase the aspect ratio on the Limits tab. If you are working with an assembly that fails to mesh, use Info>Tolerance Report to check the component tolerances to make sure that they are close enough. If not, return to Pro/ENGINEER and use Edit>Setup>Accuracy to change the accuracy values of any component whose tolerance appears to be too high.
Volume
Select the Volume option in the AutoGEM References area of the AutoGEM dialog box to create solid elements in one or more volumes that you select. The description of Volume is divided into the following sections: Using Volume Strategies for Using the Volume Option
See Also
Reference: Interrupting AutoGEM
Using Volume
When you select the Volume option, Mechanica asks you to select one or more volumes. It then begins to preprocess your model. Preprocessing searches your model for existing elements, evaluates your model to determine if the surfaces and topology of your model are meshable, and prepares your model to be meshed. If any preprocessing step requires more than 30 seconds, AutoGEM displays messages in the command area indicating its progress. AutoGEM also displays messages if it determines, during this phase, that it will not be able to mesh the model given the element limits or other conditions. After preprocessing is complete, AutoGEM searches for existing elements, and creates a mesh as follows: If it finds existing elements, AutoGEM retains these elements and begins to build a mesh using the existing elements as a starting point. If it does not find existing elements, AutoGEM creates an entirely new set of elements.
In either case, AutoGEM attempts to optimize elements by trying different element combinations until it finds a set that best meets its criteria. Mechanica regularly updates the status messages concerning how many elements AutoGEM has created. 369
This gives you a general idea of how AutoGEM is progressing. If you think that it is taking too long, you can interrupt the process. See Interrupting AutoGEM for information on using completion status to determine if you should interrupt AutoGEM. After AutoGEM creates a complete set of elements, it tries to reduce the number of elements where possible. While you can interrupt AutoGEM, allowing it to complete this stage usually results in a 3070% reduction in elements. If your model includes idealizations such as shells, beams, springs, or masses, AutoGEM first meshes any volumes, adding solid elements. It then creates the shell mesh and, finally, adds the beams, springs, and so forth. If necessary, AutoGEM shifts between solid and shell meshing to meet the mesh quality criteria. If AutoGEM completes successfully or you interrupt it, the AutoGEM Summary dialog box appears. If AutoGEM does not complete successfully, it displays messages or message boxes explaining the problem and adds this information to the log file.
See Also
Reference: Diagnose AutoGEM Problems
370
IndexMeshes
Status Messages
While meshing your model, Mechanica displays and regularly updates status messages that give you a general idea of how AutoGEM is progressing. The following are some tips on how to interpret these messages: The completion percentage is based on a simple estimate of how many total elements Mechanica will need for the selected volume. The actual number of elements Mechanica creates may vary significantly from these interim estimates. The completion percentage estimate can increase even as the number of elements created decreases. This only indicates that AutoGEM is changing its estimate of how many elements will be needed to complete the selected volumes as it tries different combinations of elements. The completion percentage sometimes decreases at least a few times during element creation. Even if AutoGEM appears to stall at a particular completion percentage, it will usually complete successfully.
Interrupting AutoGEM
You can interrupt AutoGEM at any time by clicking the Pro/ENGINEER stop sign in the lower right corner of the screen. You may want to interrupt for one of the following reasons: AutoGEM has been running for an unexpectedly long time. The command line messages indicate that AutoGEM is not making progress in creating new elements.
Consult the guidelines for deciding when to interrupt AutoGEM to learn more about the factors you should weigh. If you interrupt the meshing session: before you see the Creating element type elements status message, AutoGEM will not create any elements
371
after you see the status message, AutoGEM will usually create only a partial set of elements
AutoGEM usually responds to your interrupt request rapidly. If AutoGEM has already begun to create elements, it displays a message box indicating the current element completion percentage, how many elements AutoGEM has created, or what meshing process AutoGEM is currently performing. The message box prompts you to decide whether you really want to stop the mesh. If you click Yes, the software opens the AutoGEM Summary dialog box. If you click No, AutoGEM resumes creating the mesh. When you interrupt AutoGEM during element creation, Mechanica displays the mesh in its current, incomplete state. You can study the mesh and determine where the problems might lie. After you correct any problems by adding datum geometry to refine the mesh in the problem areas, relaxing the element limits, or a variety of other methods, you can run AutoGEM against the existing mesh to complete the element creation process.
See Also
Reference: Reduce the Number of Solid Elements
372
IndexMeshes
These files are overwritten with each successive AutoGEM session. If you want to save a particular AutoGEM log file, you can rename it through the operating system.
You can access the AutoGEM log file regardless of whether AutoGEM completed successfully or unsuccessfully, or whether you interrupted it.
373
increase the maximum edge and face angles from 175 to 178. Although these appear to be minor changes, they can reduce the number of elements by 20-30%. Note that you do not increase the allowable edge turn. Although increasing the edge turn reduces the number of elements, the reduction is not appreciable. Consequently, setting a value higher than the default generally does not produce dramatic changes in element count.
When you save your model, Mechanica saves the AutoGEM settings with the model. These settings then become the current settings when you reopen the model.
374
IndexMeshes
Feature Isolation
This area appears in both Structure and Thermal, and enables you to refine the mesh near certain geometric features or modeling entities. You use this area if your model includes geometry, loads, constraints, or boundary conditions that would result in mathematical singularities. Singularities are areas of theoretically infinite stress or temperature flux and are undesirable because they can skew analysis results. For example, point loads in shell or solid models create singularities, or stress concentrations. In this case, your analysis solution may primarily reflect these stress concentrations, hampering your ability to focus on overall stress behaviors that you may be more interested in. You use feature isolation to surround certain types of singularities in your model with a more refined mesh. When feature isolation is active, Mechanica populates the area around each singularity with small elements. Working outward from the singularity, the element size increases so that it blends compatibly with the overall model mesh. This meshing approach partially compensates for the impact of singularities on the solution by spreading the behavior over a greater number of elementsin effect, isolating the singularities. For the Feature Isolation area, you can select one of two menu options Structural or Thermal. Below this menu, the dialog box displays a list of entities that commonly cause singularities, and that AutoGEM can detect and isolate when it generates elements. The list is different depending on whether you select Structural or Thermal:
Structural Reentrant Corners Point Loads Point Constraints Thermal Reentrant Corners Point Heat Loads Point Prescribed Temperatures Point Convection Conditions
AutoGEM detects both structural and thermal entities regardless of whether you are working in either Structure or Thermal. Your model uses the same elements for the structural and thermal versions, so you should check your settings for both the modes before you use AutoGEM. For example, if you are currently in Structure, but the thermal version of your model contains a point heat load, AutoGEM detects only the point heat load if you select that item on the thermal version of this dialog box. If Point Heat Loads is not selected, AutoGEM creates elements that may work well only for the structural version of your model.
See Also
375
References:
Reentrant Corners Point Loads, Point Constraints, Point Heat Loads, Point Prescribed Temperatures, Point Convection Conditions
Settings Tab
The tab displays these options: Insert Points Add extra points when needed to complete a valid mesh. Move or Delete Existing Points Move or delete existing points when needed to optimize the element configuration for your model. Modify or Delete Existing Elements Modify or delete existing elements to improve or complete element creation. Automatic Interrupt Stop AutoGEM automatically after it creates a specified percentage of elements. Create Links Where Needed Create links when needed to connect shell elements to solid elements or solid quadrilateral faces to solid triangular faces. Detailed Fillet Modeling Create a greater number of elements near fillets to produce smoother fringe plots. Display AutoGEM Messages Display the messages and message boxes that AutoGEM generates during its session. Even if you deselect this option, the software writes the messages to the AutoGEM log file. Delete Mesh Points When Deleting Elements When deleting mesh elements, remove points inserted during an AutoGEM session. Element Types Create different types of elements: o Shells o Solids
Limits Tab The options on this tab enable you to set limits on AutoGEM when it is creating and editing elements. In general, you should use the defaults on the tab. They provide acceptable elements for the greatest number of models. If AutoGEM encounters any problems when generating elements, you can then change some of the settings on the tab to finetune the elements that AutoGEM creates. The tab contains the following items: Limits For Enables you to specify what kind of limits you are setting. Select one of the following items from this list: o Creating AutoGEM limits the angles on elements that it creates either during initial modeling or as the result of a geometry change. o Editing Editing limits are for element validity after smoothing or editing. A geometry shape change caused by a design parameter change may cause an element to violate the creation limit. If an
376
IndexMeshes
element violates the editing limit, you must delete the element and allow AutoGEM to create new elements. The limits on angles during AutoGEM element creation are set so that the elements converge well during the analysis. To retain the same element set during editing, the default editing limits are relaxed to reduce the element regeneration that is required. These relaxed editing limits enable AutoGEM to move points, which makes it easier to maintain the original set of elements. When AutoGEM can edit elements by repositioning points, elements are less likely to become invalid and the model is less likely to require element regeneration. Allowable Angles (Degrees) Enables you to set minimum and maximum edge and face angles. By widening the spread of the default values, you can reduce the number of elements AutoGEM creates. For an example, see Reducing the Element Count. Max Edge Turn (Degrees) Enables you to set the maximum subtended edge angle. The lower the number you use in this entry box, the greater the number of elements AutoGEM creates. Max Aspect Ratio Enables you to set the maximum aspect ratio. Validate Enables AutoGEM to highlight elements that do not meet the limits. Default Resets all the displayed values to the default values.
377
Additionally, if you want datum curves and surfaces that have no associated modeling entities to transfer to independent mode, you need to be sure these toggle keys are on before you use the File>Independent Mechanica command.
378
IndexMeshes
In deciding new tolerance values, you should consider the effect you want to achieve. For example, if you find that a mesh fails because some of the edges in the model are too small for AutoGEM to correctly resolve, you might increase the minimum edge length tolerance value to ensure that AutoGEM could resolve the problem edges. However, if you find that AutoGEM merges away a surface sliver that you want to see results for, you might instead reduce the minimum surface dimension, forcing AutoGEM to acknowledge the surface. When adjusting tolerance values, bear the following in mind: You should not enter extremely large values that may prevent the model from meshing or running an analysis. Any changes you make to the tolerance values should not diverge significantly from the defaults in place when you open the Geometry Tolerance Settings dialog box. As a general rule, you should keep such changes within 10% of the defaults displayed in the dialog box. If you enter erroneous values in any of the fields, you can reset the dialog box to the default values.
is closer than the specified distance, Mechanica merges the surfaces. If the surfaces are further apart, Mechanica creates automatic midsurface connections instead. You can specify the merge tolerance as an absolute or relative value. Default
Note: To ensure that Mechanica will produce usable geometry with the tolerance settings you specify, you should keep all tolerance settings within 10% of the default values for the dialog box.
380
IndexMeshes
After Mechanica successfully generates a mesh, the following commands also become active: Improve Attempts to improve the mesh. When you select Improve, the software asks you to enter the number of additional passes you want for mesh shape improvement. After you enter the number of passes, the software tries to improve the shape of solid and shell elements and redraws the model. Erase Erases an existing mesh from memory. You can erase an individual mesh or remove all meshes in the current assembly. This command is particularly helpful if you are working with hierarchical assembly meshing, but can sometimes prove useful for other meshes as well. Note: This command only erases the mesh from memory. The Erase command does not erase saved mesh files from disk. Review Opens the REVIEW MESH menu so you can review meshes, nodes, or elements. Check Elements Opens the Element Quality Checks dialog box so you can check element quality.
You can save the mesh data to a database file for later retrieval.
381
382
IndexMeshes
For assembly models, you can only perform flat meshing. Because transient mesh sessions do not call existing meshes, you cannot create a hierarchy of existing meshes within the assembly model. If you want to save a mesh in transient mesh sessions, you must use the File>Save FEM Mesh command.
If you decide to configure your session for transient meshes, be sure to observe the guidelines for working with transient meshes.
If you decide to configure your session for retained meshes, be sure to observe the guidelines for working with retained meshes.
created the appropriate shell model by defining all surface pairs assigned material to shell pairs and solid portions of the model defined idealizations to represent bars, connections, weld elements, and gaps For assembly components that need to transmit loads, established connections between surfaces or edges that do not overlap or touch Defined analyses Applied the appropriate mesh controls to control the characteristics of the mesh Optionally set up any predefined criteria in the configuration file (config.pro) against which to evaluate the quality of the mesh o o o
See Troubleshooting FEM Mesh Generation for help with mesh-generation problems.
See Troubleshooting FEM Mesh Generation for help with mesh-generation problems.
384
IndexMeshes
Invalidating a Mesh
If you set your session to use retained meshes, Mechanica attempts to preserve the model mesh throughout the session, enabling you to define modeling entities and analyses without perturbing the mesh. However, adding or modifying certain types of modeling entities can invalidate the mesh. For example, Mechanica treats any point that has an applied load or boundary condition as a mesh node. Therefore, if you add a point load to a datum point in your model, the original mesh is no longer valid because it does not account for the newly added node. While a variety of actions can invalidate a mesh, here is a list of the main causes of mesh invalidation: In Pro/ENGINEER: o changing model geometry o changing the way assembly components connect o removing assembly components Modifying or deleting datum features Creating, modifying, or deleting surface regions or volume regions Creating or modifying a load, boundary condition, beam, spring, gap, mass, rigid link, or weighted link such that it references a datum point or vertex that you have not already declared as a hard point mesh control. You can, however, change characteristics such as the value of a load, degrees of freedom for a constraint, and so forth without invalidating the mesh. Creating, modifying, or deleting connectionsfor example, end welds, perimeter welds, interfaces, and so forth Creating or deleting idealizations that affect the way the mesh generator meshes the part or assembly. You encounter cases such as this when: o creating a beam idealization on a curve or deleting one from a curve o creating or deleting a shell idealization on a quilt or surface
Mechanica only includes bars and quilts in the mesh if you define them as idealizations. Therefore, adding or deleting these idealizations changes the way the mesh generator would treat the part or assembly, thus invalidating the mesh.
If you invalidate a mesh, Mechanica informs you of the problem during modeling or meshing. If you introduce the invalidating factor at modeling time, Mechanica takes one of two actions, depending on whether the factor affects the top-level mesh or a lower-level component mesh: Top-level Mesh Mechanica warns you of the problem and gives you the option of correcting the invalidating factor. If you do not correct the factor, the software immediately removes the mesh. Lower-level Component Mesh Mechanica warns you of the problem, but leaves the mesh intact until you next mesh the component. At that time, Mechanica respects the mesh, but silently ignores the invalidating factor.
385
When you attempt to generate a mesh in assembly mode and the system gives you an error message, also consider the following: Interference The mesh generator cannot mesh assemblies that have interference. Use the Analysis>Model Analysis command and resulting Model Analysis dialog box to check for global interference in your model. Minimum element size A Minimum Element Size mesh control set for one part may not be appropriate for the entire assembly. If this is the case, remove all Minimum Element Size mesh controls assigned to the parts and try to mesh the assembly again. If you are still unsuccessful, remove all Maximum Element Size mesh controls as well. Note: If you are working at the assembly level, you can often use Ignored Mesh Control on the Mesh Control dialog box instead of actually removing the mesh controls from lower-level components. Design flaws Design flaws in model geometrysuch as misalignment, overlapping geometry, and other imperfections in part geometrycan often prevent the mesh generator from meshing assemblies even if it could successfully mesh constituent parts in part mode. You may need to temporarily suppress some components and attempt to mesh the assembly so you can determine which parts cause the problem. After you find the problem parts, try to eliminate imperfections. Curved surfaces Some assemblies contain curved surfaces on the components that are close but not touchingfor example, two concentric cylinders of similar but not equal diameters. In this case, place a local maximum, equal to the clearance, on the two opposing curved surfaces. Accuracy values Accuracy values of the parts in the assembly must be compatible. It is better for large models to have accuracy values comparable to smaller models. If you have problems generating a mesh for an assembly, you can run a report to check the accuracy values of each assembly
386
IndexMeshes
component. This report shows you which components have tolerance values that are too high so you can adjust them. When the software fails to generate a solid mesh, check the available memory. If you receive a memory error message, you can increase the amount of memory that Pro/ENGINEER uses by modifying the sim_max_memory_usage configuration file preference.
For details on flat meshing and its implications for your model, see Flat Meshing.
Hierarchical Meshing In hierarchical meshing, Mechanica assumes that some or all of the assembly components have meshes important to the model as a whole. The mesh generator creates a top-level mesh model for the assembly that uses component meshes wherever possible. It does this by: o preserving all complete and valid pre-existing component meshes o adding its own consistent top-level mesh to any unmeshed components, partially meshed components, and load path connections
Hierarchical meshing is a specialized form of meshing primarily suited for large, complex assemblies. Consider hierarchical meshing if:
you want to leverage the meshes already completed for individual components
387
your design process uses separate teams to mesh individual assembly components and the teams update these meshes at different times. In this case, hierarchical meshing gives you the ability to choose which mesh updates you want to incorporate, and which ones you want to ignore. you want to maintain one mesh type for some components while establishing a different mesh type for the rest of the assemblyfor example, if you want a triangular shell mesh for a set of aircraft flaps and a quadrilateral shell mesh for the wing
For details on hierarchical meshing, guidelines for its use, and implications for your model, see Hierarchical Meshing.
After you decide which type of meshing you want to use, you are likely to develop a workflow that matches the steps required for the mesh. However, even if you begin your work using one type of meshing, you can switch to the other type freely. You simply need to make sure that you have fulfilled any mesh prerequisites. Be aware that, while you can create flat meshes regardless of whether you use retained or transient meshes, you can create hierarchical meshes only if you configure your session to use retained meshes.
Flat Meshing
For flat meshing, Mechanica assumes your design goal is a one-level, unified mesh for your model. This means that the session model should include no individual component meshes. The easiest way to assure this is to work with transient meshes. However, if you configured your session to use retained meshes instead, you can still create a flat mesh by erasing component meshes on your screen before you create your top-level assembly mesh. How realistically you define your model determines the nature of your mesh and, consequently, your solution quality. For example, if you do not establish which components of an assembly transmit a load, your solution will not mirror the behavior of the assembly. Therefore, you should be sure your assembly includes connections for any load paths occurring between components that do not have mated surfaces or overlapping edges. Note: If your default connection type is not Bonded, you must usually establish explicit connections for all mated components in the load path. When you mesh your model, the mesh generator approaches your model as a single unit, creating coincident meshes across mated surfaces and overlapping edges. The mesh includes any nodes established by hard points, loads, boundary conditions, idealizations, connections, or mesh controls. The mesh generator also observes the mesh type you select. After you create a flat mesh, you can perform analyses using any supported solver. You can run the analysis online or offline. You can also view the results of your analysis within Mechanica.
388
IndexMeshes
Hierarchical Meshing
For hierarchical meshing, Mechanica assumes your design goal is a mesh model that contains both the top-level assembly mesh and pre-existing component meshes for one or more individual components. For convenience, this discussion refers to components with pre-existing meshes as pre-meshed components. A pre-meshed component can be an individual part or a subassembly. Development of a hierarchical mesh may involve gathering meshes from multiple designers, deciding which meshes to use or omit, and so forth. To ensure that you complete all the required modeling phases, you may want to use a specific workflow when developing a hierarchical mesh. Because you can only use hierarchical meshing if you configure your session to use retained meshes, be sure to set the fem_mesh_preserve config.pro option before starting Pro/ENGINEER. With this option set, Mechanica checks the current directory when you open your model in FEM mode. If it finds any existing component meshes, it brings those meshes into the session. Thus, as your model opens, you see meshes on pre-meshed components. Components that have no pre-existing meshes display geometry only. As with flat meshing, you should add connections to ensure that loads transmit between unmeshed components that have no mated surfaces or overlapping edges. You must also explicitly connect any pre-meshed component to the rest of the assembly. As a prerequisite for this, the component must have hard points where you want the connections before you generate the component-level mesh. If you do not use hard points, Mechanica disregards the connection when you create the toplevel assembly mesh. The way the mesh generator combines individual meshes to form a hierarchical mesh can be complex. To learn how Mechanica builds hierarchical meshes and handles premeshed components, see Understanding Hierarchical Meshes. After you create a hierarchical mesh, you can run your model online or output your model for analysis with your solver. If you choose the latter method, the output is such that it will allow the solver to handle the assembly mesh hierarchically. However, the exact arrangement of the output file is slightly different for NASTRAN than it is for the other solvers. After your run is complete, you can view the results of your analysis within Mechanica.
389
necessarily need to perform the steps in this order. You can get the same results using a different sequence, and some steps may not be required for all situations. For example, in this workflow, the designers complete all work on the individual components before the system integrator starts working on the top-level assembly. However, you could easily use a workflow where the system integrator sets up all connections for the top-level assembly before the designers work on the component meshes. The latter workflow is especially efficient for complex component-level meshes because the hard point locations are identified very early in the process. Determine which components in the top-level assembly will be premeshed at the part or subassembly level. At the part or subassembly level, place hard points on these components so you can create loadtransmitting connections in the toplevel assembly. Use the Mesh Numbering mesh controls to allocate node, element, and local mesh ID ranges to each component so you can avoid potential conflicts when you later bring the components into the toplevel assembly.
At the part or subassembly level, create meshes for any component that will appear as pre-meshed in the top-level assembly.
Add connections to the top-level assembly: o Connect pre-meshed components to the rest of the assembly using beams, springs, gaps, rigid links, or weighted links. o Where necessary, connect unmeshed top-level assembly components with beams, springs, or connections. Turn off any component-level mesh controls that you do not want the mesh generator to use.
390
IndexMeshes
Add assembly-level mesh controls where needed. Use the Mesh Numbering and Mesh ID Offset mesh controls to resolve any ID conflicts in the top-level assembly.
Generate the assembly mesh. The resulting mesh includes both the toplevel mesh and the individual meshes of any pre-meshed components. If the mesh generator notifies you of any problems, correct them and remesh the assembly.
Complete mesh
Partial mesh
391
current mesh. If so, the mesh generator adds the component to the list of components to be meshed. Inherited mesh Excludes the component from the list of components to be meshed.
After it has prepared the list of components that it needs to mesh, the mesh generator creates the top-level mesh. The resulting mesh model contains the toplevel mesh, which includes meshes for all connections and unmeshed components. The mesh model also contains any complete or inherited component-level meshes. In creating the mesh, the software respects all properly established connections between subcomponents, ensuring that the solver will be able to correctly recognize the assembly load paths. Here is how the mesh generator treats connections: Creates consistent meshes for connected components. These components can transmit loads. Does not create consistent meshes for components that it considers disconnected. These components remain in place and are part of the overall mesh, but cannot participate in the load path.
As it proceeds, the mesh generator checks for any situations that invalidate the mesh or cause unacceptable mesh inconsistencies. The mesh generator either ignores the factor causing the problem or removes the mesh. The mesh generator also checks for any node, element, or local mesh entity ID conflicts. If it finds any, it warns you of the situation, providing a list of nodes, elements, and local mesh entities that have numbering conflicts. To resolve this conflict, use the Mesh Numbering or Mesh ID Offset mesh control, as appropriate. When you output the model for use with the NASTRAN solver, Mechanica creates a single file for the assembly. This file lists all the meshes in the model, starting with the lowest level and working upward. It places the properties, materials, and coordinate system records in the lower mesh structures, enabling you to separate individual meshes from the whole and run these separately. For other solvers, the file lists all model meshes, but does not arrange them hierarchically. In this case, Mechanica arranges the file so that all nodes in the assembly are in one section of the file, all elements are in another, all materials in another, and so on. When it works with the file, the solver recreates the hierarchy using information from each of these sections. To see an example of how the mesh generator processes a hierarchical mesh, see Example: Hierarchical Mesh Generation.
392
IndexMeshes
When it meshes the top-level assembly, the mesh generator preserves the existing meshes for part f, subassembly a, and subassembly b. However, as subassembly d has a partial mesh, the mesh generator asks whether you want to remove subassembly d's mesh. If you do, the mesh generator creates the top-level mesh. Here is the result:
393
394
IndexMeshes
Unmated Geometry In this case, the software does not recognize any geometric connection and you must establish the load paths manually by creating assembly-level beam, spring, or connection idealizations to link the opposing surfaces, edges, or points of the components. When you create a connection of this kind, the mesh generator treats the datum points associated with the idealizations as nodes that enable it to generate a consistent mesh. Because these connections serve as load paths, you should determine the connection type and distribution based on the nature of the load and its distribution.
To understand how you create this type of connection more fully, you can review an example.
When you create a mesh control, the software adds the appropriate icon(s) to your model. For more information, see Mesh Control Icons. After a mesh control exists on your model, you can redefine or delete it by rightclicking the mesh control icon in the Model Tree. You can also redefine a mesh control by double-clicking the icon on your model.
396
IndexMeshes
If you enter an unusually small value for the maximum element size, the software might create an extremely large number of elements. To warn you of this situation, the mesh generator compares the specified size of the element with the volume of the meshed part. If the specified element size is very small, the software displays a message. If it cannot generate a mesh with elements that small, the software overrides the value specified in the mesh control with the smallest value it considers acceptable and displays a warning message. The mesh generator only respects the Maximum Element Size and Minimum Element Size mesh controls if you apply them to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores these mesh controls.
replaces the node ID for the selected hard point. You can define a hard point without specifying a node ID. For hierarchical meshes, make sure your model includes part-level hard points wherever you want to create connections for pre-meshed assembly components. The mesh generator only respects the Hard Point and Hard Curve mesh controls if you apply them to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores these mesh controls. You can create notes associated with specific hard points. The notes you create transfer to the NASTRAN or ANSYS output deck as comments.
The mesh generator only respects the Edge Distribution mesh control if you apply it to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores the mesh control.
398
IndexMeshes
The geometric reference that you select for a displacement coordinate system may also be part of the definition for other Mechanica entities, such as constraints, rigid links, and weighted links. If you defined the constraint, rigid link, or weighted link with a coordinate system that is not identical to the displacement coordinate system, a conflict may arise. In most cases where there are conflicting coordinate systems, the software uses the most recent coordinate system. However, if you output to the NASTRAN solver, the software tries to resolve the conflict using geometric and modeling precedence rules. If the software cannot resolve the conflicts, a message box appears when you run the analysis with an error message about the coordinate system conflict, and the output process stops. The mesh generator only respects the Displacement Coordinate System mesh control if you apply it to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores the mesh control.
399
To resolve conflicts between top-level assembly mesh IDs and component mesh IDs. When Mechanica numbers nodes, elements, and local mesh entities for top-level assembly components, it always starts with 1 regardless of the numbering of any pre-meshed components. You can use Mesh Numbering mesh controls to set the top-level assembly mesh ID range to a number higher than that of any of the pre-meshed components. To resolve conflicts that occur if two pre-meshed components have node, element, and local mesh entity IDs that partially or wholly overlap. However, you cannot use this technique to resolve ID conflicts between two instances of a pre-meshed component within the same assembly. In this case, you need to use the Mesh ID Offset mesh control applied from the top-level assembly.
If you select Mesh Numbering, specify the following: First ID Specify the first ID for the nodes, elements, and local mesh entities. Increment Specify the ID increment for the nodes, elements, and local mesh entities. Last ID Specify the last ID for the nodes, elements, and local mesh entities. You can leave this item blank. If meshing generates a mesh ID that is higher than the value you specify for Last ID, the software displays a message warning that there are conflicts in the mesh and stops the mesh. You can resolve this problem by increasing the Last ID value. For assemblies, the software defines these IDs for the top-level model only. If you switch to part mode to resolve an ID conflict within the assembly, be sure the new range for the part does not conflict with the range of another assembly component not previously in conflict. The mesh generator only respects Mesh Number mesh controls if you apply them to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores these mesh controls.
IndexMeshes
which would cause a conflict when you mesh the top-level assembly. Applying an offset to the mesh IDs when you work in the top-level assembly eliminates this problem. You can also use this technique when two individual component-level meshes have mesh IDs that partially or wholly overlap, but you may find the Mesh Numbering mesh controls easier to use in this situation. If you select Mesh ID Offset, specify the following: References Use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to specify the appropriate geometry. If you already selected the valid geometric references before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears. ID Offset Value Specify a positive integer value to be added to the IDs of each node, element, and local mesh entity.
Before choosing offset values, be sure to check that the offset does not move the new mesh ID range into the range of a component not previously in conflict.
If you select the Shell Element Direction option, you can specify the following: 401
Surfaces Use the selector arrow to specify the appropriate surface. If you select a surface that, at mesh time, does not have a shell idealization or is not part of a shell pair, Mechanica will ignore the Shell Element Direction mesh control. Coordinate System Direction area Use the selector arrow to specify the reference coordinate system. After you select the coordinate system that you want Mechanica to use as the basis for node numbering, you can select the axis that you want the software to use to determine shell element direction. For Cartesian coordinate systems, you can select X, Y, or Z. For cylindrical coordinate systems, you can select R, , or Z, while you can select R, , or for Spherical coordinate systems. If you select a coordinate direction that is perpendicular to any shell elements or within approximately 5 of perpendicular, Mechanica warns you at mesh time, highlights the problem elements, and does not reorder these element nodes.
In most cases, you should apply the Shell Element Direction mesh control before meshing the model. For hierarchical meshes, the mesh generator only respects this mesh control if you apply it to unmeshed components. If a component has a mesh, the mesh generator silently ignores any Shell Element Direction mesh control you place on a previously meshed component. Note that you can also create a shell mesh with aligned element directions by assigning material orientations as part of defining an advanced shell idealization.
402
IndexMeshes
Type types o o o o o o o o o
of Mesh Control to Ignore Select one of the following mesh control to ignore: Maximum Element Size Minimum Element Size Edge Distribution Hard Point Hard Curve Displacement Coordinate System All Types of Mesh Control Shell Element Direction Minimum Edge Length
x x x x No icon
No icon
None
403
Mesh ID Offset
No icon
ShellCSnnn where nnn is the coordinate system you selected when you created the mesh control
If you do not see the text description for the mesh control, select View>Simulation Display and make sure that Display Names is selected on the Settings tab.
Midsurface Generates a shell mesh of triangular or quadrilateral elements for shell idealizations defined through shell pairs. The resulting mesh includes: o shell elements at the midsurface of your model o shell elements for any simple or advanced shell idealizations that you created for quilt surfaces o elements for any beam, spring, gap, mass, rigid link, or weighted link idealizations Solid/Midsurface Generates a mixed mesh of solid and shell elements on your model. The resulting mesh includes: o tetrahedral solid elements for all solid chunks in your model o shell elements at the midsurface of your model o shell elements for any simple or advanced shell idealizations that you created for quilt surfaces o elements for any beam, spring, gap, mass, rigid link, or weighted link idealizations
404
IndexMeshes
Shell Generates a shell mesh of triangular or quadrilateral elements on a model's quilt surfaces if you defined simple or advanced shell idealizations on those surfaces. The resulting mesh includes: o shell elements for any simple or advanced shell idealizations that you created for quilt surfaces o elements for any beam, spring, gap, mass, rigid link, or weighted link idealizations Boundary Generates a shell mesh of triangular or quadrilateral elements on your model's exterior surfaces. The resulting mesh includes: o shell elements for any simple or advanced shell idealizations that you created for quilt surfaces o elements for any beam, spring, gap, mass, rigid link, or weighted link idealizations Bar Generates a mesh on one-dimensional idealizations such as beams, springs, gaps, masses, rigid links, or weighted links.
If the mesh type you select provides for shell elements, the Create FEM Mesh dialog box includes the Shell Element Type area that you use to specify how Mechanica constructs the shell mesh portion of your model. The Shell Element Type area provides a option list with the following items: Triangles Specifies that the shell mesh consists of triangular elements. Quads Specifies that the shell mesh consists of quadrilateral elements. If you select this method, Mechanica applies quadrilateral elements to as much of the model as it can. In areas where it cannot use quadrilateral elements due to the model geometry, Mechanica uses triangular elements as fillers.
After selecting any of these options, click Start. The mesh generator then creates and optimizes the mesh. To terminate mesh generation, click the stop sign displayed in the lower right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window. When the mesh is complete, Mechanica displays the meshed model and the Element Quality Checks dialog box. What the model looks like depends on the display style. The mesh generator automatically produces a mesh that satisfies all applied mesh controls and ensures that each constrained or loaded datum point becomes a node in the resulting mesh.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a FEM Mesh
405
The Create FEM Mesh dialog box appears. 2. Select one of the following from the Mesh Type option list, as available for your model: o Solid o Midsurface o Solid/Midsurface o Shell o Boundary o Bar 3. If you selected Midsurface, Mixed, Shell, or Boundary as the mesh type, select one of these element types from the Shell Element Type option list: o Triangles o Quads
Note that you can also select these element types if you choose Solid as the mesh type for a model that contains both solid portions and simple or advanced shell idealizations.
4. Click Start. Mechanica meshes your model, displays the mesh, and opens the Element Quality Checks dialog box. You can use this dialog box to check the quality of your mesh. If Mechanica displays any error messages before it meshes your model, see Troubleshooting FEM Mesh Generation. 5. When you finish your initial review of your model, click Close. 6. If you do not have the fem_mesh_preserve config.pro option set and want to save your mesh, click File>Save FEM Mesh and enter the name of the file in which you want the software to store the meshed model.
See Also
References: Creating a FEM Mode Mesh Checking a FEM Mode Mesh
406
IndexMeshes
The Shell Element Type option list includes two element types you can use to shellmesh modelstriangles and quadrilaterals. Triangles Meshes the surfaces with triangles. Quads Meshes the surfaces with quadrilaterals. In this case, triangles appear only in areas where the mesh generator could not use quadrilaterals.
Note that, for models that contain simple or advanced shell idealizations as well as midsurface or boundary shells, you can define only one element type. Mechanica applies this element type throughout the model. An example of shell meshing shows the results of meshing the model with different types of elements. You can also create a partial shell mesh, where the software meshes all paired surfaces, but ignores the unpaired ones.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Midsurface To Test Shell Compression
407
When you create a partial shell mesh, you can either use the unopposed surfaces in the shell model or ignore them, depending on how you set the UseUnopposed option. To eliminate unopposed surfaces to generate a full mesh, use one of the methods recommended for pairing unopposed surfaces. When you attempt to compress the model and the system detects unpaired surfaces, the following events occur: The system highlights the unpaired surfaces and asks you if you want to mesh only paired surfaces. o To halt the process, click the stop sign displayed in the lower right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
408
IndexMeshes
o To continue, proceed to the next step. You can visually investigate the shell model using options in the COMPRES MDL Menu. To mesh only the paired surfaces, select Midsurface from the Mesh Type option list on the Create FEM Mesh dialog box, click Start and, when the CONT MESH menu appears, select the Paired Only command.
409
Quilts
A quilt represents a patchwork of connected nonsolid surfaces, and can consist of a single surface or a collection of surfaces. A quilt contains information describing the geometries of all the surfaces that compose a quilt, and information on how quilt surfaces join or intersect. A part or assembly can contain several quilts. In Pro/ENGINEER, you can assign a name to an entire quilt or to an individual surface by selecting Edit>Set Up>Name>Other. For more information about quilts, search the Surface functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Selecting either of these two commands displays the Pro/ENGINEER Open dialog box, which you can use to select the desired files.
410
IndexMeshes
The greatest improvement to the mesh occurs during these two element optimization passes, and, in most cases, you will not need to refine the mesh further. However, if you examine a mesh and think that the mesh still requires adjustment, you can use the Mesh>Improve command to perform additional optimization passes. As an alternative, you may want to add mesh controls to your model in areas that concern you, and then remesh the model. When you select the Mesh>Improve command, Mechanica performs the number of passes that you indicate, and displays a message in the message area indicating the number of passes it has completed. The pass count is cumulative. In other words, if you specify four additional passes, Mechanica will report six passes altogethertwo passes that occurred as part of mesh creation plus the four passes you specified. The pass count persists from session to sessionincrementing for each optimization passuntil you erase the mesh or create a new mesh. Be aware that the higher the pass count, the longer the mesher will need to perform the optimization. With each pass, the amount of improvement is also less.
411
When you select the Review command or use one of the Run FEM Analysis dialog box methods, the REVIEW MESH menu appears. This menu allows you to review the mesh after it is created or after an analysis is run. The menu includes: Meshes Review a mesh after you create it. You can review a list of components by path within the top-level assembly hierarchy, the number of elements and nodes, and the range of element and node ID numbers. You can also review the range of element, node, and local mesh entity IDs with the Mesh ID Offset mesh control applied. This type of review can help you identify and resolve any numbering conflicts. Nodes Review nodes by selecting: o Coord Systems Select this option to display a coordinate system icon at each selected node that will be oriented for nodal displacement. If the coordinate system is not Cartesian, then Mechanica calculates and displays the R, , and Z or direction instead. o All Highlight all element nodes and display their node IDs. o Boundary Highlight only boundary nodes and display their node IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid elements. o Node ID Highlight an individual node and display its ID. If you select this option, you enter the integer ID for the node you are interested in. o Select Highlight an individual node and display its ID. In this case, you use your mouse to select the node on your model. o List Unused Generate a list of unused node IDs. You use this option to help detect node ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You can correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to the conflicting nodes. Elements Review elements by selecting: o Coord Systems Display the coordinate system for the elements that you review. o Shell Normals Display the shell normals for the elements that you review. This check box only appears if the mesh includes shell elements. o All Highlight all elements and display their element IDs. o Boundary Highlight only boundary elements and display their element IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid elements. o Element ID Highlight an individual element and display its ID as well as its node IDs. If you select this option, you enter the integer ID for the element you are interested in. o Select Highlight an individual element and display its ID as well as its node IDs. In this case, you use your mouse to select the element on your model. o List Unused Generate a list of unused element IDs. You use this option to help detect element ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You can correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to the conflicting elements. Connectivity Highlight edges that are only included in one shell surface. You can also use this command to highlight a free node on a one-dimensional element such as a beam or spring.
If you review the mesh at run time, Mechanica adds these options to the REVIEW MESH menu: 412
IndexMeshes
Materials Highlight elements made of selected materials by selecting: o All Highlight all elements with specified materials o Material ID Highlight elements by specific material. Analyses Highlight nodes or elements from a selected analysis and examine how the loads and constraints defined for the analysis apply to the mesh. Hard Points Display an information window listing nodes that were created at hard points on the model.
The value initially displayed in each check box represents a basic setting for a wellformed element. If you want your mesh to meet looser or more stringent element limits, you can increase or decrease the individual values to customize your mesh check. Use the Check button to perform the mesh check. When the check is complete, Mechanica highlights any elements that do not meet the criteria in the Quality Measures area. If you want a more exact or permanent record of measurements for elements that fail the check, use the Screen and File options in the Output Element Statistics 413
area of the dialog box. These options let you show the mesh check output in a text file displayed on your screen, write the output to a file so you can review it later, or both. The mesh check record lists failed element IDs, sorted by element types, along with their quality measures. You can use the Mesh>Review command to determine the location of the element associated with each element ID. If you find that you consistently reset one or more of the values on the Element Quality Checks dialog box, you can use config.pro options to set the defaults for this dialog box to values appropriate for your designs.
where E is the longest edge and h is the shortest heightthe distance between a vertex and the opposite surface or edge.
where h is the distance between the nodes and the reference plane, and e is the shortest edge.
414
IndexMeshes
415
where a = min (Ai) is the smallest triangle area and A = sum (Ai) is the quadrilateral area.
416
IndexMeshes
higher than the preset bound. The Mid Ratio quality measure is used primarily by the ANSYS FEA solver. Most other solvers disregard this mid ratio value. Mechanica calculates the mid ratio, M, according to this formula:
M = h/L
where h is the distance between the midnode and the connecting line of the corner nodes, and L is the distance between two adjacent corner nodes. The software performs this test on parabolic mesh only.
418
IndexMeshes
conditions, or idealizations. Mechanica considers these properties to be part of the geometry model and stores them whenever you use File>Save to save your model. See these rules for naming your mesh files if you are working with family tables or have simplified representations of your model. See Retrieving a FEM Mesh for information on mesh retrieval.
When you select Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls, Mechanica displays the DSGN CONTROLS menu, which includes these commands: Design Params Use to add design parameters to your model. 419
Switch Dim Use to review the dimension names or values for a feature before defining a design parameter. Select Switch Dim and then a feature to display the feature's dimension names. Select Switch Dim again to switch to a dimension value display. Shape Review Show how design parameters change your model's shape at a specific value. Shape Animate Show how design parameters change your model's shape in steps. Optimize Hist Use to review the shape change history of your model during an optimization study and to overwrite your Pro/ENGINEER part with the optimized shape that Mechanica developed.
See Also
Procedure: To Save an Optimized Shape
See Also
420
IndexMeshes
Procedures:
Strategy:
relations to make several dimensions move together. See Example: Relations and Guidelines for Using Relations. If you plan to create a design parameter using a Pro/ENGINEER parameter, be sure the Pro/ENGINEER parameter is independent. Although you can create a design parameter based on any numeric Pro/ENGINEER parameter, this type of application will not result in a model change unless the Pro/ENGINEER parameter is fully independent. If the Pro/ENGINEER parameter ever appears on the leftor dependentside of any relation, Mechanica will be unable to alter the parameter value. For more information on independent Pro/ENGINEER parameters and how to create them, see Pro/ENGINEER Parameters.
Observe Mechanica conventions when naming Pro/ENGINEER parameters that you plan to use as design parameters. Mechanica limits design parameter names to 16 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters and underbars only. Names must always start with alphabetic characters. Because Mechanica uses the Pro/ENGINEER parameter name as the design parameter name, always observe these naming conventions when creating the Pro/ENGINEER parameters you plan to use as design parameters. If your Pro/ENGINEER parameter name is too long, the software will truncate it.
Check the Pro/PROGRAM file for dynamically suppressed or added features. You can add conditional statements to the Pro/PROGRAM file that dynamically suppress or add features. If your Pro/PROGRAM file contains conditional statements that affect features associated with design parameters, the Structure engine may be unable to optimize your part effectively due to large stress discontinuities inherent in adding or suppressing features on the fly. For more information on Pro/PROGRAM, see the Part Modeling area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center. If you are simply running a regeneration analysis, dynamically adding or suppressing features should not cause a problem. For more information on using regeneration analyses, see Regeneration Analysis. If you want to keep the conditional statements in place and still use Mechanica to determine the effects of the design parameter, you can run a global sensitivity study. As you look at the resulting graphs, you typically will see a sudden change in the curve at the point where the feature was added or suppressed. Therefore, be sure to review the file before creating design parameters to determine whether you should remove any conditional statements.
422
IndexMeshes
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Design Parameter To Define a Dimension Design Parameter To Define a Pro/ENGINEER Design Parameter To Define a Section Dimension Design Parameter
Design Parameters
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Design Params command to create, edit, review, or delete design parameters in your model. A design parameter is a model feature on which you can instruct Mechanica to perform one of the following actions: vary within a specified range in a sensitivity or optimization design study change to a specified setting in a standard design study
423
dimensions Pro/ENGINEER parameters beam sections material properties laminate layup shell properties for shell models
When you select the Design Params command, the Design Parameters dialog box appears. The dialog box lists all design parameters you have defined for the current model and displays a description of the selected design parameter. The following buttons are available on the dialog box: Create Click to create a new design parameter. Review Click to review or edit the current values of the selected design parameter. Delete Click to delete the selected design parameter.
For more information on using design parameters when creating laminate layup shell properties for shell models, see Design Parameters with Laminate Layup.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define a Design Parameter Laminate Layup
424
IndexMeshes
Note: Although you can specify negative values, be sure that a negative value is valid for the dimension type in Pro/ENGINEER. For example, you would not specify a length as a negative number, but you could specify an angle as a negative number. If you specify a negative value where you should not, the software will be unable to regenerate the part during design studies, shape animation, or shape review.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Design Parameter To Define a Dimension Design Parameter To Define a Pro/ENGINEER Design Parameter To Define a Section Dimension Design Parameter Reference: Types of Design Parameters
4. Click Create.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears.
5. Select the type of design parameter you want to define. Continue with the procedure for defining each type of design parameter by clicking one of the following: o o o Dimension Pro/ENGINEER Parameter Section Dimension
See Also
425
Procedures:
To Create a Local Sensitivity Study To Create a Global Sensitivity Study To Create an Optimization Study
References:
Types of Design Parameters Overview of Design Parameters Example: Design Parameter Prepare Your Model for Design Parameters About Design Studies
2. Select a feature on your model for which you want to create design parameters.
Mechanica displays the feature dimensions.
3. Select a dimension.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears with the name and current value of the design parameter. Mechanica also inserts reasonable minimum and maximum values.
4. Enter a name for the dimension design parameter in the Name entry box. Choose a name that has not been assigned to another design parameter. 5. Review the minimum and maximum values and change them if necessary.
Be sure that the values are physically appropriate. For example, a negative value is valid for an angle but not for a length.
6. Click Accept. The Design Parameters dialog box appears and displays the design parameter you just created.
426
IndexMeshes
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Pro/ENGINEER Design Parameter To Define a Section Dimension Design Parameter Reference: Features
2. If you want to use one of the listed parameters, select the parameter name.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears with the name and current value of the design parameter. Mechanica also inserts reasonable minimum and maximum values.
3. If you want to create a new Pro/ENGINEER parameter, see To Create a Pro/ENGINEER Parameter. 4. Review the minimum and maximum values and change them if necessary.
Be sure that the values are physically appropriate. For example, a negative value is valid for an angle but not for a length.
5. Click Accept. The Design Parameters dialog box appears. The dialog box now shows the design parameter you just created.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Dimension Design Parameter To Define a Section Dimension Design Parameter
427
3. Select a dimension.
The Design Parameter Definition dialog box appears with the name and current value of the design parameter. Mechanica also inserts reasonable minimum and maximum values.
4. Enter a name for the dimension design parameter in the Name entry box. Choose a name that has not been assigned to another design parameter. 5. Review the minimum and maximum values and change them if necessary.
Be sure that the values are physically appropriate. For example, a negative value is legal for an angle but not for a length.
6. Click Accept. The Design Parameters dialog box appears. The dialog box now shows the design parameter you just created.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Dimension Design Parameter To Define a Pro/ENGINEER Design Parameter Reference: Beams
428
IndexMeshes
Shape Review
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Review command to show a model's shape changes in response to one or more design parameters set at values you specify. This review shows you shape changes similar to those that will occur during a design study and helps you spot potential problems before executing a time-consuming study. For example, you may find conflicts between design parameters. The Shape Review dialog box contains the following items: Parameters Select the design parameters to include in the shape review. Settings Enter a value for each parameter in the Settings box.
When you click the Review button to start the shape review, Mechanica displays the model with the dimensions set to the specified values. After displaying the shape change, Mechanica gives you the option to restore the model to its original state before the shape review or to replace your original model with the new shape. To see how a shape review changes a model's shape, see Example: Shape Review. For information on problems that may occur when design parameters change your model's shape, see: Design Parameter Errors Troubleshoot Shape Change Problems
See Also
Procedure: Reference: Strategy: To Perform a Shape Review Shape Animate Strategy: Using Design Parameters
429
See Also
Procedures: To Perform a Shape Animation To Define a Design Parameter Reference: Example: Troubleshoot Shape Change Problems Shape Review
430
IndexMeshes
Dependent Dimensions If you are applying a design parameter to a dimension, you can only work with independent dimensions. If you create a design parameter and add a Pro/ENGINEER relation that makes the design parameter's dimension dependent, Mechanica will not recognize that design parameter.
See Also
References: Prepare Your Model for Design Parameters Guidelines for Using Relations
431
Shape Animate
Use the Analysis>Mechanica Design Controls>Shape Animate command to show the effects of one or more design parameters on your model. Shape Animate allows you to view the shape changes in steps, not just at a specific value. You 432
IndexMeshes
should use Shape Animate as well as Shape Review to preview shape changes and prevent problems with your design parameters before running a design study. The Shape Animate dialog box contains the following items: Parameters Select the design parameters you want to include in the shape animation. Settings Enter starting and ending values in the entry boxes for each parameter. Number of Intervals Select the number of steps for the shape animation.
When you click the Animate button to start the shape animation, Mechanica initially displays the model with the dimensions set to the start values. Mechanica then asks if you want to move on to the next step in the animation. You have the option of continuing or stopping the animation at each step. At the end of the animation, you have the option to restore the model to its original shape before the animation or replace the original model with the new shape. To see how shape animation changes a model's shape, see Example: Shape Animation. For information on problems that may occur when design parameters change your model's shape, see: Design Parameter Errors Troubleshoot Shape Change Problems
See Also
Procedure: Reference: Strategy: To Perform a Shape Animation Shape Review Strategy: Using Design Parameters
433
2. Select the design parameters you want to include in the shape animation. 3. Enter or select a number for the starting value for each design parameter in the left entry box under Settings. 4. Enter or select a number for the ending value for each design parameter in the right entry box under Settings. 434
IndexVerifying Models
5. Select the number of steps for the animation in the Number Of Intervals box. 6. Click Animate to start the shape animation.
See Also
Procedures: To Perform a Shape Review To Define a Design Parameter Reference: Strategy: Troubleshoot Shape Change Problems Example: Shape Animation
Verifying Models
It is a good idea to check your model before you start your run to detect errors in your model that can cause: the results of a design study to be inaccurate the design study to terminate abnormally
You can check your model to make sure that the work you did passes Mechanica's validity checking. To do so, select the Info>Check Model menu option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box before running your analysis or design study. As an alternative, you can start the run and click OK to use error detection during the run. You might want to check your model more than once before starting a run to: Check for errors that are specific to the analyses and design studies you create. Make sure that any edits you made to your model did not create any new errors.
435
Validity Checking
Mechanica performs error checks when you select the Info>Check Model menu option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. For each error it finds, Mechanica: highlights any entities involved displays a message box with an error message
Unless otherwise indicated, these errors prevent you from starting a design study run. Mechanica's error checks fall into three categories: Structure and Thermal Structure Thermal
The error checking process does not include model repair. Mechanica reports only corruption errors related to modeling entities. If it encounters topological or geometric errors, Mechanica exits and returns you to Pro/ENGINEER.
Missing Properties
Mechanica highlights any components to which you have not assigned material properties or other properties. Use the Properties menu to assign any missing properties.
436
IndexVerifying Models
Mechanica also warns you if your model contains dynamic time, frequency, or random response analyses, and you have not defined any measures of the types calculated for those analyses. You can define new measures with the Insert>Simulation Measure command.
Structure Errors
In Structure only, Mechanica searches for the following errors: Missing constraints Constraintconstraint conflicts
ConstraintConstraint Conflicts
If you place constraints on associated entities that are incompatible, and include those constraints in the same set, Mechanica highlights the constraint icons. For example, if you constrained a shell in the X direction, but also placed an enforced displacement on one of the shell's edges in the same direction, the constraints will conflict if they are in the same set. As a general rule, you should not constrain any associated entities of an entity that you have already constrained if you plan to include the constraints in the same set.
Missing Constraints
Mechanica makes sure that there are constraints in your model. Note that a point-toground spring is a constraint. You cannot define an analysis for a model with no constraints, unless you select one of the following: For a modal or prestress modal analysis select Unconstrained on the dialog boxes for modal analyses. For a dynamic time, dynamic frequency, or dynamic random analysis select Use Modes From Previous Design Study on the Previous Analysis tabs of the dialog boxes for dynamic analyses.
See Also
References: Modal and Prestress Modal Analyses Previous Analysis Options for Dynamic Analysis
437
Thermal Errors
In Thermal only, Mechanica searches for the following errors: Missing prescribed temperatures or convection conditions Conflicting prescribed temperatures
You cannot define an analysis for a model without at least one constraint set containing one of these two conditions.
Creating Analyses
Use the Mechanica Analyses/Studies command to create and manage analyses. For FEM mode analyses, see About FEM Analysis and About Running FEM Analyses and Generating Output Decks. In an analysis: You specify some combination of constraints and loads for your model that Mechanica uses to calculate the model's response. You enter information that determines how Mechanica calculates and reports results for the analysis when you include the analysis in a design study and run the study.
You can create many types of analyses in each Mechanica product. For general information on creating an analysis, see Creating Analyses and Design Studies. For information on creating analyses in each Mechanica product, see the following: 438
IndexCreating Analyses
Structural Analysis Includes static, prestress static, large deformation static, contact, modal, prestress modal, buckling, and fatigue analyses. Thermal Analysis Includes steady thermal and transient thermal analyses. Vibration Analysis Includes dynamic time, dynamic frequency, dynamic random, and dynamic shock analyses.
See Also
References: Modifying Analyses and Design Studies Running Analyses and Design Studies Monitoring an Analysis or Design Study Run
439
Modify existing analyses and design studies using the Edit>Analysis/Study menu option. You can also copy or delete analyses or design studies using the options on the Edit menu. o Set up a run using the Run>Settings menu option or selecting the Configure Run Settings button on the toolbar to display the Run Settings dialog box. o Create a batch file to run more than one analysis or design study at a time using the Run>Batch menu option. o Check your model before you start a run by using the Info>Check Model menu option. o Start, stop, or restart analyses and design studies using the options on the Run menu or the buttons on the toolbar. o Monitor the status and view a detailed summary of a run using the Info>Status menu option. o Review the error and warning messages generated during a run using the Info>Diagnose menu option. Toolbar Use the toolbar buttons to perform many of the functions available on the menu bar. Analyses and Design Studies Table Lists the name and type of analyses and design studies for the current model. To perform an action on a specific analysis or design study, highlight it in the list and select the action from the options on the menus or use the toolbar buttons. Description Displays a description, if available, of the analysis or design study you select from the list. o
Analysis Types
You can create these types of analysis within each Mechanica product.
Product Structure Analysis Types
Static o Large Deformation Static o Contact Prestress Static Buckling Modal Prestress Modal Fatigue Steady-State Thermal Transient Thermal Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Time Response Frequency Response Random Response Shock Response
Thermal
440
IndexStructural Analysis
Note: Fatigue analysis requires a separate software license. If you do not have a license, you can use Mechanica in demo mode. When you run design studies, you have the option of running an analysis type called regeneration analysis. This type of analysis simply regenerates your model and is a means of running a design study without first having to run another type of analysis. In addition to 3D analysis, Mechanica allows you to perform 2D analysis on one planar or multiple coplanar edges, curves, faces, or surfaces in your model. Before performing 2D analysis on your model, you must select a 2D model type, the geometry on which you want to perform the 2D analysis, and a reference coordinate system. To read about selecting a model type, see About Specifying a Product, Mode, and Model Type. Before defining an analysis for a 2D model type, read Guidelines for Working with Model Types.
For static, prestress static, large deformation, contact, and buckling analyses, Mechanica automatically calculates all measures valid for a static analysis. For modal and prestress modal analyses, Mechanica automatically calculates all measures that are valid for a modal analysis. See Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses for an example of when you might use each of these analysis types. See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for information on including load sets and constraint sets in your analyses. 441
442
IndexStructural Analysis
o o
The following tabs appear on the Static Analysis Definition and Prestress Static Analysis Definition dialog boxes: Previous Analysis (appears only on the Prestress Static Analysis Definition dialog box) Temperature Distribution (available on the Static Analysis Definition dialog box only for models with temperature-dependent material properties) Convergence Output
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Static Analysis To Create a Prestress Static Analysis Reference: Strategy: Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses Determining the Presence of a Non-Linear Problem
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
443
2. Select New Static from the File menu. The Static Analysis Definition dialog box appears. 3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. Select a constraint set. 5. Select one or more load sets.
If your constraint set includes an enforced displacement constraint, you do not need to select a load set.
6. If nonlinear options are available for your model, you can select one of the following: o o Calculate Large Deformations See To Create a Large Deformation Static Analysis. Include Contact Regions See To Create a Contact Analysis. This option is selected by default if your model includes contact regions. If you do not want to include contact regions in your analysis, you must clear this item.
7. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the static analysis: o o o o Load Intervals (available only if you selected a nonlinear option in step 7) Convergence Output Temperature Distribution (available only for models with temperature-dependent material properties)
8. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
444
IndexStructural Analysis
You run a prestress static analysis in addition to a static analysis for the following situations: if you want a transverse effect for your model if you think your applied loads affect the stiffness of the modelfor example, if you have a model with an existing load that projects an existing force if the specified loads in the static analysis are close in magnitude to a corresponding buckling load. In this case, the prestiffening effects are negligible from a static analysis. You should run a prestress static analysis for more specific information.
Requirements 1 1 1 a constraint set or more load sets or enforced displacements or more static analyses 3D model
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Buckling Analysis Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses
445
6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the prestress static analysis: o Previous Analysis o Output o Convergence 7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
The following tabs are available on the dialog box when you select Calculate Large Deformations: Load Intervals Temperature Distribution (appears only for models with temperaturedependent material properties) Convergence Output
See Also
Procedure: Strategy: To Create a Large Deformation Static Analysis Determining the Presence of a Non-Linear Problem
446
IndexStructural Analysis
Mechanica interprets material properties for large deformation static analysis according to a natural generalization of linear elasticity. and are converted to the Lame constants and , using the same formulas as used in linear elasticity. Stresses are calculated using the neo-Hookean material law, which depends linearly on and . For more information on neo-Hookean material, see Nonlinear Continuum for Finite Element Analysis, Javier Bonet and Richard D. Wood (Cambridge University Press: 1997). When you run a large deformation static analysis, you can use the Single-Pass Adaptive convergence method or perform a Quick Check. After you run the analysis, with full results selected for multiple load intervals, you can view the results at the various load intervals by animating the fringe plot. Mechanica reports Almansi strains for large deformation static analysis. Resultant measures are not currently available for this analysis type. Requirements 1 constraint set 0 or 1 load set a 3D, 2D plane stress, or 2D plane strain model solid and mass elements only no links isotropic, linear elastic material properties only no temperature-dependent material properties
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
447
3. To select load interval options, see To Select Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses. 4. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
Contact Analysis
In a contact analysis, Mechanica examines the effect of loads on contact regions. For details, see the description of and requirements for contact analyses. You must first select a static analysis type and then use the nonlinear option Include Contact Regions. For a contact analysis, select the following options on the Static Analysis Definition dialog box as indicated: Constraints Select a constraint set. Enforced displacements in spherical and cylindrical coordinate systems are not supported for contact analysis. Loads Select a load set, unless you are using a constraint set with an enforced displacement. Nonlinear Options Verify that the nonlinear option Include Contact Regions is selected. This option is available and selected by default only if your model has contact regions. Note that, because Mechanica does not support large deformation nonlinearity for contact analyses, the Calculate Large Deformations check box is inactive, and can only be reactivated if you deselect Include Contact Regions.
The following tabs are available on the dialog box when you select Include Contact Regions: Load Intervals Temperature Distribution (appears only for models with temperaturedependent material properties) Convergence Output
448
IndexStructural Analysis
See Also
Procedure: Reference: Strategy: To Create a Contact Analysis Static and Prestress Static Analyses Using Contact Analysis Effectively
Contact analysis takes longer to run than linear static analysis because Mechanica must calculate results several times iteratively. See Contact Analyses in Design Studies for information on including contact analyses in different types of design studies.
See Also
Strategy: Determining the Presence of a Non-Linear Problem
449
In addition, you must create measures if you want to see results for specific contact regions. You can select from the following measures: average contact pressure, maximum contact pressure, contact area, and contact load. Note that Mechanica does not support contact analysis for models that include shells in the contact region. Also, Mechanica does not support large deformation nonlinearity for contact analyses. This means that the outward normals for the contact surfaces should not rotate more than 5 during analysis. See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
See Also
Procedures: To Create Contact Regions To Define Measures for Structural Analysis References: About Contact Regions About Simulation Measure Contact Regions 2D Models Contact Regions 3D Models
450
IndexStructural Analysis
The Load Intervals tab becomes available. 3. To select load interval options, see To Select Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses. 4. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
The following tabs appear on the Modal Analysis Definition and Prestress Modal Analysis Definition dialog boxes: Modes Previous Analysis (appears only on the Prestress Modal Analysis Definition dialog box) Temperature Distribution (available on the Modal Analysis Definition dialog box only for models with temperature-dependent material properties) Convergence Output
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Modal Analysis To Create a Prestress Modal Analysis
451
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
452
IndexStructural Analysis
See Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses for more information.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Buckling Analysis Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses
4. Select a constraint set. 5. Select one or more load sets. If your constraint set includes an enforced displacement constraint, you do not need to select a load set. 6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the prestress static analysis: o Previous Analysis o Output o Convergence 7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
Buckling Analysis
You can use a buckling analysis to calculate the critical load at which a structure will buckle, as well as the model's stresses, strains, and deformations at the onset of buckling. In a buckling analysis, Mechanica calculates a buckling load factor (BLF) and mode shape. See Buckling Analysis Overview for a more detailed description of and requirements for buckling analyses. These items appear on the Buckling Analysis Definition dialog box: Previous Analysis Convergence Output
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Create a Buckling Analysis Sample Uses for Prestress and Buckling Analyses
454
IndexStructural Analysis
a buckling load factor (BLF). The BLF is the magnification factor by which the loads applied in a previously specified static analysis would have to be multiplied to produce the critical buckling load. First define a static analysis, in which Mechanica calculates the stress stiffening of your model due to the applied forces. You can then define a buckling analysis, which Mechanica uses to calculate the model's elastic stiffness due to geometry and material properties. Mechanica uses the two solutions to calculate the BLF. the mode shape for each buckling mode you request
The buckling analysis uses the constraint set specified in the previous static analysis. Mechanica automatically calculates all predefined measures valid for a static analysis. Mechanica buckling analysis is a linear eigenvalue bifurcation instability analysis as described in The Finite Element Method, Third Edition, by O.C. Zienkiewicz, pages 513514. Large displacement or non-linear buckling investigations may produce significantly different results, depending on the type of model and loads being examined. A Mechanica buckling analysis will typically overestimate the buckling load in comparison to real world tests. Look at the mode shape and BLF in results. For stress results, you should use the static analysis results. For stress results at the area of buckling, multiply the stresses from the static analysis with the buckling load factor. See Buckling Load Factor and Optimization Studies for information on using the BLF as a limit in an optimization study. Requirements 1 static analysis a 3D model
5. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
Fatigue Analysis
Use fatigue analysis to establish whether your model is susceptible to fatigue damage when subjected to cyclic loading. The solver technology integrated with Mechanica fatigue analysis is provided by nCode, Inc. Fatigue analysis requires a Fatigue Advisor license from PTC. Before defining a fatigue analysis, you must first define a static analysis. You also must assign fatigue properties to the materials of your model in order to get valid fatigue results. See Fatigue Analysis Overview for a detailed description of and requirements for fatigue analysis. The following tabs appear on the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog box: Load History Previous Analysis
Below the tabs, the following items appear in the Output area: Plotting Grid Calculate factor of safety
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Fatigue Analysis
456
IndexStructural Analysis
Fatigue analysis calculates the following: Log Life the estimated number of cycles until your model breaks. Because of the exponential nature of fatigue, it is useful to express life as a logarithm. Log Damage the ratio between accumulated fatigue cycles and the total number of cycles to failure. A value greater than unity indicates failure. A value of 0.5, for example, represents a loss of 50% in the useful life of the model. Because of the exponential nature of fatigue, it is useful to express the damage ratio as a logarithm. Factor of Safety the permissible factor of safety on the input load. When the fatigue life calculated for your model is greater than the target design life, the software carries out a back calculation to determine a permissible factor of safety on the input load. This represents the extent to which the amplitude of the load can be increased without compromising the target design life. If you want the software to calculate the factor of safety, select the check box in the Output area at the bottom of the Fatigue Analysis Definition dialog box. Confidence of Life the ratio between the calculated life and the target design life. Because of the statistical nature of fatigue, the greater the confidence the better. Values below unity indicate failure. Values greater than 3.0 usually reflect an adequate confidence of achieving the desired target life. You can display Confidence Of Life results in a tricolored fringe display to give an overall view of where the model will break first and where the model will last for a greater number of cycles. Red signifies a confidence of life from 0 cycles to the number of cycles entered for desired endurance on the analysis dialog box. Yellow signifies a confidence of life that ranges from the number of cycles for desired endurance to 3 times that number. The difference between these numbers is considered the marginal life. Green signifies any number of cycles over the marginal life. For background information on fatigue and details about the methodology used in fatigue analysis, see the online document Understanding Fatigue Analysis. Fatigue Advisor is optimized so you can obtain a rapid indication of whether a design is sensitive to fatigue without having to provide the full range of input normally required to solve this problem. The software accomplishes this by asking for input that is relatively straightforward to obtain and by internally setting very conservative defaults for input that you do not directly provide. Advanced fatigue users may want to alter these defaults to examine less conservative scenarios. Requirements 3D solid or shell model isotropic materials only 1 static analysis fatigue properties for the materials
457
See Also
References: About Materials Fatigue Properties
458
IndexThermal Analysis
For guidelines on thermal analysis, see Boundary Condition and Load Sets in Thermal Analyses.
The following tabs appear on the Steady Thermal Analysis Definition dialog box: Convergence Output
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Steady Thermal Analysis
459
3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. Select a boundary condition set. 5. If you defined heat loads for your model, you have the option to select one or more heat load sets you want to include in the analysis. 6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the steady thermal analysis: o Convergence o Output 7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
460
IndexThermal Analysis
For a description of, and requirements for, transient thermal analysis, see Transient Thermal Analysis Overview. These items appear on the Transient Thermal Analysis Definition dialog box: Constraint Select a constraint set (optional). You are not required to select a constraint set to run a transient thermal analysis. However, if you do not select a constraint set, you must select at least one heat load set. Loads (Summed) Select one or more load sets (optional). This is optional if you select a constraint set. Mechanica applies all the load sets that are selected and computes just one time-dependent solution, the same as if all the heat loads were in one load set.
The following tabs appear on the Transient Thermal Analysis Definition dialog box: Temperatures Convergence Output
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Transient Thermal Analysis
You can direct Mechanica to report full results or temperature loads at specified time intervals. After you run a transient thermal analysis, with full results selected for multiple intervals, you can view the results at the various intervals by animating the fringe plot. Use transient thermal analysis to find out the following types of information: the time your model takes to heat up or cool down 461
the way your model might respond to a time-dependent heat load or bulk temperature the thermal stresses that develop as a result of temperature changes in your model
Requirements a 3D solid model isotropic material properties only no shell or beam elements no links 1 constraint set or 1 load set
3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. If you want to include boundary conditions in your thermal analysis, you have the option to select a boundary condition set. If you do not select a boundary condition set, you must select at least one heat load set. 5. If you want to include heat loads in your analysis, you have the option to select one or more heat load sets. At least one heat load set is required if you did not select a boundary condition set.
Mechanica sums the load sets and computes one time-dependent solution.
6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for a transient thermal analysis. o Temperatures o Convergence o Output 7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears with the name, type, and description of the new analysis displayed.
IndexVibration Analysis
The following four types of vibration analysis are available to Structure users: Dynamic Time Calculates displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses in your model at different times in response to a time-varying load. Dynamic Frequency Calculates the amplitude and phase of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses in your model in response to a load oscillating at different frequencies. Dynamic Random Calculates the power spectral densities and RMS values of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses in your model in response to a load of specified power spectral density. Dynamic Shock Calculates maximum values of displacements and stresses in your model in response to a base excitation with specified response spectrum.
See Also
Reference: Constraint and Load Sets in Structural Analyses
463
If you select Base Excitation, these items appear under Loading: o o o Time (or Frequency) Dependence Select a function for time or frequency dependence. Direction Select WCS coordinates for the direction of base excitation. Relative to Select whether you want results calculated relative to Ground or to Supports.
For both Load Functions or Base Excitation, you can use the Include Frequency Steps From Table check box to ensure that the solution includes all steps in a table input function, not just those that Mechanica selects automatically. The following tabs appear on the dialog boxes for dynamic time, dynamic frequency, and dynamic random analyses: Modes Previous Analysis Output
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Dynamic Time Analysis To Create a Dynamic Frequency Analysis To Create a Dynamic Random Analysis
464
IndexVibration Analysis
You can direct Mechanica to report full results at specified time intervals. For dynamic time analysis with full results, you can animate results of a fringed display for each time interval of your analysis.
Tip: You can define the equivalent of a base excitation case by placing a gravity load on the model.
3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. Select one of the following options: o Load Functions o Base Excitation 5. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the dynamic time analysis: o Modes o Previous Analysis o Output 6. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
465
For base excitation only, you can direct Mechanica to calculate the modal mass participation factors to enable you to better assess the accuracy of your results. Mechanica also calculates all valid measures for dynamic frequency analyses that you have defined for the model. You can direct Mechanica to report full results at specified frequency intervals.
Tip: You can define the equivalent of a base excitation case by placing a gravity load on the model.
3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. Select one of the following options: o Load Functions o Base Excitation 5. Select the Include frequency steps from table function check box if you want to ensure that the solution includes all steps in a table input function, not just those that Mechanica selects automatically. 6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the dynamic frequency analysis: o Modes o Previous Analysis o Output 7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
IndexVibration Analysis
period of time, the longer the sampling time, the more accurate the curve. Results are reported in terms of a response PSD. In a dynamic random analysis, Mechanica calculates these power spectral densities and RMS values of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses at points in your model in response to a load of specified PSD. Use a dynamic random analysis if: the loading of your model can be described statistically by a random process you are interested in evaluating RMS responses or power spectral densities
For base excitation only, you can direct Mechanica to calculate the modal mass participation factors to enable you to better assess the accuracy of your results. Mechanica also calculates all valid measures for dynamic random analyses that you have defined for the model. You can obtain results for the PSD of a quantity at a point by defining measures. You can also define measures that yield the RMS value or apparent frequency of a quantity. Tip: You can define the equivalent of a base excitation case by placing a gravity load on the model. The PSD is equal to gravity squared over frequency (PSD = G^2/F) for this case. Requirements 1 modal analysis 1 or more load sets
3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. Select one of the following options: o Load Functions o Base Excitation 5. Select the Include frequency steps from table function check box if you want to ensure that the solution includes all steps in a table input function, not just those that Mechanica selects automatically. 6. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the dynamic random analysis: o Modes o Previous Analysis o Output 7. Click OK when you complete the dialog box.
467
The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Dynamic Shock Analysis
3. Enter a name for the analysis. A description is optional. 4. Enter WCS coordinates for Direction of Base Excitation to specify the direction the constrained parts of your model move in response to the forcing function. For 2D models, enter only X and Y coordinates.
468
IndexFEM Analysis
5. Click the following tabs on the dialog box to select additional options for the dynamic shock analysis: o Previous Analysis o Response Spectrum o Output 6. Click OK when you complete the dialog box. The dialog box reappears displaying the name, type, and description of the new analysis.
469
analysis, the Analysis Definition dialog box for that analysis appears. You use this dialog box to redefine the analysis. Copy Copy an existing analysis under a new name. If you select this command, Mechanica displays a list of analyses for you to choose from. Once you select an analysis, you use the entry box in the message area to enter a name for the analysis copy. This function proves useful if you plan to run a number of analyses that have only minor differences. Delete Delete an existing analysis. If you select this command, Mechanica displays a list of analyses for you to choose from. Once you select an analysis, Mechanica deletes it.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a FEM Analysis
470
Parameters Use this area to define the parameters you want the modal analysis to observe. This area includes these fields: Number of Modes Specify the number of modes you want the NASTRAN or ANSYS solver to generate data for. The default is 4 modes. First Frequency Guess Provide an estimate of the first mode natural frequency. NASTRAN is the only solver that uses the information you enter in this field. The default is 1.000. Frequency Range Using the From and To fields, specify the lower and upper ends of the frequency range you want to evaluate.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Modal FEM Analysis
5. Click the Add button in the Constraint Sets (Structural) or Boundary Condition Sets (Thermal) area. The Sets Selection dialog box appears. 6. Select one or more constraint or boundary condition sets and click OK. The dialog box closes and Mechanica adds the constraint sets to the table. 7. If you want to suppress one or more constraint or boundary condition types in the set, click Suppress Constr or Suppress BCs. The Constraint Types or BC Types dialog box appears. 8. Select individual constraints or boundary conditions to suppress or click select all constraint types. Click OK to close the dialog box. 9. Perform steps 5 through 8 to complete the Load Sets area. 10. Click Ok to accept the analysis definition. to
If you delete a component of a design study, you need to redefine the study.
472
Although these topics pertain to both Structure and Thermal users, Structure runs are more computationally intensive. Therefore, these strategies are probably more helpful to Structure users.
See Also
References: Guidelines for Allocating RAM for Solver and Element Data About Design Studies
Output Files The engine also creates output files in which it places the results of the design study. These files contain the results of the previous run of the same design study, and may contain useful results even if the run did not complete successfully. The engine output files are placed in the same subdirectory as the engine input files for the design study.
474
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Design Study
You need to define a separate standard study in the following cases: 475
if you want to include multiple analyses if you want to set design parameters
When you define a standard study, you can set parameters for the selected analyses for a modified version of your model.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Create a Standard Design Study Global Sensitivity Study Local Sensitivity Study Optimization Study Standard Design Study with Parameters Strategies for Running a Standard Design Study
Set Parameters
Select this item if you want Mechanica to calculate results for a modified version of your model. You define this modified version by setting one or more parameters to different values. When you select Set Parameters, a list of the parameters you created appears in a scroll box. Select one or more parameters from the list. The computation time for the study is not affected by the number of parameters you select. For each parameter you select, enter a value from 0 to 100 in the Settings column. This value is a percentage of the range for the design parameter associated with a given parameter. Mechanica uses this value to determine the position of the design parameter. You can enter one of the following symbolic values instead of a numerical value: min or minimum max or maximum
These symbolic values represent the parameter's minimum or maximum value. You can use lowercase or uppercase letters. Minimum is always 0 and maximum is always 100.
476
Global Sensitivity Study for Structure and Thermal Global Sensitivity Study
In a global sensitivity study, Mechanica calculates values for all measures that are valid for the analyses included in the study. The software specifically calculates the changes in your model's measures when you vary a design parameter over a specified range. Mechanica does this by calculating measure values at regular intervals in a design parameter's range. You can vary more than one parameter simultaneously. You can also examine the results for a global sensitivity study as a graph of a measure for a selected design parameter.
Note: Mechanica does not calculate dynamic step measures when you use dynamic time, frequency, or random response analyses in a global sensitivity study.
The Design Study Definition dialog box contains the following items: Analyses Select one or more analyses from this list. Mechanica calculates results separately for each analysis. You also view results separately for each analysis. Parameters, Start, End Select one or more parameters from the alphabetical list of parameters you created for the model. Number of Intervals Enter the number of intervals in the range of each parameter you want Mechanica to use in the study. Mechanica distributes these intervals equally across each parameter's range and calculates values for your model's measures at each interval. Increasing the number of intervals increases the computation time for the design study. You can enter from 1 to 999 intervals. The default is 10. Repeat P-Loop Convergence Select this item to direct Mechanica to carry out additional calculations during the study. 477
See Also
Procedure: References: To Create a Global Sensitivity Study Optimization Study Using Global Sensitivity Studies Effectively
See Also
References: Standard Study Global Sensitivity Study
Mechanica calculates values at the remaining intervals differently depending on whether or not you select this option: If Repeat P-Loop Convergence is off, Mechanica calculates values at each remaining interval at the polynomial order it used to reach convergence for the first interval. This method cuts down on calculation time but may not fully capture your model's changes. If Repeat P-Loop Convergence is on, Mechanica starts its calculations over again at each interval until reaching convergence or the maximum polynomial order. This is important if you want to significantly change your model's shape, since the polynomial order required to reach convergence at later intervals may change. Note: For optimization studies, the default is On.
Regeneration Analysis
A regeneration analysis is a predefined analysis that regenerates your Pro/ENGINEER model. Because regeneration analysis does not import geometry or generate elements for the part, it is a quick method of running a design study without having to first set up an analysis. You can select regeneration analysis for the following design study types: Local Sensitivity Global Sensitivity Optimization
When you select regenerate (Model Regeneration Only) from the list of analyses, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis and generates a summary and log report. For local and global sensitivity studies, you can run a regeneration analysis from the design study dialog box. The regenerate option appears automatically in the list of existing analyses for the model. For optimization studies, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if any of the following are true: The goal and all selected limits are Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measures. The goal is a Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measure and no limits are defined. The selected limits are all Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measures and no goal is defined.
If a study is a candidate for regeneration analysis, you can choose either of two modes in which to run the analysis:
479
Current session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables a faster analysis which runs in the session you were working in. Separate session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to continue working in the same session of Pro/ENGINEER while the study runs in a different session.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Design Study To Run a Regeneration Analysis
Local Sensitivity Study for Structure and Thermal Local Sensitivity Study
A local sensitivity study calculates the effect of slight changes in one or more parameters on your model's measures. Mechanica calculates the slope of the sensitivity curve between two sample points. The result is a graph of the linear approximation of a measure over a parameter's range. The sensitivity slopes are also reported in the run Summary file. Mechanica computes local sensitivity by performing one base analysis and then a perturbation analysis for each parameter. A base analysis is the same as a standard analysis. In a perturbation analysis, Mechanica changes the parameter by an incremental amount and then performs a new analysis. Mechanica uses the results of the perturbation analysis and base analysis to compute a slope. This value is the same as the slope of the global sensitivity curve at a given 480
value of the parameter. By comparing the rates of change caused by several parameters, you can determine which parameters affect the model the most. The larger the rate of change, the greater the effect. If you are using local sensitivity studies to facilitate future optimization runs, consider the strategies listed in Optimizing a Model when reviewing your sensitivity results. You can use a local sensitivity study to determine the most important design parameters for your model, which provides a way of reducing the number of parameters used in global and optimization studies. This, in turn, reduces run times and resource requirements. Mechanica calculates values for all measures that are valid for the analyses included in the study. But Mechanica does not calculate the value for measures using the At Each Step option when you use dynamic time, frequency, or random response analyses in a local sensitivity study. For dialog box parameters, refer to Local Sensitivity Dialog Box.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Create a Local Sensitivity Study Global Sensitivity Study Optimization Study
Parameters, Settings
Use these items to select and enter a value for one or more parameters you created for the model. Selecting additional parameters has an insignificant effect on computation time for the study. Next, enter a value in the Settings column to determine each parameter's position at the start of the local sensitivity study. If you select multiple parameters, Mechanica updates the model to reflect the settings for all parameters you selected. Mechanica then varies each parameter independently about the Settings value and calculates a single set of values for your model's measures for each parameter. This value is a percentage of the range for the design parameter associated with a given parameter. You can enter one of the following symbolic values instead of a numerical value:
481
Regeneration Analysis
A regeneration analysis is a predefined analysis that regenerates your Pro/ENGINEER model. Because regeneration analysis does not import geometry or generate elements for the part, it is a quick method of running a design study without having to first set up an analysis. You can select regeneration analysis for the following design study types: Local Sensitivity Global Sensitivity Optimization
When you select regenerate (Model Regeneration Only) from the list of analyses, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis and generates a summary and log report. For local and global sensitivity studies, you can run a regeneration analysis from the design study dialog box. The regenerate option appears automatically in the list of existing analyses for the model. For optimization studies, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if any of the following are true: The goal and all selected limits are Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measures. The goal is a Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measure and no limits are defined. The selected limits are all Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measures and no goal is defined.
If a study is a candidate for regeneration analysis, you can choose either of two modes in which to run the analysis: Current session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables a faster analysis which runs in the session you were working in. Separate session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to continue working in the same session of Pro/ENGINEER while the study runs in a different session.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Design Study To Run a Regeneration Analysis
482
See Also
Reference: Local Sensitivity Study
Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if the study meets certain criteria regarding goals, limits, and parameters. You can examine the following types of results for an optimization study: graphs of a measure against the study's iterations 483
This dialog box contains the following items: Goal Limits on Measures Track Parameters, Min, Init, Max Optim Convergence (%) Max Iterations Repeat P-Loop Convergence
See Also
Procedure: References: To Create an Optimization Study Global Sensitivity Study Local Sensitivity Study Strategy: Optimizing a Model
Goal
Use this area of the Design Study Definition dialog box to select a measure to minimize or maximize as the goal of the optimization. For example, you might want to minimize mass or reaction forces for your model. When defining a goal, you cannot select a measure unless you have defined an analysis for which that measure is valid. However, you can select a measure associated with different analyses. Defining a goal is optional, but if you do not define a goal, you must define limits. Without a goal, Mechanica searches for the first feasible design that satisfies the limits you define. If you do not want to define a goal, deselect Goal on the Design Study Definition dialog box.
484
The Goal area of the dialog box includes a Goal option menu that you use to indicate the goal and a Select button that enables you to select the measure you want to use as the basis for the goal. The Goal option menu provides these selections: Minimize Mechanica tries to make the goal measure as small as possible. If the measure can move into the negative numbers, Mechanica will try to make the goal as negative as possible. Maximize Mechanica tries to make the goal measure as positive as possible. Minimize Abs Val Mechanica tries to minimize the absolute value of the goal measure, getting it as close to zero as possible, regardless of sign. Maximize Abs Val Mechanica tries to maximize the absolute value of the goal measure, getting it as far from zero as possible, regardless of sign.
Note that the Minimize and Maximize options take into account the sign of the goal measure's value, while the two Absolute Value options do not. Clicking the Select button displays the Measures dialog box. You use the option menu in the upper right corner of this dialog box to choose the type of measure you want to selectStructural or Thermal. You cannot select a measure unless you have defined an analysis for which that measure is valid. You can select measures associated with multiple analyses. Once you select a measure and exit the Measures dialog box, Mechanica displays the name of the measure you select on the Design Study Definition dialog box. Mechanica also displays an analysis name, except for measures like total_cost and total_mass that are calculated for all analyses. If there is more than one analysis you can use the Select button beside the analysis name to indicate the analysis you want the optimization study to run. Depending on the analysis type you select, you may have the option of selecting specific load sets or modes. If you select a modal and prestress modal analysis, you also have the option of enabling mode tracking.
Limits on Measures
Use this area of the Design Study Definition dialog box to select one or more measures to act as limits for the optimization, and to define the mathematical limit you want Mechanica to observe for each measure. Each limit you define is a mathematical statement including the measure, an operator, and a value (for example, max_stress_prin < 100). Mechanica seeks to keep the measures you select within the limits you specify during the study. For example, you might want to ensure that an aluminum model does not exceed 20,000 psi for a von Mises stress measure. If you set this von Mises stress value as an optimization limit (max_stress_vm < 20000), Mechanica will move the model toward 20,000 psi in an attempt to find a more efficient model that still meets that limit, as well as any goal you set.
485
Defining limits is optional, but if you do not define limits, you must define a goal. Without limits, Mechanica searches for the optimum value of your goal anywhere in the full range of the parameters you select. When defining a limit, you cannot select a measure unless you have defined an analysis for which that measure is valid. However, you can select a measure associated with different analyses. The Limits on Measures area of the dialog box includes a Create and Delete button that you use to create and delete the measure limits. Clicking the Create button displays the Measures dialog box. You use the option menu in the upper right corner of this dialog box to choose the type of measure you want to select Structural or Thermal. You cannot select a measure unless you have defined an analysis for which that measure is valid. You can select measures associated with multiple analyses. Once you select a measure and exit the Measures dialog box, Mechanica displays the name of the measure you select on the Design Study Definition dialog box and adds fields that enable you to select an operator (<, >, or =) and value for the measure limit. When entering values, use units consistent with the units you have used previously with this model. Mechanica reports some rotation measures in radians. You must enter the limits of rotation measures in radians (1 radian = 57.29578 ). Note: You can use the same measure as a limit more than once. After you select a measure as a limit, Mechanica displays an analysis name below the limit definition area, except for measures like total_cost and total_mass that are calculated for all analyses. If there is more than one analysis you can use the Select button beside the analysis name to indicate the analysis you want the optimization study to run. Depending on the analysis type you select, you may have the option of selecting specific load sets or modes. If you select a modal and prestress modal analysis, you also have the option of enabling mode tracking.
486
The minimum and maximum values define a range across which you want Mechanica to vary each selected parameter during the study. The initial value defines the position of the design parameter at the start of the optimization study. Enter a value from 0 to 100, representing a percentage of the range for the design parameter associated with a given parameter. You can enter one of the following symbolic values instead of a numerical value: min or minimum (always 0) max or maximum (always 100)
Mechanica also uses the convergence value to determine if a limit is met. For example, if the convergence is 1%, Mechanica keeps to the limit value give or take 1%. If a limit value is near zero, the optimizer uses one-tenth of the specified convergence value as an absolute limit. For example, if you use the default convergence value of 1, a zero limit is considered met if its measure has a value of 0.001 (one-tenth of 1 percent) or less. Mechanica continues the optimization study until it reaches either the convergence value or the Max Iterations value you enter below. You can enter any number between 0 and 100 for convergence, but if you enter a number below 0.1 or above 25, Mechanica asks you to confirm the value you entered when you click Accept.
487
Max Iterations
Use Max Iterations to specify the maximum number of iterations you want Mechanica to carry out during the optimization study. The minimum number of iterations is 1. If you enter a number above 50, Mechanica asks you to confirm the value you entered when you click Accept. The higher the number of iterations, the longer it takes for Mechanica to reach the goal. Mechanica continues the optimization study until it reaches either the Max Iterations value or the value for Optim Convergence %.
Regeneration Analysis
A regeneration analysis is a predefined analysis that regenerates your Pro/ENGINEER model. Because regeneration analysis does not import geometry or generate elements for the part, it is a quick method of running a design study without having to first set up an analysis. You can select regeneration analysis for the following design study types: Local Sensitivity Global Sensitivity Optimization
When you select regenerate (Model Regeneration Only) from the list of analyses, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis and generates a summary and log report. For local and global sensitivity studies, you can run a regeneration analysis from the design study dialog box. The regenerate option appears automatically in the list of existing analyses for the model. For optimization studies, Mechanica runs a regeneration analysis automatically if any of the following are true: The goal and all selected limits are Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measures. The goal is a Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measure and no limits are defined. The selected limits are all Pro/ENGINEER parameter-driven measures and no goal is defined.
If a study is a candidate for regeneration analysis, you can choose either of two modes in which to run the analysis: 488 Current session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables a faster analysis which runs in the session you were working in. Separate session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to continue working in the same session of Pro/ENGINEER while the study runs in a different session.
Index
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Design Study To Run a Regeneration Analysis
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Design Study To Save an Optimized Shape References: Optimization Study Regeneration Analysis
489
Running Solvers Native Mode Solvers Running Analyses and Design Studies
Use the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to run the analyses and design studies you create. The dialog box displays a list of existing analyses and design studies. To run an analysis or design study, select it from the list, and then use the following options to set up and manage the run: Run menu o Start Start running the analysis or design study you select. o Stop Stop running the analysis or design study you select. o Restart Restart a previously stopped analysis or design study. o Batch Create the engine input files necessary to run one or more analyses or design studies. o Settings Open the Run Settings dialog box, which enables you to change certain settings Mechanica uses for the run. Info menu o Status Open the Run Status window, which enables you to view the status of a run. You can select the Detailed Summary check box at the bottom of the window to view a detailed summary of the run. o Diagnose Open the Run Diagnostics dialog box, which enables you to review the warning and error messages. o Check Model Perform model error checks to determine whether there are problems that would prevent an analysis or study run from starting such as missing properties, problems with constraints or boundary conditions, invalid analysis definitions, and so forth.
For information on troubleshooting problems with a run, see Troubleshoot Run Problems. For information about reviewing the results of a run, see About Results.
See Also
Procedures: To Start an Analysis or a Design Study Run To Display Run Errors References: Before You Run an Analysis or Design Study Before Mechanica Starts a Run Design Study Files
490
IndexRunning Solvers
491
If there are no modeling or meshing errors, Mechanica starts running the analysis.
492
IndexRunning Solvers
See Also
Procedure: References: To Select the Iterative Solver Before You Run a Design Study Run a Batched Design Study
Setting Up a Run
Select the Run>Settings menu option or the Configure Run Settings button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to access the Run Settings dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify the locations of the output and temporary files, any elements you want to use from an existing study, the output file format, and the solver settings. The Run Settings dialog box includes the following options: Directory for Output Files Select the directory for the output files generated by the run. Directory for Temporary Files Select the directory for the temporary files generated by the run. Elements Select the source of the elements Mechanica uses during a run. Output File Format Select an output format for the output file. 493
Solver Settings Use this area to specify settings for the solver: o Memory Allocation (MB) Select the check box and enter the appropriate number of megabytes to allocate for the memory. o Use Iterative Solver Select the check box to use the iterative solver and enter the maximum number of iterations and at which Ploop pass the iterative solver should take over from the direct solver. Defaults Select this button to return the settings on the dialog box to the default values.
494
IndexRunning Solvers
Elements
You can specify the elements you want Mechanica to use when you run an analysis or design study by selecting one of the following options on the Run Settings dialog box: Use Elements from Existing Mesh File Create Elements during Run Use Elements from an Existing Study
Click the Select button to display the Select Existing Study Directory dialog box that lists the studies in the current directory. When you return to the Run Settings dialog box, the directory path of the study you selected appears.
Memory Allocation
Select Memory Allocation to turn on RAM allocation. This setting is turned off by default. The value you enter sets the amount of RAM reserved for solving equations and for storing element data created by the iterative solver. The engine dynamically allocates the rest of the memory it needs for the run. Before you run design studies, you can set the amount of RAM the engine uses. Depending on the amount of RAM installed in your machine, you might be able to improve the engine solver performance by changing this setting. When you select Memory Allocation, Mechanica displays the default value of 128 megabytes. You can change this default value by setting the config.pro value for sim_max_memory_uasge to a different number. The value you enter must be greater than 0.1. Some tips for setting this value include: You can use the default allocation for any run. If you have a lot of RAM on your machine, you may want to enter a higher RAM allocation number so that large models will run fasteryou can slow the run substantially if you specify an allocation that is too large to fit in available RAM. You can also slow the run if you do not specify sufficient memory, especially if you specify less than the default. You can increase the speed of the iterative solver by increasing the amount of RAM you allocate with this option.
For specific information about specifying solver RAM, see Guidelines for Allocating RAM for Solver and Element Data. 495
See Also
References: Managing Memory and Swap Space Guidelines for Managing Disk Space Resources
The iterative solver has the following limitations: If you are running a global sensitivity or optimization design study, you must select Repeat Convergence when you create the study. If you are running a local sensitivity or optimization design study, none of the analyses in the study can have temperature loads in Structure that refer to thermal analyses. If your design study contains any modal analyses, Mechanica does not use the iterative solver for those analyses.
For some models, the iterative solver may not converge. If a design study does not converge, the run terminates, and you must re-run the study without the iterative solver. When you select this item, the following additional items appear on the dialog box: Maximum Iterations After P-Loop Pass
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Select the Iterative Solver Guidelines for Managing Disk Space Resources
496
IndexRunning Solvers
Start
Select the Run>Start menu option or select the Start Run button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to start the run of a selected analysis or design study. You can use one of the following methods to start an analysis or design study run: Run directly from within Mechanica by selecting the Run>Start menu option or the Start button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. Run from your operating system command prompt. Create the input files for each study by selecting the Run>Batch menu option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. You can then run each study in succession by using the mecbatch command.
Mechanica gives you the following feedback before starting a run: If you enter an invalid design study, you will see an error message. Mechanica asks if you want error detection during the run. If your study is a candidate for a regeneration analysis but no other analysis type, the Run Mode dialog box appears, enabling you to: o run the study within the current Pro/ENGINEER session. The study runs faster, but you cannot work in Pro/ENGINEER while the study proceeds. o run the study as a separate task while you continue working in the same Pro/ENGINEER session
See Also
Procedure: To Start an Analysis or a Design Study Run
If the files are left over from a previous run, you can safely delete them. If the design study is currently running, you should wait until it is finished before starting a new run.
Error Detection
If you do not request error detection, Mechanica goes to the next step. If you skip error detection, and your model contains errors, the run could terminate later with a fatal engine error. If you request error detection, Mechanica checks the model for errors. Mechanica carries out the same checks as it does when you select Info>Check Model on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box, with these additions: If you select a design study that contains analyses from both Structure and Thermal, Mechanica checks for both Structure-specific and Thermal-specific errors, and displays entities specific to both products during error detection. Mechanica checks for some additional errors that Check Model does not detect. Once a run has started, Mechanica checks for errors in the following areas: o o o o matching parameters convergence measures optimization studies temperature distribution
After error checking is complete or interrupted, Mechanica searches for the following: o o boundary edges boundary faces
Even if you previously used Check Model, you should check your model again to catch errors introduced since you used Check Model, and to take advantage of the extra checks performed at this time. Once Mechanica checks your model for errors, you can resolve them.
498
IndexRunning Solvers
See Also
References: Inconsistent Shell Normals Allowable Errors
Restart
To restart an analysis or design study, select the Run>Restart menu option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. You can restart a standard design study or one of the following analysis types: static prestress static modal prestress modal buckling steady-state thermal
Note that Restart does not work for analyses that use the single-pass adaptive method.
See Also
References: Before You Use Restart What Restart Does Restart a Stopped Analysis
499
You can restart stopped analyses in any order. You cannot restart a sensitivity or optimization design study. You cannot restart an SPA analysis. Mechanica must complete at least one pass through the analysis in order for you to restart it. If the engine stops for any reason, including running out of disk space or swap space, power failure, maximum p-level reached (unless the analysis reached pass 9), or user interruption, you can use the Restart command to continue the analysis from the beginning of the pass during which the engine stopped.
500
IndexRunning Solvers
See Also
References: What Batch Does Run a Batched Analysis or Design Study Invalid Design Studies
If a batch file already exists, Mechanica asks if you want to append this design study to the existing batch file. If you do not append the design study to the existing batch file, Mechanica gives you the opportunity to overwrite the existing mecbatch file with a new one for the current design study. Mechanica asks if you want error detection. If you do not check for errors, or if no errors were detected, Mechanica takes the following steps: o o writes the engine input files places the files in a directory called study, located in the directory for output files you specify on the Run Settings dialog box (study is the name of the design study you selected) adds an msengine command for the current study to the mecbatch file located in the directory from which you are running Mechanica
Stop
To stop running a selected analysis or design study that you started during the current Mechanica session, select Run>Stop or the Stop Run button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. Note: You cannot use Stop to cancel a run you started in a previous Mechanica session, or a run you started directly from the operating system by using the mecbatch or msengine commands. When you select Stop, Mechanica does the following: If the selected analysis or design study is not running, Mechanica informs you that it is not. If Mechanica is currently running the selected analysis or design study started during the current session, Mechanica gives you the opportunity to confirm that you want to stop the run. If you confirm the stop, Mechanica terminates the run and displays a message that the run has successfully been stopped.
502
IndexRunning Solvers
See Also
References: Creating Analyses and Design Studies Modifying Analyses and Design Studies Running Analyses and Design Studies
Status/Summary
To access a summary report for the analysis or design study you select, select the Info>Status menu option, or the Display Study Status button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. You can use the summary report to: check the status of a run access information about a completed run
The summary report includes the following information for the entire analysis or design study: a model summary at the beginning, listing the model type and the number of elements, points, edges, and faces in the model a running status of convergence information that shows how far the analysis has gone, plus the quality of the convergence and the estimated error a memory and disk usage summary at the end, including the total elapsed time, total CPU time, maximum memory usage, and the amount of disk space used by various files
503
You can toggle between the status report window and the detailed summary report by selecting or clearing the Detailed Summary check box at the bottom of the status report window. If you access the status report while the run is in progress, Mechanica adds new information to the dialog box as the engine updates the report file. You can access this same file through your operating system. The file is called study/study.rpt, located in the directory for output files (where study is the name of your design study).
See Also
References: Summary Report Contents RMS Stress Error Estimates Error Messages
The contents of the body of the summary report vary by design study and analysis type: Standard Studies: Static, Large Deformation Static, Contact, Prestress Static, Modal, Prestress Modal, Buckling, Steady-State Thermal, and Transient Thermal Analyses Standard Studies: Dynamic Time, Frequency, and Random Analyses Standard Studies, Dynamic Shock Analyses Global Sensitivity Studies Local Sensitivity Studies Optimization Studies
IndexRunning Solvers
potential singularities. Mechanica does not include this information when all of the external edges have potential singularities. For static and contact analyses, Mechanica displays the following information: Load Set Name The name of the load set to which the RMS stress error estimate applies. Stress Error Obtained by sampling the local error estimates along external edges. The estimate excludes regions with potential singularities (constraints, reentrant corners). You can use the stress error as an uncertainty for local stress values. % Of Max Prin Str Keep in mind that if the maximum principal stress occurs at a singular region of the model, Mechanica excludes it from the sampling when evaluating the stress error estimate. In this case, the % Of Max Prin Str can be artificially low. To assess the achieved stress accuracy, it is always better to use the absolute stress error estimate (from the previous column) rather than this relative value. For modal, prestress modal, and buckling analyses, Mechanica displays the following information: mode stress error (% of Max Modal Stress)
Error Messages
For all design studies, the summary report also issues two types of error messages: Warning messages If the engine detects an unexpected situation that does not stop the progress of a run, it issues a warning message. This message indicates that there may be a problem requiring further attention. Fatal error messages For any design study that stops with a fatal error, Mechanica writes a message explaining the error, and in many cases, advises you of corrective action to take.
For some fatal errors, Mechanica directs you to use the Results command to see a diagnostic display of your model with entities associated with the error highlighted.
Results for a run may be available, even if the run ended with an error: For each p-loop pass in a static, prestress static, modal, prestress modal, buckling, or contact analysis, Mechanica calculates displacement and stress results. For each p-loop pass in a steady-state thermal analysis, Mechanica calculates temperature and flux results. For the quick check convergence method, Mechanica displays a warning after the convergence loop log, informing you that convergence has not been checked.
505
For the multi-pass adaptive convergence method, following the final p-loop pass, Mechanica writes a message stating that convergence to the specified percentage either was or was not attained.
If your run did not converge, you can review a convergence graph for most of the quantities that Mechanica uses for convergence.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Display Run Errors Troubleshoot Run Problems
Following is a description of each of the lines showing times: Elapsed Time the total time from the start of the run through the previous milestone, or step CPU Time the time your CPU has been in use from the start of the run through the previous milestone, or step Step Elapsed Time the total time for the previous milestone, or step Step CPU Time the time your CPU was in use during the previous milestone, or step
If an error causes your run to fail, Mechanica displays a message at the end of the log. You can find a more specific error message in the summary window. To see the summary window, select Info>Status on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. If no log file exists for the design study you select, Mechanica displays a message that it cannot find the file. If the machine you are using to run the engine is equipped with parallel processors, Mechanica automatically uses all CPUs in the system for the run. However, you can manually specify the number of CPU's devoted to the run if you want to limit the number of CPUs you use.
506
IndexRunning Solvers
In cases where the ratio of elapsed time to CPU time is close to a value of 1 with one CPU, your solution times may benefit from running the engine in parallel processing mode. For other ratios, you may experience performance degradation. For information on the benefits and limitations of parallel processing as well as a discussion of how to manually specify the number of CPU's, see Strategy: Running the Engine with Parallel Processing.
Diagnose
Select the Info>Diagnose option on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to open the Run Diagnostics dialog box. Use this dialog box to review the warnings and errors that Mechanica generates during a run. The software highlights the geometry associated with each error and places a marker on each instance of faulty meshing.
See Also
Reference: Diagnose AutoGEM Problems
Study does not converge If the summary report says that your study did not converge during the run, and you used the multi-pass adaptive convergence method, you should look at a convergence graph to get more information. For more information, see Strategy: Fixing Convergence Problems. 507
You may also be able to circumvent run problems by managing your computer resources effectively. For technical information on resource and performance management, see Managing Memory and Swap Space, Guidelines for Managing Disk Space Resources, and Managing Performance.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Display Run Errors Troubleshoot High Elapsed Run Times
508
IndexRunning Solvers
mounted disk might transfer data at only 1 MB/sec. Use local disks whenever possible. Using swap space that is not local to the machine Add local swap space and avoid using remote swap space. Using swap space or disk space that is not dedicated to that purpose Some operating systems allow an area of a disk to be shared dynamically between temporary files and swap space. Switching from this type of dynamic sharing to dedicated disk space or dedicated swap space can provide much better performance. You can also gain performance by placing the swap space and the scratch files on separate physical disks. Running a large job with insufficient machine RAM The performance of many programs suffers when the virtual memory usage exceeds the available machine RAM. However, Mechanica typically uses only a small part of memory at a time. Therefore, performance can remain stable even when the reported total memory usage is 2 or 3 times machine RAM, and sometimes as much as 5 times machine RAM.
If you follow the guidelines for all run-setting parameters and you still suspect poor performance, compare the ratio of elapsed time to CPU time and compare the memory usage for this job with previously run jobs using similar models. Make sure all runs were made on the same machine under the same work load conditions. Similar models should have the same element and analysis types and use the same type of solver. If the ratios of elapsed time to CPU time and memory usage to machine RAM are both high, you might need to install more machine RAM in order to improve performance. In some cases, it helps to decrease the solram allocation or reduce the size of the model you are analyzing. For more information on the use of virtual memory, see Managing Memory and Swap Space.
mecbatch
This command lets you to run a single design study or a series of design studies from your operating system. Mechanica runs the studies in the order in which you enter them into the batch file. If one study ends in an error, Mechanica continues running the remaining studies in the file. You can monitor the status of the runs and review the summary file by selecting Info>Status or the Display study status button on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
See Also
509
References:
Use mecbatch
The mecbatch command executes from your operating system the run of one or more design studies you previously included in a batch file. To use mecbatch, for each study you want to include in a batch file, do the following: Select the Analysis>Mechanica Analyses/Studies command. Select the design study you want to batch from the dialog box. Select Run>Batch on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. The Batch dialog box appears. You can use this dialog box to specify a new name for the batch file, change the directory where this file is stored, or append the study to an existing batch file. By default, Mechanica names the file mecbatch (mecbatch.bat on Windows) and places it in the directory from which you started Mechanica. When you are ready to run the mecbatch command: Open a command shell. Enter mecbatch at the operating system command prompt. Note: If you changed the name of the batch file, enter that name instead of mecbatch to start running the design studies. The msengine command for an individual design study contains information you entered on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. Each time you select Run>Batch on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box, Mechanica places an msengine command for a design study.
msengine
Use this command to run a single design study from your operating system. You can run a study containing structural analyses, thermal analyses, or both. In order to use this command, you need engine input files. When you select Run>Batch on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box, Mechanica does the following: writes the input files that the Structure engine needs for the run, but does not actually start the run places an msengine command in a batch file each time you use the Batch option
510
IndexRunning Solvers
Optionally, you can run a single design study by manually entering the same msengine command that Mechanica placed in the batch file. You do this by entering the following at the command prompt: msengine study [options] where study is a directory with the same name as your design study. This directory contains the engine input files. You also use the msengine command to access external optimizers for design optimization. After the msengine command executes the run of your design study, you can monitor the status of the run and review the summary file by selecting Info>Status on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box.
Use msengine
You can specify one or more of the following options after the input directory name: i input_dir Specifies the location of the directory containing the engine input files. w working_dir1:working_dir2:... Specifies the location of the directory or directories in which the engine places temporary files during the run. solram ram_size Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of memory to be allocated for direct solver memory and for element data for the iterative solver. iter n Specifies that the engine uses the iterative solver after polynomial pass n, a number from 1 to 8. sturm option Specifies whether or not the Structure engine performs a Sturm sequence test for a modal analysis. gdp Specifies that the engine uses an alternative algorithm for an optimization design study. extopt Specifies that Mechanica uses an external optimizer to run either a function evaluation (using a standard study) or a gradient evaluation (using a local sensitivity study). ascii Specifies that the engine writes the engine output files in ASCII format. p password Specifies an optional password. T Causes the design study to run in demo mode. bsram ram_size Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of block solver RAM the engine uses for equation solving. elram ram_size Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of RAM available to store element matrices created by the iterative solver. massnorm Specifies that the Structure engine mass-normalizes mode shape vectors instead of unit-normalizing them in modal analysis.
511
You will always need a standard study for function evaluation. If the external optimizer can benefit from gradient information, use a local sensitivity study. If you are running a function evaluation, enter this command: msengine extopt <standard study name> If you are running a gradient evaluation, enter this command: msengine extopt <local sensitivity study name> Before executing either of these commands, you need to write a wrapper code that defines the design problem and calls the external optimizer, which in turn calls Mechanica.
To use an external optimizer with your study, do the following: Define the appropriate study. Write the wrapper code that calls the external optimizer. Execute the msengine extopt command.
The wrapper code calls the external optimizer, which generates the mech_extopt.in file, and is read by Mechanica. When the study finishes running, Mechanica sends data containing the design objectives and the limits to a mech_extopt.out output file. For information on the format of these files, see: 512
IndexRunning Solvers
513
FEM Solvers About Running FEM Analyses and Generating Output Decks
Once you generate the mesh for your model successfully, you can perform additional reviews of your mesh, run a FEM analysis from within Mechanica using one of the supported FEA solvers, or generate an output deck that you can use outside of Mechanica. You perform these activities by selecting the Analysis>FEM Solution command and completing the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. Before you start a run, you should have created all modeling entities and generated a mesh for your model. If you plan to run an analysis instead of outputting a deck, you should also have defined an analysis. To give you a general idea of the process you might use, here is a description of how you use the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to prepare for and start a FEM analysis run or to generate an output deck for one of the FEA solvers: Use the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to choose the solver you are interested in or to select the displayonly method for reviewing the mesh. Set the dialog box to output to a file and click OK to output the mesh. Use the commands on the REVIEW MESH menu to examine the mesh. If you find problems, adjust the model and mesh.
Use the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to select the solver you are interested in and define other aspects of the run, such as the element shape, analyses, and coordinate systems. If you want to run a FEA analysis from within Mechanica, set the dialog box for an online or background run. If you want to generate a deck for later use with one of the FEA solvers, set the dialog box to output to a file.
514
Be aware that this process varies depending on your needs. For some models, you may feel comfortable omitting the mesh review cycleproceeding immediately with an online run or deck generation. For other models, you may only want to complete the mesh review phase.
After you complete an online or background run, the system stores the model mesh and the FEA results in a single database file called model.frd (where model is the name of the model). You use this file when you view results in the postprocessor. To 515
fully understand how Mechanica uses the .frd file and what this file contains, see Storing and Retrieving FEA Results.
Selecting a Solver
Use the Solver option list on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to select a solver for your FEM analysis run or mesh review. The Solver option list includes the following: Display Only Display a solver mesh for your model independent of solver type. ANSYS Perform a structural, modal, or thermal analysis of your model using the ANSYS solver. You can also use this option if you want to create an output deck formatted for use with ANSYS. MSC/NASTRAN Perform a structural or modal analysis of your model using the NASTRAN solver. You can also use this option if you want to create an output deck formatted for use with NASTRAN. If you are using MSC/NASTRAN as a solver, it creates a NASTRAN results file with the .xdb extension in addition to the model.frd file. Mechanica FEM mode gives you a direct access to the .xdb file, so you can view NASTRAN results in the postprocessor. For more information, see Loading NASTRAN Results Database. FEM Neutral Output a FEM Neutral File (FNF file) for use with solvers other than the ones Mechanica supports. If you want to use this option, the solver you plan to use must be able to correctly read the FNF format.
You can configure Mechanica to automatically display ANSYS or NASTRAN as the default setting for the Solver scroll list when you open the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. You do this by setting the fem_default_solver configuration option to ANSYS or MSC/NASTRAN. Your ability to view FEA solver results in the Mechanica postprocessor depends on the solver you used as well as whether you ran the solver online or output a deck.
516
When you select an analysis type, Mechanica adds all existing analyses of that type to the Analyses area of the dialog box. You can then select one or more individual analyses from that area. You can also choose not to select an analysis. Note that, if you select Structural from the Analysis option menu, Mechanica lists both structural and modal analyses in the Analyses area. If you select a modal analysis under these circumstances, Mechanica runs a structural analysis that includes the constraints, frequency specifications, and so forth from the modal analysis definition.
Element Shape
Use the Element Shape area on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box to determine the type of elements the solver will use. The Element Shape area includes the following: Linear Use linear elements for the run or the output deck. Linear elements have only corner nodes, straight edges, and planar faces. These elements are best suited for models with relatively planar and straight-edged topologies, and can improve solution times for these models. Mechanica outputs linear elements as follows: o shell elements Uses 3-node elements for triangular mesh and 4node elements for quadrilateral mesh. o solid elements Uses 4-node elements. Parabolic Use parabolic elements for the run or the output deck. When Mechanica runs with or outputs parabolic elements, it uses the same mesh, but adds mid-edge nodes to each element. These added nodes aid in the approximation of model curvature by enabling the mesh elements to flex at the added nodes. This ability to flex enables the elements to conform to curved model surfaces better. Mechanica outputs parabolic elements as follows: o shell elements Adds a mid-node to each edge, using 6-node elements for triangular mesh and 8-node elements for quadrilateral mesh. solid elements Adds mid-nodes to each tetrahedral edge and outputs 10-node elements to the file.
If you select Parabolic, you can use the Fix Elements button to adjust the mesh. This button adjusts mid ratios so that they do not exceed values you specified on the Element Quality Checks dialog box. The Fix Elements button is particularly useful if your model has a moderate to high degree of curvature.
If you want to use the model data outside of Mechanica, you can also output a deck for the solver of your choice. To indicate which of these methods you want Mechanica to use, you select one of the three items in the run methods area near the bottom of the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. Note: If you plan to run online or in the background, you must supply the software with the correct path to the FEA executable. You provide the path by including the appropriate options in your configuration file. The run methods area of the dialog box includes these items: Output to File Outputs a deck formatted for the solver you selected. You can use this deck outside of Mechanica as input for your solver. If you select this option, you must also enter the filename that you want Mechanica to use when writing the deck.
You can also output to user-defined solver other than the ones that appear on the Solver option list, provided the solver supports a FEM Neutral File.
Run On-Line Runs the solver online saving mesh and results in the model.frd file. This ties up the Pro/ENGINEER session until the processing is complete. When it is complete, the system automatically enters the postprocessor and loads the results section from the name.frd file into memory. Run in Background Runs the solver in the background and stores the results in the file model.frd, where model is the name of your model. Your current session is not interrupted and you can continue working with another model. After the processing is complete, you can view the analysis results in the postprocessor.
Your ability to view FEA solver results in the Mechanica postprocessor depends on the solver you used as well as whether you ran the solver online or output a deck.
See Also
Procedures: To Review the Mesh To Solve a FEM Model Online or in the Background To Create an Output File
518
When you select the Review command or use one of the Run FEM Analysis dialog box methods, the REVIEW MESH menu appears. This menu allows you to review the mesh after it is created or after an analysis is run. The menu includes: Meshes Review a mesh after you create it. You can review a list of components by path within the top-level assembly hierarchy, the number of elements and nodes, and the range of element and node ID numbers. You can also review the range of element, node, and local mesh entity IDs with the Mesh ID Offset mesh control applied. This type of review can help you identify and resolve any numbering conflicts. Nodes Review nodes by selecting: o Coord Systems Select this option to display a coordinate system icon at each selected node that will be oriented for nodal displacement. If the coordinate system is not Cartesian, then Mechanica calculates and displays the R, , and Z or direction instead. o All Highlight all element nodes and display their node IDs. o Boundary Highlight only boundary nodes and display their node IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid elements. o Node ID Highlight an individual node and display its ID. If you select this option, you enter the integer ID for the node you are interested in. o Select Highlight an individual node and display its ID. In this case, you use your mouse to select the node on your model. o List Unused Generate a list of unused node IDs. You use this option to help detect node ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You can correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to the conflicting nodes. Elements Review elements by selecting: o Coord Systems Display the coordinate system for the elements that you review. o Shell Normals Display the shell normals for the elements that you review. This check box only appears if the mesh includes shell elements. o All Highlight all elements and display their element IDs. o Boundary Highlight only boundary elements and display their element IDs. This option only appears if the mesh includes solid elements. o Element ID Highlight an individual element and display its ID as well as its node IDs. If you select this option, you enter the integer ID for the element you are interested in. o Select Highlight an individual element and display its ID as well as its node IDs. In this case, you use your mouse to select the element on your model. o List Unused Generate a list of unused element IDs. You use this option to help detect element ID conflicts in hierarchical meshes. You can correct these conflicts by applying mesh ID offset mesh controls to the conflicting elements. Connectivity Highlight edges that are only included in one shell surface. You can also use this command to highlight a free node on a one-dimensional element such as a beam or spring.
If you review the mesh at run time, Mechanica adds these options to the REVIEW MESH menu: 519
Materials Highlight elements made of selected materials by selecting: o All Highlight all elements with specified materials o Material ID Highlight elements by specific material. Analyses Highlight nodes or elements from a selected analysis and examine how the loads and constraints defined for the analysis apply to the mesh. Hard Points Display an information window listing nodes that were created at hard points on the model.
Mechanica creates output decks in a variety of FEA formats. When outputting a hierarchical mesh of an assembly, Mechanica creates a single output file. Depending on whether your goal is to create an output file for MSC/NASTRAN or any other solver, Mechanica arranges the data in two different ways: For the NASTRAN solver, Mechanica outputs component meshes into sections of a single file. Each section groups together all items that belong to a particular component, such as coordinate systems, materials, properties, nodes, elements, and so on. For other solvers, Mechanica lists separately all assembly nodes, all coordinate systems, all materials, and so forth. The solver then restores the hierarchy according to information each list provides.
520
input_file input file in the FEM Neutral format with the extension .fnf output_file solution results file in the FEM Neutral format with the extension .fnf For example: /abc/def/fea_solver model.fnf model_res.fnf If it finds a solution, the user solver should return a zero value upon termination.
521
522
IndexReviewing Results
The Results user interface incorporates a menu bar, toolbar, a set of basic functions, and a built-in workflow designed to facilitate results viewing. This workflow enables you to set up a variety of result views, evaluate individual results, and control scaling and visualization of multiple results so that you can easily compare one quantity of interest with another. Here is a step-by-step overview of what we suggest as your workflow: 1. Viewing results You define result windows, display and hide them, and control how they appear on-screen and in your reports. 2. Evaluating results You study the result windows you defined, probe specific areas of your model, and compare your findings for one model, design study, result quantity, or set of conditions with your findings for another. 3. Saving result windows You save the set of result windows you created so that you can review or re-use them later. 4. Generating reports You prepare printed and online reports for evaluation and presentation. While this sequence represents the most linear approach to reviewing results, you may find that you move back and forth through these steps as you refine the result views you have set up. Tip: You can perform many operations in the Results user interface against both single and multiple windows. For example, you can change backgrounds for multiple windows, rotate multiple result windows, and so forth. To select a single result window, move your cursor to the window and leftclick it. Mechanica highlights the window border in yellow. To select multiple result windows, press the SHIFT key and left-click each of the windows you want. If you select multiple result windows, Mechanica deactivates certain commands, such as Edit>Result Window and Export>VRML.
523
The Results user interface also includes a toolbar whose buttons give you fast access to the most frequently used commands on the menus just discussed.
524
IndexReviewing Results
Edit Lets you edit a result window definition. Copy Lets you copy result window definitions. Delete Deletes the selected result windows. Display Lets you pick which result windows you want to display. Hide Hides the selected result windows. Repaint Repaints all currently displayed result windows. Zoom In Zooms in on the model in the selected result window. Zoom Out Zooms out from the model in the selected result window. Refit Refits the model in the selected result window. Default Returns the model to the default view. Saved Views Repositions your model to the orientation of the saved view that you select from the list. Start Animation Starts an animation of the model in the selected result window. Stop Animation Stops an animation. Step Animation Backward Steps backward through an animation frame by frame. Step Animation Forward Steps forward through an animation frame by frame. Animation Playback Speed Control Speeds up or slows down all currently displayed animations.
525
Each of these commands clears the current contents of the Results user interface. When you select any of these commands, Mechanica prompts you to save any result windows currently defined for the results session. If you want to save the result windows, reply Yes. Mechanica displays the Save Results Window dialog box. Use this dialog box to create a new .rwd file or save the result windows to an existing .rwd file.
526
IndexReviewing Results
You hide windows by clicking the Hide button. You can hide a single window or multiple windows. You will find this particularly handy as you prepare to generate reports. You can also make a selected result window occupy the entire Result user interface work area through the Windows>Full Screen command. This command expands the current window to occupy the work area. Control result window appearance You control how result windows appear on-screen through commands on the View and Format menus. You can also perform some of these activities through toolbar buttons.
When you set up your result windows as you want, you can begin to evaluate and compare results. Once you have studied your result windows, you may also want to alter, copy, or delete some of them.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Result Window To Display a Result Window
load sets, time steps, and load steps if these are part of the analysis or design study you select. Display Type Select the type of display for your result window. Quantity tab Select the quantity for your result window. After you select a quantity from the first option menu, you may see additional option menus or buttons you can use to complete selecting a quantity. Display Options tab Select various options for displaying your results. The available options depend on the display type you choose. Display Location tab Select specific locations on your model to display in the results window.
The Result Window Definition dialog box provides a top-down approach to defining the result window. As you make selections at the top of the dialog box, different choices become active or inactive as you move down from one area to another area. The type of design study you select affects the available display types and quantities that are available. When you select a display type, that determines the quantities and display options that are available. The dialog box lets you select only valid combinations. For strategies on choosing among the various result window types, see Reviewing the Results. You can display result windows using these methods: If you are still working with the Result Window Definition dialog box, click the OK And Show button. If you have finished defining results and are working in the Results user interface, click the Display button on the toolbar and select result windows from the Display Result Window dialog box. As an alternative, you can use View>Display.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Result Window
528
IndexReviewing Results
Analysis Select an analysis that is part of the design study you select. Step/Combination Select a subset of design study results.
Step/Combination Selection
The step/combination selection table displays different columns depending on the design study you select. You can select one or more subsets to include in the result display. If there is only one subset for a design study, the subset is selected by default and you cannot clear it. The possible subsets in the step/combination selection table are: Load Set/Mode When you select a static, modal, or steady-state thermal design study, the table lists the load sets or modes used in the study. You can select one or more load set/mode combinations and provide a scaling factor for each load set/mode combination you select. The default scaling factor is 1.0. Note that there are special considerations if you use scaling with centrifugal loads. Time/Frequency/Load Step When you select a static large deformation, dynamic frequency, dynamic time, or transient thermal analysis, the table lists the time, frequency, or load steps present in the design study. These are the user-defined steps you defined when you created the analysis. You can select one step from the list. Mode (Buckling/Prestress Modal) When you select a buckling or prestress modal design study, the table lists the mode and buckling load factor present in the design study. You can select one mode or buckling load factor from the list.
You can query linearized stresses for your model by selecting Model as the display type, Stress as the quantity, and Linearized as the component. When the result window displays, select Linearized Stress Query from the Info menu.
Quantity Tab
Use the Quantity tab on the Result Window Definition dialog box to select a quantity for your result window display. The choices that appear on the Quantity tab depend on the design study and display type you select. The items that are available change immediately if you change the design study or display type. These are the items that can appear on the Quantity tab: Quantity Select the quantity you want to display in the result window. The menu displays only the quantities that are valid for the design study and display type you choose. The quantity you select determines which of the remaining items appears on the Quantity tab. Secondary Quantity Option Menu Select a secondary quantity to display in the result window. This item appears if you select Fatigue, Reaction, Shell Resultant, or Beam Resultant from the Quantity option menu. Component Select the component you want to display in the result window. The menu displays only components that are valid for the quantity you select from the Quantity menu, and only appears for certain quantities. Relative To Select the reference for a directional component. This item appears only if you select a directional component. Graph Location Select the type of location you want to use for your graph results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
The following additional items are available depending on the quantity you select and whether beams or shells are present in the model. These items do not appear in FEM mode. Include Contribution from Beams Select the beam contributions to include in the result window definition. This area appears only if there are beams in the model. Include Contribution from Shells Select the shell contributions to include in the result window definition. This area appears only if there are shells in the model.
In addition to using the Quantity tab to define your basic result quantity, you use the Display Options tab and Display Location tab to further refine the result window display.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Result Window
530
IndexReviewing Results
If you select a display type and then select a design study or quantity that is not compatible with that display type, Mechanica removes the display type from the option menu and displays only the valid display types for that design study and quantity combination.
Location Selector Arrow Use the selector arrow to select the specific entity on your model that you want to display in the results window. You can select more than one entity. If you accept the default All, the selector arrow is unavailable.
531
Mechanica displays the Display Result Window dialog box. 2. If you want to display one or more result windows in the result window list, select the desired result windows. Mechanica highlights each selection you make. 3. If you want to display all result windows in the list, click Tip: If you need to deselect all result windows, click 4. Click OK. 532 (Select All). (Deselect All).
IndexReviewing Results
See Also
Procedure: To Load a Result Window
Use the Preview button at any time to apply any changes you have made without closing the dialog box.
See Also
Procedures: To Annotate a Result Window To Customize Annotation Styles
533
Evaluating Results
The way you evaluate results depends on the type of result window you are working with. For example, if you are examining fringe plots, you are likely to be interested in the location of the quantity maximum, the value of the quantity at specific locations, how one quantity compares with another, and so forth. If you are looking at animations, you are likely to be interested in how the model deforms, the pattern of deformation at different steps, how behavior in one mode compares with behavior in another, and so forth. Here is an overview of methods and tools you can use to evaluate the different types of Mechanica results: Fringe, contour, and vector plots You perform three basic activities depending on how deeply you need to examine the model for the result quantity: o Adjust the legend, perform comparisons with other result windows, and, if necessary, shade or unshade your model. o Probe your model for specific information like maximum and minimum locations or how the interior of your model responded during analysis. o In FEM mode, display information about the element ID's, node ID's, and values of the result quantity at each node. Graphs You perform two basic activities depending on how much detail you need on the quantity: o Adjust the graph, perform comparisons with other result windows. o Probe the graph to obtain more exact values for specific segments of the graph or points on the graph. Animations You can start, stop, and control stepping and speed for the animation. You can also perform comparisons with the original model shape as well as with other animations.
Once you have evaluated your results, you should save the result definitions for later use. At this point, you can also generate reports on your results. After you have studied your result windows, you may also find that you want to alter, copy, or delete some of them.
534
IndexReviewing Results
Before executing this command, Mechanica checks to see if any you have changed any of the result windows in the current session. If so, the software asks you whether you want to save the result windows. If you respond Yes, the software executes a Save command before starting the new result session. Insert>Results Window from File Use to load existing result windows into the current session and add them to the list of windows you can view. This command is handy when you want to preserve the result windows you created during the current session, but also want to see the windows saved from an earlier session. Mechanica ensures that you do not overwrite current result windows by giving you the opportunity to rename any result windows that have duplicate names. When you select either of these commands, a dialog box appears. Select the name of the file you want to load or enter it without the .rwd extension Mechanica gave the file.
See Also
Procedure: To Load a Result Window
535
Saving Results
After you create one or more result windows, you can save these windows to a file for later use. Mechanica saves result windows in .rwd files. Saving result windows makes it easier to restore and add to your work. You can also use result windows as templates for developing result windows for multiple models. Use one of these commands on the File menu to save your result definitions: Save Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated views in a single .rwd file. If you defined the set of result windows in the current session and this is the first time you have saved them, Mechanica saves the windows to a file named Untitled.rwd. If the result windows displayed were saved to a named .rwd file in the past, Mechanica saves them to the named file. Save As Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated views as a named .rwd file. When you click Save As, Mechanica displays the Save Result Windows dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory and name the file. Do not include the .rwd extension in the file name you enterMechanica appends this automatically. When you use Save As to create a named .rwd file, the name of the .rwd file appears in the Results user interface title bar whenever you load the named .rwd file using Insert>Results Window From File as the first activity in your results session. Save As Template Use to save the current result window definition and some of the result window attributes as a named template as a .rwt file. When you click Save As Template, Mechanica displays the Save Results Template dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory and name the file. Do not include the .rwt extension in the file name you enterMechanica appends this automatically. You can optionally store the legend values, model orientation, annotations, and deformed scale for the result window as part of the template. Once you create a result window definition as a template, you can create other result windows from the template by selecting the Insert>Results Window From Template command. Regardless of which approach you use, be aware that Mechanica includes paths for the study directories referenced by the result windows in the .rwd file. Mechanica uses an absolute path when it writes this information to the .rwd file, but you can instruct Mechanica to use a relative path instead through the sim_pp_path_absolute config.pro option. You can retrieve a set of saved windows using one of the load commands.
536
IndexReviewing Results
See Also
Procedures: To Save a Result Window To Load a Result Window
Generating Reports
Once you define and display result windows, you can generate reports that capture the vital points of your analyses and design studies. Mechanica provides you with the ability to print reports in a wide variety of print formats, to output reports as HTML, and to generate VRML reports. For graphs, you can generate specialized graph reports so you can study the graph sampling points in depth. Use these commands located on the File menu to generate reports: Print Use to print a selected result window to a printer or to a file. Export Use to generate each of the following report types, selectable from the associated submenu: o Image Use to generate printed images. This command is identical to File>Print. o Direct VRML Use to export a single fringe plot at a time in VRML format. o HTML Report Use to export result windows to an HTML file for web viewing. o Graph Report Use to export a graph report file for a single, selected graph. The output file is a text file. o Excel Use to export a single graph for viewing in Microsoft Excel. The output file is a .xls file. o MPEG Use to export a single animated result window to an MPEG file.
When preparing to generate reports, you may want to pay particular attention to the aesthetics of the result windows you are printing or exporting. You should also consider formatting the result windows to emphasize the aspects of the result you want to focus on when you share the information with others. For example, blended or dark background colors may make it difficult to read some of the information, depending on the quality of your printer. You may want to eliminate excess text from the result window by using Format>Result Window and turning off labels. You may want to work with the Format Legend dialog box to ensure that you are using the best color scale to reflect what takes place in a fringe plot. You can highlight parts of your results and add information using annotations.
537
To perform these activities, you should become familiar with how to use the postprocessor. To learn about entering and working with the postprocessor, see Using the Postprocessor.
538
IndexReviewing Results
Once you enter the postprocessor, Mechanica displays the Results user interface that overlays the Pro/ENGINEER work area and menu bar. You can use the Results user interface to view graphical representations of analysis results by creating and manipulating result windows. Another useful tool is the RESULTS menu that appears as an extension of the menu manager to the right of the work area. The menu does not open if you select the Analysis>Results command and are reading results from the NASTRAN .xdb file. On the RESULTS menu you can: use the Parameters command to work with result parameters use the Info command to obtain statistical information use the Reports command to review hard point reports use the Visualize command to reopen the Results user interface if you closed it earlier
As a prerequisite for loading NASTRAN results, you need to perform analyses for your FEM model using the MSC/NASTRAN solver. When you run the solver, it creates a NASTRAN results file with an .xdb extension and stores it in the current directory. When you click the Results command, it opens the Results user interface and displays a file selection dialog box, which you use to specify the .xdb file you want to load. Once you specify the NASTRAN .xdb file, the postprocessor can read information about nodes, elements, and their connectivity, as well as results from the file. Also, the postprocessor looks for a FEM mesh and results .frd file associated with the current model in session and selected .xdb file. The postprocessor uses the .frd file to read mesh data only. If you have solved your model offline, the .frd file may not be present in your current directory, but you can still view results from the .xdb file. Depending on whether the .frd file is present or not, Mechanica takes one of these actions: If the .frd file is present, Mechanica reads the mesh data from the .frd file into memory and displays a mesh in the Pro/ENGINEER window. You can have
539
access to meshed geometric entities and select them as needed. Also, you can view results by layers and display saved views. If the .frd file is not present, Mechanica continues to display the current model and you have no access to meshed geometry. Graph results, layers, or saved views become unavailable.
When defining a result window, you can select from a variety of display types, quantities, and locations. The exact options and combinations available depend on the type of model and the analysis type you select when you define your analysis. Also, you can use only certain combinations of quantities and displays. For more information on defining your results window, see Result Window Definition Dialog Box.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Result Window
540
IndexReviewing Results
Native mode Use the Analysis>Results command to open the Results user interface. FEM mode Use the File>Open FEM Results command to open the .frd file that contains the FEM mesh and analysis results for the model on your screen. If you have performed an analysis of your model using the MSC/NASTRAN solver, in addition to being able to view FEM mesh and analysis results, you can also have a direct access to a NASTRAN results .xdb file. For information on different ways of loading results, see Using the Postprocessor in FEM Mode.
The Results user interface incorporates a menu bar, toolbar, a set of basic functions, and a built-in workflow designed to facilitate results viewing. This workflow enables you to set up a variety of result views, evaluate individual results, and control scaling and visualization of multiple results so that you can easily compare one quantity of interest with another. Here is a step-by-step overview of what we suggest as your workflow: 1. Viewing results You define result windows, display and hide them, and control how they appear on-screen and in your reports. 2. Evaluating results You study the result windows you defined, probe specific areas of your model, and compare your findings for one model, design study, result quantity, or set of conditions with your findings for another. 3. Saving result windows You save the set of result windows you created so that you can review or re-use them later. 4. Generating reports You prepare printed and online reports for evaluation and presentation. While this sequence represents the most linear approach to reviewing results, you may find that you move back and forth through these steps as you refine the result views you have set up.
Tip: You can perform many operations in the Results user interface against both single and multiple windows. For example, you can change backgrounds for multiple windows, rotate multiple result windows, and so forth. To select a single result window, move your cursor to the window and left-click it. Mechanica highlights the window border in yellow. To select multiple result windows, press the SHIFT key and left-click each of the windows you want. If you select multiple result windows, Mechanica deactivates certain commands, such as Edit>Result Window and Export>VRML.
Edit menu Provides commands that modify result definitions, legends, cutting and capping planes, and annotations. View menu Provides commands that control such aspects of results viewing as model position, shading, and overlays. You can also use this menu to display or hide result windows, start and stop animations, change or save the orientation of your model, and control the visual characteristics of result windows. Insert menu Provides commands that define result windows, cutting planes, capping planes, and annotations. Info menu Provides commands that probe your model for specific items of interest such as quantity maximums and minimums, exact quantities at model locations you select, and so forth. Also provides commands to display node IDs, element IDs, and node result values in FEM mode. Format menu Provides commands that format result window values, color spectrums, and scales. Utilities menu Provides commands that refine your results and let you perform result comparisons against the same scale. Window menu Provides commands that let you manipulate your result windows within the Results user interface.
The Results user interface also includes a toolbar whose buttons give you fast access to the most frequently used commands on the menus just discussed.
542
IndexReviewing Results
Hide Hides the selected result windows. Repaint Repaints all currently displayed result windows. Zoom In Zooms in on the model in the selected result window. Zoom Out Zooms out from the model in the selected result window. Refit Refits the model in the selected result window. Default Returns the model to the default view. Saved Views Repositions your model to the orientation of the saved view that you select from the list. Start Animation Starts an animation of the model in the selected result window. Stop Animation Stops an animation. Step Animation Backward Steps backward through an animation frame by frame. Step Animation Forward Steps forward through an animation frame by frame. Animation Playback Speed Control Speeds up or slows down all currently displayed animations.
Each of these commands clears the current contents of the Results user interface. When you select any of these commands, Mechanica prompts you to save any result windows currently defined for the results session. If you want to save the result windows, reply Yes. Mechanica displays the Save Results Window dialog box. Use this dialog box to create a new .rwd file or save the result windows to an existing .rwd file.
543
Viewing Results
To view results, you perform three activitiesdefine result windows, display result windows, and control the general appearance of the result windows you define. The Results user interface features easy, direct methods of defining result windows as well as a variety of view controls. Here is an overview of the method you use to view results: Define result windows You define result windows through the Insert>Result Window command or by clicking the Insert button on the toolbar. Mechanica opens the Result Window Definition dialog box. Use the dialog box to select the design studies, display types, quantities, and locations you are interested in. If you want to add or compare the result windows you define to an existing set of result window definitions, use the Insert>Result Window From File command in concert with Insert>Result Definition. You may find that you can define result windows more quickly by copying them. Display and hide result windows You display result windows through the View>Display command or by clicking the Display button on the toolbar. When you select this command, the Display Result Window dialog box appears, enabling you to select and deselect various result windows to display. You hide windows by clicking the Hide button. You can hide a single window or multiple windows. You will find this particularly handy as you prepare to generate reports. You can also make a selected result window occupy the entire Result user interface work area through the Windows>Full Screen command. This command expands the current window to occupy the work area. Control result window appearance You control how result windows appear on-screen through commands on the View and Format menus. You can also perform some of these activities through toolbar buttons.
When you set up your result windows as you want, you can begin to evaluate and compare results. Once you have studied your result windows, you may also want to alter, copy, or delete some of them.
See Also
Procedures: To Define a Result Window To Display a Result Window
544
IndexReviewing Results
The Result Window Definition dialog box provides a top-down approach to defining the result window. As you make selections at the top of the dialog box, different choices become active or inactive as you move down from one area to another area. The type of design study you select affects the available display types and quantities that are available. When you select a display type, that determines the quantities and display options that are available. The dialog box lets you select only valid combinations. For strategies on choosing among the various result window types, see Reviewing the Results. You can display result windows using these methods:
545
If you are still working with the Result Window Definition dialog box, click the OK And Show button. If you have finished defining results and are working in the Results user interface, click the Display button on the toolbar and select result windows from the Display Result Window dialog box. As an alternative, you can use View>Display.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Result Window
Step/Combination Selection
The step/combination selection table displays different columns depending on the design study you select. You can select one or more subsets to include in the result display. If there is only one subset for a design study, the subset is selected by default and you cannot clear it. The possible subsets in the step/combination selection table are: Load Set/Mode When you select a static, modal, or steady-state thermal design study, the table lists the load sets or modes used in the study. You can select one or more load set/mode combinations and provide a scaling factor for each load set/mode combination you select. The default scaling factor is 1.0. Note that there are special considerations if you use scaling with centrifugal loads. Time/Frequency/Load Step When you select a static large deformation, dynamic frequency, dynamic time, or transient thermal analysis, the table lists the time, frequency, or load steps present in the design study. These are the user-defined steps you defined when you created the analysis. You can select one step from the list.
546
IndexReviewing Results
Mode (Buckling/Prestress Modal) When you select a buckling or prestress modal design study, the table lists the mode and buckling load factor present in the design study. You can select one mode or buckling load factor from the list.
Quantity Tab
Use the Quantity tab on the Result Window Definition dialog box to select a quantity for your result window display. The choices that appear on the Quantity tab depend on the design study and display type you select. The items that are available change immediately if you change the design study or display type. These are the items that can appear on the Quantity tab: Quantity Select the quantity you want to display in the result window. The menu displays only the quantities that are valid for the design study and display type you choose. The quantity you select determines which of the remaining items appears on the Quantity tab. Secondary Quantity Option Menu Select a secondary quantity to display in the result window. This item appears if you select Fatigue, Reaction, Shell Resultant, or Beam Resultant from the Quantity option menu.
547
Component Select the component you want to display in the result window. The menu displays only components that are valid for the quantity you select from the Quantity menu, and only appears for certain quantities. Relative To Select the reference for a directional component. This item appears only if you select a directional component. Graph Location Select the type of location you want to use for your graph results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
The following additional items are available depending on the quantity you select and whether beams or shells are present in the model. These items do not appear in FEM mode. Include Contribution from Beams Select the beam contributions to include in the result window definition. This area appears only if there are beams in the model. Include Contribution from Shells Select the shell contributions to include in the result window definition. This area appears only if there are shells in the model.
In addition to using the Quantity tab to define your basic result quantity, you use the Display Options tab and Display Location tab to further refine the result window display.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Result Window
If you select a display type and then select a design study or quantity that is not compatible with that display type, Mechanica removes the display type from the option menu and displays only the valid display types for that design study and quantity combination.
548
IndexReviewing Results
Location Selector Arrow Use the selector arrow to select the specific entity on your model that you want to display in the results window. You can select more than one entity. If you accept the default All, the selector arrow is unavailable.
o Model 8. Select a quantity from the Quantity option menu on the Quantity tab. 9. Select the Display Options tab and choose among the display options to determine the appearance and behavior of your model in the result window. 10. Select the Display Location tab and choose a location from the option menu. If you want to use all entities of a certain location type, select the Use All check box. To select a single entity, click the selector arrow. 11. To display the result window, click OK And Show. To close the dialog box without displaying the result window, click OK.
Mechanica displays the Display Result Window dialog box. 2. If you want to display one or more result windows in the result window list, select the desired result windows. Mechanica highlights each selection you make. 3. If you want to display all result windows in the list, click Tip: If you need to deselect all result windows, click 4. Click OK. (Select All). (Deselect All).
See Also
Procedure: To Load a Result Window
550
IndexReviewing Results
Use the Preview button at any time to apply any changes you have made without closing the dialog box.
See Also
Procedures: To Annotate a Result Window To Customize Annotation Styles
Evaluating Results
The way you evaluate results depends on the type of result window you are working with. For example, if you are examining fringe plots, you are likely to be interested in the location of the quantity maximum, the value of the quantity at specific locations, how one quantity compares with another, and so forth. If you are looking at animations, you are likely to be interested in how the model deforms, the pattern of deformation at different steps, how behavior in one mode compares with behavior in another, and so forth. 551
Here is an overview of methods and tools you can use to evaluate the different types of Mechanica results: Fringe, contour, and vector plots You perform three basic activities depending on how deeply you need to examine the model for the result quantity: o Adjust the legend, perform comparisons with other result windows, and, if necessary, shade or unshade your model. o Probe your model for specific information like maximum and minimum locations or how the interior of your model responded during analysis. o In FEM mode, display information about the element ID's, node ID's, and values of the result quantity at each node. Graphs You perform two basic activities depending on how much detail you need on the quantity: o Adjust the graph, perform comparisons with other result windows. o Probe the graph to obtain more exact values for specific segments of the graph or points on the graph. Animations You can start, stop, and control stepping and speed for the animation. You can also perform comparisons with the original model shape as well as with other animations.
Once you have evaluated your results, you should save the result definitions for later use. At this point, you can also generate reports on your results. After you have studied your result windows, you may also find that you want to alter, copy, or delete some of them.
Saving Results
After you create one or more result windows, you can save these windows to a file for later use. Mechanica saves result windows in .rwd files. Saving result windows makes it easier to restore and add to your work. You can also use result windows as templates for developing result windows for multiple models. Use one of these commands on the File menu to save your result definitions: Save Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated views in a single .rwd file. If you defined the set of result windows in the current session and this is the first time you have saved them, Mechanica saves the windows to a file named Untitled.rwd. If the result windows displayed were saved to a named .rwd file in the past, Mechanica saves them to the named file. Save As Use to save the current set of result definitions and associated views as a named .rwd file. When you click Save As, Mechanica displays the Save Result Windows dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory and name the file. Do not include the .rwd extension in the file name you enterMechanica appends this automatically. When you use Save As to create a named .rwd file, the name of the .rwd file appears in the Results user interface title bar whenever you load the named
552
IndexReviewing Results
.rwd file using Insert>Results Window From File as the first activity in your results session. Save As Template Use to save the current result window definition and some of the result window attributes as a named template as a .rwt file. When you click Save As Template, Mechanica displays the Save Results Template dialog box. Use this dialog box to choose a directory and name the file. Do not include the .rwt extension in the file name you enterMechanica appends this automatically. You can optionally store the legend values, model orientation, annotations, and deformed scale for the result window as part of the template. Once you create a result window definition as a template, you can create other result windows from the template by selecting the Insert>Results Window From Template command. Regardless of which approach you use, be aware that Mechanica includes paths for the study directories referenced by the result windows in the .rwd file. Mechanica uses an absolute path when it writes this information to the .rwd file, but you can instruct Mechanica to use a relative path instead through the sim_pp_path_absolute config.pro option. You can retrieve a set of saved windows using one of the load commands.
See Also
Procedures: To Save a Result Window To Load a Result Window
Generating Reports
Once you define and display result windows, you can generate reports that capture the vital points of your analyses and design studies. Mechanica provides you with the ability to print reports in a wide variety of print formats, to output reports as HTML, and to generate VRML reports. For graphs, you can generate specialized graph reports so you can study the graph sampling points in depth. Use these commands located on the File menu to generate reports: Print Use to print a selected result window to a printer or to a file. Export Use to generate each of the following report types, selectable from the associated submenu: o Image Use to generate printed images. This command is identical to File>Print. o Direct VRML Use to export a single fringe plot at a time in VRML format. o HTML Report Use to export result windows to an HTML file for web viewing. 553
o o o
Graph Report Use to export a graph report file for a single, selected graph. The output file is a text file. Excel Use to export a single graph for viewing in Microsoft Excel. The output file is a .xls file. MPEG Use to export a single animated result window to an MPEG file.
When preparing to generate reports, you may want to pay particular attention to the aesthetics of the result windows you are printing or exporting. You should also consider formatting the result windows to emphasize the aspects of the result you want to focus on when you share the information with others. For example, blended or dark background colors may make it difficult to read some of the information, depending on the quality of your printer. You may want to eliminate excess text from the result window by using Format>Result Window and turning off labels. You may want to work with the Format Legend dialog box to ensure that you are using the best color scale to reflect what takes place in a fringe plot. You can highlight parts of your results and add information using annotations.
See Also
554
IndexReviewing Results
Procedures:
To Create Parameters
You can create parameters for your results provided you obtain your results from an .frd file. To obtain results from an .frd file, you must use the File>Open FEM Results command or run a FEM solver online and look at the results available immediately after the run completes. You cannot create parameters if you select Analysis>Results instead of using one of these two methods. 1. Select File>Open FEM Results and select the result file for the current model. As an alternative, perform an online FEM solver run.
Mechanica displays the RESULTS menu.
2. Select Parameters>Define Param from the RESULTS menu. The Define Parameter dialog box appears. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter a name for the parameter in the Name window. Select the type of parameter from the Type option menu. Select the analysis from the Analysis list. If you selected a modal analysis, select the desired modes from the Mode list. 7. Select the desired quantity from the Result option menu. 8. Select the desired component from the Components option menu. 9. If the model includes shell elements, select the shell side for the parameter from the Shell Side options. 10. From the Reference menu, select either the entire model or specific geometric entities. You can choose different entity types for the same parameter. Be aware that Mechanica bases the parameter on the selected geometry only. 11. Select the reference coordinate system from the Coord System option menu and indicate the coordinate system type. 12. Click Apply. Mechanica creates the parameter.
555
the results available immediately after the run completes. You cannot review statistics if you select Analysis>Results instead of using one of these two methods. Mechanica can output the following statistics from the analysis results: applied analyses type of resultquantities such as von Mises stress, heat flux, strain energy, for example side of the shell elements the analysis results data were calculated fromtop, bottom, average of both, or both maximum value of the result on the model minimum value of the result on the model average value of the result on the model variance of the result on the model location of result maximum on the model location of result minimum on the model
Mechanica can generate these statistics for the entire model or for selected parts, surfaces, edges, vertices, or hard points. For edges, Mechanica provides the additional option of generating a graph of values measured along the edges. Mechanica also supports mid-node data processing for parabolic elements. You specify the statistics you want using the Postprocessing Info dialog box. You can request that Mechanica output analysis statistics to an information window on your screen, to a readable ASCII text file, or to both the screen and a file.
See Also
References: Output of Statistics and Reports for Structural or Modal Analyses Output of Statistics and Reports for Thermal Analyses
556
IndexReviewing Results
3. Select the analysis from the Analysis list. 4. If you selected a modal analysis, select the desired modes from the Mode list. 5. Select the desired Structure or Thermal quantity from the Result option menu. 6. Select the desired component from the Components option menu. 7. If the model includes shell elements, select the shell side for the statistics from the Shell Side options. 8. From the Reference menu, select either the entire model or specific geometric entities. You can choose different entity types for the same statistical report. Mechanica includes analysis statistics on the selected geometry only. 9. Select the reference coordinate system from the Coord System option menu and indicate the type. 10. Select the display or output method as follows: o If you want to display the statistics in an information window on your screen, select Screen. o If you want to output the statistics to a file, select File and type a file name in the associated text box. o If you want both a displayed version and printable output, select Both and type a file name for the printable output in the associated text box. 11. Click the Statistics button. If you selected Screen or Both as an output method, an information window appears displaying the analysis statistics. 12. Click Done. Mechanica closes the dialog box.
557
Mechanica reports values for the selected quantity in all three translational and rotational directions at each of the hard points you select. Hard point reports are useful for recording the exact analysis data for the quantity you choose across all the hard points in your model. You specify the statistics you want using the Postprocessing Report dialog box. You can request that Mechanica output hard point reports to an information window on your screen, to a readable ASCII text file, or to both the screen and a file.
See Also
References: Output of Statistics and Reports for Structural or Modal Analyses Output of Statistics and Reports for Thermal Analyses
558
IndexReviewing Results
1. Select File>Open FEM Results and select the result file for the current model. As an alternative, perform an online FEM solver run.
Mechanica displays the RESULTS menu.
3. Select the analysis from the Analysis list. 4. If you selected a modal analysis, select the desired modes from the Mode list. 5. Select the desired quantity from the Result option menu. 6. If the model includes shell elements, select the shell side for the report from the Shell Side options. 7. From the Reference menu, select either the entire model or specific hard points. 8. Select the reference coordinate system from the Coord System option menu and indicate the type. 9. Select the display or output method as follows: o If you want to display the report in an information window on your screen, select Screen. o If you want to output the report to a file, select File and type a file name in the associated text box. o If you want both a displayed version and printable output, select Both and type a file name for the printable output in the associated text box. 10. Click the Report button. If you selected Screen or Both as an output method, an information window appears displaying the hard point report. 11. Click Done. Mechanica closes the dialog box.
559
Mechanica checks whether you have fixed surface normals at certain points in the modeling process.
560
IndexCommon Facilities
The top of a surface or shell is always in the normal direction. The surface or shell displayed on the screen represents the midsurface of the element. You can view results for stress quantities at the top or bottom of a surface or shell.
Shell Normals
Use the Surfaces selector arrow on the Shell Definition dialog box to display the normal direction for each shell and to change the direction for one or more shells. Because Mechanica sets the normal direction separately for each shell when you create it, the direction of the normals for adjoining shells may end up in opposite or inconsistent directions.
561
See Normal Direction for Surfaces and Shells for information on how Mechanica creates and uses normal directions. You can fix or flip the shell normals if your shell is not part of a volume, or part of a shell pair in a midsurface compressed model. When you use the Surfaces selector arrow to select the shell on your model, a magenta arrow appears displaying the normal direction. Do one of the following to fix or flip the normal direction: Select the shell, and then select the shell again to flip the direction of the arrow that shows the normal direction. On the SIM SELECT menu, select Fix Normals or Flip Normals.
Mechanica checks if you have fixed normals at certain points in the modeling process. To reverse the normal direction of a compressed midsurface, use the MODIFY PAIR Menu.
Working with Functions Functions for Native Mode Functions Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create a new function or to copy, review, or delete a selected function. The type of function you can define depends upon the area of Mechanica where you are working. If you are working in FEM mode, see Functions Dialog Box for FEM Mode. The dialog box lists all functions of the specified type in your model. The dialog box also contains the following items: New Click this button to create a function. The Function Definition dialog box appears. There is no limit to the number of functions you can create for a given model. Copy Click this button to copy the function you select from the list. The Copy Function dialog box appears, displaying the name of the selected function. Use the default or enter a name for the copy, then click OK. Mechanica adds the new name to the list. You cannot copy a system function. Edit Click this button to edit or review the function you select. The Function Definition dialog box appears, containing the values you entered for the selected function. You cannot review a system function. Delete Click this button to delete the currently selected function. You cannot delete a system function.
If a description was entered for a selected function, it appears in the Description area below the list of functions. 562
IndexCommon Facilities
Definition Use this area to define your function using a symbolic expression or table data. Available function components Click this button to display the Symbolic Options dialog box. Review Click this button to display the Graph Function dialog box. You can use this form to define the independent variables and values for your selected function.
See Also
Procedure: Examples: To Create a Function Function of Coordinates Modeling Specialized Loads with a Cylindrical Coordinate System
563
constants, operators, and functions, which you can also find on the Symbolic Options dialog box.
The expression cannot include another function or refer to the same function. Following is an example of a function: if (time<10, sin (pi*time/5), 0) For all functions, if you click the independent variable in the Variables box and the other symbols in their respective boxes, Mechanica places them in the Symbolic entry box. You can also type in the expression, using the Valid Symbols table as a guide. Note: For material properties, the only valid independent variable is temperature.
Independent Variables
The Variables box displays the name of the independent variable or variables available for the type of function you are defining. You can use these independent variables as part of the expression that defines the function.
Valid Symbols
You can use the following symbols when defining a symbolic function:
Functions sin(x), cos(x), tan(x) asin(x) acos(x) atan(x) atan2(y,x) ln(x) log(x) abs(x) sqrt(x) min(x,y) Definitions standard trigonometric functions arc sine in range /2 to arc cosine in range 0 to arc tangent in range /2 to /2 /2
arc tangent of y/x in range to natural (base e) logarithm base 10 logarithm absolute value. If x>0 returns x, otherwise x. square root returns the minimum of x and y. If x<y returns x, otherwise y.
564
IndexCommon Facilities
max(x,y) sign(x,y)
returns the maximum of x and y. If x>y, returns x, otherwise y. sign transfer of y to x. If y<0 returns abs(x), otherwise abs(x). remainder function, that is xint(x/y)*y where int() means "integer part of". The sign of the result is always the same as the sign of x. "if" test, or switching function. If expression c (the "condition") returns non-zero (true) then the if function returns x, otherwise (if c=0.0) it returns y. Read like this: if c then x else y. limits x to be between bounds lo and hi. If x<lo returns lo, if x>hi returns hi, otherwise, returns x. lo must be <hi. provides a "dead zone" when x is between lo and hi. If x<lo returns xlo, if x>hi, returns xhi, otherwise returns 0. "ceiling" function, rounds toward positive infinity rounds toward negative infinity "nearness" test. Returns 1.0 (true) if x is within delta of y. If abs(xy)<delta returns 1.0, otherwise returns 0.0.
mod(x,y)
if(c,x,y)
bound(x,lo,hi)
dead(x,lo,hi)
Constants:
pi e Arithmetic Operators:
= 3.14159... = 2.71828...
+ * / ^
Logical Operators (these operators return 1.0 for true, 0.0 for false):
! ==
565
not equal less than greater than less than or equal to greater than or equal to logical and logical or
( )
parentheses, grouping
You can use these buttons with the table: Add Row adds up to 50 rows Delete removes all rows you indicated Clear All clears all values from both columns
566
IndexCommon Facilities
Interpolation Method
Use this option to select the interpolation method for each variable. The first option menu specifies a method for the independent variable, and the second option menu for the dependent variable. Each option menu contains these two options: Linear Mechanica linearly interpolates the variable between values. Log Mechanica linearly interpolates the log of the variable between values.
To Create a Function
Use this procedure to create a function in Mechanica. This procedure assumes you are in the Function Definition dialog box. 1. Use the default or enter a function name. 2. Enter a description of the function. This step is optional. 3. Use the default or select a coordinate system. (This option is not available for time-dependent functions.) 4. Select the type of function you want to createSymbolic or Table.
567
If a description exists for a selected function, it appears in the Description area below the list of functions.
568
IndexCommon Facilities
For all functions, if you click the independent variable in the Variables box and the other symbols in their respective boxes, Mechanica places them in the Symbolic entry box. You can also type in the expression, using the Valid Symbols table as a guide.
See Also
Procedure: Examples: To Create a Function (FEM mode) Function of Coordinates Modeling Specialized Loads with a Cylindrical Coordinate System
Independent Variables
The Variables box displays the name of the independent variable or variables available for the type of function you are defining. You can use these independent variables as part of the expression that defines the function.
"ceiling" function, rounds toward positive infinity standard trigonometric function (the argument x is in radians) rounds toward negative infinity natural (base e) logarithm base 10 logarithm standard trigonometric function (the argument x is in radians) square root standard trigonometric function (the argument x is in radians)
569
= 3.14159...
Logical Operators (these operators return 1.0 for true, 0.0 for false): ! == != < > <= >= & | Grouping Operators: ( ) parentheses, grouping unary "not" equal not equal less than greater than less than or equal to greater than or equal to logical and logical or
570
IndexCommon Facilities
571
General Limitations
Following is a list of general limitations: If your model is any of the following, you cannot enter Mechanica: o A part or assembly in a geometry or graphics simplified representation. o An assembly simplified representation that contains one or more components in geometry or graphics simplified representations.
For each of these model types, the Applications>Mechanica command is inactive. To learn more about simplified representations, see the Assembly and Welding functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
If you use the Set Working Directory command on the Pro/ENGINEER File menu to change directories during a Mechanica session, be aware that Mechanica may still refer to the original directory for certain operations. For example, assume you have a study results directory named study in two different directoriesa and b. If you were working in directory a and decided you wanted to review the study results in directory b, you would normally use the Set Working Directory command to switch directories. However, although Mechanica switches directories, it still sees the study results directory that resides in directory a, and these would be the results the software would display unless you specifically select directory b when defining your result windows.
572
IndexAdditional Information
573
A
analysis
An examination of your model through which Mechanica determines how the model behaves under specified conditions. You run an analysis as part of a standard or other design study. Structure calculates your model's response to a set of loads and constraints. See also these analysis types: buckling, contact, dynamic frequency response, dynamic random response, dynamic shock response, dynamic time response, modal, prestress modal, prestress static, and static. Thermal calculates your model's response to a set of heat loads that are subject to specified prescribed temperatures and/or convection conditions. See also steady-state thermal.
animation A dynamic display of mode shapes, static displacement results, a variety of fringed results, and shape changes for a sensitivity or optimization study in both products.
associativity How any entity (such as geometry, load, boundary condition) in Mechanica relates to any other entity. If one entity is related to a second entity, the definition of the first entity depends on the definition of the second. For instance, if a load is associated with a point and that point moves, the load also moves.
574
IndexAdditional Information
AutoGEM (Automatic Geometric Element Modeling) Mechanica's automated process for generating geometric elements on a model. AutoGEM generates elements that comply with all element creation rules and that provide accurate results when Mechanica analyzes your model.
axisymmetric model A two-dimensional model for which the geometry, loads, deformations, prescribed temperatures, and convection conditions are symmetric about an axis of rotation. For example, you can use an axisymmetric model type for a cylindrical or spherical structure, such as a storage tank.
B
beam See beam element, flexible beam.
beam element A one-dimensional entity used to represent part or all of a structural component that has a length much greater than its other two dimensions. The beam element axis lies on a curve or edge. In Structure, you describe the cross section by a set of section properties and an orientation. See also CY, CZ, IYY, IZZ, J, orientation, shear FY and FZ, and theta.
bearing load (S) A load that approximates the pressure applied to a 3D surface or 2D circle by a rigid pin or axle passing through a hole.
boundary condition (T) See convection condition and prescribed temperature. boundary condition set (T) A grouping of convection conditions and/or prescribed temperatures placed on a single model. You typically include a boundary condition set as part of an analysis.
575
boundary edge An edge associated with only one shell or solid, unless the edge is associated with a solid and a shell coincident with a face of that solid. See also boundary face.
boundary face A face that belongs to only one solid element. See also boundary edge.
buckling analysis (S) An analysis that calculates the critical magnitudes of load at which a structure will buckle, and the model's stresses, strains, and deformations in response to loads and constraints that do not vary in time.
buckling load factor (S) A quantity obtained by running a buckling analysis in Structure. The buckling load factor multiplied by the applied load yields the buckling load.
bulk temperature (T) In convective heat transfer through a surface, the temperature of the fluid far from the surface.
C
C1 continuous curve or surface A mathematical description of a curve or surface. A curve or surface is C1 continuous if both the direction and the magnitude of its first derivatives vary continuously everywhere on the curve or surface.
C2 continuous curve or surface A mathematical description of a curve or surface. A curve or surface is C2 continuous if both the direction and the magnitude of its second derivatives vary continuously everywhere on the curve or surface.
576
IndexAdditional Information
centrifugal load (S) An inertial body load that results from rotation about an axis, directed radially out from the axis.
check button A square button on a dialog box. From a group of check buttons, you can select one or more.
com_x, com_y, com_z (S) The location of the center of mass in relation to the WCS origin.
conductivity (T) The physical property of a material that, for a given temperature gradient, governs the rate at which heat energy is transferred within the material.
constraint (S) An external limit on the movement of a structure or part of a structure. You can constrain your model in any of the six degrees of freedomtranslation or rotation about any of the three coordinate directions.
constraint set (S) A grouping of constraints placed on a single model. You typically include a constraint set as part of an analysis.
contact analysis (S) A nonlinear analysis in which Structure calculates the contact area at each contact region in a model, and the model's stresses, strains, and deformations in response to loads and constraints that do not vary in time.
577
contour plot A type of result display that superimposes a set of curves on the model. Each curve has a color that represents a constant value of a specified scalar quantity. You also have the option of labeling contour plots for black-and-white printing. Examples of scalar quantities include stress, displacement, temperature, or flux components.
convection condition (T) A boundary condition you can specify on the convective heat exchange between a moving fluid and geometric and/or element entities within your model.
convergence The method Mechanica uses to find a solution to an analysis, based on your requirements and restrictions. There are two main convergence methods in Mechanica: multi-pass adaptive and single-pass adaptive.
coordinate system A generic term for a system of coordinates enabling you to define precise locations of entities. Mechanica uses a default world coordinate system. In addition, you can create three types of user coordinate systemsCartesian, cylindrical, and spherical. You can specify orientation of a beam or spring by defining its local coordinate system. See also local coordinate system, user coordinate system, view coordinate system, and world coordinate system.
critical damping (S) Amount of damping below which oscillation occurs. See also damping coefficient.
current body The body that is active and available for modification. You are always using the current body.
578
IndexAdditional Information
current model The model you currently have open on the screen. Mechanica allows you to open only one model at a time. See also model.
CY (S) The distance off a beam's neutral axis in the local Y direction at which you direct Structure to report bending stresses.
cyclic symmetry A type of constraint that you create by making cuts in a model at two symmetric surfaces. Subsequent analyses can be done on the symmetric surfaces only, which can significantly reduce the analysis time.
CZ (S) The distance off a beam's neutral axis in the local Z direction at which you direct Structure to report bending stresses.
D
damping coefficient (S) The percentage of critical damping of a mode in a dynamic frequency response, random response, or time response analysis. A damping coefficient of 100% means the model is critically damped and does not vibrate freely. A damping coefficient of 1% means the amplitude decays by about 6% over a period of oscillation. See also critical damping.
579
design study An examination of your model using one or more analyses you previously defined (standard study). A design study may also use an analysis to examine alternatives to your design (optimization and sensitivity studies). See also global sensitivity study, local sensitivity study, optimization study, and standard study. dialog box A separate window, invoked by a command, in which you enter values and other information.
dimension parameter A range of values you associate with a Pro/ENGINEER dimension. As the parameter value changes during a shape review, shape animation, sensitivity study, or optimization study, Mechanica also regenerates the associated dimension in both the Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica versions of the model. You use dimension parameters to change your model's shape.
displacement (S) The movement of a point on the model, measured as the change in position relative to the point's location on the undeformed model. Displacements are calculated by default during an engine run.
dynamic frequency response analysis (S) An analysis that calculates the amplitude and phase of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses in your model in response to a load oscillating at different frequencies.
dynamic random response analysis (S) An analysis that calculates the power spectral densities and RMS values of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses in your model in response to a load of specified power spectral density.
dynamic shock response analysis (S) An analysis that calculates maximum values of displacements and stresses in your model in response to a base excitation with a specified response spectrum.
580
IndexAdditional Information
dynamic time response analysis (S) An analysis that calculates displacements, velocities, accelerations, and stresses in your model at different times in response to a time-varying load.
E
element An entity based on your model's geometry that Mechanica uses to analyze your model. Types of elements include beams, shells, solids, 2D shells, 2D solids, and 2D plates. Structure also has mass and spring elements. You create elements by using AutoGEM, Mechanica's automatic element generation technology. AutoGEM creates elements for your model at the start of every analysis. You can also manually start AutoGEM during your modeling session to evaluate and refine your mesh. See also AutoGEM or geometric element modeling.
Encapsulated PostScript A PostScript file you can include in another PostScript file. Encapsulated PostScript files are used to place illustrations in a PostScript document. You cannot print out an Encapsulated PostScript file on its own. See also PostScript file.
energy norm (T) A scalar quantity that is proportional to the integral over the element of the flux squared. It is analogous to element strain energy in a static structural analysis. You can create measures for this and use it for a convergence quantity.
enforced displacement (S) A known displacement you prescribe on part of your model when you create a constraint.
entity A general term for anything in a model, including points, curves, springs, beams, and so forth. There are also entities specific to each productfor example, loads and constraints in Structure and convection conditions and heat loads in Thermal.
581
entry box A box on a dialog box in which you enter data. You make an entry box active by moving your mouse cursor over the box and pressing the left mouse button.
extensional stiffness (S) A spring stiffness constant that equals the ratio of spring force to displacement along a principal coordinate axis.
F
film coefficient (T) In convective heat transfer through a surface, the constant of proportionality between the flux through the surface and the difference between the surface temperature and the bulk temperature.
flux (T) The rate at which heat energy is transferred per unit area.
fringe plot A type of result display that superimposes a set of colored regions on the model. Each color represents a different range of values of a specified scalar quantity, such as stress, displacement, temperature, or flux.
G
G1 continuous curve or surface A mathematical description of a curve or surface. A curve or surface is G1 continuous if the direction, but not necessarily the magnitude, of its first derivatives varies smoothly everywhere on the curve or surface.
582
IndexAdditional Information
G2 continuous curve or surface A mathematical description of a curve or surface. A curve or surface is G2 continuous if the direction, but not necessarily the magnitude, of its second derivatives varies smoothly everywhere on the curve or surface.
geometric element analysis (GEA) Mechanica's technology for analyzing a model by analyzing its geometric elements to the polynomial order required to achieve the level of accuracy you specify.
geometric element modeling (GEM) Mechanica's technique for defining a model for analysis by breaking it up into elements that you associate directly with the geometry. See also element.
geometric element optimization (GEO) A process that helps you determine the best balance between design constraints and performance by automatically varying design parameters that are associated with a geometric element model. See also optimization.
global sensitivity study A design study in which Mechanica calculates the changes in your model's measures when you vary a parameter over a specified range. Mechanica does this by calculating measure
583
values at regular intervals in a parameter's range. You can vary more than one parameter simultaneously. See local sensitivity study, optimization study, and standard study.
gravity load (S) A body load that represents the effect of a uniform gravitational field or the inertial load of constant acceleration.
H
heat capacity (T) A property that indicates the ability of a material to absorb heat from the external surroundings. It represents the amount of energy required to produce a unit temperature rise.
heat load (T) A thermal load you can place on specific locations on your model to study the effects of internal heat generation or applied flux. If you specify a positive heat load, the load is adding heat to the model, making the load a heat source. If you specify a negative heat load, the load is removing heat from the model, making the load a heat sink. You can group heat loads into load sets. See also heat sink and heat source.
heat sink (T) A prescribed rate of heat energy lost. See also heat load.
heat source (T) A prescribed rate of heat energy generated. See also heat load.
HPGL Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language, a page description format you can use to print on a plotter or printer that supports HPGL.
584
IndexAdditional Information
I
inertia (Iy, Iz) (S) Factors that you specify for the second moment of area for a beam element. Along with Young's modulus, these properties describe stiffness in bending about a beam's principal Y and Z axes.
isotropic Describes a material with an infinite number of planes of material symmetry, making the properties equal in all directions. You enter a single value for each property. You can assign isotropic materials to any element type.
IYY (S) A beam cross section's second moment of area describing stiffness in bending about the local Y axis.
IZZ (S) A beam cross section's second moment of area describing stiffness in bending about the local Z axis.
J
J (S) A beam cross section's effective second polar moment of area describing stiffness in torsion. For circular cross sections, the effective second polar moment of area is equal to the actual second polar moment of area.
L
Large Deformation Analysis An option you can select to compute large deformation results for static structural analyses only, using nonlinear equations. This is only available for 3D, 2D plane strain, and 2D plane stress model types.
585
limit A value or range of values for a specified measure that Mechanica must respect during an optimization study.
list box A list of items on a dialog box with a scroll bar to its right.
load (S) A force you place on your model. You can specify the direction and magnitude of the force. See also bearing load, centrifugal load, gravity load, pressure load, and temperature load
load set A grouping of structural loads or heat loads placed on a single model. You can include load sets in most analysis types. Mechanica calculates results separately for each load set, unless you use the Sum Sets option for a dynamic analysis.
local sensitivity study A design study in which Mechanica calculates the sensitivity of your model's measures to slight changes in one or more parameters. Mechanica calculates the slope of the sensitivity curve between two sample points. See also global sensitivity study, optimization study, and standard study.
M
mass element (S) An element that represents a concentrated mass and concentrated moment of inertia at a particular point of a model.
mass properties Properties calculated from a model's geometry and material properties. The mass properties for the full model are included in the summary file when you run a design study with certain types of analyses.
586
IndexAdditional Information
material damping A material property that allows you to model the dissipation of energy, caused by friction, heat exchange, or deformation, that occurs during a contact event.
material orientation The principal material directions, relative to the current coordinate system, associated with the surfaces, volumes, shells, solids, 2D solids, or 2D plates in your model. You can specify both the coordinate system axis with which each principal material direction is aligned and an angle of rotation for those directions. See also orientation.
material properties Properties of the material you assign to geometry or elements. The following table indicates the material properties for each product:
Material Property Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Conductivity Cost per Unit Mass Mass Density Poisson's Ratio Shear Modulus Young's Modulus S T S, T S, T S S S
Product
material set A set of material properties. Material sets can reside in a material library and can be assigned to one or more entities in your model.
587
maximum magnitude principal stress (S) The principal stress value having the maximum magnitude. For example, if the maximum principal stress is 100 but the minimum principal stress is 200, the principal stress with the greatest magnitude is the minimum principal stress (200).
maximum principal stress (S) The most positive principal stress in the model.
maximum shear stress The maximum shear stress (also known as Tresca stress), is defined as one half of the largest difference in the principal stresses at a given point.
MCAD Mechanical computer-aided design, a type of software you can use to draw a mechanical model design. Pro/ENGINEER is an example of an MCAD program.
measure A scalar quantity of interest that Mechanica calculates in a design study. You can set up measures to monitor specific aspects of your model's performance. For instance, you might want to know the stress tangent to a fillet for the later calculation of fatigue. You can use measures as convergence criteria for an analysis or for an optimization study goal or limit. You also use measures to measure sensitivity to parameter changes in a local or global sensitivity design study. During a design study, Mechanica calculates results for the measures that are valid for each analysis in the study. For example, a stress measure is calculated for a static analysis but not for a modal analysis.
588
IndexAdditional Information
menu item A command or submenu listed on a menu. message box A box Mechanica displays that contains a message or a question.
minimum principal stress (S) The least positive principal stress in the model.
modal analysis (S) An analysis in which Structure calculates the natural frequencies and mode shapes of your model.
mode tracking (S) During an optimization that includes a modal analysis, you can direct the Structure engine to follow a particular mode through the optimization, even if that mode's frequency becomes greater than or less than a neighboring mode's frequency.
model Your representation on the computer of a structure or object. You can associate analyses and design studies with a model.
modeling The process of simplifying and abstracting a structure, object, or physical system so that it can be represented mathematically and studied with the aid of a computer.
Model Tree window A window that graphically shows features of a model, including simulation features (datum points, coordinate systems, datum curves, surface regions, and volume regions).
589
model type The dimensional treatment you want Mechanica to apply for your model. The available model types are 3D, 2D plane strain, 2D plane stress, or 2D axisymmetric.
modified Mohr theory A theory used for predicting the failure of brittle materials. It is a variant of the CoulombMohr theory modified to better predict fracture in brittle materials.
moment of inertia (S) An inertial constant that equals the ratio of applied moment to the resulting angular acceleration about an axis.
multi-pass adaptive convergence The point during a run at which the results for the last calculation for an analysis differ from the results for the preceding calculation by less than a specified percentage. The quantities Mechanica uses to make this comparison depend on the convergence option you select when defining the analysis. Mechanica increases the polynomial order along each edge of the model until either convergence or the maximum polynomial order has been reached. See also polynomial order.
N
net heat flux (T) A measure that Thermal calculates by finding the total amount of heat that flows through one or more of the boundaries of one or more elements. For example, in 3D models, Thermal can calculate the net heat flux for the endpoints of beams, the edges of shells, the faces of solids, or a combination of these.
O
optimization study A design study in which Mechanica adjusts one or more parameters to best achieve a specified goal or to test feasibility of a design while respecting specified limits. See also global sensitivity study, local sensitivity study, and standard study.
590
IndexAdditional Information
orientation (S) A property of beams and two-point springs. Orientation is a vector with three WCS components. This vector specifies the beam's or spring's local Z axis relative to the WCS. See also material orientation.
orthotropic Describes a material with symmetry relative to three mutually perpendicular planes. You can assign orthotropic properties to surfaces and parts.
P
parameter space The representative space, internal to Mechanica's code, in which Mechanica represents geometric entities. Mechanica simultaneously represents all geometry by two methodsthe actual 2D or 3D representation of your model, and the 1D, 2D, or 3D parametric representation that Mechanica uses to manipulate geometric entities. Mechanica performs many operations on geometric entities in parameter space and then maps the entities back to 3D space. As a result, the appearance of an entity may differ significantly from its parametric representation.
phase (S) The angle by which an output quantity is out of phase with the force that prompted the response. A negative angle means that the output quantity lags behind the force.
p-level The highest polynomial order to which Mechanica performs calculations on a given edge during a run of a design study. See also polynomial order.
plotting grid The locations at which Mechanica calculates values for displacement, stress, temperature, flux, and other quantities. Mechanica places a grid across each element and calculates a value at each location where two grid lines cross, or where a grid line intersects an element edge. You can determine the size of the grid when you define an analysis by specifying how many intervals along each element edge Mechanica uses to create the grid. The grid size affects the level of detail of the results.
591
Poisson's ratio (S) The ratio of lateral contraction to longitudinal extension when a material is under tension. You specify Poisson's ratio when you define material properties.
polynomial order When Mechanica runs a design study, it calculates the value of specified quantities at successively higher polynomial orders for each edge until it reaches convergence or the maximum polynomial order. Mechanica uses functions that may range from linear to a 9th order polynomial, although you can specify a subset of that range when you define an analysis. See also convergence and p-level.
PostScript file A file written in the PostScript language, a page description language. You can create color or black-and-white files in PostScript format from Mechanica to print out on PostScript printers.
p-pass A single analysis calculation by the Structure engine with each element edge set to a particular polynomial order. After each p-pass, Mechanica updates the polynomial orders of the edges for the next p-pass. The process continues until either convergence or the maximum polynomial order is reached.
prescribed temperature (T) A temperature boundary condition that you specify for a geometric or model entity. Thermal determines the temperature at every location on your model for which you have not prescribed a temperature. You can add prescribed temperatures to new or existing constraint sets.
pressure load (S) A load that acts normal to a surface and has units of force per unit area.
592
IndexAdditional Information
prestress modal analysis (S) An analysis that calculates natural frequencies and modes of a prestressed model. The stress stiffness is calculated using stresses from a previous static analysis, then added to the elastic stiffness to create a combined stiffness. The combined stiffness is then used in place of the elastic stiffness for the modal analysis.
prestress static analysis (S) An analysis that calculates deformations, stresses, and strains of a prestressed model. The stress stiffness is calculated using stresses from a previous static analysis, then added to the elastic stiffness to create a combined stiffness. The combined stiffness is then used in place of the elastic stiffness for the static analysis.
Mechanica A family of design analysis products that enable you to simulate and optimize the structural and thermal performance of your designs before you build prototypes. The two main Mechanica products are as follows:
Structure a structural design analysis tool Thermal a thermal design analysis tool
These two products are integrated, so that you can access either product from inside a single user interface. Your installation may also include the optional Vibration module, a vibration analysis tool integrated with Structure.
prompt A request for a single input that appears on the command line.
properties See CY, CZ, IYY, IZZ, J, mass properties, material properties, orientation, shear FY and FZ, shell properties, theta.
push button A button on a dialog box that enables you to select an action that Mechanica performs. Typical push buttons include OK or Cancel.
593
Q
Q (T) The heat rate you apply to selected entities when you create a heat load.
R
radio button A diamond-shaped or circular button on a dialog box. From a group of radio buttons, you can select only one.
reaction forces (S) The forces present at constrained edges or points. See also resultant.
resultant (S) You can define a resultant force or resultant moment measure. Structure calculates the resultant force measure by integrating the total traction forces acting on one or more of the boundaries of one or more elements. Structure calculates the resultant moment measure by integrating the product of a moment arm and the traction forces acting on one or more of the boundaries of one or more elements. In 3D models, Structure can calculate a resultant measure for the endpoints of beams, the edges of shells, the faces of solids, or a combination of these. The value of a resultant measure is equal to the sum of the resultants for all of the entities selected.
result window A single display of a design study result. A result window contains one quantity, such as stress or displacement, defined over a location, such as an edge or the entire model, in a specific graphic display, such as a graph or fringe plot.
594
IndexAdditional Information
right-hand rule A method for determining the direction of the positive Z axis relative to the positive X and positive Y axes. If your right hand is in front of you with the palm up, your thumb pointing to the right represents the positive X axis, and your index finger pointing straight ahead represents the positive Y axis. If you then bend your middle finger up by 90 , it represents the direction of the positive Z axis.
rigid body modes (S) Modes that have no strain associated with them.
rotation (S) The local change in orientation at a location on the model relative to the undeformed model.
run During a run, the engine performs the calculations needed to provide results for a specified design study.
S
sensitivity study A "what if" design study where Mechanica uses parameters to study variations in the design of your model to help you find the best design. See also global sensitivity study and local sensitivity study.
shape history An animation sequence showing the changing shape of your model during each step of an optimization or global sensitivity design study. You also use a shape history result window definition to save the optimized version of a model.
shear FY and FZ (S) The ratio of a beam's effective "shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear in the Y direction (for shear FY) or in the Z direction (for shear FZ). Structure uses these factors to improve the accuracy of calculations involving beams.
595
shell element A three- or four-sided entity used to represent part or all of a structural component that has a thickness much smaller than its other two dimensions. Mechanica displays the shell element midsurface.
shell properties The properties you assign to a shell depend on its type. For a homogeneous shell, which consists of a single material whose properties do not vary through the shell's thickness, you assign a thickness. For a laminated shell, which consists of one or more materials whose properties may vary through the shell's thickness, you specify laminate stiffness properties.
simulation features Features that you can create in the Mechanica environment that allow you to focus on a portion of your model that the feature will simulate. Simulation features are only visible in the Mechanica environment, and include datum points, coordinate systems, datum curves, surface regions, and volume regions.
single-pass adaptive convergence A method Mechanica uses to find a solution to your analysis. Mechanica runs a first pass with the polynomial order set to 3, estimates stress errors, raises the polynomial order of each element to a higher level based on the magnitude of the local stress errors, and then carries out a second solution using the updated polynomial orders. The results of this second solution are output as the final results.
singularity A region of the model where the results are theoretically infinite for any physical quantity, such as displacement, stress, temperature, or heat flux. Singularities usually result from point loads, point constraints, and reentrant corners.
596
IndexAdditional Information
solid element A cubical, tetrahedral, or wedge-shaped entity you use in Mechanica to represent a part or all of a three-dimensional structural component.
spatial variation The process by which Mechanica spatially varies a Structure load or a Thermal heat load. You can direct Mechanica to vary a load or heat load linearly, quadratically, or cubically along an edge, curve, face, or surface.
specific heat (T) The heat capacity per unit mass. See heat capacity.
spring (S) An idealization that represents an elastic spring connection between two points or an elastic spring connection to ground at a single point.
standard study A study in which Mechanica calculates results for one or more analyses. You can specify different parameter settings for the analysis. See design study, global sensitivity study, local sensitivity study, and optimization study.
static analysis (S) An analysis in which Structure calculates a model's stresses, strains, and deformations in response to loads that do not vary in time, where the model is also subject to constraints.
597
steady-state thermal analysis (T) An analysis in which Thermal calculates your model's response to a set of specified heat loads, subject to any convection conditions and/or prescribed temperatures. This is the only type of analysis available in Thermal.
T
temperature load (S) A body load due to a temperature change over the model. A temperature change causes local expansion or contraction of the model. You can cause the model to resist expansion or contraction by using constraints. The two types of temperature load are MEC/T and global.
tensile/compressive/shear failure stress The maximum stress a body can endure under a tensile/compressive/shear load before failure occurs.
thermal expansion coefficient (S) A material constant that equals the ratio of strain to temperature change in degrees.
theta ( ) (S) A property of beams and two-point springs. Theta is the angle between the principal Z axis and the local Z axis. The default local Y axis lies in the plane of the beam unless theta is nonzero.
torsional stiffness (S) A spring stiffness constant that equals the ratio of spring moment to rotation about a principal coordinate axis.
598
IndexAdditional Information
transient thermal analysis (T) An analysis in which Thermal calculates temperatures and heat fluxes in your model at different times in response to specified heat loads and subject to specified prescribed temperatures and/or convection conditions.
transversely isotropic Describes a material with rotational symmetry about an axis that you can assign to surfaces and parts. The properties are equal for all directions in one plane, the plane of isotropy. You enter two values for each property, one for the plane of isotropy, and one for the remaining principal material direction.
true angle The actual, absolute 3-D angle (as opposed to a projected angle).
Tsai-Wu failure criterion A general multiaxial failure theory used to predict failure of anisotropic materials. It is named after Stephen Tsai and Edward Wu, who proposed the theory.
Tsai-Wu normalized interaction term A mathematical term used in the calculation of the Tsai-Wu failure criterion. It represents the interaction between the normal stresses in material directions 1 and 2. See also material orientation and transversely isotropic.
2D plate element A three- or four-sided element that represents a plate in a 2D plane stress model.
599
2D plane stress model A two-dimensional model you can use when modeling a thin, flat plate. All elements must lie in the WCS Z=0 plane. You can only create 2D plate elements for a 2D plate model.
2D plane strain model A two-dimensional model representing a cross section of a structure that is very long in the dimension perpendicular to the cross section. In plane strain models, all out-of-plane components of load and strain must be zero, and loading cannot vary in the out-of-plane direction. For example, in Structure, you can use a plane strain model type for applications such as long pipes, dams, and retaining walls. In Thermal, you use 2D plane strain models for structures where the heat flow in one direction is negligiblethat is, the temperature varies in two directions but not the third. For example, you could use this model type for modeling a long pipe.
2D shell element A one-dimensional entity that represents a shell element in a 2D plane strain or 2D axisymmetric model.
2D solid element A three- or four-sided element that represents a 2D plane strain or 2D axisymmetric model.
U
UCS See user coordinate system.
user coordinate system A Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical coordinate system you define, which is also referred to as a UCS. See also coordinate system, local coordinate system, view coordinate system, and world coordinate system.
600
IndexAdditional Information
view coordinate system The system Mechanica uses to define the view window. The origin is always at the center of your screen with the positive X axis horizontal and to the right, the positive Y axis vertical and up, and the positive Z axis perpendicular to the other axes and pointed at you as you sit at the computer. See also coordinate system, local coordinate system, user coordinate system, and world coordinate system. This coordinate system is a reference point for view changes. When you rotate, translate, or zoom your model, you are in effect repositioning the VCS in relation to your model.
volume A set of associated surfaces that visually represents an entity with volume. A volume must be closed, but can have interior voids.
von Mises stress (S) An equivalent stress that is a combination of all stress components. The von Mises yielding criterion states that a material reaches its elastic limit if the von Mises stress is equal to the material's yield stress in simple tension.
W
WCS See world coordinate system.
work area The largest window of the Mechanica screen, where you create and modify models, and review results. By default, the work area is below the command area and tools button area and to the left of the design menu area.
601
world coordinate system The default coordinate system, also referred to as the WCS, in Mechanica. You use this coordinate system when you create your model. See also coordinate system, local coordinate system, user coordinate system, and view coordinate system.
Y
Young's modulus (S) The ratio of stress to strain for a specific material, describing its stiffness. You specify Young's modulus when you define material properties.
yield stress The value of stress at or above which a material no longer exhibits linear elastic behavior.
602
IndexAdditional Information
Coordinate Systems
Following are the icons Mechanica uses to represent coordinate systems. Mechanica displays coordinate systems in yellow. If you designate a coordinate system as the current coordinate system, Mechanica highlights this coordinate system in green. World Coordinate System or Cartesian User Coordinate System
603
This icon appears when you create a Cartesian coordinate system. This icon also represents the WCS. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Connections
Following are the graphic representation Mechanica uses for connections: Welds
This icon appears when you create an end or perimeter weld between components in an assembly. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Spot Welds
This icon appears when you create a spot weld between entities. The size of the disks in this icon depend on the diameter you specify for the spot weld. The icon changes orientation in response to view changes. Spot welds are only available in native mode.
604
IndexAdditional Information
Interfaces
This icon appears when you create an interface between components in an assembly. The version without dots represents a free interface while the version with dots represents a bonded interface. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Rigid Connections
This icon appears when you create a rigid connection between components in an assembly. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes. Rigid connections are only available in native mode.
Constraints
Structure and Thermal have only one type of constraint in commoncyclic symmetry. Following is the default icon Mechanica uses for cyclic symmetry:
This icon appears at each location where you apply a cyclic symmetry constraint. The icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
Material Orientations
Following is the graphic representation Mechanica uses for material orientation.
This icon appears when you review the material orientation of a surface, shell, or part. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
605
Idealizations
Following are the default icons Structure uses for mass and spring idealizations: Masses
This weight shape represents a mass concentrated at a point. The mass icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
606
IndexAdditional Information
Connections
Structure has only one connection that it does not share with Thermal, namely contacts. Following is the default icon Structure uses for contact regions:
This icon appears when you define a contact region between two curves in a 2D model or between two surfaces in a 3D model. The icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes. Contacts are only available in native mode.
Constraints
Following are the default icons that Structure uses for constraints: Constraints
This icon appears at each location where you apply a constraint. The icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes. This icon shows which degrees of freedom you constrained. Two rows of boxes appear at the base of the triangle, with each box representing a degree of freedom. The top row of boxes represents displacement degrees of freedom, and the bottom row of boxes represents rotational degrees of freedom. Boxes corresponding to degrees of freedom that you constrained or for which you prescribed a displacement are filled. Boxes corresponding to degrees of freedom that you designated as free are empty. For example, this icon indicates that displacement in the x and y directions are constrained and rotation about the z axis is also constrained.
607
Loads
Following are the default icons that Structure uses for loads: Force Loads
This icon, with a single arrowhead, appears on an entity to which you apply a force load. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Moment Loads
This icon, with a double arrowhead, appears on an entity to which you apply a moment load. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
608
IndexAdditional Information
Gravity Loads
This icon appears when you apply a gravity load to your model. The vector changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes. Structure places this icon at the WCS origin.
MEC/T Temperature
This icon appears when you apply a MEC/T temperature load to your model. The icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes. Structure places this icon at the WCS origin. MEC/T temperature loads are only available in native mode.
External Temperature
This icon appears when you import an externally calculated or measured temperature load to your model. Structure places this icon near the WCS origin.
Structural Temperature
This icon appears distributed across the entity when you create a structural temperature load. Structural temperature loads are only available in FEM mode.
609
Pressure Loads
When you apply a pressure load, this arrow-type icon appears normal to shells, faces, and surfaces, or perpendicular to edges or 2D shells. The icon changes orientation, but not scale, in response to view changes.
Convection Conditions
This icon appears on an entity for which you define a convection condition. This icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes.
Radiation
This icon appears on an entity for which you define a radiation boundary condition. This icon does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes. Radiation boundary conditions are available in FEM mode only.
Heat Loads
This icon appears on an entity to which you apply a heat load. It does not change orientation or scale in response to view changes. The sign on the icon indicates whether the load magnitude is positive or negative, that is, a heat source or a heat sink. For spatially varying loads, which may change sign, the sign on the icon corresponds to the sign of the entry for Q, which multiplies the interpolation.
610
IndexAdditional Information
Bibliography
This document contains a bibliography of information on topics relevant to Mechanica. The bibliography is divided into the following sections: Topic General Finite Element Fatigue P-method Optimization Mechanics Formulas and Numerical Results Heat Transfer
Fatigue
Baumel, A. and Seeger, T. "Materials Data for Cyclic Loading, Supplement 1." Materials Science Monographs, 61. Pub: Elsavier. Morrow, J. "Fatigue Design Handbook." Advances in Engineering. Vol. 4. Society of Automotive Engineers, Warrendale, PA. (1968): Sec 3.2, pp 2129.
611
Smith, K. N., Watson, P., and Topper, T. H. "A Stress-Strain Function for the Fatigue of Metals." Journal of Materials. Vol. 5, No. 4, (1970): 767778.
p-Method
Babuska, I., and Suri, M. "The p- and h-p Versions of the Finite Element Method, an Overview." Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering. 80 (1990): 5 26. Babuska, I., and Szabo, B. "On the Rates of Convergency of the Finite Element Method." International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering. 18 (1982): 323341. Babuska, I., Szabo, B., and Katz, I. N. "The p-Version of the Finite Element Method." Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics. (1981): 515545. Szabo, B. "Geometric Idealizations in Finite Element Computations." Communications in Applied Numerical Methods. 4 (1988): 393400. Szabo, B. "Mesh Design for the p-Version of the Finite Element Method." Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering. 55 (1986): 181197. Szabo, Barna, and Ivo Babuska. Finite Element Analysis. New York: Wiley, 1991. Szabo, B., and Sahrmann, G. "Hierarchic Plate and Shell Models Based on pExtension." International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering. 26 (1988): 18551881.
Optimization
Bennett, J.A., and M.E. Botkin. The Optimum Shape. New York: Plenum, 1986. Haug, Edward J., and Jasbir S. Arora. Applied Optimal Design. New York: Wiley, 1979. Haug, Edward J., Kyung K. Choi, and Vadim Komkov. Design Sensitivity Analysis of Structural Systems. London: Academic Press, 1986. Vanderplaats, Garret N. Numerical Optimization Techniques for Engineering Design. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1984. Wismer, David A., and R. Chatterly. Introduction to Nonlinear Optimization. New York: North-Holland, 1983.
Mechanics
Gere, James M., and Stephen P. Timoshenko. Mechanics of Materials. 2nd ed. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole Engineering Division, 1984. 612
IndexAdditional Information
Jones, Robert M. Mechanics of Composite Materials. Washington, D.C.: Scripta Book Company, 1975. Popov, E. P. Introduction to Mechanics of Solids. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1968. Reddy, J. N. Energy and Variational Method in Applied Mechanics. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1984. Shigley, Joseph Edward Mechanical Engineering Design. 3rd ed. New York: McGrawHill, 1977. Timoshenko, S. P., and J.N. Goodier. Theory of Elasticity. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1970. Tsai, Stephen W. Composites Design. 4th ed. Dayton, OH: Think Composites, 1988. Tsai, Stephen W., and H. Thomas Hahn. Introduction to Composite Materials. Westport, CT: Technomic Publishing Co., 1980. Ugural, A. C. Stresses in Plates and Shells. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981.
Heat Transfer
Holman, J. P. Heat Transfer. 6th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1986. Incropera, Frank P., and David P. Dewitt. Fundamentals of Heat Transfer. New York: Wiley, 1981. Kreith, Frank, and Mark S. Bohn. Principles of Heat Transfer. 4th ed. New York: Harper & Row, 1986.
613
Database Considerations
To support the many activities it performs, Mechanica adds information to existing Pro/ENGINEER files and creates database files in the directory that stores your Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly. To learn about Mechanica database files, how the software maintains the database, and other related issues, read the following: Topic Native Mode Files Using Pro/ENGINEER File Commands FEM Database Considerations Support for Pro/INTRALINK and Windchill In reading this material, bear in mind that you do not need an in-depth understanding of the Mechanica database in order to work with your model. Treat these discussions as background information only.
614
IndexAdditional Information
.prt file This file stores information about part geometry and all simulation entities for the part. .mdb file The content of this file depends on whether or not you have actually run an analysis or design study. When you begin a run or create a mecbatch file, the .mdb file contains a subset of simulation entities such as measures, materials, analysis definitions, and so forth. Once the analysis or design study begins to run, Mechanica updates this file to include the model mesh. .asm file This file stores information about assembly geometry and all simulation entities for the assembly. .mda files As with the .mdb file, the content of these files depends on whether or not you have actually run an analysis or design study. When you begin a run or create a mecbatch file, the .mda file contains a subset of simulation modeling entities for your assembly. Once the analysis or design study begins to run, Mechanica updates this file to include model mesh.
To help prevent data loss and enable you to return to a prior model if you encounter problems, the software creates .prt or .asm backups each time you perform a save through the Pro/ENGINEER File menu. The backup files are as follows: .prt and .asm files an earlier version of the file. For the most recent backup, use the file with the next-to-highest number, although you can also access an earlier version of the part or assembly by opening files with lower numbers. Session files Each session of Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica generates one session record, or playback file in case you need to replay a session. Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica use a trail.txt.X (where X is an interger) file to store session records. The software starts a new trail.txt.X file at the beginning of each session, incrementing the integer to create a unique identity.
To learn more about the file structure and some of the guidelines you should observe as you work with these files, read the following: Topic Overview of File Creation Starting a New Model Moving to Independent Mode
615
1. When you open Pro/ENGINEER, the software creates a trail file, trail.txt.x, which tracks your actions in Pro/ENGINEER. The software stores this file in the current directory. 2. When you create and save a part, Pro/ENGINEER saves the geometry, relations, and so forth in a part (.prt) file, which it stores in the pro directory (where pro is the directory that contains the Pro/ENGINEER part). 3. After you enter Mechanica, the software stores Mechanica entities that you add to the partmodeling entities, analysis definitions, and design study definitionsin the .prt file. It stores this data each time you save the model. 4. When you run an analysis or design study, Mechanica creates a study directory (where study is the name of your design study). The software then copies the .prt file into this directory, creates an .mdb file, and merges the simulation information from the .prt file into the .mdb file. The .mdb file that appears in the study directory carries the study name. However, the .prt file that appears in the study directory carries the original name of the part. As Mechanica runs the analysis or design study, it updates the .mdb file by adding mesh data. Mechanica uses this information to display model results.
616
IndexAdditional Information
Note: While Mechanica is active, the only commands you can select from the list below are Save, Save a Copy, Backup, and Delete. To use the other commands, you must select a different Pro/ENGINEER application.
File menu option Action taken by Mechanica Erase This command provides two optionsCurrent and Not Displayed. Both options close the Mechanica model without saving. This command provides two optionsOld Versions and All Versions. Delete All Versions closes and deletes the Mechanica model. If there is no Mechanica model in memory but one exists on disk, the software deletes that model. Delete Old Versions has no effect in Mechanica. Save Save A Copy Saves the Mechanica model. Saves the Mechanica model under the new name. The name of the Mechanica model in memory does not change. If there is no Mechanica model in memory but a file of that name exists, the software copies the file to a new name matching the new Pro/ENGINEER part. If you have accessed Mechanica at least once during the current Pro/ENGINEER session, saves a backup of the Mechanica model in a directory you specify.
Delete
Backup
617
618
IndexAdditional Information
Topic Model Files Meshing Files FEM Mode Meshing Files Support for Windchill Model Files When you enter Mechanica, model files, .prt and .asm, are read from the active workspace. If your active workspace does not contain a Mechanica model, but there is a model on disk in the current working directory, it will be read from disk and checked into the workspace.
In either case, when you save your model, Mechanica writes it to the active workspace. The software also automatically creates a Pro/INTRALINK dependency between a Mechanica model and its associated Pro/ENGINEER model when it saves the model to your active workspace. Mechanica reads certain auxiliary files from the workspace, such as those containing temperature fields for structural analysis. These files are not written to the workspace, so you must either check these files out of common space or import them into a workspace before Mechanica can access them directly. Meshing Files If you are working in Pro/INTRALINK, the following points apply to your AutoGEM .mmp and .mma files in Mechanica. Associating files There is no dependency established between a part or assembly file and a mesh file when you import them from a directory into your workspace. To establish an association: 1. Import both files into your workspace. 2. Open the .prt or .asm file in your workspace. 3. Select AutoGEM>Create to open the AutoGEM dialog box. 4. Select File>Load Mesh on the AutoGEM dialog box to open the mesh file (.mmp or .mma). 5. Select File>Save Mesh on the AutoGEM dialog box to save the mesh file in your workspace. 6. Check the part or assembly files and the mesh files into the commonspace. Saving files If you have checked out a part or assembly from commonspace into a workspace, when you select the File>Save Mesh command on the AutoGEM dialog box to save a new mesh file, the .mmp or .mma file is saved into the same workspace.
619
If you retrieved the mesh file from commonspace, when you select the File>Save Mesh command on the AutoGEM dialog box, the software checks the mesh file out and then saves it to the same workspace. Retrieving files Here are the rules that Mechanica uses to determine which mesh file to retrieve when you open a mesh file and a part file in your Pro/INTRALINK workspace. o If you check out both the mesh file and the model file from commonspace into your workspace at the same time, and then open Mechanica, the software tries to check out the latest version of the mesh file that is compatible with the model file. If it cannot find an appropriate version of the mesh file, it uses the version of the mesh file that is specified by the user configuration. o If you check out a model file from commonspace into your workspace without simultaneously checking out a mesh file, open Mechanica, and then use the AutoGEM dialog box to retrieve a mesh file, the software will try to find a compatible mesh file. If no appropriate file is available, Mechanica displays an error message. o If you check out a mesh file from commonspace into your workspace without checking out a model file, the software automatically checks out an associated model file.
FEM Mode Meshing Files If you are working in Pro/INTRALINK, the same rules apply to saving and retrieving your FEM mode .fmp and .fma files as discussed above for .mmp and .mma files. If you work with hierarchical meshes, when you check out an assembly from a workspace, the software checks out both the meshes saved for the parts and the meshes saved for the assembly. Support for Windchill If you are working in Windchill, the following points apply to your AutoGEM .mmp and .mma files in Mechanica. When you create a mesh file, it is added to the same Windchill document as the Mechanica model file. When you retrieve a part or assembly file from a Windchill cabinet, the latest version of the .mmp or .mma file corresponding to the model file is also retrieved. If you update a .mmp or .mma file, the version number of the Windchill document is incremented.
The behavior when you retrieve or save .fma and .fmp files is identical to that for the .mmp and .mma files.
620
IndexAdditional Information
Engine Files
Refer to the following topics for information on different categories of engine files: Topic mecbatch Engine Input Files Temporary Engine Files Engine Output Files
mecbatch
The mecbatch command executes from your operating system the run of one or more design studies you previously included in a batch file. When you create a batch file, you can specify a name for the batch file or use the default name mecbatch (mecbatch.bat on Windows). Mechanica places the file in the directory from which you started Mechanica.
621
study.mda
meshed_stdmdl.mdb
study.lok
Mechanica places the files in a directory called study, and places study in the directory for output files you specify through the Run>Settings command on the Analsyses and Design Studies dialog box.
622
IndexAdditional Information
the step#### subdirectory of the study directory (where the four pound signs (####) represent the number of the master interval defined for the dynamic structural or transient thermal analysis in four-digit format)
study.cnv
study.d##
study.err
study.g##
study.hst
study.l##
study.mcd
study.neu study.opt
623
study.pas
Contains the connectivity information of the geometric element model. Contains values of measures for each analysis pass. Contains information about a run, including values of measures, warning messages, and, for optimization design studies, information about parameters and goal and limit quantities at each step of the optimization. You can access this file through the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box, or print out the file through your operating system.
study.rst
Contains the state of the last pass for a multi-pass adaptive analysis. Mechanica uses this file if you decide to restart an analysis that you had previously stopped. Contains information on solutions generated during an analysis. The study.solution file is in binary and is intended for internal engine use only. Mechanica refers to this file when performing analyses that rely on the solution of a previously run analysis. For example, to preform a buckling analysis, you must specify a previously run static analysis that the Structure engine uses to determine the BLF. During the buckling analysis run, the Structure engine locates and refers to the study.solution file generated by the static analysis you specified when you defined the buckling analysis.
study.solution
study.stt
Contains the start and completion times of major steps in the engine run. You can access this file through detailed summary you can review using the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. This file contains the stress/strain distribution or the fluxes and temperature gradients, depending on the analysis type. The two pound signs (##) represent in two-digit format the load set or mode number.
study.s##
study.ter
Contains a summary of your model as it is seen during the engine run expressed in ASCII. The summary includes such items as loads, constraints, materials, and so forth. Contains plotting data for dynamic structural and transient thermal analyses. Measure values of response points are reported at successive time steps. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format.
study.t##
Mechanica also creates the following engine output files for structural analyses only:
study.a## Contains the rotations. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number, in two-digit format.
624
IndexAdditional Information
study.b##
Contains the laminate stress/strain distribution calculated for a static, modal, dynamic time, dynamic frequency, dynamic random, dynamic shock, or buckling analysis. Mechanica calculates all quantities at the hnode locations and reports values with respect to the global rectangular coordinate system. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains plotting data for frequency response. Measure values are reported at successive frequency steps. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains the results for a fatigue analysis. Mechanica calculates all quantities at the h-node locations lying on the external surface of the model and reports values with respect to the global rectangular coordinate system. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains the displacement phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains the velocity phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains the acceleration phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains the rotation phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format.
study.f##
study.fatigue##
study.h##
study.i##
study.j##
study.k##
study.m##
Contains the rotational velocity phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains the rotational acceleration phases from a dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains reactions on constrained points and edges for static deformation or mode of vibration. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format. Contains the stress components distribution from a fatigue analysis expressed in ASCII. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set number in two-digit format. Contains information that the engine uses if you run a dynamic analysis using the Use Previous Modal or Dynamic Analysis option. Contains the velocity in a dynamic time or dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in twodigit format. Contains the acceleration in a dynamic time or dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode
study.q##
study.r##
study.ss##
study.coe
study.v##
study.w##
625
number in two-digit format. study.x## Contains the angular velocity in a dynamic time or dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format. Contains the angular acceleration in a dynamic time or dynamic frequency analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format. Contains maximum/minimum principal stress directions in static, modal, dynamic time, dynamic frequency, shock or buckling analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format. Contains shell stress/strain results in static, modal, dynamic time, dynamic frequency, shock, or buckling analysis. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format. Contains static analysis solution information needed to reconstruct element stress during buckling analysis. Contains the material orientation information. Contains plotting data for contact analysis. Mechanica reports values of measures at each load increment. The two pound signs (##) represent the load set or mode number in two-digit format.
study.y##
study.p##
study.n##
study.buc
study.mor study.c##
Mechanica also creates the following engine output file for thermal analyses only:
study.tld Contains information that the engine uses for structural analyses containing a thermal temperature load or temperature-dependent material properties.
Library Files
Mechanica creates and adds to the following library files when you place a material set, beam section set, shell property sets, or spring stiffness set in the library with the Add To Library button on the appropriate dialog box:
mmatl.lib beam_section.bsf Contains material sets. Contains the definition of a beam section you create (where beam_section is the name of the beam section). The beam library contains one .bsf file for each beam you create. Contains shell property sets. Contains spring stiffness sets.
mshlprp.lib mspstf.lib
626
IndexAdditional Information
A default material library resides in the lib subdirectory of the Mechanica home directory. When you start a Mechanica product, Mechanica searches for library files in the following directories, in this order: the lib subdirectory in the Mechanica home directory the text subdirectory in the Mechanica load point the current directory (the directory from which you started Mechanica) your home directory
Mechanica uses the first copy of the appropriate configuration or library file it finds. If you choose to add a material, beam section, spring stiffness, or shell property to the library, Mechanica creates a new version of the appropriate library file as follows: If Mechanica finds the file in the current directory or your home directory, Mechanica replaces the existing file with the new version. If Mechanica finds the file in the lib subdirectory or does not find the file, Mechanica places the new file in your home directory.
Results Files
Individual Mechanica products create the following results files (file represents the name you assign to the file):
file.rwd file.grt Contains the result window definitions you create and save. Contains in tabular form the XY values for a results graph you create for all Mechanica products. You create this file when you generate a graph report.
AutoGEM Files
Mechanica creates the following files when you use AutoGEM:
model.agm Contains information about the most recent AutoGEM operation you executed for the current model. You can access the AutoGEM log file regardless of whether AutoGEM completed successfully or unsuccessfully, or you interrupted it. Mechanica saves the AutoGEM log file as model.agm (where model is the name of your model). Mechanica overwrites these files with each successive AutoGEM session. If you want to save a particular AutoGEM session, you can rename it through the operating system. untitled.agm Mechanica saves the AutoGEM log file as untitled.agm if you have not named your model. Mechanica overwrites these files with each successive AutoGEM session. If you want to save a particular AutoGEM session, you can rename it through the operating system.
627
model.nas
model.fnf
In addition, Mechanica FEM mode creates the following files during the finite element modeling process.
model.bde model.fmp
Lists problem mesh elements that fail a requested quality check. Contains mesh data of a part. Mechanica creates this file in the current directory while generating the finite element mesh of your model. Contains mesh data of an assembly. Mechanica creates this file in the current directory while generating the finite element mesh of your model. Contains model's mesh and results data. Mechanica creates this file while performing a finite element analysis of your model. Lists a definition of your model and finite element results statistics. Contains plot file output from postprocessing.
model.fma
model.frd
model.inf model.plt
Miscellaneous Files
Mechanica creates the following files when you start the product:
mech_trl.txt.X (where X is an interger) Contains playback information of your actions in Mechanica. Mechanica automatically creates this file in the current directory when you start the program. The software starts a new mech_trl.txt.X file whenever you begin a new Mechanica session. Customer support can use this file to diagnose any problems you might have while running Mechanica.
628
IndexAdditional Information
Transferring Geometry
To learn about transferring geometry, read the following: Topic Transferring Geometric Entities Importing Geometry into Mechanica
Pro/ENGINEER arc
Mechanica arc
629
Bspline Bspline surface cone Coons patch cylinder face fillet surface surface of revolution line planar surface ruled surface spline spline surface tab cylinder torus cylindrical spline surface
NURBS NURBS surface revolved surface Coons surface ruled surface trimmed surface NURBS surface revolved surface line planar surface ruled surface piecewise Bezier curve piecewise Bezier surface ruled surface revolved surface Bezier surface
If you transfer a Pro/ENGINEER part containing surface pairs, one midsurface transfers into independent mode Mechanica for each surface pair. The midsurface translates to the same type of surface in Mechanica as the original Pro/ENGINEER surfaces in the surface pair would. For example, a planar surface pair in Pro/ENGINEER transfers to a single planar surface in Mechanica. You can also transfer datum points, curves, and surfaces from Pro/ENGINEER to Mechanica. For datum surfaces, you can transfer datum surfaces created using Pro/SURFACE or import them from an IGES file.
630
IndexAdditional Information
General Rules
Keep the following points in mind when importing your model into independent mode Mechanica: When you import a surface, the defining curves may be trimmed away. You can check a surface's defining curves by reviewing a surface through the Entity command on the Review menu. You can return defining curves to your model using the Untrim Surface command on the Edit>Geometry menu. After you import midsurface geometry into Mechanica, you should use the Review>Boundary Curves command to make sure there are no unintended cracks in your model. Cracks can occur if any curves and surfaces do not maintain their associations. When you import an assembly that contains mated surfaces, Mechanica merges the two surfaces into a single surface. If you create contacts for two parts with mated surfaces, Mechanica treats the two parts as separate, unmerged entities and places contacts on all surfaces 631
it considers valid for the contact. Should you then decide to work with the model in independent mode, Mechanica eliminates any superfluous contacts when it merges the surfaces during import. During import, Mechanica makes all surface normals consistent. For surfaces that are part of the boundary of a single volume, the normals are always set outward.
Import Considerations
Before you transfer your part or assembly to Mechanica, you should be aware of the following: Some of the geometry you import into Mechanica may not have the accuracy that Mechanica requires. In these cases, Mechanica uses the geometry's topological data to construct a valid model.
632
IndexAdditional Information
If you delete any of the geometry that Mechanica has transformed, you may not be able to recreate it accurately because Mechanica's geometry creation facilities are not the same as those of Pro/ENGINEER. When you import geometry, Mechanica highlights, but does not merge, partly coincident curves so you can carry out any needed edits. When you import a part, you cannot use some of the Mechanica commands on the Geometry>Model>Design Variables, and Edit>Geometry menus. These commands are displayed as inactive. If you save your model in Mechanica or unlink the model from Pro/ENGINEER, these commands become available again. Mechanica provides a Settings dialog box that you use to define the characteristics of geometry imported from an MCAD product. This dialog box defines such characteristics as the tolerance Mechanica applies in determining whether to merge geometry, the maximum surface aspect ratio, and so forth. If you are not satisfied with the results of an MCAD import, varying these settings can improve the quality of the import. To access the Settings dialog box, use the File>Import>Settings command. If you import intricate geometry, Mechanica attempts to delete surfaces that have an aspect ratio greater than 100:1 and a width less than 1/1000th of the model size. If you have very small surfaces that are larger than this, Mechanica will not delete them but may not be able to use AutoGEM efficiently. To specify a larger aspect ratio than the default just described, use the File>Import>Settings command to redefine the maximum surface aspect ratio. If a gap in your model is bigger than 1/1000th of the model size, Mechanica may not trim the surface at the gap. If it cannot trim the surface, Mechanica will not create a volume in your model. At times, two distinct nodes, edges, or faces in a single Pro/ENGINEER part are so close together that they must merge in Mechanica. When such a merge occurs, the .mnl file will contain one of the following warning messages (where name is the number of the entity or of the nodes, edges, or faces): Curve name is a boundary curve. or Curve name is partially coincident with another curve. Although the resulting model is a valid volume in Mechanica, the two nodes, edges, or faces are associated to each other, preventing the model from behaving as you intended it to.
633
634
IndexAdditional Information
Currently, Pro/ENGINEER outputs a FEM Neutral Format file containing information only about the model's mesh and loads/constraints. After you run a solver on the model, you must convert the solution results into FEM Neutral Format before the model is retrieved in Mechanica. Note: Pro/ENGINEER uses FEM Neutral Format revision 3. Consider the following conventions when you create your FEM Neutral Format file: FEM Neutral Format files have the extension .fnf. A FEM Neutral Format file has the following characteristics: o It is an ASCII file consisting of lines. o Each line contains 80 characters or less. o You can continue longer lines by using sub-lines. o End each sub-line with a backslash character (\), except for the last one. The FEM Neutral Format is case-insensitive.
635
Lines starting with a pound sign (#) as well as empty lines are treated as comments and are skipped (except for the first line).
Information in a FEM Neutral Format file is organized into sections. Each section describes its own class of objects. The order of sections in the FEM Neutral Format file is critical because information from the earlier-defined sections may be required in the sections that follow. You can skip some of the sections that are not relevant to the model description. Note: The FEM Neutral Format is backward-compatible. A FEM Neutral Format file must start with an identification line used to recognize the FEM Neutral Format. The identification line format follows. #PTC_FEM_NEUT n <flags> where: n revision number of the FEM Neutral Format file (corresponds to the revision number of the specification). The default is 3. flags reserved for future use. An identification line can appear as follows: #PTC_FEM_NEUT 1 Include the creation date as a comment: #DATE Wed Mar 22 13:56:07 EET 2000
Defining an Object
Define each object in a FEM Neutral Format file with "instructions." An instruction line starts with a percent sign (%). It consists of fields separated by spaces and/or tabulations. An instruction line includes the following components: instruction keyword indicating an instruction, for example, statistics obj_id integer handle of the object (this ID is not necessarily consecutive) key string definition used for a general definition of an object or another string specifying a feature of the object data object description (for example, placement, node ID, or element type)
The format of an instruction is as follows: %instruction <obj_id key> [: data ...] Follow these general guidelines for writing instructions: 636
IndexAdditional Information
Standard abbreviations may be used instead of full names of keywords. You can also define and use your own aliases. There may be cases when you need to skip a fieldfor example, when a particular field in an instruction is not applicable, or you want to use the system default for this field. To skip a field, enter an asterisk (*) in place of the data to be skipped. In this document, descriptions of the fields that can be replaced with an asterisk (*) are enclosed within angle brackets (< >), and the fields that can be omitted are enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) You can skip the final fields in an instruction by simply omitting them. Non-empty lines that begin with anything other than an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) are illegal and will generate an error.
You can define an object using one instruction or a group of instructions. If you use a group of instructions, follow these guidelines: If the object contains more than one instruction, you must combine the objects together as a group. You must assign the same instruction keyword obj_id to all instructions in the group. You must assign the key definition (DEF) to the first instruction in the group.
To learn about the instructions and items you will work with in defining a FEM Neutral Format file, see the following: Topic List of Available Sections List of Available Instructions Special Instructions Definitions of Some Fields Used in Instructions
637
END_SECT
ENS
END ALIAS TITLE STATISTICS ELEM_TYPE COORD_SYS MATERIAL ELEM_PROP ELEM_END_PROP NODE ELEM EDGE SURFACE LOAD_TYPE CON_CASE LOAD SOLUTION RESULT_TYPE
END ALS TTL STT ETP CS MAT EP EEP ND EL EDG SRF LTP CC LD SLU RTP
outside a section before using an alias HEADER HEADER ELEM_TYPE COORD_SYSTEMS MATERIALS PROPERTIES PROPERTIES MESH MESH MESH_TOPOLOGY MESH_TOPOLOGY LOADS LOADS LOADS ANALYSIS RESULTS
638
IndexAdditional Information
RESULT
RES
RESULTS
In this document, abbreviations are shown in parentheses. For example: RESULT_TYPE (RES).
Special Instructions
FEM Neutral Format files include special instructions. To learn about these special instructions, see the following topics: Topic Start and End of a Section End Instruction Defining Aliases
END Instruction
The END instruction appears as follows: %END The END instruction is optional. In a FEM Neutral Format file, all lines appearing after END are skipped.
Defining Aliases
The ALIAS (ALS) instruction is used to define aliases. You can define an alias for any keyword (instruction or key) and use it instead of the full name or abbreviation. 639
Note: Do not create an alias with the name reserved for keywords and standard abbreviations: this results in an error. If several aliases are defined for a keyword, only the last one is considered valid. You can use only alphanumeric aliases. An alias is defined as follows: %ALIAS : keyword alias where: keyword = full name or its abbreviation. alias = user-defined alias. A Typical Alias %ALIAS : CON_CASE C %ALIAS : EL FEM_ELEMENT
Referencing IDs
Use the following format to reference IDs of various geometry objects: elem_id ID of an element in the model (any positive number). node_id ID of a node in the model (any positive number). node_in_el_id ID of a node in an element (in the range from 1 to num_nodes, where num_nodes is the number of element nodes). The order of nodes in the element is defined in the ELEM_TYPE instruction. edge_in_el_id ID of an edge in an element (in the range from 1 to num_edges, where num_edges is the number of element edges). The order of edges in the element is defined in the ELEM_TYPE instruction.
640
IndexAdditional Information
face_in_el_id ID of a face in an element (in the range from 1 to num_faces, where num_faces is the number of element faces). The order of faces in the element is defined in the ELEM_TYPE instruction.
Value Types
Value_type appears in instructions describing applied loads/constraints and obtained results. Typically, the format is as follows: data_type <MASKABLE> where: data_type is one of the following: SCALAR (SCL) VECTOR_2 (VEC2) a vector with two components VECTOR (VEC) a vector with three components VECTOR_6 (VEC6) a vector with 6 components TENSOR (TNS)
MASKABLE indicates that the instruction may have skipped (not defined) components. MASKABLE can be defined for VECTOR_6 only.
For TENSOR, defined in the XYZ coordinates, the order of the components is the following: TX, TY, TZ, TXY, TYZ, TXZ and the tensor is defined as: T(X,Y,Z) = TX*X*X + TY*Y*Y + TZ*Z*Z + 2*TXY*X*Y + 2*TYZ*Y*Z + 2*TXZ*X*Z The statement "Value corresponds to the given Value_type" means that the value is one of the following: 1 2 3 6 scalar if data_type in Value_type is SCALAR scalars if data_type in Value_type is VECTOR_2 scalars if data_type in Value_type is VECTOR scalars if data_type in Value_type is VECTOR_6 or TENSOR
641
A solver should create a file that contains all the information from the input file "model.fnf," and append to this information the ANALYSIS and RESULTS sections. You then end up with a file that contains all the information originally defined in the input file, as well as the ANALYSIS and RESULTS data. The solution results are expected to be in exact correspondence with model definitions. To learn about these sections and the instructions they can contain, see the following topics: Topic HEADER Section ELEM_TYPES Section COORD_SYSTEMS Section MATERIALS Section PROPERTIES Section MESH Section MESH_TOPOLOGY Section LOADS Section ANALYSIS Section RESULTS Section
HEADER Section
The HEADER section can contain the TITLE (TTL) and STATISTICS (STT) instructions.
IndexAdditional Information
%TITLE : bracket
ELEM_TYPES Section
The ELEM_TYPES section contains the ELEM_TYPE (ETP) instruction.
643
Class SOLID SHELL TETRA (TET) TRIANGLE (TRI), QUAD (QUA) BAR SPAR, BEAM, GAP, ADV_BEAM (ADB), SPRING (SPR), ADV_SPRING (ADS) POINT
Supported Types
Sub_type can be LINEAR (LIN) or PARABOLIC (PAR). The default is LINEAR. This field must be skipped if Class is BAR or POINT. Typical ELEM_TYPE Instructions %ELEM_TYPE 1 DEF : SOLID TETRA PARABOLIC 4 6 4
644
IndexAdditional Information
%ELEM_TYPE 3 DEF : SHELL QUAD LINEAR 4 4 2 %ELEM_TYPE 4 DEF : SHELL TRIANGLE PARABOLIC 3 3 2 %ELEM_TYPE 7 DEF : BAR GAP * 2 1 0 %ELEM_TYPE 8 DEF : POINT MASS * 1 0 0
%ELEM_TYPE 2 EDGE : 1 1 2 4 %ELEM_TYPE 2 EDGE : 2 2 3 5 %ELEM_TYPE 2 EDGE : 3 3 1 6 %ELEM_TYPE 2 FACE : 1 1 2 3 %ELEM_TYPE 2 FACE : 2 1 3 2
COORD_SYSTEMS Section
The COORD_SYSTEMS section contains the COORD_SYS (CS) instructions.
IndexAdditional Information
X_vect0, X_vect1, and X_vect2 global coordinates of the X-vector of the described coordinate system. The abbreviated form for X_VECTOR is X.
Orig0, Orig1, and Orig2 global coordinates of the origin of the described coordinate system. The abbreviated form for ORIGIN is ORG.
MATERIALS Section
The MATERIALS section contains the MATERIAL (MAT) instruction.
648
IndexAdditional Information
PROPERTIES Section
The PROPERTIES section may contain the following instructions: ELEM_PROP (EP) ELEM_END_PROP (EEP)
649
For beam elements with additional end properties, the key REF can be used to reference instructions, defining the appropriate end properties (that is, ELEM_END_PROP). The supported element properties (keys of the ELEM_PROP instruction) are listed in the following table.
Used for SHELL elements BEAM and ADV_BEAM elements MASS elements Moment of inertia in an elemental coordinate system for BEAM and MASS elements GAP elements GAP elements GAP elements SPRING elements SPRING elements ADV_SPRING elements ADV_SPRING elements For ADV_BEAM elements, it may be one of: YES or NO. ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements
MASS_VALUE MOMENT_OF_INERTIA
MAS INE
650
IndexAdditional Information
651
%ELEM_TYPE 3 DEF : BAR SPAR * 2 1 0 ... %ELEM_PROP 1 DEF : 2 %ELEM_PROP 1 THICKNESS : 0.5 0.6 1.0 ... %ELEM_PROP 2 DEF : 3 %ELEM_PROP 2 CROSS_SECTION_AREA : 0.01
PIN_FLAG
PIN
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_ABOUT_Z_AXIS
MIZ
MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_ABOUT_Y_AXIS
MIY
AREA_PRODUCT_OF_INERTIA
API
652
IndexAdditional Information
elements TORSION_STIFFNESS_PARAMETER TSP ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements ADV_BEAM elements
NONSTRUCT_MASS_PER_UNIT_LENGTH
NML
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_C
YCC
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_C
ZCC
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_D
YCD
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_D
ZCD
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_E
YCE
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_E
ZCE
Y_COORD_OF_POINT_F
YCF
Z_COORD_OF_POINT_F
ZCF
NONSTR_MASS_MOMENT_PER_UNIT_LEN
NMU
WARPING_COEFFICIENT
WRC
Y_COORD_OF_GRAVITY_CENTER
YGC
Z_COORD_OF_GRAVITY_CENTER
ZGC
Y_COORD_OF_NEUTRAL_AXIS
YNA
Z_COORD_OF_NEUTRAL_AXIS
ZNA
653
654
IndexAdditional Information
%ELEM_END_PROP 5 CROSS_SECTION_AREA : 0.1 ... %ELEM_END_PROP 7 DEF : 3 %ELEM_END_PROP 7 CROSS_SECTION_AREA : 0.21 ...
655
MESH Section
The MESH section may contain the following instructions: NODE (ND) ELEM (EL)
656
IndexAdditional Information
Element Placement
This instruction has the following format: node1_id node2_id ... [cs_id] [offsets] For SOLID and SHELL elements, placement is a list of node_id's for all element nodes. Corner nodes should be listed first in the order referenced in ELEM_TYPE; then mid-nodesin the order of element edges. The format is as follows: node1_id ... nodeN_id where: N num_nodes for linear elements from the corresponding ELEM_TYPE definition, or (num_nodes + num_edges) for parabolic elements. For MASS and To Ground SPRING elements, placement is defined as follows: node_id <cs_id> where: node_id ID of the element node. cs_id ID of the elemental coordinate system. For MASS elements, cs_id is required only if inertia is defined for the element; that is, Prop_id is defined, and it references a set of properties with the MOMENT_OF_INERTIA line. For SPAR, GAP, SPRING elements, placement is: node1_id node2_id where: node1_id, node2_id IDs of its end nodes. For BEAM, ADV_BEAM elements, placement is defined as follows: node1_id node2_id cs_id <offset1 offset2> where: node1_id, node2_id IDs of its end nodes. cs_id ID of the elemental coordinate system. offset1 vector representing the offset of the first bar end from node1 in the elemental coordinate system. 657
offset2 vector representing the offset of the second bar end from node2 in the elemental coordinate system. The default for offset1 and offset2 is a zero vector. For ADV_SPRING element, placement is: node1_id node2_id cs_id where: node1_id, node2_id IDs of its end nodes. cs_id ID of the elemental coordinate system. Refer to the following example: %ELEM_TYPE 5 DEF : BAR BEAM * 2 1 0 ... ... %COORD_SYS 3 DEF : * CARTESIAN %COORD_SYS 3 X_VECTOR : 0. 1. 0. %COORD_SYS 3 Y_VECTOR : 1. 0. 0. %COORD_SYS 3 Z_VECTOR : 0. 0. -1. %COORD_SYS 3 ORIGIN : 0.88 -99. -1.5 ... ... %ELEM_PROP 2 DEF : 5 %ELEM_PROP 2 CROSS_SECTION_AREA : 0.01 0.021 %ELEM_PROP 2 MOMENT_OF_INERTIA : 0. 0. 0. ... ... %MATERIAL 1 DEF : ALUM ISOTROPIC %MATERIAL 1 YOUNG_MODULUS : 1.900000E+07 658
IndexAdditional Information
%MATERIAL 1 POISSON_RATIO : 2.100000E-01 ... ... ... %NODE 7 DEF : 0.88 -99. -1.5 .88 -99. -1.5 %NODE 8 DEF : 0.88 0. -1.5 .88 0. -1.5 %ELEM 10 DEF : 5 1 2 7 8 3 0.1 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
MESH_TOPOLOGY Section
The MESH_TOPOLOGY section may contain the following instructions: EDGE (EDG) SURFACE(SRF)
%SURFACE surface_id DEF: <num_faces> where: surface_id ID of the surface. num_faces number of faces lying on the surface.
LOADS Section
The LOADS section may contain the following instructions: LOAD_TYPE (LTP) CON_CASE (CC)
IndexAdditional Information
Placement_type can be one of the following: BODY, ELEM, ELEM_FACE, ELEM_EDGE, NODE. Typical LOAD_TYPE Instructions %LOAD_TYPE 1 DEF : DISPLACEMENT NODE VECTOR_6 MASKABLE %LOAD_TYPE 3 DEF : FORCE NODE VECTOR %LOAD_TYPE 5 DEF : ACCELERATION BODY VECTOR %LOAD_TYPE 7 DEF : TEMPERATURE NODE SCALAR
661
con_case_id refers to CON_CASE containing this load/constraint. If this analysis is time-dependent and the load/constraint is included in one step, specify the case number starting with 1. cs_type indicates whether the value is defined in the global coordinate system (GCS), local nodal coordinate system (NCS), or local elemental coordinate system (ECS). For SCALAR values, cs_type should be skipped. The default is GCS. cs_id refers to the definition of coordinate system. mask string of 0's or 1's, used to define mask for MASKABLE values (refer to LOAD_TYPE (LTP) Instruction). placement depends on the corresponding LOAD_TYPE. value corresponds to the Value_type, defined in LOAD_TYPE. For MASKABLE loads, it contains only values for components with 1's.
Placement
If Placement_type in LOAD_TYPE is: BODY then placement is absent. ELEM then placement is elem_id. ELEM_FACE then placement is elem_id face_in_el_id. ELEM_EDGE then placement is elem_id edge_in_el_id. NODE then placement is node_id.
Refer to the following example: %NODE 5 DEF : 0.88 -99. -1.5 ... %NODE 15 DEF : 11. -11. 0.11 ... %LOAD_TYPE 3 DEF : DISPLACEMENT NODE VECTOR_6 MASKABLE ... %LOAD 1 DEF : 3 1 * GCS * 111000 %LOAD 1 VAL : 5 0. 0. 0. %LOAD 1 VAL : 15 3. 4. 5.
662
IndexAdditional Information
ANALYSIS Section
The ANALYSIS section may contain the SOLUTION (SLU) instruction.
RESULTS Section
The RESULTS section may contain the following instructions: RESULT_TYPE (RTP) RESULT (RES)
663
%RESULT_TYPE id DEF : Name Placement_type Value_type where: Name is the name of the result. It can be one of the following: DISPLACEMENT (DSP) STRESS (STR) STRAIN (STN) REACTION_FORCE (RF) ERROR_ESTIMATE (ERR) THERMAL_STRAIN (THS) TEMPERATURE (TEM) HEAT_FLUX (HFL) HEAT_GRADIENT (HGR) MODE_FREQUENCY (FRQ)
Placement_type one of the following types: ELEM is the elemental result (currently it may be only ERROR_ESTIMATE). ELEM_NODE is the non-averaged data, defined for every node of an element (for example, STRESS, STRAIN, THERMAL_STRAIN, HEAT_FLUX, HEAT_GRADIENT) NODE is the nodal data (for example, DISPLACEMENT, REACTION_FORCE, TEMPERATURE). BODY is the whole model result (currently it may be only MODE_FREQUENCY).
664
IndexAdditional Information
ERROR_ESTIMATE STRESS, STRAIN, THERMAL_STRAIN, HEAT_FLUX, HEAT_GRADIENT MODE_FREQUENCY ERROR_ESTIMATE (For different values on both sides) STRESS, STRAIN (For different values on both sides)
Refer to the following examples: %RESULT_TYPE 1 DEF : DISPLACEMENT NODE VECTOR_6 %RESULT_TYPE 3 DEF : STRESS ELEM_NODE TENSOR %RESULT_TYPE 4 DEF : ERROR_ESTIMATE ELEM SCALAR
Placement of Results
The following table lists possible placements depending on Placement_type given in the RESULT_TYPE instruction. 665
Placement_type ELEM ELEM_FACE ELEM_NODE FACE_NODE NODE BODY elem_id elem_id face_in_el_id elem_id node_in_el_id
Placement
%ELEM_TYPE 1 DEF : SHELL TRIANGLE LINEAR 3 3 2 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 1 1 2 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 2 2 3 %ELEM_TYPE 1 EDGE : 3 3 1 %ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 1 1 2 3 %ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 2 1 3 2 %RESULT_TYPE 1 DEF : DISPLACEMENT NODE VECTOR_6 %RESULT_TYPE 2 DEF : STRESS FACE_NODE TENSOR\ ECS %RESULT_TYPE 3 DEF : ERROR_ESTIMATE ELEM SCALAR %ELEM 5 DEF : 1 .... # Displacement %RESULT 1 DEF : 1 1 # in node17 %RESULT 1 VAL : 17 1. 2. 3. 0. 0. 0. # in node 25 %RESULT 1 VAL : 25 11. 22. 33. 0. 0. 0. ... # Stress 666
IndexAdditional Information
%RESULT 20 DEF : 2 1 * ECS # in SHELL element #5, face 1 (top), node #1 %RESULT 20 VAL : 5 1 1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 -0.6 # in SHELL element #5, face 2 (bottom), node #1 %RESULT 20 VAL : 5 2 1 ... # in SHELL element #5, face 2 (bottom), node #3 %RESULT 20 VAL : 5 2 3 ... ... # Error Estimate %RESULT 50 DEF : 3 # on element #5, Face 1 (Top) %RESULT 50 VAL : 5 1 0.5 # on element #5, Face 2 (Bottom) %RESULT 50 VAL : 5 2 0.05
667
The solver technology integrated with Mechanica fatigue analysis is provided by nCode International. Fatigue analysis requires a Fatigue Advisor license from PTC.
History of Fatigue
The majority of component designs involve parts subjected to fluctuating or cyclic loads. Such loading induces fluctuating or cyclic stresses that often result in failure by fatigue. About 95% of all structural failures occur through a fatigue mechanism. The damage done during the fatigue process is cumulative and generally unrecoverable, due to the following: It is nearly impossible to detect any progressive changes in material behavior during the fatigue process, so failures often occur without warning. Periods of rest, with the fatigue stress removed, do not lead to any measurable healing or recovery.
It was well-known that wood or metal could be made to break by repeatedly bending it back and forth with a large amplitude. But, it was then discovered that repeated stressing can produce fracture even when the stress amplitude is apparently well within the elastic range of the material. When fatigue failures of railway axles became a widespread problem in the middle of the nineteenth century, this drew 668
IndexAdditional Information
attention to cyclic loading effects. This was the first time that many similar components had been subjected to millions of cycles at stress levels well below the monotonic tensile yield stress. Between 1852 and 1870 the German railway engineer August Whler set up and conducted the first systematic fatigue investigation. Some of Whler's data are for Krupp axle steel and are plotted, in terms of nominal stress (S) vs. number of cycles to failure (N), on what has become known as the S-N diagram. Each curve on such a diagram is still referred to as a Whler line.
Note: 1centner = 50 kg, 1 zoll = 1 inch, 1 centner/zoll2 ~ 0.75 MPa At about the same time, other engineers began to concern themselves with problems of failures associated with fluctuating loads in bridges, marine equipment, and power generation machines. During the first part of the twentieth century, more effort was placed on understanding the mechanisms of the fatigue process rather than just observing its results. This activity finally led, in the late fifties and early sixties, to the development of the two approaches, one based on linear elastic fracture mechanics, LEFM, to explain how cracks propagate, and the so-called Coffin-Manson local strain methodology to explain crack initiation. Through this understanding, modern designers and engineers have been able to create more fatigue-resistant components without relying solely on experimentation. From a practical point of view, this has been a much more profitable approach.
669
Physics of Fatigue
Since 1830, it has been recognized that metal under a repetitive or fluctuating load will fail at a stress level lower than required to cause failure under a single application of the same load. The following diagram shows a simple component subjected to a uniform sinusoidally varying force. After a period of time, a crack can be seen to initiate on the circumference of the hole. This crack will then propagate through the component until the remaining intact section is incapable of sustaining the imposed stresses and the component fails.
The physical development of a crack is generally divided into 2 separate stages. These relate to the crack initiation phase (Stage I) and the crack growth phase (Stage II). Fatigue cracks initiate through the release of shear strain energy. The following diagram shows how the shear stresses result in local plastic deformation along slip planes. As the loading is cycled sinusoidally, the slip planes move back and forth like a pack of cards, resulting in small extrusions and intrusions on the crystal surface. These surface disturbances are approximately 1 to 10 microns in height and constitute embryonic cracks.
670
IndexAdditional Information
A crack initiates in this way until it reaches the grain boundary. At this point the mechanism is gradually transferred to the adjacent grain When the crack has grown through approximately 3 grains, it is seen to change its direction of propagation. Stage I growth follows the direction of the maximum shear plane, or 45 to the direction of loading. During Stage II the physical mechanism for fatigue changes. The crack is now sufficiently large to form a geometrical stress concentration. A tensile plastic zone is created at the crack tip as shown in the following diagram. After this stage, the crack propagates perpendicular to the direction of the applied load.
As the physical mechanism for fatigue is divided into two stages, the methods of analysis are also conventionally divided into two stages. Stage I is typically analyzed using the local strain (or E-N) approach, while Stage II is analyzed using a fracture mechanics based approach. A complete fatigue prediction could therefore use a combination of both methods: Total Life = Life to initiation + Life taken to propagate crack to failure
671
However, most engineering components spend most of their time at either one stage or the other. In this case, it is normal to conservatively consider only one stage. For example, in most ground vehicle designs, life is typically governed by time to initiation. Components are relatively stiff and the materials fairly brittle. Once the crack has initiated, it takes a relatively short time to propagate to failure. By contrast, many aerospace applications use flexible components made of very ductile materials. In this case, cracks propagate relatively slowly and so the fracture mechanics approaches are usually more appropriate. The physical nature of fatigue was not widely understood during the early days. August Whler therefore took a more pragmatic view of fatigue analysis. The method he developed later became known as nominal stress (or S-N) fatigue analysis. This did not differentiate between the Stage I and II growth methods and instead related the nominal stress range to the time taken to complete failure. Though S-N analysis is still widely used in test-based fatigue analysis, it has one major drawback for CAE applications. Fatigue initiation is driven by local plastic strains, but S-N analysis uses elastic stress as the input. Therefore, S-N analysis is unsuitable for performing CAE analysis on components containing local areas of plasticity. For this reason local strain (or E-N) methods are more universally suitable. Mechanica fatigue analysis uses the E-N method.
672
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica uses a generic set of fatigue properties to model low alloy steels, unalloyed steels, aluminum alloys, and titanium alloys. These generic properties have been compiled by Baumel Jr. and Seeger and are known as the Uniform Material Law. While they cannot be expected to give accurate fatigue lives for practical purposes, they are ideal for determining whether a component is likely to suffer from fatigue problems, and whether a more detailed analysis is needed before commissioning. For more information on the Uniform Material Law, see Materials Science Monographs, 61, "Materials Data for Cyclic Loading, Supplement 1." The following discussion covers two aspects of fatigue theory that are critical to an understanding of the how Fatigue Advisor measures fatigue: Topic Strain Cycles Factors That Affect Fatigue Life
Strain Cycles
Before looking in more detail at the E-N procedure, it helps to understand the three different types of cyclic strains that contribute to the fatigue process. The following diagrams and descriptions explain each separate type. The first figure illustrates a fully-reversed strain cycle with a sinusoidal form. This is an idealized loading condition typically found in rotating shafts operating at constant speed without overloads. This is also the type of strain cycle used for most fatigue tests. For this kind of cycle, the maximum ( max) and minimum ( min) strains are of equal magnitude but opposite sign. Usually tensile strain is considered to be positive and compressive strain negative. The strain range, r, is the algebraic difference between the maximum and minimum strains in a cycle.
r
max
min a,
/2=(
max
/2
673
The second figure illustrates the more general situation where the maximum and minimum strains are not equal. In this case, they are both tensile and define a mean offset, m = ( max + min) / 2, for the cyclic loading.
As mentioned above, most basic fatigue data are collected using fully-reversed loads. Therefore, these data are not directly applicable for strain cycles with a non-zero mean ( m 0). In order to predict more realistic life estimates for strain cycles with tensile or compressive mean stress, results of the tests conducted using fullyreversed loads are corrected. The choice of corrective approach to use depends on whether the mean stress is primarily tensile or compressive. The reason for this can be seen in the following plot which schematically illustrates the effect of mean stress on the strain-life (E-N) curve. Viewed conceptually, tensile mean stress acts to pull open a crack while compressive mean stress works to keep it closed. Typically the effects are concentrated at the long life end of the diagram, with tensile mean stress reducing life and compressive mean stress extending it.
674
IndexAdditional Information
Since the tests required to calculate E-N curves for a range of mean stresses are quite expensive, several empirical relationships have been developed to model the effect of mean stress. Of all the proposed methods, two have been most widely accepted: The Smith, Watson, Topper Approach The Morrow Correction
For loading sequences which are predominantly tensile in nature, the Smith, Watson, Topper approach is more conservative and is therefore recommended. In the case where the loading is predominantly compressive, particularly for wholly compressive cycles, the Morrow correction can be used to provide more realistic life estimates. Mechanica uses both methods and the most appropriate method is automatically chosen. For more information on the Smith, Watson, Topper approach, see "A Stress-Strain Function for the Fatigue of Metals", Journal of Materials, Vol. 5, No. 4, 1970. For more information on the Morrow correction, see "Fatigue Design Handbook", Advances in Engineering, Vol. 4, Society of Automotive Engineers, 1968. The next figure illustrates a more complex, variable amplitude loading pattern that is closer to the cyclic strains found in real structures.
675
For variable amplitude loading it is necessary to extract the fatigue damaging cycles from the signal and then evaluate the damage carried out by each cycle. The total damage is the sum of the damage caused by each individual cycle. Each fatigue cycle is extracted by a process known as hysteresis loop capture. The loci of the stress and strain are plotted as shown in the following diagram.
When a stress-strain hysteresis loop is closed, then the strain range and mean stress are returned and the damage calculated using the E-N curve modified for mean stress correction. This analysis is carried out over the whole strain time signal until all the cycles have been extracted and the total damage evaluated. A very efficient algorithm has been developed to perform cycle extraction known as: Rainflow Cycle Counting. This is the algorithm that Mechanica uses. Mechanica normally uses a linear elastic solution to determine the pseudo-elastic strains in a component. In other words, the solution ignores plasticity. Before proceeding with the fatigue analysis, these strains are automatically converted into non-linear elastic-plastic strains using Neuber's relationship.
IndexAdditional Information
type of loading, Cload effect of notches, Cnotch effect of surface finish, Csur < 1 (promotes crack growth) effect of surface treatment, Csur >1 (inhibits crack growth)
To account for these effects, specific modifying factors are typically applied to the test result so that:
e
= 'eCnotchCsizeCloadCsur . . .
where reciprocal of the product, CnotchCsizeCloadCsur , is collectively known as the fatigue strength reduction factor Kf: Kf = 1 / (CnotchCsizeCloadCsur . . .) It is very important to remember that all the modification factors are empirical, conservative and generally only applicable to steel. They provide little or no fundamental insight into the fatigue process itself other than providing approximate trends. In particular they should not be used in areas outside their measured applicability. Read the following to learn more about the factors that influence fatigue life: Topic The Influence of Component Size The Influence of Loading Type The Influence of Surface Finish The Qualitative Influence of Surface Treatment The Quantitative Effect of Surface Treatments on the Endurance Limit The Influence of Component Size Fatigue in metals results from the nucleation and subsequent growth of crack-like flaws under the influence of an alternating stress field. The theory is that failure starts at the weakest link, the most favorably orientated metal crystal for example, and then grows through less favorably orientated grains until final failure. Intuitively, it would seem reasonable to suppose that the larger the volume of material subjected to the alternating stress, the higher the probability of finding the weakest link sooner. Actual test data do confirm the presence of a size effect particularly in the case of bending and torsion. The stress gradient built up through the section, in bending and to a lesser extent in torsion, concentrates more than 95% of the maximum surface stress in a thin layer of surface material. In large sections, this stress gradient is less steep than in smaller sections. So the volume of material available that could contain a critical flaw will be greater, leading to a reduced fatigue strength. The effect is small for axial 677
tension where the stress gradient is absent. The value for Csize is estimated from one of the following. If the diameter of the test specimen shaft is d < 6 mm: Csize = 1 If the diameter of the test specimen shaft is 6 mm < d < 250 mm Csize = 1.189d-0.097 The effect of size is particularly important for the analysis of rotating shafts such as might be found in vehicle powertrains. For situations where components do not have a round cross section, the following equation calculates an equivalent diameter, deq, for a rectangular section under bending with width (w) and thickness (t): deq2 = 0.65wt The Influence of Loading Type Fatigue data measured using one type of cyclic loading, axial tension for example, may be "corrected" to represent the data that would have been obtained had the test been performed using some other loading methodology such as torsion or bending. The standardized rotating bend test calls for tests to be carried out under conditions of fully reversed bending. In moving from one loading condition to another, the values of Cload to be used with the endurance limit, e are detailed below:
Measured Loading Axial Axial Bending Bending Torsion Torsion to to to to to to Target Loading Bending Torsion Torsion Axial Axial Bending C
load
Thus, using the values from this table, if an axial tension load produces a strain of e, the strain produced under a bending load would be 1.25 e. In addition to influencing the endurance limit, loading conditions can also influence the Basquin slope, b, which is used when plotting the E-N curve on log-log scale. This effect is usually taken into account by modification of the strain at 103 cycles, 678
IndexAdditional Information
3, as well as factor:
e.
modification
C'
load
The Influence of Surface Finish A very high proportion of all fatigue failures nucleate at the surface of components so that surface conditions become an extremely important factor influencing fatigue strength. Various surface conditions are usually judged against the polished laboratory specimen standard. Normally, scratches, pits, machining marks, and so forth, influence fatigue strength by providing additional stress raisers that aid the process of crack nucleation. The diagram below shows that high strength steels are more adversely affected by a rough surface finish than softer steels. For this reason, the surface finish correction factor, Csur < 1, is strongly related to tensile strength. Here the surface finish correction factor categorizes finish in qualitative terms such as polished, machined, and forged.
679
Note that some of the curves presented in this figure include effects other than just surface finish. For example, the forged and hot rolled curves include the effect of decarburization. Other diagrams present the surface finish correction factor in a more quantitative way by using a quantitative measure of surface roughness such as RA (the root mean square) or AA (the arithmetic average). The following diagram shows the effect of surface roughness on the surface finish correction factor.
Values of surface roughness associated with each of the manufacturing processes are readily available in handbooks, as in the example below:
Type of Finish (Microns) Lathe-formed Partly hand polished Hand Polished Ground Superfinished Ground and polished Surface Roughness
The Qualitative Influence of Surface Treatment As in the case of surface finish, surface treatment can greatly influence fatigue strength, particularly the endurance limit. The net effect of the treatment is to alter the state of residual stress at the free surface.
680
IndexAdditional Information
Residual stresses arise when plastic deformation is not uniformly distributed throughout the entire cross section of the component being deformed. In the preceding figures, a metal bar has a surface that is being deformed in tension by bending. At time T=1, bending moment M1 is being applied and is in the elastic range. At time T=2, the bending moment has increased to M2, the yield stress (Sy) has been reached, and the surface undergoes plastic deformation. When the external force is removed, the regions that were plastically deformed prevent the adjacent elastic regions from complete elastic recovery to the unstrained condition. In this way, the elastically deformed regions are
681
left in residual tension, and the plastically deformed regions are in a state of residual compression. The result is the stress distribution at time T=3. For many purposes, residual stress can be considered identical to the stresses produced by an external force. Thus, the presence of a compressive residual stress at the surface of a component will effectively decrease the probability of fatigue failure.
The preceding figure illustrates the superposition of applied and residual stresses. The top schematic shows an elastic stress distribution in a beam under bending moment M with no residual stress. In the center schematic, a typical residual stress distribution associated with a mechanical surface treatment such as shot peening is detailed. Note that the
682
IndexAdditional Information
compressive stress at the surface is compensated by an equivalent tensile stress over the interior of the cross section. In the bottom schematic, the distribution due to the algebraic summation of the applied stress (caused by bending moment M) and residual stress is shown. Note that the maximum tensile stress at the surface has been reduced by the amount of the residual stress. Also, the peak tensile stress has now been moved to the interior of the beam. The magnitude of this stress will depend on the gradient of the applied stress and the residual stress distribution. Under these conditions, subsurface crack initiation becomes a possibility.
Surface treatments are divided broadly into mechanical, thermal, and plating processes. The first two processes provide a compressive layer. The plating process provides a tensile residual stress. Following is detailed description of each process: Mechanical Treatments The main commercial methods for introducing residual compressive stresses are cold rolling and shot peening. Although some alteration in the strength of the material occurs as a result of work hardening, the improvement in fatigue strength is due mainly to the compressive surface stress. Surface rolling is particularly suited to large parts and is frequently used in critical components such as crankshafts and the bearing surface of railway axles. Bolts with rolled threads typically possess twice the fatigue strength of conventionally machined threads. Shot peening, which consists of firing fine steel or cast iron shot against the surface of a component, is particularly well suited to processing small mass produced parts. It is important to remember that cold rolling and shot peening have their greatest effect at long lives. At short lives they have little or no effect. As with other modifying factors, correction factors can be used to account for the effect of these mechanically induced compressive stresses by adjusting the endurance limit e. Typically the factor associated with peening is about 1.5 to 2.0. Thermal Treatments Thermal treatments are processes that rely on the diffusion of either carbon (carburizing) or nitrogen (nitriding) onto and into the surface of a steel component. Both types of atoms are interstitial, that is they occupy the spaces between adjacent iron atoms, thereby increasing the strength of the steel and causing a compressive residual stress to be left on the surface through volumetric changes. Carburizing is typically a three-step process: o o o packing the steel components within boxes which contain carbonaceous solids sealing to exclude the atmosphere heating to about 900 degrees Celsius for a period of time that depends on the depth of the case required
683
Alternatively components may be heated in a furnace in the presence of a hot carburizing gas such as natural gas. This process has the advantage that it is quicker and more accurate. In addition, the carburizing cycle may be followed up by a diffusion cycle with no carburizing agent present. This allows some of the carbon atoms to diffuse further into the component and thus reduces gradients. The nitriding process is very similar in nature to gas carburizing except that ammonia gas is used and the components are soaked at lower temperatures. Typically 48 hours at about 550 degrees Celsius will provide a nitrided case depth of about 0.5 mm. Nitriding is particularly suited to the treatment of finished notched components such as gears and slotted shafts. The effectiveness of the process is illustrated in the following table:
Endurance Limit (MPa) Geometry Un-notched Semicircular notch V notch Not Nitrided 310 175 175 Nitrided 620 600 550
Plating Chrome and nickel plating of steel components can decrease the endurance limit by more than half, due to the creation of tensile residual stresses at the surface. These tensile stresses are a direct result of the plating process itself. As in the case of mechanically induced surface stresses, the effect of plating is most pronounced at the long life end of the spectrum and also with higher strength materials. Introducing a compressive residual stress prior to the plating process such as shot peening or nitriding can reduce the harmful effects of plating. Annealing components after plating, thereby relieving the tensions, is an alternative approach.
The Quantitative Effect of Surface Treatments on the Endurance Limit (Steels) The effect of surface treatment depends on the surface finish. The increase in endurance limit stress due to the surface treatment is given in the following table:
Increase in Endurance Limit Finish Polished Ground Machined Hot Rolled Shot Peened +15% +20% +30% +40% Cold Rolled +50% +0% +70% +0% Nitrided +100% +100% +100% +100%
684
IndexAdditional Information
Cast Forged
+40% +100%
+0% +0%
+100% +100%
Whatever correction was made by the surface finish, applying a surface treatment will have a subsequent effect based on the preceding table. For example, if machining reduces the endurance limit by 30%, then from the table it can be seen that cold rolling will recover the loss by increasing the limit 70%.
685
Overview
The formulae given in this document express the fundamental relationships between shell forces, moments, strains, curvature changes, and shell properties and results. These formulae are provided to unambiguously define the conventions used to describe the various modeling and results data for shells. You specify properties that define the mechanical behavior of laminate shells on the laminate stiffness version of the Shell Property Definition dialog box. See About Shell Properties for more information. At the point for which you want to see results, you define the following properties relative to the material orientation: shell extensional stiffnesses shell transverse shear stiffnesses shell extensional-bending coupling stiffnesses shell bending stiffnesses shell resultant thermal moment coefficients shell resultant thermal force coefficient mass per unit area rotary inertia per unit area
You can review the following results quantities with respect to the material orientation at the point of interest or with respect to a coordinate system. See Relative Results for more information. 686 rotation of shell midsurface about the X and Y axes midsurface strain curvature change of the shell midsurface
IndexAdditional Information
shell resultant moment shell resultant force shell transverse shear force stress displacement of the shell midsurface
See the List of Symbols for the symbols that represent these terms. These formulae and their descriptions are not meant to be a tutorial for the analysis of shells. More detailed information concerning the modeling of laminated or orthotropic shells may be found in the texts by Jones (1), Reddy (2), Tsai (3), Ugural (4) and others. The Bibliography describes these texts. The figures and equations presented in this section are given for flat shells, or plates. The engineering concepts presented here generalize to curved shells, but the mathematical descriptions of curved shells are more complicated and will not be given.
687
As mentioned above, it is assumed that the displacement of any point (x, y, z) in the shell can be expressed in terms of the displacement and rotation of the point (x, y, 0) on the midsurface of the shell. Specifically, it is assumed that:
where:
are the components of displacement in the x, y, and z directions, respectively are the components of displacement of the midsurface are the (small) rotations of the midsurface about the x and y axes, respectively
and
Note that Equation (A.2) contains the tensor shear strain components, and , and not the engineering shear strain components, which are twice the values of the tensor shear strain components. For flat shells, the tensor shear strain components are:
and
688
IndexAdditional Information
The shell resultant forces ( ), the shell resultant moments ( ), and the shell transverse shear forces ( ) are obtained by integrating the stress components through the thickness of the shell. The shell resultant forces are given by:
The following figure illustrates the sign conventions employed for the resultant forces and moments, and transverse shear forces. Note that a positive moment, , induces positive strain, , in the top half of the shell (z > 0) and negative strain in the bottom half of the shell (z < 0).
689
The relationship between the shell resultants, and the midsurface strains and curvature changes are given by:
690
IndexAdditional Information
and:
In equation (A.6), the quantities (where i,j = 1, 2, 6) are called the shell extensional stiffnesses, the quantities are called the bending stiffnesses, the quantities are called the extensional-bending coupling stiffnesses, and the quantities (where k,l = 4,5) are called the transverse shear stiffnesses. The quantities quantities and and are the transverse shear strains on the midsurface. The are the resultant thermal forces and moments respectively.
The shell stiffness and thermal resultants introduced in Equations (A.6) and (A.7) are defined by integrating the material properties of the shell through the thickness of the shell. The extensional, bending, and extensional-bending stiffnesses are given by:
and:
and:
691
where
where:
are (non-reduced) stiffnesses of the material, and are the shear correction coefficients, which for a homogeneous shell are often taken to be .
Note that if the material of the shell is distributed symmetrically about the midsurface, then the integral in Equation (A.9) vanishes and the extensional-bending coupling stiffnesses are identically zero. The resultant thermal forces and moments are given by:
and:
where:
are the coefficients of thermal expansion of the material, and is the change in temperature from the stress-free state.
If the change in temperature is uniform through the thickness of the shell, then the in Equations (A.12) and (A.13) may be removed from the integral, resulting in Equations (A.14) and (A.15):
692
IndexAdditional Information
The mass properties for shells are also obtained by integrating the material property data through the thickness of the shell. The mass per unit area, , is given by:
where
693
List of Symbols
The following table defines the symbols used in this document:
Symbol
Definition
coefficients of thermal expansion
shell extensional stiffness shell transverse shear stiffness shell extensional-bending coupling stiffness rotation of shell midsurface about the X and Y axes material stiffness shell bending stiffness temperature change strain
midsurface (or membrane) strain curvature change of the shell midsurface (k,l = 4,5) shear correction coefficients shell resultant moment shell resultant thermal moment shell resultant thermal moment coefficient shell resultant force shell resultant thermal force shell resultant thermal force coefficient shell transverse shear force
694
IndexAdditional Information
(i,j = 1,2,6)
material reduced stiffness mass per unit area rotary inertia per unit area stress
x, y z
Bibliography
1. 2. 3. 4. Jones, Robert M. Mechanics of Composite Materials. Washington, DC: Scripta Book Company, 1975. Reddy, J.N. Energy and Variational Method in Applied Mechanics. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1984. Tsai, S. W. and H. T. Hahn Introduction to Composite Materials. Westport, CT: Technomic Publishing Co., 1980. Ugural, A. C. Stresses in Plates and Shells. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981.
695
Verification Guide
Verification Overview
Mechanica is a family of design analysis products. The main products are Structure and Thermal. Several optional modules are tightly integrated with these main products. Mechanica documentation is written for mechanical engineers. It assumes a working knowledge of mechanical engineering theory, terminology, and practice. However, you do not need any specialized knowledge of design analysis to use Mechanica software or its documentation. Read the following topics for information on using this book, Verification Guide, and for an overview of the documentation available for the current release of Mechanica. This preface covers: Topic Using This Guide References
696
IndexAdditional Information
Organization
Here are the topics covered in this guide:
Structure Models
Static Analysis
Modal Analysis
Thermal Models
Vibration Models
Buckling Models Buckling Analysis Describes a buckling analysis problem and compares results.
Nonlinear Models
697
Optimization Models
Optimization Analysis
The results in this guide are from the current release of Mechanica running on the Sun workstation. If you are running these programs on a different platform, your results and what you see on the screen may differ slightly from the results and graphics in this document. We have not discovered any significant differences in any results on the different platforms that we support.
Identification System
The verification problems are identified by their study name. For example, mvsm003 indicates that this is the third Structure modal analysis problem in the Verification Guide. The study names are determined by the following convention: First two alphabetic characters: mv Mechanica Verification Third alphabetic character: s Structure t Thermal o Optimization Fourth alphabetic character: o Structure m Modal 698
IndexAdditional Information
s Static l Laminate t Dynamic Time Response f Dynamic Frequency Response k Dynamic Shock Response b Buckling c Contact d Large Deformation p Prestress o Thermal s Steady-State t Transient o Optimization o Optimization o Three digit numeral: 001 Sequential problem number Use these design study names if you want to run a study or review results.
699
Results Conventions
This section describes the conventions used in the results table included for each problem. Following is an example of a results table:
Theory
MSC/ NASTRAN
Structure
% Difference
2.8769e 3
2.8715e3
2.8725e 3
0.18%
Max P: 7
No. Equations: 33
Refer to the following information for an explanation of each column in the results table: Column 1 Displays the results quantity of interest. Column 2 Displays the theoretical results, which are taken from the "Reference" listed on the first page of each model summary. Column 3 (optional) Displays results from other programs, in this case NASTRAN. Column 4 Displays Mechanica results. Column 5 Displays the percentage difference between the Mechanica results and the theoretical answer.
Beneath the results quantity name, in parentheses, is additional information you can use to view the results on your system. In this area, you will find one or more pieces of information (xxxx is the name of the measure, analysis, or load; x is the mode number): measure name, denoted by (m=xxxx) analysis name, denoted by (a=xxxx) load name, denoted by (l=xxxx) mode number (for modal analysis), denoted by (mode=x)
When multiple analyses, loads, or measures exist in a study, the analysis name and load name, measure name, or mode number are listed. You can use this information in two ways. You can view or print out the study.rpt file in a shell, or you can view the information in the summary file for the design study. To display the summary file, open the model with the same name as the study, 700
IndexAdditional Information
select Run from the Main menu, then select Status. Next, select Summary from the Design Study Status dialog box and find the measure name. For verification problems, the bottom line of the table displays the convergence percentage and the type of convergence, the maximum p-level order reached at convergence, and the number of equations required for convergence. For Structure models, the convergence option Local Edge Disp & Local Strain Energy is abbreviated as Local Disp and SE in this guide. For Thermal models, the convergence option Local Temp and Energy Norm is abbreviated Local Temp and EN.
Installation Instructions
The verification models are on the Pro/ENGINEER CD-ROM you received. The models are in the ms_verf.23 directory. You install the Mechanica verification models with your Mechanica installation.
References
Following is a list of references used in this guide: Barlow, J., and Davies, G.A.O. Selected FE Benchmarks in Structural and Thermal Analysis. UK: NAFEMS, Revision 2, October, 1987. Chahjes, A. Principles of Structural Stability Theory. Prentice-Hall, 1974. Cameron, A.D., Casy, J.A., and Simpson, G.B. Benchmark Tests for Thermal Analysis (Summary). UK: NAFEMS, August, 1986. Imai, Kanji. Configuration Optimization of Trusses by the Multiplier Method. LA: University of California, UCLA-ENG-7842. Kane, T.R., and Levinson, D.A. Dynamics: Theory and Application. NY: McGraw-Hill, 1985. Kreith, F. Principles of Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. PA: International Textbook Co., 1959. Love, A.E.H. A Treatise on the Mathematical Theory of Elasticity. 4th ed. NY: Dover Publications, 1944. MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I. Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985. MacNeal-Schwendler Corporation. MSC/NASTRAN Verification Problem Manual. MSC/NASTRAN Version 64, January, 1986. Meriam, J.L. Engineering Mechanics, Vol. 2: Dynamics. NY: John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1978. Noor, A.K., and Mathers, M.D., "Shear-Flexible Finite-Element Models of Laminated Composite Plates and Shells." NASA TN D-8044. Langley Research Center, Hampton, VA. December, 1975. Roark, R. J., and Young, W. Formulas for Stress and Strain. 5th ed. NY: McGraw-Hill, 1982. Schneider, P. J. Conduction Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., Inc., 1957. Shigley, J.E., and Uicker, J.J. Theory of Machines and Mechanisms. NY: McGraw-Hill. 1980. Swanson Analysis Systems, Incorporated. ANSYS Verification Manual.
701
Thomson, W.T. Theory of Vibration with Applications. NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. 2nd printing, 1981. Timoshenko, S. Strength of Materials, Part II, Advanced Theory and Problems. 3rd ed. NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1956. Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed. NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955.
702
IndexAdditional Information
703
Shells by the Direct Stiffness Method," AIAA Journal, 1(10): 2342-2347. J.W. Jones and H.H. Fong, "Evaluation of NASTRAN," Structural Mechanics Software Series, Vol. IV (N. Perrone and W. Pilkey, eds.), 1982.
Description:
Find the radial deflection at the loaded end of a cantilever cylinder that is modeled axisymmetrically.
Note: Element B is optional, but has been included here to increase the accuracy of results in the area local to the loaded end and to reduce computation time.
Specifications
704
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Constraint:
Load:
Structure 2.8725e 3
% Difference 0.15%
Max P: 7
No. Equations: 33
705
Description:
A flat circular plate, modeled axisymmetrically, is subjected to various edge constraints and surface loadings. Determine the maximum stress for each case.
Specifications
Element Type:
2D shell (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
radius: 40 thickness: 1
Material Properties:
706
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints: clamped
simple
placed on point B:
Loads: clamped
simple
uniform
ANSYS 7152
Structure 7200
% Difference 0.0%
Max P: 5
No. Equations: 15
2970
2989
29701
0.0%
Max P: 5
No. Equations: 16
707
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
708
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Loads:
placed on edge C-D: FY load per unit length = 200 Distribution: per unit length Spatial Variation: uniform
The theoretical results are based on elementary beam theory. Structure models the actual physical structure, capturing the singular stresses present at the constrained corners. Setting Poisson's ratio equal to zero reduces the model to its elementary form.
Structure 6.0121e4
% Difference 0.20%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 22
709
Comparison: Reference:
The MacNealHarder Accuracy Tests MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I. Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985. A thick-walled cylinder, modeled symmetrically, is loaded with unit internal pressure. Find the radial displacement at the inner radius for three nearly incompressible materials.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Poisson's Ratio:
710
IndexAdditional Information
Conductivity: 0
Constraints (UCS):
placed on edges A-B & C-D: fixed in all DOF except TransR
Loads:
placed on edge A-D: pressure load = 1 Distribution: per unit length Spatial Variation: uniform
Structure 5.0395e3
Max P: 6
No. Equations: 38
5.0602e 3
5.0555e3
0.09%
Max P: 6
No. Equations: 38
711
5.0623e 3
5.0577e3
0.09%
Max P: 7
No. Equations: 46
Description:
712
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Constraints (UCS):
Loads:
713
Structure 7.9721
% Difference 0.72%
14.69
14.73
14.69
0.0%
@ r = 11.5
.30
.30
.26636
2.98%
6.96
6.96
6.96
0.0%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 54
714
IndexAdditional Information
Comparison: Reference:
NASTRAN No. V2405 Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co., 1982, p. 96. A cantilever beam is subjected to a load at the free end. Find the deflection at the free end and the bending stress at the fixed end.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 30
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
715
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Loads:
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Structure 2.3077
% Difference 0.0%
38461
38461
38461
0.0%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 24
716
IndexAdditional Information
Problems. 3rd ed. NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 1955, p. 98, Problem 4. Description: A standard 30" WF beam, supported as shown below, is loaded on the overhangs uniformly. Find the maximum bending stress and deflection at the middle of the beam.
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (4)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 480
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
717
Constraints
Degrees of Freedom fixed in all DOF except RotY and RotZ fixed in TransY and TransZ
Loads:
ANSYS 11404
Structure 11404
% Difference 0.03%
0.182
0.182
0.182
0.0%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 96
718
IndexAdditional Information
Description:
extension in-plane shear out-of-plane shear twisting loads Find the tip displacement in the direction of the load for each case.
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (3)
Units:
IPS
719
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Loads: extension
in_plane
total load
uniform
out_plane
total load
uniform
twist
placed on point E: MX = 1
total load
N/A
Structure 2.998e5
% Difference 0.06%
720
IndexAdditional Information
0.4321
0.4310
0.27%
0.034081
0.03393
0.44%
Max P: 6
There is a typographical error in Table 3 (p. 10) of MacNeal-Harder for the twist load on a straight beam. It should read 0.03408.
721
Description:
A straight cantilever beam, constructed of trapezoidal-shaped elements, is subjected to four different unit loads at the free end, including
extension in-plane shear out-of-plane shear twisting Find the tip displacement in the direction of the load for each case.
Specifications
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
722
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints:
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
placed on edge B-C: FX = 1 placed on edge B-C: FY = 1 placed on edge B-C: FZ = 1 placed on point E: MX = 1
Theory
Structure
% Difference
3e5
2.998e5
0.08%
0.1081
0.1078
0.32%
0.4321
.4307
0.32%
0.034081
0.03393
0.44%
723
Max P: 7
There is a typographical error in Table 3 (p. 10) of the McNeal-Harder reference for the twist load on a straight beam. It should read 0.03408.
Comparison:
Reference:
MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I. Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985.
Description:
A curved beam, spanning a 90 arc, is fixed at one end and free at the other. If the beam is subjected to in-plane and out-of-plane loads at the free end, find the tip displacement in the direction of the load for both cases.
724
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
shell (2) IPS outer radius: 4.32 inner radius: 4.12 thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
725
in_plane out_plane
uniform uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.08734
0.08834
1.14%
0.5022
0.50057
0.32%
Max P: 6
Description:
726
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Material Properties:
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
placed on edges A-D, C-D: placed on edge A-B: placed on edge B-C:
fixed in TransX, TransY, and TransZ fixed in TransY, RotX, and RotZ fixed in TransX, RotY, and RotZ
727
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
pressure
uniform
point
placed on B: FZ = 1e4
N/A
N/A
Theory
Structure
% Difference
12.97
12.97
0.0%
16.96
16.80
0.94%
Max P: 9
728
IndexAdditional Information
Description:
One quarter of a rectangular plate, clamped on four edges, is modeled using symmetry. The plate is loaded with two different loads, including uniform pressure and a point load at center. Find the displacement at the center of the plate.
Specifications
Material Properties:
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
729
placed on edges A-D, D-C: placed on edge A-B: placed on edge B-C:
fixed in all DOF fixed in TransY, RotX, and RotZ fixed in TransX, RotY, and RotZ
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
pressure
uniform
point
placed on B: FZ = 1e4
N/A
N/A
Theory
Structure
% Difference
2.56
2.604
1.71%
7.23
7.194
0.49%
Max P: 9
730
IndexAdditional Information
Comparison: Reference:
The MacNealHarder Accuracy Tests MacNeal, R.H., and Harder, R.L. "A Proposed Standard Set of Problems to Test Finite Element Accuracy." Finite Elements in Analysis and Design I. Elsevier Science Publishers, 1985. One quarter of an open hemisphere is modeled with symmetry and loaded with alternating point loads at 90 intervals on the equator. Find the radial displacement at any load point.
Description:
Specifications
731
Material Properties:
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
fixed in TransP, RotR, and RotT fixed in TransP, RotR, and RotT fixed in TransT
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.0924
0.0933
0.97%
Max P: 9
732
IndexAdditional Information
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (2)
Units:
IPS
733
Dimensions:
length: 12 width: 1.1 thickness: 0.32 angle of twist 90o (from fixed to free end)
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
in_plane
total load
uniform
out_plane
total load
uniform
734
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.005424
0.005407
0.31%
0.001754
0.001771
0.97%
Max P: 6
Description:
735
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (1)
Units:
IPS
Material Properties:
736
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
fixed in TransZ, RotR, and RotT fixed in TransT, RotZ, and RotR fixed in TransR and TransT
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
Spatial Variation:
uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.3024
0.3008
0.53%
737
Max P: 7
Specifications
Element Type:
2D shell (4)
738
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
MNS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0.007 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 210000
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
load1
739
Theory
Structure1
% Difference
38.5
38.62
0.3%
Max P: 7
No. Equations: 72
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must define a result window for the Stress ZZ (Bottom), and query the value at point D.
Plane Stress NAFEMS, LSB1, No. IC 2 A tapered membrane has uniform acceleration in the global X direction. Find the direct stress Sxx at point B.
740
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (2)
Units:
MNS
Dimensions:
thickness: 0.1
Material Properties:
741
Conductivity: 0
Constraints:
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
load1
Theory
Structure
% Difference
0.247
0.247
0%
Max P: 8
742
IndexAdditional Information
3D NAFEMS, LSB1, No. IC 29 A Z-section cantilevered plate is subjected to a torque at the free end by two uniformly distributed edge shears. Find the direct stress Sxx at the mid-plane of the plate.
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (6)
Units:
MNS
743
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0.007 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 210000
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution
Spatial Variation
load1
uniform uniform
744
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
Structure1
% Difference
108.8
110.05
1.1%
Max P: 7
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must define a result window for the measure Stress XX (Top and Bottom), and query the value at point M. Then average the top (114.9) and bottom (105.2) values.
3D NAFEMS, LSB1, No. IC 19 A cylindrical shell in 3D space is loaded with a uniform normal edge moment on one edge. Find the outer surface tangential stress at point E.
745
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (1)
Units:
MNS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
746
IndexAdditional Information
Conductivity: 0
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution
Spatial Variation
load1
uniform
Theory
Structure1
% Difference
60.0
59.6
.67%
747
Max P: 5
No. Equations: 66
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must define a result window for measure Stress XX (Top) with Face Grid on, and query the value at point E.
3D Theory Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. 5th Edition. NY: McGrawHill Book Co. 1982, p. 64. A cantilever beam is subjected to transverse loads in Y and Z and axial load in X . Find the deflection at the free end, the bending stress at the fixed end, and the axial stress along the beam.
Description:
This Beam Sections model contains the following element types and corresponding results: Topic 748
IndexAdditional Information
Square Beam Rectangle Beam Hollow Rectangle Beam Channel Beam I-Section Beam L-Section Beam Diamond Beam Solid Circle Beam Hollow Circle Beam Ellipse Beam Hollow Ellipse Beam Note: In all cases, the displacement results are dependent upon the direction of the load. Thus, in this problem, all the results listed as Deflection at Tip may be interpreted as positive or negative.
Square Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Square Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
a: 0.25
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
749
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
sq_d_x
1.6e3
1.6e3
0%
750
IndexAdditional Information
transverse y
sq_d_y
9.216e1
9.215996e1
0%
transverse z
sq_d_z
9.216e1
9.215996e1
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
sq_s_ten
1.6e3
1.6e3
0%
transverse y
sq_s_bnd
1.152003e6
1.151999e6
0%
transverse z
sq_s_bnd
1.152003e6
1.151999e6
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
751
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Rectangle Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Rectangle Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1 d: 0.25
Beam Properties:
752
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
753
axial
rct_d_x
4.0e4
4.0e4
0%
transverse y
rct_d_y
2.304e1
2.304e1
0%
transverse z
rct_d_z
1.44
1.44
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
rct_s_ten
4.0e2
4.0e2
0%
transverse y
rct_s_bnd
2.880e5
2.880e5
0%
transverse z
rct_s_bnd
7.200e4
7.200e4
0%
Convergence:
754
IndexAdditional Information
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 1 bi: 0.875
755
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
756
IndexAdditional Information
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hrct_d_x
7.112e4
7.111e4
0.02%
transverse y
hrct_d_y
2.5869e1
2.5869e1
0%
transverse z
hrct_d_z
2.1653
2.1653
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hrct_s_ten
7.112e2
7.111e2
0.02%
transverse y
hrct_s_bnd
3.2337e5
3.2337e5
0%
757
transverse z
hrct_s_bnd
1.0826e5
1.0826e5
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Channel Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Channel Beam
758
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
759
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
chnl_d_x
2.6667e4
2.6667e4
0%
transverse y
chnl_d_y
3.339e1
3.339e1
0%
transverse z
chnl_d_z
8.1198e1
8.1198e1
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
760
IndexAdditional Information
axial
chnl_s_ten
2.6667e2
2.6667e2
0%
transverse y
chnl_s_bnd
2.087e4
2.087e4
0%
transverse z
chnl_s_bnd
5.244e4
5.244e4
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
I-Section Beam
761
Specifications
Element Type:
I-Section Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
762
IndexAdditional Information
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
I_d_x
2.6667e4
2.6667e4
0%
transverse y
I_d_y
3.3391e1
3.3391e1
0%
transverse z
I_d_z
1.4288
1.4288
0%
Stress:
763
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
I_s_ten
2.6667e2
2.6667e2
0%
transverse y
I_s_bnd
2.0870e4
2.0870e4
0%
transverse z
I_s_bnd
7.1442e4
7.1442e4
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
764
IndexAdditional Information
transverse z
0%
264
L-Section Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
L-Section Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
765
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
L_d_x
4.0e4
4.0e4
0%
transverse y
L_d_y
7.0892e1
7.0892e1
0%
766
IndexAdditional Information
transverse z
L_d_z
2.8357
2.8357
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
L_s_ten
4e2
4e2
0%
transverse y
L_s_bnd
5.5611e4
5.5959e4
0.62%
transverse z
L_s_bnd
1.228e5
1.228e5
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
767
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Diamond Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Diamond Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
b: 0.25 d: 0.25
Beam Properties:
768
IndexAdditional Information
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
dmnd_d_x
3.2e3
3.2e3
0%
769
transverse y
dmnd_d_y
3.6864e2
3.6864e2
0%
transverse z
dmnd_d_z
3.6864e2
3.6864e2
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
dmnd_s_ten
3.2e3
3.2e3
0%
transverse y
dmnd_s_bnd
4.608e6
4.608e6
0%
transverse z
dmnd_s_bnd
4.608e6
4.608e6
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
770
IndexAdditional Information
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
r: 0.25
Beam Properties:
771
Material Properties:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
772
IndexAdditional Information
axial
crcl_d_x
5.093e4
5.093e4
0%
transverse y
crcl_d_y
9.77848
9.77848
0%
transverse z
crcl_d_z
9.77848
9.77848
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
crcl_s_ten
5.093e2
5.093e2
0%
transverse y
crcl_s_bnd
2.44462e5
2.44462e5
0%
transverse z
crcl_s_bnd
2.44462e5
2.44462e5
0%
Convergence:
773
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
ri: 0.25
774
IndexAdditional Information
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
775
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hcr_d_x
6.7906e4
6.7906e4
0%
transverse y
hcr_d_y
1.04304e1
1.04304e1
0%
transverse z
hcr_d_z
1.04304e1
1.04304e1
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hcr_s_ten
6.7906e2
6.7906e2
0%
transverse y
hcr_s_bnd
2.6076e5
2.6076e5
0%
transverse z
hcr_s_ten
2.6076e5
2.6076e5
0%
776
IndexAdditional Information
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Ellipse Beam
Specifications
Element Type:
Ellipse Beam
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
777
a: 1 b: 0.25
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
778
IndexAdditional Information
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
elps_d_x
1.2732e4
1.2732e4
0%
transverse y
elps-d_y
1.527887e1
1.527887e1
0%
transverse z
elps_d_z
2.4446
2.4446
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
elps_s_ten
1.273239e2
1.27324e2
0%
transverse y
elps_s_bnd
1.527887e4
1.527884e4
0%
779
transverse z
elps_s_bnd
6.11155e4
6.111573e4
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
Element Type:
780
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Load:
Location:
Magnitude:
axial
placed on point B
FX=100
transverse y
placed on point B
FY=100
781
transverse z
placed on point B
FZ=100
Structure beams consider shear; however, the represented theoretical problem does not. The values for shear factor compensate for this.
Deflection at Tip:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hel_d_x
5.4325e4
5.4325e4
0%
transverse y
hel_d_y
3.6922e1
3.6922e1
0%
transverse z
hel_d_z
5.9075
5.9075
0%
Stress:
Load
Measure Name
Theory
Structure
% Difference
axial
hel_s_ten
5.4325e2
5.4325e2
0%
782
IndexAdditional Information
transverse y
hel_s_bnd
3.6922e4
3.6922e4
0%
transverse z
hel_s_bnd
1.4769e5
1.4769e5
0%
Convergence:
Load
Max P
No. Equations
axial
0%
264
transverse y
0%
264
transverse z
0%
264
783
3D Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co., 5th edition, Table 32, Case 1. A thick-walled cylinder subjected to an internal pressure is free to expand in all directions. Obtain maximum radial and circumferential stresses.
Description:
Specifications
Element Type:
tets (133)
784
IndexAdditional Information
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0.0002614 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 1.06e7
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
fixed in TransX, TransY, and TransZ fixed in TransY fixed in TransY and TransZ
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution
Spatial Variation
785
pressure
uniform
Theory
Structure
% Difference
2600
2630
1.2%
1000
1003
0.03%
Max P: 7
3D Cyclic Symmetric Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co., 5th edition, Table 29, Case 3c. A thin-walled half-spherical vessel is subjected to its own weight (gravity load). Obtain the hoop stress at points A and B.
Description:
786
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
shells (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
R: 10
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0.0002588 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 1.0e7
787
Constraints
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
Edges @
= 0 &
= 90:
Load:
Direction:
Magnitude:
gravity
x y z
Theory
Structure
% Difference
zz at point A:
0.989
1.1%
788
IndexAdditional Information
tt at point B:
-1
-0.983
1.7%
Multi-Pass Adaptive Convergence %: The analysis converged to within 4.9% on Local Displacement and Element Strain Energy. It converged to 1.7% on Global RMS Stress.
Max P: 9
3D Theory Noor, A.K. and Mathers, M.D., "Shear-Flexible Finite-Element Models of Laminated Composite Plates and Shells." NASA TN D-8044; Langley Research Center, Hampton, Va. Dec. 1975. Determine maximum resultant bending moment and transverse deformation in a clamped, nine-layered, orthotropic square plate.
Description:
789
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (4)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Shell Properties:
790
IndexAdditional Information
Extensional Stiffness
A11=10.266
A12=0.1252
A16=0
A22=10.266
A26=0
A66=0.3
B11=0
B12=0
B16=0
B22=0
B26=0
B66=0
Bending Stiffness
D11=0.25965
D12=0.0026082
D16=0
D22=0.1681
D26=0
D66=0.00625
A55=0.275004
A45=0
A44=0.275004
791
7.2915e5
1.5191e5
Force
N11=0
N22=0
N12=0
Moment
M11=0
M22=0
M12=0
CZ
Material
0.25
trniso1
0.25
trniso1
Material Properties:
792
IndexAdditional Information
Young's Moduli
E1=4e1
E2=1
E3=1
Poisson's Ratio
Nu21=0.25
Nu31=0.25
Nu32=0
Shear Moduli
G21=0.6
G31=0.6
G32= E2/[2*(1+Nu32)]
a1=0
a2=0
a3=0
Constraints:
symmetry constraints on edges B-C and C-D clamped on edges A-B and A-D
Theory
Structure
% Difference
793
Displacement
11.596
11.596
0%
Bending Moment1
1.4094
1.40638
0.21%
Convergence %: 0.2 % on local displacement and element strain energy and 0.5% on global RMS stress.
Max P: 5
To verify this Mechanica result, create a query result window for the quantity Moment:Shell Resultant:XX. Show the result window and query for the value in the upper left corner of the model. This is obtained using View:Model Min. The absolute value of this negative number is greater than the value reported using View:Model Max and is reported here.
794
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
2D Plane Strain
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGraw-
795
Description:
Find the fundamental frequency of a cantilever plate modeled as a plane strain model.
Specifications
Element Type:
2D shell (1)
Units:
MKS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7850 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 2e11
Constraint:
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
Structure
% Difference
2.1393
2.1375
0.08%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 12
Model Type:
2D Plane Stress
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Book Co. 1982. pp. 576578.
Description:
Find the fundamental frequency for the lateral vibration of a cantilever plate.
797
Specifications
Element Type:
2D plate (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.28e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraint:
Theory
Structure
% Difference
798
IndexAdditional Information
101.326
100.99
0.33%
Max P: 6
No. Equations: 42
Model Type:
2D Plane Strain
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formulas for Stress and Strain, NY: McGrawHill Book Co. 1982. pp. 576578.
Description:
Find the fundamental frequency of a cantilever plate modeled as a plane strain model.
799
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 36 width: 4
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.28e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraint:
Theory
Structure
% Difference
106.219
106.50
0.26%
Max P: 5
No. Equations: 58
800
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 67
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed. NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955. p. 425, Art. 68.
Description:
Find the fundamental frequency for the radial vibration of an annulus modeled axisymmetrically.
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid (1)
801
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.3e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraints:
placed on edge A-B: fixed in TransY and RotZ placed on edge C-D: fixed in TransY and Rot Z
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
% Difference
322.64
322.64
322.64
0.0%
Max P: 2
No. Equations: 10
Model Type:
3D
802
IndexAdditional Information
Comparison:
Theoretical Results
Reference:
Love, A.E.H. A Treatise on the Mathematical Theory of Elasticity. 4th ed. NY: Dover Publications. 1944. p. 452, Art. 293b.
Description:
Determine the first and second modal frequencies for the radial vibration of a ring modeled as a one-quarter model.
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
radius: 2
Beam Properties:
Area: 0.01
J: 1.008e3
803
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.28e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraints:
placed on point A: fixed in all DOF except TransX placed on point B: fixed in all DOF except TransY
Theory
Structure
% Difference
625.65
624.43
0.19%
3393.06
3369.13
0.70%
Max P: 9
No. Equations: 50
804
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 62
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed. NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955. p. 392, Art. 62.
Description:
Find the fundamental frequency for the lateral vibration of a cantilever, wedge-shaped plate.
Specifications
Element Type: shell (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length: 16 width: 4
805
thickness: 1
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.28e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraint:
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
% Difference
259.16
260.99
259.15
0.004%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 60
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theoretical results
Reference:
Roark, R.J., and Young, W.C. Formula for Stress and Strain. NY: McGrawHill Co. 1982. p. 576.
Description:
A cantilever cylindrical shell is modeled as a half cylinder using symmetry. Find the fundamental frequency.
806
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
shell (3)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
807
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.28e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraint:
placed on edge A-B: fixed in all DOF placed on edge A-C, B-D: fixed in TransX, RotY, and RotZ
Theory
Structure
% Difference
62.05
62.08
0.05%
Max P: 6
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 62
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering. 3rd ed. NY: D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1955. p. 392, Art. 62.
Description:
Find the fundamental frequency for the lateral vibration of a cantilever, wedge-shaped plate.
808
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (1)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.28e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraint:
Theory
ANSYS
Structure
% Difference
259.16
260.99
259.25
0.03%
Max P: 4
No. Equations: 72
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
Determine the first to eighth modal frequencies for the in-plane vibration of a cross with a pin joint at points A, B, C, & D.
810
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (4)
Units:
NMS
Dimensions:
length: 5
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
811
Constraints:
placed on points A, B, C, D: fixed TransX, TransY, TransZ placed on beams A-O, B-O, C-O, D-O: fixed in TransZ
Theory
Structure
% Difference
11.336
11.324
0.11%
17.709
17.637
0.4%
17.709
17.665
0.2%
45.345
45.155
0.4%
57.390
56.692
1.2%
57.390
57.002
0.7%
Max P: 8
812
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
Determine the first to fifth modal frequencies for the axisymmetric vibration of an annular plate.
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (3)
Units:
NMS
813
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 8000 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 2e11
Constraints:
Location
Degrees of Freedom
constraint1
placed on curve MP
fixed in TransZ
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Modal 1 Frequency
814
IndexAdditional Information
(Hz)
18.583
18.551
0.17%
140.15
138.22
1.4%
224.16
224.16
0%
358.29
355.80
0.7%
629.19
620.43
1.4%
Max P: 9
815
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 95
Reference:
Kreith, F. Principles of Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. PA: International Textbook Co., 1959.
Description:
A cooling fin of square cross-sectional area is surrounded by fluid, with one end maintained at a certain temperature, and the other end insulated. Find the temperature at the insulated tip, B.
816
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: beam (1)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
length: 0.6666
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 1
Poisson's Ratio: 0
817
Prescribed Temperatures:
therm_constr1
Location/Magnitude:
placed on point A: 100
Convection Conditions:
Bulk Temperature:
therm_constr1
ANSYS 68.618
Thermal 68.583
% Difference 0.16%
Max P: 5
No. Equations: 5
Model Type:
2D Plate
Reference:
Description:
A plate with uniform thickness is insulated on one side and surrounded by fluid on two other sides. The fourth side is maintained at a certain temperature. Find the temperature at point E.
818
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: 2D plate (2)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
819
therm_constr1
Convection Conditions:
Bulk Temperature:
0
therm_constr1
Thermal 18.3
% Difference 0.0%
Max P: 9
No. Equations: 79
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Reference:
Description:
A cylinder has a prescribed heat flux around part of the boundary. The bottom side is maintained at a certain temperature and the top is insulated. Find the temperature at point E.
820
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: 2D solid (2)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
therm_constr1
Location/Magnitude:
placed on curve A-B: 0
821
Thermal 213.1
% Difference 0.2%
Max P: 8
No. Equations: 72
Model Type:
2D Axisymmetric
Reference:
Description:
A hollow cylinder has a prescribed heat flux over the central part of the inner surface; the ends are insulated. The top, bottom, and outer surfaces are maintained at a uniform temperature. Find the temperature at point G.
822
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: 2D solid (2)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude: 823
Therm_constr1
Thermal 59.85
% Difference 0.05%
Max P: 9
Model Type:
2D Unit Depth
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 92
Reference:
Kreith, F. Principles of Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. PA: International Textbook Co., 1959.
Description:
A two-layer wall is surrounded by heated fluid on both the inner and outer surfaces; the ends are insulated. Find the temperatures at the inner and outer surfaces.
824
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: 2D solid (2)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
825
ANSYS 2957.2
Thermal 2957.2
% Difference N/A
336
336.7
336.7
0.2%
Max P: 2
No. Equations: 13
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 96
Reference:
Kreith, F. Principles of Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. PA: International Textbook Co., 1959.
Description:
A cooling fin of square cross-sectional area is surrounded by fluid with one end maintained at a certain temperature, and the other end insulated. Find the temperature at the insulated tip (surface EFGH).
826
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: solid (2)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
Location/Magnitude:
827
thermal_constr1
Convection Conditions:
therm_constr1
Location/Magnitude:
Bulk Temperature:
0
ANSYS 68.618
Thermal 68.533
% Difference 0.09%
Max P: 9
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Reference:
Schneider, P. J. Conduction Heat Transfer. 2nd ed. MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., Inc., 1957.
Description:
A short, solid cylinder is subjected to prescribed temperatures over all surfaces. Find the temperature distribution in the cylinder.
828
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: solid 1(2)
Units:
Hr Ft Btu F
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
therm_constr1
Location/Magnitude:
placed on surface EMN (top): 40 placed on surfaces AKL (bottom) and KLMN (outer surface): 0
829
ANSYS 0
Thermal 0.0
% Difference 0.0%
Point B (m=node_11_temp)
6.8
7.4427
6.8533
0.8%
Point C (m_node_21_temp)
15.6
16.361
15.3693
1.5%
Point D (m_node_31_temp)
26.8
27.411
26.5707
0.9%
Point E (m=node_41_temp)
40
40
40.0
0.0%
Max P: 9
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Description:
A plate has a prescribed temperature distributed evenly around its boundary. No internal heat is generated. Find the temperature at point E.
830
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: Shell (10)
Units:
Hr M W C
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Prescribed Temperatures:
therm_constr1
Location/Magnitude:
placed on curve A-B: 1000
831
Thermal 260.6
% Difference 0.04%
Max P: 9
832
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfer. 5th ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., 1981. Example 4.2.
Description:
A large solid cylinder of steel is at an initial uniform temperature of 35 C. One end is then exposed to a constant surface heat flux of 3.2e5 W/m2. Find the temperature after 30 s at a depth of 2.5 cm from the heated end.
833
Specifications
Element Type:
tet (167)
Units:
s m W C
Dimensions:
radius 0.25
length 6.5
Thermal Expansion
1.4e-5 m2/s
Conductivity
45 W/m C
Specific Heat
401.79 J/kg C
834
IndexAdditional Information
Prescribed Temps:
Location/Magnitude:
therm_constr1
everywhere: 35 C
therm_load1
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
Point E (m=temp_2_5)
79.3
79.05
0.31%
Max P: 6
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Holman, J.P. Heat Transfer. 5th ed. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc., 1981. Example 4.5.
835
Description:
A plate of steel is at an initial uniform temperature of 200 C. All exposed surfaces of the plate are then suddenly subjected to a convection condition of 70 C with a heat transfer coefficient of 525 W/m2 C. Find the temperature after 60 s at a depth of 1.25 cm from one of the exposed faces.
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (48)
Units:
s m W C
Dimensions:
Specific Heat
900 J/kg C
836
IndexAdditional Information
Conductivity
215 W/m C
Initial temperature
Theory
Thermal
% Difference
Point A (m=pnt_1_25cm)
147.7
144.12
2.42%
Max P: 4
837
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 74
Reference:
Thomson, W.T. Vibration Theory and Applications. NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. 2nd printing, 1965. p. 99, Article 4.1.
Description:
A mass-spring system is subjected to an impact load, and thereafter undergoes free vibration. Determine the deflection at time t = 0.1 sec for a damped and undamped system.
838
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
mass (1), spring (1)
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Mass Properties:
M: 0.5 Mxx: 0 Mxy: 0 Mxz: 0
Myy: 0
Myz: 0
Mzz: 0
Kyy: 0
Kyz: 0
Kzz: 0
839
Constraints:
placed on point A: fixed in all DOF placed on point B: fixed in all DOF except TransY
Loads:
ANSYS 0.90693
Structure1 0.9093
0.3418
0.34252
0.3418
0.0%
Max P: N/A
No. Equations: 1
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must define a displacement result window and query the result at t = 0.1.
840
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 90
Reference:
Thomson, W. T. Vibration Theory and Applications. Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N. J., 2nd Printing, 1965.
Description:
Determine the response of the two-mass-spring system when excited by a harmonic force acting on mass at point B.
841
Specifications
mass (2), spring (3)
Element Type:
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Mass Properties:
M: 0.5 Mxx: 0 Mxy: 0 Mxz: 0
Myy: 0
Myz: 0
Mzz: 0
Kyy: 0
Kyz: 0
Kzz: 0
842
IndexAdditional Information
Constraints:
constraint1
Location:
placed on points A and D placed on points B and C
Degrees of Freedom:
fixed in all DOF fixed in all DOF except TransX
Loads:
load1
Location/Magnitude:
placed on point B: FX = 200
Distribution:
N/A
Spatial Variation:
N/A
Theory 0.8227/0
ANSYS 0.8227/0
Structure1 0.8227/0
% Diff. 0%
point B
0.4627/0
0.4627/0
0.4627/0
0%
point A
0.5115/ 180
0.5115/ 180
0.5115/180
0%
point B
1.2153/ 180
1.2153/ 180
1.215/180
0%
point A
0.5851/ 180
0.5851/ 180
0.5851/180
0%
point B
0.2697/0
0.2697/0
0.2697/0
0%
Max P: 1
No. Equations: 2
You cannot view the results information in the summary file. To view the results, you must define a measure result window and view the graph.
843
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS No. 70
Reference:
Biggs, J. M. Introduction to Structural Dynamics. McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1964.
Description:
A simply supported beam is subjected to a vertical motion of both supports. The motion is defined in terms of a seismic displacement response spectrum. Determine the fundamental displacement and the corresponding maximum bending stress.
844
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type: beam (2)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Constraints:
Location:
Degrees of Freedom:
845
constraint1
placed on point A
placed on point B
placed on point C
Response Spectrum:
resp_spectrum1
Frequency:
Displacement:
0 10
0.44 0.44
ANSYS 6.0974
Structure 6.0953
% Difference 0.04%
0.560
0.553
0.560
0%
20158
20156
20138
0.1%
Max P: 6
No. Equations: 70
846
IndexAdditional Information
Description:
847
Specifications
beams IPS length: 5 Area: 10 IYY: 1e20 Shear FY: 0.83333 CY: 1 J: 1e20 IZZ: 1.907e4 Shear FZ: 0.83333 CZ: 1 Poisson's Ratio: 0.27 Thermal Expansion: 0 Conductivity: 0
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 7.32e4 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraints:
848
IndexAdditional Information
% Difference 0.3%
Structure 106.073
% Difference 0.02%
Max P: 4
No. Equations:66
Description:
849
Specifications
Shell Properties: Ply lay-up: 0/90/90/0 Extensional Stiffness A11=1.54e06 Thickness of each ply: 0.025 A12=18,779 A22=A11 A16=0 A26=0
850
IndexAdditional Information
A66=37,500 ExtensionalBending Coupling Stiffness B11=0 B12=0 B22=0 B16=0 B26=0 B66=0 Bending Stiffness D11=2,198.75 D12=15.6495 D22=367.762 D16=0 D26=0 D66=31.25 Transverse Shear Stiffnesses Material Properties: Mass Density: 0.002 Young's Moduli Poisson's Ratio Shear Moduli E1=3e7 Nu21=0.25 G21=375,000 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 E2=750,000 Nu31=0.25 G31=375,000 E3=750,000 Nu32=0 G32= E2/[2*(1+Nu32)] Coefficients of Thermal Expansion Constraints: a1=0 a2=0 a3=0 A55=27,585 A45=0 A44=17,925
in out of plane (z-direction) translation along all edges (AB, BC, CD, and DA). in translation in all directions at point D in x & z-direction translation at point A
Loads:
851
852
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
Plane Strain
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W. Formula for Stress and Strain. NY; McGraw-Hill Co. 1982. p. 517.
Description:
A half model of two cylinders of unit depth in contact. Modeled using 2D contact. Determine the maximum stress and contact area.
853
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
R1: 1 R2: 1
Material Properties:
Constraints:
fixed in all but y on vertical edges; fixed in all but x on bottom edge
854
IndexAdditional Information
Loads:
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Contact Area
0.0481
0.0483
0.42%
26450
26545.44
0.36%
Max P: 9
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
Theory
Reference:
Roark, R.J. and Young, W. Formula for Stress and Strain. NY; McGraw-Hill Co. 1982. p. 517.
Description:
A quarter section of two hemispheres in contact. Determine the maximum stress and contact area.
855
Specifications
Element Type:
2D solid
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
R1: 2 R2: 3
Material Properties:
Constraints:
fixed in all but y on xz face; fixed in all but x on yz face; fixed on bottom edge
Loads:
856
IndexAdditional Information
Total Load=-100000
Theory
Structure
% Difference
Contact Area
0.0507
0.0482
4.9%
740285
753247.2
1.75%
Max P: 7
857
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Argyris, J.H., and Symeonidis, Sp., "Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Elastic Systems Under Nonconservative Loading Natural Formulation Part I. Quasistatic Problems," Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering, 26 (1981), pp75123.
Description:
A hinged, right-angle frame is constrained in translation at the upper right and lower left corners. It is subjected to a nonconservative downward load 96 cm from the upper right constraint. The load is simulated using a pressure load applied over a small area. Calculate the lateral and vertical displacements at the load application point.
858
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
solid (56)
Units:
cm, N
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
859
Loads:
Location/Magnitude:
Distribution:
vertical
pressure
Theory 3.5
Structure 3.79
% Difference 8.3%
17.0
17.39
2.3%
Max P: 7
860
IndexAdditional Information
Model Type:
3D
Comparison:
ANSYS
Reference:
Timoshenko, S., and Young, D.H. Vibration Problems in Engineering, 3rd Edition. D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., New York, 1955.
Description:
Determine the first three radially symmetric, out of plane, natural frequencies of a circular membrane. Use stiffness calculated from static analysis where membrane is loaded radially. Edges are simply supported.
861
Specifications
Element Type:
plate
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
Material Properties:
Mass Density: 0.00073 Cost Per Unit Mass: 0 Young's Modulus: 3e7
Constraints:
Loads:
862
IndexAdditional Information
Theory
ANSYS
% Difference
Structure
% Difference
Mode 1
94.406
94.471
0.07%
94.437
0.03%
Mode 6
216.77
217.38
0.28%
217.07
0.14%
Mode 15
339.85
342.98
0.92%
341.297
0.45%
Max P: 9
Note: Results are only for radially symmetric modesmodes 1, 6, and 15 of the solution. These are out-of-plane modes, in other words; they appear in the profile view.
863
Model Type:
3D
Reference:
Imai, Kanji. Configuration Optimization of Trusses by the Multiplier Method. LA: University of California, UCLA-ENG-7842.
Description:
A five-bar truss has the following conditions for optimization: the crosssection area for bars AB, CD, BE, and CE are kept the same; bar BC has an independent cross-section area, and the load applied on point E is 20000 psi. Find the minimum weight of the truss with the maximum tensile stress in the model under 20000 psi.
864
IndexAdditional Information
Specifications
Element Type:
beam (5)
Units:
IPS
Dimensions:
length A-B, C-D: 240 length B-C: 480 length B-E, C-E: 339.41
Beam Properties:
Material Properties:
Poisson's Ratio: 0
865
Constraints: constraint1
Degrees of Freedom fixed in RotX, RotY, and RotZ fixed in all DOF
Loads: load1
Distribution uniform
Design Variables: x
Location:
Min to Max:
Current:
length of bar BC
480 to about 0
480
240 to about 0
240
dvar_1
0.1 to 10
0.1
dvar_2
placed on bar BC
0.1 to 10
0.1
dvar_4
0.1 to 10
0.1
866
IndexAdditional Information
Optimization Parameters
Optimization Goal:
Limits: measure8
measure9
< 20000
measure10
< 20000
measure18
> -20000
measure19
> -20000
measure20
> -20000
Structure 63.59
% Difference 0.1%
Convergence %: 1%
867
ascii
Specifies that the engine writes the engine output files in ASCII format.
bsram ram_size
Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of block solver RAM the engine uses for equation solving. The value must be greater than 0.1. If you do not specify a value, or if you omit this option, the engine allocates 8 megabytes by default. Note: The bsram and elram options have been superseded by the solram option. If you choose to use bsram and/or elram, you must specify them on the msengine command line, or by editing the mecbatch file. This allocation and the elram allocation represent part of the memory the engine uses to run a design study. The engine dynamically allocates the rest of the memory it needs for the run. You can use the default allocation for any run. If you have a lot of RAM on your machine, large models will run faster if you specify a higher RAM. You can slow the run substantially if you specify an allocation that is too large to fit in available RAM. You can also slow the run if you do not specify sufficient space, especially if you specify less than the default. As a general guideline for large models, set this value to one-half of your machine RAM if you do not use the -iter option, and to one-quarter of your machine RAM if you do use the -iter option. The optimal value also depends on other factors, such as what other processes are running on your machine. For more information, see Setting Up a Run.
elram ram_size
Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of RAM available to store element matrices created by the iterative solver. This option is only relevant if you are also using the iter option. The value must be greater than 0.1. If you do not specify a value, or if you omit this option, the engine allocates 2 megabytes by default. Note: The bsram and elram options have been superseded by the solram option. If you choose to use bsram and/or elram, you must specify them on the msengine command line, or by editing the mecbatch file. This allocation and the bsram allocation represent part of the memory the engine uses to run a design study. The engine dynamically allocates the rest of the memory it needs for the run.
868
IndexAdditional Information
You can increase the speed of the iterative solver by increasing the amount of RAM you allocate with this option. As a general guideline, set this value to one-quarter of your machine RAM. Do not set this value to more than half of your workstation installed RAM. The optimal value also depends on other factors, such as what other processes are running on your machine.
-gdp
Specifies that the engine use an algorithm other than the default algorithm for an optimization design study. This algorithm, gradient projection (GDP), is an alternative to the default algorithm, sequential quadratic programming (SQP). If you allow the optimizer to run in its natural state, Mechanica begins the run using SQP. However, if it encounters an invalid model during an optimization and its several recovery attempts fail, the software attempts to resolve the problem by automatically switching from SQP to GDP for the remainder of the run. In some situations, you may want to use the -gdp option to enforce the GDP algorithm throughout the optimization. When making this decision, you should understand the advantages and disadvantages of each algorithm. SQP typically finds the optimum design faster than GDP does. The disadvantage of SQP is that it does not guarantee that your design satisfies your limits at the end of each iteration. It only guarantees that the optimum design satisfies your limits. This means that if SQP ever fails to find an optimum design, there may be no intermediate designs available that are improvements over the initial design. In contrast, GDP tends to produce a series of intermediate designs that satisfy your limits while getting closer to the goal. Thus, if speed is not an issue and you want to ensure the availability of interim designs, use the -gdp option.
i input_dir
Specifies the location of the directory containing the engine input files. This is the directory with the same name as the design study you are running. The directory is the same as the directory for output files you specify on the Run Settings dialog box. By default, Mechanica places this directory in the current directory.
iter n
Specifies that the engine uses the iterative solver after polynomial pass n, a number from 1 to 8. For more information on the iterative solver, see Select the Solver.
869
-massnorm
This option specifies that the engine mass-normalizes mode shape vectors instead of unit-normalizing them in modal analysis.
p password
Specifies an optional password.
solram ram_size
Specifies the amount, in megabytes, of memory to be allocated for direct solver memory and for element data for the iterative solver. This option when used overrides any values specified for the elram and bsram options. If you do not use the solram option, solver memory is 128 megabytes by default.
sturm option
Specifies whether or not the Structure engine performs a Sturm sequence test for a modal analysis. By default, the engine performs this test in certain situations to ensure that it has identified the correct number of modes of vibration. You can control Sturm sequence checking by using one of the following options:
sturm default Equivalent to giving no sturm command line option. Mechanica performs a Sturm sequence test only for those modal analyses that include a search for rigid body modes. For nearly all models, Mechanica correctly identifies all of the modes of vibration when you use this option. Mechanica performs a Sturm sequence test for all modal analyses, which may significantly increase execution time. Mechanica does not perform a Sturm sequence test for any modal analyses.
sturm always
sturm never
T
Specifies that Mechanica run the design study in demo mode. The run cannot exceed a polynomial order of 4 in demo mode.
870
IndexAdditional Information
w working_dir1:working_dir2:...
Specifies the location of the directory or directories in which the engine places temporary files during the run. Mechanica creates a subdirectory in the working directory called study.tmp (study is the name of the design study you are running), and deletes the directory at the end of the run. If you are running a large model or the disk space available on your computer is divided among several different directories, it may help to specify multiple working directories for your Mechanica job. You can specify the list of directories to be used as working directories from either the operating system command line or by editing the command line in a Mechanica batch file. You specify the list of working directories with the w option, as follows (where dir1, dir2, and so forth, are your directory names): <install_dir>/bin/msengine... w dir1:dir2:...:dirn If you specify multiple working directories, Mechanica sequentially places temporary files in the working directories as they reach capacity. When using multiple directories, be sure that you specify enough directories, and that the directories are large enough, to complete your run. If the directories are filled before the run completes, the run will terminate. You must order your directories in the following way to allow for how Mechanica places the files: Large files, with .bas extensions, fill the directories from left to right. Therefore, specify the largest and fastest directories first in the directory list. The .bas files hold data such as the element stiffness and mass matrices and the factored global stiffness matrix. Mechanica fills the first directory you specify in the command line, followed by the second directory, and so on, until it reaches the dirn directory. For example, Mechanica uses the directory dir1 until it is filled, then dir2 is used, and so on. Other files, such as .tmp files, go only into the last directory specified (dirn). The dirn directory must be big enough to hold all of the .tmp files. Be sure that the last directory can hold at least 50 MB of data. On very large models, this directory may need to hold as much as 5 or 6 GB. Again if you exceed the allotted directory space, the run will terminate, so be sure the last directory specified is sufficiently large. Input and output files (those with the extensions .mdb, .rpt, .stt, .err, or .pas) can go in the last directory specified, or in a separate directory from the w list. For higher performance during pre- and post-processing, you can move the input and output files back to the fastest disk. The working directory is the same as the directory for temporary files you specify on the Run Settings dialog box. By default, Mechanica places this directory in the current directory.
871
About Interfaces
In addition to end welds and perimeter welds, you can use interfaces to connect surfaces in an assembly model. When you create an interface, you specify how Mechanica will treat a particular pair of mated or overlapping surfaces during meshing and analysis. Mechanica provides two basic interface typesbonded and free. Bonded Mechanica considers contacting surfaces as bonded. This means that matching nodes on contacting surfaces merge. Instead of two coincident nodes, a shared one exists. Free Mechanica specifies that two surfaces have matching, geometrically consistent nodes, but does not merge the nodes. Meshes on the contacting surfaces are identical. As an exception for FEM mode only, you can also specify free interfaces where the nodes have no geometric consistency.
To create an interface between components in your model, select the Insert>Connection>Interface command. The way you create interfaces and the interface type that Mechanica uses as a default differs depending on whether you are working in native mode or FEM mode. 872
IndexAdditional Information
Before applying thermal constraints, see Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Conditions or Guidelines for Thermal Boundary Condition Sets.
See Also
Procedures: To Add a Cyclic Symmetry Constraint To Create a Cyclic Symmetry Model Section To Define a Cyclic Symmetry Constraint
About Units
Before designing your model, you should define a principal system of units in Pro/ENGINEER using the Edit>Set Up>Units command in either part or assembly mode. As you build your model, Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica associate your principal system of units to all aspects of the model-building process. Thus, Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica store your model's data and perform analyses based on your principal system of units. You must enter all modeling data in the principal system of units, except on the Material Definition dialog box. Before choosing a principal system of units, see Guidelines for Specifying Units. 873
When you select the Units command, the Units Manager dialog box appears. The dialog box includes the following tabs: Systems of Units Use this tab to set a principal system of units, or to create, copy, edit, and delete systems of units. Units Use this tab to create, copy, edit, and delete individual units.
The Description box at the bottom of the Units Manager dialog box displays a short description of the selected unit or system of units. The following icon appears in front of the description for predefined units or systems of units:
See Also
References: Units for Materials Unit Conversion Tables
Accuracy
This value represents the acceptable fractional temperature error used to determine the time step. The time step may vary by many orders of magnitude during the course of an analysis, depending on the loads and constraints. At the beginning of an analysis, the time step can be especially small. Since the energy norm in the model is zero at the start of an analysis, the errors in energy norm are normalized by a small value. This value works with the temperature variation value to control the accuracy of the time integration. For example, if you set Accuracy to a value of 0.001 and set 874
IndexAdditional Information
Estimated Variation to a value of 200, the Thermal engine attempts to keep timestep errors in temperature to a value of 0.2 degrees or less. Mechanica controls the accuracy of transient thermal analyses by varying the p-order of element edges and the time step used for numerical integration. These values change as an analysis progresses. Two parameters affect the time step size on the Analysis Definition dialog box for transient thermal analysisAccuracy and Estimated Variation. Errors in temperature must be less than the product of the estimated temperature variation and the accuracy.
See Also
Reference: Estimated Temperature Variation
875
In addition to adjusting the minimum and maximum values, you can also adjust individual legend values through the Edit>Legend Value command.
876
IndexAdditional Information
Regardless of which method you used to adjust a legend, you can return a legend to its original state through the Utilities>Reset Legend command.
If you decide to set either of these options to a state other than the default, you should do so based on correlation with test data.
877
SIM_FATIGUE_MEAN_STRESS config.pro option Use this option to indicate whether you want Fatigue Advisor to apply mean stress correction. The default state for this option is YES. SIM_FATIGUE_MEAN_STRESS_METHOD config.pro option Use this option to indicate the method Fatigue Advisor should applySmith-WatsonTopper, Morrow, or Worst. As mentioned, the default state for this option is WORST. Note that the software only checks the setting for this option if sim_fatigue_mean_stress is set to YES.
If you decide to set either of these options to a state other than the default, you should do so based on correlation with test data.
878
IndexAdditional Information
biaxiality parameter
Another parameter that you may want to adjust is variable amplitude load history. Fatigue Advisor enables you to specify either a constant or variable amplitude load history when you define your fatigue analysis. If you decide to use a variable amplitude load history, you can either enter the data or import an ASCII file defining the load history. Importing a variable load history file can allow you to better correlate test results. Note that you do not need to change any config.pro default settings to utilize an ASCII file as the variable amplitude load history.
Alignment
The alignment options are available only if you selected Current View for the graphic size. The two options are: Landscape Select this option to orient the graphic along the horizontal axis. The graphic is wider than it is high. Portrait Select this option to orient the graphic along the vertical axis. The graphic is higher than it is wide.
The following table shows the valid minimum angles and the defaults for edges and faces during creation and editing (all angles are in degrees): Minimum Angles
879
The following table shows the valid maximum angles and the defaults for edges and faces during creation and editing (all angles are in degrees): Maximum Angles
Defaults Entity Edge Face Valid Range 150 to 179 150 to 179 Creating 175 175 Editing 179 179
These settings control the minimum and maximum angles that AutoGEM uses.
Allowable Errors
In most cases, Mechanica does not start a run if it finds errors. There are a few errors that do not prevent a run from starting, including: loads, constraints, heat loads, prescribed temperatures, and convection conditions that result in singularities elements that should be linked gravity loads that have no effect
880
IndexAdditional Information
Delete Study Deletes the selected analysis or design study. Start Run Starts an analysis or design study run. Stop Run Stops an analysis or design study run. Configure Run Settings Opens the Run Settings dialog box so you can define the settings for a run. Display Study Status Opens the status window for the analysis or design study you select.
Create a new analysis or design study using the options on the File menu.
Select the analysis or design study from the list and use the Edit>Analysis/Study menu option to modify it.
Open the Run Settings dialog box to designate the output and temporary files and their format for the run. Specify the solver and memory allocation you want Mechanica to use for the run.
Check your model before you start the run using the Info>Check Model
881
menu option.
Use the Run menu or the buttons on the toolbar to start, stop, or restart a run.
Monitor a Run
Use the Run Status window to monitor a run. Select Detailed Summary to see more information about the run. Select the Info>Diagnose menu option to troubleshoot run problems.
See Also
References: Developing a Model (Native Mode) Defining Design Changes (Native Mode) Optimizing a Model (Native Mode)
882
IndexAdditional Information
You can animate fringe, vector, or model result displays using the Display Options tab on the Result Window Definition dialog box. You cannot animate fatigue or linearized stress results. When you select Animate on the Display Options tab, these options become available: Auto Start Start the animation as soon as the result window displays. You can also start and stop the animation using the View>Start, View>Step Forward, and View>Stop commands, or the corresponding toolbar buttons on the result window. Playback mode Designate the playback mode of the animation by clicking one of these buttons: o o o (Repeat) In a static animation, the model moves from zero to maximum deformation in equal, linear steps. (Reverse) In a static animation, the model moves from zero to maximum deformation and back to zero in equal, linear steps.
(Alternating) In a modal animation, the model moves from zero to maximum deformation, back to zero deformation, then to negative maximum deformation, and then back to zero, changing shape in unequal steps. Frames Enter the number of frames you want in a single animation cycle. The default number of frames is 8. The number of frames must be a multiple of 4 except for step animation.
If you define a deformed result display, you can toggle the deformed overlay on the animation by selecting View>Overlay in the Results user interface window. When you display the result window for an animated model, you can speed up or slow down the animation by moving the slider on the toolbar in the appropriate direction. For information on controlling your animation, see Controlling Animations.
883
See Also
Procedure: To Animate a Results Display
ANSYS
Writing an ANSYS output file creates a PREP7 file in ASCII format called filename.ans. Use the fem_which_ansys_solver config.pro option to specify which ANSYS solver you plan to useFrontal, Iterative, or Powersolver. The values are: FRONTAL (default), ITERATIVE, and POWERSOLVER. The following table lists the mesh elements written to the ANSYS output file for the various mesh types and idealizations.
Analysis Shells Linear Thermal Linear Structural Parabolic Structural Tetrahedral Solids Linear Thermal Parabolic Thermal Linear Structural Parabolic Structural Beams Trusses Springs Advanced Springs Masses Gaps All All All All All All ANSYS SHELL57 SHELL43 SHELL93 SOLID70 SOLID87 SOLID92 SOLID92 BEAM44 LINK8 COMBIN14 MATRIX27 MASS21 COMBIN40
Note that Mechanica does not output radiation to ANSYS. Also, for gaps, the gap value is Gap and the normal stiffness is K2. ANSYS supports zero-length idealizationsidealizations that have no length, such as an idealization between a point on a surface and the surface itselffor gaps and advanced springs only.
884
IndexAdditional Information
Apparent Frequency
Mechanica calculates the effective frequency of a PSD output by integrating over the frequency range. This option is available for certain quantities if you selected At Point for Spatial Evaluation and base the measure on one of the directional components. Mechanica only calculates measures that use the Apparent Frequency dynamic evaluation method for dynamic random analyses.
Area
Enter the cross-sectional area for each beam section. You must enter a positive value. Because General beam section types lack geometry, for the purpose of calculating torsional stress, Mechanica assumes that the cross section is circular.
Note: In FEM mode, Mechanica respects part-level loads and constraints at the assembly level. For example, if you are working in native mode and you model the individual parts of your assembly in part mode, the software ignores the loads you assigned to each part after you access Mechanica from assembly mode. When you access Mechanica from assembly mode, you can then define loads relevant to the assembly as a whole. In any case, modeling entities that you assign while working from assembly mode have no bearing on modeling entities you assign while working from part mode, and the reverse.
885
At Each Step
Mechanica calculates the value of the measure at each time step for a dynamic time response analysis or at each frequency step for a dynamic frequency or random response analysis. If you selected At Each Step as the time or frequency evaluation method, you can obtain a cumulative measure value for all steps by selecting the Cumulative check box. Mechanica does not report the measure values in the summary file, but you can plot these values as a function of time or frequency through the Results command.
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Auto Detect, Mechanica highlights the pairs that it was able to create. One surface in each pair is red and the other yellow. If you determine that Auto Detect did not pair all the applicable pairs in the model, use New to complete the pairing process manually. See Example: Unpaired Surface on L-Bracket for an example of geometry with unpaired surfaces.
model.mmp master representation, or generic instance of a part model#rep1.mmp simplified representation of a part model#inst1.mmp family table instance of a part model#inst1#rep1.mmp simplified representation of a family table instance Assembly o model.mma any representation of an assembly
For more information on simplified representations and family tables, search the Assembly and Welding functional area and the Fundamentals functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
AutoGEM Overconstrained
We recommend that you run AutoGEM against all of the surfaces and volumes in your model at the same time. This approach assures a cohesive mesh. However, if you mesh your model in stages, selecting volumes one or two at a time, examine the volume interfaces before you start. Be sure to use AutoGEM on the volume that includes the smallest features near the interface before you use it on the volumes with larger features. This is because, after you use AutoGEM on one of the volumes in a model, the element faces on that volume become constraints that AutoGEM must respect while 887
processing other adjacent volumes. If you start with volumes that have larger features near the interface, the existing large elements at the volume interface may overconstrain AutoGEM when you then try to mesh adjacent volumes with smaller features. You can correct this situation through the AutoGEM Settings dialog box. In this case, you select Modify Or Delete Existing Elements and select the volume filled with elements as well as the unfilled volume. AutoGEM then completes the unfilled volume and modifies the existing elements in the filled volume as required.
Automatic Interrupt
Select this option on the Settings tab if you want AutoGEM to automatically stop when it has created a specified percentage of elements. If you select this item, Mechanica displays an additional line on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box where you enter the percentage of completion at which you want Mechanica to stop AutoGEM. Automatic Interrupt is useful when you know from previously using AutoGEM on your model that you will encounter swap space or AutoGEM problems if you allow AutoGEM to continue. You can use the AutoGEM log file to determine the point at which you should interrupt the AutoGEM process.
888
IndexAdditional Information
T=0, Z=0
P=0, T=90
T=90, Z=0
P=90, T=90
T=0
Mechanica documentation usually uses the Cartesian axes to describe the action of various commands. If you are using cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems, you need to substitute the appropriate equivalents of the X, Y, and Z axes. In addition, Mechanica dialog boxes use Cartesian component nomenclature for certain property types. This table lists the cylindrical and spherical equivalents:
Cartesian Cylindrical Spherical
XX
RR
RR
YY
ZZ
ZZ
XY
XZ
RZ
YZ
889
Base Excitation
You can use this option if the modal analysis you selected for your dynamic analysis contains at least one constrained modal analysis. Otherwise, Base Excitation is not available. If no loads are defined on your model, you must define the dynamic analysis using base excitation. When you select Base Excitation, these items appear on the dialog box: Time/Frequency Dependence A default function to define base acceleration appears on the dialog box. Click the f(x) button if you want a different function, and the Functions dialog box appears. You select an existing function or click New to define a new function. If you click New on the Functions dialog box, the Function Definition dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to define a new function. Direction Enter WCS coordinates that specify the direction in which the constrained parts of your model move in response to the forcing function. For 2D models, you only enter X and Y coordinates. Relative to You can have displacement, velocity, and acceleration results calculated with respect to ground or to supports.
Beam Contribution
Use the Include Contribution From Beams area of the Quantity tab to select the beam contributions you want to use for the result window. This area does not appear on the dialog box unless there are beams in the model and they were part of the design study or analysis. In FEM mode, you can see this area only when you are loading results from an MSC/NASTRAN .xdb file. However, in this case, Include Contribution From Beams area is inactiveshowing you which contributions Mechanica will include in the result window, but not allowing you to select contributions. Note: The discussion below pertains to all quantities that allow specific measurement of beam behavior except for Strain Energy. The options in the Include Contribution From Beams area determine the values that the software uses to plot along the beam curve in the result display. All of the check boxes are selected by default. If you clear all three, the result window does not display any beams. If you select beam bending, beam tensile, beam torsional stress, or beam total from the Component option menu, the check boxes in the Include Contribution From Beams area become unavailable. In FEM mode, since your selection is limited to beam total, the check boxes always remain unaccessible.
890
IndexAdditional Information
For quantities that have beams, except for strain energy, the selections in the Include Contribution From Beams area include: Bending Include bending for beams in the result display. In FEM mode, this box is always checked. Tensile Include tension for beams in the result display. In FEM mode, this box is always checked. Torsional Include torsion for beams in the result display. In FEM mode, this box remains unchecked.
There is a menu below the check boxes with these options: Maximum Use the maximum value to evaluate the beams in your model. Minimum Use the minimum value to evaluate the beams in your model. Maximum Absolute Use the signed value that has the maximum absolute value to evaluate the beams in your model. If the absolute values of the maximum value and minimum value are equal, Mechanica uses the maximum value. Recovery Point Use one of the locations at which Mechanica reports stresses for the beams in your model.
When reviewing beam resultant results, you should be aware of the sign conventions used for beam resultant forces and moments. An understanding of the sign conventions will help you interpret your results correctly.
891
If you accessed the Beam Sections dialog box from the Beam Definition dialog box, when you close the Beam Sections dialog box, Mechanica uses the section you selected from the Beam Sections in Model list for the current beam definition, and displays the beam section name in the Beam Definition dialog box.
892
IndexAdditional Information
Save your result windows before exiting Mechanica if you want to use them again. Mechanica does not keep result windows between results sessions. Use the File>Save command in the Results user interface to save result windows and either the File>Open command or the Insert>Results Window from File command to re-use saved result windows. Mechanica saves the result window definitions in an .rwd file. If you define a result window for a design study, save it, and then rerun the same design study, the original result window definition may no longer be valid. You can change result window definitions for a particular design study whether or not you change anything about the design study just by modifying the values and settings you use when you define the result window.
You can use results from previous versions of Mechanica. Mechanica automatically converts old results for use with the current release.
BLF Convergence
The convergence index is the maximum percentage change of any BLF (buckling load factor). In a buckling analysis, Mechanica calculates BLF and mode shape for each buckling mode you specify. The BLF is the magnification factor by which the loads applied in a previously specified static analysis would have to be multiplied to produce the critical buckling load. For more information, see Buckling Analysis.
Boundary Edges
Mechanica highlights all boundary edges. A boundary edge is an edge associated with only one shell or solid, unless the edge is associated with a solid and a shell coincident with a face of that solid. If your model contains boundary edges that are not associated with a curve, Mechanica highlights just those edges separately. You can use this information to identify missing elements.
Boundary Faces
Mechanica highlights all boundary facesfaces that belong to only one solid. Although these are not actually errors, you can check each boundary face to make sure it does not represent a missing element. If your model contains boundary faces that are not associated with a surface, Mechanica highlights just those faces separately. You can use this information to identify missing elements. 893
894
IndexAdditional Information
After you have defined the rules for your model, you can add, remove, or update the rules by using the Add, Remove, or Update options, respectively. The Add option adds a new rule to the Query Builder. The Remove option removes a selected rule while the Update option replaces a selected rule with the current rule. Save Query Saves a query. After you have built a query, you can save the query by selecting Options>Save Query. Specify a layer name in the Save Rules dialog box to save your query as a new layer. Mechanica displays the new layer in the Model Tree. Select Layer in the Status tab to display layers in the Value field. Include or exclude selected simulation entities so that only the required items are displayed in the mesh.
Ply Stresses Directs Mechanica to calculate the ply-by-ply stress results. This option is only for models that have laminate shell properties defined.
For dynamic random response analyses, select the following item if you want Mechanica to calculate full results: Full RMS Results for Displacements and Stresses Enables you to display fringe plots for RMS stress and RMS displacement results.
For dynamic analyses with base excitation, select the following item if you want Mechanica to calculate factors important in determining if enough vibration modes obtained from modal analysis are included to ensure accurate results. Mass Participation Factors Directs Mechanica to calculate the modal mass participation factors. This may result in greatly increased computational time.
You cannot access full results for quantities you deselect here. Mechanica calculates all measures valid for the analysis, regardless of your selections here. You can 895
access results for measures through the summary report or by graphing the measure in a results window. Note: If you select Time/Frequency Eval when you define a dynamic measure, you can access results only through a results window.
You cannot access results for any quantity you deselect here. For static, prestress static, large deformation static, contact, and buckling analyses, Mechanica does calculate all stress and rotation measures even if you do not select Stresses and Rotations on the analysis dialog box. But you cannot access the same results for measures that you can when you select Stresses, Rotations, and Reactions.
896
IndexAdditional Information
CZ The distance from the midsurface of the shell at which Mechanica calculates stresses and strains. The software defines CZ relative to material direction 3 of the material orientation assigned to the shell, as shown below:
Ply Orientation (Degrees) The orientation of the ply material relative to the material orientation that Mechanica assigns to the element. The software measures the ply orientation angle, (theta), as a counter-clockwise rotation from material direction 1 about material direction 3. The value of this item must be from 360 to +360 . Material The material at the CZ location. When you click the More button, the Materials dialog box appears. After you select a material, Mechanica displays the material name.
See Also
References: Materials Dialog Box for Structure Shell Contribution
897
The positive Z axis is perpendicular to the XY plane with the positive direction determined by the right-hand rule. Mechanica automatically makes the new coordinate system current.
Channel
The icon for a channel beam section type looks like this:
When you select Channel as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following beam cross-section dimensions: b t di tw
If you are interested in examining the exact effects of shear on a beam, enter values for Shear FY and Shear FZ. These factors represent the ratio of a beam's effective "shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear in the principal Y and Z directions. You must enter a positive value for each of these properties. The default is 0.833333, which is accurate for rectangular cross sections. When you click Accept, if your section type has fewer than two planes of symmetry, Mechanica informs you that the beams should be loaded or braced to prevent twist under shear loading. Stress recovery points for channel beam section types are illustrated below. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for FEM mode.
898
IndexAdditional Information
These values represent the thermal expansion coefficient in each of the three principal material directions of the model. For transversely isotropic material properties, enter the following two values for coefficients of thermal expansion: a1 a2 = a3
These values represent the thermal expansion coefficient in each of the three principal material directions of the model, with equal values in directions 2 and 3. You should enter values for this property if you plan to place a thermal load on the model. 899
Comparing Animations
Comparing animations helps you make important decisions about your model or models. One of the most common reasons you compare animations is to help you determine which of several models shows the most desirable behavior pattern for the quantity, mode, and so forth. You can also compare animations of the same model to: Learn how the animated shapes compare with the original model shape. Use the View>Overlay toggle to superimpose a wireframe of the original model over the animation of the model. The Overlay command is only available for unfringed animations. Learn how the model behaves for different analysis conditions. In this case, you animate the same model using different load sets, constraint sets, or analysis types to get a better idea of overall reaction to multiple environments. Learn how the model behaves for different modes. This shows you which modes are likely to be a problem and how a quantity distributes at the same
900
IndexAdditional Information
stage for different modes. To learn more, see Example: Comparing Mode Animations for the Same Model. Learn how the model behaves at different stages of the animation. This shows you how a quantity distributes at different times or how resonance behaves over time. To learn more, see Example: Comparing Animation Stages for the Same Model.
Useful for symmetry problems with relatively simple geometric profiles. You reduce the geometry by placing constraints along planes of reflective symmetry. Each plane, in effect, reduces the model or model segment by one half. If you choose to use cuts to isolate the symmetric segment, the cuts must be planar. You must explicitly define separate constraints for each unique plane of symmetry to indicate that the segment is connected to the parent model.
You reduce the geometry by finding the smallest symmetric segment and applying cuts to isolate this segment.
Cuts you use to isolate the symmetric segment need not be planar.
You define a single cyclic symmetry constraint for both cut surfaces or, in the case of shells, both cut curves. Mechanica interprets the constraint to mean that the model is a symmetric segment. You can define only one cyclic symmetry constraint for a single model.
You can define more than one mirror symmetry constraints for a single model. The mirror symmetry planes must be parallel or orthogonal to each other.
901
Comparing Results
For many models, one of the most valuable understandings you can have is how the quantities you are interested in compare with each other. While you can perform this comparison by studying the legends and scales for the various result windows or by looking at the measures in your analysis Summary file, Mechanica provides tools to make comparing results easier. The Results user interface provides functionality that lets you tie the scale of one result window to that of another. To tie scales for two result windows, use Utilities>Tie and its subcommands. The method for tying graphs together is slightly different from the method for tying fringe, contour, and vector plots.
Component
When you define your result window display, you can select a component to further define the quantity you choose. The items available on the Component option menu depend on the quantity you choose from the Quantity option menu. For more information on the components available for each quantity, select the quantity from this list: Acceleration Beam Bending Beam Resultant Beam Tension Beam Torsion Beam Total Displacement Fatigue Flux Reaction Rotation Rotation Acceleration Rotation Velocity Shear & Moment Shell Resultant Stress, Strain, and Thermal Strain Temp Gradient Velocity
902
IndexAdditional Information
stress and strain quantities displacement, rotation, and reaction quantities the contact force quantity center of mass quantities moment of inertia quantities
903
IndexAdditional Information
If you select one of the component directions instead, Mechanica determines the moment of inertia relative to the current coordinate system in the direction you selected.
Max Shear
XZ*
Max Principal
YZ*
Min Principal
Beam Bending
Beam Tensile
XX*
Beam Total
905
YY*
Beam Torsional
ZZ*
*If you select any of these options, use the arrow button to select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can also select a UCS. Note: Mechanica derives von Mises strain in the same way as von Mises stress, and maximum shear strain in the same way as maximum shear stress. For more information, see option information for Strain Results Quantity or Stress Results Quantity. Structure expresses stress values and directions somewhat differently than they are sometimes described in textbooks. To learn more about how Structure stresses relate to textbook examples, see How Stress Components Relate to Textbook Examples.
906
IndexAdditional Information
model is a part, the Component and Layer Tree displays only layers that contain beam or shell definitions. Buttons Use to determine which components or layers are visible in the results window.
In general, it is better to use Isolate to visualize the parts and layers of interest in the result window display. Use Blank to exclude a few items from the result window display. If you define assembly-level shell/beam definitions on part-level geometry, blanking the part also blanks the shell/beam definitions unless they are in an isolated layer. For more detailed information on layers, search the Basic Pro/ENGINEER functional area in the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
Components for Acceleration, Displacement, Reaction, Rotation, Rotation Acceleration, Rotation Velocity, or Velocity
When you select Acceleration, Displacement, Reaction, Rotation, Rotation Acceleration, Rotation Velocity, or Velocity from the Quantity option menu, the Component option menu displays the components specific to these quantities. Use this option menu to further refine your quantity definition. The choices available on
907
this menu depend on the design study, display type, and quantity combination you select. These are the options that can appear on the Component menu if you select Acceleration, Displacement, Reaction, Rotation, Rotation Acceleration, Rotation Velocity, or Velocity: Magnitude the magnitude of the quantity vector, which is equivalent to selecting all three components. Magnitude is not available for the reaction quantity. X the quantity in the X direction or about the X axis. X is not available for reaction moment, rotation, rotation acceleration, and rotation velocity for all 2D models. Y the quantity in the Y direction or about the Y axis. Y is not available for 2D plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models. Y is not available for reaction moment, rotation, rotation acceleration, and rotation velocity for all 2D models. Z the quantity in the Z direction or about the Z axis. Z is not available for any 2D model.
If you change the coordinate system type for your results display, the directional components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from X, Y, and Z to R, T, and Z. For more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
In FEM mode, the only available component specific to beams is Beam Total for the stress quantity. It appears when you display results from the NASTRAN .xdb file. 908
IndexAdditional Information
If you change the coordinate system type for your results display, the directional components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the Cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from X, Y, and Z to R, T, and Z. For more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
909
confidence the better. Values below unity indicate failure. Values greater than 3.0 usually reflect an adequate confidence of achieving the desired target life. You can display Confidence Of Life results in a tri-colored fringe plot to give an overall view of where the model will break first and where the model will last for a greater number of cycles. Red signifies from 0 cycles to the number of cycles entered for Desired Endurance (considered 1x) on the analysis dialog box. Yellow signifies from 1x to 3x (considered the marginal life). Green signifies any number of cycles over the marginal life (3x). The default is 3x, but you can change this by changing the value of sim_fatigue_safety_margin in the configuration file. For fatigue analyses, Mechanica reports results for all surfaces on your model, but not the interior of your model.
If you change the coordinate system type for your results display, the directional components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the Cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from X, Y, and Z to R, T, and Z. For more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
910
IndexAdditional Information
Y - The quantity in the Y direction or about the Y axis. Y is not available for 2D plane strain and 2D axisymmetric models. Z - The quantity in the Z direction or about the Z axis. Z is not available for any 2D model.
If you select Transverse Shear Force from the secondary quantity option menu, these options appear on the menu: X shear force acting in the Z direction on the plane whose outward normal is parallel to the X axis Y shear force acting in the Z direction on the plane whose outward normal is parallel to the Y axis
Regardless of whether you choose Force, Moment, or Transverse Shear Force from the secondary menu, Mechanica enables you to select a reference coordinate system for any of the directional components. If you change the coordinate system 911
type for your results display, the directional components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate system. For example, if you change from the Cartesian coordinate system to the Cylindrical coordinate system, the labels change from XX, YY, and ZZ to RR, TT, and ZZ. For more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
For directional components, Mechanica displays the Relative To option menu, enabling you to display the result relative to a coordinate system, laminate ply, and so forth. Be aware that if you change the coordinate system for your results display, the directional components in the Component option menu change to reflect the new coordinate system. For example, if you change from Cartesian to Cylindrical, the labels change from XX, YY, and ZZ to RR, TT, and ZZ. For more information, see Results Relative to Coordinate Systems.
912
IndexAdditional Information
Native mode expresses stress values and directions somewhat differently than they are sometimes described in textbooks. To learn more about how native mode stresses relate to textbook examples, see How Stress Components Relate to Textbook Examples.
For example, suppose you define a constraint on a surface with a Cartesian coordinate system (coordinate system A), and you also define a displacement coordinate system (coordinate system B) for a mesh control on the same surface. If the axes for both coordinate systems are parallel, but coordinate system B is rotated with respect to coordinate system A so that the X and Y axes are interchanged, a conflict will occur. Of course, non-parallel axes will also cause a conflict.
Mechanica checks your displacement coordinate systems and attempts to resolve conflicts by using geometric and model-hierarchy precedence rules. If the software cannot resolve the conflicts, an error message appears and the output stops. You must resolve the conflict before the run can continue. When the software sets the displacement coordinate system for each node, it checks for conflicts in this order: 913
Mesh controls The software checks for conflicts between displacement coordinate systems used to define mesh controls and tries to resolve them using geometric and assembly precedence rules. An example of a nonresolvable conflict is a different displacement coordinate system assigned to surfaces that belong to the red and yellow sides of a shell pair. The geometric precedence rules are: o A mesh control applied to a point overrides a mesh control applied to an edge or surface that contains that point. o A mesh control applied to an edge overrides a mesh control applied to a surface that contains that edge. Rigid or weighted links The software checks for conflicts between the coordinate systems associated with rigid or weighted links and tries to resolve them using geometric and assembly precedence rules. Mesh controls and rigid or weighted links The software checks for conflicts between coordinate systems associated with links and displacement coordinate systems for mesh controls. Constraints The software checks for conflicts between the coordinate systems associated with constraints and tries to resolve them using geometric and assembly precedence rules. If you apply a free and a fixed degree of freedom to the same node, the fixed constraint takes precedence over the free constraint. The presence of a fixed constraint also overrides the geometric precedence rules, so that a fixed constraint on a surface takes precedence over a free constraint on a point. A non-resolvable conflict may occur between partially fixed or partially free constraints on adjacent objects. Mesh controls, rigid or weighted links, and constraints The software checks for conflicts between constraints and mesh controls, and between constraints and links.
See Also
References: Structure Constraints and Coordinate Systems Creating Rigid Links (FEM mode) Creating Weighted Links (FEM mode) Ignored Mesh Control (FEM mode)
914
IndexAdditional Information
have contact regions defined. Contact regions allow the two volumes to separate during the simulation. If you compress the parts using midsurface compression, you can use end welds or perimeter welds, or let the software create automatic midsurface connections, to eliminate the gaps that occur between mating edges or surfaces of the parts. This ensures that touching entities remain connected. For more information, see Gaps in Assemblies. If a part does not touch any other part, Mechanica treats the part as an unconnected body.
Depending on the tolerance between parts and the degree to which parts touch, Mechanica may or may not connect some of the parts in an assembly. For example, if you create the following assembly, Mechanica connects the parts as shown:
The two rectangular parts are close enough to be within tolerance, and they share enough surface for Mechanica to merge them into a single body. However, the sphere and rectangle have only one point of contact. Therefore, Mechanica does not merge the sphere with the rest of the assembly. In this case, the assembly would contain two connected parts and one unconnected parttwo bodies in all. Before you run an analysis or design study, Mechanica asks you whether you want error detection. If you do, Mechanica checks for various modeling conditions including the presence of multiple bodies in the model. Should it encounter more than one body, Mechanica displays a message indicating the number of separate, or disjoint, bodies it finds. You can use this information to determine whether parts you thought were connected are truly connected. If you see an unexpected number of bodies, you may want to cancel the analysis or study and correct the assembly.
915
916
IndexAdditional Information
Tx, Ty, Tz, Rx, Ry, Rz Tx, Ty, Tz Original Surface Load Total Load at Point Total Load
Note: If your model has an interpolated surface load, Mechanica cannot automatically transfer the load to an edge. Therefore, if you attempt to compress a solid containing such a load, the attempt will fail, and Mechanica will delete the load.
917
The constraints that Mechanica adds bridge this gap, and link the overlapping portions of the two compressed surfaces. If your assembly contains two solids that intersect in a "T" formation, it might look like the drawing below. When these solids are compressed to their midsurfaces, Mechanica attempts to add a constraint between the edge of one midsurface and the corresponding area on the other.
918
IndexAdditional Information
Use the associated selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display.
Contour Labels
Use this command to turn on or off lettered labels on the contour plot. Use the Format>Result Window command. Select or clear the Contour Labels box on the Format Result Window dialog box. The Contour Labels box is active only if you selected Label Contours when you defined the result window. Select Labels to toggle the labels on or off. When Labels is active, Mechanica displays a series of labels along each contour curve. The labels are capital letters. Labels are especially useful if you are printing black and white hard copy. Otherwise, the contour colors generally provide enough information.
To change the density of the contour labels so there are more or less in a given area, select Utilities>Relabel Contour from the Results user interface menu bar.
919
Controlling Animations
Mechanica provides commands that let you control how an animation progresses. You can execute these commands either from the View menu or through toolbar buttons. The animation controls are: Start Start an animation. This command initializes the animation at the frame currently active in the result window. The animation moves without pause through the remaining steps in the animation. The animation repeats until you stop it. Stop Stop an animation. This command halts the animation at the current frame. Step Forward Move forward through an animation frame by frame. Step Back Move backward through an animation frame by frame. Animation Playback Speed Control Speed up or slow down an animation by moving the slider on the toolbar in the appropriate direction. This option is not available on the View menu.
IndexAdditional Information
instead of shading the elements as well, the software renders them as outlines on the surface of the shaded geometry. To create the model appearance you want, you can use the mesh display options in combination with the geometry display buttons always present on the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar. For example, you can set the geometry of your model to a Shaded display and the mesh to a No Hidden display. This renders a geometrically accurate, realistic-looking model with a simple element overlay. The Wireframe, Hidden Line, and No Hidden settings are primarily useful for solid and mixed models. For shell and midsurface models, all these settings look similar because shell elements have no displayed depth. Additionally, if you shade the geometry of your model, you will be able to see the element display more easily if you ensure that the model color has some transparency. As an alternative to using the option list to change mesh visibilities, you can use the mesh display buttons on the menu bar. You can also set the initial state of your mesh display through the sim_display_mesh_mode config.pro option.
Use the Mesh Display area on the Mesh tab of the Simulation Display dialog box to control the appearance of a mesh. This area includes: Shrink Elements Shrink elements in a mesh to clearly view their 3D shapes. Enter a value in the spin box to shrink the elements by the given percentage. This option is primarily useful for large models or models with meshing problems, where shrinking the elements can help you identify poor element shapes or locate problem areas. Display Shells with Zero Thickness Display shells in a mesh with zero thickness. This option is available only if you select the Shells option on the Mesh Entities area. Selecting this option ensures a quicker mesh display because Mechanica displays the elements as a 2D rendition, which provides an accurate footprint of the mesh while saving the time required for a 3D rendition. To display shells with the actual thickness, clear this check box. Displaying actual thickness lets you make sure that shells in a mesh are correctly defined and have the intended thickness. Note that if a shell is made up of layers, Mechanica displays the shell elements with the total shell thickness and not with the individual layer thicknesses. Display Quality Change the display quality of a mesh for better viewing of the curved elements. Select Coarse, Medium, or Fine where Fine is the 921
closest approximation to the original shape of the curved element. Mechanica displays a coarse quality mesh by default. Mechanica enhances the display quality by improving the tesselation of the nonlinear curved elements in a mesh. Therefore, selecting Medium or Fine may not be effective for models with linear shaped elements or for models with highly refined meshes, where the curved elements are already very small. The only time you may need a Medium or Fine setting for a refined mesh is if you are zooming in closely on the curved elements. You can also set the initial state of your mesh display through the Simulation Display Mesh options in the config.pro file.
o o
922
IndexAdditional Information
so forth. You control window format using the Format>Result Window command and the View menu. Window format controls include: o o Format>Result Window Use the Format Result Window dialog box to select and deselect various window characteristics. View menu Use the View menu to overlay the undeformed model over an animation or to shade your model.
Convergence Indicators
The convergence loop log also lists convergence indicators at each pass. These percentages are based on changes between the current pass and the preceding pass, and provide an indication of the accuracy of the results. If you intentionally define an analysis that requires only a single p-loop pass by setting the minimum and maximum polynomial orders to the same value, Mechanica sets the convergence indicators to 100% and warns that convergence has not been checked, because there is no preceding pass with which to compare. The Structure engine calculates the following convergence indicators: Measure Convergence Frequency Convergence BLF Convergence Local Disp/Energy Index, Local Temp/Energy Index Global RMS Stress Index Global Energy Index
Convergence Measures
Mechanica checks if measures are associated with any analyses in a design study that use the Measure option for convergence. If there are no convergence measures, Mechanica displays an error message and does not start the run.
Convergence Method
Convergence gives you an idea of how accurate your results are. If your analysis does not reach convergence during a design study, the results may not have the desired accuracy. In this case, you need to modify your model. Select one of these convergence methods for Mechanica to use when it runs your analysis: Multi-Pass Adaptive Mechanica calculates results at increasing polynomial orders until convergence criteria are satisfied.
923
Single-Pass Adaptive Mechanica runs a first pass at a polynomial order of 3 and determines a local estimate of stress error. Using this error estimate, Mechanica determines a new p-order distribution and performs a final pass. Quick Check (No Convergence) Mechanica performs a single pass at a uniform polynomial order of 3. You can use this method to verify that you have defined your analysis correctly.
This table summarizes which methods are available for different analysis and model types:
Analysis Types Multi-Pass Adaptive available Single-Pass Adaptive available only for 3D models or models with 2D solids available only for 3D models not available available Quick Check
available
available
available
available available
See Also
Reference: Strategy: Identifying and Resolving Potential Trouble Spots in a Model
For the Multi-Pass Adaptive convergence method Polynomial Order Enter a minimum and maximum polynomial order. Limits Enter the Percent Convergence. Converge on Select the quantities you want to use. For a description of the convergence quantities for each type of analysis see: o o 924 Convergence Quantity for Static, Prestress Static, Large Deformation Static, and Contact Analyses Convergence Quantity for Modal and Prestress Modal Analyses
IndexAdditional Information
For the Single-Pass Adaptive convergence method Localized Mesh Refinement (contact analysis only) Select this option to improve the accuracy of contact pressure results.
For the Quick Check method, the tab displays the polynomial order of 3.
See Also
Procedure: To Set Convergence for a Structural Analysis
The following items appear on the tab only for steady thermal analysis with the Multi-Pass Adaptive convergence method selected: Polynomial Order Enter a minimum and maximum polynomial order. Limits Enter the Percent Convergence. Converge on Select the convergence quantities you want to use.
See Also
Procedure: To Set Convergence for a Thermal Analysis
925
accuracy you need with the amount of time it will take to run a design study containing this analysis.
BLF, Local Displacement, Local Strain Energy, and RMS Stress Mechanica uses RMS (Root Mean Square) stress for each buckling mode in addition to BLF, displacement, and strain energy to calculate convergence.
The RMS stress error measure is a single scalar value which is proportional to the square root of the estimated error in total strain energy. Mechanica checks convergence for RMS stress by extrapolating the total strain energy for three successive calculations. As a result, RMS stress is sensitive to the rate of convergence.
926
IndexAdditional Information
Use this option if you are interested in details of mode shapes and modal stresses. This option provides high accuracy, but can also mean greater computation time.
Frequency, Local Displacement, Local Strain Energy, and RMS Stress Mechanica uses RMS (Root Mean Square) stress in addition to frequency, displacement, and strain energy to calculate convergence. The RMS stress error measure is a single scalar value that is proportional to the square root of the estimated error in total strain energy. Mechanica checks convergence for RMS stress by extrapolating the total strain energy for three successive calculations. As a result, RMS stress is sensitive to the rate of convergence. Use this option if you are interested in details of mode shapes and modal stresses. This option provides high accuracy, but can also mean greater computation time.
Convergence Quantity for Static, Prestress Static, Large Deformation, and Contact Analyses
If you select Multi-Pass Adaptive under Convergence Method, you select the quantities Mechanica uses to calculate convergence. See Percent Convergence for information on how Mechanica measures convergence for the multi-pass adaptive method.
927
For static, prestress static, large deformation, and contact analyses, you can select one of these options: Local Displacement and Local Strain Energy Mechanica calculates convergence of the displacements along each element edge and of the total strain energy of each element. Local Displacement, Local Strain Energy and Global RMS Stress Mechanica uses RMS (Root Mean Square) stress in addition to displacement and strain energy to calculate convergence. Mechanica checks convergence for RMS stress by extrapolating the total strain energy of three successive calculations. As a result, RMS stress is sensitive to the rate of convergence. This option provides high accuracy, but can also mean greater computation time. Measures Mechanica uses one or more measures to determine convergence. When you select this option, the Measures button becomes available. Click the Measures button to select measures from the Measures dialog box. Use Measures for convergence if you are interested either in results for one or more specific quantities, such as maximum principal stress or displacement magnitude, or in results at a particular location, such as a boundary condition or local stress concentration. Using Measures can help improve accuracy for the quantities or locations of interest, and may also lower the computation time for your design study. When you select Measures, the Structure engine samples over the plotting grid to get a measure's maximum value during a run and uses that value to determine convergence. Your plotting grid setting may have a slight effect on convergence values.
928
IndexAdditional Information
session. However, if you are working in Mechanica, switch to another Pro/ENGINEER application, and return to Mechanica in the same session, the software uses the last coordinate system you designated as current before you switched applications. If you use a UCS as a reference for a load, constraint, or measure, Mechanica warns you if you try to delete that UCS. If you delete the UCS, Mechanica also deletes the load, constraint, or measure.
You select one axis for each material direction. Since you must select a different coordinate system direction for each material direction, Mechanica automatically selects the remaining axis for the third direction after you select axes for the first two directions.
929
The same load defined in a cylindrical coordinate system with FR=1 now points in the radial direction as shown below:
930
IndexAdditional Information
Note that the T = 0 axis is the line along which T = 0 and Z = 0, and the T = 90 axis is the line along which T = 90 and Z = 0.
931
Note that the P = 0 axis is the line along which P = 0 and T = 90, and the P = 90 axis is the line along which P = 90 and T = 90. The following illustration shows you how to determine the direction of the unit vectors for theta and phi using the right hand rule (r, , ).
932
IndexAdditional Information
One use of the Copy command is to create a result window that acts as a simple template for other result window definitions you want to create for the same design study. If you use Copy this way, Mechanica is able to skip some of the definition steps, making the general process of defining result windows quicker. Edit>Delete Use to delete the selected result window. If no result window is currently selected, the Selection dialog box appears and you can select one or more result windows from the list to delete.
Cost
This property is optional. Enter a value for cost per unit mass if you want: Mechanica to calculate the model's cost to use cost as a goal or limit in an optimization design study for this model
To specify cost per unit mass, you can type in a value or click the P button to assign a parameter.
933
If you restart AutoGEM on a volume that is partially filled with tetrahedral elements, it is usually best to select Modify Or Delete Existing Elements on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box.
Creating
You can override the default limits for creating elements when your model contains angles constrained by geometry to less than the angles allowed on the dialog box. Online help uses the term geometry-constrained to refer to such elements. For example, the angle in the following geometry-constrained element is smaller than the limit of 5 on the dialog box:
934
IndexAdditional Information
from the geometric elements that Mechanica creates for its native P-code solver in that finite elements have a more regular, consistent shape. For FEM meshes, you can create solid, shell, and bar meshes, or a mesh that incorporates all three element types. Reviewing and refining a mesh After you mesh your model, you can examine the element quality by checking such characteristics as aspect ratio, warp angle, edge angle, skew, and so forth. You can also review more general aspects of the mesh to determine its quality, the connectivity of its nodes, whether it has sufficient granularity, and so forth. If you are not satisfied with the mesh, you can improve it by: o asking the FEM mesher to optimize the mesh o using the information you gathered during your mesh review to create additional mesh controls. With new mesh controls in place, you then remesh the model.
See Also
References: Developing a Model (FEM Mode) Defining an Analysis (FEM Mode) Solving a Model (FEM Mode)
When you define force or mass as your primary unit, the other becomes a derived unit. For example, if you select force as one of your primary units, mass becomes a derived unit for your model. The connection between these two systems is given by Newton's second law of motion:
force = mass x acceleration the dimensions of which are: F = ML/T2
935
When you click the New button, the System Of Units Definition dialog box appears. Enter a name for the new system of units and use these radio buttons to determine the basic physical dimension type: Mass Length Time (MLT) Select this radio button if you want your system of units to be based on mass. Force Length Time (FLT) Select this radio button if you want your system of units to be based on force.
Then, select values for the following units: Length Mass or Force Time Temperature
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Custom System of Units
Custom Unit
Use the New button on the Units tab of the Units Manager dialog box to create a custom unit. A custom unit is a unit that the user defines. You can combine predefined units and custom units to create a custom system of units. When you click the New button, the Unit Definition dialog box appears. Select an option from the Physical Dimension list for the type of unit you want to create: If you select Length, Mass, Force, Time, or Temperature, the following items appear on the dialog box for the Unit Definition: o Name Enter a name for the custom unit. o Scale Enter a scale factor. All custom units are scaled from existing units, including other custom units. o Reference Unit List Select a reference unit from the list of existing units. o Offset Appears only if you selected Temperature for the physical dimension. Enter an offset value. If you select the Derived option, the following items appear on the dialog box for the Derived Unit Definition: o Name Enter a name for the custom derived unit. o Numerical Unit Expression Enter a value to define your derived unit.
936
IndexAdditional Information
gravity = 9.81 m/sec^2 atmosphere = 14.7 psi gallon = 231 in^3 speed_of_light = 3e8 m/sec
After you click OK on the Unit Definition dialog box, the name of the new custom unit appears in the list of units on the Units Manager dialog box.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Custom Unit
X_Axis_GridColor 5.019608e-01f,5.019608e-01f,0.000000e+00f X_Axis_GridEnabled 1 X_Axis_GridStyle 2 X_Axis_LabelColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f X_Axis_LabelEnabled 1 X_Axis_LabelFont graphtool_font X_Axis_LabelFontHeight 1.500000e-01f X_Axis_Thickness 4 X_Axis_TickColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f X_Axis_TickFont graphtool_font X_Axis_TickFontHeight 1.000000e-01f X_Axis_TickHorizontal 1 Y_Axis_Color 1.000000e+00f,0.000000e+00f,0.000000e+00f Y_Axis_DisplayLabel 1 Y_Axis_GridColor 5.019608e-01f,5.019608e-01f,0.000000e+00f Y_Axis_GridEnabled 1 Y_Axis_GridStyle 2 Y_Axis_LabelColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f Y_Axis_LabelEnabled 1 Y_Axis_LabelFont graphtool_font Y_Axis_LabelFontHeight 1.500000e-01f Y_Axis_Thickness 2 Y_Axis_TickColor 1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f,1.000000e+00f Y_Axis_TickFont graphtool_font Y_Axis_TickFontHeight 1.000000e-01f Y_Axis_TickHorizontal 1
If you want to save the configurations you have selected, choose the option Automatically Save To filename. The default value for filename is config.win. The default directory is the current working directory.
See Also
938
IndexAdditional Information
Procedure:
Cylindrical UCS
When you define a cylindrical user coordinate system, you enter the coordinates, which include the origin and the locations of the axes. Mechanica creates the coordinate system as follows: Uses the origin and the Z axis location you specify to define the Z axis. Makes the T = 0 axis perpendicular to the Z axis and in the plane defined by the origin, the Z axis location, and the T = 0 axis location. If you specified a T = 0 axis location that is not on a line perpendicular to the Z axis, Mechanica places the positive T = 0 axis in the direction perpendicular to the Z axis that is closest to the location you specified. The T = 0 axis still lies in the same plane in which you placed it:
The positive T = 90 axis is perpendicular to the other axes with the positive direction determined by the right-hand rule. Mechanica displays an icon that shows the origin of the new user coordinate system and the direction of each axis. The orientation of the icon depends on the orientation of the axes you entered. Here are two views of the icon:
939
The normal range for damping coefficients is from 0% to 50%. If you enter values outside this range, Mechanica asks you to confirm each value.
IndexAdditional Information
only available for your Mechanica sessions unless you promote them not visible on your part or assembly while you are working at the Pro/ENGINEER level unless you promote them
As an alternative, you can add datum points to your model in Pro/ENGINEER before entering Mechanica. In this case, the datum points are available for all your Pro/ENGINEER sessions as well.
Default
Select the Default command to set the view of your model back to the default orientation. A model appears in its default view orientation when it is first created, but a retrieved model appears in the orientation in which it was last saved. You can resume the default view at any time.
For some models and in some situations, you may be primarily interested in generating a mesh to use with an offline solver rather than running an FEM analysis within Mechanica. In this case, you do not need to define an analysis.
See Also
References: Developing a Model (FEM Mode) Creating a Mesh (FEM Mode) Solving a Model (FEM Mode)
941
942
IndexAdditional Information
Screen Create the cutting or capping surface relative to the angle at which you are currently viewing the model in the result window. Isosurface Create the cutting or capping surface based on the nearest isosurface. This option is only available for fringe plots. The Isosurface option behaves differently depending on whether you are working with cutting surfaces or capping surfaces: o o Cutting Surface Mechanica displays the single isosurface whose range is nearest the value you specify in the Depth field. Capping Surface Mechanica displays the single isosurface whose range is nearest the value you specify in the Depth field. It also fringes the model above or below the isosurface range, depending on the location you select.
When you preview your shape changes, you may find that some design controls do not behave as you want them to. In this case, you need to modify the design control. You may also need to alter or define Pro/ENGINEER relations to help control the shape change.
See Also
References: Developing a Model (Native Mode) Analyzing a Model (Native Mode) Optimizing a Model (Native Mode)
943
See Also
Procedure: To Create Parameters
944
IndexAdditional Information
XZ Create a cutting or capping surface parallel to the XZ plane of the coordinate system, screen view, or three-point grid you selected. In this case, Mechanica calculates the depth of the cut or cap in the direction of the Y axis starting with the model geometry nearest the coordinate system origin. YZ Create a cutting or capping surface parallel to the YZ plane of the coordinate system, screen view, or three-point grid you selected. In this case, Mechanica calculates the depth of the cut or cap in the direction of the X axis starting with the model geometry nearest the coordinate system origin.
945
For information on correspondence between the axes in three coordinate systems, see Axis and Component Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems.
For information on correspondence between the axes in three coordinate systems, see Axis Equivalents in Different Coordinate Systems.
Density
Enter a positive value for the mass density associated with this material. This property is optional, unless you plan to define a modal, prestress modal, or any dynamic analyses for the model in Structure. To specify mass density, you can type in a value or click the P button to assign a parameter.
946
IndexAdditional Information
If you delete a design parameter associated with a laminate layer thickness or orientation, Mechanica converts the value shown on the Shell Properties dialog box to the current value of the design parameter. At this point, you can no longer vary or control the value for a design study. In this case, you may want to review the design study to ensure that it still meets your needs. For more information on the laminate layup version of the Shell Properties dialog box, see Laminate Layup.
You can access this same file through your operating system. The file is called study/study.stt, located in the directory for output files (study is the name of your analysis or design study). Log information includes the following: the start and end time and date of the run a summary of the AutoGEM settings you specified for your model the settings on the Element Limits dialog box a running status report from AutoGEM a summary of the elements AutoGEM created the time and date of several milestones reached during the run
Milestones can include: the start and end times for calculating an analysis within the design study the time for starting a p-loop pass in an analysis other points at which the engine starts an action 947
For more information about the displayed log information, see Time and Disk Usage Information.
See Also
Reference: Diagnose AutoGEM Problems
When you select any of these commands, Mechanica marks each location with a small gray triangle icon and displays the value next to the icon. A triangle pointing up indicates a maximum. A triangle pointing down indicates a minimum. If the plot has a maximum or minimum at multiple locations, Mechanica marks one location and displays a message box telling you there are more. When you have finished reviewing a value, you can clear it from the result window for better model visibility.
948
IndexAdditional Information
Simplifying your model You can speed up your solution times and ease your simulation modeling tasks if you work with a simplified model. Pro/ENGINEER provides various techniques that you can use to simplify your model before or during your Mechanica session. Defining a system of units for your model You need to define a system of units for your model. You can select a predefined system of units or create a custom system of units. Defining modeling prerequisites for your model You can define a variety of modeling prerequisites in Mechanica. For example, you can define coordinate systems for your model. Mechanica uses coordinate systems to help determine the direction and placement of a load, the orientation of a material, and for certain types of constraints. You can also define datum geometry, surface regions, and volume regions. These features give you a more versatile approach to placing loads, constraints, connections, and idealizations.
Defining modeling entities for your model You can add the following modeling entities: o Materials You need to define the material or materials that your model will be made of. You can also define material orientations. o Constraints For Structure, you need to define the extent to which your model can move in space. For Thermal, you need to define the convection conditions and prescribed temperatures that act as boundary conditions for the model. o Loads For Structure, you need to define the external forces that act on your model relative to its constraints. For Thermal, you need to define the heat loads that act on your model. Defining idealizations Mechanica typically treats Pro/ENGINEER parts and assemblies as solid models. Some models, or portions of a model, may be better suited for other types of meshesshell or bar meshes, for example. To accommodate this type of model, Mechanica provides you with the ability to create shell or beam idealizations that the software will include when you mesh the model. You can also add specialized idealizations such as masses, gaps, and springs. These entities enable you to model concentrated masses, enforced gaps between geometry, and general six-degree-of-freedom spring connections between points. Defining connections You can define various connections in your model. For example, you can create contact regions for your model or add spot welds. Connections tell Mechanica where the different parts of your model contact as well as describe the nature of that contact. Mechanica uses this information to develop an appropriate mesh.
See Also
949
References:
Defining an Analysis (FEM Mode) Creating a Mesh (FEM Mode) Solving a Model (FEM Mode)
950
IndexAdditional Information
Shell modeling is appropriate for parts that are thin in one dimension, such as sheet metal parts. Beam modeling is a good choice for parts that are thin in two dimensions, such as rods or struts. With beam modeling, you can define your entire model as a set of beams, or you can define beams for a portion of the model and use solids or shells for the remainder. You can also add specialized idealizations such as masses and springs. These entities enable you to model concentrated masses and general six-degree-offreedom spring connections. Defining connections You can define various connections in your model. For example, you can create contact regions for your model or add spot welds. Connections tell Mechanica where the different parts of your model contact as well as describe the nature of that contact. Mechanica uses this information to develop an appropriate mesh. Defining measures You can define custom measures to obtain result values for specific points on your model or to obtain response information for vibration analyses. Checking the mesh Mechanica automatically creates a model mesh as part of analysis. However, you can use AutoGEM, Mechanica's automatic mesh creation facility, to check this mesh prior to run time. If, when you examine the AutoGEM mesh, you feel there may be problems with certain areas in your model, you can use AutoGEM to refine or correct the mesh.
See Also
References: Analyzing a Model (Native Mode) Defining Design Changes (Native Mode) Optimizing a Model (Native Mode)
Diamond
The icon for a diamond beam section type looks like this:
When you select Diamond as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for these cross-section dimensions: b d
951
Stress recovery points for diamond beam section types are illustrated below. The figure on the left shows the points in native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points in FEM mode.
Direct VRML
Use File>Export>Direct VRML to export files in VRML format. You can export one non-animating discrete colored fringe plot (excluding p-level plots) at a time using this command. After you select this command, the Export VRML dialog box appears. If there is more than one fringe plot available, you are prompted to select one. Tip: You should minimize the number of graphical entities required to visualize the results. This reduces download time and improves graphics performance. Mechanica can export fringes as VRML 1.0 or VRML 2.0 format files. You can use a config.pro option to control the VRML format Mechanica uses as well as whether the VRML report will include feature edges.
See Also
Procedure: To Export a File in VRML
952
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Displacement from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the item is part of the analysis or design study you choose. The possible selections include: Amplitude Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to display displacement in terms of amplitude. This button is available for FEM mode dynamic analyses only. Phase Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to display displacement in terms of phase. This button is available for FEM mode dynamic analyses only. Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
Displaying Element IDs, Node IDs, and Result Values (FEM mode)
For fringe, contour, and vector result windows, you can display element IDs, node IDs, and result values for your model. Viewing values for individual elements provides you the ability to closely examine the behavior of a quantity by studying individual values in the areas of interest. You display the information by using the following commands in the Info menu: Display Element IDs Turn element IDs on and off for a result window. Display Node IDs Turn node IDs on and off for a result window.
953
Display Result Values Turn a display of node values on and off for a result window. This command is only available for the following quantities: o Displacements o Rotations o Reactions o Temperatures
See Also
Procedure: To Display a Result Window
You can use the Mesh And Model check box on the Mesh tab of the Simulation Display dialog box to display both the geometry and mesh models while you are working with functionality in which only the mesh model is active. This prevents portions of your model from disappearing from the screen if you remove a mesh. Here are the situations in which only the mesh model is active: 954 Immediately after you create a mesh When you are refining a mesh using Mesh>Improve When you are reviewing a mesh using Mesh>Review When you are deleting a mesh using Mesh>Erase When you are performing mesh operations using Mesh>Operation When you are running an analysis When you are viewing results
IndexAdditional Information
You use the No Mesh option to turn off the mesh line display. Regardless of how you set the Mesh and Model check box, you can only use the No Mesh option when both the geometry and mesh models are active in the overall modelfor example, when you add properties, loads, constraints, and so forth. You cannot use the No Mesh option if only the mesh model is active.
If you plan to use Pro/ENGINEER parameters in Mechanica, you may find it handy to create all parameters before you enter Mechanica. If you are creating parameters through the Tools>Parameters command, be aware that Mechanica does not accept parameters that are created using Integer or String as a parameter type.
955
Be aware that Mechanica limits many modeling entity names to 16 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters and underbars only. Names must always start with alphabetic characters. Because Mechanica uses the Pro/ENGINEER parameter names as design parameter and measure names, always observe these naming conventions when creating Pro/ENGINEER parameters. If your Pro/ENGINEER parameter name is too long, the software will truncate it. For your convenience, Mechanica also enables you to define Pro/ENGINEER parameters from the dialog boxes that you use to create design parameters. In this case, the software only accepts a constant, numerical value as the Pro/ENGINEER parameter definition. You can use the Pro/ENGINEER parameters defined by this method as design parameters onlyyou cannot use them as measures. Note: Mechanica does not enable you to define Pro/ENGINEER parameters from the dialog boxes you use to create measures.
Mechanica repositions the cutting or capping surface according to your mouse movements, but retains the original angle of the surface. When you finish positioning the cutting or capping surface, click the middle mouse button to return to the Results Surface Definition dialog box. The dialog box's Depth field now reflects the change you made in the cutting or capping surface location.
956
IndexAdditional Information
The menu may contain all or some of the following items: At Each Step Mechanica calculates the value of the measure at each time or frequency step. Maximum Mechanica calculates the maximum value over all time or frequency steps, or over a specified time range. Minimum Mechanica calculates the minimum value over all time or frequency steps, or over a specified time range. Max Absolute Mechanica calculates the maximum magnitude value over all time or frequency steps, or over a specified time range. RMS Mechanica calculates the root mean square value of the measure over the frequency range. Apparent Frequency Mechanica calculates the effective frequency of a PSD output by integrating over the frequency range. At Time Mechanica calculates the value of a measure at a specified time. The measure is calculated only for dynamic time analyses.
The Dynamic Evaluation area also includes a Time Stamp check box that you can use to obtain information on the time at which Mechanica satisfies your measure quantity and component.
If you select Maximum, Minimum, or Maximum Abs as an evaluation method, the second drop-down menu appears:
957
Over Analysis Mechanica calculates the value over all the time steps of the transient thermal analysis. Over Time Range Mechanica calculates the value over a specified time range of the transient thermal analysis.
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure that saves the time at which a maximum, minimum, or max abs condition occurs.
Dynamic Query
Show the value of the result window's quantity at locations you select. You can query one location or multiple locations: One location Drag the cursor over the location. While you drag, a dialog box shows the value at each location the cursor crosses. To cancel, click the Done button. Tip: Some locations may be difficult to select at certain views. If you have trouble selecting a query location, try changing the view and selecting the location again. Multiple locations Click the left mouse button at a location. Mechanica marks the location with a diamond-shaped icon and displays the value above the icon. To cancel, click the Done button.
958
IndexAdditional Information
Error Resolution
During error checks, Mechanica displays message boxes asking you whether or not you want to place the highlighted entities into groups. It does not consider boundary edges and faces to be errors and does not prevent the run from starting. If your model contains errors, Mechanica returns you to the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box without executing the run. If your model contains no errors, Mechanica continues on to the next step. If your model does not contain errors, or if you did not check for errors, Mechanica takes the following steps: saves the model, prompting you to enter a model name if you have not previously saved it writes the engine input files and starts the engine
The engine runs the design study in the background. At any time during the run, you can: Check the study's status by selecting Info>Status on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. Stop the run by clicking the Stop button.
Estimated Variation
You use Estimated Variation to indicate the expected difference between the maximum and minimum temperature in the model during the analysis. You can enter a value or select Auto. If you select Auto, the engine estimates a value from the applied heat loads and convection conditions. If you enter a value, it must correspond to the temperature variation that you expect your model to experience during the analysis. This value, which must be a positive number, works with the value you set in the Accuracy field to control the accuracy of the time integration. The estimated temperature variation you enter need only be the correct order of magnitude to ensure that Mechanica controls time integration errors properly and efficiently. If you enter a value for estimated temperature variation that is too small, the engine may warn that it took too many time steps. However, if at any point in the analysis the actual temperature variation exceeds your specified value, or the value estimated by the engine from the applied heat loads, the engine proceeds with the larger value, computed as a result of the time integration. If the engine warns that the estimated temperature variation was too large, the solution may still be sufficiently accurate because of the control of errors in energy norm. You can verify this by re-running the analysis a second time with the Estimated Variation equal to the value of temperature variation reported by the engine in the original analysis. 959
Alternatively, you can use the quick check analysis to compute the temperature variation in the model and enter that value for Estimated Variation before running a transient thermal analysis with single-pass adaptive convergence.
Cutting surfaces and capping surfaces differ in these regards: A cutting surface is a plane that slices your model and trims both the top and bottom away. You can define more than one cutting surface for your model. A capping surface is a plane that slices your model and trims either the top or bottom away. You can only define one capping surface for your model.
The left result window above shows a model with multiple cutting surfaces. The most valuable of these is the first from the bottom, which indicates how far the high stress (red) area intrudes into the interior of the model. The right result window shows the same model with a capping surface that removes the upper two thirds of the model.
960
IndexAdditional Information
Cutting and capping surfaces are particularly useful for thick models, models that may have significant variations of interior stress, or models that may undergo unseen deformations. Consider zooming in on areas of interest for cutting or capping surfaces to get a more exact idea of how quantities behave inside your model. If you find that a cutting or capping surface is not giving you the information you need, you can modify or delete it.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Cutting Surface To Create a Capping Surface
961
962
IndexAdditional Information
In addition, you can use Solid Chunk to apply different materials to solid areas of mixed models provided that the solid areas are isolated through the use of interleaved idealizations, as shown below:
When you assign bronze to this model using the Whole Part option, the entire model receives bronze as its material. However, you can override bronze for the solid area on the right side of the model by assigning a different materialin this case, brassto the surface on the far right side of the model using the Solid Chunk option. The midsurface shell acts a barrier, in effect isolating the solid chunk on the right side of the model. Mechanica applies brass to the right side solid, propagating that material through the tetrahedral mesh until it reaches the bounding midsurface. Note that you could achieve the same effect using the Solid Chunk option for the top, bottom, or left surface (upper or lower) of the right side solid. However, had you selected the front or back surface for the Solid Chunk option, brass would have propagated through both the right and left side solid, leaving the midsurface bronze. Also, had you wanted to assign the midsurface a different material, you could have done so with the Shell Pair option.
963
In this case, if the design parameters you create to translate hole 1 and hole 2 have too large a range, Mechanica may optimize the shape so that the bolt holes are in conflict, and you could no longer place both bolts.
964
IndexAdditional Information
965
966
IndexAdditional Information
Example: Brick
A brick (or hexahedron) has six quadrilateral faces, twelve edges, and eight points:
967
Be sure all animation result windows are displayed. Select the first window and use View>Step Forward to find the first frame you are interested in. Select the second window and use Step Forward to find the next frame you are interested in. Repeat this process for all result windows until you have set all the result windows to different stages. Here is an example of a comparison between Step 9 and Step 15 for the same model, showing the different deformations for the two steps:
You can use animation comparisons like the one above to help determine when areas of the model move into higher quantity ranges and when certain deformations begin to take place. Since you can also see this behavior by simply stepping through an animation, you may find that this type of comparison is primarily useful for generating formal reports.
968
IndexAdditional Information
Note: Both windows use the same number of frames and show the same frame of the animation, forming the basis of comparison.
969
970
IndexAdditional Information
1. Open the part or subassembly. At this point the part or subassembly should not yet have a mesh. If it does, erase the mesh. 2. Create datum points wherever you want to form connections with the toplevel assembly. As Mechanica uses these datum points to determine the load path, consider the distribution and placement carefully. 3. Define each datum point as a hard point mesh control, and then mesh the model. The resulting mesh establishes a node at every hard point. 4. In assembly mode, open the top-level assembly. The component meshed in step 3 should appear with its mesh. 5. Connect all pre-meshed components in the load path to the top-level assembly by creating a beam, spring, gap, rigid link, or weighted link. For the pre-meshed components, be sure to use one of the hard points established in step 3. For the top-level components, use any applicable geometry as the end of the idealization or link, as shown in this example:
Here, there is a spring idealization that connects hard point 3 on the meshed part to datum point 10 on the unmeshed part. 6. Mesh the top-level assembly. When the mesh generator encounters connections with pre-existing meshes, it uses the hard points as element nodes and routes the beam, spring, gap, or rigid or weighted link to the meshed nodes, as shown below:
971
Note that the mesh of the left part has nodes at all the hard points along the edge, but the elements of the left and right parts only have a coincident node where the spring is. These two nodes are where the load transmits. The mesh on the left is an inherited mesha pre-existing mesh that the toplevel assembly mesh inheritswhile the mesh on the right and the spring element are both part of the top-level assembly mesh. This process varies slightly if you are connecting two pre-meshed components together. In this case, you need to create the connection hard points for both components before generating the respective component meshes. After both components have meshes that account for the hard points, you mesh the connections in the top-level assembly. In this case, the assembly mesh consists of only those elements that represent connection idealizations. Once you understand the steps just described and their implications, you may want to review some techniques that will help you create desired effects and handle special situations.
972
IndexAdditional Information
973
Mechanica projects a Cartesian coordinate system onto a surface or shell in the same manner as Mechanica projects a vector.
974
IndexAdditional Information
When you pattern the holes in this way, the surface placement of hole 2 is tied to hole 1 through the dimensioning scheme. If you took this approach, and then assigned a horizontal translation design parameter for hole 1, Mechanica would move hole 2 along with hole 1. Depending on the range of movement you defined for hole 1, you could encounter unexpected topology conflicts between hole 2 and the left surface of the plate, as shown below:
To move hole 2 independently, you would define a translation design parameter for hole 2. However, in this case, all movement would be based on the position of hole 1, which would also be dynamic.
975
This bracket is made of steel and supports a bookshelf that rests on two rods. The bracket ears and vertical face slide into a die-cast slot in the shelf post. The support holes accept a rod with a predetermined diameter. If you want Mechanica to look at all the features of the shelf bracket when performing shape changes instead of focusing only on the shelf plate and holes, you might develop the part as follows:
In this case, you define the shelf plate (feature 1) as the base feature and build the rear plate (feature 2) off the back surface of the base feature. Because you want Mechanica to move the two holes independently, you design each as a separate feature (feature 3 and feature 4). When planning the rounds (feature 5 and feature 6), you can choose between two alternatives. You can either incorporate the rounds into the profile of feature 1 as you build that feature or you can treat the rounds as a separate feature. 976
IndexAdditional Information
For the purposes of Mechanica, you should strongly consider the latter method. With this method, you can suppress the rounds if Mechanica encounters a conflict between a round and the movement of any of the defining surfaces.
Example: Function of Coordinates Function loads provide a means of simulating loads that have a complex magnitude distribution. For example, you can use the function of coordinates method to define sinusoidal loads, as shown below:
977
In working with function loads, be aware that the resultant load depends on a number of factors, such as the orientation of the coordinate system, the dimensioning scheme you used for your part, and so forth. As a result of these dependencies, you may need to work through the function dialog box more than once to achieve the exact load conditions you want. Because function loads are complex, you may find it particularly useful to verify the load by clicking the Preview button on the Load Definition dialog box. The preview function shows the relative load magnitude at different points on the entity. You might also find it useful to verify the load. To review loads, select Info>Review Total Load after you define the load. The method you use varies depending on whether you are performing the review for a force, moment, bearing, or pressure load in Structure or a heat load in Thermal.
For your second beam, you select two single points, one of them belonging to the feature of points referenced for the first beam. The second beam overrides the one that already existed between the same single points. The remainder of the first beam referencing the point feature is not changed. 978
IndexAdditional Information
If you turn off Insert Points, AutoGEM is unable to create a full set of elements on the surface. The display of surfaces is turned off so you can clearly see the shells:
If you turn on Insert Points, AutoGEM adds the points it needs to finish creating elements, as shown below. Again, the display of surfaces is turned off: 979
980
IndexAdditional Information
In the invalid 3-component assembly, part a and part c are fastened with a bolt or screw. Part b lies between parts a and c, directly in the fastener path, causing problems with the fastener path regardless of the fact that, in a physical model, the bolt or screw could easily pass through all 3 parts. The invalid 2-component assembly presents a similar situationin this case, with the lower horizontal member of part a causing the problem. Again, this construction would not present any issues in a real world environment, but Mechanica considers it invalid. As you can see, the valid assembly includes two components, one of which incorporates two spacers. Note that, while the spacers enforce a distance between the two components, the fastener path includes no interfering geometry. Because the fastener path is clear, you can model the connection between the two components using a bolt or screw.
981
If you applied the load with a force per unit of length distribution to the top or bottom curve for the surface shown above, Mechanica would keep the load. If you loaded both the top and bottom curve, Mechanica would calculate the compressed load based on the value of both loads.
When you create a laminate stiffness shell property set, you can realign the default material orientation.
IndexAdditional Information
For a 0 laminate, the 1 direction of the ply is aligned with the 1' direction of the material. For a 90 laminate, the 1 direction of the ply is aligned with the 2' direction of the laminate.
983
984
IndexAdditional Information
segment of the hole, as though a rod smaller than the radius of the hole were pulling outward against the far surface of the hole. To accomplish this, you could create a specialized load as a function of a cylindrical coordinate system, as follows:
In this case, you would create a cylindrical coordinate system as shown above. You would then create a force-per-unit-area load based on the following symbolic function: if(theta>=pi/3&&theta<=pi/3,cos(theta),0) The load resulting from this function has a sinusoidal profile, with the load at its greatest where T=0. The load tapers symmetrically about T=0, reaching a 0 force at T=60 and T=60. This load profile is similar to that of a bearing load. However, Mechanica's bearing load always applies to a 180 segment, while this load applies to a 120 segment.
985
In this case, you select all three top surfaces and pair them with the three corresponding bottom surfaces. When it processes the pair, Mechanica compresses the bottom surfaces and top surfaces into a single, continuous midsurface. The software divides the midsurface into segments that coincide with the layout of the top surfaces and associates the individual thicknesses with each of these segments.
Note: Make sure the compressed midsurfaces all intersect so that there are no gaps or discontinuities. If they do not intersect, correct the model manually to eliminate the gaps.
When it builds elements during an analysis run, Mechanica places half of the thickness on top of the midsurface and half on the bottom. If your model includes shell pairs of variable thickness, or one where you have modified the pair placement, the shape of the final model may be different from that of the uncompressed model, as in the following example:
IndexAdditional Information
987
Here, the extruded length of the model is substantially greater than its circular profile. Note that the diagonal measurement taken when the extruded length lies in the WCS XY plane is about 2.5 times longer than the diagonal measurement taken when the circular profile lies in the XY plane. Further, Mechanica determines the bounding box based on the nodal placement. If the model had included nodes only at the top and bottom, the bounding box and the resulting diagonal for the circular profile version would both have been a vertical line. Thus, when you develop a ratio for Relative to Model and Relative to Part, you need to be sure you have a reasonable estimate of what the bounding box will look like and how long the diagonal will be. If you do not keep this in mind, you may enter a ratio value too large with respect to the diagonal, and Mechanica will be unable to apply the tolerance.
988
IndexAdditional Information
In the next figure, only the orientation angle is changed, causing the BSCS to rotate around the X axis.
In the last figure, both the orientation angle and the DY, DZ offsets have non-zero values. The software performs the rotation first, then translates the BSCS along the rotated BSCS axes to satisfy the DY and DZ offset values.
989
You can choose to change only the orientation angle is changed, as shown below, causing the BSCS to rotate around the X axis.
Lastly, you can specify non-zero values for both the orientation angle and the DY, DZ offsets. The software performs the rotation first, then translates the BSCS along the rotated BSCS axes to satisfy the DY and DZ offset values, as shown below.
990
IndexAdditional Information
991
If you deselect the Point Loads option on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box, AutoGEM creates eight shells. The display of surfaces is turned off so you can clearly see the shells:
If you select the Point Loads option, AutoGEM creates an additional small element to isolate that point. Again, the display of surfaces is turned off:
992
IndexAdditional Information
This bracket is made of steel and supports a bookshelf that rests on two rods. The bracket ears and vertical face slide into a die-cast slot in the shelf post. Note that the support holes accept a rod with a predetermined diameter. If you were trying to determine the best design for this part, you would probably want to optimize the shape for the lowest mass that would support a specified weight. In this case, you might want to change the following aspects of the design: the the the the angle of curve a length of the part thickness of the part placement of the rod support holes 993
However, due to external restrictions like the support rod diameter, you cannot change the following three aspects of the design: the diameter of the rod support hole the shape and dimensions of the bracket ears the overall height of the part
If you had no interest in optimizing this part, you might design the bracket as a single plate with a uniform thickness and treat the body of the plate as a single Pro/ENGINEER feature. However, because you plan to optimize for mass, you want Mechanica to be able to change any aspect of the design that reduces the mass. This objective can affect the way you develop your part in Pro/ENGINEER. For example, one of the aspects directly tied to mass is part thickness. Because the bracket ear shape and part height cannot change, you cannot alter the part thickness if you develop the bracket as a single plate. Instead, you might choose to treat the body of the plate as two separate featuresa rear plate and a shelf plate, as shown below:
This approach lets you maintain a predefined thickness for the rear plate while allowing Mechanica to vary the thickness of the shelf plate.
994
IndexAdditional Information
Material orientation 3 is defined to be normal to the surface. Material direction 1 is defined to be parallel to the projection of the vector onto the plane tangent to the surface at the point of interest. Material direction 2 is set orthogonal to material directions 1 and 3. Note that the directions of the material orientation vary with position on the surface.
995
If you turn off Reentrant Corners, AutoGEM creates four shell elements. The display of surfaces is turned off so you can clearly see the shells:
If you turn on Reentrant Corners, AutoGEM creates 11 elements, including several small elements around the reentrant corners, as shown below. Again, the display of surfaces is turned off:
996
IndexAdditional Information
The reentrant corners have a total of seven small elements. The reentrant corner shown below has three:
997
Example: Relations
With properly defined relations, you can create complex shape changes with fewer design parameters. For example, you can use relations to decrease the size of the following rectangular slot while maintaining its proportions and centering. As you look at the figure, note that the slot is dimensioned to default datum planes for orientation purposes.
In this case, the width of the slot (slt_width) is 3/4 the length of the slot (slt_length). To maintain this proportionality and ensure that the slot remains in the center of the model, you would assign the following relations: Relation 1 ties the positioning width (dtm_wid) to the positioning length (dtm_len) so that the slot expands and contracts while maintaining its center position. This relation is: dtm_wid = (3*dtm_len)/4 Relation 2 ties slt_width to slt_length, so that any change made in the slot length would result in a proportional change to the width. This relation is: slt_width = (3*slt_length)/4 Because relations control dtm_wid and slt_width, you would only need to create design parameters for dtm_len and slt_length. Without these relations, you would need to define four design parameters to simulate the movementone for each dimension.
998
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica uses the right-hand rule to determine the direction of each rotation. If you had entered a positive angle, the material directions would have rotated in the other direction.
First, you would define a cut through the solid in Pro/ENGINEER to create an external, planar surface. Then, in Mechanica you select the resulting surface for your
999
2D analysis. The following model is defined as a 2D axisymmetric model type because the 2D geometry is intended to rotate about an axis.
Be aware that, in some cases, when you define a cut through a 2D axisymmetric model, you may not be able to select only the surface that you want to include in your analysis. Pro/ENGINEER may instead select multiple surfaces created by the cut. If this occurs, you can define a surface region that includes only the surface or surfaces required to define your 2D model. You can then use the Sketcher to sketch the curve and the Use Edge geometry tool to trace around the geometry. The surfaces created by the cut are effectively separated, and you are able to select the geometry required for the 2D analysis.
1000
IndexAdditional Information
In this case, the scale values are staggered such that point 3 sees 100% of the load and point 0 sees no load. The points in between see a load that is proportional with their specific scale factors, as calculated in relation to the interpolation point scale factors. The load above has a Force Per Unit Length spatial distribution. If you apply a total load instead, Mechanica normalizes the load throughout the curve such that the total load applied to the curve equals the load value on the dialog box. When applying interpolated loads, Mechanica works in parameter space. Parameter space is representative space, internal to Mechanica's code, in which Mechanica represents model geometry. Mechanica calculates the interpolation in parameter space and then maps the interpolation back to the entity over which the interpolation is defined. This means that Mechanica may not apply the interpolated load in exactly the way you expect. Thus, with interpolated loads, be sure to use the Review button on the Load Interpolation dialog box to verify that Mechanica applied the load as desired. The review function shows the relative load magnitude at different points on the entity. The above example is one of the simplest forms of an interpolated load. Depending on how you use the scale factor in relation to interpolation point location, you can shape interpolated loads in a more complex manner.
1001
Example: T-Bracket
In the following approach, Mechanica compresses shell pair a to form the horizontal plane of the T-bracket and shell pair b to form the vertical plane.
Note: If your model includes a meeting of more than two surface pairs, make sure the compressed midsurfaces all intersect at a common point or axis. If they do not, correct the model manually to ensure a proper intersection.
The original model in the above example was created as a solid model. However, if you created this model using Pro/SHEETMETAL, the software may not merge the common surface of the two perpendicular plates, resulting in a gap between the two midsurfaces. In this case, you may need to correct the geometry to ensure that Mechanica solves the model correctly.
Example: Tetra
A tetra (or tetrahedron) has four triangular faces, six edges, and four points:
1002
IndexAdditional Information
In this case, the L-bracket round does not have a surface that the software can pair it with. To remedy the situation, you should suppress the round, as in solution A, or create an opposing round, as in solution B.
1003
In the first example, both parts are solids, so there is no need to constrain the component rotations. However, the constraint for part b allows translation in the X and Y directions, thus failing to prevent part b from rotating about the fastener axis. In the second example, both parts are fully constrained so there is no unwanted rotation. Even though the parts cannot rotate, you can still model realistic behaviors like flexion at the fastener by placing a force load on the front surfaces near the centerline of the fastener holes. The examples just discussed involve fixing rotations using constraints, but you can also fix rotations by adding other fasteners, provided you consider extra fasteners acceptable for your model and your model includes reference geometry.
1004
IndexAdditional Information
This bracket is made of steel and supports a bookshelf that rests on two rods. The bracket ears and vertical face slide into a die-cast slot in the shelf post. Note that the support holes accept a rod with a predetermined diameter. Looking at the prior example, you can omit the following two items from your initial design: the rear plate, provided it is stiff enough not to affect the analysis results the rounds
If you leave these items out of your initial design, the part you prepared for Mechanica would resemble the following:
As you can see, all nonessential areas of the design are gone. Only the portion you want to analyze or optimize remains. At this point, you can perform a complete Mechanica analysis, sensitivity study, and optimization for your part.
1005
After Mechanica develops the optimized shape for this part, you can add the rear plate and rounds. To ensure that the part is still valid, always return to Mechanica for a standard analysis of the complete part.
1006
IndexAdditional Information
Example: Wedge
A wedge (or pentahedron) has two triangular faces, three quadrilateral faces, nine edges, and six points:
1007
Excel
Use this command to write the graph data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. This command is only available if you select a single graph result window. After you select File>Export>Excel, Mechanica displays the Export To Excel dialog box. Enter a path and file name on the dialog box. When you click OK, Mechanica creates a file with an .xls extension. The file contains a pictorial rendition of the graph as well as a numeric table of graph results at given intervals. Following is a sample spreadsheet.
1008
IndexAdditional Information
Results Windows Include modeling information and VRML. Use the Select button to choose which modeling entities to include for each window. o Conclusion (optional) Enter a conclusion you want included in the report. Preferences Controls the options for the appearance of the HTML file. Export Export the .htm file to the directory specified in the HTML Report Name text box. o
1009
Include Stress Recovery Check this box if you want Mechanica to include beam stress recovery points in analyses.
3D 2D (Any)
2D 2D
Failure Criterion
Specify strength properties for isotropic and transversely isotropic materials to determine whether a material has failed under given loading conditions. These properties are stored in the material library. Select None if no failure criterion is required. To view the results, display a fringe plot. If the failure index is equal to or greater than 1, the material has failed. Failure index measures and results are not available if you do not request stress quantities. For Isotropic Properties Select one of the following stress quantities from the Failure Criterion tab: None This is the default. Distortion Energy (von Mises) Maximum Shear Stress (Tresca) Modified Mohr
For Transversely Isotropic Properties Select one of the following from the Failure Criterion tab: None This is the default. Tsai-Wu Maximum Stress Maximum Strain
These failure criteria are valid only for 3D shells. The 1 and 2 on the dialog box quantities denote the 1 and 2 directions of the material.
1010
IndexAdditional Information
When reviewing failure index results, be sure to consider the failure modes of the material. If you select Failure Index from the Quantity option menu and Graph as your display type, Mechanica adds the Graph Location selection to the Quantity tab. Use the associated selector arrow to display your model and pick the geometric entity you want to use in your results display.
Fatigue Properties
The following options for material properties appear on the Fatigue tab on the Material Definition dialog box: Ultimate Tensile Strength Enter a value between 50 MPa and 4000 MPa. Material Type Select an option for the type of material you are using: Unalloyed steels, Low Alloy steels, Aluminum alloys, Titanium alloys, or None. Surface Finish Select an option for the surface finish of your model: o Polished o Ground o Good Machined o Average Machined o Poor Machined o Hot Rolled o Forged o Cast o Water Corroded o Seawater Corroded o Nitrided o Shot Peened o Cold Rolled Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor Enter a fatigue strength reduction factor (Kf) greater than 1. This factor is used to reduce the endurance limit to account for unmodeled stress concentrations, such as those found in welds.
See Also
Procedure: To Assign Fatigue Properties to Materials
1011
See Also
Reference: Fatigue Analysis Overview
1012
IndexAdditional Information
These buttons become available only when you work in FEM mode.
model.fmp master representation, or generic instance of a part model#rep1.fmp simplified representation of a part model#inst1.fmp family table instance of a part model#inst1#rep1.fmp simplified representation of a family table instance Assembly o model.fma any representation of assembly
For more information on simplified representations and family tables, search the Fundamentals functional area and the Assembly and Welding functional area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
FEM Mode
FEM mode enables you to create a mathematical model based on a Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly, then analyze that part using any of several third-party finite element solvers such as NASTRAN, ANSYS, and so forth. The activities you perform in FEM mode are similar to those you perform in native mode. You complete such tasks as adding modeling entities such as loads, constraints, and so forth as well as defining analyses. However, unlike native mode, you must explicitly create a mesh for your model instead of having Mechanica perform this step automatically at run time. You also need to explicitly output your model to one of the supported FEA solvers, which analyzes the structural or thermal integrity of the model based on how you set up the simulation.
See Also
References: FEM Mode Workflow
analysis definitions. Note that, for modal analysis definitions, the solver may ignore the frequency range you specified in the Analysis Definition dialog box. calculated results
To output your model to the FEM Neutral Format, select the PTC FEM Neutral Format option from the Solver option menu on the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. See FEM Neutral Format File for details.
1014
IndexAdditional Information
that using this approach improves mesh quality, but at some expense to the mesh's geometric accuracy. Alternate methods of improving mesh quality include: performing additional mesh improvement passes establishing tighter local mesh control in problem areas
Flux Results Quantity Mechanica supports this quantity for all Thermal models. For thermal analyses, Mechanica only calculates the Flux quantity if you select Heat Flux as an analysis output when you define the analysis. When you select Flux from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the item is part of the design study you choose. The possible selections on the Quantity tab include: Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
1015
3D:
2D Axisymmetric:
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Strain:
Surface, 2D Solid
2D Plane Stress:
Curve, Edge
Surface, 2D Plate
The units for moment loads are the units for the force loads multiplied by length.
1016
IndexAdditional Information
Coordinate Systems Displays the view coordinate system (VCS) of the model in the lower left corner of the result window. Legend Displays the result window legend. This option is not available for the Model display type or unfringed animations. Contour Labels Displays the contour labels for contour result displays. If you want to reset contour labels, use Utilities>Relabel Contour. Loads Displays load icons where they are present Constraints Displays constraints icons where they are present. Annotations Displays annotations you define.
You can use the Format>Result Window command to control the display format for multiple windows at once. To do so, use the SHIFT key and left-click to select the windows you want. Then select Format>Result Window. Mechanica tailors the Format Result Window dialog box to include only characteristics that are common to all of the selected windows.
See Also
Procedures: To Format a Fringe, Contour, Vector, Model, or Animation Result Window To Annotate a Result Window
Frequency Convergence
The convergence index is the maximum percentage change of any modal frequency. For more information on frequency, see Modal and Prestress Modal Analyses.
Frequency Range
Enter the minimum and maximum frequencies of excitation for the range over which you want Mechanica to report results for dynamic frequency and dynamic random analyses. The minimum frequency must be greater than or equal to 0. The default maximum frequency is Automatic, which is 1.5 times the highest natural frequency calculated. If you select the User-defined option, you can enter a value for the maximum frequency.
1018
IndexAdditional Information
You can use fringes to determine whether certain results are reasonable. For example, you can look at the fringe plot of maximum principal or von Mises stress for static analyses, or flux magnitude for thermal analyses. You can also create a contour display using the Fringe display type. To get a better idea of what a fringe plot looks like, you can review an example. Also, before defining a fringe display, be sure to read the information in Tips for Fringe Displays. When you select Fringe from the Display Type option menu, the options available on the Display Options tab become specific to fringe plot result window displays. The Display Options tab displays some or all of these items depending on the design study and the selections you make on the Quantity tab and the Display Options tab: Continuous Tone Display fringes in continuous tones that transition smoothly between fringes. If you do not select this item, fringes display in discrete colors. A fringe with Continuous Tone selected cannot be exported as a VRML file. Averaged Display quantities as values averaged at locations where two elements in your model meet. If you clear the check box, the results display as unaveraged values. In FEM mode, this option becomes available only when you load results from an .xdb NASTRAN file. In native mode of Mechanica, the Averaged check box is selected by default and is unavailable for quantities other than flux and temperature gradient. You can clear the check box only for flux and temperature gradient to display the result as unaveraged values. Legend Levels Set the number of levels to display on the model for a fringe window. The minimum value is 2, and the maximum is 16. The default is 9 levels. Contour Display your model with contour lines or isosurfaces. Set to display or not display contour labels. You cannot select both Continuous Tone and Contour. Deformed Display your model in its deformed state. Additionally, you can display an undeformed wireframe or transparent version of the model superimposed over the deformed model. Show Element Edges Display the edges of the elements in your model when you display the results. Show Loads Display the load icons in your model when you display the results. Show Constraints Display the constraint icons in your model when you display the results. Animate Animate the display of your results in the result window. You can select Auto Start, Reverse-Repeat-Alternate options, and the number of frames in the animation. This option is unavailable for fatigue results and linearized stresses.
Select Dynamic Query from the Info menu to show the value of the result window's quantity at locations you select.
1019
Full Results
Use this column to specify the intervals at which Mechanica reports full results. Mechanica always reports measure results, but only reports stresses, displacements, strains, and forces at intervals that you designate. You can also turn full results on or off for all intervals with the Select All and Deselect All buttons. This column does not appear for dynamic random analyses.
After you select or define a function and click OK, the function name appears in the text box next to the (x) button on the Material Definition dialog box.
1020
IndexAdditional Information
Function of Coordinates
Use this option to apply a structure constraint (FEM mode), thermal boundary condition, or load that is a function of the current coordinate system. You can select one or more entities on which to apply the constraint or load. You define this variation by specifying a function that Mechanica uses as a scale factor. If you are using Function of Coordinates for loads or thermal boundary conditions, Mechanica typically multiplies the load value by the scale factor to approximate the load behavior. For force/moment loads and heat loads, Mechanica makes an exception if you defined the load distribution as Total Load. In this case, Mechanica applies the function, respecting its shape, but does not multiply the function by the load value. Thus, the software maintains the original total load value. When you select this option, the f(x) button and entry box appear on the dialog box. Click the button and the Functions dialog box (native mode) or Functions dialog box (FEM mode) appears under one of the following conditions: If a user-defined function has not been defined for your model If an internal function has been defined for your model
You can use this dialog box to create, copy, review, or delete a function. For an example, see Example: Function of Coordinates.
Function of Frequency
Select this option to define damping as a function of frequency. Click the f(x) button. If you have previously defined a damping coefficient function, the Functions dialog box appears. Select an existing function or click New to define a new function. If you select New, the Function Definition dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to define a new function. To select a different function, click the f(x) button and the Functions dialog box appears. You select an existing function or click New to define a new function.
1021
1D Entities:
2 points
3 points
4 points
2D Entities:
2 points
linear variation in 2D parameter space, with no variation perpendicular to the line that connects the two points in parameter space
3 points
4 non-colinear points
4 collinear points
cubic variation in 2D parameter space, with no variation perpendicular to the line that connects the four points in parameter space
quadratic variation in 2D parameter space and linear variation perpendicular to the line that passes through the three collinear points
Mechanica uses representative space to calculate interpolation and may not apply the interpolated load, heat load, or prescribed temperature in exactly the way you expect. Click the Preview button on the Interpolation Over Entity dialog box to see a display of vector arrows that show the relative magnitude of the load, heat load, or prescribed temperature at different points on the entity. 1022
IndexAdditional Information
General
There is no predefined shape for a General beam section type. When you create a beam with a general section, the beam icon on your model includes only the Y and Z axes. For General beam section types, you must define values for the following on the Beam Section Definition dialog box: Area Iyy, Izz, Iyz J Shear Fy, Shear Fz Shear Dy, Shear Dz
You can optionally perform the following tasks: Use the Stress Grid option to enter Y and Z offset values for each stress recovery point. You must specify stress grid values in order to view results for beam stress recovery points for general beam sections. Use the Review button to display the section properties of a beam section.
The default graphic for a general beam section type is illustrated below for native mode. Note that this graphic appears regardless of the stress recovery point locations that you define using the Stress Grid. That is, the software does not display a graphic with the entered locations when you define your results window. In FEM mode, the software uses the first four points that you define for the section.
See Also
Procedure: To Generate a Report for Linearized Stress
You can specify whether you want Mechanica to display the Point Data report on your screen, to output the report to a file, or both. Since you typically use Point Data reports for on-the-fly examination of your model, displaying the report on your screen is the most common of these choices.
1024
IndexAdditional Information
1025
time to calculate a different measure that uses the same type of spatial evaluation. In other words, if you specified Maximum as a spatial evaluation method for a von Mises stress measure as well as a maximum principal stress measure, there would be no appreciable time difference between running a dynamic analysis that used only one of the measures and running an analysis that used both measures. If you select stress or strain as the quantity, Mechanica provides you with an additional option menu that enables you to determine whether the software considers the entire model or samples various points within a specified radius of a model location. The latter type of measure is called a Near Point measure. For more information on Near Point measures, see Global and Local Measures.
1026
IndexAdditional Information
A study that did not converge when you used the multi-pass adaptive convergence method. In this case, you can create a convergence graph to get more information on why the study did not converge.
When you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, the Display Options tab and the Display Location tab become unavailable.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Define a Graph Results Display Graph Location
Graph Location
Use the Graph Location area on the Quantity tab to select specific locations for your graph result window display. The Graph Location area includes these items: Graph Location Select from the option menu the locations you want to display in your graph result window. You can select multiple connected beams or curves. In FEM mode, you can select multiple connected edges. The options on the menu include: o Curves o Beams o P-Pass (Measure quantity only) o Optimization Pass (Measure quantity only, optimization study only) o Design Param o Time o Frequency Location Selector Arrow Use the selector arrow to select the specific entity on your model that you want to display in the graph results window. The selector arrow is available only for curves and beams.
Graph Report
Use this command to write the graph data to a text file. After you select File>Export>Graph Report, you enter a path and file name in the Export To Text dialog box. When you click Save, Mechanica creates a text file with a .grt extension. This file contains header information consisting of the graph quantity, an indication of selected geometry, axis designations, and so forth. Immediately after the header information, Mechanica lists the graph values for each axis in vertical format.
See Also
1027
Procedure:
Graphic Size
Select one of the following graphic sizes: Current View Results are the same size as they appear in the Mechanica results window. ISO A7 74 x 105 mm ISO A6 105 x 148 mm ISO A5 148 x 210 mm
Graphing Statistics
You can generate analysis statistics for the entire model or for selected surfaces, edges, vertices, or points. If you select an edge or connected series of edges as a reference on the Postprocessing Info dialog box, you also can display a graph of the quantity as measured at those edges. To help you compare edge behavior, you can select components for your quantity. When you select multiple components, the resulting graph shows each component's curve in a different color, and provides a legend to help you distinguish the components. You can specify whether you want Mechanica to display the edge graph on your screen, output the edge data to a file, or both. When Mechanica displays your edge graph on-screen, it provides a dialog box that lets you output the graph to any of several printer types. If you choose to output the edge graph data to a file, Mechanica generates a .dat file which you can open and format in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
See Also
Procedure: To Generate an Edge Graph
Graphtool Window
You use the Graphtool window to view and manage different types of graphs. In Mechanica, the Graphtool can draw functions or graph various analysis results. After you display your graph, you can interact with it in several ways. To find out the x and y values for any graph point, click on this point and a message box appears showing the values. To work with the graph and manage its appearance, use toolbar buttons or the following menu commands: File o
Export Excel This option is available on Windows platforms only. Use it to save the graph data as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. When
1028
IndexAdditional Information
o o View o Toggle Grid Display grid lines for your graph or turn them off. o Repaint Refresh the view of your graph, removing all temporarily displayed information. o Refit Restore a graph to its original state. Use this command after you zoom in on a particular graph segment to return to an unsegmented state. Mechanica automatically redraws the complete graph in the current window. o Zoom In Zoom in on the graph to get a close-up view. This command is especially useful when your graph contains too many points, 100 or more. Zooming in on certain points helps you to display a specific segment of interest. Format Graph Open the Graph Window Options dialog box to manage your graph and its display window.
you click this command, Mechanica displays the Export To Excel dialog box. Enter a path and a file name on the dialog box. When you click OK, Mechanica creates a file with a .xls extension. The file contains a pictorial rendition of the graph as well as a numeric table of graph results at given intervals. Export Text Save the graph data as a text file. When you click this command, Mechanica displays the Export To Text dialog box. Enter a path and a file name on the dialog box. When you click OK, Mechanica creates a file with a .grt extension. Print Send your graph to a printer. Exit Close the Graphtool window.
Be aware that, although you can apply constraints, force loads, and moment loads to points, this application method can cause high stress concentrations that make the correct interpretation of analysis results difficult. You can often produce a more realistic effect by distributing the load or constraint over a small surface region or using a TLAP instead.
1029
If you decide to use point loads or constraints, always place your datum points on a boundary curve or surface. Do not locate these points in the interior of the part. You can add datum points to your model singly or, if you are adding the points in Pro/ENGINEER, as a pattern. Although datum points prove useful for certain types of modeling, large numbers of datum points in your part can result in slower Mechanica performance. If your part includes datum points that have no use in Mechanica, consider suppressing these points before accessing Mechanica.
You can find specific information about the block solver RAM and the RAM allocation for element data in the element calculations section of the study/study.pas file, located in the directory for output files. To set solver RAM allocation, refer to Guidelines for Setting Solram.
1030
IndexAdditional Information
Always configure swap space from a fast local disk. Using swap space from a remote computer can severely degrade performance. If possible, allocate swap space on disks that are not used for the Mechanica working directories. The amount of swap space you need is the maximum of the three values listed below: o 250 MB o 3 your machine's RAM o 1.5 maximum job memory (see below)
You can estimate the job memory by performing these steps: 1. Start running the study. 2. After the first two passes, check the memory usage reported in the summary file at the end of each pass. 3. Use linear extrapolation to determine the amount of memory the run will need for the pass at which you expect the analysis to converge (for example, the maximum polynomial order you set for the analysis). The following example shows how to calculate swap space requirements for a machine that has 128 MB of RAM, and a model that you expect to converge after seven polynomial passes: pass 1 memory usage = 100 MB pass 2 memory usage = 150 MB estimated memory usage during pass 7 = 400 MB swap space = max (250 MB, 3 128 MB, 1.5 400 MB) = 600 MB Note: If you are using the iterative solver, the memory usage will jump by the solram value after the first iterative solver pass. For example, if you are running with iter 2, then you should extrapolate after pass 3 ends or add solram to the estimate you extrapolated from passes 1 and 2. Your result will be the estimate of total memory use for the job.
1031
Open the part in Pro/ENGINEER and use the Edit>Setup>Mass Props command. Enter a density value on the Setup Mass Properties dialog box. Be sure you save the part before leaving Pro/ENGINEER. Open the part in Pro/ENGINEER and use the Edit>Setup>Material>Define command to specify material properties. Then use the Edit>Setup>Mass Props command to obtain the mass from the material properties. Be sure you save the part before leaving Pro/ENGINEER. Use material properties from Mechanica with the Pro/ENGINEER Edit>Setup>Material>Assign command. Then use the Edit>Setup>Mass Props command to obtain the mass from the material properties. Be sure you save the part before leaving Pro/ENGINEER.
Subassembly To use a subassembly as the component for your mass idealization, you must assign mass properties to all of the parts in the subassembly using one of the methods above. Be sure to use the Edit>Setup>Mass Props command and save the subassembly before you leave Pro/ENGINEER. If you have not assigned any mass properties for your subassembly or its components in either Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica, you can use the Pro/ENGINEER Edit>Setup>Mass Props command to calculate mass properties for the entire subassembly. Select Geometry and Parameters under Source, and enter a density value. When you click OK, Pro/ENGINEER calculates mass properties for all the components in your subassembly based on that density.
See Also
Procedures: To Assign a Material To Assign a Material in FEM Mode References: Assign a Material Assign a Material in FEM Mode
1032
The minimum value must always be less than the maximum value.
IndexAdditional Information
1033
A GRID command for a point not in the default coordinate system should follow the command for the referenced coordinate system. Two grid points (nodes) that have the same ID but different coordinates are not allowed in the same file or included files. Two elements with the same ID are allowed only if they reference exactly the same grid points (nodes). This guideline also applies to different files read with an INCLUDE statement. Elements referencing scalar pointspoints without coordinatescannot be created. Mechanica does not display the center node for CQUAD elements. The continuation of a command should follow on the next line. Mechanica does not import the Replication command.
1034
IndexAdditional Information
If you are running other memory-intensive applications on your computer, decrease the solram allocation accordingly. For example, set solram to 0.25 times machine RAM if you are running two large applications at once. However, you often can run two large jobs faster one after another than if you try to run both jobs at once.
The optimal values also depend on other factors, such as what other processes are running on your machine, and the total amount of swap space available on your machine. If increasing RAM allocation causes a decrease in performance or a shortage of swap space, some performance gains might still be possible by increasing RAM allocation to above the default values, but below the recommended maximums. For solver RAM settings that exceed maximum or minimum ideal settings, refer to Strategy: If Solver RAM Is Too High and Strategy: If Solver RAM Is Too Low.
1035
These units of force are not generally used, so you should change the system of units before applying loads in Mechanica. You can also set a default principal system of units in Pro/ENGINEER using the Tools>Options command. Use Consistent Units for Parts and Assembly You can specify units in part or assembly mode. If you are working in assembly mode, the units for all the parts must be the same as the assembly. You need to make sure your parts and assembly use consistent units. Also, when you specify values in Mechanica, you need to keep those values consistent with your principal system of units. Entering Numerical Data When you enter numerical data for quantities with physical dimensions, Pro/ENGINEER interprets the data as having units consistent with the principal system of units. Density Pro/ENGINEER displays density as mass per unit volume, not weight per unit volume. Modeling Data Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica store all data for your model in terms of the principal system of units. When you design a model, you should select a system of units in Pro/ENGINEER before defining modeling data. Exporting to Independent Mode If you plan to export your model to Mechanica independent mode, make note of your system of units. Mechanica does not display your system of units in independent mode. Material Library Mechanica displays in the material library only materials with units.
To mesh your model successfully, you should keep the following points in mind when you create surface-surface connections and interfaces: In most cases, the selected surfaces must belong to different parts in your assembly. If you are creating an interface, however, you can select a quilt surface and a solid surface on the same part. You cannot select two surfaces of different geometric types. For example, you cannot create a surface-surface perimeter weld between a cylindrical surface and a planar surface. If you want to create a solid mesh in which the meshes on the two surfaces are compatible, you cannot use offset mate constraints when you create the
1036
IndexAdditional Information
assembly in Pro/ENGINEER. If there is any offset between the mated surfaces, Mechanica will not generate a compatible mesh.
If Iteration is the location, you cannot use the Tie Loc or Tie Both commands. If two graphs use different types of values on either axisthat is, if one is linear and one is logarithmicyou cannot tie them. See the description of the Log Scale check boxfor more information.
1037
If you want to change the thickness of a shell model using a design parameter, you need to make sure both surfaces that make up the shell pair move an equal distance in opposite directions. This type of movement maintains the correct positioning of the midsurface during the thickness change. If you dimensioned the paired surfaces in relation to a datum plane or an entity in the part, the easiest way to create this effect is by setting up a relation between the two paired surfaces. In this case, you could create a datum plane at the midsurface and write the relation in terms of that plane. As an alternative, you could treat the distance from the midsurface to the dimensioning entity as an absolute value and write the relation in terms of that value.
Heat Flux
This check box enables you to have heat flux calculated as part of your analysis. This option is selected by default and works as a toggle. If you do not want heat flux calculated, deselect this option. Be aware that if you do not select Heat Flux, you cannot access results for heat flux when you look at results for your analysis.
1038
IndexAdditional Information
To define a heat load for surface a, which would also include the mated portion of the surface, you would select surface a as the reference. To define a heat load for mated surface bc, you would first create a surface region for the portion of surface c that is mated to surface b. To define a heat load for the bottom surface of volume region d, you would first create the volume region.
Hollow Circle
The icon for a hollow circle beam section type looks like this:
When you select Hollow Circle as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: R Ri
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for hollow circle section types. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for FEM mode.
1039
Hollow Ellipse
The icon for a hollow ellipse beam section type looks like this:
When you select Hollow Ellipse as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: a the length of the major (longer) cross section of the outer ellipse b the length of the minor (shorter) cross section of the outer ellipse ai the length of the major (longer) cross section of the inner ellipse Mechanica calculates the inside minor axis by making its ratio to the inside major axis the same as the ratio of the outside minor axis to the outside major axis, as shown in this equation: Inside Minor = (Outside Minor/Outside Major) Inside Major
If you want to examine the exact effects of shear on a beam, enter positive values for Shear Factor FY and Shear Factor FZ. These factors represent the ratio of a beam's effective "shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear in the principal Y and Z directions. The default is 0.833333, which is accurate for rectangular cross sections. The figures below illustrate the stress recovery points for hollow ellipse section types. The figure on the left shows the points in native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points in FEM mode.
1040
IndexAdditional Information
Hollow Rect
The icon for a hollow rectangle beam section type looks like this:
When you select Hollow Rect as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: b d bi di
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for hollow rectangle beam section types. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for FEM mode.
1041
Springs and Dampers Point-to-point spring or damper reaction force Spring or damper reaction force on translational joint axis Spring or damper reaction force on rotational joint axis Damper on Slot-follower Connection Combined normal and tangential reaction forces on slot damper Servo Motors and Force Motors Servo or force motor reaction force and moment on translational joint axis Servo or force motor reaction moment on rotational joint axis Cam-follower Connections Combined normal and tangential reaction forces at cam contact point Slot-follower Connections Reaction force on slot connection Gear Pairs Reaction moment for standard gear pair on rotational joint axis Unassociated TLAP moment at center of joint axis Unassociated TLAP force at center of slot Unassociated TLAP force at cam contact point Unassociated TLAP force at intersection of zero reference plane and translation axis Unassociated TLAP moment at center of joint axis Unassociated TLAP force at slot point location Unassociated TLAP force at attachment point Unassociated TLAP force at center of joint axis Unassociated TLAP moment at center of joint axis
1042
IndexAdditional Information
Reaction force for rack and pinion gear pair on translational joint axis Force/Torque Forces applied to points Point-to-point forces Torques applied to bodies
Unassociated TLAP force at point Unassociated TLAP force at starting point Unassociated TLAP moment at body center of gravity
Gravity Combined gravitational force and translational component of inertial acceleration Gravity acceleration at body center of gravity and the translational component of inertial acceleration
Inertial Forces Angular velocity (as Centrifugal1_Vel) and Angular acceleration (as Centrifugal1_Acc) a. TLAP = Total Load at Point Single combined centrifugal load with velocity and acceleration components
1043
The diagram below describes the directions of the stress components in a standard textbook application.
The following items explain the relation between the textbook definition of stresses and the values reported by Structure: Textbooks commonly denote normal stresses by the symbol and a subscript indicating the plane on which the stress acts. A normal stress is positive if it is tensile. Structure denotes the normal stresses in Structure as Stress XX, Stress YY, and Stress ZZ. Textbooks commonly denote shear stresses by the symbol and two subscripts. The first designates the plane on which the shear stress acts and the second indicates the coordinate axis to which it is parallel. The sign of a shear stress depends on the normal of the plane on which it is acting. If the outward normal is positive, the shear stress is positive when it points in the positive direction of the coordinate axis which it parallels. If the outward normal is negative, the shear stress is positive when in points in the negative direction of the coordinate axis which it parallels. Structure denotes the shear stresses as Stress XY, Stress XZ, and Stress YZ. The other three shear stress components follow these equivalent relations: Stress XY = Stress YX Stress XZ = Stress ZX Stress YZ = Stress ZY
IndexAdditional Information
too many characters or characters that are invalid in Structure. There are a few points you should keep in mind when using these loads in Structure. Structure imports the loads, with the exception of the gravity and centrifugal loads, as unassociated Total Load At Point (TLAP) loads. You must associate each load with a geometric reference in order for it to be retained with the model when you complete your session of Structure. When Structure imports loads from Mechanism Design, it creates a datum point for the unassociated TLAP, unless one exists. In the case of loads based on reaction forces on translational joint axes in Mechanism Design, the location of the datum point is at the intersection of the zero reference plane for the selected body and the translational axis. You can change the location of this zero reference plane by using the Joint Axis Settings dialog box in Mechanism Design. For reaction forces on rotational joint axes, the location of the datum point is at the center of the rotational joint axis. This location is determined by Mechanism Design and not easily modified. Mechanism Design defines loads with respect to the body's LCS. When you import these loads into Structure, the loads are defined with respect to the model's WCS. When you display the direction for a gravity load by highlighting the name in the Mechanism Load Import dialog box, the shaded arrow appears at the center of gravity of the component, but its icon is shown at the model's WCS. Structure combines the angular inertial velocity and acceleration components, called Centrifugal1_Vel and Centrifugal1_Acc, respectively, that are imported from Mechanism Design into a single centrifugal load. When you edit the centrifugal load in Structure, the Centrifugal Load dialog box includes the magnitudes of the velocity and acceleration components.
For information on how specific forces and moments transfer from Mechanism Design to Structure loads, see How Loads Transfer to Structure.
See Also
Reference: Total Load At Point
HTML Report
Use File>Export>HTML Report to publish results on the web. You can export multiple graphic results at a time using this command. If the results are animated, Mechanica adds a movie icon to the bottom of the report. Click this icon to view the animation in MPEG form. After you select HTML Report, the Export HTML dialog box appears. This dialog box enables you to specify a title and enter introductory remarks, comments, and a conclusion for your web report. In the Item area, select the window you wish to annotate, then enter your comments in the Comment section in the Content area.
1045
Height and width measurements of the result graphics appear for all size options except Current View. In this case, results are the same size as they appear in the Mechanica result window.
See Also
Procedure: To Export a File in HTML
I-Beam
The icon for an I-beam beam section type looks like this:
When you select I-Beam as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: b t di tw
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for I-beam beam section types. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for FEM mode.
1046
IndexAdditional Information
Solids are connected when they share a common face and the edges and endpoints of that face. Beams are best connected to shells when the beam and shell share a common edge and the endpoints of that edge. Shells are best connected to solids when the shell and solid share a common face and the edges and endpoints of that face. Two adjacent shells that share two points but no common edge can cause an error.
1047
Insert Points
Select this option on the Settings tab if you want AutoGEM to add extra points when needed to help create elements in complex areas of your model. If you select Insert Points, AutoGEM may add the following types of points: Boundary points points on surface boundary curves in addition to those it adds to create valid element edges. Interior points points on surfaces and inside volumes. These points are in addition to those points that AutoGEM adds to create valid element edges between existing points.
1048
IndexAdditional Information
AutoGEM sometimes cannot create a full set of elements on a surface or volume having complex features. If Insert Points is selected, AutoGEM is more likely to fully cover each surface or volume with elements. Note: You can also choose to add points manually to guide AutoGEM through complex areas of your model. For an example of a model for which Insert Points enables AutoGEM to create a full set of elements, see Example: Insert Points.
If the template and options combine to produce more than 16 windows, then only the first 16 will be shown.
Problems with Elements Problems with Properties Problems with Loads and Constraints
Unless you are doing a modal analysis of a free body with rigid mode search on, your model must satisfy the following rules: Attach the structure to ground such that you can apply loads to the structure from any direction without causing rigid body motion. Connect all parts of the structure to each other such that you can apply loads to any part of the structure without causing unopposed motion of any part of the structure.
The structure must be capable of resisting loads from any direction by transmitting the loads to ground at the constraints. If the structure or any part of the structure is capable of undeformed motionrigid-body translation or rotationunder some type of loading, you must add appropriate constraints to resist that rigid-body motion.
See Also
Reference: Singularities
The interpolation you create is associated with the load and the entity.
1050
IndexAdditional Information
The following illustration shows curve selections that are invalid for 2D axisymmetric models:
When you define your model as a 2D axisymmetric model, Mechanica checks for curves that break the first two rules. If it finds any problems of this sort, Mechanica displays a warning box indicating that it cannot change the model type because the geometry does not lie in the positive X direction relative to the reference coordinate system. If it encounters a curve that breaks the third rulecoincidence with the Y axis Mechanica allows the model, but any analyses you attempt to run may fail.
1051
When you define your model as a 2D axisymmetric model, Mechanica checks for surfaces that break these rules. If it finds any problems of this sort, Mechanica displays a warning box indicating that it cannot change the model type because the geometry does not lie in the positive X direction relative to the reference coordinate system.
Isotropic
If you select Isotropic material symmetry on the Structural tab on the Material Definition dialog box, the following tabs appear: Properties Failure Criterion Fatigue
If you select the Thermal tab, the following properties appear: Specific Heat Thermal Conductivity
Each field that has dimension can have its own units and Mechanica scales the values you enter when the units change.
Isotropic Properties
Select the Properties tab to enter values for the following properties. You can define any of these properties as a function of temperature or you can assign a parameter value to define a property. You can either type in a value or click the (x) button to define a function or P button to assign a parameter as appropriate. Each field that has dimension can have its own units, and Mechanica scales the values you enter when the units change. Poisson's Ratio You must enter the name of a Poisson's ratio function or a value between 0.9999 and 0.4999. The default is 0.3.
1052
IndexAdditional Information
Young's Modulus You must enter a positive value or, if Young's modulus varies with temperature, the name of a Young's modulus function for this property. Coeff. of Thermal Expansion This property is optional, but you should enter a value if you plan to place a thermal load on the model.
Note that Iyz is zero for beam sections for which the BSCS is the same as the BCPCS.
J
Enter the effective second polar moment of area for each beam section. This property describes stiffness in torsion. You must enter a positive value. For more information on J, see Todhunter and Pearson's History of the Theory of Elasticity, Dover, 1960.
L-Section
The icon for an L-section beam section type looks like this:
When you select L-Section as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: b t di tw 1053
If you are interested in examining the exact effects of shear on a beam, enter positive values for Shear Factor FY and Shear Factor FZ. These factors represent the ratio of a beam's effective "shear area" to its true cross-sectional area for shear in the principal Y and Z directions. The default value is 0.833333, which is accurate for rectangular cross sections.
Note: An L-section beam type has fewer than two planes of symmetry. Therefore, make sure the beam is loaded or braced to prevent twist under shear loading.
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for L-section beam section types. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for FEM mode.
Labels
Use this check box to turn labels on and off in a result window. The labels are the lines of textual information shown in the upper left corner of each window. Selecting the Label check box toggles the display of labels in the result window or multiple windows you select. Any change you make to the labels with this command stays with the result window, stored in the .rwd file, until you edit the window definition or exit the Results user interface. Each result window contains one or more of these labels, depending on how you define the window: the selected quantity and its units, and any scale factor you specified for a graph the maximum value in a contour, fringe, or vector plot the minimum value in a contour, fringe, or vector plot the maximum displacement value for a deformed model unless the quantity is stress or strain the scale of deformation for structural analyses the mode number and, if available, frequency, for modal analyses the buckling load factor for buckling analyses the load set, if available, for static, dynamic, and thermal analyses
See Also
Procedure: To Set Labels
1054
IndexAdditional Information
Layup
When you define shell properties for laminate layup-type shells, you can specify the layer repetition pattern. Use the drop-down list under Layup Symmetry on the Shell Property Definition dialog box. You can select one of these options: No Symmetry The layers are not repeated. Symmetrical The layers are repeated in reverse order. Antisymmetrical The layers are repeated in reverse order, and the orientation is also changed.
The dialog boxes require that you complete a table that defines the layers in your laminate. Each line in the table represents either a ply or sub-laminate of the shell property being defined. Note that the row numbers decrease as you go down the list since plies are traditionally numbered from the bottom up.
Legend Value
Use this command on the Edit menu to change one or more of the values on the legend along the right side of a fringe, fringe animation, contour, or vector result window. If no result window is currently selected, the Selection dialog box appears and you can select one or more result windows from the list to edit. The legend shows the colors used in the plot and the range connected to each color. Mechanica calculates the level of each fringe boundary by distributing the levels linearly from minimum to maximum. After you select the command, select a value from the legend. Then enter a new value. For more information about entering new values, see Guidelines for Changing Legend Values. If you enter a new minimum or maximum value, Mechanica may ask if you want to redistribute levels. Mechanica regenerates the plot to take the new levels into account.
1055
See Also
Procedure: To Edit the Legend
1056
IndexAdditional Information
At the top of the dialog box, Mechanica displays the WCS coordinates of the locations you selected. The middle area of the dialog box displays the values of your selected stress quantity at the three locations, or two in the case of 2D models. It also lists the maximum of the values. These results are in terms of the local coordinate system. For information on how Mechanica calculates these values, see Linearized Stress Value Calculation. The dialog box also contains these items: Component Select the specific type of linearized stress quantity results you want Mechanica to display. Generate Report Save the results to a file.
Membrane and bending stress values are obtained from numerical integration along the line between location 1 and location 2 as follows:
where: is any local stress component L is the distance from location 1 to location 2 Total stress is the value calculated by Mechanica, and the peak stress is defined by: Peak = Total (Membrane + Bending) Peak, Total, and Bending Stresses vary along the line from location 1 to location 2; however, membrane stress remains constant. Mechanica then processes the component values of these stresses at each point to obtain principal and von Mises stresses, using the standard formula for principal and von Mises stress.
Note: The formula for peak and total stress applies for each component of stress, but not for the principal or von Mises stress.
For axisymmetric models, similar formulas are used, with correction terms to account for the offset of the neutral bending axis from the midpoint.
See Also
Procedure: To Define the Load History for a Fatigue Analysis
1058
IndexAdditional Information
Load Interpolation
Use the Load Interpolation dialog box to add, preview, or remove interpolation points, and to enter or edit a value for each point. You can use from two to four interpolation points on the geometry and assign a scale factor to each point. Mechanica selects default interpolation points for some entities, as follows:
Entity Default Interpolation Points
endpoints
corners
surfaces
none
If you want different interpolation points than the defaults, you can delete the defaults and create new ones. When planning interpolated loads, be aware of the following: At least one of the points should have a value other than zero. For interpolated loads, you normally use scale factors that lie between 0 and 1. However, you can use larger values if you want to increase the value or vector of the original load through multiplication. Each value is a scale factor. Mechanica multiplies the force and moment values (for structural loads) or the heat transfer rate value (for heat loads) by the interpolation value at a given location to determine the load vector at that location. You can define the scale factor as either a positive or negative value. If you use a negative value, you reverse the load direction. Additionally, if you express the load value as a negative number and you use a negative scale value, the signs cancel each other and the load value becomes positive. If you enter interpolation points and add scale factors before entering load values, Mechanica enters a default value of 1 for FY. The number of interpolation points you select determines the functional form of the interpolation.
1059
See Also
Procedure: To Select Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses
1060
IndexAdditional Information
The software does not retain any information on the dialog box when you click OK to exit the dialog box.
The software does not retain any information on the dialog box when you click OK to exit the dialog box.
1061
a. When the time function is impulse, an impulse load is applied at the minimum time. b. When the frequency function is uniform, the load is multiplied by 1 over the frequency range. c. The phase function is defined in radians. d. When the frequency phase function is zero, a zero radian phase angle over the frequency range is applied to the load. e. The frequency dependence functions you specify for a random response analysis are the PSD curves for each load set. The engine calculates the PSD response curves for local measures as a function of frequency. To select a different function, click the (x) button and the Functions dialog box appears. You can select an existing function or click New to define a new function. See Function Definition Dialog Box for information on defining new functions.
1062
IndexAdditional Information
No No No No Yes
Gravity Pressure
Yes Yes
Deformation-independent load Variation must be Uniform or Interpolated Over Entity. Magnitude will remain constant but direction may change. Direction will always be parallel to the deformed normal.
Temperature
No
1063
o o
ZeroPeak Uses a Min Load Factor of 0 and a Max Load Factor of 1.0. User-Defined Allows you to enter values for the Min Load Factor and Max Load Factor.
Variable Amplitude Use this option for models with variable amplitude loading. You can define the variation of the amplitude by manually entering load factors to specify the datum points of the amplitude curve. You can enter up to 100 load factors. Use the following buttons to modify the table that defines the variation of the amplitude. o Add Row Adds numbered rows to the table. When you click Add Row, the Enter Rows dialog box appears. In the Start At field, enter the row number where you want to begin adding rows. In the Num Rows field, enter the number of rows you want to add. When you click OK, Mechanica adds the new rows and preserves any load factors you entered in rows above or below the new rows. Delete Deletes rows from the table. When you click Delete, you can use the Enter Rows dialog box to specify a Begin Row and End Row. When you click OK, Mechanica deletes all rows numbered from the Begin Row through the End Row. Clear All Click this button to delete all rows. Import Click this button to import the load factor data from a text file into the table. You can import an unlimited number of cycles from a text file.
o o
1064
IndexAdditional Information
Local Temperatures And Local Energy Norms is the default convergence option.
If the mesh refinement fails during the first pass, Mechanica continues with a second pass using the original mesh. During the second pass, you can view the results of the first pass. If you decide not to continue with the second pass, you can stop the analysis.
Log Scale
Use the Log Scale check box on the X Axis and Y Axis tabs of the Graph Window Options dialog box to change the values on the graph's X or Y axis to a logarithmic scale. After you select Log Scale for an axis, Mechanica converts the values on the appropriate axis to log base 10. If you then deselect the check box, the values return to a linear scale. Following are the limitations of these commands: You cannot convert an axis to a log scale if the axis contains any non-positive values. You cannot change the scale of a graph that is tied to another graph. You cannot tie two graphs that are not using the same scale on both axes. For example, if graph 1 uses log scale on the x axis and linear scale on the y axis, and graph 2 uses linear scale on both axes, you cannot tie them in any way. If you change the x axis on graph 2 to log scale, you can then tie the graphs.
Managing Graphs
When you select the Format>Graph command, Mechanica displays the Graph Window Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to define the visual characteristics 1066
IndexAdditional Information
of the graph display window. For example, you can change the background color of the window or the color of the x and y axes to improve the overall appearance of your graph. You can also specify new axis labels or adjust the scale for the graph to have a better view. The dialog box contains the following tabs: Y Axis Use to modify the appearance of the graph's y axis, its label and grid lines, and to change the scale for the graph. X Axis Use to modify the appearance of the graph's x axis, its label and grid lines, and to change the scale for the graph. Data Series Use to control the appearance of data series for the graph you select and to toggle the legend. Graph Display Use to control the display of the graph's title and to change the background color of the window.
You can customize the basic settings for graph displays and, consequently, for this dialog box by using the bmgr_pref_file config.pro option to set graph defaults.
decreasing solver RAM (solram) increasing memory limits increasing swap space decreasing model size
Managing Performance
The engine log file (study/study.stt file) maintains detailed information on how much memory, disk space, elapsed time, and CPU time the engine uses as your job runs. You can review this file to monitor resource requirements and performance. For example, reviewing Step Elapsed Time and Step CPU Time can help you predict how much time a particular job step will take at a future p-pass. Results inconsistent with the trends in this file can help you identify and fix performance problems and resource shortages.
See Also
References: Troubleshoot High Elapsed Run Times Managing Memory and Swap Space Strategy: Running the Engine with Parallel Processing Time and Disk Usage Information
1068
IndexAdditional Information
1069
The component that you use to define your mass cannot contain volumes that will be meshed as solids during a FEM analysis. You can select a curve or surface on a master representation or a simplified representation. For information on simplified representations, search the Fundamentals functional area in the PTC Help system. The component that you use to define your mass can be specified as excluded or substituted in the simplified representation. In this case, select the excluded or substituted component from the Model Tree when you define your mass. After you define a mass by component, you can confirm the values of the mass, moments of inertia, and center of gravity for the component by using object action or by right-clicking the mass item under Idealizations on the Model Tree and selecting the Info command. The moments of inertia and center of gravity are reported in terms of the component's WCS. The location of the selected point affects the analysis of your FEM mesh data. If the point you select for your mass idealization coincides with the center of gravity of the component, you can output mesh data to the ANSYS or MSC/NASTRAN solvers. If the point you select for your mass idealization does not coincide with the center of gravity of the component, you can only output to the NASTRAN solver. You cannot use the other FEM solvers with this type of mass idealization. After you run the NASTRAN solver, you can view the center of gravity offset on the NASTRAN output.
Matching Parameters
Mechanica checks if standard design studies with Set Parameters selected reference another design study. This can happen if the study contains a dynamic analysis with Use Previous Modes selected, or an analysis that includes a MEC/T temperature load. In either case, Mechanica checks that the parameters and parameter settings are the same in both the current study and the other study referenced by an analysis in the current study. If the parameters do not agree, Mechanica displays an error message and does not start the run.
1070
IndexAdditional Information
Similarly, Mechanica uses the material properties assigned to the surface only if you also assign a shell property to the surface. Be aware that if you assign material properties to a part, curve, or surface in part mode, those material properties are not available in assembly mode, and the reverse. For example, if you assigned AL2014an aluminum from Mechanica's material libraryto body1 in part mode, the software does not automatically assign AL2014 to body1 in assembly mode. Therefore, if you ultimately plan to work with your parts as an assembly, you should strongly consider assigning material properties in assembly mode. Mechanica treats each material you assign to a part or curve as a material set. Each material set consists of a set of material property values that you specify on the Material Definition dialog box. You can assign three types of material properties to the model: isotropic, orthotropic, and transversely isotropic. Most engineering materials are isotropic. If you are working with a curve instead of a part, you can assign isotropic material properties only.
For 3D material orientations, you select one of the following six combinations of the current coordinate system directions for the three principal material directions:
Material Direction: 1 2 3
1071
Mechanica automatically changes the label above the third column of check buttons from Z to Z when necessary to reflect the fact that the material orientation is righthanded. Note: The material directions 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the directions understood on the Material Properties dialog box when you enter orthotropic or transversely isotropic properties. When you click a Material Direction option button: Mechanica redraws the material orientations. The displayed material directions differ depending on the option you select on the Relative To menu.
Material or Sub-laminate
Enter the name of a previously defined material for your shell definition. You can also use a previously defined laminate as one of the plies when you define a laminate layup-type shell. To specify a material or sub-laminate as part of your shell definition, use one of these methods on the laminate layup version of the Shell Property Definition dialog box: You can right-click in the Material/Sub-laminate field and select Material. The Materials and Shell Properties in the Model dialog box appears. Select a laminate layup-type shell property from the list, or click More to transfer one from the library to the model. You can type in the name of an existing material or laminate-layup shell property. Be careful while entering a name for a shell property or a material. If you have assigned the same name to a material and a shell property, Mechanica searches for saved materials and shell properties in the following order in trying to match the entered name: o o o materials in the model materials in the material library shell properties in the model
Keep the following points in mind when specifying sub-laminates: Mechanica displays only those shell properties whose structural properties are those of a laminate layup.
1072
IndexAdditional Information
The dialog box does not allow recursive definitions. A shell property cannot reference itself as a sub-laminate. You cannot select shell properties defined for a 3D model if the active model is 2D.
If you select a previously defined laminate, you cannot edit the value in the Thickness entry box.
See Also
Reference: About Materials
Property
Structure
only for models with a von Mises or Tresca failure criterion only for isotropic materials with a Modified Mohr failure criterion and for transversely isotropic materials with a failure criterion
Structure
Structure
only for isotropic materials with a Modified Mohr failure criterion and for transversely isotropic materials with a failure criterion only for transversely isotropic materials with a failure criterion only for transversely isotropic materials with a Tsai-Wu failure criterion
shear strength
Structure
Structure
1073
Max Absolute
For a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, Mechanica calculates the maximum magnitude value over: all the time steps of the analysis all the frequency steps of the analysis a specified time range
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure that saves the time at which a maximum absolute condition occurs. Mechanica reports this value in the summary file. This option is not available if the Spatial Evaluation method is Maximum or Minimum, or if the Component is Magnitude, von Mises, Max Principal, or Min Principal.
1074
IndexAdditional Information
During element creation, the value of this item cannot exceed 100 . The default for creating elements is 95 . The default limit for editing is 100 . You cannot exceed the editing limit. If you enter a value for the edge angle that is not within the range allowed for that mode, Mechanica prompts you to reenter a value within the proper range.
Maximum
For a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, Mechanica calculates the maximum value over: all the time steps of the analysis all the frequency steps of the analysis a specified time range
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure that saves the time at which a maximum condition occurs. Mechanica reports this value in the summary file. This option is not available if the Spatial Evaluation method is Minimum or Max Abs.
1075
You can find the measure value in the summary file. If you select a spatial evaluation of Minimum or Maximum Abs, this option is not available.
1076
IndexAdditional Information
1077
When you select Of Ply Top/Bottom, a spin box appears on the dialog box for entering the ply number for which to display the results.
IndexAdditional Information
If the solver exceeds the number of iterations, Mechanica terminates the run. When you re-run the study, allow the block solver to complete one more pass by increasing the After P-Loop Pass number by 1.
Measure Convergence
The Structure engine calculates and reports in the summary report the convergence percentage of each measure. The convergence index is the maximum percentage change of any measure. The percentage change is the difference between the current pass and the preceding pass divided by the value at the current pass. For multiple load sets, the value is the maximum over all load sets. 1079
See Types of Measure Results Graphs to learn about the kinds of results you can display using Measure as the quantity.
value_1 value_2
analysis_name_nobj analysis_name_1
IndexAdditional Information
limit_name_2
analysis_name_2
limit_name_nlim
where
analysis_name_nlim
ndp is the number of design parameters nobj is the number of objectives (in Mechanica, there is just one single objective) nlim is the number of limits
You must specify: the names and values of design parameters for objectives and limits, the names of measures defined in Mechanica, as well as the names of analyses in which these measures are used
objective_value_1 objective_value_2
limit_value_nlim
This file contains nobj objective values and nlim limit values.
1081
Fatigue Advisor works entirely within Mechanica Structure. You simply specify an existing static analysis, then define the material properties and loading history along with the required design life for the study. You can either use the material library and load history generator included in the software or import this information. Fatigue Advisor calculates the following results quantities: Life Determines the predicted cycles to failure. Damage Measures percentage of damage due to loading. Factor of safety Estimates the factor of safety based upon predicted failure. Confidence of life Measures the reliability of the results.
You can define and review these results using standard Mechanica visualization tools including fringes, contours, and graphs. In addition, you can define and track local and global measures of the results quantities for sensitivity and optimization design studies. You can create parametric geometry models, assign a permissible range to each parameter, and specify design goals and performance limits.
See Also
Reference: About Materials
1082
IndexAdditional Information
1083
using simplified representations of your model when appropriate. Simplified representations give you a greater degree of modeling freedom while preserving your original model. modeling thin features with beams and shells rather than as solids. This simplifies the model from the solver's perspective, greatly reducing model size, disk usage, RAM requirements, and analysis times. aligning edges and surfaces that are nearly aligned in the part or assembly using cut features to remove portions of the model that are not pertinent to the analysis using cut features to reduce the model to its symmetric section for models that exhibit both geometric symmetry and modeling symmetry (symmetric loads and constraints)
See Also
Reference: Number of Modes, All Modes in Frequency Range
Minimum
For a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, Mechanica calculates the minimum value over: all the time steps of the analysis all the frequency steps of the analysis a specified time range
If you select the Time Stamp check box, Mechanica creates a time stamp measure that saves the time at which a minimum condition occurs. Mechanica reports this value in the summary file. This option is not available if the Spatial Evaluation method is Maximum or Max Abs.
1084
IndexAdditional Information
1085
When you first switch from creating to editing mode, Mechanica checks that the creation edge and face angles are between 5 and 175 and warns you if the angles are not in this range. Select Accept to keep the values you selected for the angles. Select Cancel to change the creation limits back to the previous limits.
See Also
Procedure: To Select Mode Options for a Dynamic Analysis
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure: To Select Mode Options for a Modal Analysis
Model Accuracy
In Pro/ENGINEER, model accuracy is the granularity, or precision, with which the software creates the geometry. For example, model accuracy determines such characteristics as how finely the software tessellates the model's curves. A finely tessellated curve is a smoother curve, whereas a coarsely tessellated curve would give the appearance of a series of straight lines that approximate the shape of the curve. Model accuracy in assemblies can determine whether geometry is treated as merged or separate as well as how successfully you can mesh two components. There are two types of model accuracyrelative accuracy and absolute accuracy. Pro/ENGINEER applies a relative accuracy value when it creates geometry. The default relative value is the same regardless of the part size. Pro/ENGINEER determines the overall accuracy of the geometry by multiplying the relative accuracy value by the part size to determine the absolute accuracy of the geometry. Thus, using the default relative accuracy, the software would create a small part with a greater degree of geometric refinement than a large part. For example, if the size of a small part were 100 and the relative accuracy were 0.012, the absolute accuracy of the geometry would be 1.2. If the size of the larger part were 10,000 and the relative accuracy were also 0.012, the absolute accuracy of the geometry would be 120. The significant difference between the geometric accuracy of these two parts can make it difficult to create a cohesive assembly that includes both parts. In this case, if you were to mate the two components, the differences in tessellation refinement could cause geometric incompatibilities. This is of particular concern for meshing, where the software uses the geometry to determine element edge length, element size, and so forth. For instance, if you mated the two example parts along a nonlinear curve, Mechanica might experience problems in trying to match the small elements that would be a byproduct of the small part's refined tessellation with the larger elements that the larger part's coarser tessellation would produce.
1087
The Display Options tab displays some or all of these items depending on the design study and quantity you choose and the selections you make on the tab: Shade Surfaces Display your model as light-source shaded frames. If you do not select the check box, the animation appears as a series of wireframe images. Deformed Display your model in its deformed state. Additionally, you can display an undeformed wireframe or transparent version of the model superimposed over the deformed model. Show Element Edges Display the edges of the elements in your model when you display the results. Show Loads Display the load icons in your model when you display the results. Show Constraints Display the constraint icons in your model when you display the results. Animate Animate the display of your results in the result window. You can select Auto Start, Reverse-Repeat-Alternate options, and the number of frames in the animation. This option is unavailable for fatigue or linearized stress results.
1088
IndexAdditional Information
Mec/T Apply a thermal load based on a temperature field determined by a steady or transient thermal analysis. You must already have defined a valid steady or transient thermal analysis. When defining a transient thermal analysis for this purpose, you must select the Temp Load option for various time steps in order to calculate the thermal load results you want to apply to the static or modal analysis. The dialog box displays the name of a steady thermal analysis and a load set, or a transient thermal analysis and a time step from the analysis. If you have multiple analyses, load sets, or time steps, you can select the ones you want to use. Mechanica runs the thermal analysis you select before running the static or modal analysis. You can also select Use temperatures from previous design study if you want to use the results of a previously run thermal analysis.
Ext/T Import an externally calculated or measured temperature field as a temperature load. You must already have created a Pro/FEM Neutral File to import an external temperature load. Click the Browse button and select an external temperature field file from the Open dialog box.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Select Temperature Distribution for an Analysis Global Temperature MEC/T Temperatures External Temperatures
Modes Included
Use this item to specify which modes from the modal analysis you want included in the dynamic analysis. You can specify this in two ways: All Select if you want to include all modes from the modal analysis in the dynamic analysis. Below Specified Frequency Select to limit the modes included. Enter a frequency in the entry box.
1089
For more information about how the Modified Mohr failure criterion is calculated, see Shigley, Joseph Edward, Mechanical Engineering Design, First Metric Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1986. Each field that has dimension can have its own units and Mechanica scales the values you enter when the units change.
See Also
References: Creating Analyses and Design Studies Running Analyses and Design Studies Monitoring an Analysis or Design Study Run
1090
IndexAdditional Information
Delete Cutting Surf and Delete Capping Surf Use to delete a specific cutting surface or capping surface in your result window.
MPEG
Export MPEGs to produce animated reproductions of your results. This feature can be used to help create presentations. The software offers the option of saving the animation of a single window as an MPEG file for just this reason. You can access this command using the File>Export>MPEG command. This command opens the MPEG Export dialog box. This dialog box enables you to specify a title and to determine the size and quality of the animation export. You can choose from five available options. The options are: NTSC Web NTSC CDROM PAL Web PAL CDROM Custom
The height, width, and number of frames per second are controlled by the option selected. You can only edit these options if you choose Custom.
See Also
Procedure: To Export a File as an MPEG
1091
1092
IndexAdditional Information
MSC/NASTRAN
Writing an MSC/NASTRAN output file creates an MSC/NASTRAN file in ASCII format called filename.nas. The following table lists the mesh elements written to the MSC/NASTRAN output file for the various mesh types and idealizations.
Element Type Shells Triangular Linear Triangular Parabolic Quadrilateral Linear Quadrilateral Parabolic Tetrahedral Solids Beams Trusses Springs Masses Rigid Links Weighted Links Gaps Linear and Parabolic MSC/NASTRAN CTRIA3 CTRIA6 CQUAD4 CQUAD8 CTETRA CBEAM CROD CBUSH CONM2 RBAR RBE3 CGAP (element coordinate system and orientation) PGAP (properties)
Be aware that Mechanica does not support or output thermal loads and constraints. Also, for gaps, stiffness properties are specified on the PGAP card. These properties include UO, the initial gap value, KA, the normal stiffness, and KT, the slide stiffness. MSC/NASTRAN supports zero-length idealizationsidealizations that have no length, such as an idealization between a point on a surface and the surface itselffor gaps and advanced springs only. For an MSC/NASTRAN solution, you can use the fem_solver_time_limit config.pro option to interrupt the solver after the specified time limit. The default value is 60 (60 minutes). If you place simulation entities on layers and want to review a file containing layer data, you can use the sim_output_ids_for_layers config.pro option to generate an
1093
XML file that lists the layers. Mechanica outputs this file at the same time that it outputs the .nas file and places it in the same directory as the .nas file.
See Also
Strategies: Specifying Polynomial Order for a Multi-Pass Adaptive Analysis Identifying and Resolving Potential Trouble Spots in a Model
NASTRAN Templates
You control what goes into the .nas file through a NASTRAN template file that you specify in the NASTRAN Analysis Template area of the Run FEM Analysis dialog box. The NASTRAN Analysis Template area includes a file selector that you can use to browse for a NASTRAN template file. Once you select a template file, you can set that file as the default template for the model by clicking the Default button. The format of the NASTRAN template file is as follows: [optional, user supplied File Management and NASTRAN statements] [optional, user supplied Executive Control statements] @include_promesh_executive_control_section (optional) [optional Executive Control statements] CEND [optional Case Control commands] @include_promesh_case_control_section (optional) @include_promesh_case_control_section_as_comments (optional) [more optional, user supplied Case Control commands] BEGIN BULK [optional, user supplied Bulk Data instructions] @include_promesh_bulk_data_section (optional) [more optional, user supplied Bulk Data instructions] ENDDATA There are four special optional lines in this template file:
1094
IndexAdditional Information
@include_promesh_executive_control_section @include_promesh_case_control_section @include_promesh_case_control_section_as_comments @include_promesh_bulk_data_section If these lines are present in the template file (case-insensitive), the software replaces them with data output from Mechanica FEM mode as it processes the NASTRAN input file.
Click the Preview button to view your changes as you make them, or click OK to close the dialog box.
Number
Enter the number of times the ply definition listed in the table is repeated for this laminate. You can also use a counter to increment the number from 1 to 100. Mechanica does not accept negative values in this field. If the value is zero, Mechanica ignores the ply. The Number field for at least one of the plies in the laminate must contain a non-zero, positive number.
1095
1096
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
References: Constrained, With Rigid Mode Search Min Frequency, Max Frequency
Object Action
Object action is a feature that enables you to perform an action on an object you select on your model or in the Model Tree. You can right-click highlighted simulation entities in the Model Tree or entity icons on your model to display a shortcut menu listing Mechanica operations that you can perform on the entity. The list of simulation entities on which you can perform object action operations includes, but is not limited to, the following: loads constraints beams shells masses springs shell pairs perimeter welds end welds simulation features gaps (FEM mode) mesh controls (FEM mode) rigid links (FEM mode) weighted links (FEM mode) interfaces meshes material assignments simulation measures
As you move your cursor over an icon representing any simulation entity that has been set for prehighlighting, the software highlights the icon in red. If your cursor pauses, a display tag appears showing the entity name. If you select a highlighted icon or select an entity directly from the Model Tree, the icon highlights in red on the model and you can right-click to display the shortcut menu to perform operations on the entity. The object action operations are always in effect, whether or not prehighlighting is set for a simulation entity.
See Also
Reference: Suppression and Family Tables
1097
Other commands general to Pro/ENGINEER, such as Rehighlight, Show Selection Bin, and so forth may appear on the object action menu. For information on these commands, search the Fundamentals and Part Modeling areas of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
See Also
Reference: Datum Features in Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica
For example, if you designed a collet and wanted to constrain a small section of the outside surface, you might add a region to the model. If you then omitted the region 1098
IndexAdditional Information
from your pairing scheme, Mechanica would compress and subsequently analyze the model differently depending on which surface had the red highlighting. To see how the compression results change when the unopposed surface is on the red side or the yellow side of the pair, see the collet cross section illustration. After you pair your model, you can inspect the pairing scheme by shading your model. To shade your model, select View>Shade and highlight Shell Pairs in the Model Tree. Reviewing the shaded model can disclose areas that are unpaired but may not be noticeable in the wireframe view of the model.
Optimization Studies
The report contains the following information for each iteration, or step, of the optimization: the value of each parameter the value of the goal measure and each limit measure a memory and disk usage summary at each step, similar to the summary included at the end of every design study
The parameter value is a percentage of the range for the design parameter associated with the parameter. This value tells you where Mechanica has moved the design parameter at a specific stage of the optimization. At the end of the study, Mechanica lists the values for each parameter and measure for the best design found.
1099
Standard studies Look at the results to find out how your model behaved during a single analysis or combination of analyses. If you used a particular parameter setting for a standard design study, you can use the results to determine how your model behaved at that parameter setting.
These results can help you determine the feasibility of a design. They can also help you evaluate the effect of slightly modifying an optimized shape to bring it within manufacturing tolerances. Sensitivity studies Look at the results to find out which design controls had an effect on your goals. Additionally, use the results to determine appropriate starting points and range limits for your parameters during optimization. o Optimization studies Look at the results to see the optimized shape and determine whether the final shape is acceptable. Accepting the optimized design If you want to go forward with your model's optimized shape instead of the original shape, you need to accept the optimized design. When you accept an optimized design, Mechanica updates your original Pro/ENGINEER model to reflect any shape changes. o
See Also
References: Developing a Model (Native Mode) Analyzing a Model (Native Mode) Defining Design Changes (Native Mode)
Order of Rotation
Mechanica rotates the material coordinate system in this order: 1. Rotates the material coordinate system about Material Direction 1. 2. Rotates the material coordinate system about the new Material Direction 2 created by the first rotation. 3. Rotates the material coordinate system about the new Material Direction 3 created by the first two rotations. Mechanica uses the right-hand rule to determine the direction of each rotation.
Orientation
Enter the orientation for the ply or sub-laminate. For a single ply, the orientation is the amount the material is rotated about the material direction perpendicular to the shell or surface (the material orientation 3 direction). See the illustration for more information. 1100
IndexAdditional Information
For sub-laminates, the orientation is the amount by which the entire sub-laminate is rotated. Enter positive or negative real number values for the orientation. If you have more than one ply, you can specify multiple orientations by entering the values separated by a slash. For example, enter 0/90/45/45 for a 4-ply laminate. To enter a negative orientation, insert a minus sign before the number in the entry box. For example, the negative orientation of a ply can be entered as 45. The entry box for orientation is parameter-capable. Right-click in the Orientation field of the Shell Property Definition dialog box and select Parameter from the menu. Note: If you enter multiple values for the orientation, you cannot use expressions based on parameters, and you cannot mix parameter names and real numbers. For example, you cannot use an expression such as 90/45/ANGLE.
See Also
Reference: Material Orientation Definition for Surfaces, Shells, 2D Plates, 2D Solids
1101
Spin controls Use to spin your model about the model spin center or the screen center. If you use the model center as your spin reference, the model spins about the X, Y, and Z axes. If you use the screen center as your spin reference, the model spins about the horizontal, vertical, and center axes of the screen. To spin your model, enter positive or negative values in the three text boxes. If you want to see the effects of zooming live, toggle the Dynamic Update box on and then use the Spin slider controls.
Orthotropic
If you select Orthotropic material symmetry, additional items appear on the Material Definition dialog box. For these items, enter values in terms of material directions 1, 2, and 3. If you select the Structural tab, the following properties appear: Poisson's Ratio Young's Modulus Shear Modulus Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
If you select the Thermal tab, the following properties appear: Specific Heat Thermal Conductivity
1102
IndexAdditional Information
Output Format
Use this option to specify the format that you want Mechanica to use when printing to a file. You can use the following output formats for Windows: Microsoft Print Manager Prints a file to one of the available printers. Select a printer from the list. This format generates raster plots. Microsoft Print Manager (Vector) Prints a file to one of the available printers. The files generated for vector plots are usually smaller than those for raster plots. Use this print format, for example, for pen plotters that cannot use raster fonts. Vector printouts are best used for printing text or wireframe images. You cannot use a vector format for a shaded image.
You can use the following output formats for both Windows and UNIX: PostScript (Vector) Prints a PostScript file for any printer that supports the PostScript page description language. HPGL2 (for exporting plots only) Prints a file in the Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language. This format is used to print on a plotter or printer that supports HPGL2. Use it for graphs and contour plots. Some plotters might not fill solid areas such as shaded areas or fringe plots properly. When the plotter does fill solid areas, the fill might damage the paper or plotter pens.
Using HPGL2 format to produce a fringe plot produces an extremely large plot file. It is strongly recommended that you use a contour plot instead.
BMP (for exporting images only) Prints a bit-mapped image. Encapsulated PostScript Prints a file that you can include within another PostScript file. You cannot print this type of file without printing a PostScript file.
You can use the following additional output formats for UNIX only: JPEG Prints a file in the Joint Photographic Experts Group format. TIFF Prints a file in the Tagged Image File Format. Only black and white output is available. Color .tif files cannot be produced, even though there is a color button selection. If possible, you should use .jpg. Both color and black and white .jpg files can be produced.
If you do not have sufficient disk space when you output a file, such as a PostScript file, Mechanica may terminate.
Output Formats
The options you select from the Output to File dialog box determine the format and element types included in the output file. The following is a summary of supported FEA programs that generate shell and solid element meshes.
1103
If you use the default option, Automatic Intervals Within Range, Mechanica selects appropriate intervals at which to report results. You specify a time range by entering a minimum time and a maximum time. You have the option to select Auto to automatically enter the maximum time. If you select User-defined Output Intervals, the following items become available: Number of Master Intervals Enter the number of master intervals at which you want Mechanica to report results. Mechanica displays the intervals in a table with numbered rows. You can specify up to 999 master intervals. In general, computation time increases with the number of intervals. Full Results Select the check boxes next to the intervals for which you want to save full temperature and flux results. Temp Load Select the check boxes next to the intervals for which you want to save data for importing a thermal load or temperature field into Structure. User-defined Steps Click this button to enter values for spacing the time steps. Space Equally Enters evenly spaced values for the steps. This button is only available when you click User-defined Steps. (Select All) Click this button if you want to save full results and temperature load data for all intervals. (Deselect All) Click this button if you do not want to save full results and temperature load data for any intervals.
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure: To Select Output Options for a Dynamic Analysis
See Also
Procedure: To Select Output Options for a Structural Analysis
1105
See Also
Procedure: To Select Output Options for a Thermal Analysis
1106
IndexAdditional Information
o Cartesian Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z). o Cylindrical Cylindrical coordinate system (R, Theta, Z). o Spherical Spherical coordinate system (R, Theta, Phi). Output to area Select the way you want Mechanica to present the output. o Screen Presents the specified analysis statistics in an information window on your screen. o File Routes the specified analysis statistics to an ASCII file whose name and path you specify in the associated text box. o Both Provides both screen and file output.
Use the four buttons at the bottom of the dialog box to indicate the type of analysis statistics you want to review. These buttons are as follows: Edge Graph Displays an edge graph for an edge or connected chain of edges you specified in the Reference field. This button becomes inactive if you select anything other than connected edges in the Reference field. Statistics Displays the analysis statistics as specified on the dialog box. This button becomes inactive if you select more than one component in the Component field. Point Data Displays analysis statistics for a specific point on the model. When you click this button, Mechanica asks you to select a single point on your model. You can select an existing point or click any location on your model to get data for that location. The Point Data button becomes inactive for certain quantities. It also becomes inactive if you select multiple components in the Component field. Done Closes the dialog box.
See Also
Procedures: To Display or Output Analysis Statistics To Generate an Edge Graph
1107
Analysis Select one or more analyses. If you select multiple analyses, Mechanica outputs the hard point data for all the analyses in a single report. Mode Select one or more modes. This option is only available for modal analyses. Result Select one of the result quantities available for the Structure or Thermal analysis. Shell Side For shell models, select the shell side for which to generate statistics. Reference Select the whole model to get a report for all hard points in the model or click the selector arrow to specify individual hard points. Coord System area Select a coordinate system to use as a reference for the report. Also, specify its type as follows: o Cartesian Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z). o Cylindrical Cylindrical coordinate system (R, Theta, Z). o Spherical Spherical coordinate system (R, Theta, Phi). Output to area Select the way you want Mechanica to present the output. o Screen Presents the report in an information window on your screen. o File Routes the report to an ASCII file whose name and path you specify in the associated text box. o Both Provides both screen and file output.
Use the Report button at the bottom of the dialog box to generate the hard point report. The report lists the values for each hard point, as measured in reference to the coordinate system you selected. The report provides a value for each translational and rotational axis.
See Also
Procedure: To Display or Output Hard Point Reports
Overlay
Use to superimpose the undeformed model over the animation. Select this command to turn the overlay display on or off. When you first access the View menu, Overlay is active unless you deselected the Overlay option when you defined the result window.
IndexAdditional Information
If you want to create a new coordinate system to use as a reference, use the Insert>Model Datum>Coordinate System command.
If you want to create a new coordinate system to use as a reference, use the Insert>Model Datum>Coordinate System command.
1109
Create an opposing surface Create a small feature to give the unopposed surface a pairing mate. Note, however, that this method has a dimensional impact on the finished mesh. Split the surface Split the surface and distribute it among its neighboring surface pairs. This procedure, while sometimes difficult, does the best job of retaining model accuracy.
Pan
Pan modifies the location of the model relative to the display window by moving the frame of reference horizontally or vertically. The Pan area contains two items: H (horizontal setting) Use the slider or counter to move the frame of reference to the left or right. V (vertical setting) Use the slider or counter to move the frame of reference into or out of the screen.
1110
IndexAdditional Information
Paper
Size Select one of the following page sizes from the option menu:
F (40.0 x 28.0 in.) E (44.0 x 34.0 in.) D (34.0 x 22.0 in.) C (22.0 x 17.0 in.) B (17.0 x 11.0 in.) A (11.0 x 8.5 in.) A0 (1189 x 841 mm) A1 (841 x 594 mm) A2 (594 x 420 mm) A3 (420 x 297 mm) A4 (297 x 210 mm) Variable in Inch Variable in mm
Height Select the page height from the option menu. This option is available if you select the Variable in Inch or Variable in mm option for size. Width Select the page width from the option menu. This option is available if you select the Variable in Inch or Variable in mm option for size.
Here, you define the mass parameter as equal to the mp_mass Pro/ENGINEER system parameter. You use the ("") portion of the equation to indicate that you want Mechanica to measure the mass for the current part. After you define the Pro/ENGINEER parameter, you create a measure in Mechanica that calls the Pro/ENGINEER parameter mass.
1111
After you define this relation, you create a measure in Mechanica that references the Pro/ENGINEER parameter bladesurf. By default, Mechanica names this measure bladesurf.
1112
IndexAdditional Information
to determine how your model behaves under the loads, constraints, and other conditions you define.
When you right-click, a menu appears with the following items: Parameter Display the Select Pro/ENGINEER Parameter dialog box with a list of existing parameters. You can use this dialog box for the following actions: o Select a parameter from the list and click Accept. The parameter appears in the edit field. You can add text to form an expression. o Click Create. Enter a name and value for the parameter on the Create a Pro/ENGINEER Parameter dialog box. Undo Reverse the last action. Cut Remove the highlighted text from the edit field and copy it to the system buffer. Copy Add text from the edit field to the system buffer to be pasted into another area. Paste Add text to the edit field from the system buffer. Delete Remove the selected text from the edit field. Select All Highlight all the text in the edit field.
See Also
Reference: Pro/ENGINEER Parameters
1113
Parameter Button
Click the P button to define a parameter-specified property. The Select Pro/ENGINEER Parameter dialog box enables you to select or create a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. After you click Accept and return to the Material Definition dialog box, you can convert the parameter into a Mechanica design parameter. Select a parameter from the dialog box. After you click Accept, the parameter name appears in the text box next to the P button on the Material Definition dialog box. Mechanica does not write parameters to the library but evaluates the parameters and writes their current value to the library.
Percent Convergence
If you selected Multi-Pass Adaptive for the convergence method, you enter a percentage to determine the accuracy level. The percentage applies to the convergence quantities you select. During the analysis, Mechanica performs calculations at increasingly higher polynomial orders for each element edge. An analysis converges when the difference in the results of the last two calculations is within the percentage you specify here. You should enter a value between 1% and 25%. Lower convergence percentages yield more accurate results, but Mechanica may take longer to reach convergence. You should balance the level of accuracy you need with the amount of time the analysis will take to run. If an analysis does not reach convergence during a design study, the results may not have the desired accuracy. In this case, you need to change something in your model to get better results.
1114
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Strategy: Identifying and Resolving Potential Trouble Spots in a Model
Percent Convergence
Convergence gives you an idea of how accurate the results are. If an analysis does not reach convergence during a design study, the results may not have the desired accuracy. In this case, you need to make modifications to your model to get better results. Enter the percentage you want Mechanica to use to determine convergence for this analysis. This option is available only with the multi-pass adaptive convergence method. The default convergence value is 10%. For most analyses, you should enter a value from 1% to 25%. If you enter a convergence value outside this range, Mechanica asks you to confirm the value you entered.
Phase Type
The following options appear on the second option menu if you select the Phase quantity: of of of of of of Displacement Velocity Acceleration Rotation Rotational Velocity Rotational Acceleration
Plotting Grid
When you define an analysis, you specify the refinement of the plotting grid over which Mechanica reports displacement and stress results for static and modal analyses and temperature gradient, and flux results for steady-state thermal analyses. The value you specify determines the number of intervals along each edge of each element that Mechanica uses to create plotting grids. Mechanica calculates quantity values at the intersections of grid lines. Use the following strategies for specifying the plotting grid refinement: Enter a number from 2 to 10 to determine the level of detail Mechanica uses to report results of the analysis. The default plotting grid refinement of 4 is often adequate. But when you find from a previous run that stresses or fluxes vary rapidly over a single element, specify a higher refinement to more accurately capture the peak results. For a higher plotting grid refinement, the engine requires a greater amount of computation time and a significantly greater amount of disk space for its output files. In addition, viewing results is more time-consuming. Note: If you enter a higher number, the grid will be finer, and Mechanica reports values from more locations on each element. At lower numbers, Mechanica takes less time to calculate results, and the data takes up significantly less space. The default is 4. For models consisting primarily of beams, set the plotting grid refinement to 10 for the highest possible resolution. For these problems, the overhead of the finer plotting grid is negligible.
Mechanica reports precise results for each grid intersection point and interpolates these values to show results elsewhere.
1116
IndexAdditional Information
Plotting Grid
The value you specify determines the number of intervals along each edge or across each face that Mechanica uses to create plotting grids. Mechanica calculates quantity values at the intersections of grid lines. Enter a number from 2 to 10 to determine the level of detail Mechanica uses to report results of the analysis. If you enter a higher number, the grid will be finer, and Mechanica reports values from more locations on each element. At lower numbers, Mechanica takes less time to calculate results, and the data takes up significantly less space. The default is 4. Mechanica reports precise results for each grid intersection point and interpolates these values to show results elsewhere.
Point Loads, Point Constraints, Point Heat Loads, Point Prescribed Temperatures, Point Convection Conditions
Selecting these options enables AutoGEM to place small transitional elements around: point loads or constraints in your Structure model heat loads, prescribed temperatures, or convection conditions in your Thermal model
Any of these point-based modeling entities could distort the results in elements adjacent to the point by introducing singularitiesareas of theoretically infinite stress for Structure or infinite flux for Thermal. Thus, whenever possible, you should apply loads and constraints to curves and surfaces, not points. If you must apply the load, constraint, or boundary condition to a point instead of a curve or surface, you can use the check boxes in the Feature Isolation area on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box to mitigate the effects of the singularity on your results. This enables AutoGEM to create small transitional elements around the singularity, lessening the stress or flux concentration. To take advantage of feature isolation for point loads, constraints, and boundary conditions, you should create these entities on your geometry before using AutoGEM to mesh the model. As a general rule, you should keep these items selected for all models. For an example of how this feature works, see Example: Point Loads
1117
PointPoint Pairs
When you select PointPoint Pairs from the Reference option menu on the Beam Definition or Spring Definition dialog boxes, you can create multiple beams or springs on individual pairs of points. These beams or springs will all share the same definition. In contrast, if you select PointPoint, PointSurface, or PointEdge from the Reference option menu, the definition applies to only one spring or beam at a time. To create multiple beams or springs, you select PointPoint Pairs from the Reference option menu, click the selector arrow under the Reference option menu, and then select the beginning and end points of each beam or spring you want to create. You must select an even number of points and you can select the same point twice. All the settings you make on the dialog box will apply to all the beams or springs you create before you click the OK button. You can use the PointPoint Pairs option to create multiple continuous or individual beams or springs, all having the same definition. For example: You can create a continuous string of end-to-end beams or springs where the end of one beam or spring is at the same point as the beginning of the next. As shown on the left in the example below, you can create four continuous end-to-end beams or springs that have the same beginning and end point by clicking points 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, and 1, in that order. You can create multiple individual beams or springs by clicking the beginning and end points of each one. As shown on the right in the example below, you can create two individual beams or springs that do not touch each other by clicking points 1, 2, 3, and 4.
1118
IndexAdditional Information
Poisson's Ratio
Enter values for Poisson's Ratio, the ratio of lateral contraction to longitudinal extension for a bar in tension. You can define this property or you can assign a parameter to the property. Type in a value or click the P button as appropriate. For orthotropic material properties, enter values for: Nu21 Nu31 Nu32
For transversely isotropic material properties, enter values for: Nu21 = Nu31 Nu32
There are two widely used, but conflicting, definitions of Poisson's ratios for anisotropic materials. Mechanica uses the definition described by Tsai in Composite Design. For more information, see Tsai Definition for Poisson's Ratios. You can change the labels for Poisson's ratios on the orthotropic and transversely isotropic tabs of the Material Definitions dialog box. In the config.pro file, if the default for the sim_mat_poissons_notation is set to the default value, TSAI, the labels are Nu21, Nu31, and Nu32. When it is set to JONES, the labels are Nu12, Nu13, and Nu23, respectively.
1119
Polynomial Order
The values you specify for minimum and maximum polynomial orders determine the polynomial order Mechanica uses when analyzing your model. For each value, you can enter a number from 1 to 9. The default minimum is 1. The default maximum is 6. The engine begins with all element edges at the minimum polynomial order and repeats its calculations at increasingly higher polynomial orders for each edge until it reaches one of the following values: the maximum polynomial order that you specify here the convergence percentage. This happens when the results of the last two calculations are within the value you specified for Percent Convergence.
For more information on polynomial order, see: Guidelines for Entering Polynomial Order Strategy: Specifying Polynomial Order for a Multi-Pass Adaptive Analysis
1120
IndexAdditional Information
* derived unit For a description of each predefined system of units and its basic dimensions, see System of Units in Unit Conversion Tables. The Pro/ENGINEER default, inch poundmass second (inch lbm second), is not a standard system of units, and thus is not described in System of Units.
Predefined Units
You can combine predefined units with custom units to create a custom system of units. The following predefined units for length, mass, force, time, and temperature are available in Pro/ENGINEER:
Length cm ft in micron mil m Mass g kg lbm ounce-m mg slug Force dyne kg-f kip kN lbf N Time day hr micro-sec min msec sec Temperature C F K R
1121
mm
ton-m tonne
ounce-f ton
week
See Also
Procedure: To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Buckling Analysis
1122
IndexAdditional Information
Use Modes From Previous Design Study Select this option to use results from a previously run modal analysis in the dynamic analysis. If this option is not selected, Mechanica runs the modal analysis as part of the dynamic analysis. Design Study Select a design study to include in the dynamic analysis if you selected the option Use Modes From Previous Design Study. Modal Analysis Select a modal analysis to include in the dynamic analysis. Constraint Set Mechanica displays the constraint set for the selected modal analysis.
See Also
Procedure: To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Dynamic Analysis
See Also
Procedure: To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Fatigue Analysis
Load Set Select a load set to include in the prestress analysis. Load Scale Factor Enter a factor to multiply stress results from the previous static analysis for a prestress analysis. Combine Results With Results From Previous Static Analysis (available for prestress static analysis only) Select to combine results from a previous static analysis with results from a prestress static analysis.
See Also
Procedure: To Use Previous Analysis Results in a Prestress Analysis
IndexAdditional Information
The reason for this restriction lies with how Mechanica uses design parameters during a design study. When it performs a design study, Mechanica varies the value of the selected design parameters within the range you specified as you defined the design parameter and study. This, in turn, changes the value of the Pro/ENGINEER driving parameter. If you define the Pro/ENGINEER parameter as a variable instead of a constant, you can create situations where both Pro/ENGINEER and Mechanica try to change the parameter. The resulting conflicts would prove undesirable for the study. In creating the Pro/ENGINEER parameters that you plan to use as design parameters, take special care not to use these parameters in relations that would in any way restrict their movement in Mechanica. In other words, do not use these parameters on the left side of any relation equations. To learn more about using Pro/ENGINEER parameters as design parameters, see Design Parameters.
These detailed probes help you decide how well your model behaves as a whole, whether the model needs to be improved, and, if so, where the improvements should take place.
1125
Probing Graphs
After you initially evaluate your results and adjust your result windows for efficient viewing, you can examine your results more closely by probing specific aspects of the result window. You can study a segment of your graph to get a more exact impression of the values in that area. These detailed probes can help you get a more exact idea of how your model behaves at certain key points in the graph. For example, if you are working with the results of a dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis, you may want to segment the graph around some of the resonant peaks so that you can study the peaks in more detail, as shown below.
The result window on the left is a full graph of displacement in the Z direction for a dynamic frequency analysis. The result window on the right is a segmented version of the first graph, showing the details of the point values from 1.0 on the frequency scale, and capturing the displacement peak. Note that this example also segments the graph at 0.01 along the displacement measure scale to provide easier interpretation of the point values on the graph.
1126
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure: To Segment a Graph
1127
Prestress load is too high or exceeds the buckling load Decrease the prestress load and rerun the model.
Projected Vector
When you select Projected Vector from the Relative To option menu, Mechanica displays a second option menu with the following items: Vector Components Enter the values for the WCS X, Y, and Z components to define the vector to which the material orientation will be relative. Two Points Click the following buttons to define the vector to which the material orientation will be relative: o o From specifies the start point of the vector To specifies the end point of the vector
For more information on how Mechanica projects a vector onto a surface, see Example: Project a Vector onto a Surface.
IndexAdditional Information Simple For simple masses on points, enter a real-number value or click p to create or select a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. For simple masses on edges, curves, or surfaces, select one of these properties to define a simple mass: o Total Enter a real-number value for the mass, or click p to create or select a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. The distribution of the mass along the surface or curve depends upon the mesh nodes. Each node contributes to its neighboring nodes. The mass distribution is weighted by the contribution from adjacent nodes. For example, a node on a curve with two neighboring nodes will have twice the mass distribution as a node with only one neighbor. o Per Unit Length or Per Unit Area Enter a real-number value or click p to create or select a Pro/ENGINEER parameter. For a curve, the total mass is the product of the entered value times the length. For a surface, the total mass is the product of the entered value times the area. The mass distribution is weighted by the contribution from adjacent nodes. Advanced For advanced masses, select a coordinate system or accept the default WCS. You must also specify a mass property for advanced masses. The mass properties are relative to the selected coordinate system. You can use any mass property previously defined for your model, or you can click the More button to define new mass properties. Tip: You cannot locate an advanced mass on the Z axis of a cylindrical coordinate system, or on the = 0 axis of a spherical coordinate system. Component For component masses, select one of the parts or subassemblies on your assembly. The software uses the component's mass, moments of inertia, and center of gravity for the mass definition.
Property Type
Use these items in the Shell Property Definition dialog box to select the type of shell properties you want to define: Homogeneous, Laminate Stiffness, Laminate Layup Select whether you want to define a homogeneous, laminate stiffness, or laminate layup shell property. In the Thermal mode, Laminate Stiffness is unavailable. If your model is 2D, this menu does not appear. You can use either laminate stiffness or laminate layup if you want to model a shell that is comprised of layers, or plies. The laminate stiffness version of the dialog box depends on matrix terms that describe stiffness and bending components for the laminate. The laminate layup version of the dialog box requires material properties, thickness, and orientation for each ply of a laminate, and allows you to review the stiffness components calculated from the ply specification. The items on the remainder of the dialog box are different depending on which property you select. Click the following links for more information:
1129
For basic analyses, do not select velocity, acceleration, rotational velocity, rotational acceleration, phase, or time. These quantities apply to dynamic analyses only.
IndexAdditional Information
Displacement enables you to measure displacement for your model in terms of magnitude or component direction. Failure Index enables you to determine whether a material has failed because of an applied load. Force enables you to measure the spring force. Moment enables you to measure the spring moment. Velocity enables you to measure velocity in terms of magnitude or component direction. Acceleration enables you to measure acceleration in terms of magnitude or component direction. Rotation enables you to measure model rotation in terms of magnitude or component direction. Rotational Velocity enables you to measure rotational velocity in terms of magnitude or component direction. Rotational Acceleration enables you to measure rotational acceleration in terms of magnitude or component direction. Phase enables you to measure the phase for any of the following quantities: displacement, velocity, acceleration, rotation, rotational velocity, or rotational acceleration. Only dynamic frequency analyses calculate phase measures. Driven Pro Parameter enables you to tie a measure to a dependent Pro/ENGINEER parameter. For information on this quantity, see ParameterBased Measures. Time enables you to determine the time of first or last occurrence of a measure's value being greater or less than a specified value during a dynamic time analysis. Computed Measure enables you to define your own algebraic expression for the measure.
For dynamic analyses, do not select Reaction, Center of Mass, or Moment of Inertia. These quantities apply to basic analyses only. For information on how to use these quantities in basic analyses, see Quantity Basic Analyses.
Stress Strain Displacement Rotation Velocity Acceleration Rotational Velocity Rotational Acceleration Phase Failure Index
Fatigue Force Moment Moment of Inertia Center of Mass Time Driven Pro Parameter Contact Computed Measure
Temperature Temperature Gradient Heat Flux Time Driven Pro Parameter Computed Measure
See Also
Procedures: To Define Measures for Structural Analyses To Define Measures for Thermal Analyses References: Basic Analysis Measure Selections Measures for Dynamic Analyses Thermal Analysis Measure Selections
1132
IndexAdditional Information
Acceleration Beam Resultant Contact Pressure Displacement Failure Index Fatigue Flux Measure P-Level Reaction Reactions at Point Constraints Rotation Rotation Acceleration
Rotation Velocity Shear & Moment Shell Resultant Strain Strain Energy Stress Temp Gradient Temperature Velocity
Beam Resultant Displacement Flux Reaction Rotation Shear & Moment Shell Resultant Strain Strain Energy Stress Temp Gradient Temperature Thermal Strain Thermal Strain Energy
After you select a quantity from the Quantity option menu, additional selections appear that you can use to define the quantity. For information on how Mechanica handles quantities for modal and dynamic analyses, see Quantity Notes for Modal and Dynamic Analyses.
See Also
Procedure: To Specify a Result Window Quantity
1133
See Also
Procedure: To Query for Linearized Stress
1134
IndexAdditional Information
Radius
When you choose Near Point, Mechanica displays an entry box showing a default value of 5% of the model size. Use this entry box to type in another radius value if desired. The radius you specify is three-dimensional rather than planar. Thus, the portion of the model considered depends on the model's contours. For more information, see Near Point Measures. You use the Point(s) selector arrow to select the application area for the measure.
Secondary quantity option menu Select a secondary quantity option. For FEM mode, Force is the only secondary quantity and, therefore, the secondary quantity option menu displays this item only. Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display.
For more information about the Reaction quantity, see Reaction Results Reporting.
See Also
Procedure: To Define a Reactions at Point Constraints Quantity
1136
IndexAdditional Information
1137
Rectangle
The icon for a rectangular beam section type looks like this:
When you select Rectangle as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: b d
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for rectangular beam section types. The figure on the left shows the points in native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points in FEM mode.
1138
IndexAdditional Information
Redistribute Levels
If you enter a minimum value greater than the level above it, or a maximum value less than the level below it, Mechanica prompts: Do you want to redistribute levels linearly from first to last <y>? To keep the new minimum or maximum value, you must enter y. Mechanica cannot use the new value without redistributing levels.
Reentrant Corners
This option enables AutoGEM to detect reentrant (for example, inside) corners on an individual surface in your model and place a transitional set of small elements around them. A reentrant corner can be an area of high stress or flux concentration. Placing small elements around reentrant corners helps prevent these stress or flux concentrations near the local feature from degrading the efficiency of the analysis process in larger neighboring elements. For an example of how this AutoGEM feature works, see Example: Reentrant Corners. AutoGEM does not detect reentrant corners that span more than one surface. AutoGEM also does not detect reentrant corners on volumes. This item appears on both the Structure and Thermal versions of the dialog box, and works the same way in either mode.
1139
Refit
Select the Refit command or click the Refit button on the toolbar to refit the model to the screen so that you can see the entire model. A refitted model uses 80 percent of the screen. You can also refit the model by clicking Refit on the Orientation dialog box
1140
IndexAdditional Information
Relabel Contour
Use this command to change the number of lettered labels that appear on the contour plot. The command is Utilities>Relabel Contour. You specify label density on the Result Window Definition dialog box. Labels are only visible for the contour plot if you select the Labels toggle on the Format Result Window dialog box When you define the result window, you set the initial state of labels. See Contour Results Display for information. When you select the Relabel Contour or Relabel command, Mechanica prompts you to enter a new value for label density. The density is an integer from 1 to 10. Use lower numbers to get more labels.
Relative To
When you select a directional component for a quantity, you can choose the reference direction of the component from the Relative To option menu. The reference options available on the Relative To menu vary depending on the quantity. Use the Relative To menu to display results relative to: a coordinate system the material orientation the ply orientation the beam orientation
Entities you must add before using AutoGEM You must add idealizations, connections, and simulation features that you want to use as a basis for another modeling entityfor example, a datum point that will be used to apply a measurebefore running AutoGEM. Additionally, if your model includes point loads, constraints, or boundary conditions, you must add them as well. All of these modeling entities influence the mesh. If you do not add them before using AutoGEM, the mesh will not correctly account for these entities.
While it may not be absolutely necessary in all cases, we strongly recommend that you also define all properties before running AutoGEM. Defining properties before you run AutoGEM enables you to use the All With Properties option in the AutoGEM References area of the AutoGEM dialog box.
Entities you can add before or after using AutoGEM Provided all reference simulation features and geometry are in place before you run AutoGEM, you can add loads, constraints, and boundary conditions before or after using AutoGEM. These entities must use curves, surfaces, or components as references; they should not use points. Also, you can add measures before or after you run AutoGEM. While Mechanica correctly accounts for modeling entities that you add to geometry after you run AutoGEM, it is a good practice to add all modeling entities prior to meshing the model.
Modal Combination Method Select the method the engine uses to combine modes when calculating results:
IndexAdditional Information
o o
SRSS the square root of the sum of the squares Absolute Sum the sum of the absolute values of the contributions of each mode
See Also
Procedure: To Define the Response Spectrum for a Dynamic Shock Analysis
For dynamic time analysis, you can specify a time range over which you want Mechanica to report results by entering a minimum time and maximum time. For dynamic frequency and dynamic random analyses, you can specify a frequency range by entering minimum and maximum frequencies.
If you select User-defined Output Intervals, the following options appear: Number of Master Intervals Enter the number of master intervals at which you want Mechanica to report results. You can specify up to 999 intervals. A row is added to the table for each interval. In general, computation time increases with the number of intervals. Full Results For dynamic time and dynamic frequency analyses only, select the check boxes next to the intervals for which you want to save full results. User-defined Steps Click this button to enter values for spacing the steps. Space Equally Enters evenly spaced values for the steps. This button is only available when you click User-defined Steps. (Select All) Click this button if you want full results for all intervals. (Deselect All) Click this button if you do not want full results for all intervals. Measures Output Intervals per Master Interval Enter a positive number up to 999. In general, computation time increases with the number of measures output intervals.
1144
IndexAdditional Information
Mechanica saves the coordinate system you select when you save a result window definition.
1145
1146
IndexAdditional Information
This figure shows the actual results when the two parts are modeled as solids resulting in no slippage along the common surface.
This figure shows what happens when you use midsurface compression with automatic midsurface connections. Mechanica displaces the assembly about four times further than it does for solid parts.
If the difference between the actual displacement and the displacement reported by Mechanica is beyond an acceptable tolerance, consider one of these alternatives: In situations where the difference is unacceptable for the entire model, we suggest that you model your assembly as a solid. In situations where the difference is only unacceptable for certain mated components, you can create welds, fasteners, or rigid connections to model the behavior in these areas. Alternatively, you can use beams to stiffen the model and, thus, correct the behavior.
1147
Structural and Thermal Simulation - Help Topic Collection Beam Section "Name" The summary displays the name you specified when you defined the beam section. If you have assigned the beam section to a beam on your model, when you click this link the beam highlights in the model window. Description The summary displays the optional description you included with the section definition. Type The summary displays the beam section type, such as square, channel, or sketched. In addition, for standard section types, the summary displays a figure that illustrates the section dimensions. Feature Type For sketched sections, this entry is either thick or thin. Orientation For sketched sections, the summary explains how the coordinate axes in the sketch relate to those in the beam shape coordinate system. Dimension(s) The summary displays the dimensions you entered when defining a standard section. Area The summary displays the area computed for the beam section based upon the specified dimensions. For general sections this is the entered value. Iyy, Izz, Iyz The summary displays the values for Iyy and Izz about the centroid with respect to both the beam centroidal principal (BCPCS) and beam shape (BSCS) coordinate systems. It also includes Iyz in terms of the BSCS. J The summary displays the effective second polar moment of area about the centroid for the beam section. Shear Area Factor The summary displays the values you specified for Fy and Fz with respect to the BCPCS. For channel, L, and sketched sections, it also lists the values with respect to the BSCS. Shear Center The summary displays values for Dy and Dz with respect to the BCPCS. For those sections in which the BSCS is not coincident with the BCPCS, the summary also lists values for Dy and Dz with respect to the BSCS. Centroid The summary displays the computed Y and Z coordinates specifying the location of the origin of the BCPCS system relative to the BSCS. Rotation of Principal Axis The summary displays the computed value for the rotation of the BCPCS around the beam X axis relative to the BSCS. The value is typically non-zero only for sketched sections and L-beams. Stress Computation Offsets The summary displays the maximum positive values of the Y and Z offsets for the beam stress recovery points. Grid Points For all sections, the summary displays the Y and Z coordinates of the stress recovery points with respect to the BCPCS. In addition, for standard section types, the summary displays a figure that relates the labels for the stress recovery points to the beam section shape. Note that in FEM mode there is a maximum of four stress recovery points.
FEM mode Structure or Thermal: Warp Coefficient Non-Structural Mass per Unit Length Non-Structural Mass Moment per Unit Length Coordinates of Non-Structural Mass Center of Gravity The summary displays the Y and Z coordinates with respect to the beam shape coordinate system.
1148
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
References: Beam Shape Coordinate System Beam Centroidal Principal Coordinate System
Review Layup
Opens the Laminate Layup Review dialog box, which displays all the individual plies of the laminate, with the sub-laminates expanded into individual plies. Mechanica substitutes all the current parameter values and provides the total thickness at the bottom. You can save the information on the Laminate Layup Review dialog box in a text file. Select the File>Save command at the top of the dialog box. In the Save As dialog box, select a directory to save the file. The default is the current working directory. Accept the default name, shellpropname_layup.inf, or enter another name.
Review Stiffness
Opens the Laminate Stiffness Review dialog box. You can save the information on the Laminate Stiffness Review dialog box in a text file. Select the File>Save command at the top of the dialog box. In the Save As dialog box, select a directory to save the file. The default is the current working directory. Accept the default name, shellpropname_stiffness.inf, or enter another name. You cannot change the information in any of the fields on the Laminate Stiffness Review dialog box. However, you can select the text in a field and copy it to a clipboard to paste into another application. For example, you can copy the text from one of the fields on this dialog box and then close the box. Create a new laminate 1149
stiffness shell property, then click in the field where you want to add the copied information. Right-click and select Paste to add the information from the Laminate Stiffness Review dialog box.
For more information about the terms on this dialog box, see Laminate Stiffness.
Reviewing Analyses
When you select Analyses from the REVIEW MESH menu, Mechanica displays a sequence of menus that let you specify the analysis, load and constraint names, and load and constraint locations for the mesh information you want to see. The first menu Mechanica displays is the SEL ANALYSN menu. This menu includes a list of the analyses that you defined for the mesh. After you select an analysis, Mechanica displays the LOADS BC menu. This menu lists all of the load and constraint types you defined for the load sets and constraint sets in the analysis you selected. You use this menu to select a single load or constraint type or select all of them. Be aware that a given load type may include multiple loads of a similar category, and the same holds true for constraint types. After you select a load or constraint type, Mechanica displays the CONS PLACE menu, which enables you to select the entity you want to examine. The selections on this menu vary depending on whether you applied the load or constraint to elements or nodes. Here is a list of the possible selections: All Display all nodes and elements associated with the loads and constraints. This item only appears if you select Display All on the LOADS BC menu. All Elements Display all elements associated with the load or constraint type. This item only appears if you select a load or constraint type applied to surfaces. Element Id Display the associated load and constraint on the specified element Id.
1150
IndexAdditional Information
All Nodes Display all elements associated with the load or constraint. This item only appears if you select a load or constraint applied to points or curves. Node Id Display the associated load and constraint on the specified node Id. Select Display the associated load or constraint on the selected elements or nodes.
You cannot edit the information in this box. If you need more details on the definition, use Edit>Result Window to see the original version of the Result Window Definition dialog box. Edit>Result Window Review and change the result window definition through the Result Window Definition dialog box. This command does not enable you to change analyses, mode number, or load combination. To change these items, use Edit>Change. If no result window is currently selected, the Selection dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to select an existing result window. You can also copy and delete result windows.
See Also
Procedure: To Edit a Result Window
1151
Reviewing Connectivity
Use the Review>Connectivity command to find: places where shell surfaces that should attach to one another are not connected. places where one or more nodes on a one-dimensional element do not correctly connect with the mesh. This type of review proves very useful for complex models with numerous connections. For example, if you were working with a beam model with a large number of interconnected beams or multiple beams connecting at a single point, a connectivity review would show you beams that are not fully connected to adjoining beams.
When you select the Connectivity command, Mechanica displays the CONNECTIVITY menu, from which you select: Boundary Edges Highlight edges that are only associated with one shell surface. Boundary Nodes Highlight nodes at the boundary ends of beams, springs, gaps, and other one-dimensional elements. A boundary end of a onedimensional element is a node associated only with the one-dimensional element, itself, and not with any other mesh component.
1152
IndexAdditional Information
the displacement to verify that the model is deforming the way you expect it to. Change the scale factor to make the deformed shape look more reasonable, if necessary. To examine the magnitude of the displacements, define another result window using a display type of Fringe or Vectors with the same quantity and location. Stress To create a result display for static analyses that shows the distribution and magnitude of stresses, select Fringe as the display type, Max Principal, von Mises, or Beam Total as the component, and All as the location. You can determine whether the distribution and magnitude of stress look reasonable. Locations where the stresses differ greatly across element boundaries are areas where altering the mesh can facilitate convergence. Temperature To create a result display that shows temperature distribution for thermal analyses, select Fringe as the display type, Temperature as the quantity, and All as the location. Then select Contour from the Common Settings section of the Display Options tab. You can determine whether the temperature distribution looks reasonable. Flux To create a flux distribution and magnitude result display for thermal analyses, select Fringe or Vectors as the display type, Flux as the quantity, Magnitude as the component, and All as the location. You can determine whether the distribution and magnitude of flux look reasonable.
The degrees of freedom icon changes orientation depending on the coordinate system you select for the dependent side of the rigid link. However, if you do not check the Override Coordinate System box on the Rigid Link Definition dialog box and do not select a new coordinate system for the dependent side, Mechanica displays the legs of the triad parallel to the axes of the default WCS. This may not be correct if you have previously assigned a different displacement coordinate system to the same node.
1153
RMS
Mechanica calculates the RMS (root mean square) value of the measure over the frequency range. This option is available for certain quantities if you selected At Point for Spatial Evaluation and base the measure on one of the directional components. Mechanica only calculates measures that use the RMS dynamic evaluation method for dynamic random analyses.
Rotate About
This button lets you specify additional rotations about one or more material directions, depending on the model type. These rotation angles enable you to modify the orientation of the material directions from those you specified higher on the dialog box. When you select this check box, additional items appear on your dialog box, depending on the model type and the type of material orientation you have selected: Surfaces, Shells, 2D Plates, and 2D Solids Enter an angle from 360 to +360 in the Material Direction Normal To Surface text box or the defined normal material direction. Mechanica rotates the material orientation about the orientation normal to the surface or shell. For an example of this kind of rotation, see Example: Rotation for Shells and Surfaces. Parts, Volumes, Solids Enter angles from 360 to +360 in the Material Direction text boxes for one or more of the material directions. Rotations are understood in order about the 1, 2, then 3 material directions.
FEM mode does not allow you to have additional rotations. For information about how Mechanica rotates the material coordinate system, see Order of Rotation.
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Rotation Acceleration from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the item is part of the design study you choose. The possible selections include: Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
1155
Creating constraints that eliminate all rotational degrees of freedom in the fastened components, adding more fasteners, or other means Allowing Mechanica to automatically prevent rotation when you create advanced fasteners
If you do not prevent rotation using one of these methods, the model will be underconstrained. In this case, one or both components will spin and the solver will fail. Note that, for simple fasteners, Mechanica does not provide any automatic mechanism for preventing rotation as part of the fastener definition. Therefore, you need to add constraints or create one or more additional, appropriatelylocated fasteners.
For FEM mode, the Rotation quantity is available for all models, but only returns nonzero results for beam and shell models. When you select Rotation from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the item is part of the design study you choose. The possible selections include: Amplitude Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to display rotation in terms of amplitude. This button is available for FEM mode dynamic analyses only. Phase Use this option button to indicate that you want Mechanica to display rotation in terms of phase. This button is available for FEM mode dynamic analyses only. Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
Mechanica reports rotation in radians (1 radian = 57.29578 ) and displays the SRSS of the rotation components you select.
1156
IndexAdditional Information
The Rotation Velocity quantity is not available in FEM mode. When you select Rotation Velocity from the Quantity option menu, Mechanica may alter the selections on the Quantity tab. Some selections do not appear unless the item is part of the design study you choose. The possible selections include: Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
Mechanica reports rotation velocity in radians per unit of time and displays the square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) of the rotation components you select.
%ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 3 1 5 4 %ELEM_TYPE 1 FACE : 4 1 2 3 %END_SECT %START_SECT %NODE 1 DEF %NODE 2 DEF %NODE 3 DEF %NODE 4 DEF %NODE 5 DEF %NODE 6 DEF %NODE 7 DEF %NODE 8 DEF %ELEM 1 DEF %ELEM 2 DEF %ELEM 3 DEF %ELEM 4 DEF %ELEM 5 DEF %ELEM 6 DEF %END_SECT : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : MESH -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 0.5 -0.5 0.5 -0.5 -0.5 1 1 * 1 4 7 5 1 1 * 2 5 6 3 1 1 * 2 5 1 6 1 1 * 6 1 7 5 1 1 * 2 4 1 5 1 1 * 1 8 7 4
%START_SECT : LOADS %LOAD_TYPE 1 DEF : TEMPERATURE NODE SCALAR %CON_CASE 1 DEF : TestData1 %LOAD 1 DEF : 1 1 %LOAD 1 VAL : 1 0 %LOAD 1 VAL : 2 0.15 %LOAD 1 VAL : 3 0.75 %LOAD 1 VAL : 4 0.4 %LOAD 1 VAL : 5 1 %LOAD 1 VAL : 6 0.6 %LOAD 1 VAL : 7 0.85 %LOAD 1 VAL : 8 0.25 %END_SECT %START_SECT : ANALYSIS %SOLUTION 1 DEF : THERMAL %SOLUTION 1 CON_CASES : 1 %END_SECT %END
IndexAdditional Information
# Design Study Name " study2 " $MECH_HOME/bin/msengine study2 -i ./ -w ./ -bsram 2 -elram 2
See Also
Reference: msengine
Prestress Static
pretension cable
ski lift
Prestress Modal
rotating machinery
turbine blade
Buckling
bulkheads
Saved Views
Use the View>Saved Views menu option or the Saved Views button on the toolbar to change the orientation of your model to a saved view or to save the current view. When you select the View>Saved Views menu option, the Saved Views dialog box appears with the following options: Saved view list Lists the views you save in Pro/ENGINEER or results. Set Repositions your model to the orientation of the saved view that you select from the list. Save Saves the current orientation of your model. To save the view, type a name that is 31 characters or less in the text box and select Save. The view appears on the Saved Views list.
When you select the Saved Views button on the toolbar, an alphabetical list of saved views appears. Select a view from the list to reorient your model in the result window.
1159
Search Tool
Use the Edit>Find command to access the search tool that allows you to search for simulation entities in a model. When you select the Edit>Find command, the Search Tool dialog box appears. This dialog box includes four tabsAttributes, History, Status, and Geometry. Mechanica uses only specific rules on the Attributes and Status tabs to perform the search for simulation entities. The search tool allows you to specify the search criteria based on the type of the model. The supported types of models are 2D, 3D, Structure, and Thermal in native and FEM modes. Additionally, the search tool allows you to define rules to build and save queries. You save the search queries by defining a new layer in the model. Defining a layer while saving a query allows you to group certain simulation entities on a layer. Use the Search Tool dialog box to: Specify rule classes to search by name, type, property, or layer of the simulation entities. Specify search criteria by defining the comparison, category or value of the simulation entities. Define a layer to organize simulation entities. Build a query by defining rules and operations for the query. Save a query based on the defined rules.
In Mechanica, you can search for the following objects in a model: Structural loads Thermal loads Structural constraints Thermal boundary conditions Idealizations Connections Simulation measures Material assignments AutoGEM Controls FEM mesh controls
After you apply the rules and specify the search criteria, Mechanica highlights and displays the search results.
1160
IndexAdditional Information
Select Include submodels if you want to search for simulation entities in the submodels of the assembly. In Mechanica, you use two tabsAttributes and Statusto examine the simulation entities in your model. The Attributes tab enables you to search for classes of simulation entities, and the Status tab lets you search for simulation objects on the layers you have created in your model. The Attributes tab on the Search Tool dialog box allows you to define the rule for Mechanica to use when searching for simulation entities in the model you have selected. You can search by selecting a rule class from Name, Type, or Property. Depending on the rule class you select, the fields in the Criteria area of the dialog box change. Name Search for simulation entities by Name. Specify the search criteria by selecting the required Comparison operation from the available list. Select or enter the required value or manually type the name for the simulation entity in the Value list. Based on the model you have selected, the fields in the Value list are populated at runtime. Mechanica searches the model for simulation entities that match the values specified in the Comparison and Value fields.
For example, you have selected "is equal to" as the comparison operation and the value specified is BEAM1, Mechanica searches for entities that have the name BEAM1 and displays the search results in the items found: window. Additionally, Mechanica highlights these items in the Model Tree. Type Search for simulation entities by Type. Specify the search criteria by selecting the required Comparison operation, the Category type the entity belongs to, and the Value of the entity from the lists, respectively. Property Search for simulation entities by Property. Specify the search criteria by selecting the required Property type and Comparison operation. Select or manually enter the value for the entity in the Value field. For the entity value, you can type an alphabetic character followed by a wild card. For example, B*. The wild card is represented by a *. You use the Status tab to examine the contents of a layer that you have defined for your model. When you are working in Mechanica, the Status tab has only one active option button, Layer. The Layer option button lists all the layers available in the model. Layer is a rule that allows you to search for simulation entities in any of the layers in your model by selecting the operation from the Comparison field and the desired layer from the Value field. The Value list contains all layers in your model regardless of the method you used to create the layerthe Layer tool or the Search Tool query builderor whether you created these layers in Pro/ENGINEER or in Mechanica. Select Add New option to include the new layer in the Query Builder. You can also use the Options button in the Search Tool dialog box to search for simulation entities in the model you have selected by building a query, saving the 1161
query, highlighting and displaying selected items, and displaying the filtered selections. Use the Find Now option in the Search Tool dialog box to display a list of simulation objects that the filter finds and, in case of only one matching object, highlights the object. In case of more than one object, you can select an object, and Mechanica highlights that object. You can view the search results in the items found: window. Use the New Search option to start a new search by defining rules, operations, and criteria for the new search operation.
The components that appear on the Quantity tab change depending on whether you select Force, Moment, or Transverse Shear Force. For more information, see the component topics for Beam Resultant, Shell Resultant, Reaction, or Reactions at Point Constraints.
Segmenting a Graph
When your graph has too many points and looks crowded, you can segment it to display a specific section of interest. Segmenting a graph is especially useful for dynamic time, frequency, or random response analysis results, which may contain 100 or more points in Structure. You can use one of the following methods to segment your graph: Zoom In Use the View>Zoom In command on the graph results window to get a close-up view of a specific graph segment you select. Change the Axis Range Reset minimum and maximum values for the graph range to define a segment you want to display. The x minimum should display the x coordinate that is at the left edge of the graph segment, the x maximum at the right edge, the y maximum at the top edge, and the y minimum at the bottom edge. Mechanica then redraws the graph to show the specified segment.
After you finish studying a particular graph segment, you can restore a graph to its original, unsegmented state. Use the View>Refit command. After you select the 1162
IndexAdditional Information
command, Mechanica automatically redraws the complete graph in the current window.
If you want to try the iterative solver, you should monitor how much time and disk space your models take to run with each type of solver. In this way, you can determine which solver is best for which type of model. Note: For jobs running the direct solver, an elapsed time/CPU time ratio much greater than 4 may indicate a problem. For jobs running the iterative solver, a ratio much greater than 7 may indicate a problem. The iterative solver generally has a higher ratio of elapsed to CPU time because it does more I/O per calculation than the direct solver.
dialog box. Use the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to access the summary file.
o design parameters based on Pro/ENGINEER parameters o limits for measures in an optimization design study Interpret Existing Numbers (Same Dims) Select this option if your model has correct values but an undesired system of units. Pro/ENGINEER does not convert existing Pro/ENGINEER or Mechanica data to the new system of units. Pro/ENGINEER changes the physical size of your model but not your model's dimensional values.
When you click OK in the Warning message box, Pro/ENGINEER sets the selected system of units as the principal system of units for your model.
See Also
1164
IndexAdditional Information
Procedure:
The values for these properties are relevant for non-doubly-symmetric beam sections (those that are not symmetrical about two normal axes). For many standard beam sections types such as square and rectangle, the shear center and the beam centroid are the same. For channel, thin sketched, and L-sections, Mechanica calculates these values automatically. For general and solid sketched beam sections, you need to calculate the values yourself and specify them on the dialog box. You can load a beam directly through its shear center, eliminating torsion from the element's behavior, by aligning the section to the assigning curve. To do this, you can use the Beam Orientation functionality to apply beam offsets. You can view the offset distances to enter for beam orientation when you review beam section properties. Note that the values given on this review for Shear Center are reported with respect to the BCPCS. Alternatively, you can select the Shear Center option on the Beam Orientation Definition dialog box and leave the offset values set to zero.
Shear Modulus
Enter positive values for the shear moduli of the material. You can define this property or you can assign a parameter to the property. Type in a value or click the P button as appropriate. For orthotropic material properties, enter values for: G12 G13 G23
These values represent the shear modulus in each of the three material directions.
1166
IndexAdditional Information
For transversely isotropic material properties, enter a value for the shear modulus of the material in two of the three principal planes of the material for the model. The dialog box shows the following shear modulus values: G12 = G13 G23 = E2/(2 X (1 + Nu32))
Enter a single positive value for the 21 and 31 planes. Structure automatically calculates the value for the 32 plane, using the equation shown on the dialog box. Note: For both orthotropic and transversely isotropic, G21 is also denoted as G12, G31 as G13, and G32 as G23.
Shear Strength
For all transversely isotropic failure criteria, if you enter a value for this quantity keep the following in mind: Ss must be positive. You must also enter values for ultimate tensile strength and ultimate compressive strength.
Each field that has dimension can have its own units and Mechanica scales the values entered when you change the units.
Shell Contribution
Use the Include Contribution From Shells area of the Quantity tab to select the shell contributions you want to use for the result window. This area does not appear on the dialog box unless there are shells in the model and they were part of the design study. Note: The discussion below pertains to all quantities that allow specific measurement of shell behavior except for Strain Energy. The options in the Include Contribution From Shells area determine the values used for plotting the result display. All of the check boxes are selected by default. The selections in the Include Contribution From Shells area are as follows: Membrane Include membrane values for shells in the result display. Bending Include bending values for shells in the result display. Transverse Shear Include transverse shear for shells in the result display.
There are two option menus below the check boxes. These are the possible options available on the first option menu, and they determine the options available on the second menu:
1167
Maximum Display the maximum value of the shell top or bottom at a given plotting-grid point for shells and 2D shells. Maximum is the default option for stress. Minimum Display minimum value of the shell top or bottom at a given plotting-grid point for shells and 2D shells. For stress, this option appears only with Min Principal. Top Select this item to use the value of the shell top. The top of a shell or 2D shell is in the normal direction. Bottom Select this item to use the value of the shell bottom. The bottom of a shell or 2D shell is opposite the normal direction. Top and Bottom Select this item to display the values of the shell top and bottom simultaneously on the shell, with the top values at the top, and the bottom values at the bottom.
1168
IndexAdditional Information
Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. This item is available only when you select X, Y or Z from the Component option menu.
Shell Side
If your model's mesh comprises shell elements, you can generate analysis statistics, hard point reports, and parameters based on a specific area: Top Generate analysis statistics, reports, or parameters based on the top side of the shell elements. Bottom Generate analysis statistics, reports, or parameters based on the bottom side of the shell elements. Average Generate analysis statistics, reports, or parameters based on the average value of the top and bottom sides of the shell elements. Both Generate analysis statistics, reports, or parameters based on both the top and bottom sides of the shell elements.
Shell Thickness
The properties of a shell are determined by thickness, material, and shape. The following points are true for shell thickness: Your model must have either a constant or multiconstant thickness. In FEM mode, it can also have a variable thickness. The thickness of a body you model with one or more entities should be significantly smaller than the length of any of the body's other dimensions and radii of curvature. As a guideline, the ratio of the body's thickness to its other dimensions should not be greater than 1 to 10 and no less than 1 to 1000. For shells, the thickness times the maximum curvature cannot be more than 1.5.
In this illustration, the face of the entity that appears in the work area is the midsurface of the entity. For example, if you assign a thickness of 1 to a shell, the element actually has a thickness of 0.5 in each direction.
1169
1170
IndexAdditional Information
Simulation Model
Use the Info>Simulation Model command to view information about your model in Mechanica. When you select this command, an information window appears with your model's name and model type, as well as summaries of the materials, idealizations, connections, loads, and constraints in your model. For example, here is an information window entry for a spring:
Spring "Spring1"
Reference: Feature of Points (Model COMPONENT_NAME) Edge Type: Advanced Y direction: Cartesian CSYS "WCS" Spring Property "SpringProp1" You can edit and save the information window text as a .inf file. Use the following commands on the information window toolbar to manipulate the information: File o o o Edit o
Save Saves the file as model_name.inf. Save As The Save A Copy dialog box appears. Enter a name for the file and browse to find a directory. Close Closes the dialog box. Edit Mode Activates the commands Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete Line. Use these commands to edit the text. To insert text, move the red mark to the desired location and enter text. Cut Removes the selected text. Use the cursor to highlight text, and click this command. Copy Moves the selected text to a buffer. Use the cursor to highlight text, and click this command. Paste Adds copied text from the buffer to the cursor location. Delete Line Removes the line of text at the cursor location. Search Opens the Search dialog box. Enter a search term and click Search. The software highlights any instances of the search term it finds in the information window.
o o o o o
View o Line Number Turn on or off the display of line numbers. This command is not active in edit mode.
You can also display the information window by using the shortcut menu in the Model Tree.
1171
Singularities
Mechanica Structure is based on the theory of linear elasticity, which is a useful approximation of physical reality. Linear elasticity allows solutions that have infinite values of displacement or stress. These solutions with infinite values are called singular elastic states and the locations where they occur are called singularities. At the location of a singularity and in the small area around the singularity, the theoretical elasticity solution is not a valid representation of physical reality because displacement and stress cannot be infinite. Outside the area of the singularity, the theoretical elasticity solution is valid. Structure attempts to represent the singular representation as accurately as possible using polynomial functions.
1172
IndexAdditional Information
Singularities cause edges in a model to require a high p-level for convergence, thus resulting in a longer solution time. Some of the most common locations where element singularities can occur include: at reentrant corners at point loads and constraints along line loads and constraints on solids at the interface between elements of different properties, materials, or element types
To understand the causes of singularities, see Singularities and Loads or Singularities and Constraints.
See Also
Strategy: Minimizing Singularities
Solid ok
ok
ok
1
This information also applies to temperatures and fluxes that result from heat loads, convection conditions, and prescribed temperatures in Thermal.
1173
1. Timoshenko and Goodier, Theory of Elasticity, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill Book Co. Section 36: Concentrated Force at a Point of a Straight Boundary. 2. Timoshenko and Goodier, Theory of Elasticity, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill Book Co. Section 138: Force on Boundary of a Semi-infinite Body.
This information also applies to temperatures and fluxes that result from heat loads, convection conditions, and prescribed temperatures in Thermal.
Solid Circle
The icon for a solid circle beam section type looks like this:
When you select Solid Circle as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter the radius of the circular beam cross section in the R text-entry box. The value you enter must be a positive number. The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for solid circle beam section types. The figure on the left shows the points for native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for FEM mode.
1174
IndexAdditional Information
Solid Ellipse
The icon for a solid ellipse beam section type looks like this:
When you select Solid Ellipse as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter positive values for the following cross-section dimensions: a b
The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for solid ellipse section types. The figure on the left shows the points for the native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for the FEM mode.
1175
Solids
This option enables AutoGEM to create different types of solids after you select one of the following options: Tetra Creates a purely tetrahedral mesh. This option is ideal for irregular, chunky models where none of the other solid element types would be appropriate. Wedge, Tetra Creates a mesh that may include tetrahedra, wedges, or both, based on model geometry. Use this option for models that are at least partially composed of thin sections (2.5D) with opposing surfaces. AutoGEM selects the element type that works best in each area of your model, and finds the most efficient mesh for the geometry. The result will be that the thin areas of the model will contain wedges and the thick areas will contain tetrahedra. If you use this option instead of the Tetra option, your element count may be significantly lower and your solution times, faster. Brick, Wedge, Tetra Creates a mesh that may include tetrahedra, wedges, bricks, or any combination of these element types, based on model geometry. Use this option for models that are at least partially composed of thin sections (2.5D) with opposing surfaces. AutoGEM selects the element type that works best in each area of your model, and finds the most efficient mesh for the geometry. The result will be that the thin areas of the model will contain wedges or bricks and the thick areas will contain tetrahedra. If you use this option instead of the Tetra or Wedge, Tetra options, you may be able to minimize the number of elements in your model and achieve faster solution times.
1176
IndexAdditional Information
In FEM mode, you can perform online runs with the NASTRAN and ANSYS solvers from within Mechanica, or run either of these solvers in the background. FEM mode also enables you to output NASTRAN or ANSYS decks for use outside Mechanica or output the model as a neutral file. Reviewing results After you run your analyses, you can import the solved model into Mechanica's postprocessor and review the results. You can examine such graphical renditions of model behavior as fringe plots, animations, and graphs, define FEA parameters for your results, review analysis statistics, and look at results information at particular points in your model.
See Also
References: About Running FEM Analyses and Generating Output Decks Developing a Model (FEM Mode) Defining an Analysis (FEM Mode) Creating a Mesh (FEM Mode)
For the options Maximum, Minimum, and Maximum Abs, a second option menu appears. For the At Point option, this menu appears as an advanced option only if you selected Stress, Strain, Failure Index, or Fatigue as your quantity. The menu contains the following items:
1177
Over Model Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute value over the entire model. This option is not available if you selected At Point. Near Point Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute value over the plotting grid points you select within the specified radius. This option is not available if you selected At Point. Over Selected Idealizations Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the idealizations you select. Over Selected Components Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the assembly components you select. Over Selected Layers Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the entities in the selected layers. Over Selected Geometry Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the geometric entities you select.
For the options Maximum, Minimum, and Maximum Abs, a second option menu appears. For the At Point option, this menu appears as an advanced option only if you selected Temperature Gradient or Heat Flux as your quantity. The menu contains the following items: Over Model Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute value over the entire model. Near Point Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute value over the plotting grid points you select
1178
IndexAdditional Information
within the specified radius. This option is not available if you selected At Point. Over Selected Idealizations Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the idealizations you select. Over Selected Components Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the assembly's component you select. Over Selected Layers Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the layers you select. Over Selected Geometry Specifies that Mechanica evaluates the quantity's maximum, minimum, maximum absolute, or at point value over the geometric entities you select.
Minimum Depending on your selection in the second menu, Mechanica can treat the measure as a global or local measure, searching the entire model or its selected area for the quantity's minimum value. This value is the least positive value, regardless of the magnitude of the value.
This option is inactive if you select Max Principal or Max Abs Principal for a Stress or Strain quantity.
Maximum Abs Depending on your selection in the second menu, Mechanica can treat the measure as a global or local measure, searching the 1179
entire model or its selected area for the quantity's maximum absolute value. This value is the largest value, regardless of the sign of the value. For example, if the model stress ranged from 10 to 25 ksi, the value would be 25 ksi.
This option is inactive if you select Max Principal or Min Principal as the component for a Stress or Strain quantity. This option is also inactive if you select Magnitude as the component for one of the other quantities.
Maximum Mechanica searches the entire model or the specified area of the model for the quantity's maximum value. This value is the most positive value, regardless of the magnitude of the value. For example, if the model temperature ranged from 10 to 25 , the maximum would be 10 . Minimum Mechanica searches the entire model or the specified area of the model for the quantity's minimum value. This value is the least positive value, regardless of the magnitude of the value. Maximum Abs Mechanica searches the entire model or the specified area of the model for the quantity's maximum absolute value. This value is the largest value, regardless of the sign of the value. For example, if the model temperature ranged from 10 to 25 , the maximum absolute value would be 25 . This option appears only if you select Temperature as the quantity. Range Mechanica calculates the difference between the maximum and the minimum temperatures in the model or the specified area of the model. This option appears only if you select Temperature as the quantity.
1180
IndexAdditional Information
Spherical UCS
When you create a spherical user defined coordinate system, you specify the coordinates, which include the origin, the direction of the T = 0 (theta = 0) axis, and the direction of the P = 0 (phi = 0) axis. Mechanica creates the coordinate system as follows: Uses the origin and the T = 0 axis location to define the T = 0 axis. Makes the P = 0 axis perpendicular to the T = 0 axis and in the plane defined by the origin, the T = 0 axis location, and the P = 0 axis location. If you specified a P = 0 axis location that is not on a line perpendicular to the T = 0 axis, Mechanica places the positive P = 0 axis in the direction perpendicular to the T = 0 axis that is closest to the location you specified. The P = 0 axis still lies in the same plane in which you placed it:
The positive P = 90 axis is perpendicular to the other axes with the positive direction determined by the right-hand rule. Mechanica displays an icon, showing the origin of the new user coordinate system and the direction of each axis. The orientation of the icon depends on the axes you entered. Here are two views of the icon:
1181
Spin
Spin orients the model by spinning it about a specified spin center. The Spin area contains the following items: Spin center button Click this button to spin your model using the spin center axis. o X Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its x axis. o Y Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its y axis. o Z Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its z axis. Screen center button Click this button to spin your model using the screen center axis. o H Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its horizontal axis. o V Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its vertical axis. o C Use the slider or counter to spin the model about its center.
Spin Softening
For prestress modal analyses, Mechanica automatically compensates for the effect of relative motions when a centrifugal load is present on a model. The software adjusts the stiffness matrix to account for this effect, which is referred to as spin softening. The spin softening modification term includes only derivatives of centrifugal loads that are due to angular velocity, and those with displacements. It does not include derivatives of centrifugal loads that are due to angular acceleration, nor does it affect moment terms for beams or shells, or derivatives due to rotations. Note: Springs are allowed in prestress analysis, but Mechanica does not compute stress-stiffness effects for springs. For a prestress modal analysis on a model with centrifugal loads, a spring, and a mass, the system stiffness decreases due to spin softening, and there is no stress-stiffening for the spring.
Spring References
You can define the location of a spring on your model by selecting one of the following reference types from the References area on the Spring Definition dialog box: PointPoint Create a spring between two points or two vertices. PointSurface Create a spring between a point and a surface, or a vertex and a surface. PointEdge Create a spring between a point and an edge, or a vertex and an edge. Note: For the location of the spring-end positioned on the surface/edge, the software selects the spot that is closest to the first point of the spring. If you need to position the spring at a particular 1182
IndexAdditional Information
place on the surface/edge, use the PointPoint option and create a datum point along the surface/edge. PointPoint Pairs Create multiple point-to-point springs with the same characteristics.
The points you use for any reference type requiring points can be any of the following: single point or vertex point feature (includes one or more single points) pattern of point features
The software treats the springs you create from point features or patterns of points as single entities. You cannot specify different properties for different springs created from the same point feature or pattern of point features.
Square
The icon for a square beam section type looks like this:
When you select Square as the beam type on the Beam Section Definition dialog box, you must enter a positive value in the a text-entry box for its cross-section dimension. The figures below illustrate stress recovery points for square beam section types. The figure on the left shows the points for the native mode, and the figure on the right shows the points for the FEM mode.
1183
You can save the version of the model Mechanica creates when you run an offset study.
1184
IndexAdditional Information
Standard Studies: Static, Large Deformation Static, Contact, Prestress Static, Modal, Prestress Modal, Buckling, Steady-State Thermal, and Transient Thermal Analyses
The following information is included for each analysis in the study: for Structure analyses, the convergence method convergence loop log RMS stress error estimates total mass of model total cost of model moments of inertia about WCS origin principal MOI and principal axes relative to WCS origin center of mass location relative to WCS origin moments of inertia about the center of mass principal MOI and principal axes relative to COM for each if you selected Calculate Reactions when defining a static analysis, values for the resultant load on the model in the global X, Y, and Z directions for modal analyses, the modal frequency for each mode (cycles per unit time) for static and steady-state thermal analyses, the value of each valid measure for that analysis for each load set for buckling analyses, the buckling load factor (BLF) for each mode. If only negative BLFs appear, you should reverse the direction of the loads and rerun the previous static analysis and the buckling analysis. The first positive BLF mode is usually the one of interest. for contact analyses, the contact area for each load factor if the number of load increments is greater than one
1185
If you use the iterative solver, Mechanica runs a first pass using the block solver at p=2, followed by a second pass using the iterative solver at p=3. Using the heat flux error estimate from the second pass, Mechanica performs a third and final pass. The polynomial order for beams is 9 for the final pass. Quick Check (No Convergence) This method is available for all models. It does not check convergence. Mechanica performs a single pass analysis with uniform p=3. You can use this method to verify that you have defined your analysis correctly.
1186
IndexAdditional Information
1187
Almansi strain
Green strain
The Almansi strain tensor e can be defined using the deformation gradient tensor F and the left Cauchy-Green tensor b, as follows:
The components of strain reported by Mechanica are the engineering strains gij, defined as follows: gij = eij , where i = j gij = 2eij , where i j
1188
IndexAdditional Information
Component Select a component. The directional components that appear on this option menu change if you change the coordinate system using the Relative To option menu. Relative To Display results relative to a directional component. Include Contribution from Beams Select the beam contributions to include in the result window definition. This area appears only if there are beams in the model. Include Contribution from Shells Select the shell contributions to include in the result window definition. This area appears only if there are shells in the model. This area does not appear in FEM mode. Graph Location Select a location from the option menu to display in the result window. Use the selector arrow to display your model and pick the entity you want to use in your results display. This area appears only if you select a display type of Graph.
1189
After the sensitivity study completes, graph the goal quantity against each parameter, and check to see whether the slope of each graph is close to zero. A slope that is not near zero indicates that the optimization study may not have reached the optimum goal value. In this case, you may want to redefine the optimization study and run it again. If you run the optimization again, use the parameter values from the final optimum model of the last optimization study as the starting point in the new study. If an optimization study ends with insignificant changes to your parameters, Mechanica may have encountered a local optimum value for your goal measure that caused it not to explore the design space more fully. If this happens, run the study again after setting the parameters to initial values far enough from the original settings to encourage Mechanica to examine more promising parameter positions.
IndexAdditional Information
3. If the two sets of displacements are in good agreement, then the problem was linear. If however, the two sets of displacements are not reasonable ratios of each other, then the problem is non-linear. As an example, consider a circular aluminum plate, 1 mm thick, 200 mm in diameter, pinned at its circumference and subject to a uniform pressure load.
0.0001 MPa
0.0916 mm
0.0888 mm
For the plate subject to a pressure load of 0.005 MPa, results are non-linear. To make physical sense, the displacement of the initially curved plate should not be 200 times less than that of the initially flat plate. Results for the plate subject to a pressure load of 0.0001 MPa show displacement results for the initially curved plate just 3% less than for the initially flat plate. Thus, at this very small pressure, linear analysis is a fairly good approximation. For the response to be linear, the general rule for plates and shells is that the deflection should be less than the thickness.
1191
If you decide to return a graph to its original state, use the Format Graph dialog box to re-enter the original settings.
IndexAdditional Information
components are pre-meshed, you create the zero-length spring using the geometrically-aligned hard points on each component. When you mesh the top-level assembly, Mechanica creates matching nodes wherever you placed the geometrically-aligned points. However, be aware that, while this process assures that the surfaces will have geometrically-consistent nodes, the surfaces may have different overall meshes.
See Also
Strategy: Identifying and Resolving Potential Trouble Spots in a Model
1193
Define and run an analysis using the quick check convergence option. With this option, the engine runs the analysis at a polynomial order of 3. You can then check stress and deformation results for structural analyses, or temperature gradient and flux results for thermal analyses. These results can reveal problems in the model, such as cracks or missing loads and constraints. Then, you might want to consider running an analysis with reduced tolerance or reduced maximum polynomial order values. For example, if the model is large and it would require several hours to achieve 10% convergence, consider first setting convergence to 20% and the maximum p-order to 6. Once the run is complete, review a fringe plot of the p-level reached by each edge. For edges that reach the maximum p-order, you may want to make the following changes: o o o Spread any loads or constraints over a larger area. Use AutoGEM's feature isolation settings to counteract singularities. Seed your model with datum points near the high p-order zones to adjust the size of elements so the elements in the high p-order zones are smaller. Add more elements.
Setting solram to 0.5 times machine RAM is usually the best compromise between reducing the amount of disk I/O and leaving enough machine RAM for disk caching and for other data. By limiting the solram allocation to half the machine RAM or less, you greatly increase your chances of achieving optimal performance. If there is too much demand on machine RAM and swap space, system performance can be severely degraded. In this situation, decreasing solver RAM can increase overall system performance.
1194
IndexAdditional Information
1195
Note that in the positive direction of the beam element, positive Fx acts in the positive normal X direction. However, in the negative direction of the beam element, positive Fx acts in the negative normal X direction. The resultant moments follow the same sign convention. Applying this resultant force and moment convention to a typical example, note how the results of a beam model solved in Structure relate to a free-body diagram.
In the cut section, the resultant forces Fy and moment couple Mz act to maintain equilibrium. In beam a, Fy is negative while, in beam b, Fy is positive. Mz is negative
1196
IndexAdditional Information
in both beams. Structure always reports values for the resultant forces and moments for the positive direction of the free-body diagram. The X axis for beams is along the length of the beam, with the positive X direction determined when you select the beam references. To find the positive beam direction, look at the orientation of the beam icon axes. The beam icon displays the Y and Z axes for the BSCS. You can determine the positive X direction using the righthand rule. Since Mechanica reports resultant values based on the positive beam direction, review the orientation of the BSCS before running an analysis to ensure that results will make sense to you. If the orientation is reversed, the sign of resultant forces and moments will change.
Sometimes, when trying to avoid element singularities, you impose too few constraints. In these cases, a run may end with an error message in the summary file indicating that your model is insufficiently constrained. For more information on how to address this condition, see Insufficiently Constrained Models.
1197
As an option, you can specify that convergence be repeated. We recommend repeating convergence if the parameters cause massive distortion of the elements. However, the run will require more time. Sometimes, by adjusting the starting and ending positions of the parameters, you can define the study such that the first step includes the most distorted elements. If the p-levels of the edges used for the worst case result in convergence, they will work for all others.
1198
IndexAdditional Information
Even if these conditions are present, your elapsed run time might improve only slightly when you run the engine in parallel processing mode because parallel processing accelerates just a few phases of the overall solution process. The main disadvantage of parallel processing is that, if you are running other jobs at the same time as Mechanica, you can experience performance bottlenecks. Thus, unless you expect substantial gains from using all CPUs in your system for the engine or you have no other jobs planned for your system during the engine run, you may want to limit the number of CPUs dedicated to the engine. If you do not want to use all of the CPUs in your system for the engine job, you can set the environment variable MEC_NUM_THREADS to the anticipated number of idle CPUs on the machine. For example, on a 4-CPU machine with one CPU-intensive job running in addition to the parallel job, set MEC_NUM_THREADS to 3. Note that Mechanica does not support parallel processing on the HP 32-bit platform.
You can correct for this by creating a load set that contains only the centrifugal load and rerunning the analysis with this load set. Then, determine the total load resulting from the centrifugal load set. Using this information, you can determine the true
1199
scale factor you need to enter to achieve the desired load scaling. To determine the scale factor, apply the following formula: scale value = (WN/WE)2 Where WN is the acceleration or velocity specified in the load definition and WE is the acceleration or velocity you want to achieve through scaling.
In either case, the best solution is to refine the mesh through the AutoGEM Settings dialog box, recreate the mesh, and rerun the analysis. You can use items on the AutoGEM Settings dialog box to divide the elements near the local effects, such as concentrated loads, cracks, reentrant corners, and thickness discontinuities between shells. If this proves difficult, increasing the maximum polynomial order is an alternative. (But if you require high polynomial levels in areas of interest, you should consider refining your mesh). With smaller elements, convergence is more likely to occur and thus will ensure better results in the areas of interest. For transient thermal analyses, if you suddenly switch on heat loads and convection conditions, your changes will adversely affect analysis convergence. If all heat loads and convection conditions are smooth functions that are zero at the start of the analysis, the engine will generally select smaller values for the p-orders. For more information on how to smooth these functions, see Ramping of Heat Loads and Convection Conditions.
See Also
Procedure: To Set Convergence for a Thermal Analysis
1200
IndexAdditional Information
Contact area is small in comparison to size of adjacent element edges for one or more contact regions. If you need pressure results near the contact regions, use single-pass adaptive convergence and select Localized Mesh Refinement.
1201
Measures you might want to graph include strain_energy or max_disp_mag for static analyses, modal_frequency for modal analyses, and energy_norm, max_temperature, or max_flux_mag for thermal analyses. Note that if an analysis converges on local displacement and strain energy or local temperatures and local energy norms, the stress or flux values may not converge. The following graph shows that maximum von Mises stress values are still increasing as of the final p-pass and, therefore, did not converge.
1202
IndexAdditional Information
Tip: To facilitate convergence, create a layer of small elements around features that exhibit high stress or flux concentrations. For more information, see Singularities.
If you are interested in stresses or fluxes, create a convergence graph of the particular stress or flux measures of interest to you.
1203
Before running a local sensitivity study, use Shape Review. Set the value for each parameter to the starting position you plan to use. Then use the Review menu to check the shape of the model at those settings. Before running a global sensitivity study, use Shape Animate and set the values for each parameter to the range you plan to use for the study. Then review an animation of the model's changes across each of those ranges. Before running an optimization study, use Shape Review to review all parameters at their starting positions. You can also use Shape Review to look at combinations of parameters you think could create possible shape change conflicts. For example, if setting the radius of a curve to 100% of its range while setting the translation of that curve to 0% of its range could cause the geometry to significantly change its shape, review the shape using that combination. Then use Shape Animate to vary your parameters across different ranges and in different combinations to find any problems the engine might encounter while optimizing the model. At a minimum, animate your model across the entire range of each parameter you plan to include in the optimization study. You can also use the results of local and global sensitivity studies to predict how the engine might change particular design parameters to achieve your goal. Use this information to set the parameter ranges for your optimization study.
Stress Grids
When you click the arrow beside Stress Grids on the Beam Section Definition dialog box for general beam sections, the dialog box expands to display a table of text-entry boxes. Enter the Y Offset and Z Offset values for stress recovery points for your section. You can define y and z values for up to nine points for the native mode, and four in the FEM mode. You must specify values in the stress grid in order to view results for beam recovery points.
1204
IndexAdditional Information
If your model is made up of brick, wedge, or tetrahedral elements that have the same isotropic materials, Mechanica uses a different calculation that increases the rate of stress convergence, yielding more accurate stress results at a lower polynomial order. Mechanica does not use this algorithm to compute the stresses in models made up of: non-isotropic materials more than one material property non-solid elements (the algorithm is used for solids in the same model)
In reporting stress results, if identical positive and negative stresses are the highest stresses, Mechanica reports the positive stress. If the negative value is slightly higher than the positive value, Mechanica still reports the positive value.
These symmetries are independent for Structure and Thermal. A material may have isotopic structural properties and orthotropic thermal properties. The Mechanica library contains isotropic materials only. Also, if you selected Edge/Curve as a geometry type, the Orthotropic and Transversely Isotropic options are inactive.
When you select Insert>Temperature Load>Structural, and choose Point, Curve, or Surface from the STRUCT TEMP menu, the Structural Temperature Load dialog box appears with the following fields: Name The name of the load. Member of Set The name of the load set. You can select an existing load set from the drop-down list, or create a new set by clicking the New button to display the Load Set Definition dialog box. References In this area appears the name of the type of entitypoint, curve, or surfaceyou chose. If you already selected valid geometric references before entering the dialog box, your selections appear next to the selector arrow when the dialog box appears. Otherwise, use the selector arrow and the regular selection methods to choose the desired geometry. Entity Temperature Use this area to enter the temperature to which you wish to bring the geometric entity as well as the spatial variation you want Mechanica to use. o Spatial Variation Define how you want Mechanica to distribute the load by selecting Uniform or Function Of Coordinates from the option menu. If you select Function Of Coordinates, Mechanica displays the f(x) button, enabling you to enter an existing function or create a new function. o Value Enter the temperature you want to apply to the entity. You can enter a real number or an expression incorporating Pro/ENGINEER parameters. Reference Temperature Enter the zero stress temperature of your model. The reference temperature is the stress-free temperature of the modelwhether that temperature is room temperature or some other temperature that is normal for the model.
1206
IndexAdditional Information
The difference between the entity temperature value and the reference temperature is the amount of temperature change over the model.
See Also
Procedure: To Define Structural Temperature Loads
Mechanica does not report reaction force data at constrained points and edges when the constraint is associated to a UCS. In FEM mode, there may be a conflict between your constraint coordinate systems and coordinate systems associated with connections and mesh controls.
Note: Constraints applied to vertices in Mechanica FEM mode are suppressed in Mechanica.
You can add datum points within Mechanica as you define your constraints. These datum points are available for your Mechanica sessions only. They are not visible on your part or assembly while you are working at the Pro/ENGINEER level. As an alternative, you can add datum points to your model in Pro/ENGINEER before entering Mechanica. In the latter case, the datum points are available for all your Pro/ENGINEER sessions as well.
1208
IndexAdditional Information
If you place a load on a surface, the load applies to any elements associated with that surface. A point load can create theoretically infinite stresses (for structural loads) or fluxes (for heat loads) on a shell, solid, 2D solid, or 2D plate. A curve or edge load on a solid element can create theoretically infinite stresses (for structural loads) or fluxes (for heat loads). For a 2D plane strain model a point represents a line. You can apply a load to a point as either a total load or as a load per unit length using the Total Load or Load Per Unit Length options, respectively. Because the depth of the model is considered to be unity, these two options are equivalent. For a 2D axisymmetric model, a point represents a circle. You can apply a load to a point as either a total load or as a load per unit length using the Total Load or Load Per Unit Length options, respectively. For example, if you specify a load of 100 pounds per unit length, the total load on the entire circle will be 100 r pounds, where r is the radius of the circle. But if you specify a load of 100 pounds as the total load, then the total load remains 100 pounds.
For most loads, you can add datum points within Mechanica as you define the load. These datum points will be available for your Mechanica sessions only. They are not visible on your part or assembly while you are working at the Pro/ENGINEER level. As an alternative, you can add datum points to your model in Pro/ENGINEER before entering Mechanica. In the latter case, the datum points will be available for all your Pro/ENGINEER sessions as well.
1210
IndexAdditional Information
Entity type check boxes Use these check boxes to suppress individual load, constraint, or boundary condition types. There is a check box for each kind of entity you can suppress for the type of set you are working with. As an example, if you are working with a boundary condition set, the dialog box provides Temperature, Convection, and Radiation check boxes. Select all entity types in the check box list. Deselect all entity types in the check box list.
1211
which problem you want to solve and open the associated model instance, working through the problem in that instance only. When working in a family table instance, be aware that Mechanica promotes any modeling entity you create within an instance to the generic model. However, the modeling entity appears as suppressed, and you must resume the entity if you want to use it in the generic model or any of the other instances. Note: When you are working in Mechanica, you can only add simulation modeling entities to the family table. You cannot add Pro/ENGINEER values, features, components, or parameters. You also cannot create new family table instances while you work in Mechanica.
See Also
References: To Suppress Modeling Entities Through a Family Table Object Action
Surface-Surface Gaps
Keep the following points in mind if you want to create gaps between two surfaces: When you select two surfaces as the gap references, Mechanica creates gaps between each of the mesh nodes. In the figure below, Mechanica applied a boundary mesh to an assembly with offset-mated surfaces. The purple lines represent the gaps between the mesh nodes.
1212
IndexAdditional Information
If you select the Per Unit Area option under Distribution when you define your surfacesurface gap, the software uses the total area of the first surface that you select to calculate the axial and transverse stiffness values. However, if the two surfaces that you select only partially overlap, the software first determines the portion of the first surface area that it can use to form a coincident mesh during meshing, and uses that area for the calculation of stiffness values. For example, in the illustration above, if you first selected the top surface on the lower, smaller box for your surface surface gap definition, Mechanica would designate that surface for the Per Unit Area calculation. The actual value the software uses in the calculation would consist of only that surface area with the purple gap icons. A gap can be applied between two surfaces in a model containing shells compressed to midsurfaces. If you specify your model as a midsurface shell model, and the first surface you select for your gap undergoes midsurface compression to an edge, the software uses the area of the surface before compression for the distribution calculation.
1213
your model. For more information about the systems of units provided in Pro/ENGINEER, see Predefined Systems of Units. The following buttons appear on the Systems Of Units tab: Set Sets the principal system of units. New Creates a custom system of units. Copy Click this button to make a duplicate of an existing system of units. On the Copy System of Units dialog box, enter a name for the new copy of the system of units. This new name will appear in the list on the Systems Of Units tab. Edit Active only if you select a custom system of units. Click this button to edit a custom system of units. Delete Active only if you select a custom system of units that is not the principal system of units. Click this button to delete a custom system of units. Info Click to display an Information Window with units information for the selected system of units.
See Also
Procedures: To Set a Principal System of Units To Create a Custom System of Units To Edit a Custom System of Units To Review a System of Units
1214
IndexAdditional Information
Be sure that the connections you create do not conflict with the physical design of the assembly. For example, if you have two pre-meshed components that share a surface region, you should make sure the connections line up properly for the shared region.
Temperature Distribution
Mechanica checks if a temperature load exists for an analysis that depends on it.
1215
See Also
Procedure: To Select Temperature Distribution for an Analysis
the source design study, analysis, and load set for the temperature load
These additional items appear on the tab only if you select MecT for Distribution: Use Temperatures From Previous Design Study You can select this check box option if you want to use temperature results from a previously run steady thermal analysis for the initial temperature in your transient thermal analysis. If this option is not selected, Mechanica runs the steady thermal analysis as part of running the transient thermal analysis. Design Study If you selected the option Use Temperatures From Previous Design Study, select a design study to include in the transient thermal analysis. Thermal Analysis Select a steady thermal analysis. Load Set Select a load set.
1216
IndexAdditional Information
These options are available for all transient thermal analyses: Accuracy Enter a value for the acceptable fractional temperature error. Estimated Variation Enter a value for temperature variation or select Auto. Automatically Smooth Convections Select this option to turn on convection conditions gradually.
See Also
Procedure: To Select Temperature Options for a Transient Thermal Analysis
Thermal Measures
Mechanica uses one or more measures to determine convergence. Select Measures for convergence if you are interested either in results for one or more specific quantities, such as maximum flux magnitude, or in results at a particular location, such as a boundary condition or local flux concentration. Using Measures can help improve accuracy for the quantities in which you are interested, and may also lower the computation time for your design study. When you select Measures as the convergence option, the Measures button becomes available. Click this button to select thermal measures from the Measures dialog box. You can select any global or local thermal measures. For more information about measures in general, see About Simulation Measure.
1217
The Mechanica library contains isotropic materials only. Also, if you selected Edge/Curve as a geometry type, the Orthotropic and Transversely Isotropic options are inactive.
IndexAdditional Information
Thermal Conductivity Enter positive values for the following aspects of the material's conductivity: o k1 o k2 o k3
These values represent the conductivity in each of the three principal material directions of the model. To specify thermal conductivity, you can type in a value or click the P button to assign a parameter name.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the ply for the material you are defining. The thickness may be zero, in which case Mechanica ignores the layer. Note: The sub-laminate thickness may depend on the current values of parameters. The entry box for thickness is parameter-capable. Right-click in the Thickness field of the Shell Property Definition dialog box and select Parameter from the menu. When Mechanica creates the shell elements for the plies, it calculates the total, combined thickness of all the plies and applies the plies so that the total thickness is distributed equally on both sides of the selected surface. For example, let us say you specify three plies with thicknesses as follows: Ply 1 thickness = 2 Ply 2 thickness = 7 Ply 3 thickness = 4 1219
In this case, the total thickness of all three plies is 13 so Mechanica places 6.5 of the thickness on the top of the surface and 6.5 on the bottom. Thus, 4.5 of ply 2's thickness lies atop the surface and 2.5 of ply 2's thickness lies below.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Tie Multiple Result Windows Untie Contour, Fringe, Graph, or Vectors Result Window
After you select one of the Tie commands, select another graph result window. Mechanica sets up a new interval for the data on each axis that works for both result windows. This may involve changing one or both graphs. Mechanica redraws either graph for which the interval has changed. For more information on these commands, see Guidelines for Tying Graphs. 1220
IndexAdditional Information
For a description of how to tie a group of graph windows together so that they all share a common range, see Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows.
See Also
Procedures: To Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows, Procedure 1 To Tie Multiple Graph Result Windows, Procedure 2 To Untie Multiple Graph Result Windows
1221
At Time Mechanica calculates the value of a measure at a time you specify. The measure is calculated for dynamic time analyses.
Time Range
Specify a minimum and a maximum time for the time range that defines the start and finish time for the analysis. In Mechanica, all of the predefined systems of units measure conductivity in seconds. The units you use to measure time must be consistent with your system of units and the units for measuring conductivity. For example, if you want to measure conductivity in BTUs per hour, you may need to change your system of units. For more information, see Time Range Specification.
1222
IndexAdditional Information
Time Range
Enter the minimum and maximum times for the range over which you want Mechanica to report results for a dynamic time analysis. The impulse load is applied at the minimum time. The minimum time must be greater than or equal to 0. The default maximum time is Automatic, which is three times the period of the first mode. If you use the Automatic option, the range will cover three oscillations for the first mode. If you select the User-defined option, you can enter a value for the maximum time.
Time Stamp
This item is available only if you select Maximum, Minimum, or Maximum Absolute as a time evaluation option. If you select Time Stamp, Mechanica automatically creates a measure that saves the time at which a minimum, maximum, or maximum absolute condition occurs. For dynamic analyses, if you do not create any time- or frequency-based measures, be sure not to select Automatic Intervals within Range for the results output when you define your analysis. Otherwise, some dynamic analyses will not produce any results.
Time/Frequency Eval
Activate the optional Dynamic Evaluation menu, which you use to select a time or frequency evaluation method. If you select the Time/Frequency Eval check box, Mechanica calculates the measure for dynamic time and dynamic frequency analyses. Mechanica also calculates the measure for dynamic random analyses provided you base the measure on a directional component and take the measure at a point. Note that if you select 1223
Failure Index as the quantity, Mechanica calculates the measure for dynamic time analyses only. For most quantities, if you do not select Time/Frequency Eval, Mechanica calculates the measure for dynamic shock, static, prestress static, and contact analyses.
Provides the maximum, minimum, or maximum magnitude value over all time or frequency steps, or over a specified time range for a dynamic time analysis. Also, Mechanica can create a measure that saves the time at which a maximum, minimum, or maximum absolute condition occurs. You can find this value in the summary report. Provides the RMS value or apparent frequency of a quantity. You can find this value in the summary report.
At Time
The selection you make on the Time/Frequency Eval option menu determines in what type of analysis you can use the measure.
Analysis Type dynamic time response Time/Freq Eval Option At Each Step Maximum, Minimum At Time dynamic frequency response At Each Step Maximum, Minimum dynamic random response At Each Step RMS Apparent Frequency
1224
IndexAdditional Information
Titles
Use this command to turn on and off the title of a result window, or to edit the text of the title. The title appears centered at the bottom of the window. You can include a title and a subtitle in this block. When you select Titles, you also select a result window if you are displaying more than one. Mechanica then toggles the title display in that result window. To edit the title, use the Edit>Result Window command. Any change you make to the title with this command stays with the result window until you either edit the window definition or close the Results user interface. If you have the title block displayed when you print your work area, it appears in the printed copy.
See Also
Procedure: To Set Titles
1225
5. If you want the animation to automatically alternate between forward and . reverse, click 6. Enter the number of frames in the animation or accept the default. When you display or load a result window with an animation, you can use the slider on the toolbar to speed up or slow down the animation.
4. To include leader lines, click , and then click the point on your model where you want the leader line to start.
Mechanica draws the leader line from the point you click to the closest corner of the annotation.
5. To display or turn off the leader arrow at the end of the leader line, select or clear the Display Leader Arrow check box. 6. To draw a circle, square, or multiline shape on the result window, select ,
, or and use your mouse to create the desired shape. 7. To make changes to the font, text box, leader, arrow, or mouse sketch styles, click the Style button.
The Note Style dialog box appears.
8. When you finish making all changes to the annotation and styles, click OK.
IndexAdditional Information
3. Click Assign and select Part from the menu. 4. Use the normal selection methods to select a part on your model. The material name appears in the Materials in Model list. 5. Select Close. 6. Select Applications>Standard to return to Pro/ENGINEER. 7. Select Edit>Setup>Material>Assign. 8. Select From Part, and highlight the material you assigned in Mechanica. 9. Select Accept to assign the material to the part.
2. Click New. The Material Definition dialog box appears. 3. Select the Structural tab. 4. Verify that Isotropic is selected for the material type. You can use only isotropic materials for fatigue analysis. 5. Select the Fatigue tab. 6. Enter a value for Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS). 7. If you want to change the units for UTS, select the units from the list to the right. 8. Select a Material Type. 9. Select a Surface Finish. 10. Enter a value for Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor (Kf).
Default values display all icons without names and show icons when you spin your model. All load and constraint icons appear in individual colors, and load icons are not scaled or displayed with heads touching. 3. Change any of the default values. 4. Select OK to accept the settings and close the dialog box.
1227
The Beam Definition dialog box appears. 2. Type a name for the beam, or use the default name. 3. Select a reference type for the beam location from the drop-down list. 4. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, click and use the regular selection methods to select the geometric entities now. 5. Select the material for the beam. 6. Select the beam type. 7. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list to define the Y direction: o Point o Edge o Curve o Axis o Surface o Vector in WCS 8. On the Start tab, select a beam section from the drop-down list or click the More button to create a new beam section. 9. Select a beam orientation from the drop-down list or click the More button to define a new beam orientation. 10. Select a beam release from the drop-down list or click the More button to create a new beam release. 11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 on the End tab. 12. On the Extra tab, enter values for the shear relief coefficient for planes XY and XZ. 13. Select the check box if you want to include stress recovery.
See Also
Reference: About Beams
1228
IndexAdditional Information
5. If you selected UCS as your surface definition method, use the selector arrow to select the desired coordinate system. 6. For all surface definition methods except Isosurfaces, select XY, YZ, or ZX as the reference plane. 7. Select Above or Below to indicate which side of the capping surface Mechanica should trim. 8. Enter the depth of the cut along the axis normal to the plane. If you want Mechanica to calculate the value you enter as a percentage rather than an absolute value, select the % check box. 9. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See Also
Procedure: References: To Edit a Custom System of Units Predefined Units Systems of Units Management
1229
This procedure assumes you are in Pro/ENGINEER. 1. Select Edit>Set Up>Units. The Units Manager dialog box appears. 2. Click the Units tab. 3. Click the New button. The Unit Definition dialog box appears. 4. Select an option from the Physical Dimension list. Use the Derived option if you want to define a derived custom unit. 5. Enter a name for the custom unit or use the default name. Note: If you selected the Derived option in step 4, go to step 9. 6. Select a reference unit from the drop-down list of existing units. 7. Enter a Scale factor. All custom units are scaled from existing units, including other custom units. 8. If you selected Temperature in step 4, enter an Offset value. 9. If you selected Derived in step 4, enter a Numerical Unit Expression for your derived unit. 10. Click OK. The Units Manager dialog box appears with the name of your new custom unit displayed in the list of units.
See Also
Procedure: Reference: To Edit a Custom Unit Predefined Units
1230
IndexAdditional Information
6. For all surface definition methods except Isosurfaces, select XY, YZ, or ZX as the reference plane. 7. Enter the depth of the cut along the axis normal to the plane. If you want Mechanica to calculate the value you enter as a percentage rather than an absolute value, select the % check box. 8. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See Also
Procedure: To Modify a Cutting Surface
1231
1232
IndexAdditional Information
2. Enter a name for the new Pro/ENGINEER parameter. 3. Enter a numerical value for the parameter. Mechanica highlights the new parameter and returns you to the Select Pro/ENGINEER Parameter dialog box.
To Create an Interface
1. Select the Insert>Connection>Interface command.
The Interface Definition dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name or accept the default name. 3. In FEM mode, select Bonded or Free from the option menu under Type. In native mode, this option menu is inactive, and Free is the only available interface Type. 4. If you did not select geometry before entering the dialog box, click and use the regular selection methods to select two surfaces on your assembly now. 5. In FEM mode, if you selected Free, the Generate Compatible Mesh check box is available, and is selected by default. Clear this check box if you do not want Mechanica to create geometrically-consistent node locations when it generates the mesh for the surfaces of your interface. 6. Click OK. Mechanica adds an interface icon to your model.
7. Click OK.
1234
IndexAdditional Information
The new material orientation appears on the Material Orientations list. Continue on to To Assign a Material Orientation or return to To Create a Material Orientation.
1235
The new material orientation appears on the Material Orientations list. Continue on to To Assign a Material Orientation or return to To Create a Material Orientation.
To Create Shells
1. Select the Insert>Shell command or click
The Shell Definition dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for your shell, or accept the default name. 3. If you did not select geometry before opening the dialog box, click and use the regular selection methods to select the geometric references now. 4. Select one of the Types. The options on the dialog box are different depending upon your choice. Click each type for more information. o Simple o Advanced
1236
IndexAdditional Information
1237
1238
IndexAdditional Information
5. To include displacements or deformation when you display your model, select Deformed. 6. To display the edges of the elements in your model, select Show Element Edges. 7. To animate your results, select Animate.
1239
o o
The parameter value can vary. The parameter is not currently being used as a Mechanica design parameter.
Mechanica does not check Pro/ENGINEER parameters to determine which ones are dependent. Rather, the software displays all Pro/ENGINEER parameters defined as relations or defined with Real Number as the Type.
4. Review the list box at the bottom of the dialog box to determine which types of analyses are valid for the measure. 5. Click OK. Each of the custom measures shows up on the Measures dialog box.
See Also
1240
IndexAdditional Information
Reference:
2. Select a component from the Component menu. 3. If you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, select an option from the Graph Location option menu, then use the selector arrow to select the location from your model.
4. If Reaction At Constraint is the quantity, select constraints. 5. If Spring is the quantity, select a spring. 6. If you want to define a dynamic analysis, check the Time/Frequency Eval check box. 7. Review the list box at the bottom of the dialog box to determine which types of analyses are valid for the measure. 8. Click OK. Each of the custom measures shows up on the Measures dialog box.
IndexAdditional Information
2. To display the fringe in continuous tones rather than discrete colors, select Continuous Tone. 3. Enter the number of legend levels to display or accept the default. 4. To include displacements or deformation when you display your model, select Deformed. 5. To display the edges of the elements in your model, select Show Element Edges. 6. To animate your results, select Animate.
1243
1244
IndexAdditional Information
1245
3. Select the desired boundary condition set from the Member of Set dropdown list. 4. If you want to create a new boundary condition set, click the New button to display the BC Set Definition dialog box. Enter a name and optional description for a new constraint set. under 5. If you did not select surfaces before entering the dialog box, click References and use the normal selection methods to select one or more surfaces on your model. 6. Select one of the following to specify the Spatial Variation for the Emissivity: Uniform Function of Coordinates Click f (x) to open the Functions dialog box.
7. Enter a real number in the Value entry box. 8. Select one of the following to specify the Spatial Variation for the Ambient Temperature: Uniform Function of Coordinates Click f (x) to open the Functions dialog box. 9. Enter a real number in the Value entry box. 10. Click OK to accept your definition and close the dialog box.
IndexAdditional Information
3. Click the selector arrow to select one or more entities on your model of the location type you selected.
1248
IndexAdditional Information
1249
2. If beams are present in the design study, make the appropriate selections in the Include Contribution From Beams area. 3. If shells are present in the design study, make the appropriate selections in the Include Contribution From Shells area. 4. If you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, select an option from the Graph Location option menu, then use the selector arrow to select the location from your model.
IndexAdditional Information
3. If you select a directional component, select an option from the Relative To option menu. 4. If beams are present in the design study, make the appropriate selections in the Include Contribution From Beams area. 5. If shells are present in the design study, make the appropriate selections in the Include Contribution From Shells area. 6. If you select Graph from the Display Type option menu, select an option from the Graph Location option menu, then use the selector arrow to select the location from your model.
1251
1252
IndexAdditional Information
1253
1254
IndexAdditional Information
1. Select a spring property from the drop-down list. If you do not see the spring property you want, click More to define a new spring property. 2. If you are creating the fastener with hole edges as references, select a separation option from the Fix Separation option menu. 3. If you are creating the fastener with hole edges as references and want to include a preload, select the Include Preload check box. 4. Enter a real-number value, parameter name, or expression for the following fields in the Include Preload area: Preload Force Fastener Head and Nut Diameter Separation Test Diameter 5. Click OK. The fastener icon appears at the fastener location.
5. If you defined more than one analysis of the relevant type, use the Select button to select the analysis you want. 6. If you included more than one load set for a static, prestress static, or steadystate thermal analysis, use the Select button to select a different load set. 7. If you selected a modal and prestress modal analysis, select a mode number. 8. If you want Mechanica to track a specific mode shape, select Track.
1255
3. Select the measure you want to minimize or maximize and click OK. Mechanica returns you to the Design Study Definition dialog box. 4. Select a mathematical operator (<, >, or =) and enter a value for the selected measure in the same row as the measure name.
Tip: You can enter a numerical value or c for the current value.
5. If you defined more than one analysis of the relevant type, use the Select button to select the analysis you want. 6. If you included more than one load set for a static, prestress static, or steadystate thermal analysis, use the Select button to select a different load set. 7. If you selected a modal and prestress modal analysis, select a mode number. 8. If you want Mechanica to track a specific mode shape, select Track. Repeat steps 2 through 9, and any subsequent steps that apply, for each measure you selected as a limit.
IndexAdditional Information
2. Enter in the Desired Endurance field the number of life cycles you want to include in the analysis. 3. Select a loading typeConstant Amplitude or Variable Amplitude.
Different options appear on the tab depending on the loading type you select.
4. If you selected Constant Amplitude, select one of the following options for Amplitude Type: o o o PeakPeak ZeroPeak User-Defined
5. If you selected User-Defined in step 4, enter values for Min Load Factor and Max Load Factor. 6. If you selected the loading type Variable Amplitude in step 3, enter a load factor for each row in the table to define the amplitude curve for one life cycle. You can use the Add Row button to add rows to the table, or the Delete and Clear All buttons to remove rows. You also can import the load factor data from a text file directly into the table. Click the Import button and then select the file from the Open File dialog box.
To Delete Parameters
You can delete a model's obsolete FEA results-based parameters as desired. If you do so, be sure to delete or edit any relation that references deleted parameters. If you want to create or delete parameters for your results, you must obtain your results from an .frd file. To obtain results from an .frd file, you must use the File>Open FEM Results command or run a FEM solver online and look at the 1257
results available immediately after the run completes. You cannot create or delete parameters if you select Analysis>Results instead of using one of these two methods. 1. Select File>Open FEM Results and select the result file for the current model. As an alternative, perform an online FEM solver run.
Mechanica displays the RESULTS menu.
2. Select Parameters>Delete Param from the RESULTS menu. The SEL PARAM menu appears. 3. Use the SEL PARAM menu to select the parameters to delete. 4. Complete the selection process and close the SEL PARAM menu. Mechanica deletes the selected parameters.
1258
IndexAdditional Information
See Also
Procedure: References: To Display a Result Window About Results Troubleshoot Run Problems
1259
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Custom System of Units To Review a System of Units
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Custom Unit To Review an Individual Unit
1260
IndexAdditional Information
5. Configure the Title Block. 6. Enter text for the Introduction. 7. Configure the inclusion of modeling information and VRML for the results window(s). 8. Enter a Conclusion for your web report. 9. Click Export. Mechanica saves the file with a .htm extension.
1262
IndexAdditional Information
8. If you have selected a contour result window only and want to toggle contour labels, click Contour Labels. 9. Click OK.
3. Select the analysis from the Analysis list. 4. If you selected a modal analysis, select the desired modes from the Mode list. 5. Select the desired quantity from the Result option menu. 6. Select the desired component from the Components option menu. 7. If the model includes shell elements, select the shell side for the parameter from the Shell Side options. 8. From the Reference menu, click the selector arrow to select a single edge or a contiguous series of edges. 9. Select the display or output method as follows: o If you want to display the edge graph in an information window on your screen, select Screen. The edge graph appears in a graph window on your screen accompanied by the Print dialog box, which enables you to print the graph to a printer or plotter. o If you want to output the statistics to a file, select File and type a file name in the associated text box. Mechanica outputs the graph 1263
information to a .dat file, which you can display in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. o If you want both a displayed version and printable output, select Both and type a file name for the printable output in the associated text box. 10. Click Done. Mechanica closes the dialog box.
IndexAdditional Information
2. To redefine the surface definition method, select a method from the Define By option menu. 3. If you changed your surface definition method to Three Points, use the selector arrow to select three points. 4. If you changed your surface definition method to UCS, use the selector arrow to select the desired coordinate system. 5. If you want to redefine the reference plane orientation, select XY, YZ, or ZX, as appropriate. 6. If you want to change the cutting surface depth, use one of the following methods: o Manually change the depth by entering a new value in the Depth entry box. o Dynamically change the depth by clicking Dynamic and dragging the mouse to increase or decrease the depth. Click the middle mouse button when you are finished repositioning the cutting surface.
Mechanica updates the Depth value on the Results Surface Definition dialog box to reflect your change.
2. Modify the dimensions you want to change and repaint the work area.
The offset coordinate system updates.
The Mechanica toolbar appears in the location you specified. 5. Click OK to accept the change, or Cancel to ignore the change. 1265
3. Select the display or output method as follows: o If you want to display the parameters in an information window on your screen, select Screen. o If you want to save the parameters to a file, select File. o If you want both displayed and stored versions of the parameters, select Both.
The SEL PARAM menu appears.
4. Use the SEL PARAM menu to select the parameters that you want to display or save. 5. Complete the selection process and close the SEL PARAM menu and display or save the parameter information.
1266
IndexAdditional Information
The line connecting the locations defines the X axis. 3. For 3D models, enter a third location to define the positive Y axis. Mechanica displays a Cartesian UCS with the origin at the midpoint of the line between point 1 and point 2. The Linearized Stress Report dialog box appears, displaying the results.
2. Select a system of units from the list on the Systems Of Units tab. 3. Click the Info button.
The Information Window appears displaying units information for the selected system of units. You can scroll down or sideways for more information.
See Also
Procedure: To Edit a Custom System of Units
2. Click the Units tab. 3. If you want to see a list of units of only one type, select an option from the Type drop-down list. 4. Select a unit from the list. You can review the description for the selected unit displayed in the Description box.
1267
See Also
Procedure: To Edit a Custom Unit
3. Select one of the following options from the Run Mode Choice dialog box: o Run in Current Session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to observe the effects of the parameter changes and reduces the analysis run time. While the study is running, you cannot work in this session of Pro/ENGINEER. o Run in Separate Session of Pro/ENGINEER Enables you to continue working in the current session of Pro/ENGINEER while Mechanica runs the design study. You will not be able to observe parameter changes until either the study is complete or you interrupt it. 4. Select Run to start the analysis. 5. When the study is complete, you can choose to keep the new values or return to the original values. 1268
IndexAdditional Information
You can check to see if the regeneration analysis is complete by looking for a directory named regenerate in the directory from which you launched Mechanica.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Local Sensitivity Study To Create a Global Sensitivity Study
See Also
Procedure: To Load a Result Window
4. Press ENTER to accept the final optimized shape. 5. Select File>Save to save the optimized model in Pro/ENGINEER. 6. Press ENTER to save the optimized model. 1269
To Segment a Graph
This procedure assumes you have selected a graph results window. 1. Select the Segment Graph command. 2. Select the first graph segment point. 3. Select the second point. Mechanica redraws the graph. 4. If necessary, you can do one of the following for the next step: o Segment the graph further. o Use Full Graph to restore the original graph.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Dynamic Time Analysis To Create a Dynamic Frequency Analysis To Create a Dynamic Random Analysis
To Select Load Interval Options for Large Deformation and Contact Analyses
This procedure assumes you are in the Static Analysis Definition or Prestress Static Analysis Definition dialog box and have selected Calculate Large Deformations or Include Contact Regions.
1270
IndexAdditional Information
1. 2. 3. 4.
Click the Load Intervals tab on the analysis dialog box. Select the number of intervals for your analysis. Enter a load factor for each load interval or use the default factors. If you are creating a large deformation static analysis, select the check boxes next to the load intervals for which you want to save full results.
4. If you selected For All Modes in step 3, enter a value without a % symbol for the damping coefficient you want to assign to all modes. 5. If you selected For Individual Modes in step 3, enter damping coefficient values for each mode in the list that appears for this option.
You can use the Fill button to change all zero values to the percent value immediately above them. Use the Clear button to change all values to zero.
6. If you selected Function of Frequency in step 3, click f(x) to select or define a damping coefficient function. To return to the procedure for creating your analysis, click one of the links below. Otherwise, return to previous.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Dynamic Time Analysis To Create a Dynamic Frequency Analysis To Create a Dynamic Random Analysis
1271
IndexAdditional Information
Automatic to use the default maximum frequency or User-defined to enter a different maximum frequency. Note: If you selected Automatic Intervals Within Range, skip the remaining steps. 5. Enter the Number Of Master Intervals in the time or frequency range at which you want results reported. Mechanica displays the specified number of rows in the list of master intervals. 6. Use the default values for each time or frequency interval to specify the spacing between intervals or click the User-defined Steps button to enter values. If you click User-defined Steps, you can use the Space Equally button to evenly space the steps. 7. For dynamic time and frequency analyses only, select the check boxes next to the intervals for which you want to save full results. Mechanica does not report full results for dynamic random analysis. You can also click for full results at all intervals or click results for all intervals. to turn off full
8. Enter a number for Measures Output Intervals Per Master Interval. To return to the procedure for creating your analysis, click one of the links below. Otherwise, return to previous.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Dynamic Time Analysis To Create a Dynamic Frequency Analysis To Create a Dynamic Random Analysis To Create a Dynamic Shock Analysis
1273
1. Click the Output tab on the analysis dialog box. 2. Select the quantities you want Mechanica to calculate: Stresses, Rotation, Reactions, and Ply Stresses (not available for contact analysis). 3. Select the density of the plotting grid.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Static Analysis To Create a Prestress Static Analysis To Create a Modal Analysis To Create a Prestress Modal Analysis To Create a Buckling Analysis
1274
IndexAdditional Information
The table displays numbered rows representing the number of intervals you selected. 8. Use the default values for each interval to specify the spacing between intervals or click the User-defined Steps button to enter values. If you click User-defined Steps, you can use the Space Equally button to evenly space the steps. 9. Select the Full Results check boxes next to the intervals for which you want to save full temperature and flux results. 10. Select the Temp Load check boxes next to the intervals for which you want to save temperature load data for importing a thermal load or a temperature field into Structure. You can also click intervals or click to save full results and temperature load data at all to deselect the check boxes for all intervals.
1275
1. Click the Temperatures tab on the analysis dialog box. 2. Select an option for Initial Temperature DistributionUniform or MecT. 3. If you selected Uniform, enter the temperature in the Temperature field. If there are any prescribed temperatures in the constraint set, you must enter the same value as the prescribed temperature. 4. If you selected MecT and want to use temperature results from a previously run steady thermal analysis, you can select the check box Use Temperatures From Previous Design Study.
If you do not select this check box, Mechanica will run a steady thermal analysis as part of running the transient thermal analysis.
5. If you selected Use Temperatures From Previous Design Study, select the following items to include in your transient thermal analysis: o o o Design Study (if applicable) Thermal Analysis Load Set
6. Enter a value for Accuracy. 7. Enter a value for Estimated Variation of the temperature or select the Auto check box. 8. Use the default selection Automatically Smooth Convections so that convection conditions will be turned on gradually, or you can deselect this item.
See Also
Procedure: To Start an Analysis or Design Study Run
1276
IndexAdditional Information
Reference:
See Also
References: About Units Guidelines for Specifying Units Predefined Systems of Units
1277
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Static Analysis To Create a Prestress Static Analysis To Create a Modal Analysis To Create a Prestress Modal Analysis To Create a Buckling Analysis Strategy: Improving Convergence
IndexAdditional Information
o o
Single-Pass Adaptive Quick Check Note: If you are creating a steady thermal analysis and selected Multi-Pass Adaptive, continue with the following steps.
3. Enter a minimum and maximum polynomial order. 4. Enter a convergence percentage. 5. Select the quantities you want Mechanica to use to calculate convergence.
To Set Labels
You can toggle the labels displayed on a result window on or off. The labels are the lines of information shown in the upper left of each window. 1. Select Format>Result Window. Mechanica displays the Format Result Window dialog box. 2. Select Labels to turn on or off. Mechanica toggles the label that appears in the upper left corner of your result window.
1279
Any change you make to the labels stays with the result window until you edit the window definition or close your result window.
To Set Titles
You can toggle the title of a result window on or off. The title appears centered at the bottom of the window. 1. Select Format>Result Window. Mechanica displays the Format Result Window dialog box. 2. Select Titles to turn the title on or off. Mechanica toggles the title. Any change you make to the title stays with the result window until you edit the window definition or close your result window.
1280
IndexAdditional Information
9. Select either Run On-Line or Run in Background to indicate how Mechanica will conduct the solving process. 10. Click OK. Mechanica creates an output file for the FEA solver to use as input for the run. This file is named partname.ext file (where .ext is the appropriate three-letter file extension for the selected FEA solver). Once the FEA solver solves the mesh model, Mechanica stores the results in an .frd file. You can then view your model in the postprocessor, displaying the results of the finite element analysis in a variety of tabular and graphical formats. Note: If there is already an .frd file that contains results, the system prompts you to overwrite the existing .frd file.
Note: The P-Level quantity does not require a procedure. For information on this quantity, see P-Level Results Quantity.
1281
2. Enter WCS coordinates to specify the direction in which the constrained parts of your model move in response to the forcing function. For 2D models, enter only X and Y coordinates. 3. Select an option for calculating displacement, velocity, and acceleration results relative to ground or to supports. To return to the procedure for creating your analysis, click one of the links below. Otherwise, return to previous.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Dynamic Time Analysis To Create a Dynamic Frequency Analysis To Create a Dynamic Random Analysis
IndexAdditional Information
provides a drop-down menu that you can use to suppress or activate the entity. 7. In each of the model instances, suppress or activate the modeling entities in the modeling entity columns appropriately to what you are planning to simulate with the instance. 8. Select OK. After you create the desired family table instances, you can switch to the instance you want to work with. When you open the instance model in Mechanica, the modeling entities that you suppressed in the family table do not appear in the Model Tree and no associated icons appear in the work area. 9. Use the Windows menu to switch to the desired instance. When the instance model is opened, the modeling entities that you suppressed in the family table get suppressed in the instance model.
1283
If you use this method, you would use the appropriate Graph command six times to tie a group of four result windows.
4. Select the second result window. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to tie the first result window to each other window you want to include in the group. By the time you reach the last window in the group, all windows should be tied to the first window. All windows in the group share a common range. For fringe, vector, and contour plots, changing the legend values of the first window changes the legend value of all the tied windows.
See Also
Procedure: To Tie Multiple Result Windows
1284
IndexAdditional Information
2. Click . Locate and select the name of the file you want to import. 3. If you want to preview the bulk temperature, click the Preview Tb button. If the preview does not produce the expected results, check to make sure that the reference coordinate system is correct. 4. Type a value for the convection coefficient, h. 5. If you want bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time Dependent check box under Temporal Variation. 6. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition. The software performs a simple test on the FNF file to check that it has a mesh and the required load.
To Use External Conv Coef & Bulk Temp Spatial Variation for 3D Models
This procedure assumes that you are in the Convection Condition dialog box, that you selected Surface as the entity type, and that you selected External Conv Coef & Bulk Temp for Spatial Variation. 1. If you want your reference coordinate system to be a local Cartesian system rather than the WCS, do the following: o o Under Reference Coordinate System, click . Select the local Cartesian coordinate system that you want to be the reference coordinate system for the data in the FNF file. This reference is valid only for Cartesian coordinate systems.
2. Click . Locate and select the name of the file you want to import. 3. If you want to preview the convection coefficient, click the Preview h button. 4. If you want to preview the bulk temperature, click the Preview Tb button. If either preview does not produce the expected results, check to make sure that the reference coordinate system is correct. 5. If you want bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time Dependent check box under Temporal Variation. 6. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition.
1285
The software performs a simple test on the FNF file to check that it has a mesh and the required load.
2. Click . Locate and select the name of the file you want to import. 3. If you want to preview the convection coefficient, click the Preview h button. If the preview does not produce the expected results, check to make sure that the reference coordinate system is correct. 4. Type a value for the bulk temperature, Tb. 5. If you want the bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time Dependent check box under Temporal Variation. 6. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition. The software performs a simple test on the FNF file to check that it has a mesh and the required load.
3. Select the following items to include in your buckling analysis: o o o Design Study (if applicable) Static Analysis Load Set
1286
IndexAdditional Information
3. Select the following items to include in your dynamic analysis: o design study (if applicable) o analysis The name of the constraint set for the modal analysis you selected appears in the Constraint Set field. To return to the procedure for creating your analysis, click one of the links below. Otherwise, return to previous.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Dynamic Time Analysis To Create a Dynamic Frequency Analysis To Create a Dynamic Random Analysis To Create a Dynamic Shock Analysis
1287
If you do not select this check box, Mechanica will run a static analysis as part of running your fatigue analysis.
3. Select the following items to include in your fatigue analysis: o o o Design Study (if applicable) Static Analysis Load Set
3. Select the following items to include in your prestress analysis: o o o Design Study (if applicable) Static Analysis Load Set
4. If you want to multiply the stress results from a previous static analysis, enter a Load Scale Factor. 5. If you are creating a prestress static analysis, you have the option to select the Combine Results With Results From Previous Static Analysis check box.
IndexAdditional Information
3. If you want the bulk temperature to be time-dependent, select the Time Dependent check box under Temporal Variation. 4. If you want to define more convection conditions, repeat applicable preceding steps until you have defined all constraints. 5. Click OK to accept the definition of the convection condition(s).
Tolerance Report
Use the Info>Tolerance Report command if you experience problems meshing an assembly model in either native mode or FEM mode. This command displays a report that lists the tolerance values for all assembly components whose model tolerance contributes to the global tolerance for the assembly. If the assembly contains entities such as quilts or beams, the report includes the tolerance value for the assembly itself. The report includes all those components that have geometry, and is arranged in descending order with components that have the highest tolerance values listed first. To better understand how to use the values in this report, you need background information on model accuracy, both relative and absolute. Tolerance, as reported by Mechanica, is calculated in a manner similar to absolute accuracy. However, the calculated values are somewhat different. You use the Mechanica Info>Tolerance Report command to compare the toleranceand, in effect, the accuracyof assembly components if your assembly mesh fails. For Mechanica to mesh the assembly successfully, these values must be very close to each other. When reviewing a tolerance report, look for significant differences in the tolerance values of components, the assembly as compared to the components, and so forth. Although it can vary depending on the assembly, a significant difference is generally considered to be a difference in the decimal order of magnitude. For example, the difference in two tolerance values of 0.274 and 0.513 would not typically be significant, but the difference between 2.874 and 0.513 probably would be. If you notice significant differences in the tolerance values reported by Mechanica, return to Pro/ENGINEER and use the Edit>Setup>Accuracy command to decrease the relative or absolute accuracy value for the component whose tolerance value is too high. If you want to change the accuracy value for the top-level assembly, work in assembly mode. If you want to change the accuracy value for one component, work in part mode. When working with the Accuracy command, be aware that a decrease in the accuracy value actually represents an increase in the accuracy, or precision, of the geometry. After you lower the accuracy value, the tolerance value of the component will decrease as well. For more information on accuracy, see the Part Modeling area of the Pro/ENGINEER Help Center.
1289
When you select Top, Bottom, or Top And Bottom from the first option menu, the second option menu appears. If the model does not contain laminate shells, only the first of these items is available on the option menu: Shell Select this option to display a quantity at the top, bottom, or top and bottom of the shell location. Ply Select this option to display a quantity at the top, bottom, or top and bottom of the ply location. This option is only available if there are shells with laminate properties in the model. When you select Ply, a spin box appears enabling you to select the ply for which to show the results.
Total Load
Use this option to distribute a load along the length or area of the entity such that the integral of the load over the selected entity equals the total prescribed value. For curves (and edges in FEM mode), Mechanica distributes the load as load per arc length. For surfaces, Mechanica distributes the load as load per surface area. Follow these guidelines: If you select more than one entity, Mechanica distributes the load equally across all selected entities. For 3D models, Mechanica distributes the total load you enter on the selected entities in the following ways:
Entity edges, beams curves Total Load Distributed As load/entity's arc length load/sum of the lengths of the edges that lie on the curve load/area of entity load/sum of the areas of the shells, faces, or 2D plates on the surface
Note: You cannot select the Total Load option for a 3D solid. Because all modeling data for 2D plane strain models is in terms of per unit depth, you enter the total load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell in terms of the total load applied per unit depth. For 2D axisymmetric models, a load on a curve, edge, or 2D shell defines what is physically an area load. You enter the amount of such a load on the surface that the curve, edge, or 2D shell represents. A load on a 2D solid defines what is physically a volume load. You enter this type of load on the body that the 2D solid represents.
1290
IndexAdditional Information
The total load remains the same even if the length or area changes, either through changes you make to the model or through changes that Mechanica makes during a sensitivity or optimization design study. For example, if you define a load of 100 pounds for a 25x25 inch surface, each 1x1 inch area of the surface sees 0.16 pounds of the load. Should Mechanica optimize the surface such that it shrinks to a 1x1 inch area, the remaining area would see the entire 100 pounds. Thus, although the overall 100-pound load remains steady for the model, a much smaller surface area bears the load.
Track
In Structure only, this item appears if you select modal_frequency as the measure for the goal or a limit. Select this item to direct Mechanica to follow a particular mode through the optimization, even if that mode's frequency becomes greater or less than a neighboring mode's frequency. As Mechanica modifies a design parameter during optimization, frequencies of different modes can change, so that mode 2 at the beginning can become mode 3 at the end. For example, if you enter 2 for the Mode Number and select Track, Mechanica tracks at each step of the optimization the frequency of the mode whose shape is closest to the shape of mode 2 in the original model. Mechanica reports the mode number of the frequency in a summary file, which you can access with the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box. If you do not select Track, Mechanica optimizes whatever mode has the second lowest frequency, even if the mode shape changes. Keep the following points in mind if you select Track: Mode tracking requires the polynomial order on each edge to remain constant during the optimization. Mechanica calculates values for the analysis connected to the modal_frequency measure at the first interval of the optimization. Mechanica then uses the polynomial order it reached to achieve convergence in the first interval at each remaining interval. 1291
Do not select Track for a rigid mode. If your analysis contains rigid modes, Mechanica ignores them when tracking a non-rigid mode. For buckling analyses, Track is not available. Since the smallest positive buckling mode is the mode that will cause failure first, Mechanica automatically tracks the lowest positive mode.
Neither of the preceding convergence methods is supported for the following: 2D models models with shell or beam elements models with transversely isotropic or orthotropic materials models with links
Transient thermal analyses take longer to run than steady-state thermal analyses. For some runs, you may want to use the Quick Check convergence method to get a quick reading of your model. When you do use the single-pass adaptive convergence method, allow more time for your run.
Note: For transient thermal analyses, if you suddenly switch on heat loads and convection conditions, these changes can adversely affect analysis convergence. If all heat loads and convection conditions are smooth functions that are zero at the start of the analysis, the engine will generally select smaller values for the p-orders. For more information on how to smooth these functions, see Ramping of Heat Loads and Convection Conditions.
Transversely Isotropic
If you select this type of material symmetry on the Structural tab on the Material Definition dialog box, the following tabs appear: Properties Failure Criterion
If you select the Thermal tab, these properties appear: 1292 Specific Heat
IndexAdditional Information
Thermal Conductivity
Troubleshooting Constraints
To help ensure a successful run, you may want to verify your constraints and, if you are working with an assembly, perform a pre-run error detection pass. To learn about constraint verification and other technical tips, read the following: Verifying a Constraint Performing a Body Check for Assemblies Handling Stress Concentrations Checking Your Model Insufficiently Constrained Models
1293
as Nu.
In the above expression, 1, 2, and 3 denote the three principal material directions. In a uniaxial tension test pulling in the 1 direction, the ratios of transverse normal strains, and , to longitudinal normal strain, , is given by:
and Also, since the elasticity matrix is symmetric, the following relation between Poisson's ratios and Young's moduli holds:
Therefore, if
, then
and
The values you enter for Poisson's ratios must satisfy the requirement that the determinant of the 6 X 6 constitutive equation matrix above is positive.
1294
IndexAdditional Information
Note: Mechanica uses absolute values to graph a convergence quantity. Use the Info>Status command on the Analyses and Design Studies dialog box to check the summary file for the actual value of a convergence quantity at each P-loop pass.
Standard (dynamic analyses only) Shows the measure's value at each step of a dynamic time, frequency, or random analysis. You can graph this if you select At Each Step for the analysis. The location can be time or frequency. Optimization Shows the measure's value at each step of the optimization. The location is Optimization Pass. Shows the measure's value as a design parameter changes. Design Param is the location.
UCS-Based Measures
If you want to use a UCS in creating a measure, you must define the UCS before you define the measure. If you are using a UCS, the references to the WCS X, Y, and Z axes on the dialog boxes are replaced as follows:
Cartesian UCS Cylindrical UCS R T Z Spherical UCS
X Y Z
R T P
Note that displacement measures associated with cylindrical coordinates in the T direction, or spherical coordinates in the T or P directions, are in units of length, not angle. 1295
If you select any of the options on the Measure Definition dialog box that require a coordinate system selection, use the arrow button to select a coordinate system relative to which you define the measure. The default coordinate system is the WCS. You can also select a UCS. For more information, see About Coordinate Systems.
For Transversely Isotropic Properties For all failure criteria, if you enter values for this quantity: Sc1 and Sc2 must be negative. Note: Sc1 is compressive failure stress in the material 1 direction and Sc2 is compressive failure stress in the material 2 direction. You must also enter values for ultimate tensile strength and shear strength.
For Transversely Isotropic Properties For all failure criteria, if you enter values for this quantity: St1 and St2 must be positive. Note: St1 is tensile failure stress in the material 1 direction, and St2 is ultimate tensile failure strength in the material 2 direction. You must also enter values for ultimate compressive strength and shear strength.
1296
IndexAdditional Information
Unconstrained
If you select this item, Mechanica automatically selects With Rigid Mode Search and looks for and reports rigid body modes for an unconstrained analysis. You might select this option if you want to examine rigid body vibrations. If your model contains point-to-ground springs, you can select Unconstrained separately from With Rigid Mode Search. Point-to-ground springs are the equivalent of constraints. You still have the option of selecting With Rigid Mode Search, but you do not have to select it as long as the springs sufficiently constrain your model.
Understanding Accuracy
Accuracy is a dimensionless number that is used to control local time integration errors. A local time integration error indicates that the error is estimated for each time step in the analysis, independent from the results of previous time steps, whereas a global time integration error depends on the entire time integration. The engine selects the size of the time step to keep local time integration errors in temperature smaller than the product of accuracy and estimated temperature variation, and errors in energy norm smaller than the product of accuracy and energy norm. Specifying an accuracy value of 0.001 does not guarantee that all results are within one-tenth of one percent of the exact solution. This is mostly because the accuracy of the solution is affected strongly by the spatial discretization, but also because the global time error is not controlled. To improve the spatial discretization, the engine increases or decreases the p-orders as needed to keep the flux jumps at element boundaries below a target value. Some models require more elements to capture thin layers with sharp temperature gradients that result from fast convection conditions or rapidly-varying heat loads.
1297
Note: You can also access the BC Set Definition dialog box by clicking the New button in the Member of Set area on the Prescribed Temperature, Convection Condition, and Radiation Condition dialog boxes. Copy Creates a copy of the highlighted boundary condition set and adds it to the list. Edit Opens the BC Set Definition dialog box with the information you used to specify the highlighted boundary condition set. Delete Removes the highlighted boundary condition set. Description Displays the optional description you entered when you created the boundary condition set.
If you want the flexibility of treating each of your boundary conditions separately, use a unique name and set name for each boundary condition. However, remember that a thermal analysis can only use one boundary condition set. Heat load and BC sets provide a logical means of organizing your modeling entities so you can define analyses effectively and clearly. A carefully considered approach to heat load and BC set creation simplifies heat load and boundary condition selection when defining your analyses. Although the software permits you to create each heat load and boundary condition as a separate heat load set or BC set, you can reduce the number of selections you need to make for analysis definition by grouping your heat loads and boundary conditions into sets.
See Also
References: Prescribed Temperature Conditions Convection Conditions Convection Conditions (FEM Mode) Radiation Conditions (FEM Mode)
1298
IndexAdditional Information
Topic
Introduction Basic Equalities System of Units Basic Units Examples of Values for Gravitational Acceleration and Selected Properties of Steel Correspondence Between Mass and Force Correspondence Between Mass and Pounds-mass Conversion of Basic Units Correspondence Between Degrees Celsius and Degrees Fahrenheit
Note: Throughout this document, scientific notation is written as you would type it in Mechanica. For example, 2.07 x 1011 is written as 2.07e11.
Introduction
Mechanica does not store information concerning the physical dimensions (units) of the numerical data that you enter. Therefore, whenever you enter numerical data into Mechanica, you must ensure that you are using a consistent set of units. For example, if you enter distance in terms of inches and force in terms of poundsforce, then you must enter Young's modulus in terms of pounds-force per square inch. In this system of units, Mechanica reports stress in terms of pounds-force per square inch. If you do not use a consistent set of units when entering data, the values computed by Mechanica will be meaningless. This document provides an overview of the physical dimensions of many of the quantities in Mechanica. The following abbreviations are used throughout this document: L = length M = mass T = time F = force 1299
E = energy (heat) P = power D = temperature (such as F, C, K) R = angle radian When choosing a consistent set of units, you must decide which quantities will form the basic physical dimensions and which quantities will be derived from the basic dimensions. Usually, you will choose either mass, length, and time (MLT) or force, length, and time (FLT) as the basic dimensions. The connection between these two systems is given by Newton's second law of motion: force = mass x acceleration the dimensions of which are: F = ML/T2 Some quantities in Thermal are usually expressed in terms of energy and power, the dimensions of which are determined from their definitions: energy (work, heat) = force x distance E = FL power = energy time P = E/T
Basic Equalities
Following is a list of many of the quantities in Mechanica and the physical dimensions of each expressed in terms of common physical dimensions and also in terms of MLT and FLT.
Quantity length
Common L L
MLT L
FLT
time
mass
FT2/L
1300
IndexAdditional Information
force
ML/T2
temperature
area
L2
L2
L2
volume
L3
L3
L3
velocity
L/T
L/T
L/T
acceleration
L/T2
L/T2
L/T2
angle, rotation
rotational velocity
R/T
R/T
R/T
rotational acceleration
R/T2
R/T2
R/T2
density
M/L3
M/L3
FT2/L4
moment, torque
FL
ML2/T2
FL
F/L
M/T2
F/L
ML/T2
F/L2
M/LT2
F/L2
F/L
M/T2
F/L
translational
F/L
M/T2
F/L
1301
stiffness
rotational stiffness
FL/R
ML2/T2R
FL/R
/D
/D
/D
L4
L4
L4
ML2
ML2
FLT2
FL
ML2/T2
FL
E/T
ML2/T3
FL/T
temperature gradient
D/L
D/L
D/L
heat flux
P/L2
M/T3
F/TL
thermal conductivity
P/LD
ML/T3D
F/TD
convection coefficient
P/L2D
M/T3D
F/LTD
E/MD
L2/T2D
FL/MD
1302
IndexAdditional Information
System of Units
To define a system of units, you assign a unit of measure to each of the physical dimensions. This section provides the units of the above quantities in four different systems of units, two different metric systems, MKS and mmNs, and two different English systems, FPS and IPS. The MKS system of units uses MLT as the basic dimensions. The mmNs, FPS, and IPS systems of units use FLT as the basic dimensions.
MKS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the MKS system:
L: meter (m)
T: second (sec)
D: degree Celsius ( C)
mmNS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the mmNS system:
L: millimeter (mm)
T: second (sec)
1303
D: degree Celsius ( C)
FPS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the FPS system:
L: foot (ft)
E: ft-lbf
T: second (sec)
P: ft-lbf/sec
D: degree Fahrenheit ( F)
IPS
Following are the basic and some of the derived units of the IPS system:
L: inch (in)
E: lbf-in
T: second (sec)
P: lbf-in/sec
D: degree Fahrenheit ( F)
1304
IndexAdditional Information
Basic Units
Using the definitions from the previous section, the units of the quantities in these four systems are as follows:
Units length
Metric (MKS) m
Metric (mmNS) mm
English (FPS) ft
English (IPS) in
time
sec
sec
sec
sec
mass
kg
tonne
slug
lbf-sec2/in
force
lbf
lbf
temperature
area
m2
mm2
ft2
in2
volume
m3
mm3
ft3 (cu-ft)
in3 (cu-in)
velocity
m/sec
mm/sec
ft/sec
in/sec
acceleration
m/sec2
mm/sec2
ft/sec2
in/sec2
angle, rotation
rad
rad
rad
rad
rotational velocity
rad/sec
rad/sec
rad/sec
rad/sec
rotational acceleration
rad/sec2
rad/sec2
rad/sec2
rad/sec2
1305
density
kg/m3
tonne/mm3
slug/ft3
lbfsec2/in4
moment, torque
N-m
N-mm
ft-lbf
in-lbf
N/m
N/mm
lbf/ft
lbf/in
lbf
lbf
N/m2 (Pa)
N/mm2 (MPa)
lbf/ft2
lbf/in2 (psi)
translational stiffness
N/m
N/mm
lbf/ft
lbf/in
rotational stiffness
N-m/rad
N-mm/rad
lbf-ft/rad
lbf-in/rad
/ C
/ C
/ F
/ F
m4
mm4
ft4
in4
kg-m2
tonne-mm2
slug-ft2
lbf-in-sec2
mJ
ft-lbf
in-lbf
mW
ft-lbf/sec
in-lbf/sec
temperature gradient
C/m
C/mm
F/ft
F/in
heat flux
W/m2
mW/mm2
lbf/ft-sec
lbf/in-sec
1306
IndexAdditional Information
thermal conductivity
W/m- C
mW/mm- C
lbf/sec- F
lbf/sec- F
W/m2- C
mW/mm2C
lbf/ft-secF
lbf/in-secF
J/kg- C
mJ/tonneC
ftlbf/slug- F
in2/sec2F
The numerical values of conductivity are the same in the MKS and mmNS systems and in the FPS and IPS systems. In Structure, units of modal frequency results are always cycles per unit time or Hz. The units of time are affected by the force/length/time units you used to define the model. Structure never reports modal frequency in terms of radians per unit time.
density (steel)
7830.0 kg/m3
7.83e-9 tonne/mm3
15.2 slug/ft3
7.33e-4 lbsec2/in4
2.07e11 N/m2
2.07e5 N/mm2
4.32e9 lb/ft2
3.0e7 lb/in2
12e-6/ C
12e-6/ C
6.5e-6/ F
6.5e-6/ F
1307
43.37 W/m- C
43.37 mW/mm- C
1308
IndexAdditional Information
1 m =
1000
3.281
39.37
1 mm =
1.0e-3
3.281e-3
3.937e-2
1 ft =
0.3048
304.8
12
1 in =
2.54e-2
25.4
8.333e-2
kg
tonne (N-sec2/mm)
lb-sec2/in
1 kg =
1.0e-3
6.852e-2
5.71e-3
1 tonne =
1000
68.52
5.71
1 slug =
14.59
14.59e-3
8.333e-2
Moments of Inertia
1309
kg m2
tonne mm2
slug ft2
lbf-sec2 -in
1 kg m2 =
1000
.738
8.85
1 tonne mm2 =
1e-3
7.375e-4
8.85e-3
1 slug ft
1.356
1.356e3
12
1 lbf-sec2-in =
0.113
113
1/12
1 N =
0.2248
1 lb =
4.448
1 N-m =
1000
0.7376
8.851
1 N-mm =
1.0e-3
7.376e-4
8.851e-3
1 lb-ft =
1.356
1356
12
1 lb-in =
0.113
113
8.33e-2
1310
IndexAdditional Information
kg/m3
slug/ft3
1 kg/m3 =
1e-12
1.94e-3
9.36e-8
1 tonne/mm3 =
1e12
1.94e9
9.36e4
1 slug/ft3 =
515
5.15e-10
4.82e-5
1 lb-sec2/in4 =
1.07e7
1.07e-5
20700
1 N/m2 =
1e-6
2.09e-2
1.45e-4
1 N/mm2 =
1e6
20900
145
1 lb/ft2 =
47.9
47.9e-5
6.94e-3
1 lb/in2 =
6890
6.89e-3
144
1 N/m =
1.0e-3
6.8525e-2
5.7104e-3
1311
1 N/mm =
1000
68.525
5.710
1 lb/ft =
14.593
1.4593e-2
8.33e-2
1 lb/in =
175.118
1.7512e-5
12
1 N-m/rad =
1000
0.7376
8.851
1 N-mm/rad =
1.0e-3
7.376e-4
8.851e-3
1 lb-ft/rad =
1.356
1356
12
1 lb-in/rad =
0.113
113
8.33e-2
W/m- C
mW/ mm- C
Btu/ hr-ft- F
Btu/ hr-in- F
lbf/ sec- F
1 W/m- C =
0.5777
4.817e-2
0.1249
1 mW/mm- C =
0.5777
4.817e-2
0.1249
1 Btu/hr-ft- F =
1.731
1.731
8.333e-2
0.2162
1312
IndexAdditional Information
1 Btu/hr-in- F =
20.76
20.76
12
2.594
1 lbf/sec- F =
8.007
8.007
4.626
0.3854
1313
Units Management
You can use the Units tab on the Units Manager dialog box to create, copy, edit, and delete units. This tab displays a list of existing units in Pro/ENGINEERpredefined units and any custom units. You can select a Type option to display units of a particular type only. For more information about the units provided in Pro/ENGINEER, see Predefined Units. The following buttons appear on the Units tab: New Creates a custom unit. Copy Click this button to make a duplicate of an existing unit. On the Copy Unit dialog box, enter a name for the new copy of the unit. This new name will appear in the list on the Units tab. Edit Active only if you select a custom unit. Click this button to edit a custom unit. Delete Active only if you select a custom unit. Click this button to delete a custom unit. You cannot delete a custom unit if it is used to define another unit or system of units.
See Also
Procedures: To Create a Custom Unit To Edit a Custom Unit To Review an Individual Unit
1314
IndexAdditional Information
When you select Untie, Mechanica restores the original range for the current window if the range was altered when you tied the window. Mechanica redraws the display if the ranges have changed. To untie any other windows you tied to the current window, access the Control menu for each window separately and then select Untie.
See Also
Procedure: To Untie Multiple Result Windows
The dialog box displays the name of a standard design study, modal analysis, and the constraint set for the selected modal analysis. If you have multiple studies or analyses, you can select the ones you want to use. Keep these points in mind when using this option: o o You cannot place the current dynamic analysis in the same design study as the previous modal analysis you select. The design study containing the previous modal analysis must be in the same directory as the design study in which you place the current dynamic analysis. You must run the design study that contains the modal analysis prior to running the current dynamic analysis so that the modes from the previous analysis are available.
Structure
amplitude base excitation damping coefficient amplitude phase damping coefficient base excitation load set power spectral density damping coefficient base excitation base excitation
frequency time or frequency Dynamic Shock Analysis Definition Material Structure frequency
temperature temperature
1316
IndexAdditional Information
temperature
coefficient of thermal expansion spatial variation of force/moment load spatial variation of pressure load spatial variation of global temperature load spatial variation of structural temperature load translation and rotation directions bulk temperature
Force/Moment Load
Structure
Pressure Load
Structure
Constraint
Structure (FEM mode only) Thermal (native mode only) Thermal (FEM mode only)
Convection Condition
spatial variation of convection coefficient and bulk temperature spatial variation of emissivity and ambient temperature spatial variation of temperature spatial variation of heat load heat load
Radiation Condition
Thermal
Thermal
1317
The dialog box displays the name of a standard design study, static analysis, and load set. If you have multiple studies, analyses, or load sets, you can select the ones you want to use. Note: For sensitivity and optimization studies, Mechanica always reruns the static analysis at each parameter setting, even if you select Use Static Analysis Results From Previous Design Study. Have Mechanica run the static analysis as part of running the prestress, buckling, or fatigue analysis. Clear the option Use Static Analysis Results From Previous Design Study. The dialog box displays the name of a static analysis and load set from that analysis. If you have multiple analyses or load sets, you can select the ones you want to use.
If you select this item, Mechanica takes the temperatures for the load you are creating from a thermal analysis that you run before you run the static or modal analysis. The names of a design study, analysis, and load set appear on the dialog box. If you have multiple studies, analyses, or load sets, you can select the ones you want to use. Note: In a sensitivity or optimization design study, Mechanica automatically runs the thermal analysis at each parameter setting, even if you select Use Temperatures From Previous Design Study.
1318
IndexAdditional Information
User-defined Steps
Use this button to specify the spacing between steps in the time or frequency range. You can enter different values for each step. The values you enter must be in increasing order from step to step. When you click User-defined Steps, you can also use the Space Equally button to evenly space the steps. You cannot enter any values for the steps if you selected Auto for the maximum of the time or frequency range. The dialog box shows Auto for each step in the table.
1319
For an example of a global sensitivity curve plotting von Mises stress as a function of change in radius, see Varying a Single Design Parameter in a Global Sensitivity Study.
See Also
Strategy: Running a Global Sensitivity Study
1320
IndexAdditional Information
Note that with the maximum set low, you see much more detail on the lower half of the original range than you do in the original model. On the other hand, you can get more definitive information on the upper half of the original range, with the minimum set high. For example, were you to zoom in on the left hole for the version that shows the minimum set high, you would see a more exact representation of the stress distribution around the high stress area at the bottom of the hole.
Tip: You can also control the level of detail in your plots by specifying either fewer or more legend levels.
1321
If you set limits within the same analysis that conflict with each other, Mechanica attempts to satisfy only one of the conflicting limits. For example, if you assigned contradictory values to two related measures such as max_stress_xx < 1 and max_stress_prin > 2, Mechanica interprets the limit as meaning it should either keep max_stress_xx less than 1 or keep max_stress_prin greater than 2.
1322
IndexAdditional Information
1323
Validate
Click this button on the Limits tab if you want AutoGEM to verify that all elements meet the limits. If all elements satisfy the limits, a message box states that all elements satisfy the limits for creating or editing. If there are elements that do not satisfy the limits on this dialog box, Mechanica highlights all the elements that do not satisfy the currently displayed limits. A message box asks if you want to create a new group and add the highlighted entities to this group.
1324
IndexAdditional Information
Max Length Enter a real, positive number to designate the maximum relative length of the vectors to be drawn in the result window. The default value is 5. Deformed Display your model in its deformed state. Additionally, you can display an undeformed wireframe or transparent version of the model superimposed over the deformed model. Show Element Edges Display the edges of the elements in your model when you display the results. Show Loads Display the load icons in your model when you display the results. Show Constraints Display the constraint icons in your model when you display the results. Animate Animate the display of your results in the result window. You can select Auto Start, Reverse-Repeat-Alternate options, and the number of frames in the animation. The Animate option is unavailable for fatigue results.
For Max Principal Stress or Min Principal Stress, Mechanica displays a vector plot for both quantities. See an example of a Max Principal Stress vector plot.
1326
IndexAdditional Information
Make sure Java, JavaScript, and style sheets are enabled in your browser. In Mozilla, select Edit>Preferences, go to the Advanced category and select Enable Java. Next, select the Scripts & Plugins subcategory and ensure that the Navigator check box is selected. In Internet Explorer select Tools>Internet Options, then do the following: o To enable Java, select the Advanced tab and select the Java JIT Compiler For Virtual Machines Enabled (requires restart) check box under the Java VM heading. To enable style sheets, select the General tab, click the Accessibility button, and make sure the options under Formatting are not selected.
See Also
Reference: Troubleshooting Browser Problems
1327
The degrees of freedom icon changes orientation depending on the coordinate system you select for the independent side of the weighted link. However, if you do not check the Override Coordinate System box on the Weighted Link Definition dialog box and do not select a new coordinate system for the independent side, Mechanica displays the legs of the triad parallel to the axes of the default WCS. This may not be correct if you have previously assigned a different displacement coordinate system to the same node.
1328
IndexAdditional Information
1329
Preview Stiffness Display a non-editable dialog box with the values entered for the stiffness components.
1330
IndexAdditional Information
Edge Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the projection from the first point of the gap to the selected edge. Curve Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the projection from the first point of the gap to the selected datum curve. Axis Creates a line through the first point of the gap, which is parallel to the selected axis. The parallel line and the gap's X axis form the XY plane of the gap. Surface Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and the projection of the first gap point to the selected surface. Vector in WCS Defines the XY plane with the gap X vector and a line projected from the first gap point in a direction parallel to the X, Y, or Z vector in the WCS. The default vector is 0, 1, 0, which defines the Y direction in the WCS. Not defined The gap definition does not include a Y direction. You cannot select this option if you output to the NASTRAN solver. Mechanica blocks output to NASTRAN if the Y direction for gaps in the model is not defined.
See Also
Procedure: To Create a Gap (FEM mode)
Young's Modulus
Enter values for the Young's Modulus (the modulus of elasticity) of the material. You can define this property or you can assign a parameter to the property. Type in a value or click the P button as appropriate. For orthotropic material properties, enter positive values for: E1 E2 E3
These values represent the Young's modulus along each of the three principal material directions of the model. For transversely isotropic material properties, enter positive values for the following two Young's modulus values: E1 E2 = E3
These values represent the Young's modulus along each of the three principal material directions of the model, with equal values in directions 2 and 3.
1331
1332
Index
acceleration measure................... 342 2 acceleration results ..................... 874 2D models advanced springs ........................ 159 2D axisymmetric model type analysis Structure ............................... 75 creating .................................. 872 Thermal ................................. 78 dynamic frequency ................... 465 2D axisymmetric model type ....... 75 dynamic random ...................... 466 2D plain strain model type dynamic shock ......................... 468 Structure ............................... 73 dynamic time........................... 464 Thermal ................................. 77 FEM 2D plain strain model type .......... 77 modal .................................. 471 2D plane stress model type overview .............................. 469 Structure ............................... 73 structural and thermal............ 470 Thermal ................................. 77 FEM ........................................ 469 2D plane stress model type ......... 77 modal ..................................... 452 defining .................................... 81 modifying .............................. 1090 elements ................................ 363 planning for optimization .............48 preparing.................................. 48 prestress modal ....................... 453 2D models ................................... 48 prestress static ........................ 444 3 selecting measures ................... 332 3D model type ........................72, 76 static ...................................... 443 A structural ................................ 441 acceleration measure thermal................................... 458 defining .................................1253 types ...................................... 440 overview................................. 342 1333
vibration................................. 462 workflow................................. 881 animation of results .................... 883 annotating result windows .... 533, 551 ANSYS ...................................... 884 approximated elements ............... 958 assemblies and midsurface compression ..... 138 and optimized parts ................... 49 automatic midsurface connections 96 connected and unconnected parts .......................................... 914 fasteners ................................ 103
file menu................................. 360 geometry tolerances absolute and relative.............. 380 setting ................................. 379 geometry tolerances ................. 378 info menu................................ 360 log file .................................... 373 mesh treatment options .....140, 377 settings dialog box feature isolation .................... 375 limits tab .............................. 376 settings tab .......................... 376 settings dialog box ................... 374
gaps ...................................... 138 settings menu .......................... 374 guidelines ................................. 37 AutoGEM.................................... 353 modeling entities and idealizations .......................................... 885 rigid connections...................... 101 assemblies................................... 37 AutoGEM AutoGEM dialog box ................. 359 controlling the mesh edge distribution ................... 355 batch design studies .................... 501 edge length .......................... 357 creating mesh elements............ 359 Datum options......................... 378 1334 BCPCS (Beam Centroidal Principal Coordinate System) .................. 175 beam action coordinate system ..... 174 automatic connections gaps in assemblies ................... 138 results when using.................. 1146 automatic connections ...................96 B BACS (Beam Action Coordinate System) .................................. 174
Index
beam bending in results .............. 908 beam centroidal principal coordinate system ................................... 175 Beam command ......................... 362 beam elements .......................... 362 beam orientation defining .................................. 175 in results ...............................1144 beam orientation ........................ 173 beam releases............................ 177 beam resultant results quantity .... 891 beam shape coordinate system .... 174 beams action coordinate system .......... 174 centroidal principal coordinate system ................................ 175 creating.................................. 146
guidelines................................ 279 BSCS (Beam Shape Coordinate System) .................................. 174 buckling analysis overview ................................. 454 buckling analysis......................... 454 C capping surfaces ......................... 960 center of mass measures defining ................................ 1238 overview ................................. 346 center of mass measures ............. 346 centrifugal loads defining .................................. 283 color scale.................................. 875 component visibility in results ....... 906 components - defining heat loads .. 307
in results ................................ 891 normals .................................. 561 orientation ..................... 173, 1144 releases.................................. 177 sections.................................. 166 shape coordinate system .......... 174 beams....................................... 145 bearing loads defining .................................. 279 computers with parallel processing ........................................... 1199 config.mech file ............................. 3 config.pro file ................................ 3 configuration file changing settings .......................64 options ...................................... 3 configuration file ............................ 3 connected and unconnected parts . 914 1335
connections automatic midsurface connections 96 contact regions........................ 112 end welds ................................. 96 fasteners ................................ 103 FEM mode............................... 121 gaps ...................................... 122 interfaces FEM mode ............................ 121 native mode ......................... 120 interfaces ............................... 872 perimeter welds......................... 96 precedence rules .............. 125, 162 rigid connections...................... 101 rigid links................................ 115 weighted links ......................... 118 connections ................................. 94 constraint sets overview................................. 229 constraint sets ........................... 229 constraints, Structure along surface .......................... 245 displacement adding ................................. 225 defining ............................... 236 1336
guidelines ............................. 230 relations functions ................. 268 troubleshooting ................... 1293 displacement ........................... 224 constraints, Structure .................. 224 contact analysis creating .................................. 450 contact measures defining .................................. 345 overview ............................... 1238 contact measures........................ 345 contact pressure results quantity... 918 contact regions 2D models............................... 113 3D models............................... 114 creating .................................. 114 overview ................................. 112 contact regions ........................... 112 contour plot for results ................ 919 convection conditions defining .................................. 258 coordinate systems creating ....................................90 in results............................... 1145 setting for an advanced mass..... 152
Index
coordinate systems ....................... 89 creating features .......................... 84 custom system of units editing...................................1259 overview................................. 935 custom system of units ............... 935 custom unit creating.................................1229 editing...................................1260 custom unit ............................... 936 cyclic symmetry adding.................................... 242 defining .................................. 242 guidelines ............................... 241 D datum features coordinate systems creating ................................. 90 cylindrical ............................ 939 overview ................................ 89 spherical .............................1181 coordinate systems .................... 89 datum axes creating ................................. 87 datum curves
creating..................................88 datum planes creating..................................86 datum points and custom measures ............ 940 creating..................................85 promoting to Pro/ENGINEER ........83 datum features .............................83 deformed display in results........... 945 design parameters defining .................................. 425 overview ................................. 420 preparing your model................ 421 types ...................................... 423 design parameters ...................... 423 design studies defining accessing summary report ...... 503 batch file .............................. 501 creating................................ 439 global sensitivity.................... 477 local sensitivity...................... 480 modifying ........................... 1090 results ................................. 522 running ................................ 490 1337
Structural and Thermal Simulation - Help Topic Collection E elements 2D solids ................................. 363 approximated linear edges......... 958 beam ...................................... 362 creating automatically using AutoGEM .............................. 353 mass ...................................... 363 displacement measure................. 337 properties ............................... 165 displacement results quantity ....... 952 shell ....................................... 362 display location in results...... 531, 549 solid ....................................... 361 display options in results ...... 531, 548 spring ..................................... 363 display types in results ......... 529, 547 types in Structure..................... 365 displaying result windows ............ 954 types in Thermal ...................... 366 driven parameters ...................... 955 elements.................................... 364 driven pro parameter measure defining .................................1240 overview................................. 348 driven pro parameter measure ..... 348 driving parameters ..................... 955 dynamic analyses, measures for ... 334 dynamic frequency analysis ......... 465 dynamic query ........................... 958 dynamic random analysis ............ 466 dynamic shock analysis ............... 468 dynamic time analysis ................. 464 1338 entities, transferring from Pro/ENGINEER ......................... 629 environment variables ...................65 export as MPEG ........................ 1091 Export HTML command .............. 1009 Export VRML command .............. 1009 F failure index measure defining ................................ 1241 overview ................................. 337 failure index measure .................. 337
standard .............................. 475 defining .................................. 475 types ..................................... 475 design studies ............................ 472 Diagnose command .................... 507 dimension name changes............... 35 direction, in pressure loads .......... 287
Index
failure index results quantity .......1011 family tables for simulation features 56 fasteners effect on mesh ........................ 105 prerequisites ........................... 104 fasteners ................................... 103 fatigue fatigue measures defining ..............................1241 overview .............................. 345 fatigue measures ..................... 345 fatigue results quantity............1012 fatigue .....................................1081 feature interference ...................... 32 features coordinate systems .................... 89 creating simulation features in Pro/ENGINEER ........................ 84 simulation features guidelines ..... 84
connections ............................. 121 creating parameters ................. 555 display settings and visibilities .....58 displaying analysis results ......... 540 FEA solver runs ........................ 514 gaps creating................................ 124 overview .............................. 122 gaps ....................................... 122 material assigning .............................. 209 overview .............................. 208 material .................................. 208 meshes assembly .............................. 387 checking............................... 413 connections .......................... 394 erasing................................. 381 flat meshes........................... 388
suppressing .............................. 32 hierarchical meshes ............... 389 features ...................................... 81 mixed mesh .......................... 409 FEM mode parabolic elements................. 517 analyses ................................. 469 retrieving ............................. 419 basic workflow........................... 25 reviewing ......................411, 518 configuration options .................... 3 shell mesh ............................ 407 1339
storing........................ 418, 1186 troubleshooting..................... 386 meshes .................................. 381 outputting decks ...................... 516 overview................................1013
defining ................................ 1242 overview ................................. 339 force measures ........................... 339 frequency/time step, in results..... 529, 546 fringe plot for results
radiation constraint .................. 266 contour plots ........................... 919 running FEA solvers online ........ 516 displaying values ...................... 958 running FEM analysis................ 514 overview ............................... 1018 supported FEA solvers .............. 559 tips....................................... 1225 FEM mode ................................1013 fringe plot for results ................. 1018 FEM Mode command ................... 381 function flat FEM meshes ......................... 388 in FEM mode flux results quantity ...................1015 creating................................ 571 force and moment loads overview .............................. 568 defining .................................. 277 valid symbols ........................ 569 distribution ............................. 276 in FEM mode............................ 568 guidelines ............................... 274 in native mode force and moment results creating................................ 567 beam resultant ........................ 891 overview .............................. 562 reaction .................................1135 symbolic shear and moment..................1165 overview............................ 563 shell resultant ........................1168 valid symbols ..................... 564 shell transverse shear .............1145 symbolic............................... 563 force and moment results ...........1133 in native mode ......................... 562 force measures 1340
Index
function..................................... 562 G gap connections in FEM mode....... 122 gaps in assemblies...................... 138 gaps in parts.............................. 136 global sensitivity design study ...... 477 graphing results ........................1066 gravity loads defining .................................. 285 guidelines for assemblies ............... 37 guidelines for shell properties....... 182 guidelines for structure loads ....... 271 H heat flux measure defining .................................1243 overview................................. 351 heat flux measure....................... 351 heat loads defining FEM mode ............................ 311 native mode ......................... 306 defining .................................. 306 overview................................. 300 reviewing................................ 311 heat loads ................................. 300
hierarchical FEM meshes .............. 389 I icon display ..................................58 icons mesh control ........................... 403 setting icon visibilities .................58 toolbar......................................53 icons ...........................................53 idealizations and connections .........................94 beams .................................... 145 in assembly mode .................... 885 masses ................................... 150 precedence rules ...............125, 162 shells...................................... 127 springs.................................... 155 idealizations ............................... 127 independent mode for Mechanica ....28 integrated mode for Mechanica .......27 isosurfaces, in results .................. 919 iterative solver overview ................................. 496 selecting ............................... 1163 iterative solver............................ 496
1341
Structural and Thermal Simulation - Help Topic Collection L labels in result windows..............1054 large deformation static analysis creating.................................. 448 overview................................. 447 layers in results ................................ 906 overview................................... 55 layers ......................................... 55 load sets guidelines ........................ 272, 302 in results ......................... 529, 546 load sets ..................... 271, 272, 302 loads basics..................................... 269 bearing loads defining ............................... 279 guidelines ............................ 279 centrifugal loads defining ............................... 283 force and moment loads defining ............................... 277 distribution........................... 276 guidelines ............................ 274 gravity loads 1342
defining................................ 285 heat loads defining FEM mode.......................... 311 native mode ....................... 306 defining................................ 306 overview .............................. 300 reviewing ............................. 311 heat loads ............................... 300 importing external temperatures 294 load sets ..........................272, 302 MEC/T temperature load defining................................ 293 overview .............................. 291 MEC/T temperature load............ 291 Mechanism Design loads creation.............................. 1083 defining................................ 297 pressure loads defining................................ 288 relations functions .................... 268 structure loads guidelines ............................. 271 overview .............................. 267 structure loads......................... 267
Index
temperature loads guidelines ............................ 289 using temperature load in Structure .......................................... 291 loads ................................. 267, 299
assigning in FEM mode .............. 209 creating ...........................201, 209 defining ...........................202, 210 FEM mode ............................... 208 guidelines................................ 193
local sensitivity design study ........ 480 types ...................................... 193 Log command, on AutoGEM menu. 373 M mass elements ........................... 363 measures mass properties.......................... 191 acceleration ............................. 342 masses center of mass ......................... 346 adding to curves, edges, and surfaces............................... 155 adding to points....................... 153 overview................................. 150 types for curves, edges, and surfaces............................... 153 types for points ....................... 151 masses ..................................... 150 for dynamic analyses ................ 334 material orientation for thermal analysis .................. 350 assigning ................................ 218 moment of inertia..................... 347 creating.................................. 218 in results ...............................1145 material orientation .................... 215 results graph types ................. 1295 materials results quantity ...................... 1080 assigning ................................ 200 rotation................................... 338 1343 phase ..................................... 344 results available ....................... 352 contact ................................... 345 coordinate systems and............. 326 displacement ........................... 337 driven pro parameter ................ 348 failure index ............................ 337 fatigue .................................... 345 materials ................................... 192 measure results quantity............ 1080
rotational acceleration .............. 343 rotational velocity .................... 343 selecting for analyses ............... 332 strain ..................................... 337 stress..................................... 337 time ....................................... 344 ucs-based ..............................1295 uses....................................... 313 velocity .................................. 342 measures .................................. 312 MEC/T temperature load defining .................................. 293 overview................................. 291 MEC/T temperature load .............. 291 Mechanica 2D analysis ............................... 48 analysis overview..................... 872 assembly considerations ............. 37 configuration file options............... 3 creating custom system of units. 935 dimension name changes ............ 35 FEM mode..............................1013 Model menu .............................. 70 model types .............................. 71 modeling strategies 1344
and optimization......................48 and shape changes ..................32 operating modes independent mode ...................28 integrated mode ......................27 process overview........................68 product line overview ................................21 Structure................................22 Thermal .................................22 product line ...............................21 setting simulation display ............58 setting units ..............................39 toolbar......................................53 using Pro/ENGINEER parameters ..42 workflow ...................................68 meshing guidelines, FEM mode ..... 383 midsurface compression assemblies .............................. 138 parts ...................................... 136 midsurface compression............... 140 modal analysis overview ................................. 452 results .............................529, 546 model display in results ............. 1088
Index N NASTRAN importing files for mesh ............ 410 outputting to ......................... 1093 templates .............................. 1094 NASTRAN ................................. 1093 near point measures.................... 321 normals shell ....................................... 561 normals ..................................... 560 O optimization and assemblies ...........49 optimization and suppressed features ...............................................49 optimization design study creating .................................. 489 saving optimized shape ........... 1269 optimization planning ....................48 P parallel processing .................... 1199 parameter-capable edit fields...... 1113 parameters in design studies ...................... 481 Pro/ENGINEER parameters ..........42 parameters ................................ 481
model types 2D axisymmetric structure .......... 75 2D axisymmetric thermal ............ 78 2D plate thermal........................ 77 2D unit depth thermal ................ 77 3D ......................................72, 76 defining 2D models .................... 81 guidelines ................................. 79 model type specification ............. 70 plane strain............................... 73 plane stress .............................. 73 selecting................................... 80 model types................................. 71 modeling entities in assembly mode ............................................. 885 modeling features......................... 81 moment measures defining .................................1244 overview................................. 340 moment measures ...................... 340 moment of inertia measures defining .................................1245 overview................................. 347 moment of inertia measures ........ 347
1345
parameters, driven and driving..... 955 parts connected and unconnected ...... 914 gaps ...................................... 136 midsurface compression ........... 136 perimeter welds ........................... 96 phase measure defining .................................1245 overview................................. 344
prestress modal analysis overview ................................. 453 results .............................529, 546 prestress static analysis overview ................................. 444 results .............................529, 546 prestress static analysis ............... 444 Pro/ENGINEER parameters, using in Mechanica .................................42 Pro/ENGINEER Relations menu...... 268
types ....................................1116 phase measure........................... 344 plane strain model type ................. 73 plane stress model type................. 73 properties p-level quantity in results ...........1109 beam orientation ...................... 173 ply orientation in results .............1145 beam releases ......................... 177 point measures .......................... 321 beam sections.......................... 166 precedence rules ................. 125, 162 deleting .................................. 164 predefined systems of units ........1120 for elements ............................ 165 predefined units ........................1121 guidelines for using .................. 165 prescribed temperatures mass properties ....................... 191 defining .................................. 265 material pressure loads creating.........................202, 211 defining .................................. 288 guidelines ............................. 193 direction ................................. 287 material .................................. 192 guidelines ............................... 287 1346 Pro/ENGINEER, transferring entities from ....................................... 629 promoting simulation features to Pro/ENGINEER ...........................83
Index
material orientation creating ............................... 221 material orientation.................. 215 shell defining ............................... 185 guidelines ............................ 182 shell....................................... 179 spring .................................... 186 properties.................................. 164 Q quantity in results......................1133 query in results .........................1135 quilts ........................................ 410 R radiation constraint..................... 266 reaction at point constraints results quantity.................................1136 reaction results quantity .............1135
fringe................................. 1018 graph................................. 1026 model ................................ 1088 vectors............................... 1325 display options ..................531, 548 labels.................................... 1054 loading ................................... 534 location............................531, 549 reviewing .............................. 1151 saving..............................536, 552 titles..................................... 1225 toolbar.............................524, 541 result windows.....................527, 545 results animation................................ 883 animation control ..................... 920 annotating........................533, 551 available for measures .............. 352
relative results ..........................1141 component visibility .................. 906 result windows dynamic query ....................... 1135 defining ........................... 527, 545 evaluating ........................534, 551 display options exporting HTML...................... 1008 animation ............................ 883 exporting VRML...................... 1009 contour................................ 919 FEM mode displaying result window ........ 954 loading NASTRAN results ........ 539 1347
overview .............................. 538 FEM mode............................... 538 graphing................................1066 layer visibility .......................... 906 linearized stress .....................1056 quantity.................................1133 relative..................................1141
tying multiple...................... 1284 untying .............................. 1284 view menu.......................... 1327 result windows ..................527, 545 templates creating new result windows from ...................................... 1049 saving ...........................536, 552
reporting ......................... 537, 553 templates .........................536, 552 result windows results ....................................... 522 annotating .................... 533, 551 results in FEM mode basics functions ............. 526, 543 creating parameters ................. 554 changing.............................1151 comparing............................ 902 defining ........................ 527, 545 displaying ............................ 954 editing ................................1260 file menu ............................1014 loading ................................ 534 location ........................ 531, 549 printing...............................1124 reviewing ............................1151 saving .......................... 536, 552 saving views........................1159 titles ..................................1225 toolbar ......................... 524, 542 1348 displaying element IDs, node IDs, and result values ................... 953 displaying the mesh.................. 954 loading NASTRAN results ........... 539 modal analysis ....................... 1104 statistics graphing............................. 1028 output................................ 1106 output thermal .................... 1105 statistics ............................... 1028 structural analysis .................. 1104 thermal analysis..................... 1105 using the postprocessor ............ 538 results in FEM mode .................... 538
Index
results user interface ........... 523, 540 rigid connections creating.................................. 102 overview................................. 101 rigid connections ........................ 101 rotation acceleration measure defining .................................1248 overview................................. 343 rotation acceleration measure ...... 343 rotation acceleration results quantity ............................................1154 rotation measure
error resolution ........................ 959 for FEM output formats .................... 1103 outputting decks.................... 520 overview .............................. 514 reviewing the solver mesh411, 518 solving online........................ 515 for FEM ................................... 514 overview ................................. 490 parallel processing.................. 1199 reviewing errors ....................... 507 stopping.................................. 502
defining .................................1247 run............................................ 490 overview................................. 338 S rotation measure ........................ 338 saved views in results ................ 1159 rotation results quantity .............1156 shear & moment results quantity. 1165 rotation velocity measure shell elements ............................ 362 defining .................................1249 shell models overview................................. 343 compression ............................ 142 rotation velocity measure ............ 343 defining shells rotation velocity results quantity..1157 advanced.............................. 130 run simple.................................. 129 accessing summary report ........ 503 defining shells.......................... 128 batch file ................................ 501 shell models ............................... 127 error detection ........................ 498 shell normals .............................. 561 1349
shell properties guidelines ............................... 182 thickness ...............................1169 types ..................................... 182 shell properties .......................... 179 shell resultant results quantity ....1168 shell transverse shear ................1168 simple springs ............................ 157 simulation display ......................... 58 simulation features coordinate systems .................... 89 creating...............................81, 83 guidelines ................................. 84 promoting to Pro/ENGINEER........ 83 simulation features ....................... 81 simulation model information ......1171 sketcher, using........................... 169 solid elements ...........................1176 solvers iterative.................................1163 supported FEA ......................... 559 solvers .....................................1163 spatial variation for loads............. 276 spin softening ...........................1182 spring stiffness........................... 186 1350
springs advanced ................................ 159 creating advanced springs................... 161 simple springs ....................... 158 to ground springs .................. 159 creating .................................. 155 guidelines for creating............... 157 simple..................................... 157 to ground ................................ 158 springs ...................................... 155 standard design study creating .................................. 477 overview ................................. 475 standard design study.................. 475 static analysis creating .................................. 443 strain energy results quantity ..... 1187 strain measure defining ................................ 1250 overview ................................. 337 strain measure ........................... 337 strain results quantity................ 1188 stress measure defining ................................ 1250
Index
stress results quantity ................1205 creating ....................................92 structural analysis ...................... 441 symbolic function ........................ 563 Structure..................................... 22 systems of units........................ 1213 Structure constraints adding.................................... 225 temp gradient measure................ 351 defining .................................. 236 temp gradient results quantity .... 1215 guidelines ............................... 230 temperature gradient measure sets ....................................... 229 defining ................................ 1243 troubleshooting ......................1293 overview ................................. 351 using in structural analyses ....... 442 temperature gradient measure...... 351 Structure constraints................... 224 temperature loads Structure loads global temperature change ........ 290 basics..................................... 269 guidelines................................ 289 guidelines ............................... 271 importing external temperatures 294 heat loads............................... 300 MEC/T..................................... 291 spatial variation ....................... 276 structural in FEM mode ........... 1206 Structure loads........................... 267 using in Structure..................... 291 study, selecting in results ..... 527, 545 temperature measure summary report for design study .. 503 defining ................................ 1251 suppressed features in optimized parts ............................................... 49 suppressing features ..................... 32 suppressing simulation features...... 56 overview ................................. 351 temperature measure .................. 351 temperature results quantity ...... 1217 T
1351
time step/frequency, in results..... 529, 546 titles, in result windows ............. 1225
measures for........................... 350 TLAP load................................. 1291 thermal analysis ......................... 458 to ground springs ........................ 158 thermal constraints and boundary conditions overview................................. 873 prescribed temperatures defining ............................... 265 thermal constraints and boundary conditions ............................... 873 Thermal elements ....................... 366 unit, creating custom................. 1229 Thermal loads unit, editing custom................... 1260 heat loads............................... 300 units Thermal loads ............................ 300 creating custom system .......... 1229 Thermal measures custom ................................... 936 heat flux................................. 351 custom system......................... 935 temp gradient ......................... 351 defining .................................. 873 temperature............................ 351 guidelines.............................. 1035 thermal strain energy results quantity ............................................1218 thermal strain results quantity.....1218 time measures defining .................................1252 overview................................. 344 time measures ........................... 344 managing .............................. 1314 predefined ............................. 1121 reviewing .............................. 1267 setting .................................. 1164 units ......................................... 873 Units command........................... 873 total heat loads reviewing ................................ 311 total heat loads........................... 304 U UCS (User Coordinate System) .......89 unit conversion tables ................ 1298
1352
Index V vectors in results .......................1325 velocity measure defining .................................1253 overview................................. 342 velocity measure ........................ 342 volume regions velocity results quantity .............1326 creating ....................................94 Verification Guide volumetric heat loads .................. 307 optimization analysis ................ 864 W static analysis ......................... 703 WCS (World Coordinate System) .....89 Verification Guide ....................... 696 working with assemblies ................37 vibration analysis dynamic frequency................... 465 Y direction dynamic random...................... 466 for advanced springs................. 160 dynamic shock ........................ 468 for beams................................ 148 dynamic time .......................... 464 for gaps ................................ 1330 vibration analysis ....................... 462 Y direction.................................. 148 viewing icons ............................... 58 Y
visibility of icons ...........................58 Volume command, on AutoGEM menu overview ................................. 369 strategies ................................ 370 Volume command, on AutoGEM menu ............................................. 369
1353